Copy

This category describes how to use the Copy function.



Overview of the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225

Most operations of this machine are done from the touch panel display. To use the Copy functions, press the appropriate key in accordance with the messages displayed on the touch panel display.



Switching the Copy Basic Features Screen

After the power is turned ON, the Regular Copy Basic Features screen appears on the touch panel display. This machine also includes an Express Copy function. The Express Copy function is useful for advanced users, as it allows you to set the various copying modes with fewer steps than the Regular Copy function. The following screens are examples of the Basic Features screen for the copying function. You can press [Copy] or [Express Copy] to switch the Copy Basic Features screen.

The Express Copy Basic Features screen simplifies the copying procedures of the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.


Remark
  • By default, both the Regular and Express Copy function keys are displayed on the Copy Basic Features screen. You can conduct the same range of settings from both the Regular Copy Basic Features screen and the Express Copy Basic Features screen. From the Additional Functions screen, you can set to display only the Regular Copy function key or Express Copy function key. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • By default, the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or after the Auto Clear mode initiates, is the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.
  • After changing the copy settings, even if you switch to the Express Copy Basic Features screen from the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, or vice versa, the copy settings will be retained.
  • If you press (Reset) on the Express Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns to the Express Copy Basic Features screen. If you press (Reset) on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.


Various Copying Features

  • Regular Copy Basic Features Screen

The screen below, which appears when [Copy] is selected, is called the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.


1 1:1
Press to make copies in the same size as your original.
2 Copy Ratio
Press to reduce or enlarge the copy size.
3 Finishing
Press to select the Collate, Group, or Staple mode.
4 2-Sided
Press to make [12-Sided], [22-Sided], [21-Sided], or [Book2-Sided] copies.
5 Interrupt
Press to interrupt a copy job to make priority copies.
6 Select Output Device
Press to select the printing destination for remote and cascade copying.
7 Paper Select
Press to select the paper size/type and the paper source.
8 Copy Exposure
Press [] or [] to manually control the copy exposure. Press [A] to select or cancel the automatic exposure control.
9 Original Type Drop-Down List
Press to make copies according to the type of original ([Text/Photo], [Printed Image], [Photo], or [Text]).
10 Special Features
Press to select a Special Features mode.
11 System Monitor
Press to check the progress of a copy job, change the order of printing, or cancel printing.

  • Special Features Screen 1/2

The screen below, which appears on the touch panel display when you press [Special Features] on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, is called the Special Features screen. This screen is divided into two screens. Pressing [] or [] displays the next or previous screen. All special copy modes are displayed here. In some cases, when a mode is selected, a more detailed screen for the selected mode appears. To close the Special Features screen and return to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, press [Done]. Pressing (Help) after selecting a mode displays the Help screen containing guidance information. This is useful when you want to learn more about the selected mode.


1 2-Page Separation
Press to select or cancel the 2-Page Separation mode. This mode enables you to copy facing pages of an opened book onto separate copy sheets.
2 Cover/Sheet Insertion
Press to add covers, sheet insertions, or chapter pages between specified pages.
3 Booklet
Press to make copies of several originals to form a booklet.
4 Transparency Interleaving
Press to insert a sheet between each transparency when copying transparencies. You can make the same prints on the interleaf sheets as those on the transparencies.
5 Different Size Originals
Press to make copies feeding different size originals together in one group, by placing them in the feeder.
6 Job Build
Press to select or cancel the Job Build mode. This mode enables you to divide the originals into several parts, scan them, and then print them all together. This is convenient when you cannot place all of the originals that you want to copy at one time.
7 Shift
Press to shift the position of the original image on the copy sheet.
8 Image Combination
Press to automatically reduce two, four, or eight originals to fit onto a one-sided or two-sided copy sheet.
9 Margin
Press to create margins along the sides of a copy sheet.
10 Job Done Notice
Press to have the machine notify the user through e-mail when the copy job is done.
11 Frame Erase
Press to eliminate dark border areas and lines that appear around original images or shadows from binding holes.
12 Scan Image Check
Press to confirm scanned images page by page before copying when you scan originals on the platen glass.

  • Special Features Screen 2/2

The screen below appears if you press [] on the Special Features screen.


1 Image Creation
Press to manipulate the image in the copy by selecting [Nega/Posi], [Image Repeat], or [Mirror Image].
2 Form Composition
Press to superimpose an image stored in memory onto the original image for copying.
3 Secure Watermark
Press to embed hidden text in the background. The hidden text will become visible if the resulting output is copied.
4 Mode Memory
Press to store or recall copy modes.
5 Recall
Press to recall previously set copy modes.
6 Sharpness
Press to sharpen or soften the image of the original on the copy.
7 Image Qual. Adjustment
Press to make fine adjustments to the image quality on copies.
8 Watermark/Print Date
Press to include the watermark and date on copies.
9 Pg/Copy Set Numbering
Press to include page and copy set numbers on copies.
10 Store In User Inbox
Press to store originals scanned from the Regular Copy Basic Features screen as a document in a User Inbox.
11 Job Block Combination
Press to scan multiple batches of originals with different copy settings and print them as one document.


Flow of Copy Operations

This section describes the flow of basic copy operations.


Remark
  • Before using the Copy function, it is useful to read the following topics:
  • If you are using a login service, log in and log out using the procedure for the login service you are using before and after operating the machine.
  • If you are using Department ID Management with the optional Card Reader-C1, see "Optional Equipment."
  • If you are performing user authentication using the SSO-H login service, see "Basic Operations."
  • To cancel all settings, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Copy].

  1. Place your originals.

  • If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Collate or the Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate.")
  1. Gently close the feeder/platen cover.

The paper size is recognized automatically. If the paper size recognized automatically is different from the paper size you want, press [Paper Select] → select the copy paper size. (See "Paper Selection." )

  1. Specify the desired copy modes on the Copy Basic Features screen.

  • On the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, you can select the paper size and type, copy exposure, original type, copy ratio, 2-sided mode, Finishing mode, and output device.
  1. Set the desired copy modes on the Special Features screen.
  • Press [Special Features].

  • Press the desired mode key to set the mode.

The Special Features screen is divided into two screens. Press [] or [] to display the desired mode.

  1. Press - (numeric keys) to enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 999).

If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Clear) → enter the correct value.

The copy quantity appears on the right side of the Copy Basic Features screen.

  • You cannot change the copy quantity while the machine is copying.
  • The number of copies which can be set varies according to the copy modes you have set.
  1. Press (Start).

If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel display → press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Copying starts.

  • You cannot change copy mode settings, such as the copy quantity and paper size, while the machine is copying.
  • If there is a current job, the machine scans the original, and waits to print it. Printing starts when the current job is complete.
  1. If you want to stop, interrupt, or copy another original during a copy job, follow the instructions below.

  • Press (Stop).
  • Several copies may be output even after you press (Stop).

  • To interrupt a copy job when you need to make priority copies, press [Interrupt].


  • Press [Done] → place your originals → press (Start).


  1. When copying is complete, remove your originals.


Selecting an Output Device (Select Output Device)

If a remote copy printer (iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225) is connected to a network, this machine and a remote copy printer can be used for copying. For example, the original scanned by this machine can be printed by the remote copy printer independently (remote copying) or simultaneously (cascade copying).

You can select the copy settings before selecting an output device, or select the output device before selecting the copy settings.

  • Making the Copy Settings before Selecting an Output Device

If you set the copy mode before selecting a printing destination, only the remote copy printer supporting the selected copy mode can be selected as the printing destination.

  • Selecting the Output Device before Selecting the Copy Settings

To select a printing destination before setting a copy mode, only the copy mode supported by the selected remote copy printer can be chosen.


Remark
  • If you specify the Form Composition mode with the Cascade Copy mode, it is necessary to assign the same name to the stored image form in both this machine and the remote copy printer beforehand. If the assigned image form name in this machine is not set in the remote copy printer, the job is canceled. If multiple image forms with the same assigned name are stored in the remote copy printer, different images may be used for Form Composition.
  • If you turn the remote copy printer back ON or reattach the finisher, you need to refresh the settings of the remote copy printer in Register Remote Device in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Confirming a Remote Device.")
  • If <Use IPv4> in [IPv4 Settings] in [TCP/IP Settings] in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', you cannot register a remote copy printer. (See "Network.")
  • If you connect the machine directly to other remote copy printers using a crossover patch cord, you must configure the Ethernet driver as shown below. (See "Network.")
  • Auto Detect: Off
  • Communication Mode:Full Duplex
  • Ethernet Type: 100 Base-TX
  • In order for a device to be selected as a remote output device used for remote copying, it must be stored in Register Remote Device in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Specifying the Remote Copy Printer Settings.")
  • For cascade copying, the Paper Select screen of this machine is displayed. Select the paper drawer on the machine that is loaded with the same paper size as the remote copy printers.
  • To copy the original on this machine and another remote copy printer on the network at the same time (cascade copying), the number of copies set for this machine are split in half and printed. If an odd number of copies is set, this machine will print one additional copy.
  • If you select a remote copy printer before setting the copy modes to perform with cascade copying, you cannot select copy settings that are not supported by the remote copy printer. Also, if the finishers attached to this machine and the remote copy printer are different, the finishing settings can only be set to Collate and Group modes.
  • When a remote copy or cascade copy job is in progress, you cannot reserve another remote copy or cascade copy job.
  • For the selected remote copy printer, set the same Department ID and password as this machine. (See "Security.")
  • When a remote copy or cascade copy job is in progress, and an error occurs in the remote copy printer, an error message is displayed on the Job/Print monitor area of the touch panel display of this machine and the remote copy printer.
  • For instructions on canceling a remote copy or cascade copy job, see "Basic Operations."

Giving Priority to the Copy Mode

Giving Priority to the Output Device


Giving Priority to the Copy Mode

Use this procedure for selecting copy settings before selecting a remote copying device. You can select only a remote copy printer that supports the selected copy settings.


  1. Place your originals → set the desired copy modes → press [Select Output Device].

  • This machine appears at the top of the Select Output Device list.
  1. Select the output device → press [Done].

  • Press [Cascade Copy] → select whether to perform error recovery.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: If an error occurs in either this machine or the remote copy printer, the remaining copy jobs are assigned to the machine which is operating normally.
[Off]: If an error occurs in either this machine or the remote copy printer, the remaining copy jobs are not assigned to the machine which is operating normally.
  • Error Recovery is performed only if the Finishing mode is set.
  • You must choose a remote copy printer that supports the selected copy settings. The printers that do not support the chosen settings are shown, but are grayed out. Also, even if the remote copy printer supports the Copy mode, if you select settings other than Collate and Group, you can select only a remote copy printer equipped with the same finisher as this machine.
  • If Error Recovery for the Cascade Copy mode is set to 'On', the remaining copy job is not processed in the following cases:
  • The machine is scanning originals for the Cascade Copy mode.
  • The Cascade Copy mode is used in combination with the Cover/Sheet Insertion or Copy Set Numbering mode.
  • The Cascade Copy mode is used in combination with all three of the Different Size Originals, Auto Paper Selection, and 2-sided modes.
  • The printer which is operating normally has completed the cascade copy job.
  • An error occurs in the printer which is operating normally.
  • The cascade copy job has almost finished.
  • The number of copies is fewer than six.
  • When using the Copy Set Numbering mode.
  • If Error Recovery for the Cascade Copy mode is set to 'On', a machine in which an error occurs cannot resume the remaining copy job even after the error has been resolved, if the copy job has already been reassigned.
  • It is impossible to choose two different machines other than this machine for the Cascade Copy mode. You must include this machine as one of the output devices.

  1. Press (Start).


Giving Priority to the Output Device

Use this procedure to select an output device for remote copying, before you select the copy settings. The available copy settings will include only those settings supported by the machines you have selected.


  1. Place your originals → press [Select Output Device].

  • This machine appears at the top of the Select Output Device list.
  1. Select the output device → press [Done].

  • Press [Cascade Copy] → select whether to perform error recovery.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: If an error occurs in either this machine or the remote copy printer, the remaining copy jobs are assigned to the machine which is operating normally.
[Off]: If an error occurs in either this machine or the remote copy printer, the remaining copy jobs are not assigned to the machine which is operating normally.

  • Press [Details] → check the details → press [Done].
  • Error Recovery is performed only if the Finishing mode is set.
  • If Error Recovery for the Cascade Copy mode is set to 'On', the remaining copy job is not processed in the following cases:
  • The machine is scanning originals for the Cascade Copy mode.
  • The Cascade Copy mode is used in combination with the Cover/Sheet Insertion or Copy Set Numbering mode.
  • The Cascade Copy mode is used in combination with all three of the Different Size Originals, Auto Paper Selection, and 2-sided modes.
  • The printer which is operating normally has completed the cascade copy job.
  • An error occurs in the printer which is operating normally.
  • The cascade copy job has almost finished.
  • The number of copies is fewer than six.
  • When using the Copy Set Numbering mode.
  • If Error Recovery for the Cascade Copy mode is set to 'On', a machine in which an error occurs cannot resume the remaining copy job even after the error has been resolved, if the copy job has already been reassigned.
  • You cannot select two different machines other than this machine for the Cascade Copy mode. You must include this machine as one of the output devices.

  1. From the Copy Basic Features screen, set the desired copy modes.
  • In the Remote Copy mode, only those copy settings supported by the selected remote copy printer are available.
  • In the Cascade Copy mode, you cannot select copy settings that are not supported by the selected remote copy printer. Also, if you select a remote copy printer equipped with a different finisher, you cannot select settings other than the Collate and Group modes, even if the remote copy printer supports the specified copy mode.
  1. Press (Start).


Paper Selection

Remark
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.
  • If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy. For more information on how much may be cut off, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.
  • If you select the Entire Image mode, the copied image is automatically reduced slightly based on the copy paper size and the image size. As a result, the entire original image is reproduced on the copy without being cut off. (See "Entire Image.")
  • If you select [Free Size], [Envelope], [Tracing Paper], [Transparency], or [Labels], you cannot specify any Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
  • If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • For instructions on loading paper into the stack bypass, see "Basic Operations."

  1. Place your originals → press [Paper Select].


  • Press [Auto].

  • You cannot use the Automatic Paper Selection mode when copying the following types of originals. Copy these originals using the Manual Paper Selection mode.
  • Nonstandard size originals
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • A6R or smaller originals
  • A5 or A5R originals that are placed on the platen glass
  • If Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' for a particular paper source, you cannot make copies on paper loaded in that paper source in the Automatic Paper Selection mode. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Select the desired paper size.
  • The paper sizes/types are indicated by icons on the touch panel display, in the order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers.
  • Icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed on paper selection screens, if you store that information into the machine beforehand. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • indicates that the paper is loaded vertically, and indicates that the paper is loaded horizontally. The suffix <R> (such as in A4R) used in paper size designations indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass horizontally.

  • Press [Stack Bypass].

If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to specify the desired paper size/type.

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].

  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in [Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see "Security."

  • Press [Stack Bypass].

If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to specify the desired paper size/type.

  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK]

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • If you select a nonstandard size paper, the Auto Zoom, Entire Image, Auto XY Zoom, Finishing, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Image Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Shift, Image Repeat, Form Composition, Pg/ Copy Set Numbering, Watermark/Print Date, Secure Watermark, Job Block Combination, or Store In User Inbox mode cannot be specified.

  • Press [Stack Bypass].

If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already selected for current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to specify the desired paper size/type.

  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the desired envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • If you select [Envelope], the Finishing, 1 2-Sided, 2 2-Sided, Book 2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, Form Composition, or Job Block Combination mode cannot be specified.
  • Press [OK].

  1. Press [Done].


Canceling a Copy Job


Using the Touch Panel Display

  1. Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is scanning, printing, or waiting to print.

The copy job is canceled.

  • If you cancel a copy job during scanning, be sure to remove the original for that job.


Using the Stop Key

  1. Press (Stop).

When canceling a job that which is being printed, press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears during printing.

  1. Select the copy job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

The copy job is canceled.

  1. Press [Resume Copying].

Copying resumes.

  • When you press (Stop) while copying in the Store In User Inbox mode and if the Store In User Inbox (Copy upon Storing) mode is not set, the job is not paused, but canceled.


Using the System Monitor Screen

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Copy].

  1. Press [Status] → select the copy job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

  1. Press [Yes].

The copy job is canceled.

  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.
  1. Press [Done].

The display returns to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.



Reserved Copying

You can set the machine to scan originals even while it is printing or waiting to process a job.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 20 copy jobs, including the current job. Interrupt copy jobs are not included in this count.
  • You can set different copy modes and paper sources, including the stack bypass, for each reserved job. (See "Using the Stack Bypass.")
  • To cancel a previously set copy mode, press (Reset).


Reserving Copy Jobs

Reserved printing can be specified in the following cases:

  • While the Machine Is Waiting

You can specify copy settings or scan originals while the machine is in the waiting state, such as when the power is just turned ON, or after a paper jam is cleared. Copying automatically begins when the machine is ready. The message <Reservation copies can be made.> appears on the machine when it is able to process reserved copying.


Remark
  • You can specify reserved copying while the machine is in the waiting state in the following cases:
  • Between the time that the machine is turned ON and when it is ready to copy
  • After a paper jam is cleared
  • After a cover on the main unit or an optional unit, such as a finisher, is opened and closed

  • While the Machine Is Printing

You can specify copy settings for a new job while the machine is printing. Copying of the new job automatically begins when the current job is complete.


  1. Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is printing.

If the job displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than the Copy function, press [Done] → [Copy] to display the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

  1. Place your originals → set the desired copy modes and paper source.
  1. Press (Start).

If you specify a reserved copy job while the machine is printing, copying of the new job automatically begins when the current job is complete. If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] → try reserving the job again after the current job is complete.



Using the Stack Bypass

You can perform reserved copying from the stack bypass by specifying in advance the paper to be loaded for the next job. However, this is possible only if paper is being fed from the stack bypass for the current job.

The following example assumes that A3 plain paper is being fed from the stack bypass for the current job, and that you are selecting A4 plain paper to be fed from the stack bypass for a reserved job.


Remark
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.
  • If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', reserved copying can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is printing.

If the job displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than the Copy function, press [Done] → [Copy] to display the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

  1. Place your originals → set the desired copy modes → press [Paper Select] → [Stack Bypass Settings].

Normally, when reserved copying is not being set, the Stack Bypass Settings screen is automatically displayed when paper is loaded into the stack bypass.

  1. Select the desired paper size.

The paper size/type currently loaded and the paper size/type reserved to be loaded are displayed, as shown on the screen below.

  • If there is more than one reserved job waiting to print, only the last paper size/type specified for the reserved copy job is shown on the Paper Select screen and Regular Copy Basic Features screen.
  • If you select [Free Size], [Envelope], [Tracing Paper], [Transparency], or [Labels], you cannot specify any Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
  • If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in [Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see "Security."

  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].


  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the desired envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • Press [OK].

  1. Press [Done].

This completes the settings for a reserved copy job using the stack bypass. The subsequent steps show you how to load paper into the stack bypass and complete the scanning and printing process of the reserved job.

  1. Press (Start).
  1. When it is time for the reserved copy job to be printed, load the specified paper into the stack bypass.
  • The specified paper size/type is displayed on the screen when it is time for the reserved copy job to be printed.
  • Make sure to load the same paper size and type selected in step 3 into the stack bypass. Printing does not start if paper of a different size or type is loaded.
  1. Select the desired paper size.

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides → specify the paper size → press [OK].

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Set the paper size to the same size as the paper loaded in the stack bypass.

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].


  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are copying onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].


  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the desired envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • Press [OK].


Interrupt Mode

This mode enables you to interrupt the current job or a reserved job to make priority copies.

This mode is useful if you need to make a rush copy during a long copy job.


Remark
  • You can make interrupt copies whenever the machine is ready to scan.
  • To cancel the Interrupt mode, press [Interrupt].
  • To cancel previously set copy modes, press (Reset). (The Interrupt mode itself is not canceled.)

  1. Press [Interrupt].

If you want to make copies after changing the Department ID while Department ID Management is enabled, press (Log In/Out) → enter the Department ID and password using - (numeric keys). (See "Security.")

  • The current job does not stop printing immediately after you press [Interrupt]. Printing of the current job stops only when the actual printing of the priority or interrupt copy starts.
  1. Place your originals → set the desired copy modes.
  1. Press (Start).
  1. Once the originals are scanned, remove them from the machine.
  • If you want to continue making interrupt copies, wait until the current interrupt copy job is complete (end of printing). Then, repeat steps 1 to 4.


Sample Set

This mode enables you to check the copy result before making multiple copies.


Remark
  • [Sample Set] appears only if you set to make multiple copies of your original in the Collate, Offset Collate, Rotate Collate, Staple, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, or Transparency Interleaving mode. [Sample Set] does not appear if the Group or Offset Group mode is set.
  • The machine's counter counts the sample set as a copy.

  1. Place your originals → set the desired copy modes → press [Sample Set].

  1. Press (Start).
  1. Check the sample set → select [Start Print], [Cancel], or [Change Settings].

  • Press [Start Print].

  • Press [Cancel].

  • Press [Change Settings] → change the necessary settings → press [Done].

To enter the number of copies, use - (numeric keys) and (Clear) to clear your entry.

To change the exposure, press [] or []. (See "Manual Exposure Adjustment.")

To change the paper size, press [Paper Select]. (See "Paper Selection.")

To collate the copies, press [Finishing]. (See "Collating Copies.")

To set a margin for binding, press [Margin]. (See "Margin Mode.")

To embed hidden text in the background, press [Secure Watermark]. (See "Embedding Hidden Text in the Background.")

To make two-sided copies, press [2-Sided Copy]. (See "Two-Sided Copying.")

If you print one sample set and then change the settings, the machine will print from the first set with the new settings.

If you want to check the changes that you have made, press [Sample Set] → repeat the procedure from step 2.



Confirming/Changing/Canceling Selected Settings

You can use the Setting Confirmation screen to confirm, change, or cancel selected copy modes.


  1. Press [Setting Confirmation].

  1. Check the settings.

If the desired modes are set, skip to step 4. Otherwise, press the key of the copy mode to be changed or canceled.

  • A right triangle () on a copy mode setting key indicates that more setting screens are available by pressing the key.
  1. Change or cancel the selected copy mode.

  • Perform the same steps used for setting the mode. Change the setting as you desire → press [OK].

  • Press [Cancel].

  1. Press [Done].


Exposure and Original Type Settings

Remark
  • You can change the exposure while the machine is printing.


Manual Exposure Adjustment

You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


  1. Place your originals → press [] or [].

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

  1. Press (Start).


Original Type Selection

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image. The following three original type modes are available.


Remark
  • If you make copies of an original containing halftones, such as a printed photo, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. If this happens, you can lessen the moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness).")
  • If you select the Text, Text/Photo, or Photo mode, the exposure can only be adjusted manually. Automatic exposure adjustment cannot be used.
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type → adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

  • Text Mode

This mode is best suited for making copies of text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be copied/scanned clearly.

  • Text/Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for originals containing both text and photos.

  • Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for photos printed on photographic paper.


  1. Place your originals → press the original type drop-down list → select the original type ([Text], [Text/Photo], or [Photo]).

  1. Press (Start).


Automatic Exposure Adjustment

This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the exposure to the level best suited to the quality of the original.


  1. Place your originals → press [A].

An automatic copy exposure adjustment may not work with transparencies. In this case, adjust the exposure manually by pressing [] or [].

  1. Press (Start).


Exposure Adjustment during Copying

You can change the exposure while the machine is printing.


Remark
  • You cannot change the print exposure while printing in the Secure Watermark mode.

  1. Press [] or [] on the screen that is displayed while the machine is Copying.

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

  • If the copy exposure has been changed on the Copy Basic Features screen, adjusting the exposure during printing may not have any effect on the output.


Changing the Copy (Zoom) Ratio

You can set the machine to adjust the copy (zoom) ratio automatically, or you can specify the copy (zoom) ratio manually.


Remark
  • To set the copy (zoom) ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Preset Zoom

The machine offers you a variety of preset copy (zoom) ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size originals to another standard paper (record) size.


Remark
  • Place the originals horizontally in the following cases:
  • If you are enlarging A4 originals to A3 or B4
  • If you are enlarging B5 originals to B4
  • If you are enlarging A5 originals to A3 (when the original is placed on the platen glass)
  • If you are reducing A3 or B4 originals to A4 or B5 with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'Off', load A4R or B5R paper in a paper drawer or the stack bypass.
  • Placing an original horizontally means setting the original with the longer side sideways. (See "Basic Operations.")

  • Reduction

The available preset copy (zoom) ratios for reducing originals are:

  • A3 → B4, A4/LTR → B5 (86%)
  • B4 → A4/LTR, B5 → A5 (81%)
  • A3 → A4/LTR, B4 → B5 (70%)
  • A3 → B5 (61%)
  • A3 → A5 (50%)
  • Minimum (25%)
  • Enlargement

The available preset copy (zoom) ratios for enlarging originals are:

  • Maximum* (400%)
  • A5 → B3 (200%)
  • A4/LTR → A3, B5 → B4 (141%)
  • A4/LTR → B4, A5 → B5 (122%)
  • B4 → A3, B5 → A4/LTR (115%)

* Only when placed on the platen glass


  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  • The Paper Select setting must be set to 'Auto'.
  1. Select the desired copy ratio → press [Done].

  1. Press (Start).


Zoom by Percentage

You can reduce or enlarge originals by any copy ratio in 1% increments. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. The same copy ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.


  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set a copy ratio → press [Done].

  1. Press (Start).


Auto Zoom

You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate copy ratio based on the size of the original and the selected copy paper. The same copy ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.


Remark
  • You cannot scan/copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, using the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen. Use the preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage mode instead.
  • To use the Auto setting on the Copy (Zoom) Ratio screen, your originals must conform to one of the standard paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, or A6R. (You can place A5R and A6R originals only into the feeder.)
  • If you notice a difference between the automatic copy (zoom) ratio and the actual copy/record size, you can try to eliminate this error by making a Zoom Fine Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When copying, to cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [Auto].
  • When storing a document in an inbox, to cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [Auto] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Auto] → [Done].

  • If you set [Auto], you have to select a paper size manually. If you do not select a paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to match the size of paper loaded in paper drawer 1.
  1. Press (Start).
  • If the original is placed on the platen glass, the copy ratio automatically appears when the feeder/platen cover is closed, provided that the original size can be detected.
  • If the original is placed in the feeder, the copy ratio appears when (Start) is pressed.


Entire Image

If you are copying an original with an image that extends all the way to the edges onto the same size paper at a copy ratio of 100%, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly on the copy. However, if you set the Entire Image mode, the image is slightly reduced so that the entire image is copied without being cut off.


Remark
  • The reduction ratios when the Entire Image mode is specified are:
  • A3: 98.1%
  • B4: 97.8%
  • A4: 97.3%
  • B5: 96.9%
  • A5: 96.2%
  • To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [Entire Image].

  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Entire Image] → [Done].

  1. Press (Start).


Reducing/Enlarging Using the Original and Copy Sizes

The Zoom Program mode enables you to reduce or enlarge originals by individually entering the dimensions of the original and copy paper (record size).

The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

The following two Zoom Program modes are available.


Remark
  • The specified sizes are converted into a copy (zoom) ratio (%) by the machine using the formula below. The result is rounded to the closest integer.
    Copy (zoom) ratio (%) = (copy (record) size/original size) × 100
  • To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [Zoom Program] → [Cancel].

  • Making Copies (Scanning) with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

You can set the same copy (zoom) ratio for both the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.

  • Making Copies (Scanning) with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)

You can set different copy (zoom) ratios for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.


Making Copies with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

Making Copies with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)


Making Copies with the Same XY Copy/Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Zoom Program].

  1. Use the numeric keys on the touch panel display to enter values for the original size and copy size.
  • Press [Original Size] → enter a value.
  • Press [Copy Size] → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].

You can enter either the width or the length of the original size. If you enter the width for the original size, make sure to enter the width for the copy size as well, and vice versa.

The machine automatically calculates the correct copy (zoom) ratio based on the values you entered; however, the original image may be cut off slightly depending on the paper size.

If the computation results in a copy ratio greater than 200%, place your original on the platen glass.

If the computation results in a zoom ratio less than 25% or greater than 400%, a message appears telling you that values below 25% will be set to 25%, and values above 400% will be set to 400%.

  • To specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axis independently, press [XY Zoom].
  1. Press (Start).


Making Copies with Different XY Copy/Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)

  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Zoom Program].

  1. Press [XY Zoom].
  1. Use the numeric keys on the touch panel display to enter values for the original size and copy (record) size.
  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) for Original Size → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) for Original Size → enter a value.
  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) for Copy Size → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) for Copy Size → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].

You can enter either the width or the length of the original size. If you enter the width for the original size, make sure to enter the width for the copy size as well, and vice versa.

The machine automatically calculates the correct copy (zoom) ratio based on the values you entered; however, the original image may be cut off slightly depending on the paper size.

If the computation results in a copy ratio greater than 200%, place your original on the platen glass.

If the computation results in a zoom ratio less than 25% or greater than 400%, a message appears telling you that values below 25% will be set to 25%, and values above 400% will be set to 400%.

  • To specify the same copy ratio for both the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes, press [Zoom].
  1. Press (Start).


Setting the X and Y Axes Independently

The XY Zoom mode enables you to make reduced or enlarged copies with different XY copy ratios expressed in percentages. The available copy ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

The following two XY Zoom modes are available.


Remark
  • To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [XY Zoom] → [Cancel].

  • Manually Specifying the Copy/Zoom Ratio (XY Zoom)

You can manually set different copy (zoom) ratios for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes, expressed in percentages and in 1% increments.


Remark
  • If you set the copy (zoom) ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the image of the original may be rotated before being printed on the paper depending on the outcome of the computation executed by the machine using the original size and the specified copy (zoom) ratio.

  • Automatically Specifying the Copy Ratio (Auto XY Zoom)

The XY copy ratio is automatically set to suit the size of the selected paper.


Remark
  • You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. Manually specify the copy (zoom) ratio for these types of originals.
  • If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size using the Manual Paper Selection mode. If you do not select a paper size, Paper Drawer 1 is automatically selected and the copy ratio is set to match the size of the paper loaded in that drawer.
  • If you set the copy ratio in the Auto XY Zoom mode, Auto Orientation is not performed.
  • The Auto XY Zoom mode is available for the Copy function only.
  • If you notice a difference between the copy (zoom) ratio and the actual print size, you can try to eliminate this error by making a Zoom Fine Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Place your originals → press [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [XY Zoom].

  1. Specify the desired copy ratios.

  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].


  • Press [Auto XY Zoom] → [OK].
  • If you set [Auto XY Zoom], you have to select a paper size manually. If you do not specify a paper size, the copy ratio is set to match the size of the paper loaded in paper drawer 1.

  1. Press (Start).


Collating Copies

The Finishing modes can be selected to collate the outputs in various ways, either by pages or copy sets.


Remark
  • The Finishing modes cannot be set if free size, envelopes, transparencies, tracing paper, or labels is selected.
  • To cancel this setting, press [Finishing] → [Cancel].

  • The table below shows all the finishing features that are available with each different optional unit, and the paper sizes that can be used.
: Available
- : Unavailable

Optional Unit Offset Rotate Staple Hole
Punch
Corner Double Saddle
Stitch
None -
A4, A4R, B5, B5R
- - - -
Copy Tray-J1 -
A4, A4R, B5, B5R
- - - -
Finisher-S1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5
-
A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)
- - -
Finisher-S1
and
Puncher Unit-Q1

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5
-
A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)
- -
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R
Inner 2way Tray-D1
or
Inner 2way Tray-D1
and
Copy Tray-J1
-
A4, A4R, B5, B5R
- - - -
Finisher-AE1
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5
-
A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)

A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)
- -
Finisher-AE1
and
Puncher Unit-L1

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5
-
A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)

A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)
-
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R
Saddle Finisher-AE2
A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5
-
A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)

A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)

A3, B4, A4R (15 sheets)
-
Saddle Finisher-AE2
and
Puncher Unit-L1

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5
-
A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)

A3, B4, A4R (30 sheets), A4, B5 (50 sheets)

A3, B4, A4R (15 sheets)

A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R

  • If the Collate Mode Is Set:

The copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The output is as follows:

  • If the Group Mode Is Set:

All copies of the same original page are grouped together. The output is as follows:

  • If the Staple Mode Is Set:

The copies are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. The output is as follows:

  • If you select [Corner] (Top Left):

  • If you select [Double] (Left):

  • If you select [Saddle Stitch]:


Remark
  • If the optional Finisher-S1 is attached, you cannot select the stapling position. For more information on stapling positions, see "Optional Equipment."
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the paper type and the number of sheets.
  • To use the Saddle Stitch mode, the original (stored document) must already be in booklet form, as shown in the illustration above. (See "Booklet Mode.")

  • If No Finishing Mode Is Set:

If the Collate, Group, and Staple modes are not set, copies are output as follows:

  • If the Hole Punch Mode Is Set:

The machine punches two or three holes in the output.

  • If the Rotate Mode Is Set:

If the copies are of the same size, the sheets are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and are output in alternating directions as follows:

  • If the Offset Mode Is Set:

The copies are slightly offset vertically in the output tray as follows: (You can also specify the number of copy sets to offset.)


Page Order (Collate)

Same Page (Group)

Page Order (Staple)


Page Order (Collate)

  1. Place your originals → press [Finishing].

  • If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate.")
  1. Press [Collate (Page order)].

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].


  • Press [Next] → select [A4], [A4R], [B5], or [B5R].
  • [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
  • If the available paper size is selected manually
  • If the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
  • The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate Mode, make sure to select a paper size which can be rotated. Otherwise, output will not be rotated.
  • If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


Same Page (Group)

  1. Place your originals → press [Finishing].

  • If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate.")
  1. Press [Group (Same pages)].

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].


  • Press [Next] → select [A4], [A4R], [B5], or [B5R].
  • [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
  • If the available paper size is selected manually
  • If the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
  • The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate Mode, make sure to select a paper size which can be rotated. Otherwise, output will not be rotated.
  • If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


Page Order (Staple)

Remark
  • The Staple mode can be set only if an optional finisher is attached.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.

  1. Place your originals → press [Finishing].

  • If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate.")
  1. Press [Staple].

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].


  • Press [OK].


  • Press [Next].

  • Select the stapling type ([Corner] or [Double]) → select the stapling position → press [OK].


  • Press [Next].
  • Select the stapling type ([Corner], [Double], or [Saddle Stitch]).

If you want to select [Corner] or [Double]:

  • Press [Corner] or [Double] → select the stapling position → press [OK].

If you want to select [Saddle Stitch]:

  • Press [Saddle Stitch] → [Next].
  • Select the paper source to use for the main document → press [OK].

If you selected the paper to use for the main document from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size and press [Next] → select the paper type and press [OK].

If you pressed [Add cover], press [Next] → select the paper source to use for the cover page.

If you selected the paper to use for the cover from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper type → press [OK].

Press [Next] → select whether to print on the cover → press [OK].

  • Make sure to use the same paper size for the cover and the main document.
  • If you select [No] for <Select whether to print on covers.>, [Heavy] can be selected.
  • Only 64 to 80 g/m² paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m² paper can be used for the cover page.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the paper drawer, you must load the paper face up.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the stack bypass, you must load the paper face down.

  1. Press (Start).


Two-Sided Copying

This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided or two-sided originals, or make one-sided copies from two-sided originals.


Remark
  • You may not be able to make two-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
  • If you are copying in the 2-Sided mode, align the top edge of the original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner), or with the back edge of the feeder.
  • The 2-Sided mode you have selected is displayed above [2-Sided] on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, or above [2-Sided Printing] on the Change Pr. Settings screen.
  • Paper used to make two-sided copies must conform to the following specifications:
  • Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R (envelopes cannot be used for two-sided copying)
  • Paper weight: 64 to 80 g/m²
  • When copying, to cancel this setting, press [2-Sided] → [Cancel].


1 to 2-Sided

This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals, or to print two successive pages of a document stored in a User Inbox onto both sides of a sheet of paper.


Remark
  • Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R, and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy is printed upside down.
  • If there are an odd number of originals, the back side of the last copy is left blank. (The machine's counter does not count the blank page as a copy.)
  • If the 2-Sided mode is used with the Different Size Originals mode, the copies of different size originals will be printed as one-sided copies on paper of their respective sizes. If you want to make two-sided copies with different size originals, you must select the paper size beforehand.

  1. Place your originals → press [2-Sided].

  1. Press [12-Sided].

To set the orientation of two-sided copies, press [Option] → select the type of two-sided orientation → press [Done].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


2 to 2-Sided

This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from two-sided originals. If a two-sided original is placed in the feeder, it is automatically turned over so that both sides of the original are copied onto the front and back sides of a copy sheet.


Remark
  • 22-Sided copying is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • If you placed your originals on the platen glass, follow the instructions displayed on the screen to scan each side of the originals.

  1. Place your originals → press [2-Sided].

  • If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate.")
  1. Press [22-Sided].

To set the orientation of the originals and the copies, press [Option] → select the type of two-sided orientation for the originals and the copies → press [Done].

Original

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

Copy

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the copy will have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


2 to 1-Sided

This feature automatically turns over two-sided originals placed in the feeder to make one-sided copies on different sheets of paper.


Remark
  • 21-Sided copying is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R, and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the copy is printed upside down.
  • If you want to place your two-sided original on the platen glass, use the Job Build mode in Special Features to execute 21-Sided copying. (See "Job Build.")

  1. Place your originals in the feeder → press [2-Sided].

  • If Auto Collate in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Collate or Offset Collate mode is automatically set when you place your originals in the feeder. (See "Auto Collate.")
  1. Press [21-Sided].

To set the orientation of the originals, press [Option] → select the orientation of the originals → press [Done].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


Book to 2-Sided

This feature enables you to make two-sided copies from facing pages, or from the front and back sides of a page in bound originals, such as books and magazines.

  • Left/Right Two-sided

This setting makes two-sided copies from facing pages.

  • Front/Back Two-sided

This setting makes two-sided copies from the front and back sides of a page.


Remark
  • Only A4 or B5 paper can be used for Book2-Sided copying.
  • If you select [Front/Back 2-Sided], the front side of the first two-sided page and the back side of the last two-sided page are left blank. (The machine's counter does not count the blank pages as copies.)
  • Place your original on the platen glass. The Book2-Sided mode cannot be used when the original is placed in the feeder.

  1. Place your original on the platen glass → press [2-Sided].

To make copies in the correct page order, begin copying from the first open page of the book or bound original.

Place your original face down, making sure that its top edge is aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).

  1. Press [Book2-Sided] → [Next].
  1. Select the desired type of two-sided layout → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Left/Right 2-Sided]: The facing pages of a book or bound original are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet of paper.
[Front/Back 2-Sided]: The front and back sides of the left page, or the front and back sides of the right page, are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet of paper.
  1. Press (Start).

To copy the next two facing pages, turn the page of the original → place your original on the platen glass → press (Start).

  1. When scanning is complete, press [Done].


What Are Special Features?

Special features, such as the Booklet and Job Build modes, are modes for performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when copying.


Remark


Specifying the Special Copying Features

  1. Place your originals.

  1. Press [Special Features].

  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  • Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.
  • If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  1. Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.

To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 3 and 4.

  1. Press (Start).

If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display → press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Copying starts.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • For modes which have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Frame Erase
    Press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase] → [Cancel].
  • For modes which do not have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Job Build
    Press [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


2-Page Separation

This mode enables you to scan facing pages of a book or bound original, print them in two separate pages, or store them as two separate pages.


Remark
  • Place your original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when the original is placed in the feeder.
  • To make two-sided copies of books or bound originals, use the Book 2-Sided copying feature of the 2-Sided mode. (See "Book to 2-Sided.")

  1. Place your originals on the platen glass → press [Special Features] → [2-Page Separation] → [Done].

When placing an original, to make copies in the correct page order, begin scanning from the first open page of the book or bound original. Place your originals face down, making sure that their top edge is aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).

  1. Press (Start).

To scan the next two facing pages, turn the page of the original → place your original on the platen glass → press (Start).

  1. When scanning is complete, press [Done].


Cover/Sheet Insertion

This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically add front and back covers, sheet insertions, or chapter pages using a different type of paper from that used for the main document. In addition, you can decide whether the front and back covers, and the sheet insertions are copied or printed on as well. Chapter pages are always copied or printed on.


Remark
  • If you select the Staple mode when an optional finisher is attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.
  • If you are copying on the front cover, back cover, or sheet insertions, these sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies made. If these sheets are left blank, however, the machine's counter does not count them as copies.
  • If you are adding chapter pages, these sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies made.

  • Front Cover/Back Cover

This setting adds a front cover and back cover sheet to each set of copies. You may also copy on the front/back cover sheet.

  • Sheet Insertion/Chapter Page

This setting inserts a sheet of paper between copies. The Sheet Insertion mode is useful when you want to use a blank sheet to help sort out the copies. You may also copy on the sheet insertions. Since the chapter page is always copied on one side, the Chapter Page mode is useful when you want to organize the copies by chapter.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → press [Cover/Sheet Insertion].
  1. Select the desired Cover/Sheet Insertion feature → press [Paper Select] for each selected feature.

You cannot select [Sheet Insertion] and [Chapter Page] at the same time.

  • To cancel a selected feature, press that key again.
  1. Select the paper source → press [Done].
  • Select the same size paper for [Front Cover], [Back Cover], and [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]).
  • If you try to set a different paper size for one feature, the paper sizes for the other features are automatically changed to the new paper size. However, if you are only changing the paper source with the same paper size, the settings for the other features will not change.
  1. Press [Next].

If only [Chapter Page] was selected, proceed to step 6.

  1. Select whether to copy on the front cover, back cover, or sheet insertion → press [Next].

If [Sheet Insertion] or [Chapter Page] is not selected, press [OK].

  • A chapter page is always copied on one side.
  • If you select [Leave Blank] for the front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3 to be used as the copy's front and/or back cover. You can also select the paper source for the sheet insertion in step 7.
  • If you are using paper that already has printing on it (e.g., company logo) as your front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, then you must select [Leave Blank]. Otherwise, the machine will copy your original's first or last page on the preprinted paper.
  • If you select [Print on Front Side], [Print on Back Side], or [Copy on Both Sides] for the front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3, and prints your original on its front side, back side, or on both sides. This will then be used as the copy's front cover. You can also select the paper source for the sheet insertion in step 7.
  1. Press [Add].
  1. Specify where the sheet insertions or chapter pages should be added using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

If you are inserting the sheet insertions, you can change the paper source and side(s) to be printed on.

If you are inserting the chapter pages, you can change the paper sources.

Repeat steps 6 and 7, as necessary.

  • You cannot insert a sheet insertion or chapter page on the first page. Set their positions starting from the second page.
  • The settings are displayed in the order of insertion.
  • You can insert up to 100 sheet insertions or chapter pages.
  1. Press [OK].


Booklet Mode

This mode enables you to copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies are made into a booklet.

  • Booklet

This mode enables you to copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies are made into a booklet.

  • Divided Booklet

This mode enables you to make a multiple page document with a large number of pages into a divided booklet.

  • Creep (Displacement) Correction

This mode enables you to adjust the position of the images in a booklet by calculating the width of the displacement between the outermost page and center page of the booklet.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Saddle stitching is not performed if there is only one output sheet.
  • The Saddle Stitch and Divided Booklet modes can be set only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the type and quantity of paper.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.
  • Make sure to place originals with a vertical (portrait) orientation vertically. If these originals are placed horizontally, the even numbered pages will be printed upside down.

  1. Place your original → press [Special Features] → [Booklet].
  1. Select the original size → press [Next].

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] → select the type of two-sided original → press [OK] → [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A6R is the selected original size.
  1. Select the paper source to use for the main document → press [Next].

If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, press [OK].

Only A3, B4, or A4R paper can be used for the Booklet mode.

If you selected the paper to use for the main document from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size and press [Next] → select the paper type and press [OK].


  • Press [Add Cover] → [Next].
  • Select the paper source to use for the cover page → press [Next].

If you selected the paper to use for the cover from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper type → press [OK].

  • Select whether to copy on the cover page → press [Next].

If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, press [OK].

  • You must select the same paper size for the cover page as that used for copying the main document.
  • If you select [Print] for only <Front Inside Cover> and/or <Back Inside Cover>, [Heavy] can be selected.
  • Only 64 to 80 g/m² paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m² paper can be used for the cover page.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the paper drawer, you must load the paper face up.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the stack bypass, you must load the paper face down.

  1. Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet → press [OK].
  • If you selected [Add Cover], the maximum number of sets that the booklet tray can hold is 10.

  • Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet → press [OK].
  • The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be saddle stitched is:
  • 15 sheets (64 to 80 g/m²)
  • 10 sheets (81 to 105 g/m²)
  • If the number of sheets is 16 or more, the booklet is not saddle stitched.
  • The number of saddle stitched booklets that the booklet tray can hold depends on the number of sheets that each booklet contains.
  • 1 to 5 sheets:
25 sets
  • 6 to 10 sheets:
15 sets
  • 11 to 15 sheets:
10 sets
  • If you set the Booklet mode, the center Shift mode is also automatically set.
  • If you select [Divided Booklet], enter the number of sheets that you want to divide by pressing [-] or [+] → press [OK] → [OK].
  • If the printing position of the image is out of place, and you want to set the creep (displacement) correction, press [Creep Correction] → select [Auto] or [Manual] → press [OK] → [OK].

If you select [Manual], press [] or [] to adjust the correction width.


  • Press [Do not correct] or [Auto] or [Manual] → press [OK].

If you select [Manual], press [] or [] to adjust the correction width.


  1. Set the Booklet Tray guide to match the paper size.

  • Make sure to set the Booklet Tray guide correctly to match the paper size. Setting the Booklet Tray guide incorrectly may result in a paper jam.
  • If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, this step is unnecessary.


Transparency Interleaving

When copying onto transparencies loaded into the stack bypass, this mode enables you to automatically add an interleaving sheet of paper between each sheet of transparency that is output. The interleaf sheets protect the copied surface of the transparencies. You can also set to copy the content of the transparencies onto interleaf sheets.


Remark
  • Even if an optional finisher is attached, you cannot use any of the Finishing modes with the Transparency Interleaving mode.
  • Only A4 is available for the Transparency Interleaving mode.
  • The machine's counter does not count blank interleaf sheets as copies.
  • If Tray Designation settings are set only for Copy Tray-J1, transparencies are output to Tray A. The Tray Designation settings may vary depending on the optional output units that are attached to the machine. For details on the tray designations, see "Additional Functions."

  • If You Do Not Want to Print on the Interleaf Sheets:

The [Leave Blank] setting outputs a printed transparency and a blank interleaf sheet alternately.

  • If You Want to Print on the Interleaf Sheets:

The [Print] setting outputs a printed transparency and a printed interleaf sheet alternately.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Transparency Interleaving].
  1. Load transparencies into the stack bypass.

  1. Select the transparency size → select whether to copy on the interleaf sheets → press [Next].

  1. Select the paper source for the interleaf sheets → press [OK].
  • If you are copying onto the interleaf sheets, these sheets are included in the count of the total number of copies made.
  • The copies are output with the copied side face down, alternating between transparency and interleaf sheet.
  • In the Transparency Interleaving mode, transparencies are loaded from the stack bypass while interleaf sheets are loaded from a paper drawer.


Image Combination

This mode enables you to automatically reduce two, four, or eight originals, as well as two-sided originals or the facing pages of a book, to fit onto one side or both sides of a selected paper size.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Originals copied/scanned in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
  • For the Copy function, you can change or specify the number of copies or 2-Sided Original mode before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches).
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected paper size.

  • 2 On 1

This setting reduces two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to fit onto one side or both sides of one sheet of paper.

  • 4 On 1

This setting reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of one sheet of paper.

  • 8 On 1

This setting reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of one sheet of paper.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Image Combination].
  1. Select the original size → press [Next].

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] → select the type of two-sided original → press [OK] → [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A6R is the selected original size.
  1. Select the desired Image Combination feature → press [Next].

If you want to make two-sided copies, press [2-Sided Copy] → select the type of two-sided orientation → press [OK] → [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

If you want to specify the image order, press [Option] → select the image order → press [Done] → [Next].

If you do not change the image order by pressing [Option], the images are printed as follows:

2 On 1: Left → Right
4 On 1 and 8 On 1: Upper Left → Upper Right → Lower Left → Lower Right
  1. Select the desired paper size → press [OK].
  • The machine automatically selects the copy ratio depending on the selected paper size.
  • If you set the Image Combination mode, the center Shift mode is also automatically set.


Shifting the Original Image

You can make copies with the entire original image shifted to the center or a corner.


Remark
  • If [Center/Corner Shift] is selected, and the original and the copy paper are the same size and the copy ratio is set at 100%, the image of the original is not shifted.
  • If you use the numeric keys to enter the shift position, the original image may be partially cut off on the copy, depending on the size of the original, the size of the copy paper, and the amount of shift specified.


Using the Arrow Keys

The [Center/Corner Shift] setting enables you to use the arrow keys on the touch panel display to make copies with the entire original image shifted to the center or a corner.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Shift].
  1. Press [Center/Corner Shift] → select the shift direction with an arrow key → press [OK].

The shift direction is the direction that you want the original image moved to, if you first visualize the original image as being face up and appearing in the center of the copy page.



Using the Numeric Keys

The [No. Key Entry] setting enables you to shift the entire image to a position that you specify using - (numeric keys). You can also select the shift direction for the front and back sides of documents separately.


Remark

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Shift] → [No. Key Entry].
  1. Press [Settings] under <Front Side> or <Back Side>.

  • Back side settings are only valid when making two-sided copies.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the shift position.
  • Select the shift direction.
  • Enter the shift value.
  • Press [OK].
  • To change a value you entered, select the shift direction → enter the correct value using - (numeric keys).
  • The values for the back side can also be automatically set by selecting [Same as Front Side] or [Opposite to Front Side].
    Example: When the front side is set to 50 mm for the left, and 100 mm for the top.
  • If you press [Same as Front Side]: 50 mm for the left, and 100 mm for the top
  • If you press [Opposite to Front Side]: 50 mm for the right, and 100 mm for the top

  • Press the top [].
  • Enter the shift value.
  • Press the right [].
  • Enter the shift value.


  1. Press [OK].


Margin Mode

This mode enables you to make copies or prints with the entire original image shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top, or bottom in order to create a margin on the copies. Use this mode to make copies or prints ready for placement in ring binders.


Remark
  • The Margin mode shifts the entire original image by the designated width. Therefore, an original whose image extends all the way to the edges of the sheet may be partially cut off on the copy.
  • You can choose to only create a margin on the back side of a copy. Therefore, originals that already have a margin can be copied in the 12-Sided mode or 21-Sided mode.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Margin].
  1. Select the desired margin type.

  1. Select [Front Side] or [Back Side] → press [-] or [+] to set the margin width → press [OK].
  • If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying or printing a document that already has a margin, follow the instructions below:
  • 12-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for the back only.
  • 22-Sided:
You do not need to set the Margin mode. Proceed to make copies or prints in the usual way.
  • 21-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for the back only.
  • If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying or printing a document that does not have a margin, follow the instructions below:
  • 12-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  • 22-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  • 21-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  • If you enter a value other than 0, you can switch between positive and negative margin width by pressing [±].
    Example: (+)10 → [±] → -10
    -50 → [±] → (+)50
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].


Frame Erase

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. There are three types of the Frame Erase mode: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Erase.


Remark


Original Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the copy if the original is smaller than the selected paper size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the copy.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Original Frame Erase].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the original size → press [OK].
  • You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].


Book Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark border, as well as center and contour lines that appear if you are copying facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of paper.


  1. Place your original on the platen glass → press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Book Frame Erase].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [Center] and [Sides] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the size of the bound original when it is open → press [OK].
  • You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].


Binding Erase

This mode erases the shadows that appear on copies from binding holes on originals.


Remark
  • Make sure you place your original on the platen glass. Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
  • When using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4 mm.

  1. Place your originals on the platen glass → press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Binding Erase] → select the border where the binding holes are located.

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize the original as being face up.

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].


Job Done Notice

This mode enables you to set the machine to notify you through e-mail when the current copy job is done. This is especially useful when you are waiting in line for a large copy job to complete or when you are using the Remote or Cascade Copy mode.


Remark
  • The Job Done Notice can be set only if the color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Job Done Notice].
  1. Select the destination of the job done notice → press [OK].

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • You cannot select multiple destinations at one time.
  • Once copying is complete, a job done notice is sent to the selected destination.
  • To display the [Access Number] key, set Access Number Management to 'On'. To access the Access Number Management setting, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Access Number Management]. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")


Different Size Originals

This mode enables you to copy different size originals with the same widths (A3 and A4, or B4 and B5) or different widths (A3 and B4, or A4 and B5), together as one group by setting them in the feeder.


Remark
  • If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight (paper type).
  • Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths.
  • Set different size originals with different widths and lengths in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.
  • A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 and B5, B5 and A5
  • If you place originals with different widths in the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the platen glass. As a result, the images may be scanned and copied as slanted.
  • If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.
  • Stapling cannot be performed if you place originals with different widths.
  • When copying, if the Different Size Originals mode is used with the 12-Sided mode, the copies are output as one-sided copies on paper of their respective sizes if the originals for the front and back sides of a two-sided copy are different in size.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Different Size Originals].
  1. Select the type of originals → press [OK].

If you are placing originals with the same width, press [Same Width].

If you are placing originals with different widths, press [Different Width].



Job Build

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. When copying, the originals are printed as one document after all of the batches have been scanned.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • You cannot change the copy settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary copy/scan settings beforehand, according to the type of originals or the desired result.
  • If you place your originals in the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each batch is complete.
  • When copying, you can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the number of copies, 2-Sided Original mode, original type, and copy exposure. However, if you specify the Image Combination mode together with the Job Build mode, you cannot change the copy exposure and original type.
  • If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.
  • If you place different size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode. (See "Different Size Originals.")
  • When copying, if you want to copy one-sided and two-sided originals as two-sided copies, divide the originals into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if the first batch of originals to be copied consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-Sided Original mode accordingly. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode for each batch of originals that you scan.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).
  1. When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals → press (Start).

If you want to change the scan settings, change them before pressing (Start).


  • Press [2-Sided Original].

  • Select the type of two-sided original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the type of originals you place next.

To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

Repeat this step as necessary.


  1. After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].


Scan Image Check

This enables you to confirm scanned images page by page while copying them when you scan originals in succession on the platen glass. This is useful to prevent miscopying resulting from misscanning.


Remark
  • When 12-Sided is set, two-sided copying is not performed and the machine copies each original at a time.
  • The originals must be set on the platen glass. You cannot copy using Scan Image Check mode with the originals set in the feeder.

  1. Place your originals on the platen glass → press [Special Features] → [Scan Image Check].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or press (Stop).
  1. Confirm the contents of the printout → scan the next original.

To rescan the image immediately after an original has scanned, replace the original → select [Re-Scan] → press (Start).

If you want to change the copy settings, make the changes before pressing (Start).

  1. After all originals are scanned, press [Done].


Using Image Creation Modes

The Image Creation modes enable you to rearrange the images of originals for the effect that you want. There are three types of Image Creation modes: Nega/Posi, Image Repeat, and Mirror Image.


Remark


Inverting Images (Nega/Posi)

This mode enables you to make copies of the original image by inverting the gradations of black-and-white.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Image Creation].
  1. Press [Nega/Posi].



Image Repeat

This mode enables you to repeatedly copy the entire original image in either the vertical or horizontal direction.

The following two settings are available for the Image Repeat mode.

  • Automatic Setting

The original image is copied so that the maximum possible number of repeats fit onto the selected paper size.

  • Manual Setting

The original image is copied the specified number of times.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Image Creation].
  1. Press [Image Repeat].
  1. Set the number of times that you want the image to repeat for both the vertical and horizontal directions.


  • Press [Auto].

If [Auto] is already selected, this step is not necessary.


  • Press [-] or [+] to set the number of times that you want the image to repeat.
  • The repeated images may overlap or have gaps between them, depending on the number of repeats that you set.

  1. To specify the amount of the space between repeated images, press [Margin Settings].

If you do not specify [Margin Settings], proceed to step 5.

  1. Specify the amount of space between repeated images using [-] and [+].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [-] or [+] to set the amount of space → press [OK].

  • Press [Independent Adjustment].
  • Select the space to adjust → press [-] or [+] to set its size → press [OK].

To return to the screen for setting the same amount of space for all four sides, press [Uniform Margin].


  1. Press [OK].


Mirror Image

This mode enables you to copy the original image reversed, as if it were a reflection in a mirror.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Image Creation].
  1. Press [Mirror Image].


Image Quality Adjustment

You can copy the original by erasing the background color.


Remark
  • If [A] (Auto) is selected as the copy exposure on the Copy Basic Features screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic copy exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the copy exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled and the automatic exposure is used instead.


Remove Background

This mode enables you to scan or make copies by erasing the background color of the original. This feature is especially useful for copying originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].
  1. Press [Remove Background] → [OK].

If the background color remains, or if you want to make the background color darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine adjustments to the density of the background color.

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, press [Fine Adjustment] → press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of color that you want to remove → press [OK].

  • Pressing [-] or [+] adjusts the density. Press [-] to make the color lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic copy exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)

This mode enables you to scan and record, or make copies of the originals with a sharper or softer contrast. To reproduce text or lines with a sharper contrast, use [High] as the setting. To scan/copy originals containing printed photographs or other halftones with a softer contrast, use [Low] as the setting.

  • Low

If you make copies, or scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. However, you can lessen this moiré effect by using [Low] as the setting to produce a clearer copy (image).

  • High

This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited to scanning and copying blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.


Remark

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Sharpness].
  1. Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness → press [OK].

To copy text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards [High]. To copy originals containing printed photographs or other halftones, the setting should be towards [Low].



Composing Images

The Form Composition mode enables you to superimpose a previously scanned image which has been stored in the memory of the machine (image form) on the output.


Remark
  • If you specify the Form Composition mode with the Cascade Copy mode, it is necessary to assign the same name to the stored image form in both this machine and the remote copy printer beforehand. If the assigned image form name in this machine is not set in the remote copy printer, the job is canceled. If multiple image forms with the same assigned name are stored in the remote copy printer, different images may be used for Form Composition.
  • To use the Form Composition mode, the image form must be stored in the machine beforehand. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Form composition can be used with other copy modes to process images. However, copy modes other than the Shift or Mirror Image mode can only be used for copying images, and not for stored image forms.
  • Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the free space of the hard disk.
  • For the Mail Box function, the Form Composition mode cannot be used with documents whose resolution is other than 600 x 600 dpi.
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Form Composition mode, depending on the selected document and image form.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Form Composition].
  1. Select the image form to be superimposed over the original → press [OK].

To check images stored as forms, press [Check Print] to print a sample of the image.

Press [Details] to display the detailed information of the image form.


  • Select the paper size → press [Start Print].

Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.



Embedding Hidden Text in the Background

The Secure Watermark mode enables you to embed hidden text in the background of copies. You can embed text such as "CONFIDENTIAL," the date and time, or a department name. The embedded text appears when the copies are copied.


Remark
  • You cannot change the copy exposure while copying in the Secure Watermark mode.
  • The embedded hidden text may not appear as specified even if the copy with the Secure Watermark mode applied is copied, depending on the copy machine. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Secure Watermark mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
  • The Secure Watermark mode is only available if the optional Secure Watermark is activated.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → press [Secure Watermark].
  1. Select the type of secure watermark (Watermark, Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, ID/User Name).

  • Select a preset watermark → press [Next].


  • Press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK] → [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • If you want to register your newly created secure watermark to be selected whenever necessary, press [Register] → enter the text to be registered.

  • Enter the date using - (numeric keys) → select the date format from the Date Type drop-down list → press [Next].

  • There are six different date formats that you can select in the drop-down list.
  • If you do not specify a date, the date set in Date and Time Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is printed. Confirm that the date and time settings are correct.

  • Enter the starting number using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].


  • Press [Next].

  • The Serial Number is the number which is displayed at the bottom left of the screen when you press on the control panel.

  • Press [Next].

  • The current ID or user name is displayed if you are using a login service.
  • [ID/User Name] is grayed out and cannot be selected if you are not using a login service.

  1. Select Background Pattern from the Background Pattern drop-down list → select the size of the text → press [OK].

To embed a pattern in the background of the output, select a background pattern from the Background Pattern drop-down list

You can select [Small] ('36 pt.'), [Medium] ('54 pt.'), or [Large] ('72 pt.') for the size of the text.

To change the orientation of characters, press [Print Characters Vertically].

To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored Backgnd].

To adjust the contrast of the embedded letters and the background pattern, press [Character/Backgrnd Contrast Adjustment].



Page and Copy Set Numbering

This mode enables you to print page numbers, copy set numbers, and user-defined text onto the output.


Remark
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Page/Copy Set Numbering mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
  • If you select [Numbered Chapters] in combination with the Cover/Sheet Insertion (Sheet Insertion or Chapter Page) mode or the Cover/Job Separator mode (for the Mail Box function), the chapter numbers are counted as follows:
  • After each chapter page is inserted
    After each sheet insertion is inserted
  • If the copy number has fewer than five digits, the machine copies it as follows:
  • Example: If the copy number is 10, "00010" is printed.
  • If the Scan Image Check mode is used with the Copy Set Numbering mode, the number is copied as "XXXXX."
  • If the Pg/Copy Set Numbering mode is used with the Cover/Sheet Insertion or Cover/Job Separator mode (for the Mail Box function), page numbers are not printed on the inserted pages.

  • Page Numbering

Documents can be copied with page numbers (numbers only, numbers enclosed with hyphens, with chapter numbers, or with the total page number).

  • Copy Set Numbering

This mode enables you to copy or print a document with a five digit number in the background of each page.


Page Numbering

Copy Set Numbering


Page Numbering

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Pg/Copy Set Numbering].
  1. Press [Page Numbering].
  1. Select the type of numbering ([Numbers Only], [Numbers with Hyphens], [Numbered Chapters], or [Total Page Numbering]).

  1. Select the orientation and the position of the page numbers → press [Next].

Orientation:

[Vertical]: Prints the page number vertically.
[Horizontal]: Prints the page number horizontally.
  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Select the desired position of the page numbers → press [Done].

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].

  1. Enter the page number to start numbering from using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].

If you want to insert chapter numbers along with page numbers, specify the starting chapter number on the left (1 to 9,999), and the starting page number on the right (1 to 9,999).

If you want to insert the total page number along with page numbers, specify to have the page numbers start on the left side (1 to 9,999), and the total page number starts on the right side (1 to 20,000). To set the total page number automatically, press [Auto].

  • If [Total Page Numbering] is used with the Booklet mode, the total number of pages are printed automatically.

  • Select whether to count the inserted sheets → press [Done].
[Number]: Counts the sheet insertions, chapter pages, job separator, or back cover that you inserted after the first page, but only prints chapter numbers and page numbers onto the main document pages.
[Do not number]: Does not count the sheet insertions, chapter pages, job separator, or back cover that you inserted after the first page, and only prints chapter numbers and page numbers onto the main document pages.

  • Press [Number of Digits to Print] → specify the number of digits by pressing [-] or [+].
  • The number of digits you can specify is '2' to '5'.
    Example: If the page number is 10 and number of digits is 2, "10" is printed.
    If the page number is 10 and number of digits is 5, "00010" is printed.
  • If the specified number of digits is less than the number of digits of the actual page number, the setting is invalid.

  • Press [Add Characters] → [Next].
  • Press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK] → [Next].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • Set the position of the text → press [Next].

  1. Set the size of the page numbers → press [OK].

Select the size of the page numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('10.5 pt.', '12.0 pt.', and '14.0 pt.').

You can select [Black] or [White] for the color of the page numbers.



Copy Set Numbering

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Pg/Copy Set Numbering].
  1. Press [Copy Set Numbering].
  1. Select the orientation and the position of the copy set numbers → press [Next].

Press [Full Surface] to print the copy set number repeatedly over the surface of the output.

Press [Numbers in 5 Locations] to select all five print positions.

  • If Copy Set Numbering Option Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', [Numbers in 5 Locations] is grayed out and cannot be selected. (See "Security.")
  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  1. Enter the number to start numbering from → select the Number size and density → press [OK].

Select the size of the page numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('12.0 pt.', '24.0 pt.', and '36.0 pt.').

Adjust the character density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].

  • If Copy Set Numbering Option Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the size of the page numbers becomes [Small] '10.5 pt.', [Medium] '12.0 pt.', [Large] '14.0 pt.'. (See "Security.")


Printing a Watermark and Date

This mode enables you to print a watermark, date, and user-defined text onto the output.


Remark
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Watermark/Print Date mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
  • If the Watermark/Print Date mode is used with the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode or the Cover/Job Separator mode (for the Mail Box function), the watermark/date will not be printed on the inserted pages.

  • Watermark

Prints watermark or user-defined text onto the output.

  • Print Date

Prints the date onto the output.


Watermark Printing

Date Printing


Watermark Printing

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Watermark/Print Date].
  1. Press [Watermark].
  1. Set the watermark orientation and position → press [Next].

Orientation:

[Vertical]: Prints the watermark vertically.
[Horizontal]: Prints the watermark horizontally.
  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Select the desired position of the page numbers → press [Done].

  • Select [All Pages] or [Print on Top Page Only] → press [Done].

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].

  1. Select the desired preset watermark → press [Next].

  • Press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


  1. Specify the text size and print type → press [OK].

Select the size of the watermark from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('36.0 pt.', '54.0 pt.', and '72.0 pt.').

You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].



Date Printing

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Watermark/Print Date].
  1. Press [Print Date].
  1. Set the number orientation and position → press [Next].

  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  1. Select the date type → specify the date using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].
  • There are six types of date format you can select from.
  • If no date is set, the date set in Date and Time Settings in the System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is printed. Confirm that the date and time settings are correct.
  1. Set the number size and print type → press [OK].

Select the size of the numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('10.5 pt.', '12.0 pt.', and '14.0 pt.').

You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].



Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings

The Job Block Combination mode enables you to scan multiple batches of originals with different copy settings and print them as one document.

You can set copy settings (for example, the Job Separator and Page Numbering modes) for the combined document. You can also store the combined document in a User Inbox.


Remark
  • You can use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document. You cannot use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for each batch of originals.
  • If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.
  • You cannot make an Interrupt copy while copying with the Job Block Combination mode.
  • You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Standard Settings.
  • You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.
  • You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.
  • The maximum number of batches of originals you can combine as one document is 32.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Job Block Combination].
  1. Specify the copy settings for the combined document → press [OK].

If you select special features before setting the Job Block Combination mode, the selected special features will be retained for the combined document.

  • If you selected [Use Inbox Document], you can press [OK] only if you press [Print] for the front cover and/or back cover.
  • If you want to set sheet insertions in the combined document, set them in step 6.
  1. For each batch of originals, specify the copy settings → press (Start).

If you have set two or more batches of originals, you can press [Recall Last Settings] to cancel the settings for the previous batch of originals.

  • If you selected a document stored in a User Inbox, you cannot scan the document to use for the cover. Only scan the document to use for the main document.
  1. Check the settings on the Scan screen.

You can change or specify the 2-Sided Original, Original Type, or Copy Exposure mode before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches).

If you want to continue to scan another batch of originals without changing the copy settings, place your originals and press (Start).

If you want to rescan or cancel the current batch of originals, press [Clear/Re-enter This Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

If you want to change the copy modes and scan another batch of originals, press [Next Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

  1. When you have finished scanning all of your originals, press [Conf./Combine All Blocks].

You can also press [Conf.Blocks] in step 3 to proceed to step 6.

  1. Check the copy settings for the combined document and each batch.

To check the copy settings for the combined document, press [Set. Conf. (Overall)].

To select all of the batches of originals, press [Select All]. However, if a batch of originals is already selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

To add another batch, press [Add Originals] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

If you want to select a document in an inbox to add as a batch, press [Add User Inbox Doc.] → select the document in a User Inbox.

  • Select the batches of originals in the order in which you want to combine them.
  • To view the detailed information of a batch of originals, select the batch of originals → press [Details].
  • Selecting [Edit Menu] enables you to edit each batch.

Selecting [View Page] enables you to preview images.

Selecting [Page Erase] enables you to erase pages from a batch using [Erase Single Page] or [Erase Pages Consecutively].

Selecting [Erase Block] enables you to erase a batch of originals.

  • To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals or the combined document, press [Sample Print].

To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals, press [Sample Set of Selected Block].

To make a sample print of the combined document, press [Sample Set of Combined Job].

  • To use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document, press [Cover/Sheet Insertion].

For instructions on using the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode, see "Cover/Sheet Insertion."

  • To change the number of copies, enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 9,999) using - (numeric keys).
  • The selected batches are numbered and printed in the specified order.
  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the batch of originals again.
  • To cancel all batches, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)
  1. Press [Start Print].

  • Press [Print/Store].

The combined document will be stored in the selected User Inbox at the same time as printing.

To store the combined document without printing, press [Store and Finish].


  • Press [Store].
  • You can adjust the exposure during printing. However, you cannot adjust the exposure during printing if the Secure Watermark mode is set for the combined document.
  • To cancel the Job Block Combination mode with other copy modes, press [Cancel Combination].
  • To return to step 3, press (Reset).


Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox

This mode enables you to store scanned originals in a User Inbox from the Regular Copy Basic Features screen. The copy settings are stored with the document. You can also make copies of the scanned originals while storing them in the User Inbox.


Remark
  • When you press (Stop) while copying in the Store In User Inbox (Copy upon Storing) mode, the job is not paused, but canceled.
  • You cannot store documents in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox.

  1. Place your originals → press [Special Features] → [Store In User Inbox].
  1. Select the User Inbox number → press [OK].


  • Press [Document Name] → enter a name for the document → press [OK].
  • If you store a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document was scanned. For example, if a document is stored at 1:35 (PM), 41 seconds, on January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.

  • Press [Copy upon Storing].

To store the scanned originals without copying them, deselect [Copy upon Storing] to clear the check mark.



Recalling Previous Copy Jobs

You can recall the three most recent copy jobs and make copies using these settings.


Remark
  • The machine considers any one of the following operations a copy job:
  • When copy settings, such as the copy ratio, number of copies, and copy exposure, are specified and then, the control panel power switch, (Start), or (Reset) is pressed
  • If and when the Auto Clear mode activates after copy settings are specified
  • If you recall copy settings stored in Mode Memory
    Therefore, if you make settings but do not press the control panel power switch, (Start), or (Reset), and the Auto Clear mode does not activate, the settings you have made are not stored memory for recall by pressing [Recall].
  • You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.
  • The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.
  • Identical copy settings are stored only once in Recall memory.
  • Even if a remote copy printer is stored in Recall mode, and the main power of this machine or the remote copy printer is turned OFF and ON again, the stored settings change to standard Local Print settings. To use the stored remote copy printer, confirm that the remote copy printer is ON, update the remote copy printer information after the specified time period you set in Startup Time Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and set the Recall mode. (See "Network" or "Specifying the Remote Copy Printer Settings.")
  • Once stored, the last three copy jobs are kept in memory even if the power is turned OFF.

  1. Place your original → press [Special Features] → [Recall].
  1. Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].

  1. Verify the settings → press [OK].
  • You can change the recalled copy settings before making copies.


Memory Keys

You can set any possible combination of copy settings, and then store them in a memory key. There are nine memory keys, and they can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for storing frequently used copy settings.


Remark
  • Even if a remote copy printer is stored in Memory Key mode, and the main power of this machine or the remote copy printer is turned OFF and ON again, the stored settings change to standard Local Print settings. To use the stored remote copy printer, confirm that the remote copy printer is ON, update the remote copy printer information after the specified time period you set in Startup Time Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and set the Memory Key mode. (See "Network" or "Specifying the Remote Copy Printer Settings.")
  • The copy settings stored in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.


Storing Copy Settings

Remark
  • You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.

  1. Specify the copy settings on the Copy Basic Features screen and/or Special Features screen.
  1. Press [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) for storing the settings → press [Register].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings. Press [Yes].

  1. Press [Cancel].
  • You can assign a name to the memory key by pressing [Register Name].


Naming a Memory Key

  1. Press [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) to name → press [Register Name].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default M1 to M9).
  1. Press [Cancel].


Recalling Copy Settings

  1. Press [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select the key containing the copy settings that you want to recall.

  1. Verify the settings → press [OK].

If you select a key that does not have settings stored in it, [OK] is grayed out and you cannot press it. You can select another key that has copy settings stored in it, or press [Cancel].

  • Recalling settings from memory cancels the current settings.
  • You can make changes to the recalled settings.
  • If you press another key, the settings stored in that key are recalled.


Erasing Copy Settings

  1. Press [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select the key containing the copy settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Cancel].


Switching to the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

You can switch the Regular Copy Basic Features screen to the Express Copy Basic Features screen. Press [Express Copy] to switch to the Express Copy Basic Features screen. To return to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, press [Copy].


Remark
  • By default, the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or after the Auto Clear mode initiates, is the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.
  • After changing the copy settings, even if you switch to the Express Copy Basic Features screen from the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, or vice versa, the copy settings will be retained.
  • If you press (Reset) on the Express Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns to the Express Copy Basic Features screen (Standard mode). If you press (Reset) on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, the display returns to the Regular Copy Basic Features screen (Standard mode).
  • You can set to display only the [Copy] function key, only [Express Copy] function key, or both [Copy] and [Express Copy] function keys. (See "Additional Functions.")


Various Features of the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

The following is an explanation of the keys displayed on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. For detailed explanations of the functions of these keys, see the related chapters in this manual.


Remark
  • The Special Features modes displayed on the Express Copy Basic Features screen are displayed on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen by pressing [Special Features].

This screen enables you to set basic copying modes. You can adjust the exposure, set basic copying modes such as the Collate mode, and Special Features modes such as Mode Memory and the Recall modes.


1 Adjusting Exposure, Automatic Adjustment of Exposure
You can adjust the copy exposure. (See "Adjusting Copy Exposure.")
2 Image Quality
You can adjust image quality to the level best suited for the quality of text or photo originals. (See "Selecting Image Quality.")
3 Copy Ratio
You can set the machine to select the copy ratio automatically, or you can manually specify the copy ratio for a copy job. (See "Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen.")
4 Paper Select
You can set the machine to select the paper size. (See "Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select).")
5 2-Sided
This mode enables you to make two-sided copies from one-sided originals or one-sided copies from two-sided originals. (See "Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen.")
6 Finishing
The Finishing mode can be selected to collate copies in various ways, either by pages or copy sets. (See "Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen.")
7 Standard Key Settings
You can register copy modes that you have specified as Standard Keys. This key is a shortcut key to Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen in Copy Settings from the Additional Functions screen. (See "Setting Standard Keys.")
8 Interrupt Mode
The Interrupt mode enables you to interrupt a reserved or current job long enough to make higher priority copies. (See "Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode).")
9 Sample Set
This mode enables you to check the copy result before making multiple copies. (See "Sample Set.")
10 Others
You can set copy modes other than Scan Originals, Book/Page Edit/Shift, Process/Layout, and Image Adjustment. (See "Making Copies with Job Done Notice (Others).")
11 Image Adjustment
You can make copies of original images with a sharper or softer contrast. (See "Image Adjustment Settings.")
12 Process/Layout
You can process original images and change the layout of the originals. (See "Process/Layout Settings.")
13 Book/Page/Edit/Shift
You can make booklets, add page numbers, and set finishing modes for scanned images. (See "Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings.")
14 Scan Originals
You can make various settings for the scanning of bound originals and different-sized originals. (See "Scan Originals Settings.")
15 Recall
This function enables you to recall the three most recently performed copy settings, and make copies using those settings. (See "Recalling a Previous Copy Setting (Recall).")
16 Mode Memory
You can store any possible combination of Copy functions. A memory key can be named and can hold up to nine settings. (See "Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen.")


Operating the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

This section describes cautions to take when making a copy using the Express Copy Basic Features screen.

  • Pop-up displays on the Express Copy Basic Features screen

Pop-up displays appear on the Express Copy Basic Features screen when you press certain keys. Press [] or any point outside the pop-up display to close the pop-up displays.
Example: The pop-up display which appears when [Enlarge] is pressed.

  • Grayed Out Keys

Keys which are grayed out cannot be set. [Option] is only available when there are optional settings for a copy mode you have selected. Keys for modes which cannot be used in combination with a selected copy mode are also grayed out.
Example: When [Option] becomes available after you press [12-Sided].

  • Combinations of Copy Modes

Some copy modes can be used in combination with other copy modes. Depending on the copy modes you have selected, some copy modes which are not selected may be displayed with a []. You cannot select these copy modes in combination with the currently selected copy modes.
Example: The display of the Different Size Originals key when the 2-Page Separation mode is set.



Making a Copy With the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

This section explains the basic procedure for making a copy with the Express Copy Basic Features screen.


Remark


Adjusting Copy Exposure

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Manual Exposure Adjustment."


  1. Press [], [] or [Auto Density] to adjust the copy exposure.

Press [] and [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or to the right to make the exposure darker.



Selecting Image Quality

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Exposure and Original Type Settings."


Remark
  • If you make copies of an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, moiré or screen clash may occur. If this happens, you can soften this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness).")

  1. Select the image quality ([Text], [Text/Photo], or [Photo]).

If Photo Mode in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', you can select [Printed Image]. (See "Setting the Photo Mode for the Copying Function.")



Specifying the Copy Ratio by Percentage (Zoom by Percentage)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Zoom by Percentage."


  1. Set the copy ratio by pressing [-] or [+].

To return the copy ratio to 100%, press [1:1].

You can also use the numeric keys on the pop-up display to enter values.



Enlarging/Reducing Originals to a Standard Size (Preset Zoom)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Preset Zoom."


Remark
  • Place your originals horizontally in the following cases:
  • If you are enlarging A4 originals to A3 or B4
  • If you are enlarging B5 originals to B4
  • If you are enlarging A5 originals to A3 (when the original is placed on the platen glass)
  • If you are reducing A3 or B4 originals to A4 or B5 with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'Off', place A4R or B5R size paper in a paper drawer, or stack bypass.

  1. To reduce, select a preset reduction ratio. To enlarge, select a preset enlargement ratio.

  1. Select the copy ratio.


Automatically Setting the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Auto Zoom)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Auto Zoom."


Remark
  • You cannot copy highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto Zoom mode. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage modes.
  • To use the Auto Zoom mode, your originals must conform to a standard paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, or A6R. (You can place A6R originals only on the platen glass.)

  1. Press [Auto].

  • If you set [Auto], you have to select a paper size manually. If you do not select a paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to match the size of paper loaded in paper drawer 1.


Slightly Reducing Images to Prevent the Original Periphery from Being Trimmed (Entire Image)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Entire Image."


  1. Press [Entire Image].



Calculating the Copy Ratio Based on the Original and Copy Paper Sizes (Zoom Program)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Reducing/Enlarging Using the Original and Copy Sizes."


Remark

  1. Press [Other Ratio Settings] → [Zoom Program].

  1. Press [Zoom] or [XY Zoom].

  • Press [Original Size] → enter the original size → press [Copy Size] → enter the copy size.

If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message appears telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25%. If it is more than 400%, a message appears telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400%.


  • Press [X] (horizontal direction) and [Y] (vertical direction) for both the original size and the copy size → enter each value for X and Y.

If the zoom ratio is less than 25%, a message appears telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 25%. If it is more than 400%, a message appears telling you that the ratio will be adjusted to 400%.


  1. Press [Done].


Enlarging/Reducing Originals with Copy Ratios Set Independently for the X and Y Axes (XY Zoom)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Setting the X and Y Axes Independently."


Remark
  • You cannot enlarge/reduce highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, in the Auto XY Zoom mode. To make such copies, specify the copy ratio.
  • If you set the Auto XY Zoom mode, select the paper size using the Manual Paper Selection mode. If you do not select a paper size, Paper Drawer 1 is automatically selected and the copy ratio is set to match the size of the paper loaded in that drawer.
  • If you set the copy ratio in the Auto XY Zoom mode, Auto Orientation is not performed.

  1. Press [Other Ratio Settings] → [XY Zoom].

  1. Press [X] (horizontal axis) or [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.

Press [Auto XY Zoom] to set the copy ratios automatically.

  1. Press [Done].
  • If you set [Auto XY Zoom], you have to select a paper size manually. If you do not select a paper size, the copy ratio is automatically set to match the paper size loaded in paper drawer 1.


Selecting the Copy Paper Size (Paper Select)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Paper Selection."


Remark
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.

  1. Select the paper source.

The paper sizes/types are indicated by icons on the touch panel display, in the order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers (Manual Paper Selection).

Press [Auto] to set the machine to automatically select the copy paper size.

To select the stack bypass for the current job, or to reserve the stack bypass for a reserved job, select [Stack Bypass Settings].

  • The following types of originals cannot be copied by using Automatic Paper Selection. Copy these using Manual Paper Selection:
  • Nonstandard sized originals
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • A6 or smaller originals
  • A5 or A5R originals that are placed on the platen glass

  • Press [All].
  • Press [Stack Bypass Settings].
  • Select the paper size → press [Next].
  • If you select a nonstandard size paper, the Auto Zoom, Entire Image, Auto XY Zoom, Finishing, 12-Sided, 22-Sided, Book2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, Front Cover/Back Cover, Paper Insertion, Image Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Shift, Image Repeat, Form Composition, Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, Print Date, Secure Watermark, Job Block Combination, or Store In User Inbox mode cannot be specified.
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • If you select [Envelope], the Finishing, 12-Sided, 22-Sided, Book2-Sided, 2-Page Separation, Front Cover, Back Cover, Paper Insertion, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Combination, Form Composition, or Job Block Combination mode cannot be specified.
  • When placing paper other than a standard size, press [Free Size].
  • To copy on envelopes, press [Envelope] → select the envelope type → press [OK].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].
  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • [Register/Set] is a shortcut key to Register Paper Type in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).



Making Two-Sided Copies from One-Sided Originals (1 to 2-Sided)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "1 to 2-Sided."


Remark
  • You may not be able to make two-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
  • Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R, and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back side of the original is copied upside down.

  1. Press [12-Sided] → [Option].

  1. Select the type of two-sided orientation.


Making Two-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 2-Sided)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "2 to 2-Sided."


Remark
  • You may not be able to make 2-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
  • 22-Sided copying is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).

  1. Press [22-Sided] → [Option].

  1. Select the type of two-sided orientation for both the original and the copy.


Making One-Sided Copies from Two-Sided Originals (2 to 1-Sided)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "2 to 1-Sided."


Remark
  • You may not be able to make two-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
  • 21-Sided copying is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Make sure to place originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R, and A5R, horizontally. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of the copies will be printed upside down.

  1. Press [21-Sided] → [Option].

  1. Select the orientation of the originals.


Making Two-Sided Copies from Facing Pages in a Book (Book to 2-Sided)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Book to 2-Sided."


Remark
  • You may not be able to make two-sided copies on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
  • When using this feature, select A4 or B5-size paper.
  • When copying with the Front/Back 2-Sided mode, the front side of the first two-sided page and the back side of the last two-sided page, are left blank. (The machine's counter does not count the blank pages as copies.)
  • Place the originals on the platen glass. You cannot use the Book 2-sided mode when the original is placed in the feeder.

  1. Press [Book2-Sided] → select the layout type of original.



Collating Copies into Sets in Page Order (Collate)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Page Order (Collate)."


Remark
  • The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Free Size], [Envelopes], [Transparencies], [Tracing Paper], or [Labels] is selected as the paper type.

  1. Press [Collate].

Press [Collate Not Set] if you do not want to collate the output.

If you want the copies slightly offset vertically in the output tray, press [Offset].

If you want hole punches made, press [Hole Punch].

If you want the copies to be output in alternating directions, press [Rotate].

  • [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
  • When the available paper size is selected manually
  • When the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
  • The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate mode, make sure to load only paper that can be rotated. Otherwise, the output will not be rotated.
  • If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.


Collating Copies into Groups of the Same Page (Group)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Same Page (Group)."


Remark
  • The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Free Size], [Envelopes], [Transparencies], [Tracing Paper], or [Labels] is selected as the paper type.

  1. Press [Group].

Press [Collate Not Set] if you do not want to collate the output.

If you want the copies slightly offset vertically in the output tray, press [Offset].

If you want hole punches made, press [Hole Punch].

If you want the copies to be output in alternating directions, press [Rotate].

  • [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
  • When the available paper size is selected manually
  • When the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
  • The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate mode, make sure to load only paper that can be rotated. Otherwise, the output will not be rotated.
  • If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.


Collating Pages and Stapling (Staple)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Page Order (Staple)."


Remark
  • The Finishing modes cannot be set if [Free Size], [Envelopes], [Transparencies], [Tracing Paper], or [Labels] is selected as the paper type.
  • If the optional Finisher-S1 is attached, you cannot select the stapling position. For more information on stapling positions, see "Optional Equipment."
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the paper type and the number of sheets.
  • The Staple mode can be set only if an optional finisher is attached.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.

  1. Press [Staple].

Press [Collate Not Set] if you do not want to collate the output.

If you want hole punches made, press [Hole Punch].

  1. Select the type of staple ([Corner], [Double], or [Saddle Stitch]) and the stapling position.
  • Specify the Saddle Stitch.
  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper source to use for the main document → press [Done].

If you selected the paper to use for the main document from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size and press [Next] → select the paper type and press [OK] → press [Done]

  • If you want to add a cover, press [Add Cover].

Select the paper source to use for the cover and whether to print on the cover → press [OK].

If you selected the paper to use for the cover from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper type → press [Done].

  • The paper used for the cover page must be the same size as the other pages in your document.
  • If you select [No] for <Select whether to print on covers.>, [Heavy] can be selected.
  • Only 64 to 80 g/m² paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m² paper can be used for the cover page.


Setting Standard Keys

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Setting the Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic Features Screen."


  1. Press [Register frequently used keys.].

  1. Select the number of Standard Keys that are displayed on the Express Copy Basic Features screen.
[Up to 5 Set Keys]: Displaying maximum 5 Standard Keys.
[Up to 10 Set Keys]: Displaying maximum 10 Standard Keys.
  1. Select the Standard Key to be stored → press [Settings].
  1. Display the group of functions to be stored as Standard Keys by pressing [] or [] → select the desired function.
  1. Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard Key → press [OK].

The five stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.

The 10 stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.



Interrupting the Current Job to Make Priority Copies (Interrupt Mode)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Interrupt Mode."


  1. Press [Interrupt].

  1. Place your originals → select the desired copy modes.


Sample Set

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Sample Set."


Remark
  • [Sample Set] appears only if you set to make multiple copies of your original in the Collate, Offset Collate, Rotate Collate, Staple, Front Cover/Back Cover, Paper Insertion, Booklet, or Transparency Interleaving mode. [Sample Set] does not appear if the Group or Offset Group mode is set.

  1. Place your originals → select the desired copy modes → press [Sample Set].

  1. Press (Start).
  1. Check the sample set → select [Start Print], [Cancel], or [Change Settings].

To make the remaining copies, press [Start Print].

To cancel copying, press [Cancel].

To change the copy settings, press [Change Settings] → change the necessary settings → press [Done].

  • To change the number of copies, use - and (Clear) to clear your entry.

If you print one sample set and then change the settings, the machine will print from the first set with the new settings.

If you want to check the changes that you have made, press [Sample Set] arrow repeat the procedure from step 2.



Recalling a Previous Copy Setting (Recall)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Recalling Previous Copy Jobs."


Remark
  • One copy job is defined by setting the number of copies, exposure, zoom, etc., and by pressing the control panel power switch, (Start) or (Reset), when the Auto Clear function is 'On', or by calling up a copy job stored in memory. If one of these keys was not pressed, or if the Auto Clear function is not active, calling up a copy job by pressing [Recall] is not possible.
  • You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.
  • The Standard mode cannot be recalled or stored.
  • Identical copy modes that are stored, are counted as one setting.
  • Even if a remote copy printer is stored in Recall mode, and the main power of this machine or the remote copy printer is turned OFF and ON again, the stored settings change to standard Local Print settings. To use the stored remote copy printer, confirm that the remote copy printer is ON, update the remote copy printer information after the specified time period you set in Startup Time Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and set the Recall mode. (See "Network" or "Specifying the Remote Copy Printer Settings.")

  1. Press [Recall].

  1. Select either [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].


Registering Frequently Used Copy Settings in Memory (Mode Memory)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Storing Copy Settings."


Remark
  • Even if a remote copy printer is stored in Memory Key mode, and the main power of this machine or the remote copy printer is turned OFF and ON again, the stored settings change to standard Local Print settings. To use the stored remote copy printer, confirm that the remote copy printer is ON, update the remote copy printer information after the specified time period you set in Startup Time Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and set the Memory Key mode. (See "Network" or "Specifying the Remote Copy Printer Settings.")


Storing Copy Settings

Remark
  • You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.

  1. Specify the copy settings to register on the Express Copy Functions screen → press [Mode Memory].

  1. Press [Register].
  1. Select a memory key ([M1] to [M9]) to store a desired mode → press [Register].

  • Press [Yes], when the confirmation message appears asking you to store the mode.

The memory key registering the copy mode is highlighted, and the registered settings are displayed.


  • Press [Yes], when the confirmation message appears asking you to overwrite the mode.

The memory key registering the copy mode is highlighted, and the registered settings are displayed.


  1. Press [Done].


Registering a Memory Key Name

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Naming a Memory Key."


  1. On the Mode Memory screen, press [Register].
  1. Select a memory key ([M1] to [M9]) to give a name to → press [Register Name].
  1. Enter the new name → press [OK].
  1. Press [Done].


Recalling a Copy Mode

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Recalling Copy Settings."


  1. Press [Mode Memory] → select a memory key that registers the copy settings you want to use.



Erasing a Copy Mode

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Erasing Copy Settings."


  1. Press [Mode Memory] → [Register].

  1. Select a memory key to be erased → press [Erase].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Scan Originals Settings

This section describes the functions that you can use from [Scan Originals] on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to scan facing pages of a book or bound original, print them in two separate pages, or store them as two separate pages with the Two-page Separation mode, and copy different size originals together as one group with the Different Size originals mode, and so on. Press [Scan Originals] to set these modes.


Remark
  • To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

Modes in [Scan Originals]


1 2-Page Separation
This mode enables you to copy facing pages in a book or magazine onto separate sheets of paper. (See "Copying Facing Pages in a Book on Two Separate Sheets of Paper (2-Page Separation).")
2 Job Build
This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be set at once by dividing them into multiple batches. (See "Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build).")
3 Different Size Originals
This mode enables you to copy different-size originals, such as A3 and A4, together as one group by setting them in the feeder. (See "Feeding Different-Sized Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals).")
4 Scan Image Check
This mode enables you to confirm scanned images page by page while copying them when you scan originals in succession on the platen glass. (See "Copying while Verifying Scanned Images (Scan Image Check).")


Copying Facing Pages in a Book on Two Separate Sheets of Paper (2-Page Separation)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "2-Page Separation."


Remark
  • Place the original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when the original is placed in the feeder.

  1. Press [Scan Originals] → [2-Page Separation].

  1. Press [Set].
  1. Press [Done].


Copying Separately-Set Originals (Job Build)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Job Build."


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • You cannot change the copy settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary copy settings beforehand, according to the type of originals and the desired result.
  • If you place the originals in the feeder, remove each original from the original output area when scanning is complete.
  • When copying, you can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the number of copies, 2-Sided Original mode, original type, copy exposure. However, if you specify the Image Combination mode with the Job Build mode, you cannot change the original type and copy exposure.
  • If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.

  1. Press [Scan Originals] → [Job Build].

  1. Press [Set].
  1. Press [Done].


Feeding Different-Sized Originals Together in the Feeder (Different Size Originals)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Different Size Originals."


Remark
  • All originals placed together in the feeder must be the same weight (paper type).
  • Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths.
  • Set different size originals with different widths and lengths in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.
  • A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 and B5, B5 and A5
  • If you place originals with different widths in the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the platen glass. As a result, the images may be scanned and copied as slanted.
  • If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.
  • Stapling cannot be performed if you place originals with different widths.

  1. Press [Scan Originals] → [Different Size Originals].

  1. Select the type of originals.
  1. Press [Done].


Copying while Verifying Scanned Images (Scan Image Check)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Scan Image Check."


Remark
  • When 12-Sided is set, two-sided copying is not performed and the machine copies each original at a time.
  • The originals must be set on the platen glass. You cannot copy using Scan Image Check mode with the originals set in the feeder.

  1. Press [Scan Originals] → [Scan Image Check].

  1. Press [Set].
  1. Press [Done].


Book/Page Edit/Shift Settings

This section describes the functions that you can use from [Book/Page Edit/Shift] on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to make copies for use as a booklet with the Booklet mode, make copies with the original image shifted with the Shift mode, and so on. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] to set these modes.


Remark
  • The Book/Page Edit/Shift screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

Modes in [Book/Page Edit/Shift]


1 Front Cover/Back Cover
This mode enables you to program the machine to automatically add front and back covers using a different type of paper stock from what is used for the main text. (See "Making a Copy with Front and Back Covers.")
2 Paper Insertion
This mode enables you to program the machine to automatically add sheet insertions or chapter pages using a different type of paper stock from what is used for the main text. (See "Making a Copy with Inserted Sheets.")
3 Booklet
This mode enables you to copy one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the copies are made into a booklet. (See "Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet).")
4 Page Numbering
Documents can be copied with page numbers (numbers only, numbers surrounded by hyphens, or chapter numbers). (See "Page Numbering.")
5 Copy Set Numbering
This mode enables you to copy a document with a five digit serial number in the background on each page. (See "Copy Set Numbering.")
6 Watermark
This mode enables you to copy a watermark and user-defined text onto the output. (See "Watermark.")
7 Print Date
This mode enable you to copy the date onto the output. (See "Print Date.")
8 Shift
This mode enables you to make copies with the entire image shifted to the center or a corner. (See "Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted (Shift).")
9 Margin
This mode enables you to make copies with the entire original image shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top, or bottom to create a margin on the copies. Use this mode when you want the copies placed in a ring binder. (See "Making Copies with Margins (Margin).")


Adding Front and Back Covers, Sheet Insertions, and Chapter Pages to Copy Sets (Front Cover/Back Cover) (Paper Insertion)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Cover/Sheet Insertion."


Remark
  • If you select the Staple mode when an optional finisher is attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.


Making a Copy with Front and Back Covers

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Front Cover/Back Cover].

  1. Select the front cover and/or back cover.
  • Select the desired Front Cover/Back Cover feature.
  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper source.
  • Select the same sized paper for [Front Cover] and [Back Cover]. If you set [Paper Insertion], select the same sized paper as the front and back covers.
  • When you select [Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Paper Insertion], if the paper size for one feature is changed to another size, the other two features are changed. However, you may change the paper drawer for one feature without affecting the others, as long as the paper size is the same.
  • Select whether to copy on the front cover and/or back cover.
  1. Press [Done].


Making a Copy with Inserted Sheets

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Paper Insertion].

  1. Select the desired paper insertion feature ([Sheet Insertion] or [Chapter Page]) → press [Add].

You cannot select [Sheet Insertion] and [Chapter Page] at the same time.

To check/change a specific setting, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired page → select the page → press [Edit].

To erase a specific setting, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired page → select the page → press [Erase].

  1. Enter the page number where you want sheet insertions or chapter pages to be inserted.
  • Enter the page number where you want the sheet insertion added using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper source.
  • Select the same sized paper for [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]). If you set [Paper Insertion], select the same sized paper as the front and back covers.
  • When you select [Front Cover], [Back Cover], [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]), if the paper size for one feature is changed to another size, the other two features are changed. However, you may change the paper drawer for one feature without affecting the others, as long as the paper size is the same.
  • Select whether to print on the front side, back side, or both sides of the paper.

If you set [Chapter Page], you cannot set the side of paper to print on.

  • Press [OK].
  • You cannot insert the sheet insertion and chapter page on the first page. Set their positions starting from the second page.
  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies for Use as a Booklet (Booklet)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Booklet Mode."


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Saddle stitching is not performed when there is only one sheet.
  • Saddle stitching can be performed only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the paper type and the number of sheets.
  • Make sure to place originals with a vertical (portrait) orientation vertically. If these originals are placed horizontally, the even numbered pages will be printed upside down.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Booklet].

  1. Press [Set] → specify each setting.
  • Press [Select Original Size] → set the size of the original to scan.
  • If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] → select the type of two-sided original → press [OK].
  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper source to use for the main document → press [Done].

If you selected the paper to use for the main document from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size and press [Next] → select the paper type and press [OK] → press [Done]

  • If you want to add a cover, press [Add Cover].

Select the paper source to use for the cover and whether to print on the cover → press [OK].

If you selected the paper to use for the cover from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper type → press [Done].

  • The paper used for the cover page must be the same paper size as that which is used for copying the main document.
  • If you select [Print] for only <Front Inside Cover> and/or <Back Inside Cover>, [Heavy] can be selected.
  • Only 64 to 80 g/m² paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m² paper can be used for the cover page.
  • Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet.
  • If you select [Divided Booklet], enter the number of sheets that you want to divide by pressing [-] or [+] → press [OK].
  • If the printing position of the image is out of place, and you want to set the creep (displacement) correction, press [Creep Correct] → select [Auto] or [Manual] → press [OK] → [OK].

If you select [Manual], press [] or [] to adjust the correction width.

  1. Set the Booklet Tray guide to match the paper size.

  • Make sure to set the Booklet Tray guide correctly to match the paper size. Setting the Booklet Tray guide incorrectly may result in a paper jam.
  1. Press [Done].


Page and Copy Set Numbering (Page Numbering) (Copy Set Numbering)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Page and Copy Set Numbering."


Remark
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Page Numbering or Copy Set Numbering mode, depending on the scanned original and combination of copy modes.


Page Numbering

  1. Press [Booklet/Page Edit/Shift] → [Page Numbering].

  1. Select the type of numbering ([Numbers Only], [Numbers with Hyphens], [Numbered Chapters], or [Total Page Numbering]) → specify each setting.
  • Select the orientation and the position of the page numbers.
  • Press [Option], you can select the position of the page number for the backside and whether to count the inserted sheets.
  • If you select [Number of Digits], enter the size of page number by pressing [-] or [+] → press [OK].
  • If you select [Add Character], set the character and position for page numbering → press [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from Additional Functions beforehand.

  • If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] → press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [Done].
  • Set the page number to start numbering and size of the page numbers.

If you want to insert chapter numbers along with page numbers, specify the starting chapter number on the left, and the starting page number on the right (1 to 9,999).

If you want to insert the total page number along with page numbers, specify to have the page numbers start on the left side (1 to 9,999), and the total page number starts on the right side (1 to 20,000). To set the total page number automatically, press [Auto].

  1. Press [Done].


Copy Set Numbering

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Copy Set Numbering].

  1. Press [Set] → specify each setting.
  • Select the orientation and print position of the copy set numbers.
  • If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] → press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [Done].
  • Set the starting page number and size of the page numbers.
  1. Press [Done].


Printing a Watermark and Date (Watermark/Print Date)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Printing a Watermark and Date."


Remark
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Watermark mode, depending on the scanned original and combination of copy modes.


Watermark

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Watermark].

  1. Press [Set] → specify each settings.
  • Set the watermark orientation and position.
  • Select the text size and the desired preset watermark.
  • If you want to create a user-defined watermark, press [Create] from the Watermark Type drop-down list → press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • Press [Print Type] → select the desired print type.

You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is selected, you can adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].

  • ï¼»Press [Option] → set the page to print on and the position to print on the back side of the paper.
  • If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] → press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [Done].
  1. Press [Done].


Print Date

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Print Date].

  1. Press [Set] → specify each setting.
  • Set the number orientation and position.
  • Select the number size and date format.
  • Specify the date.
  • Press [Print Type] → select the desired printing type.

You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].

  • If you want to adjust the print position, press [Adjust Position] → press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [Done].
  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted (Shift)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Shifting the Original Image."


Remark
  • If [Center/Corner Shift] is selected, and the original and the copy paper are the same size and the copy ratio is set at 100%, the image of the original is not shifted.
  • If you use the numeric keys to enter the shift position, the original image may be partially cut off on the copy, depending on the size of the original Image, the size of the copy paper, and the amount of shift specified.


Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted to the Centre or a Corner

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Shift].

  1. Press [Center/Corner Shift] → select the shift direction with an arrow key.

The shift direction is the direction that you want the original image moved to, if you visualize the original image as being face up and appearing in the center of the copy image.

  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies with the Original Image Shifted Using the Numeric Keys

Remark

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Shift].

  1. Press [No. Key Entry].
  1. Press [Settings] under <Front Side> or <Back Side> → select the shift direction → enter the desired value using - (numeric keys).
  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies with Margins (Margin)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Margin Mode."


Remark
  • When the Margin mode is set, the entire original image is shifted to the left, right, top, or bottom by a selected width, then copied. When copying an original image that extends to the edge of the sheet, part of that image will be cut off.

  1. Press [Book/Page Edit/Shift] → [Margin].

  1. Select the desired margin type → set the margin width.

Press [-] or [+] to set the margin width (-50 mm to +50 mm) of the front and back side of the paper.

  • If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying an original that already has margins, follow the instructions below:
  • 12-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for the back only.
  • 22-Sided:
You do not need to set the Margin mode. Proceed to make copies or prints in the usual way.
  • 21-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for the back only.
  • If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided modes together and copying an original that does not have a margin, follow the instructions below:
  • 12-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  • 22-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  • 21-Sided:
Set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  1. Press [Done].


Process/Layout Settings

This section describes the functions that you can use from [Process/Layout] on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to automatically reduce multiple originals to fit onto one side or both sides of a selected paper size with the Image Combination mode, erase shadows and lines that appear when copying (scanning) with the Frame Erase mode, and so on. Press [Process/Layout] to set these modes.


Remark
  • The Process/Layout screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

Modes in [Process/Layout]


1 Image Combination
This mode automatically reduces two, four, or eight originals, two-sided originals, or the facing pages of a book to fit onto one side or both sides of a selected paper size. (See "Reducing Two, Four, or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination).")
2 Form Composition
Form Composition is a function that superimposes an image (image form) previously scanned, registers it in the memory of the machine, and places it on the image of the original. (See "Composing Images (Form Composition).")
3 Secure Watermark
This mode enables you to embed hidden text in the background of copies. (See "Embedding Hidden Text in the Background.")
4 Image Repeat
You can repeatedly copy the image of an original in either the vertical or horizontal direction. (See "Making Copies by the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat).")
5 Frame Erase
This mode erases shadows and lines that appear when copying various types of originals. (See "Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase).")
6 Transparency Interleaving
Use this mode when copying onto transparencies fed from the stack bypass. The machine automatically interleaves a sheet of paper between each transparency. (See "Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving).")
7 Nega/Posi
This mode enables you to make copies of the original image by inverting the black and the white areas. (See "Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi).")
8 Mirror Image
This mode enables you to copy the image of the original as if it is reflected in a mirror or reversed. (See "Making Copies with the Original Image Reversed (Mirror Image).")


Reducing Two, Four, or Eight Originals to Fit on a Single Copy Sheet (Image Combination)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Image Combination."


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Originals copied using the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
  • Before scanning the next original (between jobs), you can set or change settings for the number of copy sets and 2-Sided Original mode.

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Image Combination].

  1. Specify each setting.
  • Select the desired image combination type ([2 on 1], [4 on 1], or [8 on 1]).
  • Press [Option] to select the order of the layout → select the image order.
  • Press [Select Original Size] → specify the original size.
  • Press [2-Sided Original] to scan two-sided originals → select the type of 2-sided originals.
  • Press [2-Sided Copy] to make two-sided copies → select the type of two-sided orientation.
  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper source.
  1. Press [Done].


Composing Images (Form Composition)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Composing Images."


Remark
  • If you use the Form Composition mode with the Cascade Copy mode, it is necessary to assign the same name to the stored image form in both this machine and the remote copy printer beforehand. If the assigned image form name in this machine is not set in the remote copy printer, the job is canceled. If multiple image forms with the same assigned name are stored in the remote copy printer, different image may be used for Form Composition.
  • To copy in the Form Composition mode, the Image form must be stored in the memory of the machine. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • The Form Composition mode can be used with other copy modes to process images. However, copy modes other than the Shift or Mirror Image mode are effective on the copied images, and not on the stored image forms.
  • Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the capacity of the hard disk.
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Form Composition mode, depending on the scanned original and image form.

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Form Composition].

  1. Select an image form to be superimposed over the original.

To check the images stored as forms, press [Check Print] to print a sample of the image.

If you press [Details], the detailed information of the image form is displayed.


  • Select the paper size → press [Start Print].

Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.


  1. Press [Done].


Embedding Hidden Text in the Background

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Embedding Hidden Text in the Background."


Remark
  • You cannot adjust the exposure during copying if the Secure Watermark mode is set.
  • The embedded hidden text may not appear as specified even if the copy with the Secure Watermark mode applied is copied, depending on the copy machine.
  • The Secure Watermark mode is available only if the optional Secure Watermark is activated.
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Secure Watermark mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Secure Watermark].

  1. Select the type of Secure Watermark (Watermark, Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, ID/User Name) → set the various items for the desired type of Secure Watermark.
  • If you want to create your own Secure Watermark, select [Create] from the Watermark Type drop-down list → press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • If you want to register your newly created Secure Watermark to be selected whenever necessary, press [Register] → enter the text to be registered.
  • Select the background pattern and size of the text.

To change the orientation of characters, press [Print Characters Vertically].

To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on colored Background].

  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies by the Original Image Repeated (Image Repeat)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Image Repeat."


  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Image Repeat].

  1. Press [Set] → set the number of times you want the image to repeat for both the horizontal and vertical directions.

Press [Auto] to set the number of times the image will repeat automatically. To make repeated images with the number of repeats automatically set, select the paper size. The original image is then copied so that the maximum number of images possible fits onto the selected paper size.

Press [-] or [+] to set the number of times the image will repeat manually.

If you want to specify the amount of space between repeated images, press [Margin Settings].

  • Depending on how many times you have manually set the image to repeat, some of the images may overlap.
  1. Press [Done].


Erasing Shadows and Frame Lines from Copies (Frame Erase)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Frame Erase."



Making Copies by Erasing the Frame around the Original (Original Frame Erase)

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Frame Erase].

  1. Press [Original Frame Erase] → select the original size → set the frame width area to erase by pressing [-] or [+].

The frame area is erased evenly (based on the value you set) around each edge of the original. To set different frame erase width values for the top, right, left, and bottom sides of the original independently, press [Adjust Each Dim.].

If you press [Adjust Each Dim.], select the frame erase values by pressing [-] or [+].

  • You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies by Erasing the Book Frame (Book Frame Erase)

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Frame Erase].

  1. Press [Book Frame Erase] → select the facing-page original size → press [Center] and [Sides] → set the frame width to erase by using [-] or [+].

The frame area to be erased is uniformly set for all sides of the original. To set the value independently for all sides of the original, press [Adjust Each Dim.].

If you select [Adjust Each Dim.], press [Top], [Left], [Center], [Right], and [Bottom] to set the frame width to erase by using [-] or [+].

  • You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies by Erasing Binding Holes (Binding Erase)

Remark
  • Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
  • When using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4 mm.

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Frame Erase].

  • Place your original on the platen glass.
  1. Press [Binding Erase] → designate the area of the binding holes on the original.

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize the original as being face up.

  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies with Sheets of Paper Interleaved between Transparencies (Transparency Interleaving)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Transparency Interleaving."


Remark
  • Even if an optional finisher is attached, you cannot use any of the Finishing modes with the Transparency Interleaving mode.
  • Only A4 is available for the Transparency Interleaving mode.

  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Transparency Interleaving].

  1. Press [Set].
  1. Load transparencies into the stack bypass.

  1. Select the transparency size.
  • Make sure that transparencies are loaded into the selected paper source. Loading paper types other than transparencies may result in a paper jam.
  1. Specify the settings for the interleaf sheets.
  • Decide whether to copy on the interleaf sheet, or leave the interleaf sheet blank.
  • Press [Paper Source of Interleaf Sheet] → select the size of the interleaf sheets.
  1. Press [Done].


Inverting Original Images (Nega/Posi)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Inverting Images (Nega/Posi)."


  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Nega/Posi].

  1. Press [Set].
  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies with the Original Image Reversed (Mirror Image)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Mirror Image."


  1. Press [Process/Layout] → [Mirror Image].

  1. Press [Set].
  1. Press [Done].


Image Adjustment Settings

This section describes the functions that you can use from [Image Adjustment] on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to adjust the contrast of the image with the Sharpness mode. Press [Image Adjustment] to set the mode.


Remark
  • To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

Mode in [Image Adjustment]


1 Sharpness
This mode enables you to make copies of original images with a sharper contrast or a softer contrast. (See "Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness).")
2 Image Quality Adjustment
This mode enables you to make fine adjustments to the image quality of copies. (See "Adjusting the Image Quality (Image Quality Adjustment).")


Making Sharp Contrast Copies (Sharpness)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)."


  1. Press [Image Adjustment] → [Sharpness].

  1. Adjust the sharpness by pressing [Low] or [High].
  1. Press [Done].


Adjusting the Image Quality (Image Quality Adjustment)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Image Quality Adjustment."


Remark
  • If [A] (Auto) is selected as the copy exposure on the Copy Basic Features screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic copy exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the copy exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled and the automatic exposure is used instead.


Remove Background

  1. Press [Image Adjustment] → [Image Quality Adjustment].

  1. Press [Remove Background].

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, press [Fine Adj.].

  1. Press [Done].


Making Copies with Job Done Notice (Others)

This section describes the functions that you can use from [Others] on the Express Copy Basic Features screen. This screen enables you to specify the Job Block Combination, Store in User Inbox, and Job Done Notice modes. Press [Others] to set these modes.


Remark
  • To cancel the settings for each function, press [Do Not Set].

Modes in [Others]


1 Job Block Combination
This mode enables you to scan multiple batches of originals with different copy settings and print them as one document. (See "Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings (Job Block Combination).")
2 Store In User Inbox
This mode enables you to store scanned originals in a User Inbox from the Express Copy Basic Features screen. (See "Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox (Store In User Inbox).")
3 Job Done Notice
This feature enables you to send a <Job Done> notification to specified e-mail addresses when a copy job is complete. (See "E-mail Notification at the End of a Copy Job (Job Done Notice).")
4 Select Device to Output
If a remote copy printer is connected to a network, this machine and a remote copy printer can be used for copying. (See "Selecting an Output Device (Select Output Device).")

Remark
  • The Job Done Notice can be set only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated.


Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings (Job Block Combination)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Combining Multiple Batches of Originals with Different Copy Settings."


Remark
  • You can use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document. You cannot use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for each batch of originals.
  • If you use the Job Block Combination mode, the Job Build mode is automatically set for each batch of originals. You cannot use the Job Build mode for the combined document.
  • You cannot make an Interrupt copy while copying with the Job Block Combination mode.
  • You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Standard Settings.
  • You cannot store the Job Block Combination mode in Mode Memory.
  • You cannot recall the Job Block Combination mode.

  1. Press [Others] → [Job Block Combination].

  1. Press [Set] → specify the copy settings for the combined document → press [OK].

If you select special features before setting the Job Block Combination mode, the selected special features will be retained for the combined document.

For instructions on specifying copy settings and their available combinations, see "Combination of Functions Chart."

  1. For each batch of originals, specify the copy settings → press (Start).

For instructions on specifying copy settings and their available combinations, see "Combination of Functions Chart."

If you are scanning two or more batches of originals, press [Recall Last Setting] to return to the copy settings for the previous batch.

  1. Check the settings on the Scan screen.

You can change or specify the 2-Sided Original, Original Type or Copy Exposure mode before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches).

If you want to continue to scan another batch of originals without changing the copy settings, place your originals and press (Start).

If you want to rescan or cancel the current batch of originals, press [Clear/Re-enter This Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

If you want to change the copy modes and scan another batch of originals, press [Next Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

  1. When you have finished scanning all of your originals, press [Conf./Combine All Blocks].

You can also press [Conf.Blocks] in step 3 to proceed to step 6.

  1. Combine the Batches of documents.

To check the copy settings for the combined document, press [Set. Conf. (Overall)].

To select all of the batches of originals, press [Select All]. However, if a batch of originals is already selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

To add another batch, press [Add Block] and repeat the procedure from step 3.

  • Select the batches of originals in the order in which you want to combine them.
  • To view the detailed information of a batch of originals, select the batch of originals → press [Details].
  • To erase a batch of originals, select the batch of originals → press [Erase].
  • To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals or the combined document, press [Sample Print].

To make a sample print of a selected batch of originals, press [Sample Set of Selected Block].

To make a sample print of the combined document, press [Sample Set of Combined Job].

  • To use the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode for the combined document, press [Cover/Sheet Insertion].
  • To change the number of copies, enter the desired copy quantity (1 to 9,999).
  1. Press [Start Print].

  • Press [Print/Store].

To store the combined document without printing, press [Store and Finish].


  • Press [Store].


Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox (Store In User Inbox)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Storing Scanned Originals with Copy Settings in a User Inbox."


Remark
  • When you press (Stop) while copying in the Store In User Inbox mode and if the Store In User Inbox (Copy upon Storing) mode is not set, the job is not paused, but canceled.
  • You cannot store documents in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox.

  1. Press [Others] → [Store In User Inbox].

  1. Press [Set] → select the User Inbox number → press [OK].
  • If you want to name the document, press [Document Name] → enter a name for the document → press [OK].
  • If you want to make copies of the scanned originals while storing them in the User Inbox, press [Copy upon Storing] → [OK].

To store the scanned originals without copying them, press [Copy upon Storing] to clear the check mark.

  1. Press [Done].


E-mail Notification at the End of a Copy Job (Job Done Notice)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Job Done Notice."


Remark

  1. Press [Others] → [Job Done Notice].

  1. Select the destination to send the Job Done Notice.

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  1. Press [Done].


Selecting an Output Device (Select Output Device)

For instructions on this procedure using the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, see "Selecting an Output Device (Select Output Device)."


Remark
  • If you specify the Form Composition mode with the Cascade Copy mode, it is necessary to assign the same name to the stored image form in both this machine and the remote copy printer beforehand. If the assigned image form name in this machine is not set in the remote copy printer, the job is canceled.If multiple image forms with the same assigned name are stored in the remote copy printer, different images may be used for Form Composition.
  • If you turn the remote copy printer back ON or reattach the finisher, you need to refresh the settings of the remote copy printer in Register Remote Device in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Confirming a Remote Device.")
  • If <Use IPv4> in [IPv4 Settings] in [TCP/IP Settings] in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', you cannot register a remote copy printer. (See "Network.")
  • If you connect the machine directly to other remote copy printers using a crossover patch cord, you must configure the Ethernet driver as shown below. (See "Network.")
  • Auto Detect: Off
  • Communication Mode: Full Duplex
  • Ethernet Type: 100 Base-TX

  1. Press [Others] → [Select Device to Output].

  1. Select the output device.

  • Press [Cascade Copy] → select whether to perform error recovery.

If you press [Details], the detailed information for the selected printing destination is displayed.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: If an error occurs in either this machine or the remote copy printer, the remaining copy jobs are assigned to the machine which is operating normally.
[Off]: If an error occurs in either this machine or the remote copy printer, the remaining copy jobs are not assigned to the machine which is operating normally.
  • Error Recovery is performed only if the Finishing mode is set.

  1. Press [Done].


What Are Additional Functions?

Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.


Remark
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).

  1. Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.

  1. Select an Additional Functions setting.

  1. Press a mode key to specify its settings.

For an overview of all the settings you can change from the Additional Functions screen, see "Copy Settings Table."

  • The Copy Settings screen consist of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.

  1. Specify the desired mode → press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.


Customizing Copy Settings


Copy Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Copy Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


Additional Functions Available Settings Delivered
Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen Large*1: Four paper sources maximum
(Stack Bypass, Stack Bypass Settings,
1: Paper Drawer 1,
2: Paper Drawer 2,
3: Paper Drawer 3,
4: Paper Drawer 4,
5: Paper Deck-P1),
Small
No
Standard Key 1/2 Settings for Regular Screen All modes (No settings*1) No
Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen The number of the displayed Standard Keys: Up to 5 Set Keys*1/Up to 10 Set Keys
All modes (No settings*1)
No
Auto Collate*2 On*1/Off Yes
Auto Orientation On*1/Off Yes
Photo Mode On/Off*1 Yes
Standard Settings Store, Initialize No
Register Remote Device Move To Top, Store (Max 7 printers), Details, Erase No
Remote Device Transmission Timeout 5 to 30 seconds, 30 seconds*1 Yes
Initialize Copy Settings Initialize No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).

Remark
  • The Copy Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with a "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Setting the Paper Select Key Size for the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

This feature enables you to set the order and number of paper sources and paper drawers to display for the paper select keys on the Express Copy Basic Features screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen].
  1. Select [Large] or [Small] → press [OK].

If you want to display all the paper drawers, press [Small].


  • Select the keys to display first.

You can select up to four paper sources.

Example: The large keys appear as shown below.

Example: The small keys appear as shown below.



Setting the Standard Keys for the Regular Copy Basic Features Screen

This feature is useful when you want to store frequently-used copy functions on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen.

You can store up to two Standard Keys in addition to the Copy Ratio, Finishing, and 2-Sided Mode keys on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen, the Special Features screen, and the memory keys containing stored copy settings in Mode Memory.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Standard Key 1 Settings for Regular Screen].

To set Standard Key 2, press [Standard Key 2 Settings for Regular Screen].

  1. Display the group of functions to be stored as Standard Keys by pressing [] or [] → select the desired function.

To cancel the Standard Key setting already stored, press [No Settings].

  1. Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard Key → press [OK].

Example: The stored Standard Keys appear on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen as shown below.



Setting the Standard Keys for the Express Copy Basic Features Screen

This feature is useful when you want to store frequently-used copy functions on the Express Copy Basic Features screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen].
  1. Select the number of Standard Keys that are displayed on the Express Copy Basic Features screen.

[Up to 5 Set Keys]: Displays a maximum of 5 Standard Keys.
[Up to 10 Set Keys]: Displays a maximum of 10 Standard Keys.
  1. Select the Standard Key to register → press [Settings].
  1. Display the group of functions to be stored as Standard Keys by pressing [] or [] → select the desired function.

To cancel the Standard Key setting already stored, and press [No Settings].

  1. Select the desired mode to be stored as a Standard Key → press [OK].

Example: The five stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.

Example: The 10 stored Standard Keys are displayed as shown below.



Auto Collate

If Auto Collate is set to 'On', the machine automatically sets the Collate (Offset Collate) mode when originals are placed in the feeder. This is useful when making multiple sets of copies, because you do not need to remember to select the Finishing mode.


Remark
  • The Auto Collate mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • If Auto Collate is set to 'On' and an optional finisher is attached, the Offset Collate mode is set. However, if no finisher is attached, the Collate mode is set instead.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Auto Collate].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Auto Orientation

If Auto Orientation is set to 'On', the machine uses information, such as the size of the original and the zoom ratio, to determine the most suitable orientation for the specified paper size and automatically rotates the image, if necessary.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Auto Orientation].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If A4, B5, or A5 originals are enlarged onto A3 or B4 copy paper, Auto Orientation is not performed even if you select [On].
  • Only the images of standard size originals, up to A4 paper, can be rotated when the copy ratio is set to 100%.
  • If Automatic Paper Selection is set and the most suitable paper size is not available, the paper source that is loaded with paper of the same size, even if the orientation is different, is displayed as the optimal paper to use.


Setting the Photo Mode for the Copying Function

You can set whether or not to use the Photo mode for the Copying function. When Photo Mode is set to 'On', you can select [Printed Image] from the Original Type drop-down list on the Regular Copy Basic Features screen or directly from the Express Copy Basic Features screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Photo Mode].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Changing the Current Standard Settings

The Standard Settings refer to a combination of copy modes that the machine automatically returns to after the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed.

The Standard Settings can be changed to suit your needs, or restored to their default settings.


Remark
  • Even if a remote copy printer is stored in Standard Settings, if the main power of this machine or the remote copy printer is turned OFF and ON again, the stored settings change to Local Printer. To use the stored remote copy printer as the Standard Setting, it is necessary to register the Standard Settings again.
  • The default settings are:
  • Copy Quantity: 1
  • Paper Selection: Auto
  • Exposure and Original Type: Auto
  • Copy Ratio: 1:1
  • Copy Function: 11-Sided Copy


Storing New Standard Settings

You can store your own copy settings as the Standard Settings.

To store your own standard settings, specify the desired settings on the Copy Basic Features screen and/or the Special Features screen, and then follow the procedure below.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Standard Settings].
  1. Press [Store].
  1. Press [Yes] → [Done].


Initializing Standard Settings

You can restore the Standard Settings to their default settings.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Standard Settings].
  1. Press [Initialize].
  1. Verify the settings → press [Yes] → [Done].


Specifying the Remote Copy Printer Settings

Details on printer names and IP addresses for remote copy printers can be confirmed, added, or deleted. You can set up to seven remote copy printers on this machine.


Remark
  • If you set Department IDs and Passwords for the registered remote copy printers, make sure their settings are the same as this machine. (See "Security.")


Registering a Remote Copy Printer

Remark
  • If <Use IPv4> in [IPv4 Settings] in [TCP/IP Settings] in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', you cannot register a remote copy printer. (See "Network.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Register Remote Device].
  1. Press [Register].

  1. Input the IP address of the remote copy printer that you wish to store by using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].
  1. To move the remote copy printer you are registering to the top of the list box, select the printer in the list box → press [Move To Top].

  • When you set the Remote or Cascade Copy mode, you cannot select [Move To Top].


Confirming a Remote Device

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Register Remote Device].
  1. Select the Remote Copy Printer to be checked → press [Details].

  1. Confirm the information → press [OK].

If you power the remote copy printer back ON, you need to refresh the information of the remote copy printer by pressing [Get Information].



Deleting a Remote Device

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Register Remote Device].
  1. Select the remote copy printer that you want to delete → press [Erase].

  • When you set the Remote or Cascade Copy mode, the remote copy printer cannot be deleted.
  1. Press [Yes].


Setting the Remote Device Transmission Timeout

A remote copy job is canceled if there is no response from the remote copy printer within a given time. Select a timeout setting from 5 to 30 seconds in 1-second increments.


Remark
  • Jobs that reach the timeout limit (without arriving at the remote copy printer) are deleted.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Remote Device Transmission Timeout].
  1. Use [-] and [+] to set the Remote Device Transmission Timeout → press [OK].


Restoring the Default Copy Settings

Modes that have been changed in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) can be restored to their default settings. (See "Copy Settings Table.")


Remark
  • When the Copy Settings of this machine are initialized, the settings stored in the other remote copy printers are also initialized.
  • If a remote copy printer is printing or selected as a printing destination, you cannot initialize the Copy Settings of this machine.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Copy Settings] → [Initialize Copy Settings].
  1. Press [Yes] → [Done].


Combination of Functions Chart

These charts show the available combinations of settings when you want to set more than one function at a time.


*1 You cannot combine these modes if you select a nonstandard paper size.
*2 You cannot combine these modes when a nonstandard paper size or envelope is selected.
*3 You cannot combine these modes if the finishers attached to this machine and the finishers attached to the remote copy printer are different.
*4 You cannot combine these modes if the Puncher Unit-Q1/L1 is not attached to this machine or the remote copy printer.


*1 You cannot combine these modes if you select a nonstandard paper size.
*2 You cannot combine these modes when a nonstandard paper size or envelope is selected.
*5 You can set the Sample Set mode as the Interrupt mode.
*6 You can set the Sample Set mode as the reserve copy mode.
*7 You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set.
*8 You can set these modes in combination with the Image Repeat mode (manual setting).
*9 Auto Drawer Switching can be performed only for interleaf sheets.
*10 If the image form name assigned to this machine is not set in the remote copy printer, the Form Composition settings will not be evident in the output from the remote copy printer.
*13 The Auto Orientation cannot be performed.
*15 You cannot combine these modes when you make fine adjustments to the density.
*16 You cannot combine these modes when you set the 2nd Side of 2-Sided Page mode.


*1 You cannot combine these modes if you select a nonstandard paper size.
*2 You cannot combine these modes when a nonstandard paper size or envelope is selected.
*7 You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set.
*8 You can set these modes in combination with the Image Repeat mode (manual setting).
*9 Auto Drawer Switching can be performed only for interleaf sheets.
*10 If the image form name assigned to this machine is not set in the remote copy printer, the Form Composition settings will not be evident in the output from the remote copy printer.
*11 You cannot make an Interrupt copy while copying with the Sample Set mode, or while changing the settings after the sample set has been made.
*12 You cannot reserve a copy job while copying with the Sample Set mode, or while changing the settings after the sample set has been made.
*13 The Auto Orientation cannot be performed.
*14 You cannot combine these modes when the Shift or Cover/Sheet Insertion mode is set.
*15 You cannot combine these modes when you make fine adjustments to the density.
*16 You cannot combine these modes when you set the 2nd Side of 2-Sided Page mode.


*13 You cannot combine these modes when the Different Size Originals mode is set in combination with the Automatic Paper Selection mode.
*17 Combination available if [Auto] is selected for the Creep Correction mode.


Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive

This category describes how to use the Send/Fax function.



What This Machine Can Do

All the elements you will ever need in a digital multitasking machine.

The iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 is packed with various send functions.

Equipped with features that meet the needs of document work in a digitized office, the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 represents the ultimate in digital multitasking machines.

  • Diverse Sending Methods

You can easily scan paper documents and send them to one or multiple recipients via fax, e-mail, or I-fax, bringing to your work environment increased efficiency in the arena of document exchange. The ability to send documents to FTP, SMB, NetWare, and WebDAV file servers also serves to help digitize paper documents for convenient data access and management.

  • Sending documents through e-mail or I-fax is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated. Sending documents to a file server or an inbox is also available.
  • Sending documents via fax is available only if the optional fax board is installed. Sending documents to an inbox is also available.
  • Super G3 Fax Function

This machine's Super G3 fax function is compatible with most Super G3 fax machines used in office environments. Compared to ordinary fax machines, Super G3 enables high-speed fax transmissions, thus reducing transmission costs. You can add an additional line if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

  • This function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • Increased Security with Subaddress Transmission

This machine's fax function is compatible with ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddress features. As long as the remote party's fax machine supports subaddress fax transmissions, you can send or receive documents with increased security by attaching a subaddress and a password to all of your fax transactions.

  • This function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • ECM Function for High Quality Images

This machine's fax function is compatible with ECM (Error Correction Mode). ECM corrects errors and distorted or poor quality fax transmissions that arise from line noise. It also enables you to send or receive high-quality faxes even if the condition of your telephone line is not ideal.

  • This function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • File Formats for Every Need

You can send documents in a variety of file formats, including TIFF, JPEG, PDF, and XPS. This gives you the freedom to send documents in a manner that is best suited to the purpose of the document, as well as the recipient's document handling environment.

  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Flexible Scan Features

This machine offers a variety of convenient scanning features, such as the scanning of two-sided and book originals, as well as the ability to merge and send documents that are scanned separately. You can also set the exposure, color mode, and document size to match the type of original that you are scanning. In addition, you can store preferred scan settings and retrieve them at any time.

  • Preview Function

The Preview function enables you to check the contents of documents before sending them. This is useful in preventing mistakes.

  • Instant Address Search with LDAP

You can search for addresses stored on LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers on the network and use them as recipients for send jobs or store them in the Address Book.

  • Receiving Faxes/I-Faxes in Memory

Received fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of being printed. You can check the sender information and the number of pages that each document contains before printing it or forwarding it to another destination.

  • Receiving I-faxes in memory is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Receiving faxes in memory is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • Automatic Forwarding

The machine can be set to automatically forward received fax/I-fax documents that match the specified forwarding conditions to any destination using the desired send settings. You can forward fax/I-fax documents to other machines (relay function) or store received documents that are confidential in Confidential Fax Inboxes. Automatic forwarding can be set to activate at a specified time. Since received documents that do not match the forwarding conditions can also be forwarded to any desired destination, this function can be used to sort and deliver received fax/I-fax documents to the appropriate destinations.

  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail and I-fax documents can also be forwarded, and file servers can be specified as forwarding destinations.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, the machine can receive faxes and forward received fax documents to fax machines.


Overview of the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225

If you press [Send], the Send Basic Features screen appears. The Send function enables you to scan documents and send them to specified destinations via fax, e-mail, or I-fax, save them to a file server, or store them in an inbox to process them at a later date. You can also send documents to multiple destinations simultaneously using various sending methods, such as e-mail and I-fax.

Depending on the installed or activated options, the Send Basic Features screen is displayed as follows:


If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, it is displayed as [Send].


If only the fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Fax].


If the Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Send].

Depending on the destination, the following conditions must be met:

  • E-mail, I-fax, file server: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated
  • Fax: The optional fax board is installed
  • Inbox: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed

The Flow of the sending is as follows.


Remark
  • Network settings must be specified to be able to send scanned documents to an e-mail address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See "Network.")

  • Send Basic Features Screen

The screen below, which appears when [Send] is selected, is called the Send Basic Features screen.

1

Destination List
Displays a list of destinations.

9

Erase
Press to erase the destination displayed in the destination list.

2

Address Book
Press to select a destination from the Address Book.

10

Cc Bcc
Press to specify the e-mail address as a Cc or Bcc destination.

3

Network Address Book
Press to search a destination from the LDAP server.

11

Recall
Press to recall previously set send jobs, including the destinations, scan settings, and send settings.

4

Details
Press to check or change the destination information selected from the destination list.

12

2-Sided Original
Press to scan both sides of the original.

5

New Address Tab
Press to specify a destination not stored in the Address Book.

13

Different Size Originals
Press to scan differently sized originals together.

6

Favorites Tab
Press to recall the destinations and settings stored in a favorites button.

14

File Format
Press to select the file format of the document you are going to send (TIFF, JPEG, PDF, or XPS).

7

One-touch Tab
Press to recall the destinations stored in a one-touch button.

15

Send Settings
Press to set the send settings. You can specify various settings, such as setting the document to be sent at a specified time, entering a subject for an e-mail message or an I-fax, or entering the sender's name for fax.

8

Scan Settings drop-down list
Press to select the scan mode.

16

Register
Press to register new destinations in the Address Book, one-touch buttons, or favorites buttons from the Send Basic Features screen.

  • Scan Settings Screen

The screen below, which appears when you press [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list, is called the Scan Settings screen. Display this screen to set the scan settings for sending documents.

1

Color Mode drop-down list
Press to select the color mode for scanning.

7

Document Size Select
Press to select the size of the original that you want to scan.

2

Direct
Press to return the scan ratio to 100%.

8

Scan Exposure
Press [] or [] to manually adjust the scan exposure. Press [A] (Auto) to select or cancel the automatic scan exposure adjustment.

3

Copy Ratio
Press to scan originals at a different scan (zoom) ratio.

9

Original Type drop-down list
Press to select the type of original (Text/Photo, Photo, or Text) that you are going to scan. You can also select the type of photo ([Printed Image] or [Photo]) if Photo Mode in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'.

4

Scanning Mode drop-down list
Press to select a stored scan mode and resolution.

10

Special Features
Press to select and use the Special Features modes available for scanning.

5

Store/Erase
Press to store or erase a scan mode.

11

System Monitor
Press to check the status or details of a send or receive job, or to cancel a job.

6

Resolution drop-down list
Press to select the resolution.



Things You Must Do Before Using This Machine

This section describes the important setting registrations and procedures that must be done before the machine is used for sending operations.


Remark
  • If you attempt to use the machine without registering the necessary information correctly, the machine may not function properly.
  • Network settings must be specified to send scanned documents to an e-mail address, an I-fax address, or a file server. (See "Network.")
  • Depending on the destination, the following conditions must be met:
  • E-mail, I-fax, file server: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated
  • Fax: The optional fax board is installed
  • Inbox: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed

  • Setting the Telephone Line Type

To set the type of telephone line connected to the machine with the optional fax board installed, check whether it is a rotary dial (rotary pulse) or a touch-tone type and make the correct setting. (See "Selecting the Type of Telephone Line.")

If you have added an additional line to the machine, perform the same registration procedure for the additional line, too. (See "Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line.")

  • Registering the Sending Record

The sending record is printed at the top of every document you send via I-fax or fax to the recipient.

The registered information is printed, as shown below. Depending upon the model of the machine at the receiving side, this information may appear on the display while communication is taking place.

  • Date and Time
  • The date and time of the transmission are recorded.
  • I-Fax Address or Fax Number
  • Your machine's I-fax address or fax number is recorded.
  • Sender's Name (TTI (Transmit Terminal Identification))
  • For fax documents, the name registered as the sender's name is recorded.
  • Destination Name
  • If you send an original and select a destination from the Address Book, the stored destination's name appears on the sending record. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • Page Number
  • The current page number out of the total number of pages of the original is recorded.

Remark
  • You can set the machine so that the sending record is not printed.
  • If the machine is set so that the sending record is printed at the top of the recording paper, and not all of the items are registered, only the required registered items and the total number of original pages are printed.
  • To print the destination's name on the recipient's paper, set Display Destination Name in TX Terminal ID in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'.
  • You can select the login user's name as the sender's name if a MEAP login service is being used. (The login name is displayed in <99> of Sender's Names (TTI).) For more information on the MEAP login service, see "MEAP/SSO."

  • Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can add an additional line. A dual or triple line can reduce the time it takes to send and receive documents. It is necessary to register a separate telephone number for the additional line. (See "Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line.")

Line 1 (the standard line): The optional fax board is installed.

Line 2 (the additional line): The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is also installed.

Line 3 (the additional line): The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is also installed.



Setting the Display Language

If you decide to switch the display language, set Language Switch to 'On' before entering characters.

If Language Switch is set to 'Off', and then you set it to 'On' after entering characters, the characters may not be displayed correctly. In this case, either re-enter the characters after setting Language Switch to 'On', or enter characters with Language Switch set to 'Off'.

If Language Switch is set to 'On', some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. (See "Additional Functions.")



Selecting the Type of Telephone Line

Set the type of telephone line that is connected to the machine.

If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [Line 1] → [Tel Line Type].
  1. Select the type of telephone line → press [OK].

If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.



Setting the Current Date and Time

You can set the current date and time. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  • GMT:
GMT stands for Greenwich Mean Time.
  • Time Zone:
Time Zone: The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference in hours (± up to 12 hours) from GMT (± 0 hours). A time zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.
  • Daylight Saving Time:
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season. The period in which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time."

Remark
  • You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the network from the Additional Functions screen. (See "Network.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Date & Time Settings].

  1. Enter the current date (day, month, year) and time using - (numeric keys).

Enter the month and the day using four digits (including zeros).

Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits (including zeros) without a space.

Examples:

May 6 → 0605
7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

  • Press the Time Zone drop-down list → select the time zone where the machine is located.

  • Press [On] → [Start Date].
  • Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, respectively.
  • Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take effect → [OK].
  • Press [End Date] → select the month, day, and time at which Daylight Saving Time ends → [OK].
  • If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one hour forward at the specified date and time.

  1. Press [OK].


Registering Your Machine's Fax Number

You must store your machine's fax number. This number is printed on the document that you fax to the receiving party.

The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine, depending on their type of machine.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [Line 1] → [Unit Telephone #].

  1. Enter the unit's telephone number using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Space]: Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax number.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.


Registering Sender Names

For fax, you can register any name as the sender's name, such as the section or department's name, or an individual's name.

The registered sender's name can be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine and/or printed at the top of the documents that you send as the sender's information.


Remark
  • You can set to display and print the sender's name instead of the name stored as the unit's name with the Sender's Names setting from the Send Settings screen. (See "Sending a Fax.")
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Basic Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Sender's Names (TTI)].
  1. Select the number under which you want to register the sender's name → press [Register/Edit].

You can store up to 99 sender names (01 to 99).

To delete a stored sender's name, select the number under which the name is registered → press [Erase]. Only one sender name can be erased at a time.

If logging in using SSO-H, the login name is displayed in <99> of Sender's Names (TTI). In this case, you can register, edit, or delete the sender's name in <99>. For more information on the MEAP login service, see "MEAP/SSO."

  1. Enter the sender's name → press [OK].


Registering the Unit's Name

Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a department name is optional).

For example:

  • Your name: John Smith
  • Company name: Canon
  • Company name and department: Canon-Accounting Dept.

When you send a document via e-mail, fax, or I-fax, the unit name that you registered is displayed or printed as the sender's name at the recipient's machine.

Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during transmission.



Registering the Unit's Name for Fax

You can register the unit name for fax documents.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional fax board is necessary to be installed.
  • The unit name can be printed in the TX Terminal ID.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [Line 1] → [Unit Name].
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].


Registering the Unit's Name for E-Mail/I-Fax

You can register the unit name for e-mail and I-fax documents.


Remark
  • For this setting, the optional Color Universal Send Kit is necessary to be activated.
  • If the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is set as the login service and you are sending an e-mail message:
  • The e-mail address of the login user registered for the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is displayed in the From field on the e-mail recipient's machine, instead of the e-mail address registered in the Device Information settings for this machine. (See "Sending an E-Mail Message.")
  • If the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is set as the login service and you are sending an I-fax:
  • The e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is displayed in the From field on the I-fax recipient's machine, and the e-mail address of the login user registered for the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H is displayed in the Sender field. (See "Sending an I-Fax.")
  • If the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user authentication system) is set as the login service and you are sending an e-mail message:
  • The e-mail address that you registered for Active Directory or iW Accounting Manager is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine, instead of the e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine. (See "Sending an E-Mail Message.")
  • If the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user authentication system) is set as the login service and you are sending an I-fax:
  • The e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is displayed in the From field, and the e-mail address that you registered for Active Directory or iW Accounting Manager is displayed in the Sender field on the recipient's machine. (See "Sending an I-Fax.")
  • If <Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender> in E-mail Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine, regardless of the login services. If <Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender> in E-mail Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the e-mail address that you registered in the Device Information settings for this machine is displayed in the From field on the recipient's machine.
  • For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see "Network."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Unit Name for E-Mail/I-Fax] under <Common Settings>.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].


Flow of Sending Operations

This section describes the flow of basic sending operations.


Remark
  • Before using the Send function, it is useful to read the following topics:
  • For instructions on entering characters using the keys displayed on the touch panel display, see "Basic Operations."
  • The maximum number of send jobs that the machine can handle is 120, including jobs with error codes. Among these, 64 fax jobs can be handled. However, the actual number of send jobs that the machine can handle may be less than 120, depending on the following conditions:
  • Multiple documents are being sent at the same time
  • Large documents are being sent
  • A large amount of memory is being used for the inboxes
  • If you are using a login service, it is necessary to log in to the machine with the appropriate procedure for the login service you are using.
  • If you are using the optional Card Reader-C1 to perform Department ID Management, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Press [Send].


The Send Basic Features Screen

The function key for the sending and fax functions on top of the basic features screen varies, depending on the activated or installed options, as follows:

  • If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, it is displayed as [Send].
  • If only the optional fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Fax].
  • If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, it is displayed as [Send].
  1. Place your originals.


  1. Specify the destinations.
  • Depending on the destination, the following conditions must be met:
  • E-mail, I-fax, file server: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated
  • Fax: The optional fax board is installed
  • Inbox: The optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed
  • A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained via a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.
  • The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
  • : Group
  • : E-mail
  • : I-Fax
  • : File Server
  • : Inbox
  • : Fax
  • : Cc
  • : Bcc


  • A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.



  • Press [Network Add.Book] → search through the directory listing on the server (LDAP) to specify the destination. (See "Using a Server.")

  • A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.

  • Only e-mail addresses can be specified as Cc and Bcc addresses.
  • The maximum number of Cc and Bcc destinations that can be sent at one time is 64, including those obtained using New Address Tab or via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count). Group addresses cannot be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc].

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → select a scan setting.

If the desired scan setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll through the list.

To change the Scan mode settings, select [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list, and adjust the settings. (See "Scan Settings.")

  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Black mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Changing Color Modes.")
  • If the originals contain few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • If the color sections of the originals are close to black
  • To set the color mode to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale] when resolution is set to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine. If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed when color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], the resolution cannot be set to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi.
  1. Press [File Format] → select a file format for sending your document.

This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:

  • A fax number is specified as the destination
  • An I-fax address is specified as the destination
  • A User Inbox is specified as the destination
  • The icons that are displayed on the screen are:
  • : Divide into Pages
  • : Trace & Smooth
  • : Compact
  • : OCR (Text Searchable)
  • : Encrypt
  • : Add Digital Signatures
  1. Press [Send Settings] → specify the send settings.

Specify the Delayed Send, Job Done Notice, Preview, Stamp, and Direct Sending modes, as necessary.

  • For instructions on setting the Direct Sending mode, see "Sending a Fax."
  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press (Start).

If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel display → press (Start).

When scanning is complete, press [Done].

If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] → try scanning the original again from the first page. Scanning may be possible if you set 'Low' for Sharpness, and 'Text' for the type of original.

Scanning starts.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

  • The size of the original is detected automatically. However, if the output paper in the recipient's machine is not equal to the scanned document size, the original image may be reduced in size to match it.
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  1. If you want to cancel sending, press (Stop).
  • You can press (Stop) to cancel a send job that is being scanned.
  1. When scanning is complete, remove your originals.


Sending Fax Documents Manually

This mode enables you to manually send fax documents after checking that the destination is ready to receive fax transmissions.


Remark
  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, manual sending can only be used for line 1.
  • To send documents consisting of two or more sheets, an optional Feeder (DADF-U1) (standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions) is required. You can only send one page at a time when you place your originals on the platen glass.
  • If you cancel manual sending during transmission, the pages that have already been scanned are sent. You can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing a Fax Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System Monitor screen.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Place your originals.

  1. Make sure that the machine is ready to send.

  1. Press [New Address] → [Fax].

  1. Press [On-hook].


  1. Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

  • Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.

  • Press [One-touch Buttons] → select the desired one-touch button → press [OK].

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-touch Button Number) → enter the number for the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).


  1. Make sure that you hear the other party or carrier signal (a high-pitched tone).

The level of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [] or [].

You can enter an extension number after dialing the fax number.

  • You can change the scan settings before sending your document.
  • To cancel Manual Sending, press [End].
  1. Press (Start).

Scanning starts and the document is sent.

During the transmission, the transaction number, destination's telephone number, and page number are displayed in the message area.



Canceling a Job

You can cancel a send job using the touch panel display, System Monitor screen, or by pressing (Stop) on the control panel.



Using the Touch Panel Display

You can cancel a send job by pressing [Cancel], while the job is being scanned.


  1. Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is scanning.

  1. A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job → press [Yes].

The send job is canceled.

  1. Remove your originals.


Using the Stop Key

You can cancel a send job by pressing (Stop), while the job is being scanned.


Remark
  • You can press (Stop) only to cancel a send job that is being scanned.

  1. Press (Stop).
  1. A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job → press [Yes].

The send job is canceled.

  1. Remove your originals.


Using the System Monitor Screen

You can cancel a send job while it is waiting to be processed, or while it is being sent.



E-mail, I-Fax, Sending to a File Server, or Storing in a User Inbox

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Send].

  1. Press [Status] → select the send job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel].

  1. Press [Yes].
  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.


Fax

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Fax].

  1. Press [Send Job Status] or [Received Job Status] → select the fax job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

If a job is in the process of being sent, it may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel].


  1. Press [Yes].

  • Verify the destinations of the fax job, press [Cancel All] or [Cancel Current Job].

If you do not want to cancel any job of the Sequential Broadcast, press [Cancel].

  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.


Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab

You must specify the destination (such as a fax number, e-mail address, I-fax address, or file server address) to send documents. This section describes the procedure for specifying destination that has not been stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • The destination that you just specified is not stored in the Address Book. It is deleted once the document is sent.
  • If you frequently send documents to the same destinations, store these destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • A maximum of 64 new addresses and addresses obtained via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count) can be specified at the same time.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and a User Inbox.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers and a User Inbox.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].


Specifying a Fax Number

You can specify a new fax number using - (numeric keys), , and . You can also specify several numbers in succession, and send the original to several destinations in a single operation (Sequential Broadcast).


  1. Press [New Address] → [Fax].
  • If no destination is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen, pressing - (numeric keys), , or without pressing [Fax] on the New Address tab, displays the screen shown in step 2, which enables you to enter the fax number.

  1. Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

Details of each item are shown below.

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number. (See "Pause Time.")
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) which accepts only tone signals. If you press [Tone], the letter <T> appears. (See "Fax Information Services.")
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[R]: Press to use the R-Key. (See "Special Dialing.")
[Direct]: Press to send documents directly to the recipient. If you do not select Direct Sending, Memory Sending is used. (See "Sending a Fax.")
[Next]: Press to specify another destination after specifying the first destination using the numeric keys.
[Option]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board. Press to set the subaddress and password, or to select the line type of the additional line.
[Subaddress]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. Press to set an optional subaddress and password.
[On-hook]: Press to use tone dialing or to send a fax document manually. (See "Fax Information Services.")
  • You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.

  • Press [Subaddress] → enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and .
  • Press [Password] → enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

  • If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine supports ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddresses.
  • Select [Line 1], [Line 2], [Line 3], or [Auto] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Line 1]: Standard line (The optional fax board is installed)
[Line 2]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Line 3]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Auto]: Selects the line according to the settings specified for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  • Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending documents, line 1 is still used for fax information services.
  • When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line settings.
  • When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for sending.

  • Press [Subaddress] → enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and.
  • Press [Password] → enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .
  • Press [OK].

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

  • If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine supports ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector) standard subaddresses.

  1. Press [OK].


Specifying an E-Mail Address

You can specify a new e-mail address. You can enter an e-mail address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display.


  1. Press [New Address] → [E-mail].
  1. Press [E-mail Address].

  1. Enter the e-mail address → press [OK].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Divided Data Destination>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination's e-mail software has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all of the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination's e-mail software has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into separate pages and sent as multiple e-mail messages.
  • Make sure to check the specifications of the destination's e-mail software before setting this mode. A sending error may occur if the destination's e-mail software is not able to combine divided data.
  1. Press [OK].


Specifying an I-Fax Address

You can specify a new I-fax address. Regardless of the distance and area, I-fax helps you to reduce transmission costs by making transactions via the Internet. You can enter an I-fax address directly from the keyboard on the touch panel display. You can also specify the scan settings and the settings at the destination when using I-fax.


  1. Press [New Address] → [I-Fax].
  1. Press the Mode drop-down list → select [Simple] or [Full].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Simple]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax was sent successfully.
  • In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be compatible with the Full mode.
  • If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the Status screen until the time set for <Full Mode TX Timeout > in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could not be verified.
  1. Press [I-Fax Address].
  1. Enter the I-fax address → press [OK].
  • If you do not send documents via a server, and the recipient's IP address is not registered on a DNS server, use the following format to enter the domain name: (user)@(the recipient's IP address).
  1. Press [Destination Conditions] → specify the receiving conditions of the destination.
  1. Select the paper size, compression method, and resolution.

The following conditions are always selected:

  • Paper Size: A4/LTR
  • Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
  • Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi

A5 is included in [A4/LTR].

  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.
  • Available compression methods are:
  • MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
  • MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
  • MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Receive Divided Data> → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination machine has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination machine has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a sending error occurs.
  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Sends your I-fax documents via a mail server. This enables you to send documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way that you send an e-mail message.

[Off]:

Does not send your I-fax documents via a server. You can send large amounts of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network) environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is possible before you set <Send Via Server> to 'Off'.
  • To be able to specify the Send Via Server setting, set <Use Send Via Server> to 'On' on the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen beforehand. It is recommended to set <Allow MDN Not Via Server> to 'On' on the same screen. To access the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server> is grayed out. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
  1. Press [OK].


Specifying a File Server

This section describes the four procedures for specifying a file server on the network as the destination of a send job.


Remark
  • Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista restricts the number of users or clients that can be accessed. Once the limit of users or clients has been reached, it is not possible to send documents to a file server using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Host Name and Folder Path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • Set the following items when sending to a file server:
  • Protocol
  • Host Name
  • Folder Path
  • User
  • Password
  • For examples of the settings that are needed to send documents to a file server, see "Network."
  • If you are sending to an iW folder, set the FTP server address specified in iW Document Manager Gateway as the destination. Using iW and the Send function of the iR enables you to manage digitized paper documents and computer data on the network. For more information on iW, see the appropriate iW Document Manager Gateway documentation.

  • Using the Keyboard

You can specify a file server as the destination directly from the keyboard displayed on the touch panel display. Press [Host Name], [Folder Path], [User], and [Password] to specify the file server settings.

  • Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))

If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen. You can either specify a file server from a workgroup, or specify the domain name of an Active Directory Server on the machine.

  • Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))

If you select [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a specific network by pressing [Browse] on the File screen.

  • Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))

If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the protocol, you can specify a file server connected to a specific network by pressing [Host Search] on the File screen.



Using the Keyboard

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select the desired server protocol.

The following server protocols may be used.

Confirm the system environment of the destination before sending.

Protocol System Requirements Application
FTP Sun Solaris V.2.6 or later, Mac OS X or later, or Red Hat Linux 7.2 -
Windows 2000 Server Internet Information Services 5.0
Windows XP Professional Internet Information Services 5.1
Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 6.0
Windows Vista Internet Information Services 7.0
Windows(SMB) Windows 2000/XP
Windows Server 2003, or
Windows Vista
-
Mac OS X v10.2
Red Hat Linux 7.2
Samba 2.2/3.0
NetWare(IPX) Novell NetWare V.3.2 or later -
WebDAV Sun Solaris V.2.6 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, Windows 2000 Server, Windows XP Professional, or Windows Server 2003 Apache 2.0
Mac OS X Apache 1.3
Windows 2000 Professional/Server Internet Information Services 5.0
Windows XP Professional Internet Information Services 5.1
Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 6.0

The following are the product requirements for the server that is compatible with IPv6.

Protocol System Requirements Application
FTP Solaris Version 9.0 or later, Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, or Mac OS X 10.3 or later -
WebDAV Solaris Version 9.0 or later Apache 2.0
Windows Server 2003 Internet Information Services 6.0
  • If you are using WebDAV and connect to the Internet using proxies, the proxy server must support IPv6.
  • This machine does not support WebDAV transmissions to Windows Vista. However, it is possible to view documents sent to the WebDAV server on the network from Windows Vista.
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

If you select [Windows (SMB)] or [NetWare (IPX)] as the server protocol, you can specify the file server by pressing [Browse]. For instructions on using the Browse key, see "Specifying a File Server."

If you select [Windows (SMB)] as the server protocol, you can specify the file server by pressing [Host Search]. For instructions on using the Host Server key, see "Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))."

[Host Name]:

Press [Host Name] → enter a host name → press [OK].

A host name is a name assigned to a host computer that provides services on the Internet. A specific host name is assigned to each host computer to identify it on the Internet. In this entry box, enter the name of the file server on the network as the destination of the send job.

When [FTP] or [WebDAV] is selected as the server protocol, you can also specify a port number after the host name address by entering a colon (:) and the port number.

Example: 192.168.100.50:21000

When sending to an IPv6 host, specify the following settings for [Host Name].

[IPv6 Address]: <Port Number>

Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000

Make sure to enter the same port number for the Host Name as the one specified for the FTP server or WebDAV server to which you are sending your documents.

When [WebDAV] is selected as the server protocol, the HTTP protocol is used if you specify 'HTTP://' as the scheme at the start of the host name, and the SSL + HTTP (HTTPS) protocol is used if you specify 'HTTPS://' as the scheme at the start of the host name. Specifying 'HTTPS://' as the scheme enables SSL communications between the server and the machine. However, the route between the server and the machine is only encrypted, and a server certificate validity check is not performed using a CA certificate.

[Folder Path]:

Press [Folder Path] → enter a folder path → press [OK].

A folder path is a series of characters that signify the location of the folder. Specify a folder in the file server as the destination of the send job.

[User]:

Press [User] → enter the user name → press [OK].

If [Windows (SMB)] is selected as the server protocol, enter the required user name information in the manner shown below:

  • To enter the user name only
    Example: user_name
    Maximum 20 characters
  • To enter the user name and the domain name
    Example: domain_name\user_name
    Domain name: Maximum 15 characters
    User name: Maximum 20 characters
  • To enter a UPN (User Principal Name)
    Example: user_name@domain_name.com
    Maximum 128 characters

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter a password → press [OK].

Setting the password is optional.

After pressing [OK], the password appears as asterisks (********) on the File settings screen.

  • If you are sending to an iW folder, enter the folder name set in iW Document Manager Gateway.
  • If you are sending to an iW folder, enter the user name set in iW Document Manager Gateway.
  • UPN (User Principal Name) can be used only if you are sending to a computer belonging to a domain operated with Active Directory.
  • If you are sending to an iW folder, enter the password set in iW Document Manager Gateway.
  • When sending to a file server on the Internet using WebDAV, proxy server settings may be required, depending on the environment of the destination. Specify the host name (or IP address), port number, user name, and password for the proxy server in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more information, see "Network."


Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select [Windows (SMB)].

  1. Press [Browse].
  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Network.")

  1. Select the desired workgroup → press [Down].

You can also select the workgroup from a list of Active Directory server domain names that are registered in the machine by pressing [Directory] from the drop-down list.


  • Press [Register].
  • Enter a domain name → press [OK].
  • You can register up to five Directory servers.
  • To edit the domain name, select the domain name that you want to edit → press [Edit].
  • To delete the domain name, select the domain name that you want to delete → press [Erase] → press [Yes] on the pop-up screen that appears when you press [Erase].

  1. Select the desired file server → press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. If the Enter Network Password screen is displayed, enter your user name and network password.
  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter your user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter your network password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  1. Press [Down] → select the folder on the specified server to which you want to send your documents → press [OK].

To go down one level, press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Confirm your settings → press [OK].


Using the Browse Key (NetWare (IPX))

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select [NetWare (IPX)].

  1. Press [Browse].
  • After turning the main power ON, you must wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings to elapse before pressing [Browse]. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. (See "Network.")
  1. Press the drop-down list → select [NDS] or [Bindery] from the drop-down list.

Details of each item are shown below.

[NDS]: NDS (Novell Directory Service) is a directory service that manages user and server names. Select [NDS] when you are using Novell NetWare V.4.x or later.
[Bindery]: One of the directory services provided by Novell for managing the information of user and server names. Select [Bindery] when you are using Novell NetWare V.3.x.

If you select [Bindery], follow the procedure from step 5 in "Using the Browse Key (Windows (SMB))."

If you select [NDS], follow the steps below.

  1. Select the desired NDS tree → press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Select a folder on the specified server in which you want to log on to → press [Log In].

If no folder is displayed, press [Log In] to log on to the Novell server.

To go down one level, press [Down].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Enter your user name and network password.
  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter your user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter your network password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  1. Press [Down] → select the folder to where you want to send your file → press [OK].

To move up one level, press [Up].

  1. Confirm your settings → press [OK].


Using the Host Search Key (Windows (SMB))

  1. Press [New Address] → [File].
  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select [Windows (SMB)].

  1. Press [Host Search].
  1. Enter the search conditions → press [Start Searching].

[Workgroup]:

Press [Workgroup] → enter the workgroup name → press [OK].

[Host Name to Search]:

Press [Host Name to Search] → enter the IP address, FQDN, or NetBIOS name → press [OK].

  • When entering a NetBIOS name, you can also enter wildcard characters, such as * and ?, as part of your search.
  • When searching for the host name using wildcard characters, make sure to also enter a workgroup name.
  • Examples:
  • * (asterisk): Replaces one or more characters (up to 15 characters).
    Example: tri* → trinity, trinity1, trinity0002
  • ?: Replaces only one character.
    Example: tr?nity → trinity

  1. Select the file server from the search results.



  1. Confirm your settings → press [OK].


Specifying a User Inbox

You can store a scanned document in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox as one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other destinations.


Remark
  • Documents that are scanned using a paper size specified by pressing [Other Size] or [Long Strip Original] in Document Size Select, cannot be stored in a User Inbox.
  • Documents stored in a User Inbox are automatically erased after three days. However, you can change this setting. (See "Mail Box.")

  1. Press [New Address] → [Store In Usr Inbox].

  1. Select the desired User Inbox → press [OK].

User Inboxes specified as destinations correspond to the inboxes that appear on the Inbox Selection screen for the Mail Box function.


  • Press [URL Send].

A message <User Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the e-mail message stating the link to the User Inbox.

  • Only one User Inbox can be specified as the destination at a time.
  • To be able to send a link via e-mail, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the User Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the machine, see "Mail Box."
  • If the URL Send mode is set, and you specify a group destination that includes a User Inbox as a send destination, the error message <Cannot send when an inbox is included in the Group Address for [URL Send]. Please enter the settings again.> may be displayed.


Sending Documents to Yourself

If the SSO-H is set as the login service, you can press [Send to Myself] to specify your e-mail address (registered in the Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H) as the destination.


Remark
  • If the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H is set as the login service, your e-mail address registered in the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H is set as the destination.
  • If the Domain Authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing domain authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system) is set as the login service, your e-mail address registered in Active Directory or iW Accounting Manager is set as the destination.

  1. Press [New Addresses] → [Send to Myself].



Specifying Registered Destinations

You can select a destination stored in the Address Book or a one-touch button, or specify a new address altogether. You can also recall the destinations and settings stored in the favorites buttons to check their contents, edit them, or delete them.


Remark
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • A maximum of 256 destinations can be specified at the same time. (Out of the 256 destinations, 64 new addresses, including those obtained via a server, can be specified.) If you specify a group, which is made up of several destinations, each destination is counted as a separate address.


Using the Address Book

You must specify the destination (such as a fax number, e-mail address, I-fax address, or file server address) to send documents. If you store addresses in the Address Book, you can easily select them. Addresses are stored in Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Storing New Addresses.")


Remark
  • Address Books can be saved, imported, and transferred using the Remote User Interface. (See "Remote UI.")

  1. Press [Address Book].
  1. Select the destination → press [OK].

You can select multiple destinations.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the result list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses.

If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers.

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  • If you select only one destination, press (Start) to send from the Address Book screen.
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")


Using the One-Touch Buttons

You can specify up to 200 destinations in one-touch buttons.

Follow this procedure to start a transmission and send a document with the press of a one-touch button.


Remark
  • To use this feature, you must first register destinations in one-touch buttons by pressing (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [One-touch Buttons]. (See "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons.")

  1. Press [One-touch].
  1. Select the desired one-touch button.

Each one-touch button is assigned a three digit number. If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, you can press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).

  • You can select multiple one-touch buttons.
  • To cancel the selected one-touch button, press the one-touch button again.


Using the Favorites Buttons

If you frequently send documents with the same document settings to the same destination, store these settings in a favorites button. Then, when you need to specify the destination, all you have to do is select the favorites button containing your stored document settings and the desired destination, and send your document.


Remark
  • To use this feature, you must first register the desired document settings and destinations in favorites buttons. (See "Registering a Favorites Button.")

  1. Press [Favorites].
  1. Select the desired Favorites Button.

  • You can manually change the recalled settings from the selected favorites button before you send your documents.
  • If you press another favorites button, the settings stored in that button are recalled.
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).
  • If multiple destinations are stored under the selected favorites button, the destinations may not be listed in the order in which they were set.


Using a Server

You can specify a destination by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers. LDAP servers are for looking up a particular piece of information, such as a user name, e-mail address, or other contact information.


Remark
  • You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
  • You can send to a maximum of 64 destinations at the same time, including destinations that are specified via a server.
  • The information that can be obtained through the LDAP server varies, depending on the following:
  • If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated: names and e-mail addresses
  • If only the optional fax board is installed: names and fax numbers
  • If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed: names, e-mail addresses, and fax numbers
  • You cannot directly specify a destination that is obtained via a server as a forwarding destination. To specify the destination as a forwarding destination, you must first store it in the Address Book. (See "Addresses Obtained via a Server.")

  1. Press [Network Add.Book].
  1. Press the Server to Search drop-down list → select the desired server to search.


  1. Specify the search criteria.
  • If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as the search criterion, and vice versa.

  • Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] → enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which you want to search → press [OK].

The search criteria boxes that are not filled out, are not searched.

To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press [Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.


  • Press [Detailed Search].
  • Press the search category drop-down list → select the desired search category.

The available search categories are:

[Name]: Search by name.
[E-mail]: Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]: Search by fax number.
[Organization]: Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of the user as follows:
organization=canon
organizationUnit=salesdept

  • The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
  • Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server, and depending on the type of application on the server.
  • Press the search condition drop-down list → select the desired search condition → press [Settings].

You can select from the following search conditions:

[contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[differs from]: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • Enter the search criterion → press [OK].
  • Press [Add].

To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] → repeat step 3.

[or]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit → press [Edit] → [Settings]. To delete the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
  • If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
  • If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.

  1. Press [Start Searching].

To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these search results are displayed.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  • The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings.")
  • If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:

  • If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
  • If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.

[User]:

Press [User] → enter the user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.


  1. Select the desired destination from the search results → press [OK].

To continue searching, press [Back].

You can specify multiple destinations.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. If you press [Select e-mail for I-Fax], the key lights showing that this setting is turned on, and the selected e-mail address can be specified as an I-fax destination.

If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are displayed.

If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, you can sort and limit the view of the displayed addresses by using the Type drop-down list.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again to clear the check mark.
  • If you specify an e-mail address as an I-fax destination, the only information that can be retrieved from the server is the I-fax address. To specify settings to match the recipient's receiving conditions, press [Details] on the Send screen.
  • If you select only one destination, press (Start) to send from the Search Results screen.
  1. If a fax number or I-fax address is specified as the destination, read the displayed message → press [OK].


Setting Cc and Bcc Addresses

In addition to the destination for the documents, you can also set multiple e-mail address destinations for the Cc (Carbon copy) and Bcc (Blind carbon copy) addresses.


Remark
  • Only e-mail addresses can be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc]. If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses.
  • The maximum number of Cc and Bcc destinations that can be sent at one time is 64, including those obtained using New Address Tab or via a server (User Inboxes are not included in this count). Group Addresses cannot be specified for [Cc] and [Bcc].

  1. Press [Cc Bcc].


  1. Specify the e-mail addresses → press [Done].

Follow the procedure below to set the e-mail addresses for [Cc] and [Bcc].

  • For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a Server.")

  • Press [Cc] → specify the e-mail addresses.

  • Press [Bcc] → specify the e-mail addresses.

  • Press [From To/Bcc].
  • Press [To] or [Bcc] → select the desired e-mail addresses → press [OK].
  • [From To/Bcc] is displayed only if you pressed [Cc].

  • Press [From To/Cc].
  • Press [To] or [Cc] → select the desired e-mail addresses → press [OK].
  • [From To/Cc] is displayed only if you pressed [Bcc].


Checking/Changing a Destination

You can check and change a specified destination before you scan your documents.


Remark
  • Only the destinations specified using the New Address tab and destinations obtained via a server can be changed.
  • You cannot change multiple destinations simultaneously.

  1. Select the destination → press [Details].


  1. If necessary, check or change the destination's information.

  • Check the destination's information → press [Done].

  • Check or change the destination's information → press [OK].

Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it. (See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab.")


  • Check or change the destination's information → press [OK].

Change the destination's information in the same way that you specified it. (See "Specifying Destinations Using the New Address Tab.")


  • To check the information of registered destinations in a group address, select one destination at a time → press [Details].
  • Check the destination's information → press [Done] → [Done].


Erasing a Destination

You can erase a specified destination from the destination list before you scan your documents.


  1. Select the destination to be erased → press [Erase].



Registering New Destinations Using the Register Key

You can register new destinations in the Address Book, one-touch buttons, and favorites buttons from the Send Basic Features and the Address Book screen.

The Register key is a shortcut key to the Register Address screen in Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the One-touch Buttons screen in Address Book Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and the Register Favorites Button screen in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).


  1. Press [Reg.].

  1. Select the item you want to register.

You can also register a destination in the Address Book or a one-touch button by pressing [Address Book] → [Register].


  • Press [Register Address] → register the destination.

  • Press [Register One-touch Button] → register the destination in a one-touch button.

For instructions on registering addresses in a one-touch button, see "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons."


  • Press [Register Favorites Button] → register destinations and settings in a favorites button.

For instructions on registering destinations and settings in a favorites button, see "Registering a Favorites Button."



Selecting a Scan Mode

You can set the scan mode that a document is scanned in. The machine has the following preset scan modes:

  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional System Upgrade RAM is installed:
    Eight scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 600 × 600 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
    Seven scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the optional fax board is installed:
    Four scan modes: Black 200 × 100 dpi,
    Black 200 × 200 dpi,
    Black 200 × 400 dpi,
    Black 400 × 400 dpi

Select the desired mode from the preset scan modes or user defined scan modes (user preset keys), according to the type of original that you are sending.


Remark
  • If only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the original is always sent in the Black-and-White mode regardless color mode settings.
  • If you want to use less memory and make the sending time shorter, use a lower resolution mode.
  • You can adjust the preset scan modes and create new scan settings. However, since changed scan settings are not automatically saved, it is useful to register a new scan setting if you use it frequently. (See "User Preset Keys.")
  • You can change the settings and assigned names for the eight preset scan keys, and store them as user defined scan modes (user preset keys).
  • In addition to the scan mode, you can store addresses and other send settings in the favorites buttons. (See "Favorites Buttons.")
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → select the scan mode.

  • Specifying the scan mode again cancels the scan mode and other scan features previously set.
  • You can also select a scan mode by pressing [Option] from the Scan Settings drop-down list to display the Scan Settings screen → press the Scanning Mode drop-down list → select a scan mode.
  1. Press (Start).

If [PDF(Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, select a scan mode from the Scanning Mode drop-down list whose Color Selection mode and resolution have been registered as one of the following combinations. If you select a combination other than those listed below, a message asking for your confirmation to change the file format appears on the screen.

  • Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Full Color and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Grayscale and 300 × 300 dpi


Scan Settings

Remark
  • Changed scan settings are not saved. For instructions on saving settings, see "User Preset Keys."
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


2-Sided Original

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) (standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions) is attached.
  • The 2-Sided Original mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size, Long Strip Original) or 2-Page Separation mode.
  • The 2-Sided Original mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R and B5R, make sure to place them horizontally into the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of these originals are scanned upside down.
  • To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals into the feeder → specify the destination → press [2-Sided Original].

  1. Select the type of original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press (Start).


Different Size Originals

This mode enables you to scan different size originals with the same widths (A3 and A4, or B4 and B5) or different widths (A3 and B4, or A4 and B5), together as one group by setting them in the feeder.


Remark
  • The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size or Long Strip Original), 2-Page Separation, Original Frame Erase, or Book Frame Erase mode.
  • The Different Size Originals mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • If Document Size Select setting is set to anything other than [Auto], all of the originals are scanned in the specified size. If you want to scan the originals in their original sizes, make sure to set Document Size Select to [Auto].
  • If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight (paper type).
  • Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths. ("Width" refers to the vertical measurement of the paper from the front of the machine to the back of the machine when the paper is placed in the feeder or on the platen glass.)
  • If you send different sized originals via fax, the paper size used to output the faxes on the recipient's machine is the size of the largest document you sent. For example, if you send an A4 and A3 original via fax, they will both be output on A3 paper at the recipient's machine.
  • Set different size originals with different widths in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.
  • A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 and B5, B5 and A5
  • If you place originals with different widths into the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the platen glass. As a result, the images may be scanned as slanted.
  • If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.
  • To cancel this setting, press [Diff. Size Originals] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Diff. Size Originals].

  1. Select the type of originals → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Same Width]: Press this key if you are placing originals with the same width.
[Different Width]: Press this key if you are placing originals with different widths.
  1. Press (Start).


Document Size

You can manually specify the document size when the machine cannot detect the paper size automatically, such as when scanning transparencies. Specify the document size as well, if you want to scan an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off. You can also store the specified document size.


Remark
  • You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of these documents manually.
  • Nonstandard size originals
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • Original on the platen glass: Originals smaller than A5 in size
  • If you are sending a fax in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, and you place your originals into the feeder, the Document Size Select setting that you specify will be disabled.
  • If the original is placed in the feeder, you cannot scan by selecting [Other Size] in Document Size Select.
  • If you select [Long Strip Original], place your originals into the feeder. You cannot specify the size of a long strip original that is placed on the platen glass.
  • If [Long Strip Original] is selected as the document size, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], a long strip originals cannot be selected. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, a long strip originals can be selected regardless of the color mode settings.
  • If you select [Other Size] in Document Size Select, you cannot select [Stamp].
  • Vertically placed B5 originals are sent as horizontal B4 documents. Horizontally placed B5 originals are sent as A4 documents.
  • If you scan a registered document size, the scanned image is not rotated automatically.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].


Specifying the Document Size

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [Document Size Select].


  1. Select the document size.

  • Select the desired document size.

  • To select an inch size, press [Inch-size].
  • If you want to scan originals longer than the standard sizes, press [Long Strip Originals]. The maximum length of originals that you can scan is 630 mm. The length of standard size originals is as follows:
  • A4: 297 mm
  • B4: 364 mm
  • A3: 420 mm

  • Press [Other Size].
  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].


The Platen Glass

  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [Other Size].
  • Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] → press [OK].
  • The registered document size is displayed on top of the key in which it is registered.

  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


Registering the Specified Document Size

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Document Size Select].

  1. Press [Other Size].

  1. Press [Register Size].

  1. Press [Registered Size 1] or [Registered Size 2] → enter the document size using the numeric keys on the touch panel display.
  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].
  • If you register a new document size in a key that already has a document size stored in it, the new document size overwrites the previously registered document size.
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].
  1. Press [Cancel] → [Done] → [Cancel].


Resolution

You can specify the resolution before scanning the original.


Remark
  • The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is A3. If the image exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, the maximum size of an image that you can send at 400 × 400 dpi resolution is A3.
  • If you are sending documents by fax, select 200 × 100 dpi, 200 × 200 dpi, 200 × 400 dpi, or 400 x 400 dpi. Otherwise, the document will be sent with poor resolution.
  • If you send a long strip original at 600 × 600 dpi, the periphery of the original image may be cut off slightly.
  • If the optional fax board is installed but the optional Color Universal Send Kit is not activated, you cannot select 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 300 × 300 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi as the resolution.
  • To set the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi when color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed when setting the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, you cannot select [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale].
  • If only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, you can set to the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi. A fax number or an I-fax original is always sent in the Black-and-White mode regardless color mode settings.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press the Resolution drop-down list → select a resolution → press [OK].

If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, and you select any resolution other than [300 × 300 dpi], and then press [OK], a message asking for your confirmation to change the PDF or XPS file format appears on the screen.

  1. Press (Start).


Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings

Remark
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].


Manual Exposure Adjustment

You can manually adjust the scan exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the scan exposure → press [OK].

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

  1. Press (Start).


Original Type Selection

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image that you are scanning. The following three original type modes are available for adjusting the image quality.


Remark
  • Combinations of these three modes (Text/Photo, Photo, and Text) cannot be selected at the same time. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness).")
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type → adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.

  • Text/Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning originals containing both text and photos, such as magazines or catalogues.

  • Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning photos printed on photographic paper, or photo originals containing halftones (e.g., printed photos).

  • Text Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly. When [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, if the Text mode is selected, the Image Level in Text Mode setting made in Image Level for High Compression in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is activated. (See "Image Level for High Compression.")


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press the original type drop-down list → select the original type ([Text/Photo], [Photo], or [Text]).

  • When the Photo Mode in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', you can select the type of photo ([Printed Image] or [Photo]). [Printed Image] can only be selected if the color mode is set to [Black and White]. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, [Printed Image] can be selected regardless of the color modes settings. (See "Setting the Photo Mode.")

  • Press the original type drop-down list → press [Priority Level].
  • Press [Text Priority] or [Photo Priority] to adjust the degree of priority for text or photo images → press [OK].

<Priority Level>:

[Text Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos, with as little moiré effect as possible.
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the scanning exposure → [OK].

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure light, or press [] to move the indicator to the right to make the exposure darker.

  1. Press (Start).


Automatic Exposure Adjustment

This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the scan exposure to the level best suited to the quality of the original.


Remark
  • When using Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode for sending a fax, the automatic scan adjustment mode cannot be used.
  • There are two types of automatic scan exposure adjustments. The Remove Background mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original, and the Prevent Bleeding mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages. Select the desired scan exposure adjustment mode depending on the type of original. The Remove Background mode is selected by default. (See "Image Quality Adjustment.")

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [A] → [OK].

  • An automatic scan exposure adjustment may not work with transparencies. In this case, adjust the scan exposure manually by pressing [] or [].
  1. Press (Start).


Changing the Zoom Ratio

You can set the machine to adjust the zoom ratio automatically, or you can specify the zoom ratio manually before scanning the original.


Remark
  • If you are scanning an original larger than A3, the original image may be cut off slightly in printing.
  • The maximum size of an image that you can send at 600 x 600 dpi resolution is A3. If the image exceeds this size, it may be cut off.
  • If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • If [Long Strip Original] is selected as the document size, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], documents can be sent only at a ratio of 100%. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the zoom ratio can be changed regardless of the color mode settings.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press [Cancel] on the Scan Settings screen.


Preset Zoom

The machine offers you a variety of preset zoom ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size originals to another standard record size.

  • Reduction

The available preset reduction zoom ratios are:

  • A3 → B4, A4/LTR → B5 (86%)
  • B4 → A4/LTR, B5 → A5 (81%)
  • A3 → A4/LTR, B4 → (70%)
  • A3 → B5 (61%)
  • A3 → A5 (50%)
  • Enlargement

The available preset enlargement zoom ratios are:

  • A5 → A3 (200%)
  • A4/LTR → A3, B5 → B4 (141%)
  • A4/LTR → B4, A5 → B5 (122%)
  • B4 → A3, B5 → A4/LTR (115%)

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press [Copy Ratio].

  1. To reduce the original image, select a preset reduction ratio. To enlarge the original image, select a preset enlargement ratio. Following your selection, press [Done] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).
  • To return the ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Zoom by Percentage

You can reduce or enlarge originals by any zoom ratio in 1% increments. Any ratio from 50% to 200% can be set. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set a zoom ratio → press [Done] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).
  • To return the ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Auto Zoom

You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of the original and the selected record size. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes. Any zoom ratio from 50% to 200% can be set.


Remark
  • You can only select the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen when the resolution is set to 300 x 300 dpi or 600 x 600 dpi.
  • When using Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode for sending a fax, you cannot select the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Auto] → select the record size → press [OK].

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To return the ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Changing Color Modes

This machine comes with two Automatic Color Selection modes. Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) detects and distinguishes color originals from grayscale originals, while Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) detects and distinguishes color originals from black-and-white originals. Depending on the Automatic Color Selection mode that you select, the machine automatically switches between the Full Color and Grayscale modes, or between the Full Color and Black-and-White modes. You can also manually select the Full Color, Grayscale, or Black-and-White mode whenever necessary.


Remark
  • if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the original is always scanned and sent in the Black-and-White mode.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], a long strip originals cannot be selected. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, a long strip originals can be selected regardless of the color mode settings.
  • If color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale], only a zoom ratio of 100% can be used to send documents. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, the zoom ratio can be changed regardless of the color mode settings.
  • To set the color mode to [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Grayscale] when the resolution is set to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • The default setting is 'Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black and White)'.
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).

  • Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale)

If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Grayscale) mode is selected, the machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are scanned in the Grayscale mode.


Remark
  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Grayscale mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'.
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • If the color sections of the original are close to black

  • Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White)

If the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode is selected, the machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are scanned in the Black-and-White mode.


Remark
  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Black-and-White mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'.
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • If the color sections of the original are close to black

  • Full Color

The Full Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white. If either of the Automatic Color Selection modes is selected, originals that contain few color sections, or originals with light color densities and colors close to black may be scanned in the Grayscale or Black-and-White mode. If this happens, select the Full Color mode manually.


Remark
  • If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Full Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.

  • Grayscale

The Grayscale mode always scans in grayscale regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white.

  • Black-and-White

The Black-and-White mode always scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white.


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].
  1. Press the color selection drop-down list → press [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)], [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Black-and-White)], [Full Color], [Grayscale], or [Black and White] → [OK].

When [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, if you specify [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] or [Black and White] as the color mode and press [OK], a message asking for your confirmation to change the file format appears on the screen.

  • If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, the color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] even if you set the color mode to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)]. If you want to send the document in the Automatic Color Selection (Full Color/Black-and-White) mode, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, the color mode is automatically changed to [Grayscale] even if you set the color mode to [Black and White]. If you want to send the document in the Black-and-White mode, change the file format setting to anything other than [PDF (Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)].
  1. Press (Start).


What Are Special Features?

Special features, such as the Frame Erase and Job Build modes, are modes for performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when sending a document.


Remark
  • Depending on the mode, some combinations of modes will not be available. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.

  1. Place your original on the platen glass → specify the destination.
  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option].

  1. Press [Special Features].
  • Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.
  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  1. Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.

To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 4 and 5.

  1. Press (Start).

If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display → press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Scanning starts.

The scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • For modes which have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Frame Erase
    Press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase] → [Cancel].
  • For modes which do not have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Job Build
    Press [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  • To cancel the scan settings, press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Cancel].
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


2-Page Separation

This mode enables you to scan facing pages in a book or bound original and record then onto separate pages.


Remark
  • The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size and Long Strip Original), 2-Sided Original, Different Size Originals, or Binding Erase mode.
  • The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • Place your original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when the original is placed in the feeder.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [2-Page Separation].


Frame Erase

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals.

The following three Frame Erase modes are available.


Remark
  • Combinations of the three Frame Erase modes cannot be set. If you select one of these modes, the previously set mode is canceled.
  • The Frame Erase mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.

  • Original Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the scanned image if the original is smaller than the selected record size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the scanned image.

  • Book Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders, as well as center and contour lines that appear if you are scanning facing pages in a book or bound original.

  • Binding Erase

This mode erases the shadows that appear on the scanned image from binding holes on originals.



Original Frame Erase

Remark
  • The Original Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Auto, Other Size, and Long Strip Original) or Different Size Originals mode.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Original Frame Erase].


  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.


  • Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the original size → press [OK].
  • You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch size, press [Inch-size].


Book Frame Erase

Remark
  • The Book Frame Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Auto, Other Size, and Long Strip Original) or Different Size Originals mode.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Book Frame Erase].


  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.

  • Press [Center] and [Sides] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the size of the bound original when it is open → press [OK].
  • You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch, press [Inch-size].


Binding Erase

Remark
  • The Binding Erase mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size and Long Strip Original) or 2-Page Separation mode.
  • Do not place originals with binding holes into the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
  • If you are using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4 mm.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Binding Erase] → select the border where the binding holes are located.

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize the original as being face up.

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [OK].


Job Build

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are sent as one document after all of the batches have been scanned.


Remark
  • The Job Build mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size or Long Strip Original) mode.
  • The Job Build mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • You cannot change the scan settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary scan settings beforehand, according to the type of originals and the desired result.
  • You can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the Document Size Select (Auto or manual) mode, scan exposure, original type, 2-Sided Original, and color mode.
  • If you place your originals into the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each batch is complete.
  • The maximum number of pages that can be sent at one time is 999. When using the Job Build mode, a message appears to ask you if you want to send the job when 999 pages of originals have been scanned. If you select to send the job, the scanned 999 pages are sent. If you cancel the job, the scanned pages are not sent.
  • If you place different size originals into the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode.
  • If you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals and store them as two-sided documents, divide the originals into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if the first batch consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-Sided Original mode. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode for each batch of originals that you scan.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).

  1. When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals → press (Start).

If you want to change the scan settings, change them before pressing (Start).

You can select the document size. (See "Document Size.")

You can change the scan exposure and the original type settings. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings.")

You can change the color mode setting. (See "Changing Color Modes.")

You can change the one-sided or two-sided original setting. (See "2-Sided Original.")


  • Press [2-Sided Original].

  • Select the type of two-sided original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the type of originals that you place next.

To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

Repeat this step as necessary.

  • [2-Sided Original] is displayed only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) (standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions) is attached.

  1. After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].


Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)

This mode enables you to scan original images with a sharper or softer contrast. To scan originals with text or lines with a sharper contrast, use [High] as the setting. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones with a softer contrast, use [Low] as the setting.

  • Low

If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed image, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. In this case, you can lessen this moiré effect by using [Low] as the setting to produce a clearer image.

  • High

This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is scanned with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited for scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Sharpness].
  1. Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness → press [OK].

To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards [High]. To scan originals containing printed images or other halftones, the setting should be towards [Low].



Image Quality Adjustment

You can adjust the scan exposure to erase the background color of the original, or prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the scanned pages.


Remark
  • If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan exposure on the Scan Settings screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic scan exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the scan exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled, and the automatic scan exposure setting is used instead.
  • The Remove Background mode cannot be used with the Prevent Bleeding mode.

  • Remove Background

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.

  • Prevent Bleeding

This mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the scanned pages.



Remove Background

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].
  1. Press [Remove Background] → [OK].

If the background color remains, or if you want to make the background color darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine adjustments to the density of the background color.

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density of the background color, press [Fine Adjustment] → press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of each color that you want to adjust → press [OK].

For example, if the background color (yellow) of the original remains, press [-] next to <Yellow> to adjust the density.

Adjusting Yellow automatically adjusts the levels of Red and Green to the same level as Yellow. However, adjusting the levels of Red or Green sets Yellow back to its default level.

  • You can adjust the density of each color by pressing [-] or [+]. Press [-] to make the color lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


Prevent Bleeding

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This mode is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].

  1. Specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent.

Details of each item are shown below.

[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages, but light areas on the front side may not be scanned either.
[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the scanned pages, but light areas on the front side of the original are always scanned.

  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent → press [OK].

  • Press [Prevent Bleed-thru] → [Fine Adjustment].
  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent → press [OK] → [OK].
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


User Preset Keys

You can set any possible combination of scan settings and store them in a user preset key in memory. The user preset keys are available for the user to set and store, and can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for storing frequently used scan settings.

Once user preset keys are stored, they are displayed in the Scan Settings drop-down list, and can be selected in the same way as the preset scan modes.

The scan modes stored in preset keys vary, depending on the installed or activated options, as follows:

  • If the Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the System Upgrade RAM is installed:
    Eight scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 600 × 600 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
    Seven scan modes: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 200 × 200 dpi,
    B&W 300 × 300 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 200 × 200 dpi,
    Clr/Gray 300 × 300 dpi,
    B&W 600 × 600 dpi
    (Clr stands for color.)
  • If only the fax board is installed:
    Four scan modes: Black 200 × 100 dpi,
    Black 200 × 200 dpi,
    Black 200 × 400 dpi,
    Black 400 × 400 dpi

Remark
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed when setting the resolution to 200 × 400 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi, or 600 × 600 dpi, select the Black-and-White mode.
  • The scan settings stored as user preset keys in memory are not erased, even if the main power is turned OFF.
  • You can change the settings and assign names for the preset scan keys.


Storing Scan Settings

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → specify the scan settings that you want to store.
  1. Press [Store/Erase].


  1. Select a user preset key for storing the scan settings → press [Store].

The icons that are displayed are explained below:

Icon Color Mode Resolution
Automatic Color Selection 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi,
200 × 200 dpi
Automatic Color Selection 200 × 400 dpi*2, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi*2,
600 × 600 dpi*2
Full Color 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi,
200 × 200 dpi
Full Color 200 × 400 dpi*2, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi*2,
600 × 600 dpi*2
Grayscale, Black-and-White*1 100 × 100 dpi, 150 × 150 dpi, 200 × 100 dpi*1,
200 × 200 dpi*1
Grayscale, Black-and-White*1 200 × 400 dpi*1, 300 × 300 dpi, 400 × 400 dpi*1,
600 × 600 dpi
(Not Stored)
*1 Displayed only if the optional fax board is installed.
*2 Send only if the optional System Upgrade RAM is installed.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can assign a name to a user preset key by pressing [Register Name].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings → press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings → press [Yes].


Naming a User Preset Key

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → [Option] → [Store/Erase].

  1. Select a user preset key to name → press [Register Name].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name changes to P1 to P8.


Erasing Scan Settings

  1. Press the Scan Settings drop-down list → press [Option] → [Store/Erase].

  1. Select the user preset key with the scan settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].


Sending Methods

You can enter the document's name, subject line, message body text, and replay-to address for document to be sent. Documents can be sent without changing any of the send settings, or you can configure them to suit your needs.

When you send a document, you can also send it at a preset time.


Remark
  • If you send an image as a TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) file to a Macintosh, the recipient may not be able to view the image correctly. In this case, send the image as a PDF file or an XPS file, or view the TIFF file with an application, such as Apple QuickTime Player.
  • For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a Server."
  • If Direct Sending mode is set to 'Off' and Preview mode is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


Sending a Fax

You can scan originals and send them as faxes. This section describes the procedure for specifying a sender's name.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  • Memory Sending

All of the originals to be sent are first scanned and read into memory, then sent. This means that you do not need to stay near the machine once the originals have been scanned.


Remark
  • The memory can hold a total of approximately 8,000 pages of sent and received documents.

  • Direct Sending

The machine sends each page of the document to the destination as it is scanned.


Remark
  • With Direct Sending mode, you can send a document of two or more pages only when using the feeder. You can only send one page at a time when you place your original on the platen glass.
  • You can specify only one destination at a time for Direct Sending mode.
  • Memory Sending is automatically set when using Delayed Send or when multiple destinations are specified.
  • If an error occurs or you cancel transmission in the Direct Sending mode, you can check how many pages have been sent to the destination by printing the Fax Activity Report, or on the Log screen for Fax on the System Monitor screen.
  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can select which line to send with.

  1. Place your originals → specify the fax destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [Done].

[Sender's Names (TTI)]:

Press [Sender's Names (TTI)] → select sender's name → press [OK].

The name registered under <00> is selected by default.

If an SSO-H login service is specified, the login name can be selected as the sender's name. For more information on the MEAP login service, see "MEAP/SSO."

[Direct]:

You can select either the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode by pressing [Direct].

To select the Direct Sending mode, press [Direct], and the key lights.

To select the Manual Sending mode, do not press [Direct], and the key remains unlit.

You can also set Direct Sending mode on the screen for specifying a new fax destination. (See "Specifying a Fax Number.")

[Line Selection]:

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, select the line to use for sending.

  • Select [Line 1], [Line 2], [Line 3], or [Auto] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Line 1]: Standard line (The optional fax board is installed)
[Line 2]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Line 3]: Additional line (The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board)
[Auto]: Selects the line according to the settings specified for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  • Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending documents, line 1 is still used for fax information services.
  • When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line settings.
  • When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for sending.
  • If logging in using SSO-H, the login name is displayed in <99> of Sender's Names (TTI).
  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, the unit's name registered for the line that is selected for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is displayed. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  1. Press (Start).

If you are using Direct Sending mode, it is automatically set to 'Off' after the transmission is complete.



Sending an E-Mail Message

You can scan a document and send it as an attached file in an e-mail message. You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address. The scanned document can be sent as a JPEG, TIFF, PDF, or XPS file.


Remark
  • If you are using Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, 2000, or 2003, a sending error may occur when you send an e-mail message in the following cases:
    • When a user is logged in to the machine using the SSO-H
    • When <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> for <Authent./Encryption> in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'
    In these cases, you should add the user logged in to the machine using the SSO-H to [Send on behalf of] in <Delivery Options> in Exchange General. For more information, contact your system administrator.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the e-mail address → press [File Format].

  1. Select a file format.
  1. Press [Send Settings] → specify each setting → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter the name of the document that you want to send → press [OK].

[DocName OCR]:

When [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] is set as the file format, set [DocName OCR] to 'On' to automatically extract the first text block in the document for use as its filename. You can set the number of characters that are extracted for [DocName OCR] in <Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting> in OCR (Text Searchable) Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "OCR (Text Searchable) Settings.")

The first text block extracted from the first page of the document is automatically set as the document name. Characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]", which are invalid when sending a file, will not be extracted.

If a document name is already entered, the extracted text is appended to the end of the filename. Characters over the character limit will be cut off.

The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.

[Subject]:

Press [Subject] → enter a subject of the e-mail message → press [OK].

[Message]:

Press [Message] → enter a message body text → press [OK].

[Reply-to]:

Press [Reply-to] → select a reply-to address → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

The selected destination is set as the reply-to e-mail address.

[E-mail Priority]:

Press the E-mail Priority drop-down list → select a priority for your e-mail message.

  • You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See "E-Mail Addresses.")
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image attached to an e-mail message, and the extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the e-mail message is assigned as follows:
  • If you set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: document name_002.tif
  • If you do not set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: 1231_002.tif
  • If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings is used. To access the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen for selecting the reply-to address only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If a login service is set for the machine and <Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination> in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is displayed as the reply-to address. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see "Network."
  1. Press (Start).


Sending an I-Fax

You can scan a document and send it to a destination via the Internet as an I-fax. An I-fax can only be sent to machines that can receive faxes via the Internet. You can add the document's name, a subject line, message body text, and reply-to address.


Remark
  • If you are using Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5, 2000, or 2003, a sending error may occur when you send an I-fax in the following cases:
    • When a user is logged in to the machine using the SSO-H
    • When <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> for <Authent./Encryption> in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'
    In these cases, you should add the user logged in to the machine using the SSO-H to [Send on behalf of] in <Delivery Options> in Exchange General. For more information, contact your system administrator.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the I-fax destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter a document name → press [OK].

[Subject]:

Press [Subject] → enter a subject of your I-fax → press [OK].

[Message]:

Press [Message] → enter a message body text → press [OK].

[Reply-to]:

Press [Reply-to] → select a reply-to address → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

A Full Mode Delivery Confirmation message will be sent to the selected reply-to address also.

  • You need to store reply-to addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See "E-Mail Addresses.")
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate TIFF image attached to the I-fax. The file name prefix of the image attached to the I-fax is assigned as follows:
  • If you set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: document name_001.tif
  • If you do not set the document's name:
    The file name prefix is generated by the job number (0001 to 4999) and three digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example: 1231_001.tif
  • If you do not enter a subject, the default subject set in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings is used. To access the E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • You cannot select multiple destinations for the reply-to address.
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen for selecting the reply-to address only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If a login service is set for the machine and <Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination> in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the e-mail address of the login user is displayed as the reply-to address. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")
  • For instructions on storing your machine's e-mail address, see "Network."
  1. Press (Start).


Sending a Job to a File Server

You can send a job to any computer that acts as a file server on the network. The following procedure explains how to specify the document's name and the file format of the image you are sending.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the file server's destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select a file format.
  1. Press [Send Settings] → specify a send document name → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter the document name → press [OK].

[DocName OCR]:

When [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] is set as the file format, set [DocName OCR] to 'On' to automatically extract the first text in the document for use as its filename. You can set the number of characters that are extracted for [DocName OCR] in <Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting> in OCR (Text Searchable) Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). You can set from 1 to 24 characters for this setting. (See "OCR (Text Searchable) Settings.")

The first text block extracted from the first page of the document is automatically set as the document name. Characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]", which are invalid when sending a file, will not be extracted.

If a document name is already entered, the extracted text is appended to the end of the filename. Characters over the character limit will be cut off.

The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.

  • If you use characters such as ",", "/", "[", or "]" in the document name, you may not be able to send the file to file servers that run on operating systems that do not recognize such characters.
  • When you are sending documents, each page is sent as a separate image and stored in a file server. The extension of the document matches the file format that you select for sending. The file name prefix of the image attached to the document you are sending is assigned as follows:
  • If you set the document's name and Divide into Pages is turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name, the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example:
    document name_20060410203000_00002.tif
    document name_20060410203000_00002.jpeg
    document name_20060410203000_00002.pdf
    document name_20060410203000_00002.xps
  • If you set the document's name and Divide into Pages is not turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the document's name and the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent.
    Example:
    document name_20060410203000.tif
    document name_20060410203000.pdf
    document name_20060410203000.xps
  • If you do not set the document's name and Divide into Pages is turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent, and the five digits that signify the page number of the image.
    Example:
    20060410203000_00002.tif
    20060410203000_00002.jpeg
    20060410203000_00002.pdf
    20060410203000_00002.xps
  • If you do not set the document's name and Divide into Pages is not turned on:
    The file name prefix is generated by the year, month, day, hour, minute, and second the document is sent.
    Example:
    20060410203000.tif
    20060410203000.pdf
    20060410203000.xps
  1. Press (Start).


Sending a Job to a User Inbox

You can scan a document and store it in a User Inbox. If you include a User Inbox as one of the destinations to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other destinations. The following procedure explains how to specify the document's name when you want to send it to a User Inbox.


Remark
  • A document stored in a User Inbox is automatically erased after three days. However, you can set the time that must elapse before the documents in an inbox are automatically erased. (See "Mail Box.")
  • Additional documents cannot be stored in a User Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • It is recommended that you delete unnecessary documents or image data from the User Inboxes to make space for storing new documents.
  • For more information on User Inboxes, see "Mail Box."

  1. Place your originals → specify the desired User Inbox → press [Send Settings].
  1. Specify a send document name → press [Done].

[Send Doc. Name]:

Press [Send Doc. Name] → enter a document name → press [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Delaying a Send Job

The Delayed Send mode enables you to store a send job in memory, and have it sent at a later time.


Remark
  • You can reserve up to 120 jobs (including 64 fax jobs) for delayed sending. However, the actual number of jobs that can be reserved may be less than 120, depending on the following conditions:
  • If multiple documents are being sent at the same time
  • If large document files are being sent
  • A large amount of memory is being used for the inboxes
  • The number of delayed send jobs which you can reserve may also be reduced if there are other jobs with no Delayed Send settings, or if there are other factors affecting the specified destinations.
  • Once the delayed documents are sent, the documents are automatically deleted from memory.
  • You can check the status, cancel, or change the destinations of documents for which a preset send time has been specified. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen.")
  • If multiple fax jobs reach their delayed send time simultaneously, documents are sent in the order indicated in the illustration below.


  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Press [Delayed Send].

  1. Enter the send time using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you set a time earlier than the current time, the document will be sent at that time on the next day.

  • If you make a mistake when entering the send time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.
  1. Press [OK] → [Done].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel the currently set Delayed Send settings, press [Send Settings] → [Delayed Send] → [Cancel].


Job Done Notice

You can send a job done notice to a specified e-mail address to notify you when a send job is complete.


Remark
  • To send a job done notice, you need to store e-mail addresses in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Press [Job Done Notice].

  1. Select the destination where the job done notice is to be sent → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.
  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel this setting, press [Send Settings] → [Job Done Notice] → [Cancel].


Previewing Originals

This mode enables you to preview the scanned data of your originals and to check the page count before sending your document. You can verify the scanned data of your originals on the Preview screen.


Remark
  • The Preview mode cannot be used when sending a fax document with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  1. Press [Preview] → [Done].

[Preview] is lit when it is on.

[Preview] is not lit when it is off.

  1. Press (Start).
  • If the Preview key is not lit, the Preview display setting is turned off, and the Preview screen is not displayed. In this case, the scanned data is sent to the specified destination when scanning is complete.
  1. Press [] or [] to specify the page that you want to verify.

  1. Select whether to erase the page.

To erase the page, press [Page Erase].

If you do not want to erase the page, proceed to step 9.


  1. Select [Erase Single Page] or [Erase Pages Consecutively] → select the pages you want to erase.

  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the page you want to erase.

  • Press [First Page] and [Last Page] to specify the first and the last page of the range you want to erase by pressing [-] or [+].

  1. Press [Start].
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Verify the images → press [Start Send].

You can press [] (reduce) or [] (enlarge) to zoom in or out.

You can press [], [], [], or [] to specify the area to display when you zoom in or out on the page.

When your image is enlarged or reduced, you can see the general location of which area you are previewing with (above the reduce and enlarge icons).

  • The number of scanned pages is displayed on the Send Process screen.


Stamping Originals

The machine can print a stamp (approximately 3 mm in diameter) on the front side of scanned and sent originals.

Vertical Placement

Horizontal Placement


Remark
  • The Stamp mode cannot be used with the Document Size Select (Other Size), or 2-Page Separation mode.
  • The Stamp mode cannot be used when sending a fax document in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode.
  • The stamp is applied to the originals that are scanned from the feeder.

  1. Place your originals in the feeder → specify the destination → press [Send Settings].
  • You can also set the Stamp mode by pressing [Stamp] in Edit Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions).
  1. Press [Stamp] → [Done].

To cancel the Stamp mode, press [Stamp] again.

  1. Press (Start).


Setting the File Format to Send a Document in

You can select TIFF, JPEG, PDF, or XPS as the file format to send a document in. If you select PDF as the file format, you can also specify the Trace and Smooth, Compact, OCR (Text Searchable), Encrypt, and/or Add Digital Signatures modes.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • For instructions on specifying a destination by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol), see "Using a Server."
  • Specify an e-mail or file server destination.
  • If Direct Sending mode is set to 'Off' and Preview mode is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


Setting the File Format

You can send a scanned document to a file server or as an e-mail attachment. The following procedure explains how to set the file format of the sent document.


  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select a file format.

[File Formats]:

[TIFF/PDF Auto Select]: Sends the file in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file format, [TIFF/PDF] is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen.
[TIFF/XPS Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or XPS (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file format, [TIFF/XPS] is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen.
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select]: Sends images in either the TIFF (Black-and-White) or JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format. If you select this file format, [TIFF/JPEG] is displayed on the Send Basic Features screen.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format regardless of the color mode. You can also specify [Trace & Smooth], [Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], [Encrypt], and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[XPS]: Sends the file in the XPS format regardless of the color mode. You can also specify [Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[JPEG]: Sends the file in the JPEG format, if you select a color mode other than Black-and-White.
[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format, only if you select the Black-and-White mode.

  • Press [OK].

If you select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select] or [TIFF/XPS Auto Select], the Divide into Pages mode is not available.

If you select [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select] or [JPEG], [Divide into Pages] is set to 'On'.


  • Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

You can also select the type of PDF or XPS file from <PDF Options> or <XPS Options>.

For information on the type of PDF or XPS file, see the following sections. ([Trace & Smooth] and [Encrypt] can be selected only if PDF is selected.)

  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.

  1. Press (Start).


Trace & Smooth

This mode enables you to convert the text and line drawings of a scanned image to scalable outline data. The extracted outline data can be used in Adobe Illustrator. The smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data, so it has less of a jagged edge when seen on a PC monitor or in print.

If you select [Trace & Smooth] as the PDF file format, [Compact] is automatically set to 'On'. You can also set [OCR (Text Searchable)]. The Trace and Smooth mode cannot be set by itself. If you select [Trace & Smooth], [PDF (Trace)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen.


Remark
  • If you send a trace and smooth PDF, select any of the following combination of a color mode and resolution:
  • Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Full Color and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Grayscale and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Long strip originals (432 mm or longer) cannot be used with the Trace & Smooth mode.
  • If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, the machine automatically recognizes which parts of the document are text or line drawings. the machine may not recognize which parts of the scanned document are text and line drawings correctly, depending on the scanned document.
  • If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, smoothing is only performed on the areas of the document that are correctly recognized as text.
  • The text and background of a PDF containing outline data may become misaligned or text and line drawings may not be displayed when opened in Adobe Illustrator, depending on the version of Adobe Illustrator used to open the PDF.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • The Trace & Smooth mode cannot be set by itself. If you select [Trace & Smooth], [Compact] is automatically set to 'On'.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Press [Trace & Smooth].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • If [Trace & Smooth] is selected for the PDF file format, the resolution is automatically changed to [300 × 300 dpi]. If the Color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the Color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want to send the document with the resolution setting and the Color mode that you specify, change the PDF file format to anything other than [Trace & Smooth] or [Compact].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format in Standard Send Settings in Edit Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."

  1. Press .


Sending a Compact PDF or XPS

This mode enables you to send files containing text originals or text/photo originals using a higher compression ratio than normal PDF or XPS files. If you select [Compact] as the PDF or XPS file format, it is recommended that you set the original type setting to either 'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type. If you select [Compact], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen. You can also select [OCR (Text Searchable)].


Remark
  • If you send a compact PDF or XPS file, select any of the following combination of a color mode and resolution:
  • Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale) and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Full Color and 300 × 300 dpi
  • Grayscale and 300 × 300 dpi
  • If the document is a long strip original (850 mm or longer), you cannot send a compact PDF or XPS file. (Long strip originals of up to 630 mm can be scanned using the scanning area of the machine, but long strip originals longer than 630 mm can only be received by I-fax, etc.)
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [Compact].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • If [Compact] is selected for the PDF or XPS file format, the resolution is automatically changed to [300 × 300 dpi]. If the color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Black-and-White)] or [Black and White], the color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want to send the document with the resolution setting and the color mode that you specify, change the PDF or XPS file format to anything other than [Compact] or [Trace & Smooth].
  • If [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format in Standard Send Settings in Edit Standard Send Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Compact)], [PDF (Trace)], or [XPS (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, documents can be sent only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • If you select [Compact], you can also set [OCR (Text Searchable)] at the same time. In that case, [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."
  1. Press (Start).


Sending a Searchable PDF or XPS

This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) to extract data that can be recognized as text from the scanned image, and add it as a transparent layer of text to create a PDF or XPS file that is searchable.


Remark
  • PDF(OCR) or XPS(OCR) and Long Strip Original (432 mm or more) cannot be set at the same time.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [OCR (Text Searchable)].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • Even if [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] is selected as the file format, text may not be detected correctly, depending on the background color, style and size of the characters in the image.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."
  • If you select [PDF (OCR)] or [XPS (OCR)] as the file format, and <Smart Scan> in OCR (Text Searchable) Settings in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the orientation of the original is detected, and the document is automatically rotated, if necessary, before it is sent.
  • If you select [OCR (Text Searchable)], you can also set [Compact] at the same time. In that case, [PDF (Compact)] or [XPS (Compact)] is displayed as the file format on the Send Basic Features screen.
  1. Press (Start).


Encrypting PDF Files

This mode enables you to encrypt PDF files that you send to an e-mail address or file server for enhanced security. If a password is set for a PDF file, only users who enter the correct password at the other party's machine can open, print, or change the received PDF.


Remark
  • This mode can be used only if an e-mail address or file server is specified as the destination. If a fax number, I-fax address, or inbox is specified as the destination, you cannot send the job as an encrypted PDF file.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
  • The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be set at the same time.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Press [Encrypt].

  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Encryption Level>:

Press the Encryption Level drop-down list → select [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later], [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later], or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].

Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption level is set to [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later].

Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption level is set to [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].

[Password Required to Open a Document]:

Select this key to set a password for opening the received PDF files. You can specify a password by pressing [Password to Open a Doc.].

The received encrypted PDF files cannot be opened without entering the password.

[Password to Open a Doc.]:

Press [Password to Open a Doc.] → enter the password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen → press [OK].

[Password Required to Change Permiss.]:

Select [Password Required to Change Permiss.] to set a password for printing or editing the received PDF file. When selecting this key, you can specify detailed settings, such as [Allow Printing], [Allow Changes], and [Enable Accessibility, Copy, Extraction of Images]. Set the password in [Permission Password].

If [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set, the received encrypted PDF files cannot be printed or edited without entering the password.

[Permission Password]:

Press [Permission Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen → press [OK].

<Allow Printing>:



If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected as the encryption level

Press the Allow Printing drop-down list → select whether to allow printing of the received PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

  • [Do Not Allow]:
Printing is not allowed. Even if [Do Not Allow] is selected, the document can be printed if it is opened with the permission password if the recipient is using Adobe Acrobat 5 or earlier.
  • [Allow (Low Res. only)]:
Only low-resolution printing is allowed. ([Allow (Low Res. only)] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Allow]:
Printing is allowed.

<Allow Changes>:



If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] is selected as the encryption level

Press the Allow Changes drop-down list → select whether to allow changing of the received PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

  • [Do Not Allow]:
Changing of documents is not allowed.
  • [Insert, Delete, or Rotate Pages]:
Inserting, deleting and rotating pages is allowed. ([Insert, Delete, or Rotate Pages] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Add Digital Signatures]:
Adding digital signatures is allowed. ([Add Digital Signatures] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Add Comments and Digital Signatures]:
Adding comments and digital signatures is allowed.
  • [Changes but Comment Add/Page Extract.]:
Changing of documents except for adding comments and extracting pages is allowed. ([Changes except Comment Add/Page Extract.] is displayed only if [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Changes but Page Extraction]:
Changing of documents except for extracting pages is allowed.

[Enable Accessibility, Copy, Extraction of Images]:

You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

If [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected, you can select this setting. Select this key to allow copying of images and page extraction. In addition, it also has a function for reading aloud text inside a document for the visually impaired.

If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected, [Enable Copying and Extraction of Image and Text] and [Enable Access for the Visually Impaired] are displayed and you can set these settings separately.

  • If you did not enter a password in [Password to Open a Doc.] or [Permission Password], enter the password in the screen that appears after pressing (Start). You can store the settings for encrypted PDF files in a favorites button. If you do not want to set a password for [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] in a favorites button, leave their text boxes blank.
  • If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall], [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] become blank.
  • You cannot set the same password for both [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password].
  • [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] are displayed as asterisks (********) on the Encrypted PDF screen.
  • Even if you set restrictions for a PDF file with [Permission Password], some of these restrictions may be ignored if the recipient opens the PDF with certain software.
  • To open or print a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To change a PDF file or to enable copying and extraction of images, Adobe Acrobat is required.
  • Adding digital signatures and comments, and the ability to insert, delete, and rotate pages are features of Adobe Acrobat.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter on the Password Required to Open a Document screen and the Permission Password screen is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")

  • Select [Password Required to Open a Document] → enter a password to open a document in [Password to Open a Doc.] → select [Password Required to Change Permiss.] → enter a password in [Permission Password].

If a password is already stored, the stored password is recalled when [Encrypt] is pressed.

  • Press [Store Password] → [Yes].
  • Passwords can only be stored if logging in using SSO-H. If SSO-H is not used when logging in, [Store Password] is not appeared.
  • One password can be stored for each user. If a password is already stored, the password is overwritten when a new password is stored.
  • If [Password to Open a Doc.] or [Permission Password] is left empty, the password already stored is erased.
  • If logged in using SSO-H:
  • When sending using favorites buttons set to Encrypted PDF, if a password is already stored in [Store Password], a message is displayed confirming whether to use the password stored in [Store Password] rather than the password set for the favorites buttons. If [Yes] is selected, the password stored in [Store Password] is used when sending. If [No] is selected, the password set for the favorites buttons is used when sending.
  • If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall], you can set to recall the stored password.
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • If fax, I-fax, or User Inbox destinations are specified, the message telling you the send job is canceled appears. Press [OK] → check the destinations.
  • To cancel the settings, press [File Format] → [Encrypt] → [Cancel].


Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF or XPS

This mode enables you to send PDF or XPS documents with a digital signature.

You can add the following two types of digital signatures:


  • Device Signature

This mode uses the device signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify which device scanned it. The recipient can verify the device that signed the document, and whether the document has been changed after it was signed.

  • User Signature

This mode uses information about the user currently logged in to the machine using an SSO-H login service and the user signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify which user signed it. The recipient can verify the user that signed the document, and whether the document has been changed after it was signed.


Remark
  • You can add only a digital signature to documents sent in either the PDF, PDF (Trace), PDF (Compact), PDF (OCR), XPS, XPS (Compact), or XPS (OCR) file format. You cannot add a digital signature to documents sent in the TIFF or JPEG format.
  • If an error occurs when sending a multiple page PDF or XPS document with a digital signature, the document will not be able to be opened by the recipient.
  • If you select to add both a device signature and user signature, the device signature is added before the user signature.
  • If the recipient verifies a PDF that has had both a device signature and user signature added to it using software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat), only the user signature can be verified. The device signature causes the document to be handled as if it has been altered.
  • If you change the file format to a format other than 'PDF' or 'XPS' after setting to add a digital signature, a message confirming whether you want to change the file format is displayed. If you change the file format, the digital signatures you have set to add are canceled.
  • For information on validating certificates, registering certificates in the trusted certificates list, and verifying signatures on the recipient side, see the documentation for the software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) or the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer).


Adding a Device Signature

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
  • You can only add device signatures to PDF or XPS documents if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated and you have generated a device signature certificate and key pair in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more information, see "Network."
  • <Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability of a PDF or XPS file with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and other device signature information, see "Confirming the Device Signature Certificate" or "Network."
  • If the SSO-H login service is set and an e-mail address is registered for the user, in addition to adding the device signature, the [Author] property of the PDF or XPS file is set to the e-mail address of the user.

  1. Place your originals → specify the destination → press [File Format].

  1. Select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [Add Digital Signatures].

  1. Press [Device Signature] → [OK] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Adding a User Signature

You can add a user signature using information about the user currently logged in to the machine using a login service and the user signature certificate and private key inside the machine.


Remark
  • You cannot forward a received fax/I-fax document with a user signature from the machine.
  • This mode is available only under the following conditions:
  • The optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.
  • A user certificate and key pair for each user is issued by the certificate authority.
  • For information on the certificate authorities that you can use for issuing user certificates for each user, see the Before Using the Digital User Signature Kit included with the Digital User Signature Kit.
  • The following conditions are necessary to add a user signature to a PDF or XPS file:
  • SSO-H login service must be set for the machine.
  • A user certificate must be installed in the machine using the Remote UI. (See "Remote UI.")

  1. Log in to the machine using a login service.

For more information on the SSO-H login service, see "Basic Operations."

  1. Place your originals and specify the destination → press [File Format] → select [PDF] or [XPS] → press [Add Digital Signatures].

  1. Press [User Signature] → [OK] → [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Job Recall

You can recall the last three addresses, scan settings, and send settings which have been set, and then send your documents.


Remark
  • The machine considers any one of the following operations a send job:
  • When settings, such as the destination, scan settings, and send settings, are specified, and the control panel power switch, (Start) or (Reset) is pressed
  • When the Auto Clear mode activates or after the Auto Sleep time has elapsed, after send settings are specified
  • The Standard mode is not stored in Recall memory.
  • Identical send settings are stored only once in Recall memory.
  • If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.
  • If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all stored settings in the Recall mode are erased, regardless of the destination type.
  • The three most recent settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the main power is turned OFF.

  1. Place your originals → press [Recall].
  1. Select [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before] → confirm the settings → press [OK].

  • If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, the unit name registered for the line that is selected for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is displayed. (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")
  • When [Auto] is selected for <Line Selection>, the user name displayed/printed on the recipient's machine will be the user name registered for the line which was used for sending.
  • You can change the settings in a recalled send job.
  • If there are multiple destinations stored in Recall memory, the order of the destinations shown in the list may not correspond to the order in which they were set.
  • If you recall the Encrypted PDF settings by pressing [Recall] when logging in using SSO-H, you can set to recall passwords that are stored.
  1. Press (Start).
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")


Receiving Print, Fax, and I-Fax Documents

  • Receiving Print Jobs

The machine receives and prints print jobs sent from a computer.

  • Receiving I-Fax Documents

The I-fax function is similar to e-mail. However, instead of sending and receiving messages over the Internet, I-fax enables you to send and receive scanned document images via the Internet.

You can set the machine to automatically forward received I-fax documents to specified destinations. For more information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding Settings."


Remark
  • You can only receive I-fax documents if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If files (images) that are attached to received I-fax documents are not compatible with this machine, the machine does not process (print, forward, or store) these files, but erases them instead. The names of the erased files and the message "Could not create image" are printed with the text of the received I-fax.
  • If a received I-fax document does not contain an e-mail message, and contains only a TIFF file attachment, the sender's name and subject of the e-mail (each up to 24 characters) are printed as the header of the TIFF image.

  • Receiving Fax Documents

This machine's Super G3 fax function is compatible with most Super G3 fax machines used in office environments.

You can automatically forward received fax documents to specified destinations. For more information on specifying forwarding settings, see "Forwarding Settings."


Remark
  • You can only receive fax documents if the optional fax board is installed.


Receiving Documents

  1. When documents are being received, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel flashes a green light.
  • During reception, the transaction number and information related to the sender are displayed on the touch panel display.
  1. When document reception is complete, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel maintains a steady green light. This indicates that documents are stored in memory.
  • The Processing/Data indicator flashes or maintains a steady green light even when the machine enters the Sleep mode.
  • The Error indicator flashes a red light when either the amount of available memory is low or paper needs to be loaded into a paper drawer.
  1. The document is printed.

The Processing/Data indicator goes out when documents stored in memory are printed.

  • If there is no paper on which the received documents can be printed, the received documents are stored in memory.
  • The memory can hold a total of approximately 8,000 pages of sent and received documents.
  • Documents which have been stored in memory because the paper has run out, are automatically printed when paper is loaded into a paper drawer.
  • If a printing error occurs, the Error indicator flashes a red light.


Processing Received Documents

When the Machine receives I-fax/fax documents, they are processed as shown below:

*1 Received I-fax documents can be forwarded if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*2 Received fax documents can be forwarded if the optional fax board is installed.
*3 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the documents are forwarded to their forwarding destinations regardless of the reception password setting.
*4 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*5 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*6 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), all received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination selected for Forward w/o Conditions.
*7 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, it is printed after the paper jam is cleared, paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*8 If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
*9 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen):
  • [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
  • [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned 'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.
*10 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully.
*11 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully. However, if <Notice Only for Errors> is also specified, a notification e-mail is sent only when the document fails to be forwarded.
*12 The received Fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox by specifying the Confidential Fax Inbox as forwarding destination. Only the received documents that match the specified forwarding conditions can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox.

Remark
  • If the memory is full, no additional jobs can be processed.
  • For information on the following settings, see their respective sections:


Setting the Memory Lock Mode

You can set to store the received fax/I-fax documents in the Memory RX Inbox without printing them. After verifying the documents on the Memory RX Inbox screen, you can print or send them whenever necessary.

If you set Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock mode to 'On', you can turn Fax Memory Lock or I-Fax Memory Lock for documents sent to the Memory RX Inbox 'On' or 'Off' as necessary. If Fax Memory Lock or I-Fax Memory Lock mode is set to 'On', received documents are stored in the Memory RX Inbox instead of being printed. (See "Mail Box.")


Remark
  • Additional documents cannot be stored in the Memory RX Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents have been stored in the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages have been stored in the inboxes
  • To receive documents in memory, you must first set Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock in Memory RX Inbox Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")


Forwarding Received Documents

If you receive a fax/I-fax document, and it conforms to the specified forwarding conditions, the document is automatically forwarded to the specified destination. You can register the forwarding conditions and destinations in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding Settings.")


Remark
  • To be able to forward received documents, you must first set Validate/Invalidate to 'On' in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Forwarding Settings.")


Erasing Received Documents

You can erase any received document stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the Confidential Fax Inboxes. If the memory is full, the machine cannot receive any more documents. It is recommended that you erase unnecessary documents as often as possible.


Remark
  • Additional documents cannot be stored in the Memory RX Inbox or the Confidential Fax Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents have been stored in the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages have been stored in the inboxes

  1. Press [Mail Box] → select [Memory RX Inbox] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Memory RX Inbox]: To select a received document that has been stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: To select a received document that has been forwarded to a Confidential Fax Inbox.
  1. Select the desired inbox and the document that you want to erase → press [Erase].

In the example above, Memory RX Inbox is specified.

To erase multiple documents in the memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox, select and erase one document at a time.

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
  • If the document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the () icon.
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked mark () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press [Send].


Available Paper Sizes

When received documents are printed, they are printed from the paper drawer that has the same paper size as the received document. If paper of the correct size is not available, the machine automatically selects a different paper size in the following order. (If all the switches in Select Drawer in RX Setting under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'). The paper size is automatically selected in the same order, even if paper runs out during printing.

  • Available Paper Sizes for Received Documents
A3 originals A3 → B4* → A4* → A4R*
B4 originals B4 → A3 → A4* → A4R* → B5 x 3 → B5R x 3
A4 originals A4 → A4R → B4 → A3 → A5R x 3 → B5 x 2 → B5R x 2
B5 originals B5 → B5R → A4 → A4R → B4 → A3
A5 originals A5R → A4 → A4R → B5 → B5R → B4 → A3

* Received documents are automatically reduced before being printed on the paper size indicated.

Remark
  • Received documents can be printed on the following paper sizes and paper types:
  • Paper Sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R
  • Paper Types: plain, recycled, color, or irregular paper types (paper with the following settings; Basis Weight: 64 to 90 g/m2, Type: Normal, Finish: Uncoated or Recycled.)
  • You can specify each paper drawer for the fax/I-fax function. The default setting is 'On', except for the stack bypass. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • You can set the machine to reduce received documents from 75% to 97% in 1% increments if the document is larger than any of the available paper sizes. (See "Reducing a Received Document.")
  • You can set the machine to print received documents on both sides of the paper. (See "2-Sided Printing.")
  • Received documents are output face down, in the order in which the pages are received.


Sending with a Subaddress

If the destination fax machine is compatible with ITU-T (International Telecommunications Union-Telecommunications Sector) standard subaddresses and passwords, you can send or receive documents with increased security by attaching a subaddress and a password to all of your fax transactions.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Place your originals → press [New Address] → [Fax] → enter the fax number.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <P> appears at the end of the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number. (See "Pause Time.")
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch Exchange) which accepts only tone signals. (See "Fax Information Services.")
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press when an incorrect number is entered. The last number entered is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.
[R]: Press to use the R-Key. (See "Special Dialing.")
[Direct]: Press to send documents directly to the recipient. If you do not select Direct Sending mode, Memory Sending mode is used. (See "Sending a Fax.")
[Next]: Press to specify another destination after specifying the first destination using - (numeric keys).
[Option]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board. Press to set the subaddress and password, or to select the line type of the additional line.
[Subaddress]: Displayed if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed. Press to set an optional subaddress and password.
[On-hook]: Press to use tone dialing. (See "Fax Information Services.")
  • You cannot insert a pause at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.
  1. Press [Subaddress].

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, press [Option].

  1. Press [Subaddress] or [Password] → enter the subaddress and password using - (numeric keys), , and → press [OK].

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

  1. Press (Start).
  • If [Preview] on the Send Settings screen is set, you can verify the images from the Preview screen before sending your document. (See "Previewing Originals.")


Special Dialing

Enter fax numbers as described below when the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 is connected to an extension, or when you want to enter international fax numbers.

  • Calling from an Extension

When calling an outside line from an extension, the outside line access number (such as 0) is normally dialed before the fax number of the destination. In the same manner, when the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 is connected to an extension, the outside line access number needs to be entered before fax numbers. You can also enter a pause time (i.e., the amount of time the machine waits after dialing the outside line access number when calling from an extension) together with these numbers.

  • International Dialing

You can enter a pause time (i.e., the amount of time the machine waits after dialing the international fax number) together with an international fax number.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.


Calling from an Extension

This section describes only the procedure for entering fax numbers.


Remark

  1. Place your originals → press [New Address] → [Fax].
  1. Press [R] → [Pause] → enter a fax number.

Example: Enter 516XXXXXXX as the fax number.

Press [Pause] after entering the outside line access number ('R' in the above example) and before entering the fax number.

Enter the pause time equivalent in length to the time required for the outside line dial tone to be heard after the outside line access number is called.

Press [Backspace] when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.

  • The pause time differs in length, depending on whether it is entered in the middle or end of a fax number.
  • The pause time entered in the middle of a fax number (lower-case p) is set to four seconds long by default. This length can be changed to any number between 1 and 15 seconds. (See "Pause Time.")
  • The pause time entered at the end of a fax number (upper-case P) is set to 10 seconds long. (This length cannot be changed.)
  • Two or more pauses can be entered consecutively.
  1. Press [OK].


Entering International Fax Numbers

Follow the procedure below to enter pauses with international fax numbers.


  1. Place your originals → press [New Address] → [Fax].
  1. Enter the international fax number → press [Pause].

Example:

International Dialing Code: 010

Country code: 1

Area code: 516

Fax number: XXX-XXXX

[Pause]: Enter the pause time equivalent in length to the time required for the dial tone to be heard after dialing is completed.

[Backspace]: Press when a wrong number is entered. The number immediately to the left of the cursor is deleted, enabling you to enter the correct number.

  • The pause time differs in length, depending on whether it is entered in the middle or end of a fax number.
  • The pause time entered in the middle of a fax number (lower-case p) is set to four seconds long by default. This length can be changed to any number between 1 and 15 seconds.(See "Pause Time.")
  • The pause time entered at the end of a fax number (upper-case P) is set to 10 seconds long. (This length cannot be changed.)
  • Two or more pauses can be entered consecutively.
  • The location of a pause and the actual pause time may differ depending on the telephone system. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer or your local telephone company for further details.
  1. Press [OK].

The specified destination appears in the destination list on the Send Basic Features screen.



Fax Information Services

Many fax information services for banks, airline reservations, hotel reservations, etc., require tone dialing for their services. If your machine is connected to a rotary pulse telephone line, follow the procedure below to temporarily set the machine for tone dialing.


Remark
  • Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • When you use fax information services, you cannot specify a destination that is stored in the Address Book or use the Job Recall mode.

  1. Press [New Address] → [Fax].

  1. Press [On-hook] → enter the number of the fax information service using - (numeric keys).

  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, the line will be disconnected if you press [On-hook], and then remove the control card while the line is engaged.

  • Select the desired one-touch button.

One-touch buttons are assigned a three digit number. To specify a destination using a one-touch button's three digit number, enter the three digit number using - (numeric keys).

  • Press [OK].

  1. When your call is answered and you hear the recorded message of the fax information service, press [Tone].

If you are already using this machine with tone dialing, this step is not necessary.

The volume of the dial tone can be adjusted by pressing [] or [].

  1. Enter the numbers requested by the fax information service using - (numeric keys), , and .
  • If you require more information about the service, contact the company providing the service.
  1. Press [RX Start] if you require a faxed copy of the information.

If you do not require a faxed copy of the information, press [End].



Checking/Changing the Status of Send Jobs

This section describes how to check/change the status of send jobs. For more information, see "What This Machine Can Do."


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, send jobs to e-mail, I-fax, and file servers can be checked/changed.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax jobs can be checked/changed.
  • The maximum number of send jobs that are displayed on the Send Status screen is 120.
  • The maximum number of send and receive jobs that are displayed on the Send Log screen is 100.


Checking Send Job Details

You can check detailed information of any send job, such as the destination and the date and time the job was specified.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Send] → [Status] or [Log].


  1. Select a job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].
  • You cannot check the status of fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed. To check their statuses, see the Send Job Status screen for Fax.
  • If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when multiple destinations are selected for a send job, <Finished.> is displayed for those destinations to which the job was sent successfully, and <Error> is displayed for those destinations that had transmission errors. When multiple destinations are simultaneously specified for a send job, and you select and cancel the transmission to any one of those destinations, or the retransmission of an error job or an interrupted job is completed successfully, information on all of those simultaneously specified destinations is displayed in the log.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. In this case, the job concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the Status screen until the time set for <Full Mode TX Timeout> in E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could not be verified.

  • Check the details.

To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the Destination.")

To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job.")


  • Check the details.
  • Press [Broadcast List].
  • Check the status for each destination.

To change the destination, press [Change Destination]. (See "Changing the Destination.")

To resend the job, press [Resend]. (See "Resending a Job.")


  • Check the details.


Changing the Destination

You can change the destination of a send job from the System Monitor screen.


Remark
  • You can only change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error or jobs that have been set with the Delayed Send mode and are still waiting in the send queue.
  • To be able to change the destination for send jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Automatic Document Deletion.")
  • You cannot change more than one destination at the same time. You also cannot change the destination of a whole group at once.
  • You cannot change the destination of a send job if another job with the same job number is being sent or is waiting in the send queue. This restriction does not apply to Delayed Send jobs.
  • You cannot change the destinations of fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed.
  • If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', you cannot change the destination, regardless of the destination type.
  • You cannot change the destination type. For example, you cannot change the destination of a job from an e-mail address to an I-fax address. Also, you cannot change the destination of a job from a fax number to a User Inbox.
  • If a job is specified to be stored in a User Inbox, you cannot change the inbox in which to store the job.

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Send] → [Status].

  1. Select the job whose destination you want to change → press [Details].

  1. Select the destination that you want to change.

  • Press [Change Destination].

  • Press [Broadcast List].
  • Select the destination that you want to change → press [Change Destination].

  1. Change the destination.

The types of destinations and the settings that you can change are:

  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
  • E-mail: E-mail Address
  • I-Fax: I-Fax Address, Mode, Send Via Server (On/Off)
  • File: Host Name, Folder Path, User, Password
  • If the optional fax board is installed:
  • Fax: Fax Number
  1. Press [OK].


Resending a Job

You can resend jobs that are canceled due to transmission errors.


Remark
  • To be able to resend jobs that have been canceled due to a transmission error, you must first set Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Automatic Document Deletion.")
  • You cannot resend fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed.

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Send] → [Status].

  1. Select the job that you want to resend → press [Details].

  1. Select the destination to resend the job to.

  • Press [Resend].

  • Press [Broadcast List].
  • Select the destination to resend the job to → press [Resend].
  • The job is placed in the send queue if there is another job being sent or waiting to be processed.


Printing the Send Job Status/Log

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Send] → select [Status] or [Log].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Status]: Press this key if you want to print the send job list (Send Job List).
[Log]: Press this key if you want to print the send job log (Activity Report).
  1. Press [Print List].
  • You cannot print the Send Job List for fax jobs sent with the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver because the statuses of those jobs are not displayed.
  • The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed
  • The send job status/log can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Basic Operations.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Checking the Status of Fax Jobs

This section describes how to check the status of fax jobs. For more information, see "What This Machine Can Do."


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • The maximum number of jobs that are displayed is:
  • Send Job Status screen: 64 jobs
  • Received Job Status screen: 3 jobs
  • Log screen: 100 jobs


Checking Fax Job Details

You can check the detailed information of any fax job, such as the destination and the date and time the job was specified.


  1. Press [System Monitor].


  1. Press [Fax] → [Send Job Status], [Received Job Status], or [Log].


  • Select the job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

  • Press [Details].
  • You can select between three received fax jobs to check.

  • Select the job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

  1. Check the details of the selected job.

If you selected a job with multiple destinations in [Send Job Status], press [Broadcast List] → check the status of each destinations → press [Done].



Printing the Fax Activity Report

You can print the Fax Activity Report, which includes the fax transmission's start time, destination, job number, transmission mode, number of pages, and transmission result.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Fax] → [Log].

  1. Press [Print List].
  • The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
  • : A job for which a Fax Activity Report has already been printed
  • : A job for which a Fax Activity Report has not yet been printed
  • The Fax Activity Report can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Checking the Status of Receive and Forwarded Jobs

You can check the details of received documents stored in memory, as well as the status of forwarded jobs and receive jobs.


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', <Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen are not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • Up to 100 documents for the total of send and receive jobs combined can be displayed on the job log (Activity Report (RX)) screen.


Checking Receive Job Details

You can check the detailed information of any received job, such as the destination and the date and time the job was received.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → select a job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

  1. Check the details of the selected job.


Printing the Receive Job Log

You can print the receive job log (Activity Report (RX)).


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → [Print List].
  • The icons that are displayed on the left side of the list are explained below:
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has already been printed
  • : A job for which an Activity Report has not yet been printed
  • The receive job log can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Checking the Arrival of a Receive Job

The machine regularly checks for the arrival of an I-fax. However, you can check for the arrival of an I-fax at any time by performing the procedure below.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs].

The screen below is displayed while the machine is checking for the arrival of an I-fax.

  • To be able to use [Checking RX of I-Fax Jobs], you must first set the POP setting in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On' so that you can receive documents using POP. (See "Network.")


Checking the Status of Jobs That Have Been Forwarded

You can check the details of jobs that have been forwarded, depending on the forwarding settings.


  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Receive] → [Forwarding Status].

  1. Select a job whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].
  • If 120 send jobs have accumulated on the job status screen, jobs that are waiting to be forwarded are displayed on the Forwarding Status screen.
  1. Check the details of the selected job.


What Are Additional Functions?

Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.


Remark
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are not changed when you press (Reset).

  1. Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.

  1. Select an Additional Functions setting.

If you select [System Settings] and the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, press [System Settings] → enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys) → press (Log In/Out).

If a password has been set for the Address Book in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings, press [Address Book Settings] → enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK]. (See "Address Book Password.")

  1. Press a mode key to specify its settings.

  • Some screens are divided into several screens, press [] or [] to scroll through the lists.

  1. Specify the desired mode → press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Send Basic Features screen appears.


Communications Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Communications Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • Common Settings
Item Settings Delivered
TX Settings
Unit Name for E-Mail/I-Fax*2 24 characters maximum No
Erase Failed TX On*1, Off Yes
Data Compression Ratio*2 High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio Yes
Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors Always Print, Store/Print, Off*1 Yes
Photo Mode On, Off*1 Yes
Retry Times*2 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1 Yes
Edit Standard Send Settings If only the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated:
  • Scanning Mode: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi*1
  • File Format: TIFF/PDF Auto Select*1
  • Stamp: Off
If only the optional fax board is installed:
  • Scanning Mode: Black 200 dpi*1
  • Stamp: Off
If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed:
  • Scanning Mode: Clr/B&W 200 × 200 dpi*1
  • File Format: TIFF/PDF Auto Select*1
  • Stamp: Off
No
Register Favorites Button Register/Edit, Erase: M1 to M18
Display Comment: On, Off*1
Yes
Display Confirmation for Favorites Button On*1, Off No
Image Level for High Compression*2 Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode:
  • Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Image Level in Text Mode:
  • Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
OCR (Text Searchable) Settings*3 Smart Scan: On*1, Off
Number of Characters for Document Name Setting:
1 to 24 characters; 24 characters*1
Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings*3 Outline Graphics: On*1, Off
Graphics Recognition Level: Normal*1, Moderate, High
Background Image Level: Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
Check Device Signature Certificate*4 Certificate Details: Certificate Verification No
Check User Signature Certificate*5 Certificate Details: Certificate Verification No
Default Screen for Send Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons, New Address*1 No
TX Terminal ID On*1;

If the optional fax board is installed:
  • TX Terminal ID: On
  • Printing Position: Outside
  • Display Destination Name: On
  • Telephone # Mark: FAX
Off
Yes
Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending*2 On*1, Off Yes
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs*2 Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 Yes
Initialize TX Settings Initialize No
RX Settings
2-Sided Print On, Off*1 Yes
Select Drawer Switch A: On*1, Off
Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Yes
Receive Reduction On*1
  • RX Reduction: Auto
  • Reduce %: 90%
  • Reduce Direction: Vertical Only
Off
Yes
Received Page Footer On, Off*1 Yes
2 On 1 Log On, Off*1 Yes

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*3 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
*4 Indicates an item that appears only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
*5 Indicates an item that appears only if the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.
  • Fax Settings*6
Item Settings Delivered
Basic Settings
Sender's Names (TTI) 01 to 99: Register/Edit, Erase No
TX Settings
ECM TX On*1, Off Yes
Pause Time 1 to 15 seconds; 4 seconds*1 Yes
Auto Redial On*1

Option:
  • Redial Times: 1 to 10 times; 2 times*1
  • Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes; 2 minutes*1
  • TX Error Resend: Error and 1st page*1, All pages, Off
Off
Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending*7 On, Off*8 Yes
RX Settings
ECM RX On*1, Off Yes
Line Options
Line 1 No

Unit Telephone #

20 digits maximum No

Unit Name

24 characters maximum No

Tele Line Type

Pulse, Tone*1 No
Line 2*9, Line 3*9 No

Unit Telephone #

20 digits maximum No

Unit Name

24 characters maximum No

Tele Line Type

Pulse, Tone*1 No
TX Line Selection If the optional fax board is installed:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
  • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
If the optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
  • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
  • Line 3: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*6 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.
*7 Indicates the default setting (however, the default setting may be different in some regions.).
*8 Indicates an item that does not appear in some regions.
*9 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

Remark
  • The Communications Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Select the item and press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Automatic Document Deletion

If transmission of a document has failed, this mode automatically erases that document from memory.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Erase Failed TX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Erases jobs after sending, whether the transmission ends successfully or with an error.
[Off]: Stores a job in memory if the transmission ends in an error. From the System Monitor screen, you can resend jobs whose transmissions have failed, or change the destinations and resend the jobs. (See "Changing the Destination" and "Resending a Job.")
  • Even if the Erase Failed TX mode is set to 'Off', fax documents sent in the Direct Sending or Manual Sending mode, or sent from computers via the fax driver do not remain in memory when the transmission ends in an error.


Data Compression Ratio

You can set the compression ratio for color scanned data. A high compression ratio reduces the data size, but results in low quality images. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the data size, but results in high quality images.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If [PDF (Compact)], [PDF (Trace)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format, set [Data Compression Ratio] to 'Normal' or 'Low Ratio' in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If [Data Compression Ratio] is set to 'High Ratio', the images that are output may be of a low quality even if 'Image Priority' is selected in Image Level for High Compression in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Data Compression Ratio].
  1. Select [High Ratio], [Normal], or [Low Ratio] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[High Ratio]: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]: The data size and image quality are in between those of [High Ratio] and [Low Ratio].
[Low Ratio]: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.


Handling Documents That Fail to Be Forwarded

You can set how the machine handles the documents that fail to be forwarded.


Remark
  • If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen. The document will not be processed according to the settings you make for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors. (See "Automatic Document Deletion.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors].
  1. Select [Always Print], [Store/Print], or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Always Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are printed.
[Store/Print]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are stored in the Memory RX Inbox. The machine automatically prints the documents that fail to be forwarded if Use Fax Memory Lock or Use I-Fax Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off'. (See "Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory" and "Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory.")
[Off]: Documents that fail to be forwarded are not printed.


Setting the Photo Mode

You can set whether to use the Photo mode. When the Photo Mode is set to 'On', you can select [Printed Image] or [Photo] for scanning originals that contain photos or printed images.


Remark
  • [Printed Image] can only be selected if the color mode is set to [Black and White]. However, if only a fax number or an I-fax address is specified as the destination, [Printed Image] can be selected regardless of the color modes settings.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Photo Mode].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Number of Retry Attempts

Retry Times is the mode which automatically resends data when the data cannot be sent. This occurs because the receiver is busy sending or receiving, or when an error occurs. This setting determines the number of retry attempts. You can set from one to five retry attempts, or select '0' to turn the Retry Times mode 'Off'.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Retry Times].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the number of Retry Times → press [OK].

If the number of retry times is set to '0', the machine will not resend the data.



Standard Send Settings

This mode enables you to change the standard settings for the Send function, including the scan mode and file format. (See "Selecting a Scan Mode" and "Sending Methods.")


Remark
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, the file format set here is disabled.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can also change the file format.
  • If you send documents by fax or I-fax, the file format set here is disabled. However, if [PDF(Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)] is selected as the file format in the Standard Send Settings and you are sending documents by fax or I-fax, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. If this happens, change the File Format setting to anything other than [PDF(Trace)], [PDF (Compact)], or [XPS (Compact)].

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Edit Standard Send Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

[Scanning Mode]:

Press the Scanning Mode drop-down list → select a scan mode.

You can also select a scan mode that you have already stored. (See "User Preset Keys.")

[Stamp]:

Press [Stamp].

To cancel this setting, press [Stamp] again.

[File Formats]:

Press [File Format] → select a file format.

The file format can be selected from the following formats. For more information on each format, see the following section.

  • [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], [TIFF/XPS Auto Select], [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [JPEG], [TIFF]: See "Setting the File Format."
  • [OCR (Text Searchable)] appears only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • [Trace & Smooth] appears only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • [Compact] appears only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode on the Send Basic Features screen, press (Reset).
  • For more information on the different file formats, see "Glossary."


Favorites Buttons

You can set any possible combination of send settings and register them in a favorites button in memory. There are 18 favorites buttons and they can be assigned names and comments for increased convenience. This feature is useful for registering frequently used send settings.


Remark
  • The send settings registered as favorites buttons in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
  • If an address included in a favorites button is deleted from the Address Book, it is also deleted from the settings registered in the favorites button.


Registering a Favorites Button

  1. Specify the send settings that you want to register → press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].
  1. Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) for registering the send settings → press [Register/Edit].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.

  1. Press [Store].
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can assign a name to a favorites button by pressing [Name].
  • You can also assign a comment to a favorites button by pressing [Comment].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings → press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings → press [Yes].


Naming a Favorites Button

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].
  1. Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) to name → press [Register/Edit].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  1. Press [Name].
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default M1 to M18).


Registering a Comment for a Favorites Button

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].

If <Display Comment> is set to 'On', the registered comments are displayed after you press [Favorites] on the Send Basic Features screen.

  1. Select a Favorites Button ([M1] to [M18]) to comment → press [Register/Edit].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  1. Press [Comment].
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also register comments on keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a comment → press [OK].


Erasing a Favorites Button

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Register Favorites Button].
  1. Select the favorites button with the send settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].


Displaying Confirmation for Favorites Buttons

This mode enables you to set whether to display a confirmation screen when recalling destinations and settings using favorites buttons.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Display Confirmation for Favorites Button].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: A confirmation screen is displayed when a favorites button is recalled.
[Off]: A confirmation screen is not displayed when a favorites button is recalled.


Image Level for High Compression

If PDF (Trace), PDF (Compact), or XPS (Compact) is selected as the file format, you can set the image quality level of the document.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Image Level for High Compression].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Data Size Priority]: The data size is small, but the image quality is low.
[Normal]: The data size and image quality are in between those of [Data Size Priority] and [Image Priority].
[Image Priority]: The data size is large, but the image quality is high.
  • The setting made for <Image Level in Text Mode> or <Image Level in Text/Photo Mode or Photo Mode> is enabled only if the Text/Photo mode or Photo mode is selected from the Original Type drop-down list. However, if [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format and Text mode selected as the original type, this setting is disabled.
  • If an original with many colors is scanned, the compression level is determined by the data size and the number of colors, according to the selected image level. However, if the original is in monochrome or has few colors, it does not matter which image level you select.


OCR (Text Searchable) Settings

This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) on a scanned original to create a PDF or XPS file with searchable text.

You can set the Smart Scan mode and the Document Name OCR mode. Smart Scan is a mode which automatically detects the orientation of the characters on the original when sending it. The Document Name OCR mode enables you to use text extracted from the original as the filename of the document to be sent. You can set the number of characters to use for Document Name OCR. (See "Sending Methods.")


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated. For more information on the file format, see "Glossary."
  • The encrypted PDF mode and [DocName OCR] cannot be used at the same time.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [OCR (Text Searchable) Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Smart Scan>:

[On]: The orientation of the original is detected, and the document is automatically rotated before sending.
[Off]: The orientation of the original is not detected, and the document is sent as is.

<Number of Characters for Document Name Setting>:

Press [-] or [+] to set the number of characters.



Trace & Smooth Settings

When outlining documents that are to be sent, you can change the recognition rate of line drawings of the original.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Trace & Smooth Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Outline Graphics>:

[On]: Outlining of the graphics is performed.
[Off]: Outlining of the graphics is performed.

<Graphics Recognition Level>:

[Normal]: Sets a standard recognition level. (The data size becomes small.)
[Moderate]: The recognition level and data size are in between those of [Normal] and [High].
[High]: Sets the highest recognition level. (The data size becomes large.)

<Background Image Level>:

[Data Size Priority]: The data size is small, but the background image quality is low.
[Normal]: The data size and background image quality are in between those of [Data Size Priority] and [Image Priority].
[Image Priority]: The data size is large, but the background image quality is high.
  • For <Graphics Recognition Level>, by increasing the recognition level, the data size becomes larger as well. It is recommended that you first use [Normal], and if desirable results are not obtained, to try increasing the recognition level in the order of [Moderate] and [High].


Confirming the Device Signature Certificate

You can confirm the certificate and key pair required for adding a device signature to PDF or XPS files.


Remark
  • You cannot press [Check Device Signature Certificate] if the certificate and key pair for adding a device signature have not been generated. For more information on the certificate and key pair for adding a device signature, see "Network."
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Check Device Signature Certificate].
  1. To verify a certificate, select the certificate you want to verify → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].
  • <Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability of a PDF or XPS file with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and other device signature information, see "Network."


Checking a User Signature Certificate

You can confirm the certificate and key pair required for adding a user signature to PDF or XPS files.


Remark
  • You cannot press [Check User Signature Certificate] if the certificate and key pair for adding a user signature have not been installed. For more information on installing a user certificate, see "Network."
  • This mode is available only if the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated, and you are logged in to the machine using the SSO-H login service.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Check User Signature Certificate].
  1. To verify a certificate, select the certificate you want to verify → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].


Initial Send Screen Display

This mode enables you to set whether [Favorites], [One-touch], or [New Address] tabs will be displayed on the initial Send Basic Features screen when the power is turned ON, or the Auto Clear mode is activated. You can also switch the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, which displays enlarged Favorites Buttons.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Default Screen for Send].

  1. Select [Favorites Buttons], [One-touch Buttons], or [New Address] → press [OK].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Enlarged Display> → press [OK].

<Enlarged Display>:

[On]: Switches the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, and displays enlarged favorites buttons.
[Off]: Switches the screen to the Send Basic Features screen, and displays regular size favorites buttons.


Printing the TX Terminal ID

The TX Terminal ID setting enables you to specify whether the Terminal ID information is printed at the top of every document that you send via fax or I-fax. Information such as your fax number, name, and I-fax address is printed, enabling the recipient to know who sent the document.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [TX Terminal ID].

  1. Select [On] or [Off].

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Printing Position>:

[Inside]: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.

[Outside]:

The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.

<Display Destination Name>:

[On]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is displayed in the Terminal ID information.
[Off]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is not displayed in the Terminal ID information.

Example: If you set TX Terminal ID and Display Destination Name to 'On', the Terminal ID information is printed on the recipient's paper as follows:


  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Printing Position>:

[Inside]: The Terminal ID information is printed inside the image area on the recipient's paper.
[Outside]: The Terminal ID information is printed outside the image area on the recipient's paper.

<Display Destination Name>:

[On]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is displayed in the Terminal ID information.
[Off]: The destination name registered in the Address Book is not displayed in the Terminal ID information.

<Telephone # Mark>:

[FAX]: "FAX" is printed before the fax number.
[TEL]: "TEL" is printed before the telephone number.

Example: If you set TX Terminal ID and Display Destination Name to 'On', the Terminal ID information is printed on the recipient's paper as follows:


  • Press [OK].


Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV

Chunked encoding is a function for sending a file with an unknown size by dividing it into chunks of a known length. It enables the sending time to be reduced because it is not necessary to calculate the size of the file before sending it.

You can set whether to divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.


Remark
  • You may not be able to send files with chunked encoding, depending on certain conditions for the WebDAV server and proxy server.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If [Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending] is set to 'Off', the speed when sending with WebDAV is slightly slower than normal.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.
[Off]: Do not divide data into chunks when sending with WebDAV.


Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs

If you are sending to an e-mail or file server destination, you can specify the gamma value used when converting scanned RGB image data to YCbCr. By setting a gamma value corresponding to the gamma value at the receiving end, sent image data can be printed with the appropriate image quality at the receiving end.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • If the optional fax board is installed and you are sending documents by fax, this setting is disabled.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs].
  1. Select the gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4], [Gamma 1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]) → press [OK].


Initializing TX Settings

You can restore almost all of the TX settings to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize the Sender's Names (TTI), Unit Name, Unit Name for E-mail/I-Fax, Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors, and TX Terminal ID settings.
  • If you initialize the TX Settings, the settings stored in the favorites buttons are also initialized.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Initialize TX Settings].
  1. Press [Yes].


2-Sided Printing

You can print received documents on both sides of the paper you select. This enables you to save paper.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [2-Sided Print].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Paper Drawer Selection

You can set how the machine prints documents when there is no paper matching the size of the received document.

There are four printing methods (Switches A, B, C, and D):

  • Switch A: The image is printed over two sheets of paper that have the same combined size as the received document.

  • Switch B: The image is printed with blank space on paper that has the same width as the received document.

  • Switch C: The image is reduced and printed on paper that differs in width from the received document.

  • Switch D: The image is printed on paper that is larger in size than the received document.


Remark
  • For more information on selecting a paper source for printing received documents, see "Additional Functions."

  1. (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → under [RX Settings] <Common Settings> → [Select Drawer].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for the respective switches → press [OK].


Reducing a Received Document

You can set the machine to automatically reduce received documents so that the whole document is printed within the printable area of the paper.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Receive Reduction].

  1. Select [On] or [Off].
  • If you select [Off], the received document is not automatically reduced to fit the size of the paper. If the size of the received document exceeds the printable area, the image is divided into equal sections and printed onto separate sheets of paper.
  • Regardless of the settings you set for Receive Reduction, if the area of the image which exceeds the printable area is less than 12 mm, it will not be printed.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

<RX Reduction>:

[Auto]: The image is automatically reduced by a suitable reduction ratio that can range from the value set for <Reduce %> up to 100% of the received document size.
[Fixed Reduction]: The image is reduced by the reduction ratio set for <Reduce %>.

<Reduce %>:

Press [-] or [+] to specify the reduction ratio.

<Reduce Direction>:

[Vertical & Horizontal]: The image is reduced in both the vertical and horizontal directions.
[Vertical Only]: The image is reduced in the vertical direction only.

  • Press [OK].


Printing Footer Information on a Received Document

You can set whether the machine prints the date, day, and time received, transaction number, and page number at the bottom of the received document.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Received Page Footer].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


2 On 1 Log

This mode enables you to print two received documents of the same paper size onto a single sheet of paper.
The 2 On 1 Log mode is available only under the following conditions:

  • The same paper drawer must be selected for printing two consecutive pages of the received document.
  • The paper in the selected paper drawer must be large enough for two consecutive pages to be printed out.
    Example: Example: If the A4 paper drawer is empty, but the A3 drawer is loaded, you can print two A4 documents onto a single sheet of A3 paper.

Remark
  • When the 2 On 1 Log mode is set to 'On', documents are printed with a dotted line in the middle. If the document is printed with sender information, the dotted line is not printed in the area where the sender information is located.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [2 On 1 Log].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


ECM Transmission

ECM (Error Correction Mode) reduces the effect of system and line errors on documents that occur during sending or receiving with another fax machine that supports ECM. If the other machine does not support ECM, this setting is ignored. If transmission speed appears to be extremely slow, you may be able to speed up transmission time by turning ECM 'Off'.


Remark
  • If you want to transmit using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Transmission be set in both the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to send the documents.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [ECM TX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Pause Time

Some overseas dialing may be affected by the distance or complex routing of connections when dialing the international access code, country code, and the destination's telephone number all at once. In such cases, insert a pause after the international access code. When the machine dials the number, it will pause where the pause was inserted in the number. This helps to improve the connection.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • Pauses entered at the end of dialed fax numbers are always 10 seconds long.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Pause Time].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the pause time → press [OK].


Auto Redial

Auto Redial enables the machine to automatically redial the recipient's fax number if the recipient cannot be reached due to a busy line, or if a sending error occurs.

Auto Redial can be turned 'On' or 'Off'. If you set Auto Redial to 'On', you can set how many times the machine redials, the redial interval, and whether the document should be resent due to an error.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Auto Redial].

  1. Select [On] or [Off].

  • Press [Option] → specify each setting → press [OK] → [OK].

<Redial Times>:

Press [-] or [+] to set the number of redial times.

<Redial Interval>:

Press [-] or [+] to set the redial interval.

<TX Error Resend>:

[Error and 1st page]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. The first page of the document, the error page, and all subsequent pages are resent.
[All pages]: Auto Redial takes place if a sending error occurs. All pages of the document are resent.
[Off]: Redialing does not take place if a sending error occurs.

  • Press [OK].


Checking the Dial Tone before Sending

You can set whether the machine checks for a dial tone before dialing when sending a fax.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • This mode is not available in some regions.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [Check Dial Tone Before Sending].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • The Check Dial Tone Before Sending mode is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON).


ECM Reception

You can receive incoming documents using ECM (Error Correction Mode).

ECM is a mode which automatically corrects errors in an image while it is being received.


Remark
  • If you want to communicate using ECM, it is necessary that ECM Reception be set in both the destination machine and this machine. This function does not operate unless ECM is set in both machines.
  • Even when ECM is set, errors can sometimes occur due to a poor telephone line connection.
  • If there is trouble with the line, it will take more time to receive the documents.
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [RX Settings] under <Fax Settings> → [ECM RX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Registering the Fax Number for an Additional Line

If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you must register a different fax number for the additional line. This number is printed on the document that you fax to the receiving party.

The number may also be displayed on the touch panel display of the receiving party's machine, depending on their type of machine.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings>.
  1. Select [Line 2] and/or [Line 3] → press [Unit Telephone #].

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

  1. Enter the machine's telephone number using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Space]: Press to insert a space between the area code and the local fax number.

[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.

[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.



Registering the Unit Name for an Additional Line

Your name or company's name must be registered as the unit's name (a department name is optional) for an additional line.

When you send a document, the recipient's machine displays or prints your name or company's name (and department's name, if applicable) as the sender's information on the recording paper.

Some fax models also display sender information on the touch panel display during transmission.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings>.
  1. Select [Line 2] and/or [Line 3] → press [Unit Name].

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

  1. Enter a name → press [OK].

Selecting the Telephone Line Type for an Additional Line

Set the type of additional telephone line that is connected to the machine.

If this setting is incorrect, you will be unable to communicate with other machines. Be sure to check the type of telephone line that you are using, and make the correct setting.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings>.
  1. Select [Line 2] and/or [Line 3] → press [Tel Line Type]

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

  1. Select the type of telephone line → press [OK].

If you do not know the telephone line type, call your telephone service provider for details.



Selecting the Line for Sending

You can register the method for selecting the line to use for sending.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • If you select another line for sending on the Send Settings screen or One-touch Buttons screen, that setting takes priority.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Communications Settings] → [Line Options] under <Fax Settings> → [TX Line Selection].
  1. Setting the line to use for sending.

Depending on the line, the following conditions must be met:

Line 1: The optional fax board is installed

Line 2: The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Line 3: The optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board

Details of each item are shown below.

[Priority TX]: When sending, the line specified in [Priority TX] is selected if the line is not in use.
[Prohibit TX]: The line specified in [Prohibit TX] is restricted. (The specified line is only used for receiving).
  • The same line cannot be set for both [Priority TX] and [Prohibit TX].
  • Specify at least one line in [Priority Sending]. You cannot set all lines in [Prohibit TX].
  • Even if you set to prohibit using line 1 for sending documents, line 1 is still used for fax information services.
  • When using manual sending, line 1 is automatically selected, regardless of the line settings.


Address Book Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Address Book Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


Item Settings Delivered
Register Address Register New Address
Edit
Erase
Incremental
Yes
Register Address Book Name Register Name Yes
One-touch Buttons Register/Edit, Erase Yes

Remark
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


About the Address Book

The Address Book is a feature used for storing fax, e-mail, I-fax, and file server destinations. The Address Book is divided into 10 subaddress books and one-touch buttons. You can store up to 1,800 destinations, including 1,600 destinations in the subaddress books, and 200 destinations in one-touch buttons. Registering a destination in the Address Book saves you the effort of entering that destination's address each time you send a job. By storing your own e-mail address, you can specify a reply-to e-mail address and use the Job Done Notice function.

The following types of destinations can be stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • Since each address entry is treated as a single entry, if an e-mail address is registered in a group address, that e-mail address and the group address are counted as two entries. In the same way, if a fax number is registered in a group address, the fax number, and group address are counted as two entries.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses can be registered in the Address Book.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers and group addresses can be registered in the Address Book.
  • Destinations stored in the Address Book can be exported to your computer as a file, which can later be imported in the machine. For information on exporting the Address Book, see "Remote UI."

  • Fax

You can store fax numbers, as well as subaddress and password information.

A fax number obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP can also be stored.

  • E-mail

You can store e-mail addresses.

An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP can also be stored.

  • I-Fax

You can store the I-fax address, the mode, and the destination conditions.

An e-mail address obtained by searching through the directory listings on a server on the network using LDAP can also be stored as an I-fax address.

  • File

You can register a protocol, host name, folder path, etc. for storing scanned documents in a file server.


Remark
  • For examples of settings needed for sending to a file server, see "Network."

  • Group

You can register multiple destinations of various types in a group address. You can group and use these registered destinations according to your needs.


Remark
  • You cannot register new destinations in a group address. New destinations must be registered in the Address Book before you can register them as part of a group address.
  • When you register destinations in a group address, you can select and store only destinations registered in the same subaddress book.


Storing New Addresses

If you register a destination in the Address Book, you can save yourself the effort of entering the destination every time it is used. That destination can also be selected from the Address Book for use in any other customized setting.


Remark
  • If you want to manage destinations with the Access Number Management mode, set the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to On. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If there is any required destination setting that has not yet been set after registering the access number, the screen for specifying the destination settings is displayed again.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the access number that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Access Number Settings screen. (See "Security.")
  • You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
    You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
    Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.


Fax Numbers

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address].
  1. Press [Register New Address].

  1. Press [Fax].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the recipient of the fax → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The fax number that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.


  1. Enter the recipient's fax number using - (numeric keys), , and .

Details of each item are shown below.

[Pause]: Press to insert a pause of several seconds in the fax number that you are dialing. If you insert a pause, the letter <p> is displayed between the numbers, and the letter <p> appears at the end of the number. When dialing an overseas number, insert a pause after the country code, and at the end of the telephone number. (See "Pause Time.")
[Tone]: Press when you want to directly call an extension line that is connected to a PBX (Private Branch eXchange) which accepts only tone signals. If you press [Tone], the letter <T> appears. (See "Fax Information Services.")
[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
[Option]: Press to specify the subaddress, password, ECM TX, sending speed, and type of call settings. These settings are optional.
[R]: Press to use the R-Key. (See "Special Dialing.")
  • You cannot insert a pause or a space at the beginning of a number.
  • If you enter a pause at the end of the number, the pause is always 10 seconds long.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[Subaddress] and [Password]:

Press [Subaddress] → enter the recipient's subaddress using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Password] → enter the recipient's password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the recipient's password for confirmation → press [OK].

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit entered.

If the recipient did not set a password for the target subaddress, you do not need to enter a password.

<ECM TX>:

Select [On] or [Off].

<Sending Speed>:

Press the Sending Speed drop-down list → select the desired sending speed.

If your document transmissions are slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], or [4800 bps].

<Long Distance>:

Press the Long Distance drop-down list → select the type of call.

Select [Long Distance (1)] if transmission errors occur frequently when you make overseas calls (when the number is stored in the Address Book). If errors persist, try selecting [Long Distance (2)] or [Long Distance (3)].

<Line Selection>:

Press the Line Selection drop-down list → select the line.

[Line 1]: Standard Line

[Line 2]: Additional Line

[Line 3]: Additional Line

[Auto]: A line is selected according to the settings you made for Priority TX in TX Line Selection in Line Options under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Selecting the Line for Sending.")

  • If you want to attach a subaddress to your send job, make sure that the recipient's fax machine supports ITU-T standard subaddresses.
  • The Line Selection drop-down list is displayed only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board is or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password you enter is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


E-Mail Addresses

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [E-mail].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the e-mail address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The e-mail address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.

  1. Press [E-mail Address] → enter the e-mail address → press [OK].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Divided Data Destination>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination's e-mail software has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination's e-mail software has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into pages and sent as multiple e-mail messages.
  • Make sure to check the specifications of the destination's e-mail software before setting this mode. A sending error may occur if the destination's e-mail software is not able to combine divided data.

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


I-Fax Addresses

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [I-Fax].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the I-fax address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The I-fax address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.

  1. Press the Mode drop-down list → select [Simple] or [Full].

<Mode>:

[Simple]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet.
[Full]: Sends scanned data as an image via the Internet, and enables you to receive a delivery confirmation message telling you whether your I-fax was sent successfully.

In order for you to receive a confirmation message telling you the delivery status of your I-fax document, the recipient's machine must have I-fax capabilities and be compatible with the Full mode.

  • If you send documents using the Full mode to a machine that does not support the Full mode, delivery confirmation cannot be carried out. When this happens, the job concerned is not considered as complete even though the actual sending of the document is successful. Such jobs are displayed as <Waiting for result...> on the Status screen until the time set for Full Mode TX Timeout in I-Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) has lapsed. After the timeout, the job is moved to the log, and the result is shown as <-> when sending of the document to a server or other destination could not be verified.
  1. Press [I-Fax Address] → enter the I-fax address → press [OK].
  • If you do not send documents via a server, and if the recipient's IP address is not registered with a DNS server, enter the domain name in the following format: (user)@(the recipient's IP address).
  1. Press [Standard Field 1] and [Standard Field 2] → enter their respective standard fields → press [OK].

Standard Field 1 and Standard Field 2 are settings required for using an Internet fax service. For details, contact your service provider.

If you do not use an Internet fax service, this step is not necessary.

  • After pressing [OK], the standard field that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the I-fax settings screen.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Send Via Server>.

<Send Via Server>

[On]: Sends documents via a server. You can send documents to destinations via the Internet in the same way as e-mail.
[Off]: Does not send documents via a server. You can send large amounts of image data to a recipient within the same LAN (Local Area Network) environment without placing a burden on the mail server. This enables you to send documents quickly and directly to the recipient. To use this setting, it is necessary to set up an MX (Mail eXchange) record on the DNS server. Ask your System Manager whether this type of sending is possible before you set Send Via Server to 'Off'.

If you specify the Standard Field settings, set Send Via Server to 'On'.

  • To be able to specify the Send Via Server setting, set <Use Send Via Server> to 'On' on the I-Fax Settings screen beforehand. It is recommended to set <Allow MDN Not Via Server> to 'On' on the same screen. To access the I-Fax Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [I-Fax Settings]. If <Use Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', <Send Via Server> is grayed out. (See "I-Fax Settings.")
  • Even if <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', delivery confirmation of documents sent using the Full mode is carried out via the server.
  1. Press [Destination Conditions] → specify the paper size, compression method, and resolution.

The following conditions are always selected:

  • Paper Size: A4/LTR
  • Compression Method: MH (Modified Huffman)
  • Resolution: 200 x 100 dpi and 200 x 200 dpi

A5 is included in [A4/LTR].

  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.
  • Available compression methods are:
  • MH (Modified Huffman) - a coding system that horizontally scans and compresses extended areas of white and black dots.
  • MR (Modified Read) - a coding system that horizontally and vertically scans and compresses white and black areas. Faster than MH.
  • MMR (Modified Modified Read) - an adaptation of Modified Read, originally for use in digital machines. Faster than MR.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Receive Divided Data> → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Select [On] if the destination machine has a function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the data is divided into multiple parts before being sent. Once the destination machine receives all the parts of the data, it combines them into one item of data.
[Off]: Select [Off] if the destination machine has no function to combine divided data. If the size of the data being sent exceeds the value set for Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a sending error occurs.
  • Set the destination conditions according to the specifications of the recipient's machine. An error in transmission may occur if you set conditions that the recipient's machine does not support.

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


File Server Addresses

Remark
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the host name and folder path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • For examples of the settings needed to send to a file server, see "Network."
  • UPN can be used only if you are sending to a computer belonging to a domain operated with Active Directory.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [File].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the file server address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The file server address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.

  1. Press the Protocol drop-down list → select the desired protocol.
  1. Set [Host Name], [Folder Path], [User], and [Password].
  • For instructions on specifying each of the settings for FTP, Windows (SMB), NetWare (IPX), and WebDAV, see "Specifying a File Server."

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].
    If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • Press [OK].


Group Addresses

The Group Address feature enables you to create a group of up to 256 stored destinations as a single destination.


Remark
  • If you want to store a group address, the destinations must be stored beforehand, such as fax numbers, e-mail addresses, and file server addresses.
  • If you want to store a group address, you can only select destinations that you registered in the same subaddress book.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and a User Inbox can be stored in a group address.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers and a User Inbox can be stored in a group address.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [Group].

  1. Press [Name].

  1. Enter a name for the group address → press [OK].
  • The first character that you enter for the name is used for sorting the destination list when you press keys, such as [ABC], [DEF], and [GHI], on the Address Book screen.
  • If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed. You can refine addresses by entering letters or symbols.
  1. Press the Address Book drop-down list → select one of the numbered subaddress books.

Address Books 1 to 10 are used to divide the Address Book into 10 parts, called subaddress books. This is a convenient way to classify destinations.

The group address that you enter will be stored in the subaddress book that you select here.


  1. Select [Address Book] or [Store In Usr Inbox].

To store destinations in a group address, those destinations must be stored in the subaddress book that contains the group address.

You cannot store destinations from different subaddress books in the group address. For example, you cannot store e-mail addresses from Address Book 1 and file server addresses from Address Book 2 into the same group address.


  • Select the destination → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

To cancel a selected destination, select the destination once more to clear the check mark.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list. If only the optional fax board is installed, the Type drop-down list is not displayed.

You can select a destination and press [Details] to confirm the detailed information related to the selected destinations. Press [Done] to return to the previous screen.

Repeat step 6 to add other destinations.

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")

  • Select the User Inbox from the Inbox Selection screen → press [OK].
  • Only one User Inbox can be stored in a group address.

  • Select a destination from the group address → press [Erase].

  1. Finish storing the address.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.


  • Press [OK].


Addresses Obtained via a Server

You can store an address that is obtained by searching the directory listings on the network using LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) servers.


Remark
  • You may have to set up the LDAP servers beforehand, depending on the network environment.
  • The information that can be obtained through the LDAP server varies, depending on the installed or activated options, as follows:
  • If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated: names and e-mail addresses
  • If only the fax board is installed: names and fax numbers
  • If both the Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the fax board is installed: names, e-mail addresses, and fax numbers

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address].

  1. Press [Network Add. Book].

  1. Press the Server to Search drop-down list → select the desired server to search.


  1. Specify the search criteria.
  • If you want to search for a destination that is registered with an e-mail address and a fax number, you can search for the e-mail address by entering the fax number as the search criterion, and vice versa.

  • Press [Name], [E-mail], or [Fax] → enter the name, e-mail address, or fax number for which you want to search → press [OK].

The search criteria boxes that are not filled out are not searched.

To make a more detailed search with multiple search conditions, press [Detailed Search], and follow the directions below. The search criteria you entered for Simple Search are continuously used in Detailed Search.


  • Press [Detailed Search].
  • Press the search category drop-down list → select the desired search category.

The available search categories are:

[Name]: Search by name.
[E-mail]: Search by e-mail address.
[Fax]: Search by fax number.
[Organization]: Search by organization name.
[OrgnztionUnit]: Search by organizational unit (e.g., departments in an organization).

For example, if cn(common name)=user1, ou(organization unit)=salesdept, o(organization)=canon, c(country)=jp is the distinguished name in the directory, enter the organization/organizationUnit of the user as follows:
organization=canon
organizationUnit=salesdept

  • The organization/organizationUnit can be used as search categories only if the information has been registered on the LDAP Server.
  • Detailed Search by organization/organizationUnit may not be performed, depending on whether the attribute types have been registered on the LDAP server, and depending on the type of application on the server.
  • Press the search condition drop-down list → select the desired search condition → press [Settings].

You can select from the following search conditions:

[contains]: The result must contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[does not contain]: The result must not contain the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[equals]: The result must be exactly the same as the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[differs from]: The result must be different from the entered name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[begins with]: The result must begin with the same first few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
[ends with]: The result must end with the same last few letters that you entered for the name, e-mail address, fax number, organization, or organizational unit.
  • Enter the search criterion → press [OK].
  • Press [Add].

To continue adding more search criteria, press [or] or [and] → repeat step 4.

[or]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches any of the specified search criteria.
[and]: The machine searches and returns a result that matches all of the specified search criteria.

To edit the search criteria, select the search criterion that you want to edit → press [Edit] → [Settings].

To delete the search criteria, select the criterion that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • You can specify up to four different search criteria at a time.
  • If you specify three or more search criteria, you cannot use both [or] and [and] together.
  • If you press [Simple Search] after specifying search criteria on the Detailed Search screen, the display changes to the Simple Search screen, and the specified detailed search criteria are deleted.

  1. Press [Start Searching].

To cancel searching while the machine is searching for your criteria, press [Cancel]. If the machine finds some results before you press [Cancel], these search results are displayed.

  • Searching for a destination via an LDAP server is not possible if the time setting of the server and the time setting of the machine are more than five minutes apart. If you cannot send even when the user name and password are correct, check the time settings on the server and the machine.
  • The number of search results displayed will not exceed the maximum limit set in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). If the desired destination is not displayed, either increase the maximum number of addresses to search, or change the search criteria. (See "LDAP Server Settings."
  • If you press [Start Searching] without specifying any search criteria, all of the addresses stored on the LDAP server are displayed.

  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

The Enter Network Password screen is displayed if either one of the following is true:

  • If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use', and <Display authentication dialog when searching> is set to 'On'.
  • If the user name, password, and domain name specified in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are incorrect.

[User]:

Press [User] → enter the user name → press [OK].

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Enter Network Password screen.


  1. Select the destination that you want to store in the Address Book from the search results → press [Next].

To continue searching, press [Back].

You can select multiple destinations.

If you want to select the first 64 destinations, press [Select All (Max 64 destinations)]. (If a destination is selected, the key changes to [Clear Selection].)

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. You can register the selected e-mail address as an I-fax address by pressing [Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.

If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are also displayed.

If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination once more to clear the check mark.

  1. Store the selected destination.
  • The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names and e-mail addresses, and fax numbers.

  • Verify the address → press [OK].

If necessary, edit the contents of the address.

If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Next].

Press [Access Number].

Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.


  • Select the subaddress book in which to store the addresses → press [OK].

If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Access Number].

Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

  • If you want to register a fax number or I-fax address as a new destination, read the displayed message → press [OK].
  • The maximum number of destinations that can be selected at one time is 64.

  • Verify the address → press [OK].

If necessary, edit the contents of the address.

If the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', press [Next].

Press [Access Number].

Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.



Editing Address Details

You can change destination details as necessary.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address].
  1. Select the destination to be changed → press [Edit].

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.

If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot edit these destinations. For instructions on storing and editing one-touch buttons, see "Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons."

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Edit the address details.

You cannot change the address book of a group address, or change a destination registered as a group address.

  • For instructions on setting fax numbers, see "Fax Numbers."

  1. Finish editing the address details.

  • Press [Next].
  • Press [Access Number].
  • Press [Access Number] → enter the access number using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → re-enter the access number for confirmation using - (numeric Keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set an access number for this destination, press [OK] without entering any number.

You can enter up to seven digits for the access number. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the access number with leading zeros.
Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

You cannot store an access number with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.


  • Press [OK].
  • If you want to manage destinations with the Access Number Management mode, set the Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If there is any required destination setting that has not yet been set after registering the access number, the screen for specifying the destination settings is displayed again.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off' when Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the access number that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Access Number Settings screen. (See "Security.")


Erasing Addresses

You can erase destinations stored in the address book.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address].
  1. Select the destination to be erased → press [Erase].

You cannot erase multiple destinations at the same time.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book.

You cannot select a one-touch button stored in a subaddress book.

If you select [All] in the Address Book drop-down list, the destinations stored in the one-touch buttons are displayed. However, you cannot erase these destinations. For instructions on erasing one-touch buttons, see "Erasing One-Touch Buttons."

If you select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] and then enter the access number using - (numeric keys). If you press [No Access Number], the destinations that are not managed with an access number are displayed.

  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Naming an Address Book

You can assign a name to any subaddress book.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address Book Name].
  1. Select a subaddress book to name → press [Register Name].
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the subaddress book name reverts to its current name (default Address Book 1 to 10).
  1. Press [OK].


Storing/Editing One-Touch Buttons

You can store up to 200 destinations in the one-touch buttons. This section describes how to store/edit the destinations with the one-touch buttons feature.


Remark
  • If Language Switch in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the host name and folder path of the file server destination may not be displayed correctly, so you may not be able to refer to them.
  • Destinations stored in one-touch buttons are also displayed in the Address Book.
  • A new destination cannot be registered in a group destination that is stored in a one-touch button. The destination must be registered in a one-touch button in advance.
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses can be stored in a one-touch button.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers and group addresses can be stored in a one-touch button.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [One-touch Buttons].
  1. Select a one-touch button to store or change → press [Register/Edit].

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).

If you select a one-touch button already storing a destination, proceed to step 4.

  • One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the destinations are displayed.
  • If you register multiple destinations as a group address in a one-touch button, the number of destinations registered in the group address is displayed.

  1. Select [Fax], [E-mail], [I-Fax], [File], [Group], or [Network Add. Book].

  • Enter a name for the recipient of the fax in accordance with steps 4 and 5 of "Fax Numbers."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Enter the fax number of the destination in accordance with step 7 of "Fax Numbers."

  • Enter a name for the e-mail address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "E-Mail Addresses."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Specify the e-mail address and Divided Data Destination setting in accordance with steps 6 and 7 of "E-Mail Addresses."

  • Enter a name for the I-fax address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "I-Fax Addresses."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Specify the I-fax mode, I-fax address, standard fields, send via server setting, or destination condition in accordance with steps 6 to 11 of "I-Fax Addresses."

  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Specify the protocol, host name, folder path, user, and password in accordance with steps 6 and 7 of "File Server Addresses."

  • Enter a name for the group address in accordance with steps 3 and 4 of "Group Addresses."
  • Press [One-touch Button Name].
  • Enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • Press [Specifying Destinations].
  • Select a destination to store in the group address from [Address Book], the one-touch buttons, or [Store In Usr Inbox] → press [OK].

Only destinations that are already stored in one-touch buttons can be selected as part of a one-touch button group address.

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).


  • Select the destination that you want to store in the one-touch button from the search results → press [Next].

To continue searching, press [Back].

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, e-mail addresses that meet the specified search criteria are displayed. You can register the selected e-mail address as an I-fax address by pressing [Register e-mail address for I-Fax]. To register e-mail addresses as I-fax addresses, register one e-mail address at a time.

If the optional fax board is installed, fax numbers that meet the specified search criteria are also displayed.

If both the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and the optional fax board is installed, you can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • If necessary, edit the contents of the destination.
  • Press [One-touch Button Name] → enter a name for the one-touch button → press [OK].
  • The information that can be obtained via the LDAP server consists of only names, e-mail addresses, and fax numbers.

  1. Press [OK].


Erasing One-Touch Buttons

You can erase the destinations that you have stored in one-touch buttons.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings] → [One-touch Buttons].
  1. Select the one-touch button containing the destination(s) you want to erase → press [Erase].

If you know the one-touch button's three digit number, press [] (One-Touch Button Number) → enter the three digit number of the desired one-touch button using - (numeric keys).

  • Make sure that you verify the settings first before you erase them.
  • One-touch buttons that already have destinations stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a one-touch button that already has destinations stored in it, the destinations are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].


System Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in System Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

Item Settings Delivered
Communications Settings
E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings*2

Maximum Data Size for Sending

0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1 Yes

Default Subject

40 characters maximum; Attached Image*1 Yes

Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination

On, Off*1 No
E-mail Settings*2

Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender

On*1, Off No
I-Fax Settings*2

Full Mode TX Timeout

1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 Yes

Divided Data RX Timeout

0 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 Yes

Print MDN/DSN on Receipt

On, Off*1 Yes

Always send notice for RX errors

On*1, Off Yes

Use Send Via Server

On, Off*1 Yes

Allow MDN Not Via Server

On*1, Off Yes
Fax Settings*3

Send Start Speed

33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes

Receive Start Speed

33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes

Receive Password

20 digits maximum No

R-key Setting

PSTN*1, PBX Yes
Memory RX Inbox Settings

Memory RX Inbox Password

Seven digits maximum No

Use Fax Memory Lock*3

On, Off*1 Yes

Use I-Fax Memory Lock*2

On, Off*1 Yes

Memory Lock Start Time

Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Yes

Memory Lock End Time

Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Yes
Restrict the Send Function
Address Book Password Seven digits maximum Yes
Access Number Management On, Off*1 Yes
Restrict New Addresses Fax: On, Off*1
E-mail: On, Off*1
I-Fax: On, Off*1
File: On, Off*1
Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX*3 On*1, Off Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers*3 On, Off*1 Yes
E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction*2 Restrict Sending to Domains; On, Off*1
Register, Edit, Erase*6
Yes
Allow Sending with Expired Certificates*4 On, Off*1 Yes
Always Add Device Signature to Send*5 On:
  • Restrict File Format: On*1, Off
Off*1
Yes
Forwarding Settings Receive Type*6, Validate/Invalidate, Register, Edit*6, Erase*6, Forward w/o Conditions, Print List*6, E-mail Priority*6 Yes
Register LDAP Server Register, Edit, Erase, Register/Edit LDAP Search, Print List No
Erasing All Encrypted PDF Passwords Erase No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*3 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.
*4 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set or the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.
*5 Indicates items that appear only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
*6 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.

Remark
  • The System Settings screen consists of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Communications Settings

This section describes the e-mail, I-fax, fax, and Memory RX Inbox settings.



E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings

You can change the e-mail and I-fax transmission settings. The following settings are available.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  • Maximum Data Size for Sending

Sets the maximum data size for outgoing e-mail messages and I-fax documents. If an e-mail message exceeds this data size limit, it is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent. However, if an I-fax transmission exceeds the data size limit, it is handled as an error, and it is not sent.


Remark
  • When sending an e-mail or I-fax document, you can set to divide the data before sending it if the size of the data exceeds the maximum data size for sending.

  • Default Subject

The subject that you enter here is used as the default subject whenever you do not enter a subject when sending a job.

  • Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination

If you are using a login service, you can specify whether to set the e-mail address of the login user as the reply-to destination when sending an e-mail message or I-fax document.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Maximum Data Size for Sending>:

Specify the maximum data size for sending by pressing [-] or [+].

<Subject>:

Press [Subject] → enter a subject → press [OK].

<Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination>:

[On]: The e-mail address of the login user is set as the reply-to destination.
[Off]: The e-mail address set for the machine is set as the reply-to destination.
  • The maximum data size for sending must not be greater than the maximum data size of the mail server.
  • If you enter '0' MB as the data size, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
  • If an e-mail address is entered as the reply-to destination on the Send Settings screen when sending an e-mail message or I-fax document, the e-mail address specified on the Send Settings screen is given priority, regardless of whether Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination is set to 'On'.


E-Mail Settings

If you are using a login service, you can set whether to display the e-mail address of the login user in the From field as the sender destination on the received e-mail.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-mail Settings] → [Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[On]: The e-mail address of the authorized user is set as the sender destination in the From field on the received e-mail message.
[Off]: The e-mail address set for the machine is set as the sender destination in the From field on the received e-mail message.


I-Fax Settings

You can change the I-fax transmission settings. The following settings are available.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  • Full Mode TX Timeout

Sets the time that elapses before sending operations terminate (automatically) if you do not receive a notification e-mail message (MDN) from the recipient when you send an I-fax in the Full Mode.

  • Divided Data RX Timeout

If it takes longer than the set Divided Data RX Timeout time to receive all the parts of a divided I-fax document, only the data which has been received is combined to form the document. Data which can be combined to form complete pages is printed, and any remaining data is erased.


Remark
  • If you delete the divided data, it cannot be combined to form a document even if the remaining divided data is received later.
  • Divided data cannot be printed as a regular image unless it has been combined.
  • If you select [Print When Erased] on the Divided Data RX Inbox screen for the Mail Box function to print the data which is erased, the data will not be forwarded or stored in memory. It will only be printed.

  • Print MDN/DSN on Receipt

Sets whether to print notification e-mail messages that inform you of the successful delivery of I-fax jobs sent using the Full Mode.

  • Always Send Notice for RX Errors

Sets whether to inform the sender that the e-mail message or I-fax was not received successfully.

  • Use Send Via Server

Determines whether you can select to send jobs via a server on the screen for specifying I-fax destination settings. To be able to select 'On' or 'Off' for <Send Via Server> on the I-fax settings screen, set <Use Send Via Server> and <Allow Not Via Server> to 'On' beforehand.

  • Allow MDN Not Via Server

Sets whether to allow the recipient machine to send MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail directly to the IP address of the sending machine without going via a mail server.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [I-Fax Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Full Mode TX Timeout>

Specify the full mode RX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+].

<Divided Data RX Timeout>:

Specify the divided data RX timeout time by pressing [-] or [+].

<Print MDN/DSN on Receipt>:

[On]: Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the successful delivery of jobs are printed.
[Off]: Notification e-mail messages (MDN/DSN) that inform you of the successful delivery of jobs are not printed.

<Always send notice for RX errors>:

[On]: If an error occurs, the sender is always informed of the details of the error.
[Off]: If an error occurs, the sender is not informed of the details of the error.

<Use Send Via Server>:

[On]: Enables you to set whether to use the Send Via Server setting as a condition to send to I-fax addresses.
[Off]: You cannot use the Send Via Server setting as a condition to send to I-fax addresses.

<Allow MDN Not Via Server>:

[On]: Allows the sending of MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail without going via a mail server.
[Off]: Does not allow the sending of MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail without going via a mail server.
  • If you set the divided data RX timeout time to '0', no divided data RX timeout time is set.
  • For I-fax, when <Send Via Server> is set to 'Off', even if you enter the maximum data size for sending, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.
  • The maximum data size for sending can be set in 1 MB increments. If the size of an e-mail exceeds the set limit, the e-mail message is split up by page and sent out as smaller e-mail messages, each of which is within the set limit. I-fax data that exceeds the set limit is handled as an error, and is not sent. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.


Fax Settings

This section describes settings that the System Manager can make, including how to set the Send Start Speed, Receive Start Speed, RX (Receive) mode, and how to register a password. It also describes how to set, change, and erase settings for transferring received documents, and how to enable or disable certain settings.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  • Send/Receive Start Speed

This function enables you to change the send and receive start speeds, which is useful when there is difficulty initiating the sending or receiving of a document.

  • Receive Password

This function enables you to set an optional ITU-T standard password. If a subaddress is not set in a document that was received from another party using the ITU-T standard, an RX password check takes place. If the RX password found does not match the RX password set with this mode, or if an RX password is not attached to the document, the document is not received.


Remark
  • ITU-T stands for International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector, which is the group that makes recommendations towards the standardization of worldwide telecommunications.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Fax Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Send Start Speed>:

Press the Send Start Speed drop-down list → select the desired start speed.

If your document transmission is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], [7200 bps], [4800 bps], or [2400 bps].

<Receive Start Speed>:

Press the Receive Start Speed drop-down list → select the desired start speed.

If your document reception is slow in starting, this may mean that the telephone lines in your area are in poor condition. Select a slower speed. You can select [33600 bps], [14400 bps], [9600 bps], [7200 bps], [4800 bps], or [2400 bps].

<Receive Password>:

Press [Settings] → enter [Password] and [Confirm] using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Space] to insert a space.

Press [Backspace] to delete the last digit that you entered.

  • Priority is given to a subaddress password if the received document is set with a subaddress, even if a receive password is set.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")


Memory RX Inbox Settings

There may be occasions when you want to store all incoming documents into memory until you are ready to print or send them. Locking the machine to receive and store all documents in memory is called Memory Lock. After Memory Lock is turned 'On', the machine will enter the Memory Lock mode. Documents received when the machine is in the Memory Lock mode are stored in memory until you unlock the memory with a password, and print or send them.

This section explains how to define a memory lock password, receive fax/I-fax documents in memory, and set the times for the machine to enter and leave the Memory Lock mode.


Remark
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can receive I-faxes into memory.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, you can receive faxes into memory.


Setting the Memory RX Inbox Password

You can set a seven digit password for the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox, and restrict its use to only those users who know the password.


Remark
  • You can enter up to seven digits for the password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Password].
  1. Press [Settings].
  1. Press [Password] → enter the desired password using - (numeric Keys).
  1. Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation using - (numeric Keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set the Memory RX Inbox with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.

If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")


Storing Received Fax Documents in Memory

You can set the machine to store received fax documents in memory without printing them. This is referred to as Fax Memory Lock. You can later check the received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Use Fax Memory Lock].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If the message <Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the Fax Memory Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See "Mail Box.")


Storing Received I-Fax Documents in Memory

You can set the machine to store received I-fax documents in memory without printing them. This is referred to as I-Fax Memory Lock. You can later check the received documents in the Memory RX Inbox, and print or send them.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Use I-Fax Memory Lock].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If the message <I-Fax Memory RX is on.> does not appear, set the I-Fax Memory Lock setting on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function to 'On'. (See "Mail Box.")


Memory Lock Start Time Settings

You can set Memory Lock to start automatically at a specified time.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Memory Lock Start Time].

  1. Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].

  • Select a number ([1] to [5]) → enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

You can store up to five different start times.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) → select a number ([1] to [5]).

  • Enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Press [OK].

If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off] under <Fax Memory Lock> or <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See "Mail Box.")

  • You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.


Memory Lock End Time Settings

You can set Memory Lock to end automatically at a specified time.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → [Memory Lock End Time].

  1. Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].


  • Select a number ([1] to [5]) → enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].
    You can store up to five different start times.
    Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) → select a number ([1] to [5]).
  • Enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].
    You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.
    Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.
Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Press [OK].

If you select [Off], Memory Lock will not automatically turn on at a specified time. You can manually turn Memory Lock On or Off by pressing [On] or [Off] under <Fax Memory Lock> or <I-Fax Memory Lock> on the Memory RX Inbox screen from the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box function. (See "Mail Box.")

  • You can select [Everyday] for Memory Lock Start Time, and [Select Days] for Memory Lock End Time, and vice versa.


Restricting the Send Function

You can set the Address Book with a password and set access numbers to restrict its use.



Address Book Password

You can set a password for the Address Book. If a password is set, restrictions can be placed on the registering, editing, and erasing of destinations.


Remark
  • You can enter up to seven digits for the Address Book password. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine stores the password with leading zeros.
    Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Address Book Password].
  1. Press [Settings].
  1. Press [Password] → enter the desired password - (numeric Keys).
  1. Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation using - (numeric keys) → press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set the Address Book with a password, press [OK] without entering any numbers.

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you entered is not displayed as asterisks. (See "Security.")


Access Number Management

You can set an access number for an address in the Address Book to restrict access to that address, and this restricts other users who do not know the access number from viewing and utilizing these special addresses.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Access Number Management].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

If Access Number Management is set to 'On', the Recall mode cannot be used.



Restricting New Addresses

This mode enables you to restrict users from adding new destinations (fax, e-mail, I-fax, or file) to send to. The four types of new destinations can be restricted independently. The destination types you set to 'On' are grayed out so that they cannot be selected in [New Address] on the Send Basic Features screen. Setting this mode with an address book password enables only the following to be specified as destinations for the destination types in Restrict New Addresses set to 'On'.

  • Destinations stored in the Address Book
  • Destinations obtained via LDAP servers
  • User Inboxes
  • Destinations obtained by pressing one-touch buttons
  • Destinations obtained by pressing favorites buttons
  • E-mail addresses obtained by pressing [Send to Myself]

Remark
  • The following destinations cannot be edited if a destination type in Restrict New Addresses is set to 'On'
  • Destinations obtained via LDAP servers
  • Destinations obtained by pressing favorites buttons
  • E-mail addresses obtained by pressing [Send to Myself]
  • Destinations of a job that is canceled because of transmission errors, or a job that is waiting to be sent with the Delayed Send mode
  • If a destination type in Restrict New Addresses is set to 'On', all stored settings in the Recall mode are erased, regardless of the destination type.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Restrict New Addresses].
  1. Select [Fax], [E-mail], [I-Fax], or [File].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver

You can set whether to disable the sending of faxes using the fax driver.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Allow Fax Driver TX].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Faxes can be sent using the fax driver.
[Off]: Faxes cannot be sent using the fax driver.


Setting to Confirm Entered Fax Numbers

This mode displays a confirmation screen when a user enters a fax number, to prevent misdialing.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Confirm Entered Fax Number].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Displays a confirmation screen after a fax number is entered.
[Off]: Does not display a confirmation screen after a fax number is entered.


Restricting the Domains to Which E-mail/I-Fax Documents Can Be Sent

You can restrict the domains to which documents can be sent via e-mail or I-fax. If you restrict the domains for sending, you can send documents only to destinations which belong the specified domain.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction].
  1. Select [On] for <Restrict Sending to Domains>.

If you select [Off], proceed to step 4.


  1. Specify the domains to which you want to allow e-mail or I-fax documents to be sent.

  • Press [Register].
  • Press [Domain Name] → enter a domain name → press [OK].
  • Select [Permit] or [Reject] for <Send to Subdomain> → press [OK].

<Send to Subdomain>

[Permit]: Allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
[Reject]: Do not allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
  • You can register up to three domains.

  • Select the desired registered domain → press [Edit].
  • Press [Domain Name] → enter a domain name → press [OK].
  • Select [Permit] or [Reject] for <Send to Subdomain> → press [OK].

<Send to Subdomain>

[Permit]: Allow sending to subdomains of the domain.
[Reject]: Do not allow sending to subdomains of the domain.

  • Select the domain that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • Press [Yes].

  1. Press [OK].


Allowing the Sending of PDF or XPS Documents With Expired Certificates

This mode enables you to set whether to allow the sending of PDF or XPS documents created with expired certificates.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set or the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Allow Sending with Expired Certificates].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Allows the sending of PDF or XPS documents created with expired certificates.
[Off]: Does not allow the sending of PDF or XPS documents created with expired certificates.


Setting to Always Add a Device Signature to PDF or XPS Documents

This mode enables you to set whether to always add a device signature to sent PDF or XPS documents.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict the Send Function] → [Always Add Device Signature to Send].

  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Always adds a device signature to sent PDF or XPS documents.
[Off]: Does not add a device signature to sent PDF or XPS documents.

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Restrict File Format> → press [OK].

    <Restrict File Format>:
[On]: Only PDF or XPS files can be sent.
[Off]: Files other than PDF or XPS can also be sent.
  • If <Restrict File Format> is set to 'On', and sending a file in a format other than PDF or XPS is registered in the Favorites Button, the file cannot be sent.

  • Press [OK].


Forwarding Settings

You can set the machine to store received fax/I-fax documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes, or forward them to other machines or file servers. If a received document matches the forwarding conditions, it is forwarded to the specified destination. You can also set a specified time during which received fax/I-fax documents which match the forwarding conditions are forwarded. This section explains the conditions for forwarding, and how to register, change, and erase forwarding destinations.

When the machine receives I-fax/fax documents, they are processed as shown below:

*1 Received I-fax documents can be forwarded if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
*2 Received fax documents can be forwarded if the optional fax board is installed.
*3 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the documents are forwarded to their forwarding destinations regardless of the reception password setting.
*4 If Store/Print Received Doc. in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', forwarded documents are either printed or stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
*5 If the subaddress and password attached to the received document do not match the information registered in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the document is rejected.
*6 If Forward w/o Conditions is set up in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), all received documents that do not match the specified forwarding conditions are forwarded to the destination selected for Forward w/o Conditions.
*7 If documents are received while paper is jammed, or paper or toner has run out, they are printed after the paper jam is cleared, paper is loaded, or toner is added.
*8 If Erase Failed TX in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the status of any job with a forwarding error will be saved on the System Monitor screen.
*9 Documents with forwarding errors are handled as follows, depending on the settings for Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen):
  • [Always Print]: All documents with forwarding errors are printed.
  • [Store/Print]: Documents with forwarding errors are stored in the Memory RX Inbox when Memory Lock is turned 'On'. If Memory Lock is turned 'Off', the documents are printed.
*10 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully.
*11 If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated and Forwarding Done Notice is specified in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), a notification e-mail is sent when the forwarding job completes successfully. However, if <Notice Only for Errors> is also specified, a notification e-mail is sent only when the document fails to be forwarded.
*12 The received fax/I-fax documents can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox the by specifying the Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination. Only the received documents that match the specified forwarding conditions can be stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox.

Remark
  • The maximum number of forwarding settings that you can store is 150.


Storing Forwarding Settings

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Press [Register].

  1. To recall the forwarding settings of a received document that you have stored, press [1 Before], [2 Before], or [3 Before].

You can recall the last three forwarding settings.

  • The forwarding settings are stored in memory if you press [OK] on the Register screen or the Edit screen.
  • Identical forwarding settings are stored only once in memory.
  • The three most recent forwarding settings that were stored in memory are not erased even when the power is turned OFF.
  • The forwarding settings of a received document that were not stored in memory are not displayed even when you press the recall keys.
  1. Press [Condition Name].
  1. Enter a name for the forwarding condition → press [OK].
  • If [Send Doc. Name] is not specified, the first 24 characters of the condition name are also stored as the document's name. However, you can change the document's name at any time.
  1. Press [Forwarding Conditions].
  1. Press the Receive Type drop-down list → select [Fax] or [I-Fax].

If either the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed, this step is not necessary. If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can select the line ([Fax: Line Shared], [Fax: Line 1], [Fax: Line 2], or [Fax: Line 3]).


  1. Set the forwarding conditions.

  • Press the To, From, or Subject drop-down list.

The available forwarding conditions are:

[disregarded]: Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

[equals] is not an option for <To>.

  • Select the forwarding condition → press [Set.].
  • Enter the forwarding criterion → press [OK].
  • If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).

If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without changing the forwarding condition for the To, From, and Subject drop-down lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change → enter the new criteria → press [OK].

  • If [disregarded] is selected as the forwarding condition, you cannot enter any criteria.

  • Select the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password drop-down list.

The available forwarding conditions are:

[disregarded]: Disregards the To, From, or Subject information as forwarding conditions.
[does not exist]: The Subaddress or Password information does not exist for the received document.
[equals]: Forwards the document if the From or Subject information matches all of the characters entered.
[differs from]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information differs from the characters entered.
[begins with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information begins with the characters entered.
[ends with]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information ends with the characters entered.
[contains]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information contains the characters entered.
[does not contain]: Forwards the document if the To, From, or Subject information does not contain the characters entered.

[does not exist] is not an option for <Fax Number >.

[does not exist] and [equals] are the only forwarding conditions that can be selected for <Subaddress> and <Password>.

  • Select the forwarding condition → press [Set.] → enter the forwarding criterion using - (numeric keys).

Details of each item are shown below.

[][]: Press to move the position of the cursor.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.
[Space]: Press to insert a space between numbers.
[+]: Use to insert a country code. Press [+] after the country code, and before the fax number.
  • If necessary, repeat this step for the other drop-down list(s).

If you want to change the criteria for the forwarding conditions without changing the forwarding condition for the Fax Number, Subaddress, and Password drop-down lists, press [Set.] next to the criteria you want to change → enter the new criteria → press [OK].

If you select password as the forwarding conditions, press [Set.] → [Password] → enter a password using - (numeric keys), , and .

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation → press [OK].

You can enter up to 20 characters for the Fax Number, Subaddress, or Password forwarding criteria. The characters that can be entered are:

  • Fax Number: 0 to 9, [Space], [+]
  • Subaddress: 0 to 9, , , [Space]
  • Password: 0 to 9, , , [Space]
  • If [disregarded] or [does not exist] is selected as the forwarding condition, you cannot enter any criteria.
  • You cannot set the following combinations of conditions.
Fax Number Subaddress Password
[disregarded] [does not exist] [equals]
Other than [disregarded] [equals] [equals]
Other than [disregarded] [does not exist] [equals]
Other than [disregarded] [equals] [does not exist]
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as asterisks on Password screen, and you do not have to re-enter the password for confirmation. (See "Security.")

  1. Press [Done].

  1. Press [Forwarding Destination] → select [Address Book] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Address Book]: Select to forward the received document to another machine (relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
  • If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox as a destination, the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
  • A WebDAV server cannot be specified as a forwarding destination. If the selected destination is a group address which contains a WebDAV server, the document is not forwarded to the WebDAV server.

  • Select the forwarding destination → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time. To forward to multiple destinations, select a group address.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If you select a fax number as the forwarding destination, the subaddress and password registered in the Address Book are ignored.

  • Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox → press [OK].

You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.

If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send].

A message <Confidential Fax Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the e-mail message stating the link to the Confidential Fax Inbox.

  • Additional documents cannot be stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • To be able to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the document is stored, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the Confidential Fax Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the machine, see "Mail Box."

  1. Press [Send Doc. Name].

If you selected a fax number or Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 13.

  1. Enter the name of the document → press [OK].

The condition name is automatically entered as the document's name by default. However, you can change this name.

  1. Press [Forwarding Time].

  1. Select [Everyday], [Period Specification], or [Off].
  • You cannot set the same time for both the start time and end time.

  • Enter the start time and end time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

  • If the end time is set earlier than the start time, the received documents will stop being forwarded at the specified end time on the following day.
    For example:
    Start time: 22:00, end time: 21:00
    The end time refers to 21:00 on the following day.

  • Press [Add].
  • Press the Start Time drop-down list → select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) at which to start forwarding.
  • Press [] next to the Start Time drop-down list → enter the time at which to start forwarding using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

If you press [All Day], the start and end times are automatically set to '00:00'. The day for the end time is automatically set to the day following the day for the start time.

  • Set the end time in the same way as the start time → press [OK].

You can store up to seven different combinations of start and end times.

To change previously stored settings, select the setting that you want to change → press [Edit].

To erase previously stored settings, select the setting that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • If the end time is set earlier than the start time and both the start time and the end time are set for the same day of the week, the received documents will stop being forwarded at the specified end time on the specified day of the following week.
    For example:
    Start time: Monday 22:00, end time: Monday 21:00
    The end time refers to Monday 21:00 of the following week.

  • Press [OK].

  1. Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list → select [On] or [Off].

If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 19.

<Store/Print Received Doc.>:

[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'On', the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off', the received document is printed. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  1. Press [Forwarding Done Notice] → select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to be sent → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs, press [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].

  1. Press [File Format] → select the file format of the document you want to forward → [OK].

This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:

  • A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination
  • An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
  • A Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding destination

File formats:

[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[XPS]: Sends the file in the XPS format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • For more information on the file format, see "Glossary."
  1. Press [OK].
  • You cannot set multiple forwarding conditions that contain the same subaddress setting.
  1. If necessary, press the E-mail Priority drop-down list → select a priority for your forwarded e-mail messages.

This setting is necessary only if the forwarding destination is an e-mail address.



When Forwarding Destinations Do Not Match the Forwarding Conditions

You can store the forwarding destinations of a received document if the forwarding settings of the received document are not registered, or if the received document does not match all of the forwarding conditions that you have specified.


Remark
  • If the optional fax board is installed and the subaddress and password specified from the sending machine do not match the registered forwarding conditions, the documents are not forwarded to forwarding destinations registered in Forward w/o Conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), and the faxed documents are not received.
  • Forwarding destinations can be stored one at a time, according to the receive type of the received document.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings] → [Forward w/o Conditions].
  1. Press the Receive Type drop-down list → select [Fax] or [I-Fax].

If either the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional fax board is installed, this step is not necessary. If the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board, you can select the line ([Fax: Line 1], [Fax: Line 2], or [Fax: Line 3]).


  1. Press [Forwarding Destination] → select [Address Book] or [Conf. Fax Inbox].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Address Book]: Select to forward the received document to another machine (relay function).
[Conf. Fax Inbox]: Select to store the received document in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
  • If the selected destination is a group address which contains a User Inbox as a destination, the document is not sent and stored in that User Inbox.
  • A WebDAV server cannot be specified as a forwarding destination. If the selected destination is a group address which contains a WebDAV server, the document is not forwarded to the WebDAV server.

  • Select the forwarding destination → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

You can restrict the type of destinations displayed in the results list by pressing the Type drop-down list.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, you can specify e-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, file server addresses, and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

If the optional fax board is installed, you can specify fax numbers and group addresses as forwarding destinations.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a forwarding destination, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  • If you select a fax number as the forwarding destination, the subaddress and password registered in the Address Book are ignored.

  • Select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox → press [OK].

You cannot select multiple Confidential Fax Inboxes.

If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send].

A message <Confidential Fax Inbox Incoming Notice> is inserted into the body of the e-mail message stating the link to the Confidential Fax Inbox.

  • Additional documents cannot be stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox under the following conditions. (These numbers may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When a total of 2,000 documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • When a total of 8,000 pages of documents or images have been stored in any or all of the inboxes
  • To be able to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the document is stored, it is necessary to register an e-mail address in the Confidential Fax Inbox beforehand. For instructions on storing an e-mail address in the machine, see "Mail Box."

  1. Press [Send Doc. Name].

If you selected a fax number or Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 6.

  1. Enter the name of the document → press [OK].
  1. Press the Store/Print Received Doc. drop-down list → select [On] or [Off].

If you selected a Confidential Fax Inbox as the forwarding destination, proceed to step 11.

<Store/Print Received Doc.>:

[On]: The received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
[Off]: The received document is not stored in the Memory RX Inbox or printed.
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'On', the received document is stored in the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  • If <Store/Print Received Doc.> is set to 'On' and Memory Lock mode is set to 'Off', the received document is printed. (See "Memory RX Inbox Settings.")
  1. Press [Forwarding Done Notice].
  1. Select the destination where the forwarding done notice is to be sent → press [OK].

If Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and you want to select a destination that is stored with an access number, press [Access Number] → enter the access number. (See "Using the Address Book.")

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can select a letter or number to restrict the displayed range of entries. Press [All] to return to the full address list.

If [Incremental] is pressed, the screen for refining the address book is displayed.

Press the alphanumeric keys (e.g., [ABC]) to display the individual keys for each letter or number. You can also refine the addresses display by specifying the multiple letters pressing [Keyboard].

[Backspace]: Press to delete the last letter entered.

[Clear]: Press to delete all of the text entered.

[Keyboard]: Displays the keyboard on the touch panel display.

[Clear Incremental]: Returns the display to the Address Book.

Press the Address Book drop-down list to display a list of subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons. Subaddress books categorize the addresses stored in the Address Book. Select one of these subaddress books to limit the display of destinations.

You cannot select multiple destinations at the same time.

  • To cancel a selected destination, select the destination again.
  • To view the detailed information of a selected destination, select the destination → press [Details].
  • To be able to select a destination for the forwarding done notice, it is necessary to register destinations in the Address Book beforehand. (See "Storing New Addresses.")
  • [Access Number] is displayed on the screen only if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Access Number Management.")
  1. Select whether to check [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent only when an error occurs, press [Notice Only for Errors].

If you want the forwarding done notice to be sent every time a received document is forwarded, do not press [Notice Only for Errors].

  1. Press [File Format] → select the file format of the document you want to forward → [OK].

This part of the procedure is not necessary if any one of the following is true:

  • A fax number is specified as the forwarding destination
  • An I-fax address is specified as the forwarding destination
  • A Confidential Fax Inbox is specified as the forwarding destination

File formats:

[TIFF]: Sends the file in the TIFF format.
[PDF]: Sends the file in the PDF format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].
[XPS]: Sends the file in the XPS format. You can also specify [OCR (Text Searchable)] and/or [Add Digital Signatures].

If you want to separate multiple images and send them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to send multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.
  • To view a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view an XPS file or to search a text in an XPS file, software that supports the XPS format (such as XPS Document Viewer) is required.
  • For more information on the file format, see "Glossary."
  1. Press [OK].


Checking/Changing Forwarding Settings

You can check or change forwarding settings that have been stored.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Select the forwarding setting whose details you want to check → press [Edit].
  1. Check or change the forwarding settings → press [OK].


Forwarding Received Documents

You can set whether received documents are forwarded.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Select the desired forwarding setting → press [Validate/Invalidate].

Details of each item are shown below.

<On>: The received document is forwarded to the specified destination if it matches the forwarding conditions.
<Off>: The received document is not forwarded to the specified destination even if it matches the forwarding conditions.

To cancel forwarding, press [Validate/Invalidate] again.



Erasing Forwarding Settings

You can erase forwarding settings that have been stored.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Select the forwarding setting that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  1. Press [Yes].


Printing Forwarding Settings

You can print a list of the stored forwarding settings.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings].
  1. Press [Print List].
  • The forwarding settings can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


LDAP Server Settings

If the information for an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server is registered in the machine, you can search for e-mail addresses and fax numbers via the LDAP server. E-mail addresses and fax numbers obtained via the server can be specified as destinations or stored in the Address Book.


Remark
  • The following types of LDAP servers can be used with this machine:
  • Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory
  • Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later
  • Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later
    For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • You can register up to five LDAP servers.


Registering an LDAP Server

You have to specify the relevant information for the LDAP server, such as the server name and address.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server] → [Register].
  1. Specify each setting → press [Next].

[Server Name]:

Enter a server name → press [OK].

[Server Address]:

Press [Server Address] → enter the server's address → press [OK].

[Location to Start Search]:

Press [Location to Start Search] → enter the location to start searching → press [OK].

If the server's LDAP version is 3, then you do not have to specify [Location to Start Search]. (If the LDAP version is 3, the machine automatically retrieves settings from the server, and sets the location to start searching.) If the server's LDAP version is 2, you have to specify [Location to Start Search].

Enter the location to start searching according to the type of LDAP server you are using, or as described below.

  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
    Add "DC=" to each dot separated series of characters in the Active Directory domain name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp> is the domain name in Active Directory:
    DC=team1, DC=salesdept, DC=canon, DC=co, DC=jp
  • If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
    Add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
    ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
    Enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the node on the directory tree, such as "ou=team1", "ou=salesdept", "o=canon", or "c=jp".

<Use SSL>:

[On]: SSL is used. Using SSL encodes the content of the communication, and ensures greater security.
[Off]: SSL is not used.

<Port Number>:

Press [Port Number] → enter a port number using - (numeric keys).

<Max. No. of Addresses to Search>:

Press [Max. No. of Addresses to Search] → enter the maximum number of addresses to search using - (numeric keys).

<Search Timeout>:

Press [Search Timeout] → enter the timeout time, in seconds, using - (numeric keys).

  • If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, enter a host name instead of an IP address.

  1. Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] for <Login Information>.
  • [Use (security auth.)] next to <Login Information> can be selected only if the LDAP server is running on Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory.
  • If you entered an IP address in step 2, and Reverse DNS Lookup (a function that looks up the host name from the IP address) is not supported, select either [Do not use] or [Use].
  • If <Login Information> is set to 'Use (security auth.)', and if Date & Time Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is different from the time settings on the LDAP server, the machine may not be able to connect to the LDAP server.

  • Select the Server LDAP version and character code → press [OK].

Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.


  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter a user name → press [OK].

Enter the user name according to the type of LDAP server you are using.

  • If you are using Windows 2000 Server with Active Directory:
    Press [User] → enter "Windows domain name/Windows user name".
    Example: If <team1> is the Windows domain name, and <user1> is the Windows user name:
    team1/user1
  • If you are using Novell NetWare 5.1 (NDS) or later:
    Press [User] → add the corresponding object class "o=", "ou=", or "c=" to each dot-separated series of characters that configure the distinguished name, and separate each series of characters by a comma.
    Example: If <user1.TEAM1.SALESDEPT.CANON> is the distinguished name in NDS:
    cn=user1, ou=team1, ou=salesdept, o=canon
  • If you are using Lotus Notes Domino R5 or later:
    Press [User] → enter the dn (Distinguished Name) of the user, such as "cn=admin", "ou=team1", or "ou=salesdept".

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter a password → press [OK].

Press [Confirm] → re-enter the password for confirmation → press [OK] → [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Register screen.

<Display authentication dialog when searching>:

[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is not displayed.

<Server LDAP version and character code>:

Select the LDAP version and character code according to the LDAP server's environment.


  • Specify each setting → press [OK].

[User]:

Press [User] → enter a user name → press [OK].

Example: If <user1 > is the Windows user name:
user1

[Password]:

Press [Password] → enter a password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation → press [OK].

After pressing [OK], the password that you entered appears as asterisks (********) on the Register screen.

[Domain Name]:

Press [Domain Name] → enter a domain name → press [OK].

Enter the directory tree name of the Active Directory, such as <team1.salesdept.canon.co.jp>.

<Display authentication dialog when searching>:

[On]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is displayed even if a password is not required.
[Off]: When searching for information on the server, a login information dialog box is not displayed.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter is not displayed as asterisks on the Password screen. (See "Security.")


Changing an LDAP Server Setting

You can change the settings for a stored LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server].
  1. Select the LDAP server whose settings you want to change → press [Edit].
  1. Change the necessary settings → press [Next].
  1. Select [Do not use], [Use], or [Use (security auth.)] for <Login Information> → change the settings for the selected mode → press [OK].


Deleting an LDAP Server

You can delete a stored LDAP server.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server].
  1. Select the LDAP server that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  1. Press [Yes].


Registering/Editing LDAP Search Attributes

You can register or edit the LDAP search attributes.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server] → [Register/Edit LDAP Search].

  1. Register/edit the LDAP search attributes.


  • Press [Not Reg'd 1] or [Not Reg'd 2] → [Register/Edit].
  • Press [Display Name] → enter the name to display → press [OK].
  • Press [Attribute Name] → enter the attribute name → press [OK].
  • Press [OK].

  • Select the search attribute that you want to edit → press [Register/Edit].
  • You can only edit the two search attributes displayed as 'Not Registered' by default. You cannot edit the name, e-mail, fax, organization, and organization unit attributes.
  • Press [Display Name] → enter the name to display → press [OK].
  • Press [Attribute Name] → enter the attribute name → press [OK].
  • Press [OK].

  • Select the search category that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • You can only erase the two search attributes displayed as 'Not Registered' by default. You cannot erase the Name, E-mail, Fax, Organization, and OrganizationUnit attributes.
  • Press [Yes].


Printing LDAP Server Settings

You can print the LDAP server settings.


Remark
  • For more information on the Registered LDAP Server List, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server].
  1. Press [Print List].
  • The Registered LDAP Server List can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Erasing All Encrypted PDF Password

When changing the authentication system if an SSO-H login service is specified, it is necessary to erase the encrypted PDF passwords that are stored for each user. Using this function, all of the encrypted PDF passwords are erased.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send Advanced Feature Set is activated, and you are using SSO-H login services. For information on SSO-H login services, see "Security."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Erase All Encrypted PDF Password].
  1. Press [Yes].


Report Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Report Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


  • Settings
Item Settings Delivered
Send
TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Yes
Activity Report Yes

Auto Print

On*1, Off

Daily Activity Report Time

On, Off*1
  • Time Settings: 00:00 to 23:59

Send/Receive Separate

(Not Selected*1)
Fax*2
Fax TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off
Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Yes
Fax Activity Report Yes

Auto Print

On*1, Off

Daily Activity Report Time

On, Off*1
  • Time Settings: 00:00 to 23:59

Send/Receive Separate

(Not Selected*1)
Fax RX Report For Error Only, On, Off*1 Yes
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report On*1, Off Yes

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.

  • Print List
Item Settings Delivered
Send
Address Book List Address Book 1 to 10, One-touch Buttons
Print List: Print
No
User's Data List Print List No
Fax*2
User's Data List Print List No

*2 Indicates items that appear only if the optional fax board is installed.

Remark
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Specifying Report Settings

You can specify how various reports are printed.


Remark
  • The reports can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")


Send TX Report

The Send TX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly to their intended destinations. A Send TX Report can be printed automatically after the documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Send TX Report only when a transmission error occurs, and adjust the Send TX Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the document's contents.


Remark
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, the results of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmissions are printed.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, the results of fax and User Inbox transmissions are included in the Send TX Report. In addition, a Fax TX Report is printed with the Send TX Report, if Fax TX Report in Fax under <Settings> in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On'. (See Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.)
  • For an example of a Send TX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Settings> → [TX Report].

  1. Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with TX Image> → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the Send TX Report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the Send TX Report.
  • Even if <Report with TX Image> is set to 'On', the original will not be printed if the document was sent using the Encrypted PDF mode.

  • Press [OK].

The Send TX Report is not printed.



Activity Report

The Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. The Activity Report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed automatically when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100. The send and receive logs can also be printed separately.

An Activity Report can be printed manually from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Send Job Status/Log" and "Printing the Receive Job Log.")


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Activity Report] is not displayed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is changed from 'Off' to 'On', the following settings are switched to 'Off' automatically:
  • Auto Print
  • Daily Activity Report Time
  • If the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, a list of e-mail, I-fax, file server, and User Inbox transmission logs is printed.
  • If the optional fax board is installed, a list of fax and the User Inbox transmission logs are printed.
  • For an example of an Activity Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Settings> → [Activity Report].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Auto Print>:

[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100.

<Daily Activity Report Time>:

[On]: The Daily Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.

If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 100 before the specified time, an Activity Report of the most recent 100 transmissions is printed.

<Send/Receive Separate>:

To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to select it.

If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press [Send/Receive Separate].



Fax TX Report

The Fax TX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly to their intended destinations. A Fax TX Report can be printed automatically after the documents are sent. You can also set the machine to print a Fax TX Report only when a transmission error occurs, and adjust the Fax TX Report setting to print the first part of the document as part of the report to remind you of the document's contents.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • If TX Report in Send under <Settings> in Report Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'For Error Only' or 'On', a Send TX Report is printed with the Fax TX Report.
  • If a sequential broadcast transmission is performed when Fax TX Report is set to On, a Fax Multi TX Report is printed.
  • For an example of a Fax TX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Fax TX Report].

  1. Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Report with TX Image> → press [OK].

<Report with TX Image>:

[On]: Part of the sent document is printed on the Fax TX Report.
[Off]: The contents of the sent document are not printed on the Fax TX Report.

  • Press [OK].

The Fax TX Report is not printed.



Fax Activity Report

The Fax Activity Report is a printed log that shows the results of send and receive jobs. The Fax Activity Report can be printed at a specified time or it can be printed automatically when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40. The send and receive logs can also be printed separately.

A copy of the Fax Activity Report can be printed at any time from the System Monitor screen. (See "Printing the Fax Activity Report."


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Fax Activity Report] is not displayed.
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is changed from 'Off' to 'On', the following settings are switched to 'Off' automatically:
  • Auto Print
  • Daily Activity Report Time
  • For an example of a Fax Activity Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Fax Activity Report].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Auto Print>:

[On]: The Activity Report is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40.
[Off]: The Activity Report is not automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 40.

<Daily Activity Report Time>:

[On]: The Fax Activity Report is printed at the specified time.
[Off]: The Daily Activity Report Time setting is not specified.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples: 7:05 a.m. → 0705
23:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.

If the number of send and receive transmissions exceeds 40 before the specified time, a Fax Activity Report of the most recent 40 transmissions is printed.

<Send/Receive Separate>:

To print the send and receive logs separately, press [Send/Receive Separate] to select it.

If it is not necessary to print the send and receive logs separately, do not press [Send/Receive Separate].



Fax RX Report

The Fax RX Report enables you to check whether documents were sent correctly from the sender's machine and received successfully by this machine. A Fax RX Report can be printed automatically after documents are received, and you can also set the machine to print a Fax RX Report only when a reception error occurs.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • For an example of a Fax RX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Fax RX Report].
  1. Select [For Error Only], [On], or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[For Error Only]: Prints a Fax RX Report only when a reception error occurs.
[On]: Prints a Fax RX Report each time a document is received.
[Off]: Does not print a Fax RX Report.


Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report

The Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report enables you to check the reception of documents in Confidential Fax Inboxes.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • For an example of a Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Settings> → [Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Printing Lists

You can print the contents of the Address Book or a list of Send settings that have been specified from the Additional Functions screen.


Remark
  • The lists can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in the paper sources whose settings in Other in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) are set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")


Address Book List

You can print the contents of the Address Book (subaddress books 1 to 10 or one-touch buttons). This is useful for checking the details of the destinations.


Remark
  • Even if Access Number Management in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', all of the destinations in the selected subaddress book (including those stored with Access numbers) are printed in the Address Book list.
  • For an example of an Address Book List, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Print List> → [Address Book List].
  1. Select one of the subaddress books 1 to 10 or [One-touch Buttons] → press [Print List].
  1. Press [Yes].


User's Data List

You can print a list of Send or Fax settings that have been specified from the Additional Functions screen. This is useful for checking the details of the settings.


Remark
  • The following two types of User's Data Lists are available:
  • Send: Prints all information related to the Send function stored from the Additional Functions screen.
  • Fax: Prints all information related to the Fax function stored from the Additional Functions screen.
  • For an example of the User's Data List, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.


Printing the User's Data List for send

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Send] under <Print List> → [User's Data List].
  1. Press [Yes].


Printing the User's Data List for fax

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Report Settings] → [Fax] under <Print List> → [User's Data List].
  1. Press [Yes].


When Problems Occur


Sending Documents

Canceling transmissions.

Document cannot be sent.

Document cannot be sent (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

Document cannot be sent (if the optional fax board is installed).

Memory is full.

The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.

The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.

The machine will not transmit using a subaddress (if the optional fax board is installed).

The remote machine is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur (if the optional fax board is installed).

Canceling transmissions.

How do you cancel a transmission while a document is being scanned?

Press (Stop) on the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel display.

How do you cancel a transmission after the document has been scanned?

If you are sending the document by any other sending method besides fax, press [System Monitor] → [Send] → [Status] → select the document that you want to cancel → press [Cancel] → [Yes]. However, documents that are being sent may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen.")

If you are sending the document by fax, press [System Monitor] → [Fax] → [Send Job Status] → select the document that you want to cancel → press [Cancel] → [Yes]. However, documents that are being sent may not be canceled even if you press [Cancel]. (See "Using the System Monitor Screen.")

Are you sending a fax document using the Direct Sending mode?

Press (Stop) on the control panel, or press [Cancel] on the touch panel display.

Document cannot be sent.

Is the destination setting correct?

Check the destination setting of the recipient.

Is the destination stored in the Address Book correct?

Check the destination in the Address Book. (See "Editing Address Details.")

Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?

Check to ensure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot, check to see whether the machine is turned OFF, is out of recording paper, or has insufficient available memory.

Document cannot be sent (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

If you are sending an e-mail message or I-fax, are the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings correct?

Check the SMTP Server and DNS Server settings.

If you are sending to a file server, are the User and Password settings correct?

Check the User and Password settings, and send the document again.

If you are sending to a file server, are the shared folder settings correct?

Check the shared folder settings. (See "Network.")

Document cannot be sent (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is the telephone line type set correctly?

Check the type of telephone line that has been set. (See "Selecting the Type of Telephone Line.")

If you are sending with a subaddress setting, did you enter the correct subaddress and password for the destination?

Check the subaddress and password settings.

Is the line connected to a private branch exchange switchboard or terminal adapter?

Set Check Dial Tone Before Sending in TX Settings under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Checking the Dial Tone before Sending.")

Memory is full.

Are unwanted documents stored in memory?

Check the TX Document and RX Document memory, and erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

The document does not print clearly on the remote machine.

Is the platen glass clean?

Use your machine to make a copy of the document, and check it for streaks. If streaks appear, clean the platen glass. (See "Maintenance,")

The density of the documents sent to a remote machine is too light.

Is the Exposure setting set towards '' (Light) and the Original Type setting set to 'Photo'?

Change the Exposure setting to '' (Dark) and the Original Type setting to 'Text'. Try sending the document again. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings.")

The machine will not transmit using a subaddress (if the optional fax board is installed).

Are the subaddress and password of the remote machine specified correctly?

Check to see if the machine has a subaddress function.

Check with the remote party to see if the specified subaddress and the RX password at both this machine and the remote machine are the same.

Has trouble occurred in the remote machine?

Check to make sure that the remote machine can receive documents. If it cannot, check to see whether the recipient's machine has been turned OFF, is out of recording paper, or has insufficient available memory.

Are the subaddress and password for the destination stored in the Address Book correct?

Check the subaddress and password settings for the destination stored in the Address Book.

The remote machine is slow to switch over to the receiving mode, and errors always occur (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is a pause inserted in the fax number?

If you are sending to a machine that is slow in switching over to fax receiving, insert a pause after the destination's fax number.



Receiving Documents

The machine does not receive documents.

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional fax board is installed).

Documents cannot be received in Confidential Fax Inboxes.

Documents cannot be received in memory.

The quality of printed originals is uneven.

The machine does not receive documents.

Does the machine have sufficient memory?

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated).

Are network settings specified?

Documents cannot be received if the appropriate network settings are not specified. Confirm this with your System Manager.

The machine does not receive documents (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is the RX password set in your machine?

If Receive Password is set in Fax Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), documents can be received only from senders that use the correct password. Confirm this with your System Manager. (See "Fax Settings.")

Documents cannot be received in Confidential Fax Inboxes.

Are the forwarding conditions in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set correctly?

Check the Forwarding Conditions, and inform the sender of those settings. (See "Forwarding Settings.")

Is Forwarding Settings set to 'On' using [Validate/Invalidate]?

Forwarding Settings must be set to 'On' to be effective. (See "Forwarding Settings.")

Is there sufficient available memory?

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Erase unnecessary documents from the Confidential Fax Inboxes. (See "Erasing Received Documents.")

Documents cannot be received in memory.

Is there sufficient available memory?

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Erase unwanted documents from the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents.")

The quality of printed originals is uneven.

Is the platen glass of the sender's machine clean?

Make a few copies using your machine. If the copies are not streaked, the problem is in the sending party's machine. Contact the sender and ask them to send the document again.



Other Situations

Transmissions are slow.

Fax transmissions are slow (if the optional fax board is installed).

Cannot use fax information services (if the optional fax board is installed).

Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #18) (if the optional fax board is installed).

Calls are not connected, or an incorrect number is dialed.

Transmissions are slow.

Are documents being sent at a high resolution?

It is recommended that you send documents containing text only in a lower resolution.

Fax transmissions are slow (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is the ECM TX or ECM RX set to 'On'?

Set ECM TX and ECM RX to 'Off'. (See "ECM Transmission" and "ECM Reception.")

Was the original type set to 'Text/Photo' when sending the document?

Select 'Text' from the Original Type drop-down list if the original does not contain any photos. (See "Scan Exposure and Original Type Settings.")

Cannot use fax information services (if the optional fax board is installed).

If your machine is connected to a rotary pulse line, is your machine set for tone dialing?

Set the machine for tone dialing to use fax information services. (See "Fax Information Services.")

Did you receive an instruction from the sender to set the machine to receive?

Press [RX Start]. (See "Fax Information Services.")

Documents cannot be sent overseas (error code #18) (if the optional fax board is installed).

Is a pause inserted in the fax number?

Insert a pause after the country code, or after the fax number of the recipient, and then dial the number again. (See "Specifying a Fax Number.")

Change the Long Distance setting on the Option screen if you are sending documents to destinations stored in the Address Book. To access the Long Distance setting, press → [Address Book Settings] → [Register Address] → [Register New Address] → [Fax] → [Option]. (See "Editing Address Details.")

Calls are not connected, or an incorrect number is dialed.

Did you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number?

Make sure that you hear the dial tone before entering the fax number. If you enter the fax number before hearing the dial tone, the call may not be connected, or an incorrect number may be dialed.



Error Messages

This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display, along with possible causes and remedies.

For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see "Problem Solving" and "Network."



Self-Diagnostic Display

Perform the necessary procedures according to the displayed self-diagnostic error message.

Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following times:

  • When scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error
  • When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning or printing
  • When you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network

The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible causes and remedies.


Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

Set the IP Address.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

There are too many subdirectories.

No response.

Check the TCP/IP.

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Check the user name and password or check settings.

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.

Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.

Out of resources. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

Cause

You cannot browse the network. There is a lack of TCP/IP resources because documents have just been continuously sent or are being continuously sent via FTP or Windows (SMB).

Remedy

Wait for a while, and try browsing again.

Set the IP Address.

Cause

This machine is not set with an IP address.

Remedy

Specify the IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), turn the machine's main power OFF, and then back ON.

No response from the server. Check the settings.

Cause

The specified server settings are incorrect, or the server is not turned ON. Alternatively, the machine's TCP/IP resources may be low.

Remedy

Wait for a while, and then try browsing again. If there is still no response from the server, try selecting another server.

NetWare is in use. Wait for a moment, then perform operation again.

Cause

You cannot browse the network because NetWare is printing through a PServer or NDS PServer.

Remedy

Wait until printing is complete, and then try browsing again.

There are too many subdirectories.

Cause

You have exceeded the maximum number of subdirectory levels allowed.

Remedy

Specify a different destination because the directory level that you are trying to access cannot be specified.

No response.

Cause 1

The server was not running when you tried to send.

Remedy

Make sure that the server is ON, and check the destination.

Cause 2

The network connection was lost when you tried to send. (Either you could not connect to the destination, or the connection was lost before the job could be completed.)

Remedy

Check the status of the network.

Cause 3

You tried to send via NetWare, but the Tree name was not entered.

Remedy

Enter the Tree name.

Cause 4

A TCP/IP error occurred when you tried to send an e-mail message or I-fax.

Remedy

Check that the network cables and connectors are properly connected.

Check the TCP/IP.

Cause

The machine's TCP/IP connection is not operating.

Remedy

Check the IP Address Settings (IP Address, DHCP, RARP, BOOTP) in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cannot find the selected server. Check the settings.

Cause 1

The IP address that the machine should connect to cannot be determined.

Remedy 1

Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy 2

Check whether the DNS server's DNS settings are correct.

Cause 2

If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, the machine will not be able to determine the host name.

Remedy

Check the DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cannot connect to the selected server. Check the settings.

Cause

The machine cannot connect to the specified IP address/port.

Remedy 1

Check the Gateway Address setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy 2

Check the Server Address and Port Number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Remedy 3

Check whether the LDAP server is operating normally.

Remedy 4

If <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)' for the LDAP server, check whether UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packages are blocked by the filter.

Check the user name and password or check settings.

Cause 1

When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)', the user name or password is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the User Name and Password settings when <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use' or 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Cause 2

When setting Login Information for the LDAP server to 'Use (security auth.)', the domain name is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the Domain Name setting when <Login Information> in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Use (security auth.)'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Cannot complete searching due to timeout. Check the settings.

Cause

The search could not be completed within the time specified under <Search Timeout>.

Remedy

Increase the time setting for Search Timeout in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

The number of search results has exceeded limits. Change search conditions and try again.

Cause

The number of addresses that meet the search criteria exceeds the specified maximum number of addresses to search.

Remedy 1

Narrow down the search criteria, and then search again.

Remedy 2

Increase the maximum number of addresses to search. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")

Search condition includes characters that cannot be used with the selected server.

Cause 1

"\" is used in the search criterion.

Remedy

Remove "\" from the search criterion, and then search again.

Cause 2

The combination of characters used in the search criterion does not constitute an acceptable search criterion.

  • There is an unequal number of "("and")".
  • "*" is not placed within "( )".
Remedy

Make sure that the characters for the search criterion are combined properly, and then search again.

Cause 3

If <Server LDAP version and character code> is set to 'ver.2 (JIS)', characters other than ASCII Code (0x20-0x7E) are being used.

Remedy

Omit characters that cannot be used, and then search again.

Cannot start searching because the version setting for the server is incorrect. Check the settings.

Cause

Although 'ver. 3' is set as the server LDAP version number in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the LDAP server is running on version 2.

Remedy

Set Server LDAP version and character code in Register LDAP Server in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'ver. 2'. (See "Registering an LDAP Server.")



List of Error Codes without Messages

If an error occurs while a document is being sent or received, an error code is displayed on the job log in the System Monitor screen, and is included in various reports. Check what the error code is, and then take the required steps to solve the problem. (See Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.)


Remark
  • If a send job is canceled, <STOP> is printed in the Results column on the Send report.

#001

#003

#005

#009

#011

#012

#018

#022

#037

#080

#081

#102

#107

#701

#702

#703

#704

#705

#706

#711

#712

#713

#751

#752

#753

#754

#755

#756

#761

#762

#766

#770

#801

#802

#803

#804

#806

#810

#815

#818

#819

#820

#821

#822

#827

#828

#829

#830

#831

#832

#833

#834

#835

#837

#839

#841

#842

#843

#847

#851

#852

#859

#868

#869

#870

#871

#872

#873

#874

#875

#876

#877

#878

#879

#880

#881

#882

#883

#884

#885

#886

#899

#995

#001

Cause 1

Different sized originals were scanned without setting the Different Size Originals mode.

Remedy

Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.

Cause 2

Different sized originals were scanned in the 2-Sided Original without setting the Different Size Originals mode.

Remedy

Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.

#003

Cause 1

Communications that take longer than the preset time (64 minutes) caused the error.

Remedy1

Reduce the resolution or divide the document into two or more parts, and then try sending the document again. (See "Resolution.")

Remedy2

When receiving a document, ask the remote party to either reduce the resolution at which the document is scanned, or divide the document into two or more parts before sending it.

#005

Cause 1

The recipient did not answer within 35 seconds.

Remedy

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Cause 2

The receiving machine is not a G3 fax.

Remedy

Check the type of machine that the recipient has.

#009

Cause 1

There is no paper.

Remedy

Load paper. (See "Maintenance,")

Cause 2

The paper drawer is not correctly inserted into the machine.

Remedy

Insert the paper drawer properly. (See "Maintenance,")

#011

Cause 1

The document that you are sending is not placed correctly.

Remedy

Place the document properly into the feeder or on the platen glass, and try sending again.

#012

Cause 1

The document could not be sent because the receiving fax machine was out of paper.

Remedy

Ask the recipient to load paper into their fax machine.

#018

Cause 1

The recipient's machine did not respond when your machine redialed.

Remedy

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Cause 2

The documents could not be sent because the recipient's machine was performing another task.

Remedy

Confirm that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and then try again.

Cause 3

The settings on your machine do not match the settings on the recipient's machine.

Remedy

Check that the settings on your machine match those on the recipient's machine, and that the recipient's machine is able to communicate, and try again.

#022

Cause 1

Forwarding could not be performed because all of the addresses stored in the specified group destination have been deleted, or a User Inbox is specified as the group destination.

Remedy

Re-enter the group destination, and try sending again.

Cause 2

When transmitting to a destination stored in the Address Book, transmission could not be performed because the specified destination stored in the Address Book was deleted while the documents were waiting to be sent.

Remedy

Re-enter the destination in the Address Book, and try sending again.

Cause 3

Transmission via fax driver is not allowed.

Remedy

Allow Fax Driver TX in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'. Set Allow Fax Driver TX to 'On'. (See, "Setting Whether to Allow Sending Using the Fax Driver.")

Cause 4

Forwarding could not be performed because a group address that includes a destination using WebDAV is selected as the forwarding destination.

Remedy

Specify a forwarding destination that does not use WebDAV.

#037

Cause 1

Transmission via fax driver is not allowed.

Remedy

Allow Fax Driver TX in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'. Set Allow Fax Driver TX to 'On'. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Cause 2

Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.

Remedy

This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining page.

#080

Cause 1

A subaddress is not set in the recipient's machine.

Remedy

Try sending the document without a subaddress, or request that the recipient set the same subaddress as the sender's subaddress.

#081

Cause 1

A password is not set in the recipient's machine.

Remedy

Try sending the document without a password, or request that the recipient set the same password as the sender's password.

#102

Cause 1

The subaddress and/or password do not match.

Remedy

Check the subaddress and/or password of the recipient's machine, make sure that the subaddress and password you are sending with the document matches the recipient's, and then try again.

#107

Cause 1

The document could not be sent because there was insufficient memory available.

Remedy1

Resend the document at a lower resolution.

Remedy2

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors to make more memory available. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Remedy3

If this problem occurs frequently, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

#701

Cause 1

The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.

Remedy

Enter the correct Department ID or password using - (numeric keys) on the control panel, and then try sending again.

Cause 2

The Department ID or password was changed during the job.

Remedy

Try performing the job again with the new Department ID and password. If you do not know the password, contact your System Manager.

Cause 3

<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in Dept. ID Management in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Set <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> in Dept. ID Management in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Security.")

#702

Cause 1

The document could not be sent because the memory is full.

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again after the other send jobs are complete.

Remedy2

Do not send the document to too many recipients at the same time. Send the document to a smaller number of recipients.

#703

Cause 1

The memory for the image data is full.

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again after the other send jobs are complete.

Remedy2

Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#704

Cause 1

An error occurred while reading address information from the Address Book.

Remedy

Check the address settings. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#705

Cause 1

The send operation was interrupted because the size of the image data is larger than the Maximum Data Size for Sending set in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Remedy

Change the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Select a lower resolution, or if you are using I-fax, decrease the number of pages containing images that you are sending each time, so that you do not exceed the Maximum Data Size for Sending limit. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.") Depending on the destination conditions, it may be possible to divide the data.

#706

Cause 1

The Address Book is being imported or exported from the Remote UI, or it is being used by another sending component.

Remedy

Wait until the Address Book Import/Export function from the Remote UI or the other sending component is complete, and then try sending again.

#711

Cause 1

The inbox memory is full.

Remedy

Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

#712

Cause 1

The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox.

Remedy

Erase the unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

#713

Cause 1

The document in the inbox was deleted before its link was sent via e-mail.

Remedy

Store the necessary document in the inbox again, and then try to send the link via e-mail.

#751

Cause 1

The server is not functioning. The network is down (the server is unable to connect to the network or was disconnected).

Remedy

Check the recipient's address. Check that the network is up.

#752

Cause 1

The server is not functioning. The network is down.

Remedy

Check that the SMTP server is operating properly. Check the network status.

Cause 2

The SMTP server name for e-mail or I-fax is not correct. The domain name or e-mail address may not be set.

Remedy

Check the SMTP Server name, domain name, and E-mail Address in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#753

Cause 1

A TCP/IP error occurred while sending an e-mail message. (Socket, Select error, etc.)

Remedy

Check the network cables and connectors. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#754

Cause 1

The server is not functioning or the network is down. The destination setting is not correct.

Remedy

Check the server and network. Check the destination's address settings.

#755

Cause 1

You cannot send jobs because TCP/IP is not functioning correctly.

Remedy

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cause 2

The IP address is not set.

Remedy

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Cause 3

When the machine was turned ON, an IP address was not assigned to the machine by the DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP server.

Remedy

Check TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#756

Cause 1

NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Turn NetWare in NetWare Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) 'On'. (See "Network.")

#761

Cause 1

A PDF or XPS file with a digital signature could not be sent because a digital certificate or key pair registered in the machine is corrupt or could not be accessed.

Remedy1

If you are sending a PDF or XPS file with a user signature, confirm that the user certificate is not corrupt. If the user certificate is corrupt, re-install it. (See "Network.")

Remedy2

If you are sending a PDF or XPS file with a device signature, confirm that the device certificate is not corrupt. If the device certificate is corrupt, generate it again. (See "Network.)

#762

Cause 1

Could not send to a domain that is not registered as an allowed domain because E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction in Restrict the Send Function in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'.

Remedy1

Try sending again after setting E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction to 'Off', or registering the domain as an allowed domain.

#766

Cause 1

The certificate used to send a PDF or XPS with a digital signature has expired.

Remedy1

Update the certificate, or use a certificate which has not expired.

Remedy2

Set the date and time of the machine to the correct date and time. (See "Setting the Current Date and Time.")

#770

Cause 1

Data could not be sent with WebDAV, because the WebDAV server or proxy server does not support SSL communications.

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the proxy server if you are communicating via a proxy server.

#801

Cause 1

A timeout error occurred while the machine was communicating with the SMTP server to send an e-mail message or send/receive an I-fax.

Remedy

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Cause 2

The SMTP server returned an error while trying to connect. The destination is not correct. An error occurred on the server side during transmission to a file server.

Remedy

Check that the SMTP server is functioning normally. Check the network status. Check the destination setting. Check the status and setting of the file server.

Cause 3

You are sending a file to a destination to which you have no write permission.

Remedy

Check the destination setting.

Cause 4

When the machine tried to send a file to the server, a file with the same name already exists on the FTP server and that file cannot be overwritten.

Remedy

Change the settings on the file server to enable the file to be overwritten, or contact the server administrator.

Cause 5

When the machine tried to send a file to the server, either the folder name is incorrectly specified or the password is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the destination setting.

#802

Cause 1

The name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. The DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect. Connection to the DNS server failed.

Remedy

Check the name of the SMTP Server in E-mail/I-Fax Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Check the DNS server name in DNS Server Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Check that the DNS server is functioning normally.

#803

Cause 1

The connection was interrupted due to reasons on the recipient's side before all of the pages could be sent.

Remedy

Try sending again.

#804

Cause 1

Unable to match the specified directory name when sending data to a file server.

Remedy

Check the destination.

Cause 2

You have no permission to access the folder.

Remedy

Change the settings on the file server to enable access to the folder, or contact the server administrator.

#806

Cause 1

An incorrect user name or password was specified for the sending of a file to a file server.

Remedy

Change the user name or password.

Cause 2

An incorrect destination was specified for the sending of an e-mail message or I-fax.

Remedy

Check the e-mail or I-fax address.

#810

Cause 1

A POP (Post Office Protocol) server connection error occurred while receiving an I-fax.

Remedy

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Cause 2

The POP server returned an error during the connection.

Remedy

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

Cause 3

A timeout error occurred on the server while connecting to the POP server.

Remedy

Check the POP Server name in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Confirm that the POP server is functioning normally. Check the network status.

#815

Cause 1

You cannot log on to the file server because the machine is printing a document sent to that server. Simultaneous connections are not possible.

Remedy

Wait for a few moments before trying to send the data again, or change the NetWare server to which you are sending your documents. Alternatively, stop the PServer.

#818

Cause 1

The received data is not in a printable file format.

Remedy

Ask the sender to change the file format and resend the data.

#819

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (MIME information is incorrect).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#820

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (BASE 64 or uuencode is incorrect).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#821

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (TIFF analysis error).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#822

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (image data cannot be decoded).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#827

Cause 1

You have received data that cannot be processed (contains MIME information that is not supported).

Remedy

Check the settings, and ask the sender to resend the data.

#828

Cause 1

You have received HTML data.

Remedy

Ask the sender to use a file format other than HTML, and then resend the data.

#829

Cause 1

Data that contains more than 1,000 pages is received.

Remedy

This machine can print or store up to 999 pages of data in memory, but will delete any data that exceeds this limit. Ask the sender to resend the remaining pages.

#830

Cause 1

A DSN (Delivery Status Notification) error notification is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or because the data size of the sent documents exceeds the mail server capacity.

Remedy1

Check the I-fax address or destination setting.

Remedy2

Set Maximum Data Size for Sending in E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings in Communications Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) so that it is less than the mail server capability. (See "E-Mail/I-Fax Common Settings.")

Remedy3

Check the status of the mail server, DNS server, and network.

#831

Cause 1

An I-fax document could not be received using SMTP because of the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Remedy

Reset the RX/Print Range setting in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#832

Cause 1

DSN (Delivery Status Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/ I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) have not been set, or because trouble has occurred in the mail server.

Remedy1

Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/ I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.

#833

Cause 1

MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) mail was not sent because TCP/IP Settings or E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) have not been set, or because trouble has occurred in the mail server.

Remedy1

Check the DNS Server Settings and IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings, and E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Check the status of the mail server and DNS server.

#834

Cause 1

An MDN (Mail Delivery Notification) error notification is received because of an incorrect I-fax address or destination setting, or because trouble has occurred in the network or mail server. Alternatively, the memory of the receiving machine is full.

Remedy

Check the I-fax address and destination settings.

#835

Cause 1

The maximum number of text lines for receiving an I-fax has been exceeded.

Remedy

Ask the sender to reduce the amount of text data in the body of the document, and then resend the data.

#837

Cause 1

A connection request was received from a host whose connection is restricted by IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

Remedy

Check the settings in IP Address Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
Make sure that the connection request is made from an authorized host.

#839

Cause 1

The user name or password for the SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is incorrect.

Remedy

Check the user name and password for SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) in Authent./Encryption in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#841

Cause 1

The encryption algorithm that matches the mail server does not exist for sending e-mail or I-fax.

Remedy1

Set Allow SSL in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Add the same encryption algorithm as the mail server in the mail server settings.

#842

Cause 1

Authentication using the client certificate was requested by the mail server for sending an e-mail message or I-fax.

Remedy1

Set Allow SSL in E-mail/I-Fax in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Network.")

Remedy2

Change the mail server settings so that the client certificate is not requested.

#843

Cause 1

There is large difference between the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server and the time set in the machine.

Remedy1

Change the current date and time in Date & Time Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Setting the Current Date and Time.")

Remedy2

Change the current time set in the KDC (Key Distribution Center) server.

#847

Cause 1

Could not save the received document in the Confidential Fax Inbox, as the memory of the Confidential Fax Inbox is full.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents stored in the Confidential Fax Inbox or the Memory RX Inbox. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

#851

Cause 1

There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.

Remedy

Check the system's available memory, and delete unnecessary documents in the inboxes. (See "Mail Box.")

Cause 2

The memory for image data is full.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents to make more memory available. (See "Erasing Received Documents" and "Mail Box.")

Cause 3

The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 2,000 documents in the specified inbox.

Remedy

Delete unnecessary documents from the specified inbox. (See "Mail Box.")

#852

Cause 1

An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed.

Remedy

Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job again, if necessary. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#859

Cause 1

A compression error occurred with the image data.

Remedy

Check the print settings, and try printing again.

Cause 2

An original was not scanned properly, or the orientation of the original was incorrect.

Remedy

Check the scan settings, and try scanning again.

#868

Cause 1

Failed to communicate with the destination when sending with WebDAV, because access via a proxy server was requested (received HTTP Error 305: Use Proxy).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check Proxy Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#869

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that authorization failed when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 401: Unauthorized).

Remedy1

Check the user name and password for the destination.

Remedy2

Check the security settings of the WebDAV server.

#870

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the request was denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 403: Forbidden).

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again.

Remedy2

Check the destination.

Remedy3

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#871

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the specified folder could not be found when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 404: Not Found/409: Conflict/410: Gone).

Remedy

Check the destination.

#872

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that access is denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 405: Method Not Allowed).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#873

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that proxy authentication failed when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 407: Proxy Authentication Required).

Remedy

Check Proxy Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")

#874

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the connection timed out when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 408: Request Timeout).

Remedy1

Wait a few moments, and then try again.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#875

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that chunked encoding was denied when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 411: Length Required).

Remedy1

Set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV.")

Remedy2

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#876

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the size of the data was too large when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 413: Request Entity Too Large).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#877

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the URI (host name + folder path) was too long when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 414: Request-URI Too Long).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#878

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server encountered an unexpected condition that prevented it from executing the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 500: Internal Server Error).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#879

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not support the necessary functions to execute the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 501: Not Implemented).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

If you are sending via a proxy server without using SSL communication, set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV.")

#880

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the proxy server failed to communicate with the server above it when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 502: Bad Gateway).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the proxy server.

#881

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server could not handle the current request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 503: Service Unavailable).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#882

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the proxy server failed to communicate with the server above it when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 504: Gateway Timeout).

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the proxy server.

#883

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not support the necessary functions to execute the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 505: HTTP Version Not Supported).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#884

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the server does not have sufficient free disk space to execute the request when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 507: Insufficient Storage).

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

#885

Cause 1

An unexpected error occurred when sending with WebDAV.

Remedy1

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Remedy2

Check the settings of the proxy server.

#886

Cause 1

Received a response from the destination stating that the request was invalid when sending with WebDAV (received HTTP Error 400: Bad Request).

Remedy

If you are sending via a proxy server without using SSL communication, set Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Dividing Data Into Chunks When Sending With WebDAV.")

#899

Cause 1

The e-mail message or I-fax has been successfully sent, but reception may be incomplete because the transmission was relayed via multiple servers.

Remedy1

Confirm whether reception was completed.

Remedy2

Check if you received an error notification.

#995

Cause 1

Reserved communication jobs were cleared.

Remedy

Reserve the jobs again, if necessary.



Questions & Answers

Can the machine automatically resend documents when there are errors in transmission?

If you are sending the document by any other sending method besides fax, specify Retry Times in TX Settings under <Common Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Number of Retry Attempts.")

If you are sending the document by fax, set Auto Redial in TX Settings under <Fax Settings> in Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). You can also make detailed settings, such as the redialing frequency and interval. (See "Auto Redial.")

What happens to documents that are sent to my machine while the power switch on the control panel is turned OFF?

These documents are automatically stored and printed when all documents have been received.

What happens if fax/I-fax documents arrive when the machine is being used for copying?

While you are making copies, the documents are automatically received and stored in the machine's memory, and will be printed automatically when you finish copying.

You can change the order in which these documents print. (See "Additional Functions.")

I frequently send documents using the same settings. Can the machine be set to automatically restore those settings when the power is turned ON or after an operation completes?

You can store the desired settings in a favorites button and recall them as needed. Alternatively, you can set the desired settings as the Standard Send Settings so that they are always specified when the machine is turned ON or after an operation completes.

What happens to received documents if a paper jam occurs while they are printing?

If documents are not printed correctly, they are held in memory. When the paper jam is cleared, printing resumes from the page at which the paper jam occurred.

What happens to a document that has not been completely received when a blackout occurs?

The document, up to the last page that was successfully received, is printed.

What happens to documents in memory and the memory settings if power is interrupted?

Documents that are stored in the system's memory remain in memory even when power to the machine is interrupted. Similarly, the contents of the Address Book are also stored permanently in memory. However, if power is interrupted while a document is being received, it is not stored in memory. After the power is restored, the sender or mail server may resend the interrupted job. If the interrupted job was sent from a POP server as I-fax, since the job is stored in the POP server, the machine can receive it again.

How can I save paper?

You can set for received documents to be printed on both sides of the paper. (See "2-Sided Printing.")

You can set for received documents to be forwarded to e-mail destinations, or receive documents in memory, and then send them to the desired destinations. (See "Forwarding Settings" and "Mail Box."

You can set the machine to not print reports. Two kinds of reports are printed when an error occurs while sending a fax, the Send TX Report and Fax TX Report. You can save paper by setting the machine to not print either one of these reports. (See "Specifying Report Settings.")

Can I turn the machine's power OFF if a document is set with the Delayed Send setting?

When you are not using the machine, you may turn OFF the control panel power switch on the control panel, but leave the main power switch turned ON. Documents that are set with the Delayed Send setting are automatically sent from memory when the specified time arrives.

Can I change the data size of an e-mail message or I-fax before sending it?

You can specify the Maximum Data Size for Sending setting according to your needs. To access this setting, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings]. For e-mail, the send job is split up into several e-mail messages before being sent, so that the data size of each e-mail message does not exceed the set limit. For I-fax, the send job cannot be sent if the data size exceeds the set limit when Send Via Server setting is set to 'On'. However, when Send Via Server setting is set to 'Off', even if you enter the maximum data size for sending, there is no size limit on the data that is sent.

The result in the Activity Report shows "--." How can I tell if the document was successfully sent?

"--" is displayed when sending is successful, but it is not confirmed whether the e-mail message or I-fax you sent, or the file that you sent to an iW folder, was actually delivered. Contact the recipient to check whether your document was received.



Sending a Fax from a Computer (Windows)

This category describes how to send faxes from computers.



Faxing Fundamentals

This section explains the fundamental operations of the fax driver, such as how to display the fax driver, and how to send a fax from a computer.



Faxing a Document

The procedure for faxing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Faxing methods may differ depending on the application you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • If an error occurs in the printer while sending a fax, send the document once more from the fax driver. The fax job sent from the fax driver for which an error occurred will be erased regardless of whether [Erase Failed TX] is turned on or off at the printer.
  • Up to 512 fax transmission recipients can be stored in the device. If the number of recipients exceeds 512 after a fax job has been sent to the device, the last job to be input will be erased. Be careful when registering more than 512 recipients in groups or when sending a fax continuously to multiple groups.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Open the document you want to fax from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  • The procedure for displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the application you are using.
  1. Select your fax from [Name], then click [Properties].

The fax driver screen is displayed.

  • The fax name displayed in the fax driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
    See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  • The procedure for displaying the fax driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Configure the required settings in the fax driver screen, then click [OK].

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Specify recipient name and fax number in the [Sending Settings] sheet → click [Add to Recipient List].

  • The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on the conditions of cover sheet attachment. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • You can select a recipient from the address book by clicking [Address Book]. See "Using the Address Book" about the address book.
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination" for changing where you save the address book.
  1. If you want to attach a cover sheet, select [Cover Sheet] sheet → specify a format for the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

Faxing begins.



Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand

To fax a document, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When faxing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The fax driver screen is displayed.

The fax driver screen includes the following sheets.

  • [Edit Address Book] sheet
  • [Register Cover Sheet] sheet
  • [Special] sheet

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be assigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed fax driver screen.

For details about the fax driver settings, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.

  1. Click [OK].


Setting Up the Fax Configuration

To configure the fax conditions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, full control access is required to configure the fax settings. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • If you use this procedure in a shared printer environment, Canon Driver Information Assist Service must be installed on the print server. For details about installing Canon Driver Information Assist Service, refer to the "Fax Driver Installation Guide."
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [] (Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the fax whose settings you want to configure → click [Properties] from the displayed menu.

The printer properties dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the [Device Settings] sheet → click [Get Device Status].

  • If the information request returns an error message, you need to select and configure such settings as optional fax board, memory, etc. installed in the fax you are using manually.
  • If the printer and computer are connected via USB, the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
  1. Confirm the settings → click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the fax driver screen.

See "Faxing a Document" or "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Useful Fax Functions

This section explains useful functions for sending faxes, such as scheduling the fax send time, attaching a cover sheet, etc.



Using Subaddresses

You can send faxes using the subaddress function.
If you send a fax that includes a password together with a subaddress, the document data is faxed to and stored in a memory box at the other end. This function is convenient when sending confidential documents as faxes.


Remark
  • Faxes can be sent using the subaddress function only when using a device that is provided with a fax board as standard.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Sending Settings] sheet.

See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Specify the recipient name and fax number.

If the recipient is already registered in the address book, you can select the destination from the address book.

  1. Click [Settings].

The [Advanced Function Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Use Subaddress], → specify [Subaddress] and [Password].

  1. Click [OK].

  1. Confirm the settings in [Advanced Function].

  1. Click [Add to Recipient List].

If you are sending to multiple destinations, repeat steps 2 to 7.

  1. Click [OK].

If you are using the subaddress function, the data is sent to and stored in a memory box in the destination device. The data can only be output if the correct password is entered.



Setting the Fax Send Time

You can store the data temporarily in the printer, and send the fax at the specified time.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Sending Settings] sheet.

See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Specify the recipient name and fax number → click [Add to Recipient List].

  1. Select [Set the Time to Send] → specify the time to send the fax.

Specify a time from 0:00 to 23:59.

  1. Click [OK].

The data is stored temporarily in the printer, and the fax is sent at the specified time.



Attaching a Cover Sheet

To attach a cover sheet to the fax, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The number of recipients to which you can send simultaneously depends on how a cover sheet is attached. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Cover Sheet] sheet.

See "Faxing a Document" on how to display the fax driver screen.

  1. Select an option for attaching the cover sheet to the fax from [Cover Sheet Attachment].

Select one of the following options:

  • [None]
  • [Different Sheet to Each Recipient]
  • [Same Sheet to All Recipient]

  1. Select a cover sheet template from [Style].

  1. Click [Settings] to specify the items to include on the cover sheet.

If you do not specify the items to include on the cover sheet, proceed to step 12.

The [Item Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Sender] sheet → enter the information in the text boxes for the selected items.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Sender Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept./Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • You can save the information entered in the [Sender] sheet in a file by clicking [Save Sender]. Then, when you send a fax, you can import the information by using [Import Sender], instead of entering the sender information each time you send a fax.
  1. Select check boxes according to the information you want to print on the cover sheet in the [Recipient] sheet.

You can specify the following items:

  • [Include Sender Name]
  • [Include Company]
  • [Include Dept./Div.]
  • [Include Fax Number]

  • The information of the recipients specified in the [Sending Settings] sheet prints on the cover sheet.
  1. Display the [Logo] or [Signature] sheet.

  1. Select [Print with Logo] or [Print with Signature] to include a logo or signature on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [Browse] to select a bitmap logo or signature file name for [File Name] → specify the magnification and position of the selected logo or signature.
  1. Select [Include Number of Sheets to Send] in the [Sheets to Send] sheet → enter the number of sheets you are going to send as a fax.

  • The number of sheets is not counted automatically. The number which you entered manually is shown on the cover sheet.
  1. Click [OK].

The [Fax Sending Settings] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Insert Attention Note] to insert an attention note → select a note from [Attention Note].

  • You can also enter the characters you want to insert. You can enter up to 30 characters.
  1. Enter any other information you want to include on the cover sheet in [Comment to include].

  1. Click [Preview] if you want to check the preview image on the cover sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The specified cover sheet is attached to the fax when the fax is sent.



Using the Address Book

This section explains how to use the address book, and includes the procedures for registering individual and group addresses, editing the address book, etc. You can also specify destinations from address books created in applications other than the fax driver.


Remark
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to the folder). If you are not permitted access to the folder, log on as a user who has access to the folder, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission. See "Changing the Address Book Export Destination" for changing where you save the address book.


Single Person Entry

You can register addresses for individual people in the address book.


Remark
  • You can register up to 3000 address entries for individual people.
  • If you are using Windows Vista, or if you do not have access privileges to the destination folder for the address book in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 (default is Power User privileges or higher), you cannot browse or edit the address book. If this is the case, log on again as a user with access privileges, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and change the address book destination folder to a folder such as [My Documents] for which you have read/write privileges.
  • You can also edit previously registered single person addresses. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Person].

The [Add Person] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter information about the new person such as their name and company name.

  1. Enter the fax number.
    You can also enter information concerning the fax number in [Description].

  • You can register two fax numbers: a primary number and a secondary number
  • You can also use the subaddress function (a function that enables you to send documents with a password attached to a memory box at the other end) in some devices. If you want to use this function, click [Settings].
  1. Enter any additional information about the person in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.

  • If you specify two fax numbers for a single individual destination, two fax numbers with the same name will be displayed in the address book.


Group Entry

You can register groups in the address book. As well as the addresses of individual people in a group, you can also register other registered groups as sub-groups.


Remark
  • You can register the group address up to 3000 entries.
  • If you are using Windows Vista, or if you do not have access privileges to the destination folder for the address book in Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003 (default is Power User privileges or higher), you cannot browse or edit the address book. If this is the case, log on again as a user with access privileges, or click [Specify a Folder] in the [Edit Address Book] sheet, and change the address book destination folder to a folder such as [My Documents] for which you have read/write privileges.
  • You can also edit previously registered group destination information. For more information, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the fax driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Add Group].

The [Add Group] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the new group name → select what to register from [Show].

Select what to register from among the following:

  • [Person]
  • [Group]
  • [All]

  1. Select person or group entries as members of the new group from the [Available Recipients] list → click [Add].

To remove a member of the selected group, select the person or group entry you want to remove from the [Current Group Members] list → click [Delete].

  • You can select multiple entries by holding down [SHIFT] or [CTRL] on the keyboard and clicking each entry that you want to select.
  1. Enter the keyword of the new group in [Notes].

  1. Click [OK].

The settings are registered.



Importing Address Book Entries

You can load data from CSV (*.csv) files or Canon Address Book files (*.abk) into the address book. If you load CSV format data, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Import].

The [Open] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the file to import → click [Open].

Select the type of the file to import from [Files of type]: CSV Files (*.csv), Canon Address Book (*.abk), All Files (*.*)

The address book is imported, and added to the list.



Exporting Address Book Entries

You can save data registered in the address book as a CSV (*.csv) file or a Canon Address Book file (*.abk). If you save it in CSV format, specify the character to be used as a separator.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Export].

The [Save As] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the file name → click [Save].

Select the type of the file to export from [Save as type]: CSV Files (*.csv) or Canon Address Book (*.abk)

The specified address book is saved as a file.



Changing the Address Book Export Destination

You can change the save destination of the address book of the fax driver (the Canon Fax Driver Address Book), or create a new address book.


Remark
  • For Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, you can use or edit the address book only if you are permitted access to the folder where the address book file is saved (by default, Power Users and higher have access to this folder).
    If you are not permitted access to the folder, save the address book file in another folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system and system environment.

  1. Display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

See "Specifying the Fax Settings Beforehand" on how to display the [Edit Address Book] sheet.

  1. Click [Specify a Folder].

The [Browse for Folder] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the folder to save the address book → click [OK].

  • Save the address book file in a folder, such as the [My Documents] folder, where you have write permission.
  1. If you want to create an address book, click [New], or if you want to copy the existing address book to the specified folder, click [Copy].

If an address book already exists in the folder selected in step 3, the following message box will be displayed. If you want to use the existing address book, click [Use as-is], and if you want to use the address book of the fax driver, click [Overwrite].

The address book is created or copied.



Mail Box

This category describes how to use the Mail Box function.



Various Mail Box Functions

If you press [Mail Box], the Inbox Selection screen appears. The Mail Box function enables you to store the image data which is scanned by this machine, and the data sent from a personal computer, as if storing documents in binders. The documents (data) stored in an inbox can be kept confidential by setting a password, and printed at any time with your desired print setting. Also, if you select the Merge Documents mode, you can print multiple documents as one document.


Remark
  • You can use the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inboxes for storing I-fax or fax documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • No more documents can be stored in inboxes if any of the following is true: (The numbers below may vary depending on the remaining capacity of the hard disk.)
  • When 2,000 documents have been stored in the selected inbox.
  • When a total of 2,000 documents have been stored in all of the inboxes.
  • When a total of about 8,000 pages of documents have been stored in all of the inboxes.
  • It is recommended that you delete unwanted documents or image data from your inbox to make space for storing new documents.
  • You can use memory media to save and print files. For information on memory media, see "Using Memory Media."

  • Inbox Selection Screen

The screen below, which appears when you select [Mail Box], is called the Inbox Selection screen.
There are three types of inboxes: User Inboxes, the Memory RX Inbox, and Confidential Fax Inboxes. An Inbox Selection screen is available for each type of inbox.
Inbox numbers, names, and available memory are displayed for each inbox. In addition, an icon appears on the key of each inbox to indicate its status.

is the icon for an empty inbox.
is the icon for an inbox with documents.
is the icon for an inbox that is set with a password.


1 User Inbox
Scanned documents and documents sent from computers are stored in User Inbox.
The stored documents (data) can be printed at anytime with your desired settings.
For example, you can merge the scanned documents and the documents sent from computer, then print and staple them together.
They can also be sent at anytime using the desired settings.
2 Memory Media
Scanned documents and documents stored in User Inboxes can be saved to memory media. Documents (data) on memory media can be printed with the required settings, as necessary.
3 Memory RX Inbox
Received Fax/I-Fax documents in the memory of the machine are stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Divided Data RX Inbox.
The stored documents can be printed or sent to computers at anytime using the desired settings.
4 Confidential Fax Inbox
If a document received through Fax/I-Fax matches the specified forwarding conditions, it is stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox.
The stored documents can be printed at anytime using the desired settings.
5 Memory RX Inbox
Received Fax/I-Fax documents in the memory of the machine are stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
The stored documents can be printed or sent to computers at anytime using the desired settings.
6 Divided Data RX Inbox
I-fax documents received as divided data are saved in the Divided Data RX Inbox, and combined together as one document.

  • Document Selection Screen

The screen below, which appears after you select the desired inbox, is called the Document Selection screen.
If a password is set, the Document Selection screen appears after you enter the password.
The screen that appears varies, depending on the type of inbox selected.
An icon indicating the conditions with which each document was scanned or saved is displayed.

Following icons are displayed in the User Inboxes:
: Document scanned and saved from the Scan screen.
Document saved from the Send screen when the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
: Document sent from a computer.
Document with the print settings stored from the Change Print Settings screen. Document stored using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy Function.

Following icons are displayed in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inbox:
: Forwarded fax document or fax document saved in memory.
: Forwarded I-fax document or I-fax document saved in memory.


1 Select All
Press to select all of the documents in an inbox. If a document is selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].
2 Print
Press to print the selected document.
3 Move/Duplicate
Press to move or duplicate documents to another User Inbox.
4 Scan
Press to scan an original and store it in the selected inbox.
5 [Document Name][Date/Time]
Press to sort the displayed documents when there are two or more documents stored in a user inbox.
6 Details
Press to check the details of a document stored in an inbox.
7 Erase
Press to erase a document stored in an inbox.
8 Print List
Press to print a list of documents stored in a User Inbox.
9 Edit Menu
Press to edit or check a document in a User Inbox.
10 Send
Press to send a document stored in the User Inbox or the Memory RX Inbox.
11 I-Fax Memory Lock
Press to turn the I-Fax Memory Lock mode 'On' or 'Off' for the Memory RX Inbox in order to receive I-faxes in memory.
12 Fax Memory Lock
Press to turn the Fax Memory Lock mode 'On' or 'Off' for the Memory RX Inbox in order to receive faxes in memory.

  • Document Editing Screen

When you press [Edit Menu] on the Document Selection screen, the screen below appears, which is called the Document Editing screen.
Use this screen to edit a document in a User Inbox.


1 View Page
Press to view the contents of the selected document.
2 Page Erase
Press to erase certain pages from a document.
3 Merge and Save
Press to combine multiple documents to create a new document.
4 Document Insertion
Press to insert a document before a certain page in another document, to create a new document.

  • Print Screen

The screen below, which appears when you select a document and press [Print] on a Document Selection screen, is called the Print screen.
Display this screen when you want to print documents that are stored in an inbox.
The screen that appears varies, depending on the type of inbox selected.


1 Change Pr. Settings
Press to change the print settings.
2 Erase Doc. After Print.
Press to have a document automatically deleted after it is printed.
3 Change The Copies
Press to set the number of prints when multiple documents are selected. This key is displayed only when multiple documents are selected.
4 Start Print
Press to start printing.

  • Change Print Settings Screen

The screen below, which appears when you press [Change Pr. Settings] on the Print screen of a User Inbox, is called the Change Print Settings screen.
Display this screen when you want to change the print settings for a document.


1 Sample Print
Press to print a sample of the document to check the print result or the contents of the document.
2 Paper Select
Press to select the paper size/type and the paper source.
3 Finishing
Press to select or cancel the Collate, Group, or Staple mode.
4 2-Sided Printing
Press to make two-sided prints.
5 Original Settings
Press to cancel the settings that you have changed, and restore the original settings of the document.
6 Erase Doc. After Print.
Press to have a document automatically deleted after it is printed.
7 Merge Documents
Press to merge and print multiple documents as one document. This key is displayed only when multiple documents are selected.
8 Special Features
Press to select and use the Special Features modes available for printing.
9 Initial Settings
Press to cancel all settings and restore the machine to Standard Local Print Settings.
10 Store Pr. Settings
Press to store the print settings for documents.

  • Scan Screen

The screen below, which appears when you press [Scan] on the Document Selection screen of a User Inbox, is called the Scan screen.
Display this screen when you want to scan an original and store it as a document in the selected User Inbox.


Remark
  • To scan in color, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.

1 Color Selection Drop-Down List
Press to select the color mode for scanning. This key is displayed only when the optional System Upgrade RAM is installed to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
2 1:1
Press to scan your document in the same size as your original.
3 Copy Ratio
Press to reduce or enlarge the scanning size of the original.
4 2-Sided Original
Press if you are scanning a two-sided original.
5 Document Name
Press to assign the document a name.
6 Document Size Select
Press to set the size of the original that you are going to scan.
7 Scan Exposure
Press [] or [] to manually control the scan exposure. Press [A] to select or cancel the automatic exposure control.
8 Original Type Drop-Down List
Press to select the type of original ([Text/Photo], [Printed Image], [Photo], or [Text]) you are going to scan.
9 Special Features
Press to select and use the Special Features modes available for scanning.
10 Initial Settings
Press to cancel all settings and restore the machine to the Standard Scan settings.

  • Send Screen

The screen below, which appears when you select a document and press [Send] on the Document Selection screen of a User Inbox or the Memory RX Inbox, is called the Send screen.
Display this screen when you want to send a document that you have stored in a User Inbox using the Send function or a document received and stored in the Memory RX Inbox


1 Address Book
Press to select a destination from the Address Book.
2 Network Add.Book
Press to select a destination from an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server.
3 Details
Press to check or change the destination selected in the destination list.
4 Erase
Press to delete the destination selected in the destination list.
5 Cc Bcc
Press to specify addresses destinations for the Cc and Bcc addresses when sending an e-mail.
6 Delete After Sending
Press to have the document automatically deleted after sending is complete.
7 File Format
Press to select the file format (TIFF/PDF Auto Select, TIFF/XPS Auto Select, TIFF/JPEG Auto Select, PDF, XPS) of the document you are sending.
8 Send Settings
Press to specify the send settings, such as delayed sending, which enables you to send documents at a specified time.
9 One-touch Buttons
Press to select the destinations stored in one-touch buttons.
10 New Address
Press to specify a destination not stored in the Address Book.
11 Reg.
Press to register new destinations in the Address Book or one-touch buttons from the Send screen.
12 Start Send
Press to start sending.

  • Memory Media Document Selection Screen

The screen below, which appears when you press [Memory Media] on the inbox selection screen and then select a memory media connected to the machine and press [Open]. is called the memory media document selection screen.
Icons indicated the types of folders are files are displayed.
The icons displayed are as follows:
: folder
: PDF file
: TIFF file
: JPEG file


1 [Document Name]/[Date & Time]
Press to sort the displayed files when there are two or more files saved on the memory media.
2 Up
Press to go up one level from the currently displayed folder.
3 Open
Press to open a folder.
4 Print
Press to print a file.
5 Scan
Press to save a file to the memory media.
6 Remove USB
Press to remove the memory media.
7 Status/Log
Press to display the job status/log for memory media.
8 Detail
Press to check the details of folders/files saved on memory media.
9 Erase
Press to erase a file saved on memory media.
10 Do Not Display Folder/Display Folder
Press to display or hide a folder.
11 New Creation
Press to create a new folder.
12 Duplicate from Box
Press to copy a document from a User Inbox.

  • Memory Media Print Screen

The screen below, which appears when you select a file on the memory media document selection screen and press [Print]. is called the memory media document selection screen.
Display this screen when you want to print a document on memory media.


1 Paper Select
Press to select the paper size and type, and paper source.
2 Finishing
Press to set the Collate, Group, and Staple modes.
3 2-Sided Printing
Press to perform two-sided printing.
4 Print Range
Press to set the range to print.
5 Special Features
Press to select special features.
6 Initial Settings
Press to cancel all settings and return to the Standard Local Print Settings.
7 Start Print
Press to start printing.

  • Memory Media Scan Screen

The screen below, which appears when you press [Scan] on the memory media document selection screen. is called the Scan screen.
Display this screen when you want to scan an original and save it as a file on memory media.


1 Color Mode drop-down list
Press to select the color mode for an original to scan.
2 1:1
Press to scan with the same size and the original.
3 Copy Ratio
Press to set the zoom ratio for an original to scan.
4 2-Sided Original
Press to scan a two-sided original.
5 Document Name
Press to add a name to the file.
6 Scanning Mode drop-down list
Press to select the resolution.
7 Document Size Select
Press to select the size of the original to scan.
8 File Format
Press to select the file format.
9 Scan Exposure
Press [] or [] to manually adjust scan exposure. To set or cancel automatic scan exposure, press [A].
10 Original Type drop-down list
Press to select the original type (original with text and photos, photos only, or text only).
11 Special Features
Press to select special features.
12 Initial Settings
Press to cancel all settings and return to the Standard Scan Settings.


Flow of Mail Box Operations

This section describes the flow of two basic Mail Box operations: scanning originals and printing documents.


Remark
  • Before using the Mail Box function, it is useful to read the following topics:
  • If you are using a login service, log in and log out using the procedure for the login service you are using before and after operating the machine.
  • If you are using Department ID Management with the optional Card Reader-C1, see "Optional Equipment."
  • If you are performing user authentication using the SSO-H login service, see "Basic Operations."


Storing Originals into an Inbox

Place the original that you want to scan in the feeder or on the platen glass, the same as when you are using the Copy function.


Remark
  • You cannot store scanned originals in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox. For instructions on storing documents in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inboxes, see "Memory RX Inbox" and "Receiving Confidential Documents."
  • To scan in color, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • If the machine is used as a network printer, you can store data directly into an inbox from a computer.
  • To cancel all settings, press [Initial Settings]. (The machine returns to the Standard Scan mode.) To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].


The Inbox Selection Screen

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [] or [].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) → enter the correct number.

  • If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon ().
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. If the message <Enter the password using the numeric keys.> appears, enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter the password set for the selected User Inbox. (See "Setting/Storing a User Inbox.")

If a password is not set for the selected User Inbox, this step is not necessary.

  1. Place your originals.

  1. Press [Scan].

  1. Specify the desired scan settings.

  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Black and White mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Changing Color Modes.")
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when loading the originals in the feeder
  • If the color sections of the originals are close to black
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • Additional scan settings are available by pressing [Special Features].
  • You can set various modes when scanning originals, similar to the Copy function.

  • Press [Document Name] → enter a name for the document → press [OK].
  • If you scan a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document was scanned. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.

  • Press [Document Size Select].
  • Select the document size → press [Done].

  • The Auto (Automatic Document Size Selection) mode cannot be used with the Booklet Scanning, Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, or Image Combination mode.
  • You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of the document manually.
  • Nonstandard size originals
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • A6R or smaller originals
  • A5 or A5R originals that are placed on the platen glass
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

  1. Press (Start).

If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel display → press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

When scanning is complete, the scanned data is stored in the selected inbox.

  • You cannot change settings, such as the document size or the scanning ratio, while the machine is scanning.
  • The stored data is deleted after three days (default setting). This setting can be changed to any time period between 1 hour and 30 days. Also, data can be stored indefinitely if the time period is set to '0' (Off). (See "Setting/Storing a User Inbox.")
  • If you want to cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).

  1. When scanning is complete, remove your originals.


Printing Documents Stored in an Inbox

This section describes the procedure for printing out documents stored in an inbox on the machine. If the machine is connected to a network, you can also specify printing from your computer. For more information on how to operate the machine from your computer, see "Remote UI."


Remark
  • You can print documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox and Confidential Fax Inboxes only with the settings that were used when the documents were received.
  • A document stored in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically deleted after printing.
  • You can select and print up to 32 documents in one inbox at a time. If you merge documents, you can select and print up to 100 documents. However, if there are reserved jobs in the inbox, the number of documents you can select and print varies, depending on the number of documents reserved.
  • You can only select multiple documents when the documents are stored in the same User Inbox. To print multiple documents stored in different User Inboxes, you need to move the documents to one User Inbox beforehand. (See "Moving/Duplicating a Document.")
  • If you do not change the print settings when printing out documents stored in inboxes from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function, documents sent from computers are printed with the settings set at the computers, and the documents scanned into memory are printed with Standard Local Print Settings. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • If you want to print a document stored in the machine from a computer or using [Store In User Inbox] on the Copy Basic Features screen with the settings that were set when the document was stored, do not print the document from the Change Print Settings screen. If you print the document from the Change Print Settings screen, the document may not be printed with the same settings that were set when the document was stored.
  • If the print settings of a document sent to an inbox from a computer are not supported by this machine, you cannot print out the document. If this is the case, delete the document from the inbox, specify settings that are supported by this machine at the computer, and then send the document to an inbox again.
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard Local Print Settings, press [Initial Settings]. To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).
  • A User Inbox is used as an example in this section.

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press the desired User Inbox number.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [] or [].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) → enter the correct number.

  • If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon ().
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. If the message <Enter the password using the numeric keys.> appears, enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter the password set for the selected User Inbox. (See "Setting/Storing a User Inbox.")

If a password is not set for the selected User Inbox, this step is not necessary.

  1. Select the document that you want to print → press [Print].

If there are seven or more stored documents, press [] or [] to display the other documents.

You can select multiple documents stored in the User Inbox.

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

  • The selected documents are numbered in the order specified, and are printed in that order.
  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
  • To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)
  • When there are two or more documents stored in a user inbox, you can press [Document Name] or [Date/Time] to sort the list of documents.
  • When you close the user inbox after sorting the documents, the documents will be unsorted the next time you open the user inbox.
  • If a document is stored in the user inbox from a computer or if you delete a document from the user inbox after sorting the documents, the updated list will remain sorted.
  • If you press [Document Name] or [Date/Time] with a document selected, that document is unselected, and the top of the document list is displayed.
  1. If you want to change the print settings, press [Change Pr. Settings].

To change the number of prints, enter the desired number using - (numeric keys). If multiple documents are selected, you can change the number of prints by pressing [Change The Copies].

If you do not want to change the print settings, proceed to step 7.

  1. Select the print settings on the Change Print Settings screen.

  • If you press [Original Settings], the settings for documents stored in inboxes from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function are returned to the settings specified at the computer, and the settings for documents scanned and recorded at the machine are returned to Standard Local Print Settings. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • You can set paper selection, 2-Sided printing, finishing, and special features on the Change Print Settings screen.
  1. Press [Start Print].


When one document is selected


When multiple documents are selected

If you want to print a sample of the document, press [Sample Print]. (See "Sample Print.")

If you want to store the print settings for documents, press [Store Pr. Settings]. (See "Storing Print Settings.")

If you want to automatically delete the selected document after it is printed, press [Erase Doc. After Print.].

If there is a current or reserved print job, the machine will start printing your document after that job is complete.

When printing starts, the following screen appears.

When printing is complete, the display returns to the Inbox Selection screen.

  • If you notice a difference between the document size specified when scanning originals and the actual print size, you can try to eliminate this error by making a Zoom Fine Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • You can change the print density or cancel printing while the machine is printing.
  • To cancel printing, press [Cancel]. (You cannot cancel printing by pressing (Stop).)
  • To reserve the next print job, press [Done] → select the inbox containing the document you want to print → select the document → press [Print]. (See "Reserving Jobs.")


Paper Selection

You can specify the paper size when printing out documents stored in User Inboxes.


Remark
  • You cannot change the print settings when printing documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Paper Select].

  • If you press [Original Settings], the settings for documents stored in inboxes from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function are returned to the settings specified at the computer, and the settings for documents scanned and recorded at the machine are returned to the Standard Local Print Settings. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • The paper size/type that can be used may vary depending on the settings for the finisher. (See "Collating Prints.")
  1. Select the desired paper size.
  • If you select [Free Size], [Envelope], [Tracing Paper], [Transparency], or [Labels], you cannot specify any Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
  • If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Press [Auto].


  • Select the desired paper size.
  • The paper sizes/types are indicated by icons on the touch panel display, in the order in which they are loaded in the paper drawers.
  • Icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed on paper selection screens, if you store that information into the machine beforehand. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • indicates that the paper is set vertically, and indicates that the paper is set horizontally. The suffix <R> (such as in A4R) used in paper size designations indicates that the paper is loaded in a paper drawer or the stack bypass horizontally.

  • Press [Stack Bypass].

If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to specify the desired paper size/type.

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].

  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are printing on the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in [Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see "Security."

  • Press [Stack Bypass].

If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already selected for the current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to specify the desired paper size/type.

  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • If you select a nonstandard paper size, the Finishing, 2-Sided Printing, Booklet, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, Form Composition, Pg/Copy Set Numbering, Secure Watermark, or Watermark/Print Date mode cannot be specified.

  • Press [Stack Bypass].

If you want to select the stack bypass when a paper size/type is already selected for current or reserved job, press [Stack Bypass Settings] to specify the desired paper size/type.

  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the desired envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • If you select [Envelope], the Finishing, 2-Sided Printing, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, Booklet, or Form Composition mode cannot be specified.
  • Press [OK].

  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press [Start Print].


Canceling a Job

You can cancel the scanning of a document to be stored in an inbox from the touch panel display or by pressing (Stop) on the control panel.
However, the printing of a document stored in an inbox can only be canceled from the touch panel display and System Monitor screen.



While Scanning


Using the Touch Panel Display

  1. Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is scanning.

The job is canceled.

  1. Remove the original.


Using the Stop Key

  1. Press (Stop).
  1. A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to cancel a job → press [Yes].

The job is canceled.

  1. Remove the original.


While Printing


Using the Touch Panel Display

  1. Press [Cancel] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is printing.

The job is canceled.



Using the System Monitor Screen

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Print].

  1. Press [Status] → select the print job that you want to cancel → press [Cancel].

You cannot select multiple jobs and cancel them all at once. Select and cancel one job at a time.

  1. Press [Yes].

The print job is canceled.

  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.
  1. Press [Done].

The display returns to the Inbox Selection screen.



Reserving Jobs

You can set the machine to scan originals even while it is printing or waiting to process a job.


Remark
  • You can specify up to 32 documents to be reserved, including the current job.
  • You can set different modes and paper sources, including the stack bypass for each reserved job.
  • A User Inbox is used as an example in this section.


Storing Originals While Printing

You can scan and store an original while the machine is printing.


  1. Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is printing → select the desired User Inbox number → press [Scan].

If the screen displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than the Mail Box function, press [Done] → [Mail Box] to display the Inbox Selection screen.

  • In the above example, User Inbox 00 has three documents stored in it already.
  1. Place your originals → specify the desired scan modes → press (Start).


Reserving Print Jobs

Reserved printing can be specified in the following cases:

  • While the Machine Is Waiting

You can specify print settings while the machine is in the waiting state, such as when the power is just turned ON, or after a paper jam is cleared. Printing automatically begins when the machine is ready.


Remark
  • You can specify reserved printing while the machine is in the waiting state in the following cases:
  • Between the time that the machine is turned ON and when it is ready to print
  • After a paper jam is cleared
  • After a cover on the main unit or an optional unit, such as a finisher, is opened and closed

  • While the Machine Is Printing

You can specify print settings for a new job while the machine is printing. Printing of the new job automatically begins when the current job is complete.



Reserving Print Jobs

  1. Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is printing.

If the screen displayed on the touch panel display is from a function other than the Mail Box function, press [Done] → [Mail Box] to display the Inbox Selection screen.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and document to print → press [Print].

  1. Print the selected document.


  • Press [Start Print].

  • Press [Change Pr. Settings] → specify the desired print settings → press [Start Print].

If you select 33 or more documents to print at one time, the screen below is displayed. To print out the first 32 documents that you selected, press [Yes]. Press [No], if you want to cancel printing altogether.

If the machine can no longer accept any more reserved jobs, the screen below is displayed. Press [OK] → try reserving the job again after the current job is complete.

  • You cannot change print settings or make sample prints when printing documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
  • To make a sample print, press [Sample Print]. (See "Sample Print.")
  • If you want to automatically delete a document after it is printed, press [Erase Doc. After Print.].


Using the Stack Bypass

Reserved printing using the stack bypass is possible only if paper is being fed from the stack bypass for the current job.

The following example assumes that A3 plain paper is being fed from the stack bypass for the current job, and that you are selecting A4 plain paper to be fed from the stack bypass for a reserved job.


Remark
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.
  • If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', reserved printing can be performed only for the registered paper size and type. (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Press [Done] on the pop-up screen that appears while the machine is printing.

Normally, when reserved printing is not being set, the Stack Bypass Settings screen is automatically displayed when paper is loaded into the stack bypass.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Paper Select] → [Stack Bypass Settings].

  1. Select the desired paper size.
  • If you select [Free Size], [Envelope], [Tracing Paper], [Transparency], or [Labels], you cannot specify any Finishing modes (Collate, Group, or Staple).
  • If Stack Bypass Standard Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', and the paper size/type have been stored, the selected paper size/type are displayed on the screen. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • You can register paper types that are not displayed on the detailed settings list in [Selecting the Paper Type]. For more information on storing the paper type, see "Security."

  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].
  • Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].


  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the desired envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • Press [OK].

The paper size/type currently loaded and the paper size/type reserved to be loaded are displayed, as shown on the screen below.

  • If there is more than one reserved job waiting to print, only the last paper size/type specified for the reserved print job is shown on the Paper Select screen.

  1. Press [Done].

This completes the settings for reserving a print job using the stack bypass. The subsequent steps show you how to start printing and load paper into the stack bypass.

  1. Press [Start Print].
  1. When it is time for the reserved print job to be printed, load the specified paper into the stack bypass.
  • The specified paper size/type is displayed on the screen when it is time for the reserved print job to be printed.
  • Make sure to load the same paper size and type selected in step 3 into the stack bypass. Printing does not start if paper of a different size or type is loaded.
  1. Select the desired paper size.

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides → specify the paper size → press [OK].

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Set the paper size to the same size as the paper loaded in the stack bypass.

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • Select the paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].


  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].
  • Select the paper type → press [OK].

If the desired paper type is not displayed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type from the list → press [OK].

If you are printing onto the back side of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].


  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the desired envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not set correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Do not use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, as the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.


Sample Print

Before making multiple prints of a document stored in an inbox, you can print a sample of it to check its contents or the print results with the settings that were set when the document was stored.


Remark
  • You cannot make a sample print of documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
  • When you select more than one document, [Sample Print] appears only if you select [Merge Documents] and set the Collate, Offset Collate, Rotate Collate, Staple, Cover/Job Separator, Cover Sheet Insertion, or Booklet mode. [Sample Print] does not appear if the Group or Offset Group mode is set.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Sample Print].

  • [Sample Set] is not displayed if only one copy is set.
  1. Select [All Pages] or [Specified Pages] → press [OK].


  • Press [First Page] and [Last Page] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective page numbers.
  1. Press [Start Print].
  • If you select [Specified Pages], specify the page numbers of the output. Note that the page numbers of the output may be different from those of the stored document.
  • If you select [Specified Pages], the Staple, Hole Punch, or Booklet mode cannot be set.
  • You cannot change [All Pages] to [Specified Pages] or vice versa after the sample print is output.
  • If you select [Specified Pages], you cannot change the specified pages after the sample print is output.
  1. Check the sample print → select [Start Print], [Cancel], or [Change Settings].

  • Press [Start Print].

  • Press [Cancel].

  • Press [Change Settings] → change the necessary settings → press [Done].

To enter the number of prints, use - (numeric keys) and (Clear) to clear your entry.

To change the paper size, press [Paper Select]. (See "Paper Selection.")

To collate the prints, press [Finishing]. (See "Collating Prints.")

To make two-sided prints, press [2-Sided Printing]. (See "Two-Sided Printing.")

To change the Special Features mode settings, press [Special Features].

If you want to check the changes that you have made, press [Sample Print] → repeat step 2.

  • Press [Change Pr. Settings] to change the print settings.


Storing Print Settings

You can store the print settings for documents stored in a user inbox. This is useful to print most frequently printed documents with the same print settings.


Remark
  • You cannot select multiple documents and store the print settings at the same time.
  • The printing settings in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.
  • You can store the following print settings and modes: the number of printouts, paper select, 2-Sided Printing, Finishing, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Booklet, and Margin
  • If Erase Document After Printing is set to 'On' from the Standard Local Print Settings, the selected documents are erased after the documents for which the print settings are stored are printed.
  • You can overwrite the stored print settings.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Setting].
  1. Specify the print settings that you want to store → press [Store Pr. Settings].

  • In the above example, the Booklet mode is selected.
  1. A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings. Press [Yes].
  • The document for which the print settings are stored is overwritten, its name is changed to the current date and time, and the document moves to the end of list.
  1. Press [Done].


Arranging Documents Stored in an Inbox

From the Inbox Selection screen, you can change the document's name, check a document's detailed information, move and duplicate a document, and view the contents of the User Inboxes.



Changing the Name of a Document

Remark
  • You cannot change the name of documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document whose name you want to change → press [Details].

  • If you select multiple documents and press [Details], only the details of the selected (highlighted) document are displayed.
  1. Press [Change Document Name].
  1. Enter a new name for the document → press [OK].
  • You cannot press [OK] without entering a name for the document.
  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Inbox Selection screen appears.


Checking a Document's Detailed Information

  1. Select the desired Inbox → select the document whose detailed information you want to check → press [Details].

To select a document from the Memory RX Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing a Document in the Memory RX inbox."

To select a document from the Confidential Fax Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox."

  • If you select multiple documents and press [Details], only the details of the selected (highlighted) document are displayed.
  1. Check the detailed information → press [Done] repeatedly until the Inbox Selection screen appears.
  • To scan in color, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • The color mode used when the document is scanned is displayed for <Color/Black>.
  • The icons for documents stored from a computer or using the Store In User Inbox mode of the Copy function and documents with print settings are icons with print settings. However, if you perform Merge and Save or Document Insertion with these documents, the icons for the newly created documents are icons without print settings.

    Icon Document Type Color/Black
    Without Print Settings 'Black and White'
    With Print Settings 'Black and White'
    Without Print Settings 'Color' or 'Mixed'
    With Print Settings 'Color' or 'Mixed'


Erasing a Document

  1. Select the desired Inbox → select the document that you want to erase → press [Erase].

To select a document from the Memory RX Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing a Document in the Memory RX inbox."

To select a document from the Confidential Fax Inbox, refer to step 1 of "Printing a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox."

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

To erase multiple documents in the Memory RX Inbox or in a Confidential Fax Inbox, select and erase one document at a time.

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
  • To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Printing Lists

You can print a list of documents stored in a User Inbox.


Remark
  • You cannot print a list of documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
  • The document list can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R paper (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • The following information is printed: The User Inbox number, type of document, document name, paper size, number of pages, user name, and date and time.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → press [Print List].

  • Even if you sort the list of stored documents by pressing [Document Name] or [Date/Time], the list of documents will be printed in the order that the documents were stored in the user inbox.
  1. Press [Yes].


Moving/Duplicating a Document

Remark
  • You cannot move or duplicate a document stored in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox to another inbox. Similarly, you cannot move or duplicate a document stored in a User Inbox to the Memory RX Inbox or any Confidential Fax Inbox.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document that you want to move or duplicate → press [Move/Duplicate].

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
  • To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)
  1. Select the inbox into which you want to move or duplicate the document → press [Start].

If you want to duplicate the selected document, press [Duplicate Document].

You cannot move or duplicate a document to multiple inboxes at once.

If the document cannot be moved or duplicated to the selected inbox, a message appears telling you that the move or duplication cannot be performed.

If the document cannot be moved or duplicated to the selected inbox, it remains in the original User Inbox.

If an error occurs while multiple documents are being moved or duplicated, the number of documents that are moved or duplicated successfully is displayed.

  • The name of the moved or duplicated document is the same as that of the original document.
  • If the control panel power switch is turned OFF while documents are being moved or duplicated, only those documents that have been processed up to the time when the power is turned OFF, are moved or duplicated successfully.
  1. Press [Done].


Editing/Checking the Contents of a Document

You can edit or check documents in User Inboxes.


Remark
  • You cannot edit a document which has been stored in the Memory RX Inbox or a Confidential Fax Inbox.


Checking an Image in a Document

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document whose contents you want to view → press [Edit Menu] → [View Page].

  • If you press [View Page] while multiple documents are selected, only the contents of the selected (highlighted) document are displayed.
  1. Press [] or [] to display the page that you want to check.

  1. Check the contents of the page → press [Done].

Press [] or [] to change the magnification of the displayed image.

Press [], [], [] or [] to move around the magnified image.

The position of the image shown in can be checked.

  1. Press [Done].


Storing Multiple Documents as One Document

This mode enables you to combine multiple documents in the same inbox as one document to create a new document.


Remark
  • You cannot use the Merge and Save mode if the resolutions of the selected documents differ.
  • You can set the Merge and Save mode only for documents in the same inbox.
  • If there are 2,000 documents in all of the User Inboxes, you cannot perform the Merge and Save mode.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the documents to be merged in the order in which you want to merge them → press [Edit Menu] → [Merge and Save].

  1. Press [Doc. Name after Merg.] → enter the document's name → press [OK] → [Start].

If the memory is full while you are merging and saving, a message informing you that you cannot merge is displayed.

  • If you create a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document was created. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.
  • If print settings have been stored for the selected documents, the settings are not carried over to the new document.
  1. Press [Done].


Inserting a Document into Another Document

This mode enables you to insert a document before a specified page of another document in the same User Inbox, to create a new document.


Remark
  • You cannot use the Document Insertion mode if the resolutions of the selected documents differ.
  • You can set the Document Insertion mode only for documents in the same User Inbox.
  • If there are 2,000 documents in all of the User Inboxes, you cannot set the Document Insertion mode.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document into which you want to insert another document → press [Edit Menu] → [Document Insertion].

  • If you select multiple documents and press [Document Insertion], the selected (highlighted) document becomes the document that is inserted.
  1. Select the document you want to insert.

A checkmark is displayed to the left of the selected document.

You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.

  • You cannot select multiple documents.
  1. Enter the number of the page before which you want to insert the selected document using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].

You can check images stored in the document in which you are inserting by pressing [View Page]. (See "Checking an Image in a Document.")

  1. Press [Doc. Name after Insert.] → enter the name of the document → press [OK] → [Start].

If memory is insufficient while you are using the Document Insertion mode, a message appears to inform you that you cannot insert the document.

  • If you create a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document was created. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.
  • If print settings have been stored for the selected documents, the settings are not carried over to the new document.
  1. Press [Done].


Erasing Part of a Document

This mode enables you to erase pages from a document that is stored in a User Inbox.


Remark
  • If you select all the pages of a document, the entire document is erased.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document containing the pages you want to erase → press [Edit Menu] → [Page Erase].

  • If you select multiple documents and press [Page Erase], the selected (highlighted) document becomes the document pages will be erased from.
  1. Press [Erase Single Page] or [Erase Pages Consecutively] → specify the number(s) of the page(s) you want to erase.

  • Select the page to be erased using [-] and [+].

You can check image stored in the document you have selected by pressing [View Page]. (See "Checking an Image in a Document.")


  • Press [First Page] and [Last Page] → select the first and last pages to be erased using [-] or [+].

You can check image stored in the document you have selected by pressing [View Page]. (See "Checking an Image in a Document.")


  1. Press [Start].
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Exposure and Original Type Settings

Remark
  • You can change the exposure while the machine is printing.


Manual Exposure Adjustment

You can manually adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [] or [].

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.

  1. Press (Start).


Original Type Selection

You can manually select the original type according to the type of image. The following three original type modes are available.


Remark
  • If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photo, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. If this happens, you can lessen the moiré effect by using the Sharpness mode. (See "Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness).")
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed to expand the memory capacity of the machine, and if you select the Text, Text/Photo, or Photo mode, the exposure can only be adjusted manually. Automatic exposure adjustment cannot be used.
  • If the original is a transparency, select the original type → adjust the exposure to the most appropriate level for the original.
  • To adjust the text/photo processing priority level, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.

  • Text Mode

This mode is best suited for scanning text originals. Blueprints or pencil drawn originals can also be scanned clearly.

  • Text/Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for originals containing both text and photos.

  • Photo Mode

This mode is best suited for photos printed on photographic paper.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan].
  1. Press the original type drop-down list → select the original type ([Text], [Text/Photo], or [Photo]).


  • Press the original type drop-down list → press [Priority Level].
  • Press [Text Priority] or [Photo Priority] to adjust the degree of priority to text or photo images → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Text Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of text.
[Photo Priority]: Priority is given to the faithful reproduction of photos/images, with as little moiré effect as possible.

  1. Press (Start).


Automatic Exposure Adjustment

This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically adjust the exposure to the level best suited to the quality of the original.


Remark
  • There are two types of automatic scan exposure adjustments; the Remove Background mode which enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original, and the Prevent Bleeding mode which enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the paper. Select the desired exposure adjustment mode depending on the type of original. The Remove Background mode is selected by default. (See "Image Quality Adjustment.")

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [A].

  1. Press (Start).


Exposure Adjustment during Printing

You can change the exposure while the machine is printing.


Remark
  • You cannot change the exposure when printing documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox or Confidential Fax Inboxes.
  • You cannot change the print exposure while printing in the Secure Watermark mode.
  • If you change the exposure when scanning an original into an inbox, the selected exposure may be modified by the machine if you select to merge the document when printing it.

  1. Press [] or [] on the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing.

Press [] to move the indicator to the left to make the exposure lighter, or press [] to move it to the right to make the exposure darker.



Changing the Zoom Ratio

You can set the machine to adjust the zoom ratio automatically, or you can specify the zoom ratio manually.


Remark
  • To set the zoom ratio to 100%, press [1:1].


Preset Zoom

The machine offers you a variety of preset zoom ratios to reduce or enlarge standard size originals to another standard record size.


Remark
  • Place the originals horizontally in the following cases:
  • If you are enlarging A4 originals to A3 or B4
  • If you are enlarging B5 originals to B4
  • If you are enlarging A5 originals to A3
  • If you are reducing A3 or B4 originals to A4 or B5 with Auto Orientation in Copy Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'Off', load A4R or B5R paper in a paper drawer or the stack bypass.
  • Placing an original horizontally means setting the original with the longer side sideways. (See "Basic Operations.")

  • Reduction

The available preset zoom ratios for reducing originals are:

  • A3 → B4, A4/LTR → B5 (86%)
  • B4 → A4/LTR, B5 → A5 (81%)
  • A3 → A4/LTR, B4 → B5 (70%)
  • A3 → B5 (61%)
  • A3 → A5 (50%)
  • Minimum (25%)
  • Enlargement

The available preset zoom ratios for enlarging originals are:

  • Maximum (400%) *1
  • A5 → A3 (200%)
  • A4/LTR → A3, B5 → B4 (141%)
  • A4/LTR → B4, A5 → B5 (122%)
  • B4 → A3, B5 → A4/LTR (115%)

*1 Only when placed on the platen glass


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Select the desired zoom ratio → press [Done].

  1. Press (Start).


Zoom by Percentage

You can reduce or enlarge originals by any zoom ratio in 1% increments. The available zoom ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set a zoom ratio → press [Done].

  1. Press (Start).


Auto Zoom

You can set the machine to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio based on the size of the original and the selected record size. The same zoom ratio is used for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.

The available zoom ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.


Remark
  • You cannot scan highly transparent originals, such as transparencies, using the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen. Use the Preset Zoom or Zoom by Percentage mode instead.
  • To use the Auto setting on the Copy Ratio screen, your originals must conform to one of the standard paper sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, or A6R. (You can place A5R and A6R originals only on the platen glass.)
  • If you notice a difference between the automatic zoom ratio and the actual record size, you can try to eliminate this error by making a Zoom Fine Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When storing a document in an inbox, to cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [Auto] → [Cancel].

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Auto] → [OK].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  1. Press (Start).
  • If the original is placed on the platen glass, the zoom ratio automatically appears when the feeder/platen cover is closed, provided that the original size can be detected.
  • If the original is placed in the feeder, the zoom ratio appears when (Start) is pressed.


Reducing/Enlarging Using the Original and Record Sizes

The Zoom Program mode enables you to reduce or enlarge originals by individually entering the dimensions of the original and record size.

The available zoom ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.

The following two Zoom Program modes are available.


Remark
  • The specified sizes are converted into a zoom ratio (%) by the machine using the formula below.
    The result is rounded to the closest integer.
    Zoom ratio (%) = (record size/original size) × 100
  • To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [Zoom Program] → [Cancel].

  • Scanning with the Same XY Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

You can set the same zoom ratio for both the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.

  • Scanning with Different XY Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)

You can set different zoom ratios for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes.


Scanning with the Same XY Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

Scanning with Different XY Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)


Scanning with the Same XY Zoom Ratio (Zoom)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Zoom Program].

  1. Use the numeric keys on the touch panel display to enter values for the original size and record size.

Press [Original Size] → enter a value.

Press [Rec. Size] → enter a value.

Press [OK].

You can enter either the width or the length of the original size. If you enter the width for the original size, make sure to enter the width for the record size as well, and vice versa.

The machine automatically calculates the correct zoom ratio based on the values you entered; however, the original image may be cut off slightly depending on the record size.

If the computation results in a zoom ratio greater than 200%, place your original on the platen glass.

If the computation results in a zoom ratio less than 25% or greater than 400%, a message appears telling you that values below 25% will be set to 25%, and values above 400% will be set to 400%.

  • To specify the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axis independently, press [XY Zoom].
  1. Press (Start).


Scanning with Different XY Zoom Ratios (XY Zoom)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [Zoom Program].

  1. Press [XY Zoom].
  1. Use the numeric keys on the touch panel display to enter values for the original size and record size.

Press [X] (horizontal axis) for Original Size → enter a value.

Press [Y] (vertical axis) for Original Size → enter a value.

Press [X] (horizontal axis) for Record Size → enter a value.

Press [Y] (vertical axis) for Record Size → enter a value.

Press [OK].

You can enter either the width or the length of the original size. If you enter the width for the original size, make sure to enter the width for the record size as well, and vice versa.

The machine automatically calculates the correct zoom ratio based on the values you entered; however, the original image may be cut off slightly depending on the record size.

If the computation results in a zoom ratio greater than 200%, place your original on the platen glass.

If the computation results in a zoom ratio less than 25% or greater than 400%, a message appears telling you that values below 25% will be set to 25%, and values above 400% will be set to 400%.

  • To specify the same zoom ratio for both the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes, press [Zoom].
  1. Press (Start).


Setting the X and Y Axes Independently

The XY Zoom mode enables you to make reduced or enlarged records with different XY zoom ratios expressed in percentages.

The available zoom ratios are from 25% to 400% when the original is placed on the platen glass, and from 25% to 200% when the original is placed in the feeder.


Remark
  • To cancel this setting, press [Copy Ratio] → [XY Zoom] → [Cancel].

  • Manually Specifying the Zoom Ratio (XY Zoom)

You can manually set different zoom ratios for the horizontal (X) and vertical (Y) axes, expressed in percentages and in 1% increments.


Remark
  • If you set the zoom ratio with the XY Zoom mode, the image of the original may be rotated before being printed on the paper depending on the outcome of the computation executed by the machine using the original size and the specified zoom ratio.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Copy Ratio].

  1. Press [XY Zoom].

  1. Specify the desired zoom ratios.

  • Press [X] (horizontal axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [Y] (vertical axis) → enter a value.
  • Press [OK].


  1. Press (Start).


Collating Prints

The Finishing modes can be selected to collate the outputs in various ways, either by pages or print sets.


Remark
  • The Finishing modes cannot be set if free size, envelopes, transparencies, tracing paper, or labels is selected.
  • To cancel this setting, press [Finishing] → [Cancel].

  • The table below shows all the finishing features that are available with each different optional unit, and the paper sizes that can be used.
: Available
-: Unavailable

Optional Unit Offset Rotate Staple Hole Punch
Corner Double Saddle Stitch
None -
A4, A4R
B5, B5R
- - - -
Copy Tray-J1 -
A4, A4R
B5, B5R
- - - -
Finisher-S1
A3, B4,
A4, A4R,
B5
-
A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets), A4, B5
(50 sheets)
- - -
Finisher-S1
and
Puncher Unit-Q1

A3, B4,
A4, A4R,
B5
-
A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets), A4, B5
(50 sheets)
- -
A3, B4,
A4, A4R
B5, B5R
Inner 2way Tray-D1
or
Inner 2way Tray-D1
and
Copy Tray-J1
-
A4, A4R,
B5, B5R
- - - -
Finisher-AE1
A3, B4,
A4, A4R,
B5
-
A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)
- -
Finisher-AE1
and
Puncher Unit-L1

A3, B4,
A4, A4R,
B5
-
A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)
-
A3, B4,
A4, A4R
B5, B5R
Saddle Finisher-AE2
A3, B4,
A4, A4R,
B5
-
A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4R
(15 sheets)
-
Saddle Finisher-AE2
and
Puncher Unit-L1

A3, B4,
A4, A4R,
B5
-
A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4R
(30 sheets),
A4, B5
(50 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4R
(15 sheets)

A3, B4,
A4, A4R
B5, B5R

  • If the Collate Mode Is Set:

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The output is as follows:

  • If the Group Mode Is Set:

All prints of the same original page are grouped together. The output is as follows:

  • If the Staple Mode Is Set:

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. The output is as
follows:

  • If you select [Corner] (Top Left):

  • If you select [Double] (Left):

  • If you select [Saddle Stitch]:


Remark
  • If the optional Finisher-S1 is attached, you cannot select the stapling position. For more information on stapling positions, see "Optional Equipment."
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the paper type and the number of sheets.
  • To use the Saddle Stitch mode, the original (stored document) must already be in booklet form, as shown in the illustration above. (See "Booklet Mode" or "Booklet Scanning.")

  • If No Finishing Mode Is Set:

If the Collate, Group, and Staple modes are not set, prints are output as follows:

  • If the Hole Punch Mode Is Set:

The machine punches two or three holes in the output.

  • If the Rotate Mode Is Set:

If the prints are of the same size, the sheets are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and are output in alternating directions as follows:

  • If the Offset Mode Is Set:

The print are slightly offset vertically in the output tray as follows: (You can also specify the number of print sets to offset.)


Page Order (Collate)

Same Page (Group)

Page Order (Staple)


Page Order (Collate)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Finishing].

  1. Press [Collate (Page order)].

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].


  • Press [Next] → select [A4], [A4R], [B5], or [B5R].
  • [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
  • If the available paper size is selected manually
  • If the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
  • The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate Mode, make sure to select a paper size which can be rotated. Otherwise, output will not be rotated.
  • If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Start Print].


Same Page (Group)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Finishing].

  1. Press [Group (Same pages)].

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].


  • Press [Next] → select [A4], [A4R], [B5], or [B5R].
  • [Rotate] can be selected only in the following cases:
  • If the available paper size is selected manually
  • If the available paper size is loaded in both the horizontal and vertical directions
  • The selected paper source must have Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • When you have selected Automatic Paper Selection for the Rotate Mode, make sure to select a paper size which can be rotated. Otherwise, output will not be rotated.
  • If there is no paper which can be rotated, the output will be collated.

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press [Start Print].


Page Order (Staple)

Remark
  • The Staple mode can be set only if an optional finisher is attached.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Finishing].

  1. Press [Staple].

If you want to make hole punches, press [Hole Punch].


  • Press [OK].


  • Press [Next].

  • Select the stapling type ([Corner] or [Double]) → select the stapling position → press [OK].


  • Press [Next].
  • Select the stapling type ([Corner], [Double], or [Saddle Stitch]).

If you want to select [Corner] or [Double]:

  • Press [Corner] or [Double] → select the stapling position → press [OK].

If you want to select [Saddle Stitch]:

  • Press [Saddle Stitch] → [Next].
  • Select the paper source to use for the main document → press [OK].

If you selected the paper to use for the main document from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size and press [Next] → select the paper type and press [OK].

If you pressed [Add cover], press [Next] → select whether to print on the cover → select the paper source to use for the cover page.

If you selected the paper to use for the cover from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper type → press [OK].

  • Make sure to use the same paper size for the cover and the main document.
  • If you select [No] for <Select whether to print on covers.>, [Heavy] can be selected.
  • Only 64 to 80 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m2 paper can be used for the cover page.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the paper drawer, you must load the paper face up.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the stack bypass, you must load the paper face down.

  1. Press [Start Print].


Two-Sided Printing

This mode enables you to print two successive pages of a document stored in a User Inbox, on both sides of a sheet of paper.


Remark
  • You may not be able to make two-sided prints on some types of paper, depending on the paper.
  • The 2-Sided mode you have selected is displayed above [2-Sided Printing] on the Change Pr. Settings screen.
  • Paper used to make two-sided prints must conform to the following specifications:
  • Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R (envelopes cannot be used for two-sided printing)
  • Paper weight: 64 to 80 g/m2
  • To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Printing] → [Cancel].


1 to 2-Sided

This feature enables you to print two successive pages of a document stored in a User Inbox onto both sides of a sheet of paper.


Remark
  • If there are an odd number of pages in a document, the back side of the last print is left blank. (The machine's counter does not count the blank page as a print.)
  • If the 2-Sided Printing mode is used together with the Automatic Paper Selection mode, and the pages that you want to print are of different size, the different sized documents will be printed as one-sided prints on paper of their respective sizes. If you want such pages to be printed as two-sided documents, select the desired paper size beforehand.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [2-Sided Printing].

  1. Select the desired orientation → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the print will have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the print will have opposite top-bottom orientations.

If you want to print the first page of each document on the front when documents are merged and the Finishing mode is selected (except for [Group]), press [Non continuous].

If you want to print continuously without inserting any blank pages between the documents, press [Continuous].

  1. Press [Start Print].


Scanning Two-Sided Originals

You can set the machine to automatically turn over two-sided originals that are placed in the feeder, and scan each side separately.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • When you are scanning originals with a horizontal (landscape) orientation, such as A4R, B5R, and A5R, make sure to place them horizontally in the feeder. If these originals are placed vertically, the back sides of the originals are scanned upside down.
  • If you placed your originals on the platen glass, follow the instructions displayed on the screen to scan each side of the originals.
  • To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals in the feeder → press [Scan] → [2-Sided Original].

  1. Select the type of original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  1. Press (Start).


Changing Color Modes

This machine comes with the Automatic Color Selection mode, which recognizes whether an original is in color or black-and-white, and then automatically switches between the Full Color mode and Black and White mode. You can also manually switch between the Full Color mode and the Black and White mode whenever necessary.


Remark
  • To scan in color, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • The default setting is 'Black and White.'
  • You can store the color mode as Standard Scan Settings in Mail Box Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Standard Scan Settings.")

  • Auto-Color Select

If the Auto-Color Select mode is selected, the machine automatically recognizes whether the original is in color or black-and-white. Color originals are scanned in the Full Color mode, while black-and-white originals are scanned in the Black and White mode.


Remark
  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Black and White mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'.
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when loading the originals in the feeder
  • If the color sections of the originals are close to black
  • If the originals contain light color densities

  • Full Color

The Full Color mode always scans in color regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white.


Remark
  • The Full Color mode is only available for storing documents in an inbox.
  • If a black-and-white original is scanned in the Full Color mode, it is counted as a color scan.

  • Black and White

The Black and White mode always scans in black-and-white regardless of whether the original is in color or black-and-white.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan].
  1. Press the color selection drop-down list → press [Auto-Color Select], [Full Color], or [Black and White].

  1. Press (Start).


Merging Documents

The Merge Documents mode enables you to print multiple documents, such as scanned documents and documents sent from a computer, as one document - if they are stored in the same inbox. You can combine documents with different settings into one document, which is useful when you want to print the following kinds of documents:

  • Documents created with different programs, or documents created by multiple users for printing and stapling as a single document.
  • Documents combining cutout artwork, transparencies, and data sent from one or more computers, using the Two-sided Printing mode.

Remark
  • You can set the Merge Documents mode only if you select multiple documents.
  • If you use the Merge Documents mode to combine and print multiple documents, the documents are printed using Standard Local Print Settings instead of the individual settings of the respective documents. However, the settings of each document are not changed or erased, and remain the same as when the document was created.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the documents to print in the order that you want to print them → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Merge Documents].

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)

[Merge Documents] is displayed only when multiple documents are selected.

  1. Press [Start Print].
  • While the merged documents are being printed, only the name of the first document is displayed on the screen.


What Are Special Features?

Special features, such as the Booklet and Job Build modes, are modes for performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when printing or storing documents in an inbox.


Remark


Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Scanning

  1. Press [Mail Box].


The Inbox Selection Screen

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [] or [].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) → enter the correct number.

  • If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon ().
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. If the message <Enter the password using the numeric keys.> appears, enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter the password set for the selected User Inbox. (See "Setting/Storing a User Inbox.")

If a password is not set for the selected User Inbox, this step is not necessary.

  1. Place your originals.

  1. Press [Scan].

  1. Press [Special Features].

  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  • Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.
  1. Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.

To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 7 and 8.

  1. Press (Start).

If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display → press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Scanning starts.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • For modes which have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Frame Erase
    Press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase] → [Cancel].
  • For modes which do not have a right triangle () on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Job Build
    Press [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard Scan mode, press [Initial Settings]. To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).


Specifying the Special Mail Box Features for Printing

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press the desired User Inbox number.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [] or [].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) → enter the correct number.

  • If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon ().
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. If the message <Enter the password using the numeric keys.> appears, enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter the password set for the selected User Inbox. (See "Setting/Storing a User Inbox.")

If a password is not set for the selected User Inbox, this step is not necessary.

  1. Select the document that you want to print → press [Print].

If there are seven or more stored documents, press [] or [] to display the other documents.

You can select multiple documents stored in the User Inbox.

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

  • The selected documents are numbered in the order specified, and are printed in that order.
  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the document again.
  • To cancel all documents, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All (Max 100 doc.)].)
  1. If you want to change the print settings, press [Change Pr. Settings].

To change the number of prints, enter the desired number using - (numeric keys). If multiple documents are selected, you can change the number of prints by pressing [Change The Copies].

If you do not want to change the print settings, proceed to step 7.

  1. Press [Special Features].

  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  1. Set the desired mode.

For more information on setting each mode, see the corresponding section.

To set other modes at the same time, repeat steps 7 and 8.

  1. Press [Start Print].

If there is a current or reserved print job, the document is placed in the queue and is printed after the current or reserved job is complete.

Printing starts.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • Example:
Booklet
Press [Special Features] → [Booklet] → [Cancel].
  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to Standard Local Print Settings, press [Initial Settings]. To return to the Inbox Selection screen, press (Reset).


2-Page Separation

This mode enables you to scan facing pages of a book or bound original, print them in two separate pages, or store them as two separate pages.


Remark
  • Place your original on the platen glass. The 2-Page Separation mode cannot be used when the original is placed in the feeder.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals on the platen glass → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [2-Page Separation].
  1. Press (Start).

To scan the next two facing pages, turn the page of the original → place your original on the platen glass → press (Start).

  1. When scanning is complete, press [Done].


Cover/Sheet Insertion

This mode enables you to set the machine to automatically add front and back covers, sheet insertions, or chapter pages using a different type of paper from that used for the main document. In addition, you can decide whether the front and back covers, and the sheet insertions are printed on as well. Chapter pages are always printed on.


Remark
  • You cannot set the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode when you select multiple documents. In this case, set the Cover/Job Separator mode.
  • If you select the Staple mode when an optional finisher is attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.
  • If you are printing on the front cover, back cover, or sheet insertions, these sheets are included in the count of the total number of prints made. If these sheets are left blank, however, the machine's counter does not count them as prints.
  • If you are adding chapter pages, these sheets are included in the count of the total number of prints made.

  • Front Cover/Back Cover

This setting adds a front cover and back cover sheet to each set of prints. You may also print on the front/back cover sheet.

  • Sheet Insertion/Chapter Page

This setting inserts a sheet of paper between prints. The Sheet Insertion mode is useful when you want to use a blank sheet to help sort out the prints. You may also print on the sheet insertions. Since the chapter page is always printed on one side, the Chapter Page mode is useful when you want to organize the prints by chapter.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Cover/Sheet Insertion].
  1. Select the desired Cover/Sheet Insertion feature → press [Paper Select] for each selected feature.

You cannot select [Sheet Insertion] and [Chapter Page] at the same time.

  • To cancel a selected feature, press that key again.
  1. Select the paper source → press [Done].
  • Select the same size paper for [Front Cover], [Back Cover], and [Sheet Insertion] (or [Chapter Page]).
  • If you try to set a different paper size for one feature, the paper sizes for the other features are automatically changed to the new paper size. However, if you are only changing the paper source with the same paper size, the settings for the other features will not change.
  1. Press [Next].

If only [Chapter Page] was selected, proceed to step 6.

  1. Select whether to print on the front cover, back cover, or sheet insertion → press [Next].

If [Sheet Insertion] or [Chapter Page] is not selected, press [OK].

  • A chapter page is always printed on one side.
  • If you select [Leave Blank] for the front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3 to be used as the print's front and/or back cover. You can also select the paper source for the sheet insertion in step 7.
  • If you are using paper that already has printing on it (e.g., company logo) as your front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, then you must select [Leave Blank]. Otherwise, the machine will print your original's first or last page on the preprinted paper.
  • If you select [Print on Front Side], [Print on Back Side], or [Print on Both Sides] for the front and/or back cover and/or sheet insertion, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3, and prints your original on its front side, back side, or on both sides. This will then be used as the print's front and/or back cover. You can also select the paper source for the sheet insertion in step 7.
  1. Press [Add].
  1. Specify where the sheet insertions or chapter pages should be added using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

If you are inserting the sheet insertions, you can change the paper source and side(s) to be printed on.

If you are inserting the chapter pages, you can change the paper sources.

Repeat steps 6 and 7, as necessary.

  • You cannot insert a sheet insertion or chapter page on the first page. Set their positions starting from the second page.
  • The settings are displayed in the order of insertion.
  • You can insert up to 100 sheet insertions or chapter pages.
  1. Press [OK].


Cover/Job Separator

If you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode, you can specify the Cover/Job Separator mode. The Cover/Job Separator mode automatically adds front and back covers, or job separator sheets to divide each document, using a different type of paper from that used for the main document.


Remark
  • You can set the Cover/Job Separator mode only if you select multiple documents and set the Merge Documents mode. (See "Merging Documents.")
  • You cannot print on the job separator sheets.
  • If you select the Staple mode when an optional finisher is attached, you cannot staple more than 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, or 50 sheets of A4 or B5 paper, including sheet insertions.
  • Job separator sheets are not counted as prints.

  • Front Cover/Back Cover

This setting adds a front cover or back cover sheet to each set of prints. You may also print on the front cover or back cover sheet.

  • Job Separator

This setting inserts a sheet of paper between documents. You cannot print on the job separator sheets.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and documents to print in the order that you want to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Merge Documents] → [Special Features] → [Cover/Job Separator].

[Merge Documents] is displayed only when the multiple documents are selected.

  1. Select the desired Cover/Job Separator feature(s) → press [Paper Select] for each selected feature.

  • You cannot print on the job separator sheets.
  • To cancel a Cover/Job Separator feature, press the feature key again.
  1. Select the paper source for each selected feature → press [Done] → [Next].

If only [Job Separator] is selected, select the paper source for the job separator sheets → press [Done] → [OK].

  • Select the same paper size for [Front Cover], [Back Cover], and [Job Separator].
  • If you try to set a different paper size for one feature, the paper sizes for the other features are automatically changed to the new paper size. However, if you are switching to another paper source with the same paper size, the settings for the other features will not change.
  1. Select the side(s) to be printed for the front and/or back cover → press [OK].
  • The screens that appear on your machine may differ depending on the setting in step 2.
  • If you select [Leave Blank] for the front and/or back cover, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3 to be used as the print's front and/or back cover.
  • If you are using paper that already has printing on it (e.g., company logo) as your front and/or back cover, you must select [Leave Blank].
  • If you select [Print on Front Side], [Print on Back Side], or [Print on Both Sides] for the front and/or back cover, the machine inserts a sheet of paper from the paper source that you selected in step 3, and prints your original on its front side, back side, or on both sides. This will then be used as the print's front and/or back cover.


Booklet Mode

This mode enables you to print one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the prints are made into a booklet.

For the Booklet Scanning mode of the Mail Box function, see "Booklet Scanning."

  • Booklet

This mode enables you to print one-sided or two-sided originals in such a way that the prints are made into a booklet.

  • Divided Booklet

This mode enables you to make a multiple page document with a large number of pages into a divided booklet.

  • Creep (Displacement) Correction

This mode enables you to adjust the position of the images in a booklet by calculating the width of the displacement between the outermost page and center page of the booklet.


Remark
  • Saddle stitching is not performed if there is only one output sheet.
  • The Saddle Stitch and Divided Booklet modes can be set only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the type and quantity of paper.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.
  • The Booklet mode can only be specified for the following paper sizes: A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, or A5R.
  • The Booklet mode cannot be set if multiple documents are selected, and their record sizes are different.
  • The Booklet mode cannot be used with documents whose resolution is other than 600 × 600 dpi.
  • If you want to print documents for use as a booklet, we recommend that you scan the originals using the Booklet Scanning mode. (See "Booklet Scanning.")

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Booklet].
  1. Select the paper source to use for the main document → press [Next].

If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, press [OK].

Only A3, B4, or A4R paper can be used for the Booklet mode.

If you selected the paper to use for the main document from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size and press [Next] → select the paper type and press [OK].


  • Press [Add Cover] → [Next].
  • Select whether to print on the cover page → press [Next].
  • Select the paper source to use for the cover page → press [Next].

If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, press [OK].

If you selected the paper to use for the cover from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper type → press [OK].

  • You must select the same paper size for the cover page as that used for printing the main document.
  • If you select [Print] for only <Front Inside Cover> and/or <Back Inside Cover>, [Heavy] can be selected.
  • Only 64 to 80 g/m2 paper can be used for the main document, and 64 to 128 g/m2 paper can be used for the cover page.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the paper drawer, you must load the paper face up.
  • If you are setting the paper for the cover page in the stack bypass, you must load the paper face down.

  1. Specify the Booklet settings.
  • If you set the Booklet mode, the Center Shift mode is also automatically set.

  • Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet → press [OK].
  • The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be saddle stitched is:
  • 15 sheets (64 to 80 g/m2)
  • 10 sheets (81 to 105 g/m2)
  • If the number of sheets is 16 or more, the booklet is not saddle stitched.
  • The number of saddle stitched booklets that the booklet tray can hold depends on the number of sheets that each booklet contains.
  • 1 to 5 sheets: 25 sets
  • 6 to 10 sheets: 15 sets
  • 11 to 15 sheets: 10 sets
  • If you selected [Add Cover], the maximum number of sets that the booklet tray can hold is 10.
  • [Stitching Position] is a shortcut key to Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • If you select [Divided Booklet], enter the number of sheets that you want to divide by pressing [-] or [+] → press [OK] → [OK].
  • If the printing position of the image is out of place, and you want to set the creep (displacement) correction, press [Creep Correction] → select [Auto] or [Manual] → press [OK] → [OK].

If you select [Manual], press [] or [] to adjust the correction width.


  • Press [Do not correct] or [Auto] or [Manual] → press [OK].

If you select [Manual], press [] or [] to adjust the correction width.


  1. Set the Booklet Tray guide to match the paper size.

  • Make sure to set the Booklet Tray guide correctly to match the paper size. Setting the Booklet Tray guide incorrectly may result in a paper jam.
  • If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, this step is unnecessary.


Booklet Scanning

This mode enables you to scan originals in such a way that, when printing the scanned data, the output paper can be made into a booklet. Specify the Booklet mode when printing the scanned data. (See "Booklet Mode.")


Remark
  • [2-Sided Original] is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Make sure to place originals with a vertical (portrait) orientation vertically. If these originals are placed horizontally, the even numbered pages will be printed upside down.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Booklet Scanning].
  1. Select the original size → press [Next].

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] → select the type of two-sided original → press [OK] → [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A6R is the selected original size.
  1. Select the booklet layout size → press [OK].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].


Image Combination

This mode enables you to automatically reduce two, four, or eight originals, as well as two-sided originals or the facing pages of a book, to fit onto one side or both sides of a selected record size.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • Originals scanned in the Image Combination mode must all be the same size. You cannot use the Image Combination mode with the Different Size Originals mode.
  • You can change or specify the 2-Sided Original mode before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches).
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set so that the originals fit onto the selected record size.

  • 2 On 1

This setting reduces two 1-sided originals or one 2-sided original to fit onto one side or both sides of one sheet of paper.

  • 4 On 1

This setting reduces four 1-sided or two 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of one sheet of paper.

  • 8 On 1

This setting reduces eight 1-sided or four 2-sided originals to fit onto one side or both sides of one sheet of paper.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Image Combination].
  1. Select the original size → press [Next].

If the original is two-sided, press [2-Sided Original] → select the type of two-sided original → press [OK] → [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  • [2-Sided Original] cannot be selected if A6R is the selected original size.
  1. Select the desired Image Combination feature → press [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

If you want to specify the image order, press [Option] → select the image order → press [Done] → [Next].

If you do not change the image order by pressing [Option], the images are printed as follows:

  • 2 On 1: Left → Right
  • 4 On 1 and 8 On 1: Upper Left → Upper Right → Lower Left → Lower Right
  1. Select the desired paper size → press [OK].
  • The machine automatically selects the scan ratio depending on the selected record size.
  • If you set the Image Combination mode, the Center Shift mode is also automatically set.


Shifting the Original Image

You can make prints with the entire original image shifted to the center or a corner.


Remark
  • If you use the numeric keys to enter the shift position, the original image may be partially cut off on the print, depending on the size of the selected document, the size of the print paper, and the amount of shift specified.


Using the Numeric Keys

The [No. Key Entry] setting enables you to shift the entire image to a position that you specify using - (numeric keys).


Remark

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Shift].
  1. Press [Settings] under <Front Side> or <Back Side>.

  • Back side settings are only valid when making two-sided prints.
  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the shift position.
  • Select the shift direction.
  • Enter the shift value.
  • Press [OK].
  • To change a value you entered, select the shift direction → enter the correct value using - (numeric keys).
  • The values for the back side can also be automatically set by selecting [Same as Front Side] or [Opposite to Front Side].
  • Example:
When the front side is set to 50 mm for the left, and 100 mm for the top.
If you press [Same as Front Side]:
50 mm for the left, and 100 mm for the top
If you press [Opposite to Front Side]:
50 mm for the right, and 100 mm for the top

  • Press the top [].
  • Enter the shift value.
  • Press the right [].
  • Enter the shift value.


  1. Press [OK].


Margin Mode

This mode enables you to make prints with the entire original image shifted by a designated width to the left, right, top, or bottom in order to create a margin on the prints. Use this mode to make prints ready for placement in ring binders.


Remark
  • The Margin mode shifts the entire original image by the designated width. Therefore, an original whose image extends all the way to the edges of the sheet may be partially cut off on the print.
  • You can choose to only create a margin on the back side of a print. Therefore, originals that already have a margin can be printed in the 12-Sided mode or 21-Sided mode.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Margin].
  1. Select the desired margin type.

  1. Select [Front Side] or [Back Side] → press [-] or [+] to set the margin width → press [OK].
  • If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided Printing modes together and printing a document that already has a margin, set the Margin mode for the back only.
  • If you are using the Margin and 2-Sided Printing modes together and printing a document that does not have a margin, set the Margin mode for both the front and back.
  • If you enter a value other than 0, you can switch between positive and negative margin width by pressing [±].
    Example: (+)10 → [±] → -10
    -50 → [±] → (+)50
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].


Frame Erase

This mode enables you to erase shadows and lines that appear when scanning various types of originals. There are three types of the Frame Erase mode: Original Frame Erase, Book Frame Erase, and Binding Erase.


Remark


Original Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark borders and frame lines that appear around the scanned image if the original is smaller than the selected record size. You can also use this mode to create a blank border around the edge of the recorded page.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Original Frame Erase].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width.
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the original size → press [OK].
  • You can set the Original Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].


Book Frame Erase

This mode erases the dark border, as well as center and contour lines that appear if you are scanning facing pages in a book or bound original onto a single sheet of recorded page.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your original on the platen glass → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Book Frame Erase].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase widths.
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  • Press [Center] and [Sides] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

  • Press [Adjust Each Dim.].
  • Select the desired frame erase borders → press [-] or [+] to set their respective frame erase widths → press [Next].

To return to the screen for setting the same width for all four borders, press [Adjust All At Once].


  1. Select the size of the bound original when it is open → press [OK].
  • You can set the Book Frame Erase mode only for the original paper sizes shown on the touch panel display.
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].


Binding Erase

This mode erases the shadows that appear on scanned image from binding holes on originals.


Remark
  • Make sure you place your original on the platen glass. Do not place originals with binding holes in the feeder, as this may damage the originals.
  • When using the Binding Erase mode, the borders you do not select are also erased by 4 mm.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your original on the platen glass → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Frame Erase].
  1. Press [Binding Erase] → select the border where the binding holes are located.

The border is where the binding holes are located on the original, if you visualize the original as being face up.

  1. Press [-] or [+] to set the frame erase width → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].


Different Size Originals

This mode enables you to scan different size originals with the same widths (A3 and A4, or B4 and B5) or different widths (A3 and B4, or A4 and B5), together as one group by setting them in the feeder.


Remark
  • If the originals are placed in the feeder, make sure that the different size originals are of the same weight (paper type).
  • Align the top edge of the originals with the back edge of the feeder if you are placing originals with different widths.
  • Set different size originals with different widths and lengths in the following combinations. Other combinations may damage the originals.
  • A3 and B4, B4 and A4R, A4 and B5, B5 and A5
  • If you place originals with different widths in the feeder, the originals may move slightly when fed to the platen glass. As a result, the images may be scanned and copied as slanted.
  • If the Different Size Originals mode is set, the scanning speed may be slower than normal.
  • Stapling cannot be performed if you place originals with different widths.
  • When storing a document in an inbox, if Document Size Select is set to anything but 'Auto' all of the originals are scanned in the specified size. If you want to scan the originals in their original sizes, make sure to set Document Size Select to 'Auto'.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Different Size Originals].
  1. Select the type of originals → press [OK].

If you are placing originals with the same width, press [Same Width].

If you are placing originals with different widths, press [Different Width].



Job Build

This mode enables you to scan originals that are too many to be placed at once, by dividing them into multiple batches. You can use both the feeder and the platen glass for scanning. The originals are stored as one document after all of the batches have been scanned.


Remark
  • The 2-Sided Original mode is available only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached (standard equipped for the iR3245/iR3235 in some regions).
  • You cannot change the scan settings while the machine is scanning originals in the Job Build mode. You need to set the necessary scan settings beforehand, according to the type of originals or the desired result.
  • If you place your originals in the feeder, remove the originals from the original output area when the scanning of each batch is complete.
  • You can change or specify the following settings before scanning the next batch of originals (i.e., between batches): the 2-sided Original mode, original type, scan exposure, and color mode. However, you cannot change the original type, scan exposure, and color mode, while the machine is scanning originals in the Image Combination mode.
  • If you place different size originals in the feeder, set the Different Size Originals mode. (See "Different Size Originals.")
  • It is useful to store originals in an inbox first, and print them later using the Merge Documents mode if you cannot prepare the originals at one time, or if you want to specify different settings for each original. (See "Merging Documents.")
  • If you want to scan one-sided and two-sided originals and store them as two-sided documents, divide the originals into one-sided and two-sided batches. For example, if the first batch consists of two-sided originals, set the 2-sided Original mode. Thereafter, you have to manually set or cancel the 2-sided Original mode for each batch of originals that you scan.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).
  1. When scanning is complete, place your next batch of originals → press (Start).

If you want to change the scan settings, change them before pressing (Start).


  • Press [2-Sided Original].

  • Select the type of two-sided original → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the original have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the original have opposite top-bottom orientations.

Do not forget to set or cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, according to the type of originals you place next.

To cancel the 2-Sided Original mode, press [2-Sided Original] → [Cancel].

Repeat this step as necessary.


  1. After the last batch of originals is scanned, press [Done].


Inverting Images (Nega/Posi)

This mode enables you to scan and record the original image by inverting the hues and gradations.


Remark

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Nega/Posi].


Image Quality Adjustment

You can scan the original by erasing the background color or prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the recorded pages.


Remark
  • If [A] (Auto) is selected as the scan exposure on the Scan screen, pressing [Image Qual. Adjustment] and making fine adjustments cancels the automatic scan exposure setting. Similarly, if you select [A] (Auto) for the scan exposure setting when image quality adjustments have been made, the Image Quality Adjustment mode is canceled and the automatic exposure is used instead.


Remove Background

This mode enables you to scan by erasing the background color of the original. This feature is especially useful for scanning originals, such as catalogues and paper, that have turned yellow from age.


  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].
  1. Press [Remove Background] → [OK].

If the background color remains, or if you want to make the background color darker when the original is scanned in the Remove Background mode, make fine adjustments to the density of the background color.


  • Press [Fine Adjustment].
  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of each color that you want to remove → press [OK].

For example, if the background color (yellow) of the original remains, press [-] next to <Yellow> to adjust the density.

Adjusting Yellow automatically adjusts the levels of Red and Green to the same level as Yellow. However, Adjusting the levels of Red or Green sets Yellow back to its default level.

  • Pressing [-] or [+] adjusts the density of each color. Press [-] to make the color lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.

  • Press [Fine Adjustment].
  • Press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of color that you want to remove → press [OK].
  • Pressing [-] or [+] adjusts the density of color. Press [-] to make the color lighter, or press [+] to make the color darker.
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


Prevent Bleeding

This mode enables you to prevent the original image on the reverse side of thin originals from appearing on the recorded pages.


Remark
  • [Prevent Bleed-thru] is displayed only if the optional System Upgrade RAM is installed to expand the memory capacity of the machine.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Image Qual. Adjustment].
  1. Press [Prevent Bleed-thru] → [OK].

If you want to make fine adjustments to the density, press [Fine Adjustment] → press [-] or [+] to specify the amount of bleeding that you want to prevent → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[-]: This setting prevents dark areas on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the recorded pages, but light areas on the front side may not be scanned either.
[+]: This setting may not be able to completely prevent dark areas on the reverse side of the original from appearing on the recorded pages, but light areas on the front side of the original are always scanned.
  • If you make fine adjustments to the density, the automatic scan exposure setting is canceled, and the original is scanned according to the Fine Adjustment settings.


Adjusting the Contrast (Sharpness)

This mode enables you to scan and record the originals with a sharper or softer contrast. To reproduce text or lines with a sharper contrast, use [High] as the setting. To scan originals containing printed photographs or other halftones with a softer contrast, use [Low] as the setting.

  • Low

If you scan an original containing halftones, such as a printed photograph, using the Photo mode, the moiré effect (a shimmering, wavy pattern) may occur. However, you can lessen this moiré effect by using [Low] as the setting to produce a clearer image.

  • High

This setting enhances the edges of original images so that faint or fine text is reproduced with a sharper contrast. This setting is particularly suited to scanning blueprints and faint pencil drawn images.


Remark

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Sharpness].
  1. Press [Low] or [High] to adjust the sharpness → press [OK].

To scan text or lines clearly, the setting should be towards [High]. To scan originals containing printed photographs or other halftones, the setting should be towards [Low].



Composing Images

The Form Composition mode enables you to superimpose a previously scanned image which has been stored in the memory of the machine (image form) on the output.


Remark
  • To use the Form Composition mode, the image form must be stored in the machine beforehand. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the free space of the hard disk.
  • The Form Composition mode cannot be used with documents whose resolution is other than 600 × 600 dpi.
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Form Composition mode, depending on the selected document and image form.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Form Composition].
  1. Select the image form to be superimposed over the original → press [OK].

To check images stored as forms, press [Check Print] to print a sample of the image.

Press [Details] to display the detailed information of the image form.


  • Select the paper size → press [Start Print].

Press [Cancel] to cancel the sample print.



Embedding Hidden Text in the Background

The Secure Watermark mode enables you to embed hidden text in the background of prints. You can embed text such as "CONFIDENTIAL," the date and time, or a department name. The embedded text appears when the prints are copied.


Remark
  • You cannot change the print exposure while printing in the Secure Watermark mode.
  • The embedded hidden text may not appear as specified even if the print with the Secure Watermark mode applied is copied, depending on the copy machine. In this case, the relative contrast (brightness) of the hidden text and the background can be adjusted in Character/Background Contrast Adjustment in Adjustment/Cleaning (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Secure Watermark mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
  • The Secure Watermark mode is only available if the optional Secure Watermark is activated.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Secure Watermark].
  1. Select the type of secure watermark (Watermark, Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, ID/User Name).

  • Select a preset watermark → press [Next].


  • Press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK] → [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • If you want to register your newly created secure watermark to be selected whenever necessary, press [Register] → enter the text to be registered.

  • Enter the date using - (numeric keys) → select the date format from the Date Type drop-down list → press [Next].

  • There are six different date formats that you can select in the drop-down list.
  • If you do not specify a date, the date set in Date and Time Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is printed. Confirm that the date and time settings are correct.

  • Enter the starting number using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].


  • Press [Next].

  • The Serial Number is the number which is displayed at the bottom left of the screen when you
    press (Counter Check) on the control panel.

  • Press [Next].

  • The current ID or user name is displayed if you are using a login service.
  • [ID/User Name] is grayed out and cannot be selected if you are not using a login service.

  1. Select a background pattern from the Background Pattern drop-down list → select the size of the text → press [OK].

To embed a pattern in the background of the output, select a background pattern from the Background Pattern drop-down list.

You can select [Small] ('36 pt.'), [Medium] ('54 pt.'), or [Large] ('72 pt.') for the size of the text.

To change the orientation of characters, press [Print Characters Vertically].

To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored Backgnd].

To adjust the contrast of the embedded letters and the background pattern, press [Character/Backgrnd Contrast Adjustment].



Page and Copy Set Numbering

This mode enables you to print page numbers, copy set numbers, and user-defined text onto the output.


Remark
  • The Pg/Copy Set Numbering mode cannot be used with documents whose resolution is other than 600 × 600 dpi.
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Page/Copy Set Numbering mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
  • If you select [Numbered Chapters] in combination with the Cover/Sheet Insertion (Sheet Insertion or Chapter Page) mode or the Cover/Job Separator mode, the chapter numbers are counted as follows:
  • After each chapter page is inserted
  • After each sheet insertion or job separator sheet is inserted
  • If the copy number has fewer than five digits, the machine copies it as follows:
  • Example: If the copy number is 10, "00010" is printed.
  • If the Pg/Copy Set Numbering mode is used with the Cover/Sheet Insertion or Cover/Job Separator mode, page numbers are not printed on the inserted pages.

  • Page Numbering

Documents can be printed with page numbers (numbers only, numbers enclosed with hyphens, with chapter numbers, or with the total page number).

  • Copy Set Numbering

This mode enables you to print a document with a five digit number in the background of each page.


Page Numbering

Copy Set Numbering


Page Numbering

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Pg/Copy Set Numbering].
  1. Press [Page Numbering].
  1. Select the type of numbering ([Numbers Only], [Numbers with Hyphens], [Numbered Chapters], or [Total Page Numbering]).

  1. Select the orientation and the position of the page numbers → press [Next].

Orientation:

[Vertical]: Prints the page number vertically.
[Horizontal]: Prints the page number horizontally.
  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

  • Select the desired position of the page numbers → press [Done].

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  1. Enter the page number to start numbering from using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].

If you want to insert chapter numbers along with page numbers, specify the starting chapter number on the left (1 to 9,999), and the starting page number on the right (1 to 9,999).

If you want to insert the total page number along with page numbers, specify to have the page numbers start on the left side (1 to 9,999), and the total page number starts on the right side (1 to 20,000). To set the total page number automatically, press [Auto].

  • If [Total Page Numbering] is used with the Booklet mode, the total number of pages are printed automatically.

  • Select whether to count the inserted sheets → press [Done].

[Number]: Counts the sheet insertions, chapter pages, job separator, or back cover that you inserted after the first page, but only prints chapter numbers and page numbers onto the main document pages.

[Do not number]: Does not count the sheet insertions, chapter pages, job separator, or back cover that you inserted after the first page, and only prints chapter numbers and page numbers onto the main document pages.


  • Press [Number of Digits to Print] → specify the number of digits by pressing [-] or [+].
  • The number of digits you can specify is '2' to '5'.
    Example: If the page number is 10 and number of digits is 2, "10" is printed.
    If the page number is 10 and number of digits is 5, "00010" is printed.
  • If the specified number of digits is less than the number of digits of the actual page number, the setting is invalid.

  • Press [Add Characters] → [Next].
  • Press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK] → [Next].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.

  • Set the position of the text → press [Next].

  1. Set the size of the page numbers → press [OK].

Select the size of the page numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('10.5 pt.', '12.0 pt.', and '14.0 pt.').

You can select [Black] or [White] for the color of the page numbers.



Copy Set Numbering

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Pg/Copy Set Numbering].
  1. Press [Copy Set Numbering].
  1. Select the orientation and the position of the copy set numbers → press [Next].

Press [Full Surface] to print the copy set number repeatedly over the surface of the output.

Press [Numbers in 5 Locations] to select all five print positions.

  • If Copy Set Numbering Option Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', [Numbers in 5 Locations] is grayed out and cannot be selected. (See "Security.")
  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  1. Enter the number to start numbering from → select the Number size and density → press [OK].

Select the size of the page numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('12.0 pt.', '24.0 pt.', and '36.0 pt.').

Adjust the character density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].

  • If Copy Set Numbering Option Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the size of the page numbers becomes [Small] '10.5 pt.', [Medium] '12.0 pt.', [Large] '14.0 pt.'. (See "Security.")


Printing a Watermark and Date

This mode enables you to print a watermark, date, and user-defined text onto the output.


Remark
  • The Watermark/Print Date mode cannot be used with documents whose resolution is other than 600 × 600 dpi.
  • Printing performance may not be optimal in the Watermark/Print Date mode, depending on the selected document and combination of printing modes.
  • If the Watermark/Print Date mode is used with the Cover/Sheet Insertion mode or the Cover/Job Separator mode, the watermark/date will not be printed on the inserted pages.

  • Watermark

Prints watermark or user-defined text onto the output.

  • Print Date

Prints the date onto the output.


Watermark Printing

Date Printing


Watermark Printing

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Watermark/Print Date].
  1. Press [Watermark].
  1. Set the watermark orientation and position → press [Next].

Orientation:

[Vertical]: Prints the watermark vertically.
[Horizontal]: Prints the watermark horizontally.
  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

  • Select the desired position of the page numbers → press [Done].

  • Select [All Pages] or [Print on Top Page Only] → press [Done].

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  1. Select the desired preset watermark → press [Next].

  • Press [Enter] → enter the text → press [OK].

You can also select the text which has been registered in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


  1. Specify the text size and print type → press [OK].

Select the size of the watermark from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('36.0 pt.', '54.0 pt.', and '72.0 pt.').

You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].



Date Printing

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and the document to print → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Watermark/Print Date].
  1. Press [Print Date].
  1. Set the number orientation and position → press [Next].

  • If you set any two of the Page Numbering, Copy Set Numbering, Watermark, or Print Date modes to print in the same position, a message asking for your confirmation is displayed when you press (Start).

  • Press [X] and [Y] → press [-] or [+] to set their respective position → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].

  1. Select the date type → specify the date using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].
  • There are six types of date format you can select from.
  • If no date is set, the date set in Date and Time Settings in the System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is printed. Confirm that the date and time settings are correct.
  1. Set the number size and print type → press [OK].

Select the size of the numbers from [Small], [Medium], and [Large] ('10.5 pt.', '12.0 pt.', and '14.0 pt.').

You can select [Transparent] or [Overlay] for the print type. If [Transparent] is selected, you can also adjust the halftone density by pressing [Light] or [Dark].



Memory Keys

You can set any possible combination of scan settings, print settings, or copy settings, and then store them in a memory key. There are nine memory keys, and they can be assigned names for increased convenience. This feature is useful for storing frequently used scan, print, and copy settings.


Remark
  • The scan, print, and copy settings stored in memory are not erased, even if the power is turned OFF.


Storing Scan/Print Settings


Mail Box (Scan)

  1. Specify the scan settings on the Scan screen and/or Special Features screen.
  1. Press [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) for storing the settings → press [Register].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings. Press [Yes].

  1. Press [Cancel].
  • You can assign a name to the memory key by pressing [Register Name].


Mail Box (Print)

  1. Specify the print settings on the Change Print Settings screen and/or Special Features screen.
  1. Press [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) for storing the settings → press [Register].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to store the settings. Press [Yes].

  • A screen appears, asking for your confirmation to overwrite the previous settings. Press [Yes].

  1. Press [Cancel].
  • You can assign a name to the memory key by pressing [Register Name].


Naming a Memory Key


Mail Box (Scan)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) to name → press [Register Name].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default M1 to M9).
  1. Press [Cancel].


Mail Box (Print)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and a document → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select a key ([M1] to [M9]) to name → press [Register Name].

  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  • You can also name keys with no settings stored in them.
  1. Enter a name → press [OK].
  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the key name reverts to its current name (default M1 to M9).
  1. Press [Cancel].


Recalling Scan/Print Settings


Mail Box (Scan)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → place your originals → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select the key containing the scan settings that you want to recall.

  1. Verify the settings → press [OK].

If you select a key that does not have settings stored in it, [OK] is grayed out and you cannot press it. You can select another key that has copy/scan/print settings stored in it, or press [Cancel].

  • Recalling settings from memory cancels the current settings.
  • You can make changes to the recalled settings.
  • If you press another key, the settings stored in that key are recalled.


Mail Box (Print)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and a document → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select the key containing the print settings that you want to recall.

  1. Verify the settings → press [OK].

If you select a key that does not have settings stored in it, [OK] is grayed out and you cannot press it. You can select another key that has copy/scan/print settings stored in it, or press [Cancel].

  • Recalling settings from memory cancels the current settings.
  • You can make changes to the recalled settings.
  • If you press another key, the settings stored in that key are recalled.


Erasing Scan/Print Settings


Mail Box (Scan)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → press [Scan] → [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select the key containing the scan settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].
  • Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming a Memory Key."
  1. Press [Cancel].


Mail Box (Print)

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number and a document → press [Print] → [Change Pr. Settings] → [Special Features] → [Mode Memory].
  1. Select the key containing the print settings that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Make sure to check the settings first before erasing them.
  • Keys that already have settings stored in them are displayed with a colored triangle () in the lower right corner of the key.
  • If you select a key that already has settings stored in it, the settings are displayed.
  1. Press [Yes].
  • Key names are not erased. For instructions on changing a key name, see "Naming a Memory Key."
  1. Press [Cancel].


Memory RX Inbox

You can select either the Memory RX Inbox or Divided Data RX Inbox from the Memory RX Inbox screen.



Memory RX Inbox

The Memory RX (Receive) Inbox is an inbox for receiving and storing documents received by Fax and I-Fax. Documents received in the Memory RX Inbox are stored without being printed. You can print or send the stored documents later, or whenever necessary.


Remark
  • You can use the Memory RX Inbox function for receiving and storing I-fax documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • You can use the Memory RX Inbox function for receiving and storing fax documents only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • If you want to use Memory Lock, you must first set Use Fax Memory Lock and Use I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On' in Memory RX Inbox Settings. To access the Memory RX Inbox Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings]. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")


Receiving Documents through Fax or I-Fax

  1. Set Memory Lock to 'On' from the Additional Functions screen.
  • The following messages are displayed while Memory Lock is being set to 'On':
    <I-Fax Memory RX is on.>: I-Fax documents will be received in memory
    <Fax Memory RX is on.>: Fax documents will be received in memory
  1. The machine is now ready to receive documents in memory.
  • The message <Check the Memory RX Inbox.> is displayed when a document is received in the Memory RX Inbox:


Settings for Receiving Documents in Memory

You can use the Memory Lock mode outside of the preset Memory Lock start and end times.


Remark
  • If you want to use Memory Lock, you must first set Use Fax Memory Lock and Use I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On' in Memory RX Inbox Settings. To access the Memory RX Inbox Settings screen, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings]. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")

  1. Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen → press [Memory RX Inbox].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for I-Fax Memory Lock and/or Fax Memory Lock.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Documents are received and stored in the Memory RX Inbox.
[Off]: Documents are received and printed.
  • If Memory Lock start and end times have been set, the time at which Memory Lock will automatically switch 'Off' is displayed when you set Fax/I-Fax Memory Lock to 'On', and the time at which Memory Lock will automatically switch 'On' is displayed when you set Memory Lock to 'Off'.
  • If I-Fax Memory Lock is set to 'Off', documents received through the I-Fax function are printed and erased from the Memory RX Inbox.
  • If Fax Memory Lock is set to 'Off', documents received through the Fax function are printed and erased from the Memory RX Inbox.
  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Inbox Selection screen appears.


Printing a Document in the Memory RX inbox

Remark
  • You can use the Memory RX Inbox for storing I-fax or fax documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • You can print documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox only with the settings that were used when the documents were received.
  • A document stored in the Memory RX Inbox is automatically deleted after it is printed.
  • You can print only one document at a time. You cannot print multiple documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox simultaneously.
  • If Fax Memory Lock and I-Fax Memory Lock are set to 'Off', documents transmitted to the Memory RX Inbox are printed as they are received. (See "Memory RX Inbox.")

  1. Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen → press [Memory RX Inbox].
  1. Select the document that you want to print → press [Print].

  1. Press [Start Print].


Divided Data RX Inbox

When the machine receives a large I-fax document which has been divided into several parts before being sent, the Divided Data RX Inbox stores the divided data, and automatically combines it into a single I-fax document. After the document has been combined, it is printed, forwarded, or stored in memory in the same way as when a regular I-fax document is received.


Remark
  • You can save I-fax documents in divided data form in the Divided Data RX Inbox only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.


Confirming Documents in the Divided Data RX Inbox

You can check the status of divided data, and the remaining capacity of the Divided Data RX Inbox.


  1. Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen → press [Divided Data RX Inbox].
  1. Select the document you want to confirm → press [Divide Data List].

  1. Select the divided data you want to confirm → press [Details].


Erasing Divided Data

You can print and erase the divided data while the machine is receiving the divided data.


  1. Press [Memory RX Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen → press [Divided Data RX Inbox].
  1. Select the data to erase → press [Erase].

To erase the document without printing it, deselect [Print When Erased].

If you force the machine to print the document which is being erased, only the data which has already been received is combined to form the document. Data which can be combined to form complete pages is printed, and any remaining data is erased without being printed.

  • If you delete the divided data, it cannot be combined to form a document even if the remaining divided data is received later.
  • As the divided data is not valid image data, it will not be printed correctly.
  • If the divided data is erased while the forwarding settings or the Memory Lock mode is being set to the divided data, any process for the forced printed image will not be performed.


Confidential Fax Inboxes

If a document received by Fax/I-Fax, matches the specified forwarding conditions, it is stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox without being printed. This feature is useful for receiving confidential documents. You can print the documents stored in Confidential Fax Inboxes whenever necessary.


Remark
  • You can use the Confidential Fax Inbox function for receiving and storing I-fax documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • You can use the Confidential Fax Inbox function for receiving and storing fax documents only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • In order to use a Confidential Fax Inbox, it is necessary to first register the Confidential Fax Inbox as a forwarding destination in Forwarding Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")
  • It is necessary to inform the other party of the forwarding conditions beforehand.


Receiving Confidential Documents

  1. Register a Confidential Fax Inbox as a forwarding destination.
  1. The machine is now ready to receive documents in the specified Confidential Fax Inbox.
  • The message below is displayed when a document is received in a Confidential Fax Inbox:
  • <Check the Confidential Fax Inboxes.>


Printing a Document in the Confidential Fax Inbox

Remark
  • Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • You can print documents stored in Confidential Fax Inboxes only with the settings used when the documents were received.
  • You can print only one document at a time. You cannot print multiple documents stored in Confidential Fax Inboxes simultaneously.

  1. Press [Conf. Fax Inbox] on the Inbox Selection screen → press the desired Confidential Fax Inbox number.
  1. Select the document that you want to print → press [Print].

  1. Press [Start Print].
  • If you want to automatically delete the selected document after it is prints, press [Erase Doc. After Printing].


Sending a Document

You can send documents stored in User Inboxes or the Memory RX (Receive) Inbox to a desired destination.


Remark
  • You can send documents only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • The Fax function is available only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • Documents with a resolution other than 600 × 600 dpi cannot be sent if there is a fax address included in the destination.
  • You cannot send documents stored in a Confidential Fax Inbox.

  1. Select the desired User Inbox number → select the document that you want to send → press [Send].

To select all of the documents (up to 100 documents from the top) in the User Inbox, press [Select All (Max 100 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key appears as [Clear Selection] instead.

To select all of the documents (up to 32 documents from the top) in the selected Memory RX Inbox, press [Select All (Max 32 doc.)]. If a document is already selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

  • A maximum of 32 documents stored in the same inbox can be selected and sent at the same time.
  • A maximum of 999 pages can be sent simultaneously.
  1. Specify the desired send settings → press [Start Send].

See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive" for instructions on the following:

  • Specifying a destination
  • Selecting the file format
  • Specifying the Send settings
  • If Restrict New Address is set to 'On' in the System Manager Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you cannot enter a destination in [New Address]. You have to select a stored destination by pressing [Address Book], [Network Add.Book], or [One-touch Buttons].
  • If you want to automatically delete the selected document after it is sent, press [Delete After Sending].
  • While the document is being sent, you cannot print or store it in another inbox.
  • If the selected destination is a group address that includes an inbox, the document you are sending will not be sent to (and stored in) that inbox.
  1. Press [Done].


What Are Additional Functions?

Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.


Remark
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).

  1. Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.

  1. Select an Additional Functions setting.

  1. Press a mode key to specify its settings.

For an overview of all the settings you can change from the Additional Functions screen, see "Mail Box Settings Table."

  1. Specify the desired mode → press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.


Customizing Mail Box Settings


Mail Box Settings Table

The following items can be stored or set in Mail Box Settings from the Additional Functions screen.


Item Settings Delivered
User Inboxes Settings Inbox No.: 00 to 99
Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum
Password: Seven digit number
Doc. Auto Erase: 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours; 1, 2, 3*1, 7, 30 days; 0 (no limit)
Print upon storing from the printer driver: On, Off*1
URL Send Settings*3
Initialize
Yes*2
Photo Mode On, Off*1 Yes
Standard Scan Settings Store, Initialize No
Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings*3 Inbox No.: 00 to 49
Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum
Password: Seven digit number
URL Send Settings
Initialize
Yes*2

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Information is not delivered if a password is set for the inbox.
*3 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.

Remark
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with a "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For instructions on setting the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."


Setting/Storing a User Inbox

You can set and store a name and password for a User Inbox, as well as specify the time that has to elapse before the documents in that inbox are automatically erased.


Remark
  • You can create up to 100 User Inboxes.
  • The numbers for User Inboxes are 00 to 99.
  • Setting a name for a User Inbox is optional.
  • Setting a password for a User Inbox is optional.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [User Inboxes Settings].
  1. Select the desired User Inbox number.

If you enter User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

[Register Inbox Name]:
Press [Register Inbox Name] → enter the new name → press [OK].

[Password]:
If you want to set a password for this User Inbox, enter the password using - (numeric keys). You can leave the password blank. You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.

<Time until Document Auto Erase>:
Press [] or [] to set the time that has to elapse before documents in the selected User Inbox are automatically erased.

[URL Send Settings]:
If you set the machine to send a link via e-mail to the User Inbox in which the document is stored, you can check or perform operations on the document in the User Inbox, using the Remote UI (User Interface) of the machine. To send a link to a User Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send Settings] → specify the destination → press [OK].

<Print upon storing from the printer driver>
You can select whether to print a document when it is sent from a computer and stored in an inbox. To print the document when it is stored in an inbox, select [On].

  • Since there is no way to check a stored password, make sure that you write down the password that you enter, and keep it in a safe place.
  • If a password is already set for each User Inbox, you can specify [Time until Document Auto Erase] and [Print Upon Storing From the Printer Driver] settings of all the User Inboxes using [Setting for All User Inboxes] in System Manager Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). However, if you update the settings for a User Inbox separately after using [Setting for All User Inboxes], the updated settings take preference over the settings set with [Setting for All User Inboxes].
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Password in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as asterisks (*******). (See "Security.")
  1. Press [Done].


Initializing a User Inbox

You can restore a stored User Inbox name, password, and the document automatic erase time to their default settings.


Remark
  • You cannot initialize a User Inbox if there are documents still remaining in it.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [User Inboxes Settings].
  1. Select the User Inbox that you want to initialize.

If you enter User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

  1. Press [Initialize].
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Setting the Photo Mode for the Mail Box Function

You can select whether or not to use the Photo mode for the Mail Box function. When Photo Mode is set to 'On', you can select [Printed Image] from the Original Type drop-down list on the Scan screen for scanning and storing documents in a user inbox.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [Photo Mode].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Standard Scan Settings

The Standard Scan Settings refer to a combination of scan settings that the machine automatically returns to after the power is turned ON, or when (Reset) is pressed.

The Standard Scan Settings can be changed to suit your needs, or restored to their default settings.


Remark
  • To scan in color, it is necessary to install the optional System Upgrade RAM to expand the memory capacity of the machine.
  • The default settings are:
  • Document Size: Auto
  • Record Size: Auto
  • Original Type: Auto
  • Copy Ratio: 1:1
  • Color Mode: Black and White


Storing the Standard Scan Settings

You can store your own scan settings as the Standard Scan Settings.

To store your own standard scan settings, specify the desired settings on the Scan screen, then follow the procedure below. (See "Storing Originals into an Inbox.")


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [Standard Scan Settings].
  1. Press [Store].
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Initializing the Standard Scan Settings

You can restore the Standard Scan Settings to their default settings.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [Standard Scan Settings].
  1. Press [Initialize].
  1. Verify the settings → press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Setting/Storing a Confidential Fax Inbox

You can set and store a name and password for any Confidential Fax Inbox.


Remark
  • [Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings] appears only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • You can create up to 50 Confidential Fax Inboxes.
  • The numbers for Confidential Fax Inboxes are 00 to 49.
  • Setting a name for a Confidential Fax Inbox is optional.
  • Setting a password for a Confidential Fax Inbox is optional.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings].
  1. Press the desired Confidential Fax Inbox number.

If you enter Confidential Fax Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

[Register Inbox Name]:
Press [Register Inbox Name] → enter a name → press [OK].

<Password>:
If you want to set a password for this Confidential Fax Inbox, enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK]. You can leave the password blank. You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.

[URL Send Settings]:
If you set the machine to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox in which the document is stored, you can check or perform operations on the document in the Confidential Fax Inbox, using the Remote UI (User Interface) of the machine. If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, press [URL Send Settings] → specify the destination → press [OK].

  • Since there is no way to check a stored password, make sure that you write down the password that you enter, and keep it in a safe place.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Password in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password is not displayed as asterisks (*******). (See "Security.")
  1. Press [Done].


Initializing a Confidential Fax Inbox

You can restore a stored Confidential Fax Inbox name and password to their default settings.


Remark
  • [Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings] appears only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or if the optional Super G3 FAX Board is installed.
  • You cannot initialize a Confidential Fax Inbox if there are documents still remaining in it.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Mail Box Settings] → [Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings].
  1. Select the Confidential Fax Inbox that you want to initialize.

If you entering Confidential Fax Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to enter a two digit number → press [OK].

  1. Press [Initialize].
  1. Press [Yes] → [Done].


Using Memory Media

You can use memory media connected to the machine via USB. This enables you to save documents, print documents, check folders/files, and copy documents stored in user inboxes to memory media.


Remark
  • The following type of memory media is supported:
  • USB memory
  • The following memory media file system is supported:
  • FAT32
  • Memory media with security functions and memory card readers connected via USB are not supported.
  • Memory media used with an extension cable is not supported.
  • Memory media used via a USB hub is not supported.
  • Use commercially sold memory media.
  • When using memory media, memory media that does meet the USB specification is not supported.
  • Some memory media cannot be used.
  • When using memory media, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely. Weekly Timer settings are also disabled.
  • Up to 236 characters (including the path) is displayed for folder names/file folder names/files on memory media. Only JPEG, TIFF, and PDF files are displayed.
  • The following requirements must be met to use memory media:
  • The optional USB Memory Connectivity Kit must be enabled
  • [Use USB Host] in [USB Settings] in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) must be set to 'On'
  • [Use MEAP Driver for USB External Disk Device] in [USB Settings] in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) must be set to 'Off'


Flow of Operations for Using Memory Media

The basic flow of operations for organizing folders/files, saving documents, copying documents in user inboxes, printing, checking the job status/job log, and removing memory media is explained in six sections.



Organizing Folders/Files in Memory Media

You can check, delete, and display details for folders/files in memory media, show/hide folders, and create new folders.



Checking Folders/Files

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folders/files you want to check.

  1. Check the folders/files.

If seven or more folders/files are saved, press [] or [] to display them.

  • Press a selected folder/file again to deselect it.
  • If you close the Memory Media screen after sorting the folders/files, the folders and files will be unsorted the next time you open the memory media.
  • If a document is stored from a computer or if you delete a folder/file from the memory media after sorting the folders/files, the updated list will remain sorted.
  • If you press [Document Name] or [Date & Time] with a folder/file selected, that folder/file is unselected, and displayed at the top of the list of folders/files.


Showing/Hiding Folders

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder you want to show.

  1. Press [Do Not Display Folder].

If you want to show a folder, press [Display Folder].



Checking the Details of Folders/Files

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folders/files you want to check the details of.

  1. Select the folder/file you want to check the details of, and press [Details].

  1. Check the details, and press [Done] repeatedly until the inbox selection screen is displayed.



Erasing Folders/Files

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folders/files you want to erase.

  1. Select the folders/files you want to erase, and press [Erase].

  • Press a selected folder/file again to deselect it.
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Creating New Folders

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder you want to create the new folder in.

  1. Press [New Creation].

  1. Enter the folder name, and press [OK].
  • You cannot press [OK] with the folder name blank.


Saving Documents to Memory Media

Perform this operation after placing the originals to scan in the feeder or on the platen glass.

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed, it is necessary to select the Black and White color mode to save documents with a resolution of 200 x 400 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi.
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed, it is necessary to select the Black and White color mode to specify the zoom ratio to save documents.
  • If the memory becomes full while saving a document, the file being saved will not be saved to the memory media.
  • To cancel all of the mode settings, press [Initial Settings]. (The scan settings return to the Standard mode.) To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder you want to save the file to.

  1. Place your originals.

  1. Press [Scan].

  1. Set the scanning mode.

  • When the Auto-Color Select mode is set and your originals contain color sections, the machine scans them in the Full Color mode. However, the machine may scan the color originals in the Grayscale mode under the following conditions. To avoid this, set the color mode to 'Full Color'. (See "Changing Color Modes.")
  • If the originals contain a few color sections
  • If the color sections are located only on the left side (within 10 mm from the left edge) of the originals when placing the originals into the feeder
  • If the color sections of the original are close to black
  • If the originals contain light color densities
  • To change the Special Features settings, press [Special Features].
  • You can set various modes when scanning originals, similar to the Copy function.

  • Press [Document Name], enter a name, and press [OK].
  • If you scan a document without giving it a name, the machine automatically assigns the document a name using the year, month, day, and time the document was scanned. For example, if a document is created at 1:35 PM, 41 seconds, on January 15, 2006, its name will be <20060115133541>.

  • Press [Document Size Select].
  • Select the document size, and press [Done].

  • Document Size Select cannot be used in combination with the Image Combination mode.
  • You cannot select [Auto] when scanning the following types of originals. Specify the size of the document manually.
  • Nonstandard size originals
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • A6R or smaller originals
  • A5 or A5R originals that are placed on the platen glass
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

  1. Press (Start).

If the following screen is displayed, follow the instructions on the touch panel display, and press [Done] once for each original.

When scanning is complete, the document starts to be saved to the memory media.

  • You cannot change modes such as the document size and zoom ratio during scanning.
  • To stop scanning, press [Cancel] or (Stop).

  1. When scanning is complete, remove your originals.


Copying a Document From an Inbox

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • If the memory becomes full while copying a document, the file being copied will not be saved to the memory media.
  • Documents in user inboxes that were merged with the Job Build mode cannot be copied to memory media.
  • To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder that the document you want to print is.

  1. Press [Duplicate from Box].

  1. Specify the desired user inbox.

If the desired User Inbox is not displayed, press [] or [].

If you enter the User Inbox number using - (numeric keys), make sure to
enter a two digit number → press [OK].

If you make a mistake when entering the User Inbox number, press (Clear) → enter the correct number.

  • If a document is stored in an inbox, that inbox is displayed with the documents icon ().
  • If an inbox is set with a password, a locked icon () is displayed next to the icon of that inbox.
  • If you make a mistake when selecting an inbox, press [Done] → select the correct inbox.
  1. Select the document to copy → press [Start].

When copying of the document is complete, the document starts to be saved to the memory media.


  • Press [Details].
  • Check the details → press [Done].

  • Press [View Page].
  • Press [] or [] to select the page to check → press [Done].



Printing Documents in Memory Media

This section describes the procedure for printing documents saved in memory media from the machine.

This section describes the procedure with the memory media already attached to the USB port.


Remark
  • Do not insert the memory media into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert memory media of a shape that does not meet the USB specification, the USB port may be damaged.
  • To print documents in memory media, it is necessary to activate the optional PS Printer Kit.
  • You can print files of a maximum size of 2 GB.
  • When printing documents saved in memory media, you cannot set the Rotate Collate or Rotate Group modes.
  • To cancel all of the mode settings, press [Initial Settings]. (The machine returns to the Standard Local Print Settings.) To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Open].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder that the document you want to print is.

  1. Select the document to print → press [Print].

If seven or more documents are saved, press [] or [] to display them.

  • Press a selected document again to deselect it.
  • If you close the Memory Media screen after sorting the documents, the documents will be unsorted the next time you open the memory media.
  • If a document is stored from a computer or if you delete a document from the memory media after sorting the documents, the updated list will remain sorted.
  • If you press [Document Name] or [Date & Time] with a document selected, that document is unselected, and displayed at the top of the list of documents.
  1. To print a JPEG or TIFF file, select the paper size to print on, and press [Done].

When printing a PDF file, [Auto] is selected. For information on changing the paper size, see "Paper Selection."

  1. Press [Start Print].

To change the number of prints, enter the desired number using - (numeric keys).

To select the paper size, press [Paper Select]. (See "Paper Selection.")

When printing a TIFF or PDF file, you can specify the pages to print. To specify the pages to print, press [All] or [Specify Page]. (See "Specifying the Range to Print.")

To perform two-sided printing, press [2-Sided Printing]. (See "Printing on Both Sides of the Paper.")

When printing a PDF file, you can specify finishing modes. To specify finishing modes, press [Finishing]. (See "Collating Prints.")

If there is a current or reserved print job, the machine will start printing your document after that job is complete.

The following screen is displayed when printing starts.

When printing is complete, the memory media selection screen is displayed.

  • To cancel printing, press [Cancel]. You cannot press (Stop) to cancel printing.
  • To reserve the next print job, press [Done], select the document you want to print, select the paper size, and press [Start Print]. (See "Reserving Jobs.")


Checking the Job Status/Job Log for Memory Media

This section describes the procedure for checking the job status/job log for memory media. On the job status/log screen, jobs for saving documents to memory media and jobs for copying documents from user inboxes are displayed.


Remark
  • If Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Log] is not displayed on the System Monitor screen.
  • One job is displayed on the job status screen.
  • 100 jobs are displayed on the job log screen.
  • On the job status/log screen, jobs for saving documents to memory media and jobs for copying documents from user inboxes are displayed. For information on canceling jobs for documents being printed from memory media, see "Basic Operations."


Checking the Details of Save Jobs for Memory Media

You can check the details for the save jobs of memory media connected to the machine via USB, such as the date and time the job was saved and the number of pages that was saved.


Remark
  • On the Status/Log screen, jobs for saving documents to memory media and jobs for copying documents from user inboxes are displayed.

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Status/Log].

  1. Press [Status] or [Log].


  • Press [Details].

  • Select the memory media you want to check the details of → press [Details].

  1. Check the details.


Canceling Save Jobs for Memory Media

You can cancel the save jobs for memory media connected via the USB port.


Remark
  • On the Status/Log screen, jobs for saving documents to memory media and jobs for copying documents from user inboxes are displayed. For information on canceling jobs for documents being printed from memory media, see "Basic Operations."

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Status/Log].

  1. Press [Status] → [Cancel].

  1. Press [Yes].
  • The canceled job is displayed as <NG> (No Good) on the Log screen.


Removing Memory Media

This section describes the procedure for removing memory media.


Remark
  • Follow the procedure below when removing memory media. If you remove memory media using a method other than that described below, you may damage the memory media, USB port, or data on the memory media.

  1. Press [Mail Box].

  1. Press [Memory Media].

  1. Select the memory media → press [Remove USB].

  1. Press [OK].

If removing the memory media fails, repeat steps 3 and 4.

  1. Remove the memory media from the USB port.


Changing the Resolution for Saving Documents

When saving documents to memory media, you can specify the resolution for the documents.


Remark
  • If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed, it is necessary to select the Black and White color mode to save documents with a resolution of 200 x 400 dpi, 400 x 400 dpi, or 600 x 600 dpi.

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Select the memory media, press [Open] → [Scan].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder you want to save the file to.

  1. Press the Resolution drop-down list → select the resolution → press [OK].

  1. Press (Start).


Setting the File Format for Saving Documents

When saving documents to memory media or copying document from user inboxes, you can specify either TIFF, JPEG, or PDF as the file format for the documents. If you select PDF as the file format, you can also specify the Trace and Smooth, Compact, OCR (Text Searchable), Encrypt, and/or Add Digital Signatures modes.


Remark
  • To cancel all settings, press (Reset). (The machine returns to the Standard mode.)


Setting the File Format

This section describes the procedure for setting the file format.


Remark
  • When saving a document, you can select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], [PDF], [JPEG], or [TIFF] as the file format.
  • When copying a document from a user inbox, you can select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select], or [PDF] as the file format.

  1. Place your originals.

This step is not required when copying a document from a user inbox.

  1. Select the memory media, press [Open] → [Scan].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder you want to save/copy the file to.

For information on copying a document from a user inbox, see "Copying a Document From an Inbox." Display the memory media document selection screen → press [Duplicate from Box] → select the user inbox.

  1. Press [File Format].

  1. Select the file format for the scanned image.

You can select either of the following file formats.

[TIFF/PDF Auto Select]: Saves the file in either the TIFF (Black and White) or PDF (Grayscale/Color) format.
[TIFF/JPEG Auto Select]: Saves images in either the TIFF (Black and White) or JPEG (Grayscale/Color) format.
[PDF]: Saves the file in the PDF format regardless of the Color mode. You can also specify [Trace & Smooth], [Compact], [OCR (Text Searchable)], [Encrypt], and/or [Add Device Signature].
[JPEG]: Saves the file in the JPEG format, if you select a Color mode other than Black and White.
[TIFF]: Saves the file in the TIFF format, only if you select the Black and White mode.

  • Press [OK].

If you select [TIFF/PDF Auto Select], the Divide into Pages mode is not available.

If you select [TIFF/JPEG Auto Select] or [JPEG], [Divide into Pages] is set to 'On'.


  • Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and save them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to save multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

You can also select the type of PDF from <PDF options>. For information on the type of PDF, see the following sections.

  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To view a JPEG file, software that supports the JPEG format (such as Microsoft Internet Explorer for Windows) is required.
  • To view a TIFF file, software that supports the TIFF format (such as Imaging for Windows) is required.

  1. Press (Start).

This step is not required when copying a document from a user inbox.



Saving a Trace and Smooth PDF

This mode enables you to convert the text and line drawings of a document to scalable outline data. The extracted outline data can be used in Adobe Illustrator. The smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data, so it has less of a jagged edge when seen on a PC monitor or in print.

If you select [Trace & Smooth] as the PDF file format, [Compact] is automatically set to 'On'. The Trace and Smooth mode cannot be set by itself. [PDF (Trace)] is displayed on the screen for saving the document.


Remark
  • If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, the machine automatically recognizes which parts of the document are text or line drawings. The machine may not recognize which parts of the scanned document are text and line drawings correctly, depending on the scanned document.
  • If you set the Trace & Smooth mode, smoothing is only performed on the areas of the document that are correctly recognized as text.
  • The text and background of a PDF containing outline data may become misaligned or text and line drawings may not be displayed when opened in Adobe Illustrator, depending on the version of Adobe Illustrator used to open the PDF.
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals, display the memory media selection screen → press [File Format].

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the File Format."

  1. Press [Trace & Smooth].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and save them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to save multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • If [Trace & Smooth] is selected for the PDF file format, the resolution is automatically changed to [300x300 dpi]. If the Color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black and White)] or [Black and White], the Color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want to save the document with the resolution setting and the Color mode that you specify, change the PDF file format to anything other than [Trace & Smooth] or [Compact].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format for the Standard mode, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format, documents can be saved only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • For more information on this file format, see "PDF (Trace)" in the glossary.
  1. Press (Start).


Saving a Compact PDF

This mode enables you to save files containing text originals or text/photo originals using a high compression ratio. If you select [Compact] as the PDF file format, it is recommended that you set the original type setting to either 'Text/Photo' or 'Text', depending on the image type. [PDF (Compact)] is displayed on the screen for saving the document.


Remark
  • If the document is a long strip original (850 mm or longer), you cannot save it as a compact PDF. (The scanner of the machine can scan long strip originals up to 630 mm in length.)
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals, display the memory media selection screen → press [File Format].

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the File Format."

  1. Press [Compact].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and save them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to save multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • If [Compact] is selected for the PDF file format, the resolution is automatically changed to [300x300 dpi]. If the Color mode is set to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/Black and White)] or [Black and White], the Color mode is automatically changed to [Auto-Color Select (Full Color/ Grayscale)] or [Grayscale], respectively. If you want to save the document with the resolution setting and the Color mode that you specify, change the PDF file format to anything other than [Trace & Smooth] or [Compact].
  • If [PDF (Compact)] is selected as the file format for the Standard mode, a message prompting you to change the file format may appear on the screen. In this case, change the file format to anything other than [PDF (Trace)] or [PDF (Compact)].
  • If [PDF (Trace)] is selected as the file format, documents can be saved only at a zoom ratio of 100%.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • If you select [Compact], you can also set [OCR (Text Searchable)] at the same time.
  • For more information on this file format, see "PDF (Trace)" in the glossary.
  1. Press (Start).


Saving a Searchable PDF

This mode enables you to perform OCR (optical character recognition) to extract data that can be recognized as text from the scanned image, and add it as a transparent layer of text to create a PDF file that is searchable.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Advanced Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals → display the memory media selection screen → press [File Format].

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the File Format."

  1. Press [OCR (Text Searchable)].

  1. Specify whether to divide your documents into separate pages → press [OK].

If you want to separate multiple images and save them as separate files, each of which consists of only one page, press [Divide into Pages], and the key lights.

If you want to save multiple images as a single file without dividing them, do not press [Divide into Pages], and the key remains unlit.

  • Even if [PDF (OCR)] is selected as the file format, text may not be detected correctly, depending on the background color, style and size of the characters in the image.
  • To view a PDF file or to search a text in a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • For more information on this file format, see "PDF (OCR)" in the glossary.
  1. Press (Start).


Saving Encrypted PDF Files

This mode enables you to encrypt PDF files for enhanced security.

If a password is set for a PDF file, only users who enter the correct password can open, print, or change the PDF.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Feature Set is activated.

  1. Place your originals → display the memory media selection screen → press [File Format].

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the File Format."

  1. Press [Encrypt].

  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].

<Encryption Level>:

Press the Encryption Level drop-down list, and select [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later], [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].

Adobe Acrobat 5.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption level is set to [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later].

Adobe Acrobat 7.0 or later is required for opening PDF files whose encryption level is set to [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later].

[Password Required to Open a Document]:

Select this key to set a password for opening the PDF files. You can specify a password by pressing [Password to Open a Document].

The encrypted PDF files cannot be opened without entering the password.

[Permission to Open a Doc.]:

Press [Password to Open a Doc.] → enter the password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen → press [OK].

[Password Required to Change Permiss.]:

Select [Password Required to Change Permiss.] to set a password for printing or editing the PDF file. When selecting this key, you can specify detailed settings, such as [Allow Printing], [Allow Changes], and [Enable Accessibility, Copy, Extraction of Images]. Set the password in [Permission Password].

If [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set, the encrypted PDF files cannot be printed or edited without entering the password.

[Permission Password]:

Press [Permission Password] → enter the password → press [OK].

Re-enter the password for confirmation on the Confirm screen → press [OK].

<Allow Printing>:

Press the Allow Printing drop-down list → select whether to allow printing of the PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

  • [Do Not Allow]: Printing is not allowed. (Even if [Do Not Allow] is selected, the document can be printed if it is opened with the permission password if other users are using Adobe Acrobat 5 or earlier.)
  • [Allow (Low Res. only)]: Only low-resolution printing is allowed. ([Allow (Low Res. only)] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Allow]: Printing is allowed.

<Allow Changes>:

Press the Allow Changes drop-down list → select whether to allow changing of the PDF files. You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

  • [Do Not Allow]: Changing of documents is not allowed.
  • [Insert, Delete, or Rotate Pages]: Inserting, deleting and rotating pages is allowed. ([Allow (Low Res. only)] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Add Digital Signatures]: Adding digital signatures is allowed. ([Allow (Low Res. only)] is displayed only if [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Add Comments and Digital Signatures]: Adding comments and digital signatures is allowed.
  • [Changes but Comment Add/Page Extract.]: Changing of documents except for adding comments and extracting pages is allowed. ([Changes except Comment Add/Page Extract.] is displayed only if [Low (40-bit RC4)/ Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected.)
  • [Changes but Page Extraction]: Changing of documents except for extracting pages is allowed.

[Enable Accessibility, Copying, Extraction of Images]:

You can select this setting only if [Password Required to Change Permiss.] is set to 'On'.

If [Low (40-bit RC4)/Acrobat 3.0 and later] is selected, you can select this setting. Select this key to allow copying of images and page extraction. In addition, it also has a function for reading aloud text inside a document for the visually impaired.

If [High (128-bit RC4)/Acrobat 5.0 and later] or [High (128-bit AES)/Acrobat 7.0 and later] is selected, [Enable Copying and Extraction of Image and Text] and [Enable Access for the Visually Impaired] are displayed and you can set these settings separately.

  • If you did not enter a password in [Password to Open a Doc.] or [Permission Password], enter the password in the screen that appears after pressing (Start).
  • You cannot set the same password for both [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password].
  • [Password to Open a Doc.] and [Permission Password] are displayed as asterisks (********) on the Encrypted PDF screen.
  • Even if you set restrictions for a PDF file with [Permission Password], some of these restrictions may be ignored if other users open the PDF with certain software.
  • To open or print a PDF file, software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/ Adobe Acrobat) is required.
  • To change a PDF file or to enable copying and extraction of images, Adobe Acrobat is required.
  • Adding digital signatures and comments, and the ability to insert, delete, and rotate pages are features of Adobe Acrobat.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter on the Password Required to Open a Document screen and the Permission Password screen is not displayed as asterisks.(See "Security.")
  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).
  • To cancel the settings, press [File Format] → [Encrypt PDF] → [Cancel].


Adding a Digital Signature to a PDF File to Save

You can add the following two type of digital signature to PDF data:


  • Device Signature

This mode uses the device signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables other users to verify which device scanned it. Other users can verify the device that signed the document, and whether the document has been changed after it was signed.


Remark
  • You can only add a digital signature to documents saved in either the PDF, PDF (Trace), PDF (Compact), or PDF (OCR) file format. You cannot add a digital signature to documents saved in the TIFF or JPEG format.
  • If other users verify a PDF that has had multiple signatures added to it using software that supports the PDF format (such as Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat), only the last signature is enabled. The other signatures cause the document to be handled as if it has been altered.
  • If you change the file format to a format other than 'PDF' after setting to add a digital signature, a message confirming whether you want to change the file format is displayed. If you change the file format, the digital signatures you have set to add are canceled.
  • For information on validating certificates, registering certificates in the trusted certificates list, and verifying signatures on the other users' side, see the documentation for the software that supports the PDF format (such as for Adobe Reader/Adobe Acrobat).


Adding a Device Signature

Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional Universal Send PDF Feature Set is activated.
  • You can only add device signatures to PDF documents if the optional Universal Send PDF Security Feature Set is activated and you have generated a device signature certificate and key pair in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more information, see "Network."
  • <Certificate Thumbprint> contains information used to validate the reliability of a PDF with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest number. For more information on confirming <Certificate Thumbprint> and other device signature information, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive" or "Network."
  • If the SSO-H login service is set and an e-mail address is registered for the user, in addition to adding the device signature, the [Author] property of the PDF is set to the e-mail address of the user.

  1. Place your originals → display the memory media selection screen → press [File Format].

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 1 and 2 of "Setting the File Format."

  1. Press [Add Device Signature].

  1. Press [OK].
  1. Press (Start).


Specifying the Range to Print

When printing a file on memory media, you can specify the range to print.


Remark
  • [Specify Page] can only be set for TIFF or PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [All] or [Specify Page].


  • Press [First Page] and [Last Page] to select the first and last page to print with [-] or [+] → press [OK].

  1. Press [Start Print].
  • If you selected [All], the specified number of pages depends on the number of pages of the document.
  • You cannot select [All] or [Specify Page] again after the prints are output.
  • If you specified [Specify Page], you cannot change the number of pages after the prints are output.


Printing on Both Sides of the Paper

You can print two consecutive pages of a document stored in memory media on both sides of a sheet of paper.


Remark
  • You may not be able to print on both sides of the paper, depending on the type of paper.
  • The following paper can be used for two-sided printing:
  • Paper size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R (envelopes cannot be used for two-sided copying)
  • Paper weight: 64 to 80 g/m2
  • To cancel this setting, press [2-Sided Printing] → [Cancel].

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [2-Sided Printing].

  1. Select the type of finishing → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Long Edge]: Uses the long edge of the paper as the binding location for the back and front sides.
[Short Edge]: Uses the short edge of the paper as the binding location for the back and front sides.
  1. Press [Start Print].


What Are Special Features?

Special features are modes for performing various kinds of editing according to your needs, when printing documents from memory media.


Remark


Setting Special Features When Saving Documents to Memory Media

  1. Place your originals.
  1. Select the memory media, press [Open] → [Scan].

Press [Up] or [Open] if necessary to move to the level of the folder you want to save the file to.

  1. Press [Special Features].

  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  • Depending on the mode, you may have to place your original on the platen glass or in the feeder. See the corresponding section on each mode for detailed information.
  1. Set the desired mode.

To set another mode, repeat steps 4 and 5.

  • To erase frames and shadows on the original, see "Frame Erase."
  • To scan batches of originals together, see "Job Build."
  1. Press (Start).

If the original is placed on the platen glass, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display, and press (Start) once for each original. When scanning is complete, press [Done].

Scanning starts.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • For modes which have on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Frame Erase
    Press [Special Features] → [Frame Erase] → [Cancel].
  • For modes which do not have on the bottom right of their key:
    Example: Job Build
    Press [Special Features] → [Job Build].
  • To cancel all of the mode settings, press [Initial Settings]. (The scan settings return to the Standard mode.) To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).


Setting Special Features When Printing Documents From Memory Media

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].

  1. Select the desired mode from the Special Features screen.

  1. Set the desired mode.

To set another mode, repeat steps 3 and 4.

  • To reduce a multiple page document or two-sided document to print on a single page, see "Image Combination."
  1. Press [Start Print].

If there is a current or reserved print job, the machine will start printing your document after that job is complete.

Printing starts.

  • To cancel this setting, follow the procedure below.
  • Example: Booklet
    [Special Features] → [Booklet] → [Cancel]
  • To cancel all of the mode settings, press [Initial Settings]. (The machine returns to the Standard Local Print Settings. However, for PDF files, the paper drawer set in [Mail Box] in [Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS] in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is selected. For JPEG and TIFF files, Paper Drawer 1 is selected.) To return to the inbox selection screen, press (Reset).


Changing the Resolution for Printing Documents

You can specify the resolution before printing an original.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing JPEG, TIFF, or PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Resolution].
  1. Select the desired resolution.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Fine (600dpi)]: Prints with 600 dpi resolution. Suitable for printing regular documents and tables.
[Superfine (1200dpi)]: Prints with 1200 dpi resolution. Enables you to clearly print fine text and diagrams. Particularly suitable for data that includes a lot of small text or fine lines.
  1. Press [OK].


Specifying the Type of Halftones to Print

You can select the method for producing halftones when printing.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing JPEG, TIFF, or PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Halftones].
  1. Select the desired method of producing halftones.

When printing a PDF file, you can select the method for producing halftones for the text, graphics, and images.

When printing a JPEG or TIFF file, you can select the method for producing halftones for the images.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Resolution]: Enables you to perform fine printing to enhance the lines of text data, etc. Suitable for printing data with text and fine lines, etc.
[Gradation]: Enables you to print with both smooth gradation and quality lines. Suitable for printing diagrams and graphs that use gradations.
[High Resolution]: Enables you to perform even finer printing than [Resolution], but with slightly less stable texture. Suitable for printing data with text and fine lines or sharply printing the lines of CAD data.
  1. Press [OK].


Matching the Paper Size When Printing

You can match the paper size when printing.

If the page size of a PDF file is larger than the effective print region, the page size is reduced to fit the paper size when printing. Also, if the page size of a PDF file is smaller than the effective print region, the page size is enlarged to fit the paper size when printing.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Match to Paper Size].


Enlarging the Print Region to Print

You can enlarge the print region when printing.

The printable area is enlarged to the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper. If the aspect ratio of the pages of the file are the same as the specified size, this enables you to print without inserting a margin.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing JPEG, TIFF, or PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Enlarge Printing Area].


Image Combination

You can automatically reduce a document of 2, 4, 6, 8, 9, or 16 pages to fit a specified paper size.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing PDF files.
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set to fit the specified paper size.

  • 2 On 1

Reduces a 2 page document to fit on a single side of paper.

  • 4 On 1

Reduces a 4 page document to fit on a single side of paper.

  • 3 On 1

Reduces a 6 page document to fit on a single side of paper.

  • 8 On 1

Reduces a 8 page document to fit on a single side of paper.

  • 9 On 1

Reduces a 9 page document to fit on a single side of paper.

  • 16 On 1

Reduces a 16 page document to fit on a single side of paper.


  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Image Combination].
  1. Select the type of image layout → press [Next].

If you want to specify the layout order, press [Option] → select the layout order, and press [Done] → [Next].

If you do not press [Option] to change the layout order, the order is set as follows:

  • 2 On 1:
Left → right
  • 4 On 1, 6 On 1, 8 On 1, 9 On 1 or 16 On 1:
Upper left → upper right → lower left → lower right
  1. Select the paper size → press [OK].
  • The reduction ratio is automatically set to fit the specified paper size.


Printing a Booklet

You can print documents in such a way that the prints are made into a booklet.


Remark
  • Saddle stitching will not be performed if only one sheet is output.
  • Saddle stitching is only available if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary, depending on the type and quantity of paper.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty, or the paper could jam, and a service repair may be needed.
  • You can only use this function when printing PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Booklet].
  1. Select the type of finishing → press [Next].
  1. Select the paper source for the paper to use for the main body of the booklet → press [Next].

If the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is not attached, press [OK].

The available paper sizes are A3, B4, A4R, 11"×17", LGL, or LTRR.

If you selected the paper to use for the main body of the booklet from [Stack Bypass Settings], select the paper size, press [Next], then select the paper size and press [OK].

  1. Select whether to saddle stitch the booklet → press [OK].
  1. Set the Booklet Tray guide to match the paper size.

  • Make sure to set the Booklet Tray guide correctly to match the paper size. Setting the Booklet Tray guide incorrectly may result in a paper jam.


Adding Comments When Printing

You can set whether to print the comments in PDF files.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing PDF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Print Comments].
  1. Set how to print the comments.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Auto]: Only the comments set to be printed in the PDF file are printed.
[Print All]: All comments are printed.
[Not Print]: Comments are not printed.
  1. Press [OK].


Printing a PDF File With a Password

When printing a PDF file with a password, enter the password for opening the document.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing PDF files.
  • You can only print PDF files with passwords by using this function.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Doc. Open Password] → enter the password for opening the document.
  • If you want to print a PDF file that is not allowed to be printed or if you want to print a PDF file in high resolution that is only allowed to be printed in low resolution, enter the master password of the PDF file.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the password that you enter for opening the document is not displayed as asterisks.
  1. Press [OK].


Enlarging/Reducing a Document to Print

You can enlarge/reduce the document to match the paper size when printing.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Enlarge/Reduce].

The image data is automatically enlarged/reduced to fit the specified paper size.



Image Orientation

You can specify the image orientation when printing.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Image Orientation].
  1. Select the image orientation.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Auto]: Compares the width and height of a JPEG or TIFF image, and prints the image with landscape orientation if the width is greater. If the height is greater, the image is printed with portrait orientation.
[Y]: Prints the image with portrait orientation, regardless of its width/height ratio.
[X]: Prints the image with landscape orientation, regardless of its width/height ratio.
  1. Press [OK].


Specifying the Position to Print

You can specify the printing position when printing.


Remark
  • You can only use this function when printing JPEG or TIFF files.

  1. Specify the desired memory media → select the document to print → display the Print screen.

To check the screens for this procedure, see steps 4 to 6 of "Printing Documents in Memory Media."

  1. Press [Special Features].
  1. Press [Print Position].
  1. Select the printing position.

Details of each item are shown below.

[Auto]: If the printing position is specified for a JPEG or TIFF image, prints in the specified position. If the printing position is not specified, prints in the center position.
[Center]: Prints in the center, regardless of the printing position specified for a JPEG or TIFF image.
[Upper Left]: Prints in the upper left, regardless of the printing position specified for a JPEG or TIFF image.
  1. Press [OK].


Combination of Functions Chart

These charts show the available combinations of settings when you want to set more than one function at a time.



Scan Function


*1 Combination available when the Job Build mode is set.
*2 If the optional System Upgrade RAM is not installed, priority is given to the latest set mode.
*3 If you set both the Automatic Exposure Adjustment mode and Fine Adjustment for the Remove Background/Prevent Bleed-thru mode, priority is given to the latest set mode.


Print Function


*4 Combination unavailable if [Free Size] or [Envelope] is selected.
*5 Combination unavailable if [Free Size] is selected.
*6 Output prints scanned using the Different Size Originals mode.
*7 Combination unavailable if the record size is different from the original size.
*8 Combination available if [Auto] is selected for the Creep Correction mode.


Printing from a Computer (Windows)

This category describes how to print from computers.



Printing Fundamentals

This section explains how to print a document and how to display the online help.


Remark
  • To use the printer, you need an appropriate printer driver. See Getting Started and the Printer Driver Installation Guide for details on how to install the printer driver.


Printing with the Printer Driver

The procedure for printing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Open the document you want to print from the application.
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  • The procedure displaying the [Print] dialog box may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Select your printer from [Name], then click [Properties].

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • The printer name displayed in the printer driver screen is changed by settings in the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]). See "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" to display the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes]).
  • The procedure displaying the printer driver screen may differ depending on the applications you are using.
  1. Configure the required settings in the printer driver screen, then click [OK].

See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].

Printing begins.



Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand

To configure the printing conditions, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • When printing, you can change the settings you configured beforehand. To change the settings, configure them from the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [](Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to configure → click [Printing Preferences] from the displayed menu.

The printer driver screen is displayed.

  • To access the [Printing Preferences] dialog box from [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), you need to be assigned full control permission for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  1. Configure the required settings in the displayed printer driver screen.

See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [OK].

The printer whose settings you have configured will print with the same settings every time.



Setting the Printer Configuration

To set the printer configuration, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, full control access is required to configure the settings for the printer. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. On the [Start] menu, point to [Settings] → click [Printers].

The [Printers] folder is displayed.

  • If you are using Windows XP Professional/Server 2003, on the [Start] menu, click [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows XP Home Edition, on the [Start] menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers and Other Hardware] → [Printers and Faxes].
  • If you are using Windows Vista, on the [](Start) menu, click [Control Panel] → [Printers].
  1. In the [Printers] folder (or [Printers and Faxes] folder), right-click the icon of the printer whose settings you want to configure → click [Properties] from the displayed menu.

The printer properties dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select [Device Settings] sheet → click [Get Device Status].

  • If the information request returns an error message, you need to configure the settings (such as paper feed options, paper output options, etc.) manually.
  • If the printer and computer are connected via USB, the [Get Device Status] function is unavailable. You need to configure the settings manually.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, the function version of the device is obtained together with the device information. If the function version cannot be obtained, print a device status page from the device, verify the function version → click [Function] and set the function version manually. The available printer driver functions differ according to the function version.
  1. Confirm the settings such as paper source options and output options → click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the printer driver screen.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Click [Help].

The online help is displayed.



Printing Functions

This section explains what you can do in each sheet of the printer driver UI.


Remark
  • The items displayed in the printer driver window differ according to the printer model you are using.
  • Some functions may not be available depending on the printer model you are using.

Common Functions

[Page Setup] sheet

[Finishing] sheet

[Paper Source] sheet

[Quality] sheet

[Device Settings] sheet


Common Functions

The following functions are common to all sheets. The following settings are configured from the locations indicated by the corresponding numbers in the image.


1

Selecting Profiles

You can select a profile to conveniently repeat the same print settings.

4

Preview

The settings configured in each sheet are displayed in the preview.

2

Adding/Editing Profiles

You can add and edit profile settings.

5

Verifying Settings

You can verify the settings specified in each sheet.

3

Changing the Output Method

You can change the output method; e.g. storing a print job in an inbox. You can also select [Edit and Preview] to view the print preview.




[Page Setup] Sheet

In the [Page Setup] sheet, you can do the following. The following settings are configured from the locations indicated by the corresponding numbers in the image.


1

Output Paper Size

Enables you to select the paper size actually output from the printer

4

Watermark

Prints pages with a watermark (such as "COPY") superimposed on the document.

2

Print Direction

Sets the print direction relative to the orientation of the paper.

5

Page Border

Prints each page with a border.

3

Page Layout

Prints multiple pages arranged on one sheet of paper.

5

Header/Footer

Prints pages with headers and/or footers with the date, page number, etc.




[Finishing] Sheet

In the [Finishing] sheet, you can do the following. The following settings are configured from the locations indicated by the corresponding numbers in the image.


1

Two-sided Printing

Prints on the front and back of the paper.

4

Collating

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs each set separately in page order.

2

Booklet Printing

Prints pages in a sequence that allows them to be folded and grouped into a booklet when output.

5

Grouping

When printing multiple sets of copies, outputs the pages in groups according to their page numbers.

3

Mixed Paper Sizes/Orientations

Aligns the binding location when printing pages of mixed size and/or orientation.

6

Offsetting

Alternately offsets sets of output pages according to a specified number of pages.




[Paper Source] Sheet

In the [Paper Source] sheet, you can do the following. The following settings are configured from the locations indicated by the corresponding numbers in the image.


1

Printing on Transparencies

Prints on transparencies. You can also insert interleaving pages between the transparencies.

2

Front/Back Covers

Uses different paper for the front and back covers from that used for the main body copy.




[Quality] Sheet

In the [Quality] sheet, you can do the following. The following settings are configured from the locations indicated by the corresponding numbers in the image.


1

Objective

Enables you to conveniently select the appropriate settings for the current content.

3

Manual Grayscale Settings

Enables you to set the brightness and contrast of the original when printing.

2

Toner Reduction

Prints with a reduced amount of toner




[Device Settings] Sheet

In the [Device Settings] sheet, you can do the following. The following settings are configured from the locations indicated by the corresponding numbers in the image.


1

Set Options

You can set device information manually.

3

Display Version Information

You can display version information.

2

Obtain Device Information

You can obtain device information and update the settings displayed in the sheet.




Scaling Documents

You can enlarge or reduce documents to match the output paper size, such as reducing a document created in A4 size to print on B5, or enlarging a document created in B5 size to print on A4.
There are two methods for scaling a document: select the output size of the document to scale it automatically, or specify the scaling value manually.


Move the cursor over the image on the left to activate it.


Remark
  • Depending on the selected page size and printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document.
  • Depending on the printer model you are using, you may not be able to magnify the document to the optimum ratio for the selected page size.
  • If you are using an application that enables you to enlarge or reduce the document, configure the settings in the application.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page size of the document you created in the application from [Page Size].

  1. Select output size of the document from [Output Size].

The document is scaled automatically according to the settings made in [Page Size] and [Output Size].

  1. If you want to increase or decrease the magnification manually, select [Manual Scaling] → specify the scaling ratio for [Scaling].

  • If the ratio is less than 25% or more than 200%, the document is printed without scaling on the paper specified in [Output Size].
  1. Click [OK].


Printing Multiple Pages on One Sheet

Multiple pages can be printed on one sheet of paper.


Move the cursor over the image on the left to activate it.


Remark
  • Although there may be a function for printing multiple copies depending on the application you are using, do not use it together with this function. If you do, printing may not be executed correctly.
  • You cannot enlarge and reduce manually when using this function.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select the page layout from [Page Layout].

  • If the options are not displayed for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] sheet, then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host].
  1. Select the page order from [Page Order].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


2-sided Printing

Two-sided printing prints a document on both sides of the paper.


Move the cursor over the image on the left to activate it.


Remark
  • The page sizes for which two-sided printing is available differ according to printer model. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the printer driver window to view the online help.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [2-sided Printing] from [Print Style].

  1. Select binding edge for the paper printout from [Binding Location].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Booklet Printing

You can create a booklet by printing 2 pages on both sides of each sheet of paper and folding the sheets in half. You can also bind together sets of folding sheets to create a book.


Move the cursor over the image on the left to activate it.


Remark
  • You cannot specify the [Finishing] options in the [Finishing] sheet when performing Booklet Printing.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the [Finishing] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Booklet Printing] from [Print Style] → click [Booklet].

The [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box opens.

  1. Specify the method of booklet printing and gutter width → click [OK].

The [Finishing] sheet is displayed.

  • For details about the various settings in the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Detailed Settings for Booklet] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Select [Saddle Stitch] if you want to staple the middle of the pages and fold them in half.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Poster Printing

You can enlarge a one-page image and print it over multiple pages. You can then glue the printed pages together to create a poster.


Remark
  • When outputting the pages face up, the print sequence for the pages (the sheets into which the image is divided) starts from the top left proceeds to the right. When outputting the pages face down, the sequence starts from the bottom right and proceeds to the left.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select page layout for poster from [Page Layout].

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • If the options are not displayed for [Page Layout], display the [Device Settings] sheet, then select [Auto] or [Enabled] from [Spooling at Host].
  1. Click [OK].


Watermark Printing

You can print a watermark (such as "CONFIDENTIAL" or "COPY") on a document created using an application. You can register the customized watermark other than the various predefined watermarks.


Move the cursor over the image on the left to activate it.


Remark
  • You can register up to 50 watermarks, not including the watermarks already provided.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the [Page Setup] sheet.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select [Watermark] → select watermark for printing.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  • By clicking [Edit Watermark], you can display the [Edit Watermark] dialog box, and create and register new watermarks based on previously registered ones. For details, click [Help] in the bottom right-hand corner of the [Edit Watermark] dialog box to view the online help.
  1. Click [OK].


Viewing the Print Preview

You can display a preview and verify the print results prior to printing.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. In the printer driver UI, select [Edit and Preview] from [Output Method].

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Set the printing conditions in each of the sheets in the printer driver UI → click [OK].

See "Printing Functions " to find what you can configure in each sheet.

  1. Click [OK] in the [Print] dialog box.

The [Canon PageComposer] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the document you want to see a print preview of from [Document Name] → click the [Print Preview] button.

The print preview is displayed.

  • In Canon PageComposer, not only can you display a print preview, you can also merge and edit print jobs. For details, see the Canon PageComposer online help.


Selecting a Profile for Printing

Combinations of printer driver settings corresponding to a variety of printing purposes are provided with the printer driver as "profiles". This enables you to print documents according to a desired objective by simply selecting a profile from the [Profile] list.


Remark
  • To select a profile, you need to select [Allow Profile Selection] in the [Profile] sheet of the printer properties dialog box (→"Setting the Printer Configuration"). If you are using Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003, to change this setting, you need full control access for the device. Full control access is available for users who are registered as Administrators or Power Users in the Windows system settings.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the printer driver screen.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" or "Setting Printer Conditions Beforehand" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select a profile from the [Profiles] list according to your objective.

The output image is displayed in the preview area.

  1. Click [OK].


Printing from a Computer (Mac)

This category describes how to print from computers.



Printing Fundamentals

This section explains how to display the printer driver, how to print, and other basic printer driver operations.



Printing with the Printer Driver

The procedure for printing a document created in application software is as follows.


Remark
  • Printing methods may differ depending on the applications you are using. For details, see the instruction manuals provided with the application software.
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Open the document you want to print from the application.
  1. Select [Page Setup] from the [File] menu.

The [Page Setup] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Confirm the printer name for [Format for] in the [Page Attributes] pane → specify the paper size, paper orientation, and scale.

  1. Click [OK].
  1. Select [Print] from the [File] menu.

The [Print] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Select the printer name from [Printer].

  1. Specify which pages to print, the number of copies, etc. → click [Print] in the [Print] dialog box.

Printing begins.



Setting the Printer Configuration

When first using the printer driver, or changing the printer settings, obtain or set the printer information by following the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.
  • If the printer information cannot be set automatically, such as when the computer and printer are connected via USB, set the printer information manually. Refer to the online manual for details.

  1. Select the printer from [Printer] in the [Printer] dialog box → select a preferences pane.

Select one of the following preferences panes:

  • [Finishing] preferences pane
  • [Paper Source] preferences pane
  • [Quality] preferences pane
  • [Special Features] preferences pane

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" on how to display the [Print] dialog box.

  1. Click [Printer Info].

The [Printer Information] dialog box is displayed.

  • If the [Printer Information] is not displayed, check whether the printer is turned on.
  1. Confirm the printer information.

The information obtained from the printer is displayed.

Confirm options, paper sources, etc.

  1. Click [OK].


Viewing the Online Help

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The display may differ according to the operating system, as well as the type and version of the printer driver.

  1. Display the printer driver screen.

See "Printing with the Printer Driver" on how to display the printer driver screen.

  1. Select the printer from [Printer] in the [Print] dialog box → select a preferences pane.

Select one of the following preferences panes:

  • [Finishing] preferences pane
  • [Paper Source] preferences pane
  • [Quality] preferences pane
  • [Special Features] preferences pane
  1. Click [].

The online help is displayed.



Viewing the Online Manual

To view the online manual, follow the procedure below.


  1. Open the [Documents] folder in the installation folder.
  1. Double-click the PDF file icon.

The online manual is displayed.

  • The file names of the PDF and Readme files may differ depending on the printer driver version.


Setting the Main Unit (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer)

This category describes how to use the PS/PCL/UFR II printer drivers.



Printing Flow With This Machine


Printing With a Printer Driver

Normally, the series of operations involved in printing data from a computer is specified by control commands generated using a printer driver. Control commands are a command system for controlling a printer. For example, when printing using a printer driver, control commands print data according to the following flow.


<1> Using a printer driver, data to be printed is converted to control commands.
<2> Control command data is sent to the machine.
<3> Following the received control commands, the machine processes and prints the data.

Remark

This machine supports the following three kinds of control commands:

  • UFR II Mode

UFR (Ultra Fast Rendering) is printing technology developed by Canon. High-speed printing is made possible by sharing the processing of print data normally done by the machine with the computer.

  • PCL Mode (PCL or PS Printer only)

PCL (Print Control Language), developed by Hewlett-Packard, is a command system for controlling page printers. Command versions supported by this machine are PCL5e and PCL6.

  • PostScript Emulation Mode (PS Printer only)

PS (PostScript), developed by Adobe, is a command system for controlling page printers. This mode emulates the operation of a printer in conformance with PostScript. The command version supported by this machine is PostScript emulation 3.

  • To print in the above printer modes, a Printer Driver supported by this machine must be installed.


Printing With Direct Print

Printing with Direct Print can also be done with this machine. Direct Print is a print function that enables you to send PS/EPS, TIFF/JPEG, and PDF format files without using a printer driver from the computer to the machine, which recognizes the file. Therefore, you can print without the need to open files.

You can specify PS/EPS, TIFF/JPEG, and PDF files to be printed from a Remote UI. You can print a PDF file by specifying the location on your computer or URL from the Remote UI.

You can also use the Direct Print function by entering a command (LPR command) in the command prompt.


Remark


Operations and Terms Used In This Manual


Combinations and Names of Printer Kit Options

Combinations with options (system configurations) for using the machine as a printer are available as described below.
In this manual, the combinations are each defined with the terms "UFR II Printer," "PCL Printer," "PS Printer," and "PDF Direct Print Printer."


Remark
  • To enable these modes and functions, you must register the licence key with the machine. For information on registering the licence key, see "Security."

  • UFR II Printer

For UFR II printing, the optional UFR II Printer Kit must be installed.


Machine Model Required Option Kit
iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 UFR II Printer Kit or UFR II/PCL Printer Kit

  • PCL Printer

For PCL printing, the optional PCL Printer Kit must be installed.
The optional UFR II Printer Kit must be installed before installing the optional PCL Printer Kit.


Machine Model Required Option Kit
iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 UFR II/PCL Printer Kit or UFR II Printer Kit + PCL Printer Kit

  • PS Printer

For PS printing, the optional PS Printer Kit must be installed.
The optional UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit must be installed before installing the optional PS Printer Kit.


Machine Model Required Option Kit
iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 UFR II/ PCL Printer Kit + PS Printer Kit or
UFR II Printer Kit + PCL Printer Kit + PS Printer Kit

  • PDF Direct Print Printer

For PDF direct printing, the optional PS Printer Kit must be installed.
The optional UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit must be installed before installing the optional PS Printer Kit.


Machine Model Required Option Kit
iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 UFR II/ PCL Printer Kit + PS Printer Kit or
UFR II Printer Kit + PCL Printer Kit + PS Printer Kit or
Direct Printing Kit


Differences in Operation with UFR II, PCL, PS, and Direct Print Printers

This describes differences in the settings that can be specified as a minimum from the touch panel display in each printer type.


Remark
  • An asterisk (*) indicates settings which are not specifiable with the printer driver or a Remote UI that can be specified from the touch panel display.



Personality

The machine can distinguish between computer-sent control commands and Direct Print data and automatically switch personalities. However, in instances such as where received control commands are exclusively defined or the machine does not automatically switch to the appropriate personality, please set the Personality to match received data. The machine enables you to switch the personality and set specifications for printing using the menu functions on the touch panel display. (See "Personality.")



Menu Functions

This section describes the menu functions and how to access them with the touch panel display.



What Are Menu Functions?


Specifying the Menu Settings

The machine lets you specify settings, such as the number of copies and the paper size, to use when it receives a print job. These types of settings can be specified by the application sending the print job, or by the printer driver.

You can specify many settings which affect the printer function of the machine. These include some settings that cannot be specified remotely from an application or from the printer driver. These settings are referred to as "Menu Functions."

The menu functions are grouped together according to the type of settings, which makes them easy to set.

There are two ways you can specify the menu functions.

  • Specifying the settings on the touch panel display:
    Display the Printer Settings screen on the touch panel display and specify the settings by pressing the keys on it.
  • Specifying the settings on the Remote UI:
    You can specify some settings from your computer using your web browser.

Remark
  • This category only explains how to specify the menu settings on the touch panel display. For instructions on specifying the menu settings on the Remote UI, please refer to "Remote UI."
  • The contents of the Printer Settings are stored in the nonvolatile memory of the machine. This means that the settings are stored even if the power to the machine is switched OFF, and therefore the settings will still be available when the power is switched ON again.


Settings Priorities

When the same menu function setting can be specified by using the keys on the machine or by specifying the setting in an application or the printer driver, the setting from the application or printer driver has priority. These settings will override the settings made on the machine.

For settings available only on the touch panel display or Remote UI, the most recently specified settings take priority.

The printer driver is included on the CD-ROM provided with the machine. For instructions on installing the printer driver, see (See Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started.)



Menus for Printer Settings

Printer Settings are configured with the menus below.

  • Printer Settings

Enables you to specify or change settings for printing from the machine.
The following menus are included within the Printer Settings menu.

  • Settings Menu
    Enables you to specify or change settings common to all printer functions.
  • UFR II/PCL/PS Settings Menus
    Enables you to specify or change settings for the operating mode when a UFR II/PCL/PS control command is received.
  • Imaging/PDF Settings Menus
    Enables you to specify or change settings for the operating mode when Direct Print data is received.
  • Utility Menu


Accessing the Printer Settings Menu

The Printer Settings menu enables you to access common features. Below is an abbreviated outline of the Printer Settings menu structure.

As an example, the sequence of steps for setting the default number of copies is shown on the following pages.


Remark
  • Depending on the printer personality, some settings are not available.


  1. Press (Additional Functions).

  1. Press [Printer Settings].

  1. Press [Settings].

  1. Press [Copies].

  1. Press [-] or [+] to enter the number of copies.

If you enter a value outside the setting range, a message prompting you to enter an appropriate value appears on the screen.

  1. Confirm the setting → press [OK].



Accessing the Report Settings Menu

The Report Settings menu enables you to access report print features, such as checking the configuration. Below is an abbreviated outline of the Report Settings menu structure.

As an example, the sequence of steps for printing a Configuration Page is shown on the following pages.


Remark
  • The Report Settings is only available for the PCL or PS Printer.


  1. Press (Additional Functions).

  1. Press [Report Settings].

  1. Press [Printer] under <Print List>.

  1. Press [PCL].

  1. Press [Configuration Page].

  1. Press [Yes] to print the page.

If you do not want to print the configuration page, press [No].

If the printer function is working correctly, the Configuration Page will be similar to the sample below.



Procedure for Checking and Changing Jobs

You can check or change the status of print jobs from the touch panel display.

For example, you can change the priority of jobs in the print queue, cancel jobs, check the details of jobs, or print password protected Secured Print jobs or Encrypted Secured Print jobs.

By displaying the job list, you can check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed. By displaying the Log, you can confirm that jobs have been processed.

Jobs can be handled from the Print Basic Features screen or the System Monitor screen in the touch panel display with this machine. This section describes the procedure for checking the current machine status from each screen.


Remark
  • The My Job Status screen is displayed in the Print Basic Features screen if you are using a login service. Only jobs for a logged-in user are displayed in the job list, and therefore you can block other users from accessing the job names or documents to prevent the flow of information from the machine. To enhance security of the print environment, it is recommended that you normally handle jobs from the Print Basic Features screen.
  • For instructions on a login service, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • For information on changing the priority of print jobs, checking the details and the log of jobs, or current status, see "Basic Operations."
  • The items below relating to print jobs are not displayed if "Job Log Display" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off]. (The default setting is [On].)
  • [Log] in the Print Basic Features screen
  • [Log] in the System Monitor screen
  • If "Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off], you cannot print a secured print job from the System Monitor screen. (The default setting is [Off].)
  • You can restrict the display of the System Monitor screen under the following conditions if "Display Status Before Authentication" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off]. (The default setting is [On].)

    When "Display Status Before Authentication" is set to [Off]

    : Displayed
    : Not Displayed
    Login service (Department ID Management, SSO-H, etc.) System Monitor screen
    Print, Copy, Send, Fax, and Receive screens Device Status screen
    Before logging in
    After logging in
    * Even if you set the 'Display Status Before Authentication' mode to [Off], access to the System Monitor screen is only restricted if a login service is set.
  • Many of the check/change operations can also be performed from the Remote User Interface. (See "Remote UI.")


Checking Jobs from the Print Basic Features Screen

If you press [My Job Status] or [Status] in the Print Basic Features screen, you can check print job status. If you press [Log], you can check the jobs that have already been processed.


  1. Press [→] → [Print Job].

  • You can set the Print Basic Features screen to be the initial screen, when the main power is turned ON or after an Auto Clear, with "Initial Function and Function Order Settings" in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Depending on the system configuration, the Print Basic Features screen or the function key is displayed in the front page of the touch panel display as the initial screen.
  1. Press [My Job Status], [Status], or [Log] to display the current machine status.

  • The My Job Status screen is displayed if you are using a login service. Since only jobs for a user logged in to this machine will be displayed in the job list, you can block other users from accessing the job names or documents to prevent the flow of information from the machine. For instructions on a login service, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • You can check only the logged-in user jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.


  • You can check all the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.


  • You can check the jobs that have already been processed.


  • Secured print jobs (including encrypted secured jobs) other than for a logged-in user are displayed as asterisks (*) and cannot be handled unless you are using a login service. However, if you are logged in as an Administrator, you can perform any operation other than printing.


  • You can change or cancel multiple jobs selected from the list. If you select multiple jobs, they are numbered in the order selected.


  • If you press [Select All], you can select all the jobs. If you press [Clear Selection], any selected jobs are cleared.



  • For instructions on changing the priority of jobs in the print queue or checking the details of a job, see "Basic Operations."


Checking Jobs from the System Monitor Screen

If you press [Status] in the System Monitor screen, you can check print job status. If you press [Log], you can check the jobs that have already been processed.

If you press [Device], you can quickly view machine information. The remaining amount of paper, toner, and staples, the amount of system memory currently being used, and error messages can be checked.


Remark
  • The status bars (on the keys located on the bottom of the System Monitor screen) blink in red or green to indicate the status of jobs. The status bars blink green while jobs are being processed. Blinking red status bars indicate errors. For instructions on how to resolve errors, see "Problem Solving."

  1. Press [System Monitor].

  1. Press [Print] or [Device] to display the current machine status.

  • Press [Status] to check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.

  • Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.


  • Check the current machine status.

  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Checking and Changing Print Jobs

This section describes the procedures for the job processes listed below.


Remark
  • You can restrict the display of the System Monitor screen under the following conditions if "Display Status Before Authentication" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off]. (The default setting is [On].)

    When "Display Status Before Authentication" is set to [Off]

    : Displayed
    : Not Displayed
    Login service (Department ID Management, SSO-H, etc.) System Monitor screen
    Print, Copy, Send, Fax, and Receive screens Device Status screen
    Before logging in
    After logging in
    * Even if you set the 'Display Status Before Authentication' mode to [Off], access to the System Monitor screen is only restricted if a login service is set.
  • You can receive print jobs only for encrypted secured documents with this machine if "Only Allow Encrypted Secured Jobs" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [On]. A job will be canceled and an error message displayed if a print job other than an encrypted secured print job is received. (The default setting is [Off].)
  • The table below describes the icons that are displayed on the status and log screens.
    Icon (Job Status) Description
    Executing
    Waiting
    Error
    Canceling
    Paused
    Secured Document
    Encrypted Secured Document

    Icon (Job Type) Description
    Copy Job
    Mail Box Job
    Print Job
    Report Print Job
    Received Print Job


Canceling Print Jobs

You can perform [Cancel] when you want to cancel a print job at the time data is currently being received or executed. It does not affect the print data of a following job or a job the machine has not yet started processing.


Remark
  • If you are not logged in as an Administrator, you can only cancel your own jobs.


Handling Jobs from the Print Basic Features Screen

To cancel jobs from the Print Basic Features screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [→] → [Print Job].
  • You can set the Print Basic Features screen to be the initial screen, when the main power is turned ON or after an Auto Clear, with "Initial Function and Function Order Settings" in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Depending on the system configuration, the Print Basic Features screen or the function key is displayed in the front page of the touch panel display as the initial screen.
  1. Press either [My Job Status] or [Status].

  1. Select the job to be canceled → press [Cancel].


  • To cancel multiple jobs, select jobs displayed in the list in the order to be canceled → press [Cancel].


  • To cancel all jobs, press [Select All] → press [Cancel].


  1. Press [Yes].

If you do not want to cancel, press [No].

  • You cannot cancel other users' jobs. However, if you are logged in as an Administrator, you can cancel the other users' jobs.
  • <NG> is displayed in the print job log screen for canceled print jobs.


Handling Jobs from the System Monitor Screen

To cancel jobs from the System Monitor screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [System Monitor]→[Print].
  1. Press [Status].

  1. Select the job to be canceled→press [Cancel].

  • You cannot select and cancel multiple jobs.
  1. Press [Yes].

If you do not want to cancel, press [No].

  • <NG> is displayed in the print job log screen for canceled print jobs.
  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Canceling All Operations (Reset Printer)

You can delete (reset) print data in memory and any jobs being processed.


Remark
  • If the machine is being used in a network, please note that resetting the printer function may affect data being received from other users.
  • If you reset the printer function, data is deleted for print jobs that have already been received, or received while the printer function is being reset. However, in some cases, the data is not deleted from the machine's memory, and the print job may not print correctly. Canon recommends that you reset the printer function to delete the data and print the job again.

  1. Display the desired screen with the following procedure.

Press (Additional Functions) → [Printer Settings] → [Utility] → [Reset Printer].

  1. Press [Yes].

If you do not want to reset the printer, press [No].

  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Temporarily Stopping Print Jobs

You can temporarily stop jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.



Handling Jobs from the Print Basic Features Screen

To stop jobs temporarily from the Print Basic Features screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [→] → [Print Job].
  • You can set the Print Basic Features screen to be the initial screen, when the main power is turned ON or after an Auto Clear, with "Initial Function and Function Order Settings" in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Depending on the system configuration, the Print Basic Features screen or the function key is displayed in the front page of the touch panel display as the initial screen.
  1. Press either [My Job Status] or [Status].

  1. Select the job to be stopped → press [Details].

  1. Press [Pause].

The print job will stop temporarily.

  • While printing is paused, [Pause] changes to [Resume]. If you press [Resume], the print job will continue.
  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Handling Jobs from the System Monitor Screen

To stop jobs temporarily from the System Monitor screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print].
  1. Press [Status].

  1. Select the job to be stopped → press [Details].

  1. Press [Pause].

The print job will stop temporarily.

  • While printing is paused, [Pause] changes to [Resume]. If you press [Resume], the print job will continue.
  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Form Feeding Print Data

If a job is canceled from the computer or received data does not fill one full page, the data remains in the machine's memory. In this case, the print job may not finish properly; the data can no longer be received and a following job cannot be processed. If this happens, force the data to be form fed.


Remark


Handling a Job from the Print Basic Features Screen

To force a job to be form fed from the Print Basic Features screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [→] → [Print Job].
  • You can set the Print Basic Features screen to be the initial screen, when the main power is turned ON or after an Auto Clear, with "Initial Function and Function Order Settings" in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Depending on the system configuration, the Print Basic Features screen or the function key is displayed in the front page of the touch panel display as the initial screen.
  1. Press either [My Job Status] or [Status].

  1. Select the job to be form fed → press [Details].

  1. Press [Form Feed].

  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Handling a Job from the System Monitor Screen

To force a job to be form fed from the System Monitor screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print].
  1. Press [Status].

  1. Select the job to be form fed → press [Details].

  1. Press [Form Feed].

  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Skipping an Error during Printing

If an error occurs during printing, you may be able to continue printing depending on the error by pressing [Auto Continue]. However, an error is only temporarily cleared. Data may also not be printed correctly. For information on types of errors that can be temporarily cleared with Auto Continue, see "When a Message Is Displayed."



Handling a Job from the Print Basic Features Screen

To bypass an error and continue printing from the Print Basic Features screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [→] → [Print Job].
  • You can set the Print Basic Features screen to be the initial screen, when the main power is turned ON or after an Auto Clear, with "Initial Function and Function Order Settings" in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Depending on the system configuration, the Print Basic Features screen or the function key is displayed in the front page of the touch panel display as the initial screen.
  1. Press either [My Job Status] or [Status].

  1. Select the job with an error to be skipped → press [Details].

  1. Press [Auto Continue].

  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Handling a Job from the System Monitor Screen

To bypass an error and continue printing from the System Monitor screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print].
  1. Press [Status].

  1. Select the job with an error to be skipped → press [Details].

  1. Press [Auto Continue].

  1. Press [Done].

The screen returns to the Basic Features screen.



Printing Secured Documents

You can print out documents (print data) that have been assigned a password and sent to this machine from a computer. Documents with a password are called "secured documents."
Secured documents sent to this machine are displayed with a locked document icon () in the job list in the touch panel display, and are queued for printing. To print these documents, you need to enter the correct password. This prevents unauthorized people who do not know the password from printing or accessing the documents.


Remark
  • Only a logged-in user can print secured documents (including encrypted secured documents) if a login service is being used.
  • Setting for assigning a password at the computer is made with the printer driver.
  • If the main power is turned OFF or [Reset Printer] is performed (See Reset Printer), any secured documents in the machine are erased.
  • Secured documents are erased after they are printed.
  • You cannot change the print settings of secured documents (set through the printer driver).
  • Secured documents will automatically be erased even if not printed. The Job Securing Time setting enables you to specify how long a job will be stored before it is erased. (See Job Securing Time.)
  • The number of secured documents that can be stored at one time (including encrypted secured documents) is 50. If the number of jobs exceeds the maximum storable number, those jobs will be ignored.
  • A large secured print job with many pages may be canceled by the machine. A canceled secured print job does not appear on the Print Job status screen. The machine can store up to 6,000 pages per secured print job; however, if the machine is being used for other jobs or operations, such as the storing of documents in inboxes, the actual number of pages per secured print job that the machine can process is fewer than 6,000.


Handling Jobs from the Print Basic Features Screen

To print secured documents from the Print Basic Features screen, follow the steps below.


  1. Press [→] → [Print Job].
  • You can set the Print Basic Features screen to be the initial screen, when the main power is turned ON or after an Auto Clear, with "Initial Function and Function Order Settings" in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Depending on the system configuration, the Print Basic Features screen or the function key is displayed in the front page of the touch panel display as the initial screen.
  1. Press either [My Job Status] or [Status].

  1. Select the secured document that you want to print → press [Secured Print].

To display only secured documents (including encrypted secured documents) in the [Status] list, select [Secured Print] at 'Select Type'.

  1. Enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Printing starts.
To cancel printing the secured document, press [Cancel] on the Secured Print screen.

  • You cannot simultaneously select secured documents and encrypted secured documents from the job list to clear their passwords.
  • Enter the same password that you originally assigned to the document at the computer. This will enable printing. If there is a current or reserved job, it will be queued for printing.
  • If multiple or all secured documents have the same password, you can select them and clear their passwords simultaneously.


Handling Jobs from the System Monitor Screen

To print secured documents from the System Monitor screen, follow the steps below.


Remark
  • If "Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off], you cannot print a secured print job from the System Monitor screen. (The default setting is [Off].)

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print].
  1. Press [Status].

  1. Select the secured document that you want to print → press [Secured Print].

  1. Enter the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Printing starts.
To cancel printing the secured document, press [Cancel] on the Secured Print screen.

  • You cannot simultaneously select secured documents and encrypted secured documents from the job list to clear their passwords.
  • Enter the same password that you originally assigned to the document at the computer. This will enable printing. If there is a current or reserved job, it will be queued for printing.
  1. Press [Done].

The display returns to the Basic Features screen.



Printing Encrypted Secured Documents

You can print out documents (print data) that have been encrypted and sent to this machine from a computer.

Print data that are encrypted using this machine are called "encrypted secured documents." Since the data is encrypted, security is enhanced at the queued stage. Encrypted secured documents sent to this machine are displayed with a locked document icon with a dotted pattern () in the job list in the touch panel display, and are queued for printing. To print these documents, you need to enter the correct password. This prevents unauthorized people who do not know the password or are not logged in from printing or accessing the documents.

Document data is encrypted before being sent to this machine. This allows you to print within a more highly secured environment compared to a secured document.


Remark
  • To use the Encrypted Secured Print function, the Encrypted Printing Software is required.
  • If "Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [Off], you cannot print an encrypted secured print job from the System Monitor screen. (The default setting is [Off].)
  • You can receive print jobs only for encrypted secured documents with this machine if "Only Allow Encrypted Secured Jobs" in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to [On]. A job will be canceled and an error message displayed if a print job other than an encrypted secured print job is received. (The default setting is [Off].)
  • Only a logged-in user can print encrypted secured documents (including secured documents) if a login service is being used.
  • If the main power is turned OFF or [Reset Printer] is performed (See Reset Printer), any encrypted secured documents in the machine are erased.
  • Encrypted secured documents are erased after they are printed.
  • You cannot change the print settings of encrypted secured documents (set through the printer driver).
  • Encrypted secured documents will automatically be erased even if not printed. The Job Securing Time setting enables you to specify how long a job will be stored before it is erased. (See Job Securing Time.)
  • The number of encrypted secured documents that can be stored at one time (including secured documents) is 50. If the number of jobs exceeds the maximum storable number, those jobs will be ignored.
  • A large encrypted secured print job with many pages may be canceled by the machine. A canceled encrypted secured print job does not appear on the Print Job status screen. The machine can store up to 6,000 pages per encrypted secured print job (including secured documents). However, if the machine is being used for other jobs or operations, such as the storing of documents in inboxes, the actual number of pages per encrypted secured print job that the machine can process is fewer than 6,000.


From the Print Job Screen

Encrypted secured documents can be printed from the Print Job screen.

When you press [Print Job], either the My Job Status or Job Status screen is displayed.

  • My Job Status Screen

If a login service is set for the machine, the My Job Status screen is displayed. Only jobs for the user currently logged in to the machine are displayed on the My Job Status screen.

  • Job Status Screen

Jobs for all users are displayed on the Job Status screen.

  • If you want to display only secured print jobs, select [Secured Print] from the Select Type drop-down list.
  • If a login service is set for the machine, secured print jobs and encrypted secured print jobs sent by other users are displayed as asterisks (*), and operations cannot be performed on them.
  • If you are logged on as the SSO-H administrator, jobs sent by all users are displayed, and you can view the details of or cancel the jobs. However, secured documents and encrypted secured documents can only be printed by the user that sent them.

  1. Press [Print Job].

  • This explanation uses the procedure for printing an encrypted secured document from the My Job Status screen as an example, but the procedure for printing an encrypted secured document from the Job Status screen is the same.
  1. Select the encrypted secured document that you want to print → press [Secured Print].

You can select multiple jobs. To select all of the jobs, press [Select All].
If a destination is already selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the job again.
  • To cancel all selections, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All].)
  • You cannot print a secured print job and encrypted secured print job at the same time.
  1. Press [Password].

  1. Enter the correct password → press [OK].

Enter the same password (alphanumeric characters) that you originally assigned to the document at the computer. Once the correct password is entered, the machine is ready to print the document.

  1. Press [OK].

If the password you enter is incorrect, the message <Authentication failed for the specified jobs.> is displayed. Confirm and enter the correct password.

If you select multiple jobs and the password you enter does not match all of the selected jobs, the message <Authentication process of XX/XX of the specified jobs was successful> is displayed, and only the jobs which the password matched are printed.

To cancel printing, press [Cancel].

Printing starts.

  • Enter the correct password for each encrypted secured document.
  • If there are jobs currently being printed or waiting to be printed, the encrypted secured documents will be printed after those jobs are completed.
  1. Press [Done].

The display returns to the Basic Features screen.



From the System Monitor Screen

Remark
  • Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen in System Monitor Screen Restriction in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', secured print jobs and encrypted secured print jobs are not displayed on the System Monitor screen, and therefore cannot be printed from the System Monitor screen. (See "Security.")
  • If a login service is set for the machine and Display Status Before Authentication in System Monitor Screen Restriction in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', operations such as printing cannot be performed from the System Monitor screen before logging on to the machine. (See "Security.")

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print].

  1. Press [Status].

  1. Select the encrypted secured document that you want to print → press [Secured Print].

  • If a login service is set for the machine, secured print jobs and encrypted secured print jobs sent by other users are displayed as asterisks (*), and operations cannot be performed on them.
  • If you are logged on as the SSO-H administrator, jobs sent by all users are displayed, and you can view the details of or cancel the jobs. However, secured documents and encrypted secured documents can only be printed by the user that sent them.
  1. Press [Password].

  1. Enter the correct password → press [OK].

Enter the same password that you originally assigned to the document at the computer. Once the correct password is entered, the machine is ready to print the document.

  1. Press [OK].

If the password you enter is incorrect, the message <The Password is incorrect.> is displayed. Confirm and enter the correct password.

To cancel printing, press [Cancel].

Printing starts.

  • Enter the correct password for each encrypted secured document.
  • If there are jobs currently being printed or waiting to be printed, the encrypted secured document will be printed after those jobs are completed.
  1. Press [Done].

The display returns to the Basic Features screen.



Overview of Printer Settings

The following table lists all settings of the Printer Settings menu.

  • Settings Menu
ItemSettings
Copies1 to 9999; 1*
2-Sided PrintingOn, Off*
Paper Feed
Default Paper Size Letter, Legal, A4*, A3, A5, 11x17, Executive, Statement, Envelope Monarch, Envelope COM10, Envelope DL, Envelope ISO-B5, Envelope ISO-C5
Default Paper Type Plain Paper*, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Tracing Paper, Labels, Bond Paper, Pre-punched, Envelope
Paper Size Override On, Off*
Print Quality
Image Refinement On*, Off

Density*1

1 to 9; 5*
Toner Save On, Off*
Line Refinement On*, Off
Horizontal Line Refinement Off, Level 1*, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Vertical Line Refinement Off, Level 1*, Level 2, Level 3, Level 4
Resolution 1200 dpi, 600 dpi*
Layout
Binding Location Long Edge*, Short Edge
Margin -50.0 to +50.0 mm; 0.0* mm
Offset Short Edge (Front) -50.0 to +50.0 mm; 0.0* mm
Offset Long Edge (Front) -50.0 to +50.0 mm; 0.0* mm
Offset Short Edge (Back) -50.0 to +50.0 mm; 0.0* mm
Offset Long Edge (Back) -50.0 to +50.0 mm; 0.0* mm
Auto ContinueOn, Off*
Job Securing Time1 hour*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, 24 hours
TimeoutTimeout (5 to 300 seconds), Off; 15* seconds
Print After Completing RIPOn, Off*
Finishing Off* Collate, Rotate+Collate, Rotate+Group, Offset+Collate, Offset+Group, Staple+Collate, Staple+Group

Copies to Offset (Offset+Collate): 1 to 9999; 1*

Staple Position (Staple+Collate):
Corner (Upper-L), Double (Top), Corner (Upper-R), Double (Right), Corner (Lower-R), Double (Bottom), Corner (Lower-L), Double (Left)

Staple Position (Staple+Group):
Grp Upp L-Corner, Grp Double(Top), Grp Upp R-Corner, Grp Double(R), Grp Lwr R-Corner, Grp Double(Btm), Grp Lwr L-Corner, Grp Double(L)
PunchOff*, Top, Bottom, Left, Right
BookletOn, Off*
Saddle Stitch*2On, Off*
Creep Correction*2Off*, Auto, Correction Width (0.00 to 10.00 mm)
Transparency Interleaving*3Off*, Blank, Printed
Copy Set Numbering*4
Copy Set Numbering On, Off*
Print Position 5 Locations*, Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right, Full Surface
Starting Number 1 to 9999; 1*
Number Size Small(12 point), Medium(24 point), Large(36 point)*
Density 1 to 5; 3*
Number Position Vertical -8 to +8 mm; 0* mm
Number Position Horizontal -8 to +8 mm; 0* mm
Personality*5Auto*, PS, PCL, Imaging, PDF
Mode Priority*5None*, PS, PCL, PDF
Initialize—

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*1 Indicates a menu that appears only when 'Toner Save' is set to [Off].
*2 Indicates menus that appear only when 'Booklet' is set to [On].
*3 Indicates a menu that appears only when 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [Off].
*4 Indicates a menu that appears only when 'Transparency Interleaving' is set to [Off].
*5 Settings are not applicable for the UFR II mode.

  • UFR II Settings
ItemSettings
Halftones

Text

Tone, Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution

Graphics

Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution

Image

Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution
Paper SaveOn*, Off

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.

  • PCL Settings (PCL or PS Printer only)
ItemSettings
Paper SaveOn, Off*
OrientationPortrait*, Landscape
Font Number0 to 91; 0*
Point Size*64.00 to 999.75 point; 12.00* point
Pitch*70.44 to 99.99 cpi; 10.00* cpi
Form Lines5 to 128 lines; 64* lines
Symbol SetDESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8*, PC850, PC852, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2, WINL5
Custom PaperOn, Off*
Unit of MeasureMillimeters*, Inches
X dimension148.0 to 630.0 mm; 431.8* mm
Y dimension99.0 to 297.0 mm; 297.0* mm
Append CR to LFYes, No*
Enlarge A4 Print WidthOn, Off*
Halftones
Text Tone, Gradation, Resolution*, High Resolution
Graphics Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution
Image Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*6 Indicates a menu that appears only if 'Font Number' is specified from '1' to '69'.
*7 Indicates a menu that appears only if 'Font Number' is specified from as '0' or as from '70' to '89'.

  • PS Settings (PS Printer only)
ItemSettings
Job Timeout0 to 3600 seconds; 0* seconds
Wait Timeout0 to 3600 seconds; 300* seconds
Print PS ErrorsOn, Off*
Halftones
Text Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution*
Graphics Gradation*, Resolution, High Resolution
Image Gradation*, Resolution, High Resolution

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.

  • Imaging Settings*8
ItemSettings
Image OrientationAuto*, Vertical, Horizontal
ZoomOff*, Auto
Print PositionAuto*, Center, Top Left
Show WarningsOn*, Off
Enlarge Print AreaOff*, On
HalftonesGradation*, Resolution, High Resolution

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.
*8 Settings are applicable only for the Imaging mode of Direct Print.

  • PDF Settings (PS Printer or PDF Direct Print Printer only)
ItemSettings
Enlarge/Reduce to Fit SizeOn, Off*
Enlarge Print AreaOn, Off*
N-up PrintOff*, 2 on 1, 4 on 1, 6 on 1, 8 on 1, 9 on 1, 16 on 1
Halftones
Text Gradation, Resolution, High Resolution*
Graphics Gradation*, Resolution, High Resolution
Image Gradation*, Resolution, High Resolution
Comment PrintAuto*, On, Off

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting.

  • Utility Menu
ItemSettings
Initialize PCL Hard Disk*9 —
Initialize PS Hard Disk*10—
Reset Printer—

*9 Settings are applicable only for the PCL mode.
*10 Settings are applicable only for the PS mode.


Settings Menu

An asterisk (*) indicates the default setting in this section.



Copies

1 to 9999; 1*


This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed. The default setting is '1', but you can specify up to 9999 copies.



2-Sided Printing

On, Off*


This parameter enables you to select one-sided or two-sided printing. When '2-Sided Printing' is specified, the document is printed on both sides of the paper.


Remark
  • Two-sided printing can use either the paper drawer or the stack bypass with the following sizes.
  • A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, JIS-B5R, A5R, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, and STMTR
  • Two-sided printing can use paper within the following range:
  • 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
  • When printing on letterhead paper, or paper with a logo (such as a cover sheet), please note the following:
  • If the paper is fed from a paper drawer, the printing surface should be face down.
  • If the paper is fed from the stack bypass or the optional paper deck, the printing surface should be face up.


Paper Feed


Default Paper Size

Letter, Legal, A4*, A3, A5, 11" x 17", Executive, Statement, Envelope Monarch, Envelope COM10, Envelope DL, Envelope ISO-B5, and Envelope ISO-C5


This parameter defines the default paper size used when the paper size cannot be set within the application software, when no paper source is specified.


Remark
  • If you are printing from an OS that does not have a printer driver for the machine (MS-DOS, UNIX, etc.), make sure that the paper loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper size specified in this setting. If the paper size specified in this setting is not available, an error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been selected through the application, the machine automatically selects the default print settings for the paper size and type. (See "Additional Functions.")


Default Paper Type

Plain Paper*, Transparency, Heavy Paper, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, Tracing Paper, Labels, Bond Paper, Pre-punched, and Envelope


This parameter sets the default paper type to be used for print jobs. This machine has internally defined optimal print modes for each specified paper type.


Remark
  • If you are printing from an OS that does not have a printer driver for the machine (MS-DOS, UNIX, etc.), make sure that the paper loaded in the paper drawer matches the paper type specified in this setting. If the paper type specified in this setting is not available, an error message is displayed when the machine tries to print the job, and the machine stops. In addition, if a paper source has not been selected through the application, the machine automatically selects the default print settings for the paper type and size. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • Use the following figures as a guideline to decide whether paper should be specified as Plain Paper or Heavy Paper.
  • Plain Paper: 64 g/m2 to 90 g/m2
  • Heavy Paper: 91 g/m2 to 128 g/m2
  • Canon transparency film is recommended for printing on transparencies.
  • Canon label paper is recommended for printing on labels.
  • Heavy Paper, Transparency, Tracing Paper, Labels, Bond Paper, and Envelope cannot be printed using two-sided printing.


Paper Size Override

On, Off*


If paper of the size that is set in the printer driver has not been loaded in the paper drawer, the paper that is printed is changed to the following sizes.


Printer Driver Setting Paper
A4 Letter
Letter A4
A3 11" x 17"
11" x 17" A3

If [On] is selected, the paper size is changed.

If [Off] is selected, the paper supply message is displayed and the paper size is not changed.


Remark
  • The paper size does not change if there is no paper in the paper source of the size that is set in the printer driver, even if 'Paper Size Override' is set to [On].


Print Quality


Image Refinement

On*, Off


This setting smoothes the jagged outlines of characters and graphics.

If [On] is selected, smoothing is performed before printing.

If [Off] is selected, jobs are printed without being smoothed.


Remark
  • The function is not available if 'Resolution' is set to [1200 dpi].
  • The results of image refinement may be different depending on the types of characters and graphics you want to print.


Density

1 to 9; 5*


This setting adjusts the print density.

Pressing [Dark] makes the print image darker, pressing [Light] makes the image lighter. This setting has 9 levels you can adjust, with level '5' (middle level) being the default setting.


Remark
  • This function is not available if 'Toner Save' is set to [On].


Toner Save

On, Off*


This setting enables you to set the Toner Save function. Toner Save uses less toner to print documents and may result in longer toner life.


Remark
  • The function is not available if 'Resolution' is set to [1200 dpi].
  • Depending on the data to be printed, 'Toner Save' may not be applied even if [On] is selected.
  • If [On] is selected for 'Toner Save', very light or finely detailed images may not be printed clearly.


Line Refinement

On*, Off


This setting enables clearer printing of fine lines and small characters, or when you want to print characters and lines thicker.


Remark
  • This setting remains in effect even when the printer job is sent to a box.


Horizontal Line Refinement

Off, Level 1*, Level 2, Level 3, and Level 4


This setting adjusts the thickness of horizontal lines to express fine lines and small characters more clearly. The higher the level number, the thicker the horizontal lines printed.


Remark
  • This setting is also available when 'Line Refinement' is set to [On] in the printer driver.
  • With this setting, horizontal lines are based on the direction in which the paper is fed.
  • Selecting [Level 2] or higher for this setting may result in abrupt changes in gradation with halftone images.


Vertical Line Refinement

Off, Level 1*, Level 2, Level 3, and Level 4


This setting adjusts the thickness of vertical lines to express fine lines and small characters more clearly. The higher the level number, the thicker the vertical lines printed.


Remark
  • This setting is also available when 'Line Refinement' is set to [On] in the printer driver.
  • With this setting, vertical lines are based on the direction in which the paper is fed.
  • Selecting [Level 2] or higher for this setting may result in abrupt changes in gradation with halftone images.


Resolution

1200 dpi, 600 dpi*


This setting specifies the resolution for printing.

Resolution is expressed in units of dpi (dots per inch), indicating the number of dots in one inch. The higher the value, the greater the resolution, allowing finer expression of detail.

If [1200 dpi] is selected, the outline of characters and diagrams can be finely printed. This is suited to printing data containing fine lines and small characters.

If [600 dpi] is selected, you can perform printing suited to general documents and tables.


Remark
  • This setting cannot be applied to jobs in PCL5e mode.
  • When printing on large scale paper, set 'Resolution' to [600 dpi]. If [1200 dpi] is selected, there will not be enough memory necessary to process printing and printing will not be possible.


Layout


Binding Location

Long Edge*, Short Edge


This parameter determines whether the binding position is along the long edge or the short edge of the paper. When binding for two-sided printing, the image orientation is automatically adjusted for correct layout.

When the binding position is on the long edge of the paper:

When the binding position is on the short edge of the paper:


Remark
  • You cannot create a binding margin with this setting alone. Use this setting in combination with the Margin setting to create a binding margin.
  • For two-sided printing, the orientation of the image on the back side of the page may be changed by this setting.


Margin

-50.0 to +50.0 mm (in increments of 0.5 mm); 0.0* mm


This setting enables you to set the page margin in millimeters. The settings can be set in increments of 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) from -50.0 mm (-1.90 inches) through +50.0 mm (+1.90 inches).

Use [] to increase the width of the inside margin.

Use [] to increase the width of the outside margin.

You can specify the edge along which the margin will be created in the 'Binding Location' setting (previous setting). To create a margin along one of the edges of the paper, use this setting in combination with the 'Binding Location' setting.


Remark
  • If this setting moves the image outside the printable area, part of the image may be cut off.
  • If this setting is used in combination with 'Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge', the values of the two settings are added together.
  • Pressing [] increases the setting value by 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) each time the key is pressed. Pressing [] decreases the value by 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) each time. Holding down either [] or [] continuously speeds up the value alteration.



Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge (Front)

-50.0 to +50.0 mm (in increments of 0.5 mm); 0.0* mm


This setting enables you to set the offset position in millimeters. The settings can be set in increments of 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) from -50.0 mm (-2.00 inches) through +50.0 mm (+2.00 inches).

The print position on the front page is adjusted in the vertical or horizontal direction to the value specified in the setting value.

To adjust the print position on the back page, set 'Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge (Back)' (the next setting).

You can increase or decrease the setting in increments of 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) to adjust the print position, as described below.

Offset Short Edge (Front): Increasing the setting value moves the image in the rightward X direction on the paper. Decreasing the setting value moves the image in the leftward X direction on the paper.

Offset Long Edge (Front): Increasing the setting value moves the image in the downward Y direction on the paper. Decreasing the setting value moves the image in the upward Y direction on the paper.


Remark
  • Please note that if the print position is adjusted to place print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area is not printed.
  • If this setting is used in combination with 'Margin', the values of the two settings are added together.
  • Pressing [] increases the setting value by 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) each time the key is pressed. Pressing [] decreases the value by 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) each time. Holding down either [] or [] continuously speeds up the value alteration.


Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge (Back)

-50.0 to +50.0 mm (in increments of 0.5 mm); 0.0* mm


This setting enables you to set the offset position in millimeters. The settings can be set in increments of 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) from -50.0 mm (-2.00 inches) through +50.0 mm (+2.00 inches).

The print position on the back page is adjusted in the vertical or horizontal direction to the value specified in the setting value.

To adjust the print position on the front page, set 'Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge (Front)' (the previous setting).

You can increase or decrease the setting in increments of 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) to adjust the print position, as described below.

Offset Short Edge (Back): Increasing the setting value moves the image in the rightward X direction on the paper. Decreasing the setting value moves the image in the leftward X direction on the paper.

Offset Long Edge (Back): Increasing the setting value moves the image in the downward Y direction on the paper. Decreasing the setting value moves the image in the upward Y direction on the paper.


Remark
  • Please note that if the print position is adjusted to place print data outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area is not printed.
  • If this setting is used in combination with 'Margin', the values of the two settings are added together.
  • Pressing [] increases the setting value by 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) each time the key is pressed. Pressing [] decreases the value by 0.5 mm (0.01 inches) each time. Holding down either [] or [] continuously speeds up the value alteration.


Auto Continue

On, Off*


This setting enables you to automatically clear an error and continue printing when an error occurs (Error skip).

If [On] is selected, error skips are performed automatically.

If [Off] is selected, you must perform error skips from the touch panel display.


Remark
  • To perform an error skip, press [Print Status] on the System Monitor screen → select the job containing the error → press [Details] → [Error Skip].
  • Error skip only temporarily clears an error, so the data may not print correctly.
  • This setting is valid even if multiple errors have occurred.


Job Securing Time

1 hour*, 2 hours, 3 hours, 6 hours, 12 hours, and 24 hours


When a secured print job is sent to the machine, it is stored on the machine's hard disk, and a password must be entered before the job can be printed. This setting specifies how long the job will be stored before it is automatically canceled.


Remark
  • Even if the time period specified with this setting has not elapsed, the print job data is deleted if the main power to the machine is switched OFF.
  • The password is set from the printer driver.


Timeout

Timeout (5 to 300 seconds), Off; 15* seconds


When the 'Personality' is set to [Auto], the machine detects the control commands and starts printing in the appropriate mode. After all the data has been received and the end of the data is detected, the print mode stops. This processing of print data is called a job.

If the data for a job does not end, the machine does not start the next job even if it receives other print commands. In cases like this, use the Timeout setting to force jobs to finish if no data is received during the set period of time.

If Timeout is enabled, jobs can finish automatically. For example, if print data still remains in the machine because a form feed command cannot be processed, the paper can be fed automatically.

If Timeout is [Off], jobs will not end automatically.


Remark
  • If this function is set so that a job will timeout, the machine may end a print job before all the data has been received if it takes a long time for the PC to send the data. If this occurs, adjust the length of the 'Timeout' setting.
  • If [Off] is selected, you will not be able to make copies until print jobs that use the Staple and Punch settings have been completed.
  • If you send data from a printer driver that is not compatible with the machine, and the end of job command is not received within the time set in this setting, the machine cancels the job, which may cause the data to be printed incorrectly.
  • When a job is being processed, the Processing/Data indicator on the control panel blinks green.


Print After Completing RIP

On, Off*


This setting sets whether to use the Print After Completing RIP function.

RIP (Raster Image Processor) is used for advanced graphical representation.

If Print After Completing RIP is enabled, the first page is printed after all the pages in the job have been processed.

Although it may take longer to print the first page, the remaining pages in the job will be printed more quickly. This is useful when several people are using the machine or when using another function, such as the Copy function, because the printing time for a print job is reduced.


Remark
  • Please note that the memory of the machine can store up to 8,000 pages. When you send a secured document to be stored in the memory to be printed at a later time, and the memory is full (already reached its maximum capacity), your document will not be stored. The memory may be full because the machine is being used for other functions (such as storing a document in an inbox or storing a form) or other jobs, which use memory space.


Finishing

Off*, Collate, Rotate+Collate, Rotate+Group, Offset+Collate, Offset+Group, Staple+Collate, and Staple+Group

Copies to Offset (Offset+Collate):
1 to 9999; 1*

Staple Position (Staple+Collate):
Corner (Upper-L), Double (Top), Corner (Upper-R), Double (Right), Corner (Lower-R), Double (Bottom), Corner (Lower-L), and Double (Left)

Staple Position (Staple+Group):
Grp Upp L-Corner, Grp Double(Top), Grp Upp R-Corner, Grp Double(R), Grp Lwr R-Corner, Grp Double(Btm), Grp Lwr L-Corner, and Grp Double(L)


Some of the above options require specific delivery trays and may not be available unless appropriate delivery trays are installed.

: Available
: Unavailable

No Options Inner 2 Way Tray-D1,
Copy Tray-J1
Finisher-S1 Finisher-AE1,
Saddle Finisher-AE2
Collate
Rotate+Collate
Rotate+Group
Offset+Collate
Offset+Group
Staple+Collate
Staple+Group

You can choose from several features when collating printed matter.

  • Off

This setting prints all copies of the same page before printing the next page.

  • Collate

This setting prints all pages of each copy before printing the next copy.

  • Rotate+Collate

This setting prints all pages of each copy (collating), and rotates every other complete copy 90 degrees to indicate where each copy starts.

  • Rotate+Group

This setting prints all copies of the same page before printing the next page. It rotates every other complete set of pages to indicate where each new set starts.

  • Offset+Collate

This setting prints all pages of each copy (collating). It offsets every other complete copy by the number specified with this setting to indicate where each copy starts.

  • Offset+Group

This setting prints all copies of the same page before printing the next page. It offsets every other complete set of pages to indicate where each new set starts.

  • Staple+Collate

This setting prints all pages of each copy (collating) and prepares them for stapling according to the option selected for [Staple+Collate].

  • Staple+Group

This setting prints all copies of the same page before printing the next page, and prepares them for stapling according to the option selected for [Staple+Group].

Examples of each Finishing option when printing three copies of a three page document:


Remark
  • Please note that the memory of the machine can store up to 8,000 pages. When you send a secured document to be stored in the memory to be printed at a later time, and the memory is full (already reached its maximum capacity), your document will not be stored. The memory may be full because the machine is being used for other functions (such as storing a document in an inbox or storing a form) or other jobs, which use memory space.
  • [Rotate+Collate] and [Rotate+Group] are available if the paper size is A4, A4R, JIS-B5, JIS-B5R, LTR, or LTRR.
  • If [Rotate+Collate] or [Rotate+Group] is selected, part of the print image may be cut off when the image is rotated. You need to load the same size paper as the original in the paper drawers in both landscape and portrait positions. If you do not, all the sheets will be printed in the orientation that the loaded paper is in.
  • [Offset+Collate] and [Offset+Group] are available if the following paper size is selected.
  • When the Finisher-S1 is attached:
    A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR
  • When the Finisher-AE1 or the Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached:
    A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, 11" × 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or EXEC
  • When you are stapling paper in landscape orientation, the image orientation and the staple position may not match.
  • When you select [Staple+Collate] or [Staple+Group], you can select the stapling position.


Remark
  • [Staple+Collate] and [Staple+Group] are available for selection if the paper size is A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, LTRR, or EXEC when the optional Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached, or if the paper size is A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, or LTRR when the optional Finisher-S1 is attached. Available staple locations depend on paper size and image orientation, as shown.

  • Finisher-AE1/Saddle Finisher-AE2
: Available
: Unavailable
Staple Position
Paper Size
Corner (Upper-Left) Double (Top) Corner (Upper-Right) Double (Right) Corner (Lower-Right) Double (Bottom) Corner (Lower-Left) Double (Left) Capacity (Sheets)
11" x 17" 30
LGL 30
LTR 50
LTRR * * 50
EXEC 50
A3 30
JIS-B4 30
A4 50
A4R * * 30
JIS-B5 50
* Will be stapled parallel to the edge of the paper.

  • Finisher-S1
: Available
: Unavailable
Staple Position
Paper Size
Corner
(Upper-Left)
Corner
(Upper-Right)
Corner
(Lower-Right)
Corner
(Lower-Left)
Capacity (Sheets)
11" x 17" 30
LGL 30
LTR 50
LTRR 50
A3 30
JIS-B4 30
A4 50
A4R 50
JIS-B5 50

Remark
  • For the Finisher-AE1 and Saddle Finisher-AE2, the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30 for A4R, A3, JIS-B4, LGL, and 11" x 17", 50 for A4, JIS-B5, LTR, LTRR, and EXEC. If the number of sheets is greater than the limit, they will not be stapled.
  • For the Finisher-S1, the maximum number of sheets that can be stapled is 30 for A3, JIS-B4, LGL and 11" x 17", 50 for A4, A4R, JIS-B5, LTR, LTRR, and EXEC. If the number of sheets is greater than the limit, they will not be stapled.
  • Make sure to select compatible settings when using Staple and Punch simultaneously. If conflicting settings are selected, such as the staple setting for the right side of the paper and the punch setting for the left, the printer will use neither Staple nor Punch.


Punch

Off*, Top, Bottom, Left, and Right


This setting enables you to specify the desired paper position for holes to be punched for binding.


Remark
  • This menu is only displayed for selection in combination with the following optional units.
  • If the Finisher-S1 is attached to the Puncher Unit-Q1.
  • If the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached to the Puncher Unit-L1.
  • Acceptable paper sizes for this option are A3, JIS-B4, A4, A4R, JIS-B5, JIS-B5R, 11" x 17", LGL, LTR, and LTRR.
  • Make sure to select compatible settings when using Staple and Punch simultaneously. If conflicting settings are selected, such as the staple setting for the right side of the paper and the punch setting for the left, the machine will use neither Staple nor Punch.
  • The machine automatically detects the size of the paper and punches two or three holes accordingly. (A3, A4, 11" x 17", and Letter papers are punched with three holes.)
  • Holes can only be punched in Plain Paper, Heavy Paper, Recycled Paper, Color Paper, and, Bond Paper.


Booklet

On, Off*


This setting enables you to prepare the printout for binding as a booklet. Booklet printing is a process whereby two pages of data are printed on the front and back of one page and it is folded in half to create a book.

If [On] is selected, the pages are bound on the left side.


Remark
  • Please note that the memory of the machine can store up to 8,000 pages. When you send a secured document to be stored in the memory to be printed at a later time, and the memory is full (already reached its maximum capacity), your document will not be stored. The memory may be full because the machine is being used for other functions (such as storing a document in an inbox or storing a form) or other jobs, which use memory space.
  • If the 'Finishing' settings are specified as [Rotate+Group], [Offset+Group], and [Staple+Group], then [Rotate+Collate], [Offset+Collate], and [Staple+Collate] are specified.
  • If the pages are not all the same size, this function will not work.
  • The 'Margin' or 'Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge' settings is invalid if this function is set to [On].
  • This function is available for selection if the image paper size is A4, A5, JIS-B5, Letter, or Statement. The data for these page sizes is printed on the following paper. (See the Help function on the printer driver.)

Page Size Paper
A4 A3
A5 A4R
JIS-B5 JIS-B4
Letter 11" x 17"
Statement Letter-R


Saddle Stitch

On, Off*


This setting enables you to bind a finished print job by stapling and folding the pages of a booklet in the center.


Remark
  • Please note that the memory of the machine can store up to 8,000 pages. When you send a secured document to be stored in the memory to be printed at a later time, and the memory is full (already reached its maximum capacity), your document will not be stored. The memory may be full because the machine is being used for other functions (such as storing a document in an inbox or storing a form) or other jobs, which use memory space.
  • This function can only be selected if the Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached to the machine.
  • This function is not available if 'Booklet' is set to [Off].
  • If the print job contains only one sheet of paper, the paper will be folded but not stapled.
  • The maximum number of sheets that can be saddle stitched is 15. If the number of sheets is greater than this, they will not be saddle stitched.
  • The number of copies of a saddle stitched booklet that can be made at one time is limited as shown below:

Number of sheets in
each booklet
Max. number of copies
that can be printed
1-15 15


Creep Correction

Off*, Auto, and Correction Width (0.00 to 10.00 mm (in increments of 0.05 mm); 0* mm)


This setting enables you to adjust the print position of each page when printing a booklet using saddle stitch.

When sheets of paper are folded in half to make a booklet, the edges of the paper protrude more the closer the pages are to the center of the booklet. Margin width at the edges is narrowed, and part of the printing may also be cut off (depending on the number of pages and paper thickness when the edges are trimmed to make them even). Using creep correction to adjust the margin of the gutter can correct such uneven printing (creep).

If [Auto] is selected, the gutter margins are automatically adjusted based on the number of pages and paper thickness.

If [Correction Width] is selected, the gutter widths are adjusted based on a value you enter which specifies the difference in how far the edge of the most inner page and the edge of the most outer page come when sheets of paper are folded in half to make the booklet.


Remark
  • This function is not available if 'Booklet' is set to [Off].
  • Pressing [ ] increase the setting value by 0.05 mm (0.001 inches) each time the key is pressed. Pressing [ ] decreases the setting value by 0.05 mm (0.001 inches) each time. Holding down either [ ] or [ ] continuously speeds up the value alteration.
  • If this setting is used in combination with the 'Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge' or 'Margin', the values of these three settings are added together.


Transparency Interleaving

Off*, Blank, and Printed


If you are printing on transparencies, you can use this setting to output a sheet of paper after each transparency. The paper can be blank, or it can be a paper copy of the transparency.

If [Off] is selected, no sheets are interleaved with the transparencies.

If [Blank] is selected, a blank sheet of paper is inserted between each transparency.

If [Printed] is selected, a printed paper from the print job is inserted between each transparency.


Remark
  • This function is not available if 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [On].
  • When printing multiple copies, the [Offset+Group] for the 'Finishing' option cannot be used.
  • If the 'Finishing' settings are specified as [Rotate+Group], [Offset+Group], and [Staple+Group], then [Rotate+Collate], [Offset+Collate], and [Staple+Collate] are specified.
  • If [Printed] is selected, the paper printouts are included in the Prints count. However, if [Blank] is selected, they are not included in the Prints count.


Copy Set Numbering


Copy Set Numbering

On, Off*


This setting enables you to print documents with a five digit serial number in the background on each copy.

Copy numbers are printed in the following methods:

When printing three copies of a five page document:


Remark
  • If this setting is used in combination with [Forced Secure Watermark Mode (print)] in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), this setting is invalid. For details on the Forced Secure Watermark Mode function, see "Security."
  • If the 'Finishing' settings are specified as [Rotate+Group], [Offset+Group], and [Staple+Group], then [Rotate+Collate], [Offset+Collate], and [Staple+Collate] are specified.
  • If the copy number has fewer than five digits, the machine prints it as follows:
  • Example: If the copy number is 10
    10→00010
  • Copy numbers are not printed on blank pages (pages with no data).
  • If this setting is used in combination with 'Margin' or 'Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge', part of the copy number may be cut off.
  • This function is not available if 'Transparency Interleaving' is enabled.
  • If the number of printed copies exceeds '99999', it returns to '00001'.


Print Position

5 Locations*, Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right, and Full Surface


This setting enables you to specify the position of the copy numbers to be printed. You can select to print numbers in all five positions, in each corner, or over the entire page.


Remark
  • This function is only available if 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [On].


Starting Number

1 to 9999; 1*


This setting enables you to specify the copy number to start numbering. The default is '1' (printed as 00001), but you can specify up to '9999' (printed as 09999).


Remark
  • This function is only available if 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [On].


Number Size

Small(12 point), Medium(24 point), and Large(36 point)*


This setting enables you to select the size of copy number from 'Small', 'Medium', and 'Large' ('12.0 pt.', '24.0 pt.', and '36.0 pt.').


Remark
  • This function is only available if 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [On].


Density

1 to 5; 3*


This setting enables you to adjust the number density and has 5 levels you can adjust, with level '3' (middle level) being the default setting. Selecting '1' makes the number lighter, and selecting '5' makes it darker.


Remark
  • This function is only available if 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [On].


Number Position Vertical/Number Position Horizontal

-8 to +8 mm (in increments of 1 mm); 0* mm


The position of the copy numbers specified with 'Print Position' can be finely adjusted by offsetting them in the horizontal or vertical directions. The adjustment can be made in increments of 1 mm (1/16 inches) from -8 mm (-5/16 inches) through +8 mm (+5/16 inches).

You can increase or decrease the setting value to adjust the print position of the copy numbers, as described below.

Number Position Vertical: Increasing the setting value moves the print position in the downward direction of the paper. Decreasing the setting value moves the print position in the upward direction of the paper.

Number Position Horizontal: Increasing the setting value moves the print position to the right. Decreasing the setting value moves the print position to the left.


Remark
  • Please note that if the print position is adjusted to place the digits of the copy numbers outside the printable area, the portion outside the printable area is not printed.
  • This function is only available if 'Copy Set Numbering' is set to [On].


Personality

Auto*, PS, PCL, Imaging, and PDF


This setting enables the machine to process data received from the host computer in the specified data format. Setting the 'Personality' to [Auto] makes the machine determine the type of data received from the host on a job-by-job basis. If you are printing from applications on a computer, we recommend that you use the [Auto] setting.


Remark
  • If you find that the machine does not correctly switch to the appropriate personality when 'Personality' is set to [Auto], change the setting manually to match the data you are sending from the host computer.
  • This function is not available when printing in the UFR II mode.


Mode Priority

None*, PS, PCL, and PDF


This setting determines which personality should be used if a job is received without a specified command language or Direct Print data. 'Mode Priority' is used when the 'Personality' is set to [Auto].

  • None

This does not specify a preferred personality. If a job is received without a specified command language or Direct Print data, the current personality is used. The default setting is [None].

  • PS

This assigns priority to the PS personality.

  • PCL

This assigns priority to the PCL personality.

  • PDF

This assigns priority to the PDF mode.


Remark
  • This function is not available when printing in the UFR II mode.


Initialize

—


The menu settings can be reset to the factory defaults by initializing the printer settings.

If you select Initialize, the confirmation message <Is it OK to initialize the settings?> is displayed. If you select [Yes], the settings are initialized. If you select [No], the settings are not initialized.


Remark
  • Do not turn OFF the machine while the settings are being initialized, as doing so may damage the machine's memory.


UFR II Settings

Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the UFR II mode.


Halftones

Text: Tone, Gradation, Resolution*, and High Resolution
Graphics: Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, and High Resolution
Image: Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, and High Resolution


This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.

Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.

For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most suitable texture.

If [Tone] is selected, you can print with sharp gradation and well-balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best for printing images.

If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.

If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.

If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.



Paper Save

On*, Off


This setting specifies whether to output a blank page when software does not send print data between End Page codes.

If [On] is selected, a blank page is not output, thus saving paper.

If [Off] is selected, a blank page is output.



PCL Settings

Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the PCL mode.


Paper Save

On, Off*


This setting specifies whether to output a blank page when software does not send print data between End Page codes.

If [On] is selected, a blank page is not output, thus saving paper.

If [Off] is selected, a blank page is output.



Orientation

Portrait*, Landscape


This setting enables you to set the paper orientation.

If [Portrait] is selected, the print image is printed in portrait orientation regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper drawers.

If [Landscape] is selected, the print image is printed in landscape orientation regardless of the orientation of the paper in the paper drawers.



Font Number

0 to 91; 0*


You can set the default font typeface for this printer function using the corresponding font numbers. Valid font numbers are from 0 to 91.



Point Size

4.00 to 999.75 point (in increments of 0.25 points); 12.00* point


If the number selected in 'Font Number' is that of a proportionally spaced scalable font, this option appears in the PCL menu. It enables you to specify a point size for the default font. The point size can be adjusted in increments of 0.25 points.


Remark
  • This function is available if a value from '1' to '69' is specified for the 'Font Number' option.


Pitch

0.44 to 99.99 cpi (in increments of 0.01 cpi); 10.00* cpi


If the number selected in 'Font Number' is that of a fixed pitch scalable font, 'Pitch' appears in the PCL menu. It enables you to specify the pitch for the default font. The pitch can be adjusted in increments of 0.01 cpi (characters per inch).


Remark
  • This function is available if a value of '0' or from '70' to '89' is specified for the 'Font Number' option.


Form Lines

5 to 128 lines; 64* lines


This setting enables you to specify the number of lines to be printed on a page. You can specify from 5 to 128 lines.



Symbol Set

DESKTOP, ISO4, ISO6, ISO11, ISO15, ISO17, ISO21, ISO60, ISO69, ISOL1, ISOL2, ISOL5, ISOL6, LEGAL, MATH8, MCTEXT, MSPUBL, PC775, PC8*, PC850, PC852, PC8DN, PC8TK, PC1004, PIFONT, PSMATH, PSTEXT, ROMAN8, VNINTL, VNMATH, VNUS, WIN30, WINBALT, WINL1, WINL2, and WINL5


This setting enables you to select the symbol set most suited to the needs of the host computer.



Custom Paper

On, Off*


This setting enables you to specify a custom paper size. If [On] is selected, you can enter a custom size.


Remark
  • You can only select the custom paper size entered with settings from the printer driver.


Unit of Measure

Millimeters*, Inches


This setting enables you to specify the unit of measurement you would like to use to specify your custom paper size.



X dimension

148.0 to 630.0 mm; 431.8* mm


This setting enables you to specify the X dimension of the custom paper. The X dimension can be adjusted from 148.0 mm (5.82 inches) through 630.0 mm (24.80 inches) in increments of 1.0 mm (0.01 inches).

This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off. Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing text to be correctly printed. Make sure you do not increase the X dimension beyond the actual size of the paper you are using for printing.



Y dimension

99.0 to 297.0 mm; 297.0* mm


This setting enables you to specify the Y dimension of the custom paper. The Y dimension can be adjusted from 99.0 mm (3.89 inches) through 297.0 mm (11.69 inches) in increments of 1.0 mm (0.01 inches).

This function can be very useful when part of the printed image is cut off. Increasing this dimension may allow some of the missing text to be correctly printed. Make sure you do not increase the Y dimension beyond the actual size of the paper you are using for printing.



Append CR to LF

Yes, No*


This setting enables you to specify whether to append a carriage return (CR) when line feed code (LF) is received.

If [Yes] is selected, the print head moves to the beginning of the next line when line feed code is received.

If [No] is selected, the print head moves down to the next line when line feed code is received, and the margin does not change (such as to the beginning of the next line).



Enlarge A4 Print Width

On, Off*


This setting determines whether to expand the printable area of A4 size paper to that of Letter size in width.

If [On] is selected, all the area on a page 4.23 mm (1/6 inches) from the top and bottom edges and 3.39 mm (1/8 inches) from the left and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper. Only the width increases.

If [Off] is selected, all the area on a page 4.23 mm (1/6 inches) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges is available for printing on A4 paper.


Settings On Off
A: Length 288.54 mm (11 1/3 inches)
B: Width 203.22 mm (8 inches) 201.54 mm (7 7/8 inches)
C: Left and right edges 3.39 mm (1/8 inches) 4.23 mm (1/6 inches)
D: Top and bottom edges 4.23 mm (1/6 inches)

Remark
  • This setting is applicable for A4 paper only.
  • This setting is applicable for portrait orientation only.


Halftones

Text: Tone, Gradation, Resolution*, and High Resolution
Graphics: Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, and High Resolution
Image: Tone*, Gradation, Resolution, and High Resolution


This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.

Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.

For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most suitable texture.

If [Tone] is selected, you can print with sharp gradation and well-balanced texture, contrasting light and shade, which is best for printing images.

If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.

If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.

If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.



PS Settings

Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the PS mode.


Job Timeout

0 to 3600 seconds; 0* seconds


This setting enables you to specify the amount of time before a job times out. If a job has not finished within the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.



Wait Timeout

0 to 3600 seconds; 300* seconds


This setting enables you to specify the amount of time the machine will wait for data sent from the host computer before it times out. If data is not received within the set time limit, the job automatically cancels.



Print PS Errors

On, Off*


This setting determines whether an error page is printed when an error is encountered.



Halftones

Text: Gradation, Resolution, and High Resolution*
Graphics: Gradation*, Resolution, and High Resolution
Image: Gradation*, Resolution, and High Resolution


This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.

Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.

For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most suitable texture.

If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.

If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.

If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.



Imaging Settings

Settings on this menu specify how to print TIFF (Tagged Image File Format) and JPEG (Joint Photographic Experts Group) images that are sent directly to the machine using the Remote UI or command prompt.


Remark
  • These settings are applicable only when printing in the Imaging mode of Direct Print.
  • The paper size used is determined by the paper size specified in the Settings Menu.


Image Orientation

Auto*, Vertical, and Horizontal


This setting specifies whether to print an image vertically or horizontally.

If [Auto] is selected, orientation is automatically adjusted by comparing length and width of the image. If the width is greater, the image is printed horizontally. If the length is greater, the image is printed vertically.

If [Vertical] is selected, the image is printed vertically regardless of its dimensions.

If [Horizontal] is selected, the image is printed horizontally regardless of its dimensions.



Zoom

Off*, Auto


This setting enlarges or reduces the size of an image to match the printable area of the paper size specified.

If [Auto] is selected, the size of the image is automatically enlarged or reduced to match the printable area of the specified paper size. If the size of the image is larger than the printable area, it is automatically reduced. If the size of the image is smaller than the printable area, it is automatically enlarged.


Remark
  • If there is blank space in the top, bottom, left, and right edges when using this setting, use the 'Print Position' setting in combination with this setting to adjust the print position.
  • This setting uses the same ratio for both the length and width to enlarge or reduce the size of the image.
  • Even if [Off] is selected, the image size is automatically reduced if it is larger than the printable area of the specified paper size.


Print Position

Auto*, Center, and Top Left


This setting specifies the print position for the image.

If [Auto] is selected, the image is printed in the specified position of the paper if the print position for the image is specified. If the print position is not specified, the image is printed in the center of the paper.

If [Center] is selected, the image is printed in the center of the paper regardless of whether the print position of the image is specified.

If [Top Left] is selected, the image is printed in the top left of the paper regardless of whether the print position of the image is specified.


Remark
  • As the JPEG file format does not contain print position information, JPEG images are printed in the center of the paper even if [Auto] is selected.


Show Warnings

On*, Off


This setting specifies the action to be taken if an error associated with printing an image occurs on the machine.

If [On] is selected, an error message is displayed.

If [Off] is selected, an error message is not displayed.


Remark
  • Depending on the error, an error message may be displayed even if [Off] is selected.


Enlarge Print Area

Off*, On


This setting specifies whether to enlarge the printable area on the paper.

If [On] is selected, the printable area is enlarged to the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.

If [Off] is selected, the area 5 mm (1/5 inches) from the top, bottom, left and right edges of the paper is not printable.


Remark
  • If [On] is selected, images on the edge of the paper may not print properly.


Halftones

Gradation*, Resolution, and High Resolution


This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.

Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.

For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most suitable texture.

If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.

If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.

If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.



PDF Settings

Settings on this menu specify how to print PDF files that are sent directly to the machine using the Remote UI or command prompt.


Remark
  • These settings are only applicable for the PS Printer or PDF Direct Print Printer.


Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Size

On, Off*


This setting enlarges or reduces the original document to match the printable area of the paper size.

If [On] is selected, the document is reduced to a page size that fits the paper size if the page size specified in the PDF file is larger than the printable area of the paper size. Conversely, the original document is enlarged to a page size that fills the paper size if the page size specified in the PDF file is smaller than the printable area of the paper size.


Remark
  • If you specify [Auto] in 'Paper Size' using the Remote UI, this setting is not applied.
  • The PDF file page size is enlarged or reduced with the same ratio for both the length and width.


Enlarge Print Area

On, Off*


This setting specifies whether to enlarge the printable area to the edge of the paper.

If [On] is selected, the printable area is enlarged to the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper.

If [Off] is selected, the area 4 mm (1/8 inches) from the top, bottom, left, and right edges of the paper is not printable.


Remark
  • If [On] is selected, images on the edge of the paper may not print properly.


N-up Print

Off*, 2 on 1, 4 on 1, 6 on 1, 8 on 1, 9 on 1, and 16 on 1


You can print several pages of PDF file data on 1 sheet of paper. Multiple pages are printed from (top) left to right.

Example: If 'Vertical' is specified in the PDF file Page Setup.



Halftones

Text: Gradation, Resolution, and High Resolution*
Graphics: Gradation*, Resolution, and High Resolution
Image: Gradation*, Resolution, and High Resolution


This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.

Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.

For example, using a pattern that sharpens character and line edges, or a pattern that smoothens image and graph gradation, enables you to obtain the most suitable texture.

If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.

If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.

If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.



Comment Print

Auto*, On, and Off


This setting specifies whether to print annotations in the PDF file.

If [On] is selected, all annotations are printed.

If [Off] is selected, no annotations are printed.

If [Auto] is selected, only the annotations specified for printing in the PDF file are printed.



Utility Menu

Remark
  • Hard disk initialization is available only for the PCL or PS modes.


Initialize PCL Hard Disk

—


If trouble occurs when fonts or macros are downloaded from a personal computer to this machine using the download utility, initialize the PCL hard disk partition.

For details, see "If Trouble Occurs When Downloading Fonts or Macros from a Personal Computer."


Remark
  • This function can only be selected if the System Management Mode is set.


Initialize PS Hard Disk

—


If trouble occurs when fonts or macros are downloaded from a personal computer to the machine using the download utility, initialize the PS hard disk partition.

For details, see "If Trouble Occurs When Downloading Fonts or Macros from a Personal Computer."


Remark
  • This function can only be selected if the System Management Mode is set.


Reset Printer

—


If you want to clear all print jobs in progress as well as data that has been received in memory, you must reset the printer function. Resetting the printer deletes print jobs in the machine's memory and the print data that has been received by all interfaces.


Remark
  • If the machine is being used in a network, please note that resetting the printer function may affect data being received from other users.
  • If you reset the printer function, data may be deleted for print jobs that have already been received, or received while the printer function is being reset. However, in some cases, the data is not deleted from the machine's memory, and the print job may not print correctly. Canon recommends that you reset the printer to delete the data and print the job again.
  • If you have downloaded fonts to the machine from a Macintosh computer, you need to restart the machine or reset the printer function from this menu, in order to enable the downloaded fonts when spool printing.


Overview of Report Settings

The following table lists all settings of the Report Settings menu.


Remark
  • This menu is only applicable for the PCL or PS Printer.

  • Printer Menu
Item Settings
PCL

Configuration Page
Font List

—
—
PS

Configuration Page
Font List

—
—


PCL Menu


Configuration Page

—


Details of RAM capacity, settings in the printer's menus, etc., are printed.

If you select Configuration Page, the confirmation message <Print the Configuration page?> is displayed. If you select [Yes], the configuration page is printed, and if you select [No], it is not printed.



Font List

—


ID numbers, names, and samples of fonts held by the printer are printed.

If you select Font List, the confirmation message <Print the Font list?> is displayed.

If you select [Yes], the font list is printed, and if you select [No], it is not printed.



PS Menu


Configuration Page

—


Details of RAM capacity, settings in the printer's menus, etc., are printed.

If you select Configuration Page, the confirmation message <Print the Configuration page?> is displayed. If you select [Yes], the configuration page is printed, and if you select [No], it is not printed.



Font List

—


Names and samples of fonts held by the printer are printed.

If you select Font List, the confirmation message <Print the Font list?> is displayed.

If you select [Yes], the font list is printed, and if you select [No], it is not printed.



Overview of Direct Printing

Direct Print is a print function that enables you to send a file without using a printer driver from the host terminal to the machine, which recognizes the file. Therefore, you do not need to open the file to print it.

You can print a PDF file by specifying the location on your computer or URL from the Remote UI.

You can also use the Direct Print function by entering a command (LPR command) in the command prompt.


Remark
  • To make the Direct Print function available, first register the license, then turn the main power of the machine OFF and then ON again, and finally initializing the printer's settings to their default values. For more information, see "Reset Printer."


System Requirements

The system requirements for the Remote UI are as follows:

  • Windows
  • OS (Operating System)
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, or later
  • Macintosh
  • OS (Operating System)
  • Mac OS 10.3, or later
  • Web Browser
  • Safari 1.3.2, or later

Remark
  • Apart from those mentioned above, no other software, such as a web server, is necessary. (There already is a web server inside the machine.)


Printing Directly from the Remote UI

You can print PDF files directly from the Remote UI, without having to open the files. For more information on the basic operations of the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." To print a PDF file directly from the Remote UI, follow the instructions below.


Remark
  • Even in cases where you cannot print a file or if the print output is out of alignment using the Direct Print function, you may still be able to open the file in an application and print it using the printer driver.


Printing PDF Files Directly

Follow the steps below for Direct Printing of a PDF file from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • This PDF File menu is only available for the PS Printer or PDF Direct Print Printer.

  1. Start your web browser → enter the appropriate URL into [Address] or [Location].

http://<the IP address of the device>/

  • If you do not know the appropriate URL, consult your system administrator.
  • When the printer's host name is registered on the DNS server, you can enter it in place of the IP address in [Host Name/Domain Name].
    Example : http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com
  1. Click [Direct Print] → select [PDF File] from the menu that appears under [Direct Print].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

  1. Specify the location of the PDF file that you want to print.

  • Click [Browse] → click [Open] after selecting the file.


  • Enter the URL of the PDF file you want to print.

* For URLs that need user certification, enter the [User] and [Password].

  • If you specify a PDF file by entering its URL, the next print job cannot be processed until the PDF file is downloaded or until the browser disconnects from the web server.
  • Only HTTP protocol is supported when you print a PDF file by entering its URL.
  1. Enter the password in [Document Password] to open PDF files that have a password (user password) specified.

  • If you want to print a PDF file that is not allowed to be printed or if you want to print a PDF file in high resolution that is only allowed to be printed in low resolution, enter the master password of the PDF file. If you try to print without entering the password, the error message <PDL PDF Data Decode Err> is displayed and printing is canceled.
  1. Specify the settings for [Specify Print Range].

Select [All] to print every page.

If you want to specify the pages to print by the page number, click [Pages] → enter the page numbers. Only the setting for the item whose radio button is selected will be effective.

  1. Specify the settings under [Quality Settings] according to your preference.

Details of each menu are shown below.


[Resolution] This setting specifies the resolution for printing.
Resolution is expressed in units of dpi (dots per inch), indicating the number of dots in one inch. The higher the value, the greater the resolution, allowing finer expression of detail.
  • If [600 dpi] is selected, you can perform printing suited to general documents and tables.
  • If [1200 dpi] is selected, characters and lines can be finely printed.
[Halftones] This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.
Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.
  • If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.
  • If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.
  • If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.
  1. Specify the settings under [Print Settings] according to your preference.

Details of each menu are shown below.


[Copies] This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed.
[Paper Size] This setting specifies the output paper size.
  • If [Auto] is selected, the most appropriate paper source is selected according to the PDF file page size.
  • If a setting other than [Auto] is selected, the file is printed so that the orientation of the long edge of the PDF file page size and the long edge of the selected paper matches.
If the PDF file page size exceeds the largest or smallest size of the user defined paper, jobs are canceled. (They are not included in the Prints count.)
[Paper Type] This setting specifies the output paper type.
[Manual Feed] This setting enables you to fix the paper feed source to manual feed.
[Enlarge/Reduce to Fit Paper Size] If you select the checkbox, the selected page size is enlarged or reduced with the same ratio for both the length and width to print within the printable area. However this function is not available if [Auto] is selected in [Paper Size].
[Enlarge Print Area] This setting specifies whether to enlarge the printable area to the edge of the paper.
[2-Sided Printing] This setting specifies whether to print on one-side or both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location] This setting specifies whether to place the binding position along the long edge or the short edge of the paper. If the margin is specified on the touch panel display, the binding margin position is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper.
For more information, see "Margin."
[Page Layout] You can print multiple pages of PDF data on one page.
* If you print multiple pages, select a setting other than [Auto] in 'Paper Size'.
[Page Order] If you print multiple pages on one page in the [Page Layout] settings, you can specify the order that the pages are arranged onto the source paper.
[Finishing]* This setting specifies whether to print in pages or copies.
  • If [Off] is selected, all copies of the same page are printed before the next page is printed.
  • If [Collate (Page order)] is selected, all pages of each copy are printed before the next copy is printed.
  • If [Group (Same pages)] is selected, all copies of the same page are printed before the next page is printed.
  • If [Staple+Collate] is selected, all pages of each copy (collating) are printed and stapled.
[Offset]*
  • If the checkbox and [Collate (Page order)] are selected in [Finishing], all pages of each copy (collating) are printed, and every other complete copy is offset to indicate where each copy starts.
  • If the checkbox and [Group (Same pages)] are selected in [Finishing], all copies of the same page are printed before printing the next page. Every other complete set of pages is offset to indicate where each new set starts.
[Rotate]*
  • If the checkbox and [Collate (Page order)] are selected in [Finishing], all pages of each copy (collating) are printed, and rotates every other complete copy 90 degrees to indicate where each copy starts.
  • If the checkbox and [Group (Same pages)] are selected in [Finishing], all copies of the same page are printed before printing the next page. It rotates every other complete set of pages 90 degrees to indicate where each new set starts.
[Punch]* This setting allows you to punch holes in the printed-paper.
Select the checkbox and one of either [Left], [Right], [Top], or [Bottom].
If you select both the staple and punch settings, specify the punch and staple settings so the positions match. If the positions do not match (for example, the staple position is on the right and the punch position is on the left), both settings are void and the paper is printed without either stapling or punching.
[Staple Position]* This setting specifies the staple position if [Staple+Collate] is selected in [Finishing].
  • If [Corner] is selected, you can select one of either [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], or [Bottom Right].
  • If [Double] is selected, you can select one of either [Left], [Right], [Top], or [Bottom].
[Booklet]* This setting enables you to prepare the printout for binding as a booklet. Booklet printing is a process whereby two pages of data are printed on the front and back of one page and it is folded in half to create a book.
[Comment Print] This setting specifies whether to print annotations.
  • If [Auto] is selected, only the annotations specified for printing in the PDF file are printed.
  • If [On] is selected, all annotations are printed.
  • If [Off] is selected, no annotations are printed.
[Store In User Inbox] To store the data in a user box, select [Store In User Inbox] and then select the destination user box.
[Document Name after Storing] To store the data in a user box, you can specify the document name.
The document name cannot exceed 24 characters.

* The settings and settings values displayed on the Remote UI differ depending on which options are attached.
  1. Click [Start Print].

Click [Restore Defaults] to return the settings to their default values.

Do not click [Start Print] continuously during file transfer. The file transfer process may take some time, but continuously clicking [Start Print] may cause the file to crash and not transfer.

After sending of a print job is completed, the screen changes and the following message appears.

Click [to Job List] to verify sent print jobs that have already been sent.



Printing PS/EPS Files Directly

Follow the steps below for Direct Printing of a PS/EPS file from the Remote UI.


  1. Start your web browser → enter the appropriate URL into [Address] or [Location].

http://<the IP address of the device>/

  • If you do not know the appropriate URL, consult your system administrator.
  • When the printer's host name is registered on the DNS server, you can enter it in place of the IP address in [Host Name/Domain Name].
    Example : http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com
  1. Click [Direct Print] → select [PS/EPS File] from the menu that appears under [Direct Print].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

  1. Specify the location of the PS/EPS file that you want to print.

Click [Browse] → click [Open] after selecting the file.

  1. Specify the settings under [Print Settings] according to your
    preference.

Details of each menu are shown below.


[Resolution] This setting specifies the resolution for printing.
Resolution is expressed in units of dpi (dots per inch), indicating the number of dots in one inch. The higher the value, the greater the resolution, allowing finer expression of detail.
  • If [600 dpi] is selected, you can perform printing suited to general documents and tables.
  • If [1200 dpi] is selected, characters and lines can be finely printed.
[Copies] This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed.
[2-Sided Printing] This setting specifies whether to print on one-side or both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location] This setting specifies whether to place the binding position along the long edge or the short edge of the paper. If the margin is specified on the touch panel display, the binding margin position is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper.
For more information, see "Margin."
[Finishing]* This setting specifies whether to print in pages or copies.
  • If [Off] is selected, all copies of the same page are printed before the next page is printed.
  • If [Collate (Page order)] is selected, all pages of each copy are printed before the next copy is printed.
  • If [Group (Same pages)] is selected, all copies of the same page are printed before the next page is printed.
  • If [Staple] is selected, all pages of each copy (collating) are printed and stapled.
[Offset]*
  • If the checkbox and [Collate (Page order)] are selected in [Finishing], all pages of each copy (collating) are printed, and every other complete copy is offset to indicate where each copy starts.
  • If the checkbox and [Group (Same pages)] are selected in [Finishing], all copies of the same page are printed before printing the next page. Every other complete set of pages is offset to indicate where each new set starts.
[Rotate]*
  • If the checkbox and [Collate (Page order)] are selected in [Finishing], all pages of each copy (collating) are printed, and rotates every other complete copy 90 degrees to indicate where each copy starts.
  • If the checkbox and [Group (Same pages)] are selected in [Finishing], all copies of the same page are printed before printing the next page. It rotates every other complete set of pages 90 degrees to indicate where each new set starts.
[Punch]* This setting allows you to punch holes in the printed-paper.
Select the checkbox and one of either [Left], [Right], [Top], or [Bottom].
If you select both the staple and punch settings, specify the punch and staple settings so the positions match. If the positions do not match (for example, the staple position is on the right and the punch position is on the left), both settings are void and the paper is printed without either stapling or punching.
[Staple Position]* This setting specifies the staple position if [Staple] is selected in [Finishing].
  • If [Corner] is selected, you can select one of either [Top Left], [Top Right], [Bottom Left], or [Bottom Right].
  • If [Double] is selected, you can select one of either [Left], [Right], [Top], or [Bottom].
[Store In User Inbox] To store the data in a user box, select [Store In User Inbox] and then select the destination user box.
[Document Name after Storing] To store the data in a user box, you can specify the document name.
The document name cannot exceed 24 characters.

* The settings and settings values displayed on the Remote UI differ depending on which options are attached.
  1. Click [Start Print].

Click [Restore Defaults] to return the settings to their default values.

Do not click [Start Print] continuously during file transfer. The file transfer process may take some time, but continuously clicking [Start Print] may cause the file to crash and not transfer.

After sending of a print job is completed, the screen changes and the following message appears.

Click [to Job List] to verify sent print jobs that have already been sent.



Printing Image Files Directly

Follow the steps below for Direct Printing of a TIFF/JPEG image file from the Remote UI.

Direct printing of image files for JPEG images supports specifications for ITU-T Recommendation T.81.

TIFF images support specifications for Adobe TIFF Revision 6.0.


Remark
  • Images files in the JPEG 2000 format cannot be printed.
  • This machine supports the following encoding methods for JPEG images.
  • Supported encoding
    Baseline DCT encoding
  • Non-supported encoding
    Extended encoding
    Lossless encoding
    Hierarchical encoding
  • This machine supports the following encoding methods for TIFF images.
  • Supported encoding
    Uncompressed
    ITU-T Recommendation T.4 one-dimensional encoding
    ITU-T Recommendation T.4 two-dimensional encoding
    ITU-T Recommendation T.6 basic facsimile encoding
    ITU-T Recommendation T.81 JPEG (Basic DCT methods only)
    PackBits (Apple Macintosh PackBits methods)
  • Non-supported encoding
    LZW
    ITU-T Recommendation T.82 JBIG (Bi-level black-and-white)
    ITU-T Recommendation T.43 JBIG (Color)
    ITU-T Recommendation T.44 MRC

  1. Start your web browser → enter the appropriate URL into [Address] or [Location].

http://<the IP address of the device>/

  • If you do not know the appropriate URL, consult your system administrator.
  • When the printer's host name is registered on the DNS server, you can enter it in place of the IP address in [Host Name/Domain Name].
    Example : http://my_printer.xy_dept.company.com
  1. Click [Direct Print] → select [Image File] from the menu that appears under [Direct Print].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

  1. Specify the location of the Image file that you want to print.

Click [Browse] → click [Open] after selecting the file.

  1. Specify the settings for [Specify Print Range].

Select [All] to print every page.
If you want to specify the pages to print by the page number, click [Pages] → enter the page numbers. Only the setting for the item whose radio button is selected will be effective.

  1. Specify the settings under [Print Settings] according to your preference.

Details of each menu are shown below.


[Resolution] This setting specifies the resolution for printing.
Resolution is expressed in units of dpi (dots per inch), indicating the number of dots in one inch. The higher the value, the greater the resolution, allowing finer expression of detail.
  • If [1200 dpi] is selected, the outline of characters and diagrams can be finely printed. This is suited to printing data containing fine lines and small characters.
  • If [600 dpi] is selected, you can perform printing suited to general documents and tables.
[Copies] This setting enables you to specify the number of copies printed.
[Paper Size] This setting specifies the output paper size.
  • If [Auto] is selected, the most appropriate paper source is selected according to the PDF file page size.
  • If a setting other than [Auto] is selected, the file is printed so that the orientation of the long edge of the PDF file page size and the long edge of the selected paper matches.
If the PDF file page size exceeds the largest or smallest size of the user defined paper, jobs are canceled. (They are not included in the Prints count.)
[Paper Type] This setting specifies the output paper type.
[Image Orientation] This setting specifies whether to print an image vertically or horizontally.
  • If [Auto] is selected, orientation is automatically adjusted by comparing length and width of the image. If the width is greater, the image is printed horizontally. If the length is greater, the image is printed vertically.
  • If [Vertical] is selected, the image is printed vertically regardless of its dimensions.
  • If [Horizontal] is selected, the image is printed horizontally regardless of its dimensions.
[Print Position] This setting specifies the print position for the image.
  • If [Auto] is selected, the image is printed in the specified position of the paper if the print position for the image is specified. If the print position is not specified, the image is printed in the center of the paper.
  • If [Center] is selected, the image is printed in the center of the paper regardless of whether the print position of the image is specified.
  • If [Top Left] is selected, the image is printed in the top left of the paper regardless of whether the print position of the image is specified.
[Zoom] This setting enlarges or reduces the size of an image to match the printable area of the paper size specified.
If [Auto] is selected, the size of the image is automatically enlarged or reduced to match the printable area of the specified paper size. If the size of the image is larger than the printable area, it is automatically reduced. If the size of the image is smaller than the printable area, it is automatically enlarged.
[Enlarge Print Area] This setting specifies whether to enlarge the printable area to the edge of the paper.
[2-Sided Printing] This setting specifies whether to print on one-side or both sides of the paper.
[Binding Location] This setting specifies whether to place the binding position along the long edge or the short edge of the paper. If the margin is specified on the touch panel display, the binding margin position is automatically adjusted on the front and back sides of the paper.
For more information, see "Margin."
[Show Warnings] This setting specifies the action to be taken if an error associated with printing an image occurs on the machine.
  • If [On] is selected, an error message is displayed.
  • If [Off] is selected, an error message is not displayed.
[Halftones] This setting specifies how to express halftones in black and white data.
Print data is expressed in dots. Fine gradations, edges, and shades are expressed by using dither patterns, which are groups of dots. This is called halftone processing.
  • If [Gradation] is selected, you can print with both smooth gradation and outlines, which is best to print graphs and graphics that use gradation.
  • If [Resolution] is selected, you can print text with distinct outlines, which is best to print text and thin lines.
  • If [High Resolution] is selected, finer printing can be done than with [Resolution], although toner stability is somewhat weaker. This is suited to printing small characters and fine lines, and outlines (such as from CAD data) sharply.
  1. Click [Start Print].

Click [Restore Defaults] to return the settings to their default values.

Do not click [Start Print] continuously during file transfer. The file transfer process may take some time, but continuously clicking [Start Print] may cause the file to crash and not transfer.

After sending of a print job is completed, the screen changes and the following message appears.

Click [to Job List] to verify sent print jobs that have already been sent.



Printing Directly Using the Command Prompt

You can print directly by entering the LPR command in the command prompt.

For commands, settings specified by the command prompt or touch panel display are available.

  • Specifies from the command prompt

You can specify LPR command settings with the P option, where each item is separated with an underscore ( _ ). The following commands are supported with this machine.


Item Command
Paper Size A3, A4, A5, B4, B5, LETTER, LEGAL, LEDGER (11" x 17")
Layout SIMP (One-sided), DUPL (Two-sided/Long Edge), DUPS (Two-sided/Short Edge)
Copies C<Number of copies>.

Command example (with Paper Size as "A4," Layout as "DUPL," and Copies as "20"):

Input Example : lpr -S <IP Address> -P A4_DUPL_C20 <file name>


Remark
  • If settings have not been specified from the command prompt, settings in the touch panel display will be enabled.

  • Specifies from the touch panel display

The two settings that are available with the Direct Print function are 'Settings Menu' and 'PDF Settings Menu'.

For more information, see "Settings Menu," and "PDF Settings."



Responding to Error Messages

When the Error indicator is orange, printing is not possible. If this happens during printing, the print operation stops. Read the displayed error message to determine the appropriate actions necessary to correct the problem.

This section describes how to handle error messages that appear on the touch panel display. The two types of error messages are:

  • Service Call Messages
  • Error Messages

Remark
  • Other messages that may appear indicate the current condition of the machine.


Resetting the Machine after a Service Call Message

If a Service Call message occurs (Exxx-xxxx, where x represents a number), use the following procedure to clear the message.


  1. Press (Additional Functions).

  1. Press [Printer Settings].

When a Service Call error occurs, the normal Printer Settings screen does not appear and only the Reset Printer screen appears.

  1. Press [Reset Printer].
  • If the Service Call error message still appears after you have performed this procedure, make a note of the number of the message and contact your local authorized Canon dealer with the number of the message and the conditions when the error occurred.


When a Message Is Displayed

If the machine is unable to print for some reason, the Error indicator lights up and a message indicating the cause of the problem is displayed on the touch panel display. When these messages are displayed, take the appropriate action to solve the problem.


Remark
  • If a message indicating another problem occurs at the same time as the first error message, a warning message will not be displayed.
  • If the message is shown with the "Error Skip" mark, you can bypass the error and continue printing by pressing [Error skip]. However, if you do this, print data may be lost or the data may not be printed correctly. If you want to cancel the procedure, cancel the print job to remove the cause of the problem, and print the data again.
  • For instructions on canceling a print job from the touch panel display, see "Canceling Print Jobs."

E730-1001 PDL Initialize Error
Service Call

E730-100A PDL Service Call
Service Call

E730-100B PDL Font Error
Service Call

PDL Font Memory Full
Error Skip

PDL HD Error
Error Skip

PDL Image Memory Full
Error Skip

PDL IMG Initial. Err

PDL IMG Invalid Data
Error Skip

PDL IMG Process. Error

PDL IMG Work Memory Full
Error Skip

PDL L. PAPER+1200dpi Err

PDL Macro Memory Full
Error Skip

PDL Memory Full
Error Skip

PDL Pattern Memory Full
Error Skip

PDL PDF Access Error

PDL PDF Analy. Acc. Err

PDL PDF Color Analy. Err

PDL PDF Comp. Analy. Err
Error Skip

PDL PDF Data Decode Err

PDL PDF Data Error
Error Skip

PDL PDF Data Process Err

PDL PDF Data Scan Error

PDL PDF Error

PDL PDF Font Error

PDL PDF HDD Access Error

PDL PDF Initialize Error

PDL PDF Memory Full

PDL PDF Output Sel. Err

PDL PDF Page Comp. Error

PDL PDF Print Range Err

PDL PDF Profile Error

PDL PDF Rendering Error

PDL PDF Temp. File Error

PDL PDF Transparency Err
Error Skip

PDL UFR II DL Mem. Full
Error Skip

PDL UFR II Invalid Data

PDL UFR II Layout Error
Error Skip

PDL UFR II Version Err
Error Skip

PDL UFR II Work Mem Full
Error Skip

PDL Warning

E730-1001 PDL Initialize Error

Service Call

Cause

An error occurred during the initialization of the printer function.

Remedy

Perform a printer reset to try to initialize the function again. (See "Reset Printer.") If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

E730-100A PDL Service Call

Service Call

Cause

An internal error has occurred.

Remedy

Perform a printer reset to try to initialize the function again. (See "Reset Printer.") If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

E730-100B PDL Font Error

Service Call

Cause

A master font error has occurred.

Remedy

Perform a printer reset to try to initialize the function again. (See "Reset Printer.") If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL Font Memory Full

Error Skip

Cause

The machine's memory space allocated for fonts is full and printing cannot proceed.

Remedy

Change the font setting in the printer driver and try printing again. Alternatively reduce the complexity of the print job by reducing the number of fonts that need to be downloaded to the machine.

PDL HD Error

Error Skip

Cause

The machine has reported a hard disk error.

Remedy

Perform a reset and try printing again. (See "Reset Printer.") If the problem persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL Image Memory Full

Error Skip

Cause

The machine's memory space allocated for images is full and printing cannot proceed.

Remedy

Change the image setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
Alternatively reduce the complexity of the print job by reducing the number of images that need to be downloaded to the machine.

PDL IMG Initial. Err

Cause

An error occurred during the initialization of the function.

Remedy

Cancel the job and then perform a printer reset to initialize the function again.(See "Reset Printer.") If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL IMG Invalid Data

Error Skip

Cause

There is data in the TIFF or JPEG images that cannot be processed by the machine.

Remedy

Cancel the job and try printing the data again.

PDL IMG Process. Error

Cause

An error occurred while processing data.

Remedy

Cancel the job and then perform a printer reset to initialize the function again.(See "Reset Printer.") If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL IMG Work Memory Full

Error Skip

Cause

There is not enough memory necessary to process TIFF or JPEG images.

Remedy

Cancel the job and try printing the data again.

PDL L. PAPER+1200dpi Err

Cause

There is not enough memory necessary to process printing because 'Resolution' is set to [1200 dpi] when printing on large scale paper.

Remedy

Set 'Resolution' in the printer driver to [600 dpi] and print again.


Remark
  • You can also perform the same procedure from the touch panel display. (See "Resolution.")

PDL Macro Memory Full

Error Skip

Cause

The machine's memory space allocated for macros is full and printing cannot proceed.

Remedy

Change the macro setting in the printer driver and try printing again.
Alternatively reduce the complexity of the print job by reducing the number of macros that need to be downloaded to the machine.

PDL Memory Full

Error Skip

Cause

The machine's memory is full and printing cannot proceed.

Remedy

Change the mode setting in the printer driver and try printing again, or reduce the complexity of the print job by reducing the number of fonts, macros, images, or patterns that need to be downloaded to the machine.

PDL Pattern Memory Full

Error Skip

Cause

The machine's memory space allocated for patterns is full and printing cannot proceed.

Remedy

Change the pattern setting in the printer driver and try printing again. Alternatively reduce the complexity of the print job by reducing the number of patterns that need to be downloaded to the machine.

PDL PDF Access Error

Cause

An error occurred when PDF data was being loaded.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Analy. Acc. Err

Cause

An error occurred when PDF data was being loaded.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Color Analy. Err

Cause

A color space definition that cannot be rendered by the machine was sent.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Comp. Analy. Err

Error Skip

Cause

There was compressed data in the PDF page that cannot be processed by the machine.

Remedy 1

Try printing again with PDF data that is compatible with the machine.

Remedy 2

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.


Remark
  • If 'Auto Continue' is set to [On], this error is skipped automatically. (See "Auto Continue.")

PDL PDF Data Decode Err

Cause 1

The password you entered to print the PDF file is incorrect.

Remedy 1

Enter the correct password from the Remote UI and print the data again.

Cause 2

The Security settings in the PDF file do not allow printing.

Remedy 2

Change the setting to allow printing.


Remark
  • If you enter an incorrect password for a PDF data with restrictions on low resolution printing, this error will not be displayed. Instead, the printed PDF will be of low quality.

PDL PDF Data Error

Error Skip

Cause

Damaged PDF data or PDF data that cannot be processed by the machine was sent.

Remedy 1

Try printing again with PDF data that is compatible with the machine.

Remedy 2

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.


Remark
  • If 'Auto Continue' is set to [On], this error is skipped automatically. (See "Auto Continue.")

PDL PDF Data Process Err

Cause

PDF data that cannot be processed by the machine was sent.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Data Scan Error

Cause

An error occurred when PDF data was being loaded.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Error

Cause

PDF data that cannot be processed by the machine was sent.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Font Error

Cause

There is font in the PDF data that cannot be processed.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF HDD Access Error

Cause

An error occurred while the PDF data was being loaded from the hard disk.

Remedy

Turn off the machine's power, and turn it on again. Reset the printer and print again. (Note that print data in memory such as secured print jobs and any jobs being processed will be deleted.)
If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Initialize Error

Cause

An error occurred while the PDF processor was initializing.

Remedy

Turn off the machine's power, and turn it on again. Reset the printer and print again. (Note that print data in memory such as secured print jobs and any jobs being processed will be deleted.)
If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Memory Full

Cause

The machine's memory space allocated for PDF is full and printing cannot proceed.

Remedy 1

After canceling the print job, optimize the PDF in Adobe Acrobat and reduce the size of the data you are going to print at one time, such as by resetting the resolution to an appropriate level, and try printing again. (See the Adobe Acrobat Help.)

Remedy 2

After canceling the print job, reduce the number of pages to print at one time by dividing the PDF data you are going to print in Adobe Acrobat into several files, before trying to print again. (See the Adobe Acrobat Help.)

Remedy 3

After canceling the print job, open the data in the application software and print again via the printer driver. (See the Adobe Acrobat Help.)

PDL PDF Output Sel. Err

Cause

An error occurred in the PDF data output mode.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Page Comp. Error

Cause

There was compressed page in the PDF data that cannot be processed by the machine.

Remedy 1

After canceling the print job, try printing again with PDF data that is compatible with the machine.

Remedy 2

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Print Range Err

Cause

The range of the specified print pages is incorrect.

Remedy

After canceling the print job, check the number of pages in the PDF data, then specify the correct printing range and try printing again.


Remark
  • This error will not be displayed if there are printable pages within the printing range you specified. For example, if a PDF data has five pages in it, and you specify a printing range from page 2 to 10, then page 2 to 5 will be printed without an error being displayed.

PDL PDF Profile Error

Cause

An error occurred while the ICC profile was being processed.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Rendering Error

Cause

An error occurred while PDF data was being rendered.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Temp. File Error

Cause

An error occurred while a PDF temporary file was being processed.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

PDL PDF Transparency Err

Error Skip

Cause

There were transparent objects in the PDF data that cannot be processed by the machine.

Remedy 1

After canceling the print job, optimize the PDF or flatten the transparent object and convert it into a format that the machine can process and print again. (See the Adobe Acrobat Help.)

Remedy 2

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.


Remark
  • If 'Auto Continue' is set to [On], this error is skipped automatically. (See "Auto Continue.")

PDL UFR II DL Mem. Full

Error Skip

Cause

There is not enough memory to register the character set.

Remedy 1

Set the Graphics Mode in the UFR II printer driver to 'Raster Mode' and print the data again. (See the Help function on the UFR II printer driver.)

Remedy 2

After canceling the print job, reset the printer to increase the amount of available memory and print again. (Note that print data in memory such as secured print jobs and any jobs being processed will be deleted.) (See "Reset Printer.")

Remedy 3

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.


Remark
  • If 'Auto Continue' is set to [On], this error is skipped automatically. (See "Auto Continue.")

PDL UFR II Invalid Data

Cause

An error occurred while processing data in UFR II custom mode.

Remedy

After canceling the print job, try printing again with a printer driver version that is compatible with the machine.

PDL UFR II Layout Error

Error Skip

Cause

The page layout cannot be processed due to lack of memory.

Remedy 1

Set the Graphics Mode in the UFR II printer driver to 'Raster Mode' and print the data again. (See the Help function on the UFR II printer driver.)

Remedy 2

After canceling the print job, reset the printer to increase the amount of available memory and print again. (Note that print data in memory such as secured print jobs and any jobs being processed will be deleted.) (See "Reset Printer.")

Remedy 3

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.


Remark
  • If 'Auto Continue' is set to [On], this error is skipped automatically. (See "Auto Continue.")

PDL UFR II Version Err

Error Skip

Cause

The machine received data from an incompatible UFR II version.

Remedy 1

Install a UFR II printer driver for use with the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 and print the data again.

Remedy 2

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.

PDL UFR II Work Mem Full

Error Skip

Cause

The work memory for the UFR II mode is full.

Remedy 1

Set the Graphics Mode in the UFR II printer driver to 'Raster Mode' and print the data again. (See the Help function on the UFR II printer driver.)

Remedy 2

After canceling the print job, reset the printer to increase the amount of available memory and print again. (Note that print data in memory such as secured print jobs and any jobs being processed will be deleted.) (See "Reset Printer.")

Remedy 3

Perform [Error Skip] and continue printing. However, the data will not be printed correctly.


Remark
  • If 'Auto Continue' is set to [On], this error is skipped automatically. (See "Auto Continue.")

PDL Warning

Cause

An internal error has occurred for the printer function.

Remedy

Perform a printer reset to try to initialize the function again. If this error persists, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Printing Problems

If you have trouble printing, we recommend resolving the problems with the following remedies.


Remark
  • Please contact your local authorized Canon dealer if a problem persists, or if you encounter problems not listed below.


Printer Trouble

The printer's function does not work.

Printing stops before the job is complete.

You cannot print a job or store a job.

You cannot store a secured print job.

The printer's function does not work.

Cause 1

There is data remaining in the printer's memory. (The Processing/Data indicator is blinking or lit.)

Remedy

Print out the data.

Cause 2

There is a problem with the printer or the software.

Remedy

Look at the message on the display and act accordingly. (See "When a Message Is Displayed.")

Printing stops before the job is complete.

Cause

There is data remaining in the printer's memory. (The Processing/Data indicator is blinking or lit.)

Remedy

Print out the data.

You cannot print a job or store a job.

Cause

The total number of pages in all jobs (maximum capacity is 8,000 pages) or size of the data in the hard disk has exceeded the limit which can be processed.

Remedy 1

Delete other processes, documents, or forms stored in the box, cancel other jobs being processed, or wait until those jobs are finished, then print again.

Remedy 2

Divide the job, then print again.

You cannot store a secured print job.

Cause

The number of secured jobs stored in the machine has exceeded the maximum capacity of 50 jobs, or the total number of pages that are stored or are in jobs has exceeded the limit (8,000 pages).

Remedy

Delete other secured jobs, or wait until those jobs have finished printing, then print again.



Printing Problems

Meaningless characters are being printed.

A font that is different from the one specified is printed.

You cannot print the last page.

A print job that you have specified as two-sided printing is printed on one side of the paper.

The data does not fit on the page properly.

The printing location has slipped.

Data that should be printed on the same page is printed on two separate pages.

Meaningless characters are being printed.

Cause 1

You have printed from Windows without installing the printer driver for Windows that was included with the machine.

Remedy

Install the printer driver for Windows that was included with the machine and print the data again. (See Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started.)

Cause 2

MS-DOS application software printer settings are incompatible.

Remedy

Reset the MS-DOS application software printer settings on a printer that is compatible with the machine. (See the application software manual.)

A font that is different from the one specified is printed.

Cause

The 'Send According to Font Substitution Table' setting has been set on the printer driver for Windows.

Remedy

Set the 'Send According to Font Substitution Table' setting to the correct setting and print the data again. (See the Help function on the printer driver.)

You cannot print the last page.

Cause

The command that identifies the end of the data has not been sent from the PC.
(The Processing/Data indicator is blinking or lit.)

Remedy

Clear the print data. (If you print from application software that does not have a print function and the last page of data is not a full page, the data will remain in the machine's memory.)

A print job that you have specified as two-sided printing is printed on one side of the paper.

Cause 1

The paper size you have specified is not supported by two-sided printing.

Remedy

Change the print job settings and print the data again.

Cause 2

The settings for the front and back sides of the paper are different.

Remedy

Change the print job settings and print the data again.

The data does not fit on the page properly.

Cause 1

The paper is not in the correct position.

Remedy

Make sure the machine is set correctly and try printing again. (See "Maintenance.")

Cause 2

The data is outside the printable area.

Remedy 1

Insert margins around the data and print the data again. (See the Help function on the printer driver or the application software manual.)

Remedy 2

Change the 'Scaling' settings on the printer driver and print the data again. (See the Help function on the printer driver.)

The printing location has slipped.

Cause 1

Margin, Offset Short Edge, or Offset Long Edge in the printer settings menu have been changed.

Remedy

Set Margin, Offset Short Edge, and Offset Long Edge to '0.0' and print the data again. (See "Margin." and "Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge (Front)." "Offset Short Edge/Offset Long Edge (Back).")

Cause 2

The application software's top margin and paper location settings are not correct.

Remedy

Set the correct settings for the top margin and the paper location and print the data again. (See the application software manual.)

Data that should be printed on the same page is printed on two separate pages.

Cause 1

The application software's "Line spacing" and "Number of lines on a page" settings are not correct.

Remedy

Change the settings so that the data fits on one page and print the data again.
(See the application software manual.)

Cause 2

The 'Timeout' setting is too short, when the 'Personality' setting is set to [Auto].

Remedy

Change the 'Personality' setting to a setting other than [Auto], or increase the 'Timeout' setting. (See "Personality." and "Timeout.")



Print Quality Problems

The printout is too light or too dark.

Fine lines and characters with a small point size are light.

The printout is too light or too dark.

Cause 1

The toner density settings are not correct.

Remedy

Adjust the toner density and print the data again. (See "Density.")

Cause 2

'Toner Save' is set to [On].

Remedy

Set 'Toner Save' to [Off] in the printer driver and print the data again. (See the Help function on the printer driver.)


Remark
  • You can also perform the same procedure from the touch panel display. (See "Toner Save.")

Fine lines and characters with a small point size are light.

Cause

The specified thin lines and fine characters cannot be processed properly.

Remedy 1

Set 'Resolution' to [600 dpi] and print the data again.

Remedy 2

Set 'Line Refinement' to [On] and print the data again.

Remedy 3

Set a higher level number for 'Horizontal/Vertical Line Refinement' and print the data again. (See "Horizontal Line Refinement," and "Vertical Line Refinement.")



If Trouble Occurs When Downloading Fonts or Macros from a Personal Computer

If trouble occurs when fonts or macros are downloaded from a personal computer to this machine and the problem cannot be resolved by reinstalling, follow the steps explained in this section to initialize the hard disk partition.


Remark
  • Only the system administrator for the machine can initialize the hard disk. Contact the system administrator to execute this procedure.
  • The font or macros information downloaded to the hard disk is deleted by initializing the hard disk.
  • Do not turn OFF the power when the hard disk is initializing. Doing so may damage the machine.
  • The hard disk cannot be initialized in the following conditions:
  • When print data is being received or printed. (It is recommended that you remove the cable connecting the machine to the hub, so it does not receive print data.)
  • When fonts are being installed or uninstalled.
  • The steps explained below are for initializing the PCL Hard Disk partition.
  • To initialize the PS Hard Disk partition, follow the same steps, except that for step 5, select [Initialize PS Hard Disk].

  1. Set System Management Mode.
  • Before setting System Management Mode, a system manager ID and system password must be set. For details on settings, see "Security."
  1. Press (Additional Functions).

  1. Press [Printer Settings].

  1. Press [Utility].

  1. Press [Initialize PCL Hard Disk].

A confirmation message appears.

  • If you cannot press [Initialize PCL Hard Disk], the hard disk cannot be initialized.
    Check whether System Management Mode is set or if the machine is processing a job, and start with Step 1 again.
  1. Press [Yes].

If you do not wish to initialize the hard disk, press [No].

The following screen is displayed and the hard disk is initialized. During initialization, the Processing/Data indicator blinks green.

When the initialization of the hard disk is completed, the Processing/Data indicator goes out.

The duration of the hard disk initialization process depends on the number of fonts and macros on the hard disk.

  • Do not turn OFF the power until the Processing/Data indicator goes out. Doing so may damage the machine.
  • If the following screen is displayed after pressing [Yes], the hard disk has not been initialized. Check whether print data is received and retry.



Some Basic Facts about Fonts

This section summarizes some of the basic facts you should know about fonts.



What Is a Font?

A font is a collection of letters and symbols used when printing a document. In general, a group of letters and symbols sharing a common design is referred to as a font. A font consists of the letters A to Z in both upper and lowercase, digits, and symbols.

The design that distinguishes one font from another is referred to as a "typeface." Each font has a typeface name, such as Courier, CG Times, Letter Gothic, etc.



Attributes of Fonts

All fonts share some common characteristics, which are called "attributes." The typeface is one such attribute. The letters and symbols that are actually printed are determined by the values of a collection of these attributes.


Typeface The design of the letters (e.g., Courier, CG Times, Helvetica, or Gothic).
Stroke Weight The thickness of the lines with which the letters are drawn (e.g., bold, medium, or light).
Style Whether the letters are drawn straight or at an angle (e.g., upright or italic).
Point Size Height of the letters (e.g., 10 point or 5 point).
Pitch (cpi) Number of characters that are printed in one inch (e.g., 10 cpi, 12 cpi, or Scale).
Character Width (Fixed/PS) Indicates whether the character width is set to "Fixed" or "Proportional."
Orientation Orientation of the characters on a page ("Portrait" or "Landscape").
Symbol Set The rule that defines the correspondence between the character codes coming from the host computer, and the letter forms that appear on the page (e.g., Roman-8).


Typeface

Typeface refers to the design of the characters and symbols. The following figure shows an example of some typefaces.



Stroke Weight

Stroke weight refers to the thickness of the print. There are light, medium, and bold stroke weights. The printer function has medium and bold fonts available. The figure below shows an example of medium and bold printing.



Style

Style refers to the shape of the characters. The printer function can print in two styles: upright and italic.

With some fonts, like CourierPS and Letter Gothic, the terms "Oblique" and "Slanted" are used in the same manner as italics.



Point Size

Point size refers to the height of the character. Character size is measured in points. One inch is divided into 72 points and 1 point is 1/72 of an inch (about 0.35 mm). The printer function has bitmapped fonts and scalable fonts available. The bitmapped fonts are fixed in size, but the scalable fonts are not fixed in size. Scalable fonts are freely scalable to any size you wish in 0.1 point increments. The following figure shows an example of various point sizes.


Remark


Pitch (cpi)

Pitch refers to the number of characters that are printed in one inch. The unit is cpi (characters per inch). As the number of characters per inch increases, the space between characters decreases; as the cpi decreases, the space between characters increases.



Character Width (Fixed and PS)

Each character has a different width from all the other characters in a font at a given point size. For example, "W" is a wider letter than "I." There are two ways to print letters of different widths: you can print all letters with the same spacing, regardless of their actual width; or you can change the spacing between letters to accommodate these different widths. Printing all letters with the same spacing is called "Fixed spacing," while changing the spacing to accommodate different letter widths is called "Proportional spacing."

Because the Fixed spacing method prints all letters with the same spacing, the number of characters which will fit into a given length is a fixed quantity which can be specified.

If the characters are printed with Proportional spacing, then the number of characters that will fit into an inch varies depending on the letters printed.



Orientation

Orientation refers to the direction of printing. The printer function can print using two different paper orientations: portrait and landscape. With portrait orientation, text is printed across the width of the paper (short edge), and with landscape orientation, text is printed across the length of the paper (long edge).



Symbol Set

When you print the letter "A," the host computer sends a code corresponding to "A" (hexadecimal 41 is an example of this) to the machine. This code is referred to as the character code. The machine stores an internal representation of each character, and selects from among these character patterns the pattern corresponding to the received code. In this case, the machine searches for the pattern for "A," and prints it.

  • The process by which letters are printed

The machine uses a fixed rule to decide which letter or symbol corresponds to the character code sent from the host computer. For example, the letter "A" is printed for the hexadecimal code "41." The rule which determines the correspondence between character codes and printed letters is called the "symbol set."



Fonts and Scalable Fonts

There are two types of fonts available, and these fonts are distinguished by the type of data from which they are formed.

  • Bitmapped fonts
  • Scalable fonts


Bitmapped Fonts

Each character of bitmapped fonts are composed of a grid of small dots and stored in the machine's memory in dot matrix format.

Bitmapped fonts are fixed in size and specified by characteristics called "attributes," such as typeface, stroke weight, style and so on. Various types of bitmapped fonts are produced by the combination of these attributes.



Scalable Fonts

With scalable fonts, characters are freely enlarged or compressed from the one point to any size you wish in 0.1 point increments.



Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)

With scalable fonts, characters are freely enlarged or compressed from one point to any size you wish in 0.1 point increments. (The maximum range of scaling depends on the size of the memory installed in the machine and the size of the paper used.)

The following scalable typefaces are included with the machine.


Albertus Extra Bold Garamond Halbfett New Century Schoolbook Bold Italic
Albertus Medium Garamond Kursiv New Century Schoolbook Italic
Antique Olive Garamond Kursiv Halbfett New Century Schoolbook Roman
Antique Olive Bold Helvetica Palatino Bold
Antique Olive Italic Helvetica Bold Palatino Bold Italic
Arial Helvetica Bold Oblique Palatino Italic
Arial Bold Helvetica Narrow Palatino Roman
Arial Bold Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Symbol
Arial Italic Helvetica Narrow Bold Oblique SymbolPS
CG Omega Helvetica Narrow Oblique Times Bold
CG Omega Bold Helvetica Oblique Times Bold Italic
CG Omega Bold Italic ITC Avant Garde Gothic Book Times Italic
CG Omega Italic ITC Avant Garde Times New
CG Times

Gothic Book Oblique

Times New Bold
CG Times Bold ITC Avant Garde Gothic Demi Times New Bold Italic
CG Times Bold Italic ITC Avant Garde Times New Italic
CG Times Italic

Gothic Demi Oblique

Times Roman
Clarendon Condensed ITC Bookman Demi Univers Medium
Coronet ITC Bookman Demi Italic Univers Bold
Courier ITC Bookman Light Univers Bold Condensed
Courier Bold ITC Bookman Light Italic Univers Bold Condensed Italic
Courier Bold Italic ITC Zapf Chancery Medium Italic Univers Bold Italic
Courier Italic ITC Zapf Dingbats Univers Medium Italic
CourierPS Letter Gothic Univers Medium Condensed
CourierPS Bold Letter Gothic Bold Univers Medium Condensed Italic
CourierPS Oblique Letter Gothic Italic Wingdings
CourierPS Bold Oblique Marigold
Garamond Antiqua New Century Schoolbook Bold


OCR Sets Fonts (PCL)

OCR A

OCR B



Symbol Sets (For Scalable Typefaces Only)

The following symbol sets are included with the machine.


ASCII (ISO6) MC Text* PS Text
DeskTop Microsoft Publishing Roman-8
Dingbats (14L) OCR-A Roman 9*
ISO 8859-1 Latin1 OCR-B Symbol
ISO 8859-10 Latin 6 PC-1004 (OS/2) Unicode
ISO 8859-2 Latin 2 PC-775 Ventura International
ISO 8859-9 Latin 5 PC-8 Ventura Math
ISO French (ISO69) PC-8 D/N Ventura US
ISO German (ISO21) PC-8 Greek Windows 3.0 Latin 1*
ISO Italian (ISO15) PC-850 Windows Baltic*
ISO Latin 9* PC-852 Windows 3.1 Latin 1*
ISO Norwegian (ISO60) PC-858* Windows 3.1 Latin 2*
ISO Spanish (ISO17) PC-860 Portugal Windows 3.1 Latin 5*
ISO Swedish:names (ISO11) PC-865 Norway Wingdings
ISO United Kingdom (ISO4) PC-Turkish
Legal Pi Font
Math-8 PS Math* * Supports the euro symbol.


PS Fonts

AlbertusMT GillSansCE Italic NewCenturySchlbk BoldItalic
AlbertusMT Italic GillSans Bold NewCenturySchlbkCE
AlbertusMT Light GillSansCE Bold

BoldItalic

AntiqueOlive Roman GillSans BoldItalic NewYork
AntiqueOliveCE Roman GillSansCE BoldItalic NewYorkCE
AntiqueOlive Italic GillSans Condensed Optima
AntiqueOliveCE Italic GillSansCE Condensed OptimaCE Roman
AntiqueOlive Bold GillSans BoldCondensed Optima Italic
AntiqueOliveCE Bold GillSansCE BoldCondensed OptimaCE Italic
AntiqueOlive Compact GillSans Light Optima Bold
AntiqueOliveCE Compact GillSansCE Light OptimaCE Bold
Apple Chancery GillSans LightItalic Optima BoldItalic
Apple ChanceryCE GillSansCE LightItalic OptimaCE BoldItalic
ArialMT GillSans ExtraBold Oxford
ArialCE GillSansCE ExtraBold Palatino Roman
Arial ItalicMT Goudy PalatinoCE Roman
ArialCE Italic Goudy Italic Palatino Italic
Arial BoldMT Goudy Bold PalatinoCE Italic
ArialCE Bold Goudy BoldItalic Palatino Bold
Arial BoldItalicMT Goudy ExtraBold PalatinoCE Bold
ArialCE BoldItalic Helvetica Palatino BoldItalic
AvantGarde Book HelveticaCE PalatinoCE BoldItalic
AvantGardeCE Book Helvetica Oblique StempelGaramond Roman
AvantGarde BookOblique HelveticaCE Oblique StempelGaramondCE Roman
AvantGardeCE BookOblique Helvetica Bold StempelGaramond Italic
AvantGarde Demi HelveticaCE Bold StempelGaramondCE Italic
AvantGardeCE Demi Helvetica BoldOblique StempelGaramond Bold
AvantGarde DemiOblique HelveticaCE BoldOblique StempelGaramondCE Bold
AvantGardeCE DemiOblique Helvetica Condensed StempelGaramond BoldItalic
Bodoni HelveticaCE Cond StempelGaramondCE
BodoniCE Helvetica Condensed Oblique

BoldItalic

Bodoni Italic HelveticaCE CondObl Symbol
BodoniCE Italic Helvetica Condensed Bold Taffy
Bodoni Bold HelveticaCE CondBold Times Roman
BodoniCE Bold Helvetica Condensed BoldObl TimesCE Roman
Bodoni BoldItalic HelveticaCE CondBoldObl Times Italic
BodoniCE BoldItalic Helvetica Narrow TimesCE Italic
Bodoni Poster HelveticaCE Narrow Times Bold
BodoniCE Poster Helvetica Narrow Bold TimesCE Bold
Bodoni PosterCompressed HelveticaCE NarrowBold Times BoldItalic
BodoniCE PosterCompressed Helvetica Narrow BoldOblique TimesCE BoldItalic
Bookman Light HelveticaCE NarrowBoldOblique TimesNewRomanPSMT
BookmanCE Light Helvetica Narrow Oblique TimesNewRomanCE
Bookman LightItalic HelveticaCE NarrowOblique TimesNewRomanPS
BookmanCE LightItalic HoeflerText Regular ItalicMT
Bookman Demi HoeflerTextCE Regular TimesNewRomanCE Italic
BookmanCE Demi HoeflerText Italic TlmesNewRomanPS BoldMT
Bookman DemiItalic HoeflerTextCE Italic TimesNewRomanCE Bold
BookmanCE DemiItalic HoeflerText Black TimesNewRomanPS
Candid HoeflerTextCE Black

BoldItalicMT

Chicago HoeflerText BlackItalic TimesNewRomanCE
Chicago CE HoeflerTextCE BlackItalic

BoldItalic

Clarendon HoeflerText Ornaments Univers
ClarendonCE JoannaMT UniversCE Medium
Clarendon Light JoannaMTCE Univers Oblique
ClarendonCE Light JoannaMT Italic UniversCE Oblique
Clarendon Bold JoannaMTCE Italic Univers Bold
ClarendonCE Bold JoannaMT Bold UniversCE Bold
CooperBlack JoannaMTCE Bold Univers BoldOblique
CooperBlack Italic JoannaMT BoldItalic UniversCE BoldOblique
Copperplate ThirtyTwoBC JoannaMTCE BoldItalic Univers Light
Copperplate ThirtyThreeBC LetterGothic UniversCE Light
Coronet Regular LetterGothicCE Univers LightOblique
CoronetCE Regular LetterGothic Slanted Univers CE LightOblique
Courier LetterGothicCE Slanted Univers Condensed
CourierCE LetterGothic Bold UniversCE Condensed
Courier Oblique LetterGothicCE Bold Univers CondensedOblique
CourierCE Oblique LetterGothic BoldSlanted UniversCE
Courier Bold LetterGothicCE BoldSlanted

CondensedOblique

CourierCE Bold LubalinGraph Book Univers CondensedBold
Courier BoldOblique LubalinGraphCE Book UniversCE CondensedBold
CourierCE BoldOblique LubalinGraph BookOblique Univers Condensed
Eurostile LubalinGraphCE BookOblique

BoldOblique

EurostileCE LubalinGraph Demi UniversCE Condensed
Eurostile Bold LubalinGraphCE Demi

BoldOblique

EurostileCE Bold LubalinGraph DemiOblique Univers Extended
Eurostile ExtendedTwo LubalinGraphCE DemiOblique UniversCE Extended
EurostileCE Marigold Univers ExtendedObl
ExtendedTwo Monaco UniversCE ExtendedObl
Eurostile BoldExtendedTwo MonacoCE Univers BoldExt
EurostileCE MonaLisa Recut UniversCE BoldExt

BoldExtendedTwo

NewCenturySchlbk Roman Univers BoldExtObl
Geneva NewCenturySchlbkCE Roman UniversCE BoldExtObl
GenevaCE NewCenturySchlbk Italic Wingdings Regular
GillSans NewCenturySchlbkCE Italic ZapfChancery MediumItalic
GillSansCE Roman NewCenturySchlbk Bold ZapfChanceryCE MediumItalic
GillSans Italic NewCenturySchlbkCE Bold ZapfDingbats


Checking the Font Lists for Available Fonts

Font lists are a comprehensive listing of all fonts currently available. The listing contains both the names of resident fonts, and the names of the fonts stored on any external hard disk that may be present.


Remark
  • These fonts are only applicable for the PCL or PS Printer.

The Font List includes the following information:


<1> Font/Symbol Set* The typeface name and the symbol set.
<2> Spacing This indicates whether a font is a fixed-size, non-proportional font (0) or a proportional font (1).
<3> Style Upright (straight) characters or italic (slanted) characters.
<4> Stroke Weight The stroke weight of the characters in the font.
<5> Pitch/Point Size The pitch and point size. For a scalable font, Scale is displayed. The vertical distance in points from the top of capital letters to the tail of the letter "y."
<6> Print Sample A print sample of the font.

* If the font supports more than one symbol set, a command parameter (indicated with xY or xM) will not be shown.

Typeface Samples

Symbol Sets



Typeface Samples


Standard Scalable Fonts (PCL)



Bitmapped Fonts (PCL)



OCR Code Scalable Fonts (PCL)



PS Fonts



Symbol Sets


ASCII



DeskTop



ISO 8859-1 Latin 1



ISO 8859-10 Latin 6



ISO 8859-2 Latin 2



ISO 8859-9 Latin 5



ISO French



ISO German



ISO Italian



ISO Norwegian



ISO Spanish



ISO Swedish



ISO United Kingdom



Legal



Math-8



MC Text



Microsoft Publishing



PC-1004



PC-775



PC-8



PC-8 D/N



PC-850



PC-852



PC-Turkish



Pi Font



PS Math



PS Text



Roman-8



Symbol



Ventura International



Ventura Math



Ventura US



Windows 3.0 Latin 1



Windows 3.1 Latin 1



Windows 3.1 Latin 2



Windows 3.1 Latin 5



Windows Baltic



Wingdings



Unicode



OCR-A



OCR-B



Dingbats



ISO Latin 9



PC-8 Greek



PC-858



PC-860



PC-865



Roman 9



Configuration Page Sample

The Configuration Page includes the following information:


<1> Hardware Configuration This section displays the hardware configuration of the machine, including any options that have been installed.
<2> Common Settings This section displays the common printer settings of the machine, as determined by the Settings menu. (See "Settings Menu.")
<3> Paper Feed This section displays the paper feed settings for the printer function of the machine, as determined by the Paper Feed section of the Settings menu. (See "Paper Feed.")
<4> Print Quality This section displays the print quality settings for the printer function of the machine, as determined by the Print Quality section of the Settings menu. (See "Print Quality.")
<5> Layout This section displays the layout settings for the printer function of the machine, as determined by the Layout section of the Settings menu. (See "Layout.")
<6> Copy Set Numbering This section displays the Copy Set Numbering settings for the printer function of the machine, as determined by the Copy Set Numbering section of the Settings menu. (See "Copy Set Numbering.")
<7> PCL Settings This section displays the PCL settings for the printer function of the machine, as determined by the PCL section of the Settings menu. (See "PCL Settings.")
<8> PS Settings This section displays the PS settings for the printer function of the machine, as determined by the PS section of the Settings menu. (See "PS Settings.")

Remark
  • These samples are only applicable for the PCL or PS Printer.


Release Notes

  • Notes on using the NetWare print services banner page setting and page breaks in Windows applications

If a print job sent to the machine contains a banner page or page break command (referred to as a banner page below) the job is processed as two separate jobs. Therefore, you should remember the following points when using the banner page setting:


1. When the job is displayed on the machine's touch panel display or in the utility software, the main document and the banner page are displayed separately. If you cancel or change the print order of the main document, the banner page is still printed or mixed in with other print jobs unless it is also canceled or its order in the print queue is changed.
2. If several print jobs are sent to the machine at the same time, the banner page associated with the main document of a job may not printed immediately after the job, but in a different order.
3. If you are using the impression count setting for the Department ID Management function, the banner page is not counted as an impression. It is counted as a job with an unknown ID.
4. Even if the main document is a secured print job, protected by a password, the banner page is not processed as a secured print job, and is printed immediately when it reaches the top of the print queue.
5. If a print job is stored in an inbox, the banner page is not stored in the inbox and is printed.
6. If a print job containing a banner page is printed using a driver that is not specific to this machine, the print job may not be executed correctly.
7. In models that is equipped with a fax function, a banner page is not considered a fax transmission job even if the print job is set up as a fax transmission, and only the banner page is printed.

  • Notes on using the NetWare print services form feed function

Even if you have specified a form feed setting for a print job, a form feed is not performed. The form feed function is effective for only line printers. It is not necessary for page printers. If the form feed function is enabled, the form feed may be inserted in an unexpected location, and the print result may be incorrect.

  • Notes on using the PS print functions

Limitation when using the Group function when sending a print job to an inbox

If you specify multiple copies when sending a print job to an inbox that uses the Group function, the copy quantity when you print from the inbox is one rather than the actual number of copies specified for the job. However, when you print the job, the number of copies specified when the job was sent to the inbox are printed. This means that if you specify more than one copy when printing from the inbox, the machine prints the multiple copy job several times. Unnecessary copies of the job are printed if you specify several copies when printing because only "1" was displayed for the copy quantity when printing from the inbox.

Limitations on setting the number of copies to '0'

If a job is complex, pages may be printed even when the copy quantity is set to '0'. If this happens, try using the PCL5 printer driver and using the Graphics mode.

Limitations when printing from Macintosh computers

If you specify the Gutter Location, when printing with the 2 in 1 (L→R) layout, the job is printed with the gutter shifted in the opposite direction.

  • Notes on using the drivers and utility software through the USB interface

Some drivers and utility software are not available through the USB interface, as shown below.


: Available : Unavailable
Address Book Conversion Utility *1 NetSpot Job Monitor
Canon Font Manager 2000 Network ScanGear
Canon LPR2 PCL5e printer driver (Win CCD) *2
Canon NDPS GW PCL6 printer driver (Win CCD) *2
Device Status Extension PS printer driver (Win CCD) *2
Mac CCD (Mac OS X 10.2.2) Raster FAX driver *2
Mac PPD UFR II printer driver (Mac OS X 10.1.5)
NetSpot Console UFR II printer driver (Win CCD) *2
NetSpot Device Installer USB printer driver for Windows 98/Me

* The above list contains software not included on the accompanying CD-ROMs.
*1 Not available through the Remote UI.
*2 The automatic printer configuration and the Job Accounting feature are not available.


Web Access

This category describes how to use the Web Browser function.



Product Information

This product includes NetFront, a product of ACCESS Co., Ltd., for the Internet function.

NetFront is either a registered trademark or a trademark of ACCESS Co., Ltd. in Japan and/or other countries.

The software of this product includes modules developed by the Independent JPEG Group.

This product contains Adobe® Flash® Player and Adobe® Reader® Player under license from Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Copyright© 1995-2007 Adobe Macromedia Software LLC. All rights reserved.

Adobe, Flash and Reader are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.

http://www.adobe.com/products/flash/about

This machine supports the following markup languages and versions:


Markup Language Version
HTML HTML 4.01 (XHTML 1.1)
CSS CSS 1.0, parts of CSS 2.0
ECMAScript ECMAScript 3rd Edition (equivalent to subset of JavaScript 1.5)
DOM DOM Level 1, parts of DOM Level 2 and Dynamic HTML

This machine supports the following image formats and versions:


Image Format Version
GIF GIF87a, GIF89a (interlaced, non-interlaced, transparent color), Animation GIF
JPEG

Standard method (baseline) DCT encoding
JFIF standard method (baseline) DCT encoding
Progressive JPEG

PNG PNG (interlaced, non-interlaced, transparent color)
BMP BMP (16 bit not supported)
Flash Contents for Macromedia Flash Player 6 or equivalent can be displayed

This machine does not support Java Applet or Window.Open.



Terms and Conditions

Please use the Web Access Software (hereinafter referred to as the "Software") under the terms and conditions below.

Terms and conditions for use of the Software:

  • You may use the Software only on the Canon product specified when acquiring a License Access Number (hereinafter referred to as the "Hardware"), and you may not use the Software on any device other than the Hardware. The Software may not be shared, installed, or used concurrently on different computers.
  • Other than as set forth in this Terms and Conditions section, you may not transfer, sublicense, sell, rent, lease, or lend the Software to another person or entity and you may not make copies of the Software.
  • You may not alter, modify, adapt, convert to another programming language, decompile, disassemble, or otherwise reverse engineer the Software in part or in full, and you shall not have another person or entity do so. You may not separate the Software from the Hardware, and you shall not have another person or entity do so.
  • Canon or someone designated by Canon may audit your use of the Software for compliance with these terms at any time. In this case, Canon or the party designated by Canon will give you reasonable notice of the audit.
  • You may permanently transfer all of your rights to another person or entity to use the Software only when you transfer the Hardware itself to them, provided you retain no copies and transfer all of the Software (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, any upgrades or anything related to the Software including, but not limited to, its instruction manual). The recipient must use the Software under the terms and conditions outlined in this Terms and Conditions section.
  • You may not remove or alter any trademarks, trade names, product names, logos, copyrights or other proprietary notices, legends, symbols, or labels of Canon or its licensors in the Software.
  • Canon or its licensors retain all rights, titles and interests, including all copyrights and intellectual property rights, in and to, the Software and all copies thereof.
  • You may not export or re-export, directly or indirectly, the Software in violation of any related laws, restrictions and regulations, or without all necessary approvals.
  • Canon or its licensors in the Software, Canon's subsidiaries and affiliates, and Canon's distributors and dealers are not responsible for maintaining or assisting you in your use of the Software and are not responsible for updates, bug-fixes, or support for the Software. If an upgrade version of the Software is provided to you, it is provided to you in exchange for the previous version. In this case, such an upgrade version is regarded as the Software and used under the terms and conditions outlined in this Terms and Conditions section. You can no longer use the previous version or transfer the rights to another person or entity.
  • Except when required by an applicable law, Canon or its licensors disclaim all warranties and representations, whether expressed, implied, or otherwise, including the warranties of merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose. Also, there is no warranty of non-infringement. The Software is not designed, intended, or licensed for use in hazardous environments requiring fail-safe controls, including without limitation, the design, construction, maintenance, or operation of nuclear facilities, aircraft navigation or communication systems, air traffic management or control systems, life support systems or weapons systems.

CANON INC.



Overview of the Web Access Function

Web Access is a function that enables you to browse Web pages using the touch panel display of this machine. When you press [Web Access], the screen below, called the Web Access screen, is displayed. By entering a URL, you can browse various Web pages. The Web pages displayed on the Web Access screens in this category are all samples.

The following keys are displayed on the toolbar of the Web Access screen.


Key Key Name Description
(Open New Window) Press to open a new window.
(Close Window) Press to close the window that is currently displayed.
Back Press to go back to the Web page that was displayed immediately before the one that is currently displayed.
Forward Press to proceed to the Web page that was displayed immediately after the one that is currently displayed.
Stop Press to stop loading a Web page.
Refresh Press to refresh a displayed Web page.
Home Press to display the Web page that you have specified as the home page in the initial settings. (See "Home Page Settings.")
Print Press to print a displayed Web page. (See "Printing a Displayed Web Page.")
Favorites Press to register Web pages in Favorites, and to display the Favorites list. (See "Using Favorites.")
Menu Press to change settings.

Remark
  • When you press [Web Access], the first Web page displayed is the one that is registered as the home page in [Home Page Settings] (from the Settings screen). For instructions on designating a home page, see "Home Page Settings."


Multi-Window Function

By using [Open New Window], you can open up to three windows. If more than two windows are displayed using [Open New Window], tabs are automatically displayed. You can switch windows using the tabs that are displayed at the top of the toolbar.

If you open a new window using [Open New Window], a new window is displayed on top. The new window displays the same URL as the window that was opened when [Open New Window] was pressed.

PDF files cannot be open in more than two windows. For this reason, when a PDF file is displayed, a PDF file is not displayed in a new window, even if [Open New Window] is pressed. (A window is opened.)


Remark
  • Depending on the model of the machine, [Open New Window] and [Close Window] may not be supported.
  • When only one window is displayed, [Close Window] is inactive and cannot be selected.


Displaying a Web Page

Follow the instructions below to start Web Access and display the desired Web page.


Remark
  • Depending on your system environment, it may be necessary to set proxy settings. For instructions on specifying proxy settings, see "Network."

  1. Press [].

You can change the order of the function keys in [Function Display Settings] (from the Additional Functions screen). For instructions on changing the order of the function keys, see "Additional Functions."

  1. Press [Web Access] → press the text field.

  1. Enter the URL of the desired Web page → press [OK].

Example: http://www.example.com

Press [] to display the history of entered URLs and to display Web pages. You can erase the history of entered URLs by pressing [Erase All] in [History] (from Menu). (See "Erasing the URL History.")

The desired Web page is displayed.

  • Depending on the file size, some Web pages and images may not be displayed.
  • Depending on the image size, it may take some time for GIF animations to load.
  • The optional Expansion RAM may be required to display Flash content, depending on the model of your machine.
  • If multiple windows are open, the windows are not differentiated, and URLs are saved in the order that they were entered.
  1. Press .

Depending on the entry area of the Web page, the text field may be displayed with multiple entry lines.

  • When [Initialize All Data/Settings] in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is performed, the following registered or saved data is erased:
  • Favorites
  • Page Memos
  • History Information
  • Cookies
  • Cache
  • Settings (restored to their defaults)
  • For more information on initializing all data/settings, see "Security."
  • If you are logged in using an authentication system such as Department ID Management and using the Web browser, the following procedures are performed when you log out:
  • Cookies are deleted
  • The session is disconnected
  • The displayed page is changed to a blank page


Specifying Settings for the Web Access Screen

Based on your needs, you can change how the Web Access screen is displayed.
Depending on the screen size and whether to display the toolbar, you can select from four different selections.


Remark
  • The default settings are 'Normal' and 'Toolbar ON'.

  1. Press [View].

  1. Select a screen size and whether to display the toolbar → press [Done].

Each setting is displayed as follows.



Using Favorites

By registering a frequently viewed Web page in Favorites, you can access the Web page without having to enter its URL. You can also organize registered Web pages so that they are easily manageable.


Remark
  • The names of Web pages that are registered in Favorites are displayed as a list when you press [Favorites]. To browse these Web pages, press [Favorites] → select the desired Web page from the list.
  • If multiple windows are open, the web pages specified in Favorites are displayed in the window that is currently displayed on top.


Adding to Favorites

You can add frequently viewed Web pages to Favorites. By adding a Web page to Favorites, you can access the page easily.


  1. Call up the desired Web page → press [Favorites].

  1. Press [Add to Favorites].

  1. Press [OK].

If you want to change the name of the Web page to be added, press the text field
for <Name> → enter the name → press [OK].

  • The Name and URL fields are automatically displayed.
  • The registered Web page is added to the list that is displayed when [Favorites] is pressed.
  • Up to 100 bookmarks can be registered in Favorites.
  • Up to 255 characters can be entered for each Favorites name and URL.


Organizing Favorites

You can change the names of Web pages registered in Favorites, as well as erase those that are no longer necessary.


  1. Press [Favorites].

  1. Press [Organize Favorites].

A list of registered Favorites is displayed.

  1. Organize the Favorites list.
  • Select [Name] or [Order] to sort the Favorites list in ascending or descending order.

  • Select the desired Web page → press [Details].

The detailed information of the selected Web page is displayed.


  • Select the desired Web page → press [Edit].

  • Press the text field for <Name>.

  • Enter the new name → press [OK].

The name of the Web page is changed.

  • If you press [OK] without entering a name in the name field, the URL address is registered as the name.

  • Select the desired Web page → press [Erase].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the selected Web page, press [No].

The selected Web page is erased from Favorites.


  • Press [Erase All].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase all of the Web pages, press [No].

All of the Web pages are erased from Favorites.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Web Access screen appears.


Importing/Exporting Favorites

You can use the Remote UI to save information about a Web page registered in Favorites to your computer. You can also retrieve saved information from your computer and register it in the machine.


Remark
  • The Import/Export operation may take several minutes to complete. Do not turn the machine's main power OFF until the operation is complete. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
  • During an export operation, the screen display does not change until the operation is complete. Do not click [Start Export] while the hourglass or pointer indicates that the operation is still being processed.
  • The machine's control panel cannot be used while files are being imported/exported.
  • For instructions on using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI."


Exporting Favorites to a Computer

You can save the list of addresses registered in Favorites to your computer as a file.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • If the System Manager ID and System Password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and System Password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Web Access Favorites].
  1. Click [Export].

  1. Click [Start Export].

  • The list of registered Web pages is exported. It is not possible to export individual Web pages.
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.

There is a tab space between the name of the Favorites page and its URL.

Example: Example Home Page http://www.example.com

The list of registered Favorites is saved in text format in the specified location.



Importing Favorites from a Computer File

You can import the list of Favorites into the machine from saved computer files.


Remark
  • When importing Favorites, the existing registered Favorites are overwritten.
  • When importing a file, use the same file format as the data that was exported. Data in a different format cannot be imported.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Importing/Exporting Favorites."

The Import/Export screen is displayed.

  • If the System Manager ID and System Password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and System Password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Web Access Favorites].
  1. Click [Import].


  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [Start Import].

The list of Favorites is imported.

  • You cannot import a file when there are other jobs being processed.


Specifying Settings for Device Information Delivery

You can set the machine to deliver information about Web pages registered in Favorites to other machines that are connected to the same network. For detailed information on Device Information Delivery, see "Security."


Delivered Information Contents Notes
Web Access Favorites Web pages registered as Favorites Device information delivery is possible only when both host and client machines are activated.

Remark
  • Device information can be delivered between machines of the same model. However, some information may not be delivered depending on the optional equipment attached to the machines.
  • Device information cannot be delivered if the System Manager ID and System Password registered in the client machine are different from the System Manager ID and System Password registered in the host machine.
  • During device information delivery, device information cannot be delivered to destination machines under the following conditions:
  • While Favorites is being imported/exported from the Remote UI
  • While Favorites is being delivered during device information delivery
  • While the Web browser is retrieving contents
  • While printing from a Web page
  • While Favorites is being deleted
  • By default, every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions menu) is set to 'On'.


Displaying the URL History

You can display or erase the history of URLs that have been entered in the address bar. The URL history can display up to 500 locations.


Remark
  • If multiple windows are open, the web page is displayed in the window that is currently displayed on top.
  • The URLs of pages displayed from a registered Page Memo are not saved in the URL history.


Confirming the URL History

  1. Press [Menu].

  1. Press [History].

  • When <Restrict History Display> is set to 'On' in Privacy Policy and Regulations (from the Settings screen), it is not possible to display the URL history. (See "Privacy Settings.")

The URL history list is displayed.

  • Depending on the Web page, the name may be left blank.
  • If a PDF file or an image is displayed, the name is left blank.
  • Select [Name] or [Order] to sort the URL history list in ascending or descending order.
  • If multiple windows are open, URL histories are saved in the order that the windows were open.

  • Select the desired Web page from the URL history list → press [Details].

Detailed information is displayed.

The following details are displayed:

  • Name
  • URL
  • Last accessed
  • When <Dept. ID/User Name with History> is set to 'On' in Privacy Policy and Regulations (from the Settings screen), the Department ID or user name is also displayed. (See "Privacy Settings.")


  • Select the desired Web page from the URL history list → press [Access].

The selected Web page is displayed.



Erasing the URL History

  1. Press [Menu] → [History].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Confirming the URL History."

  1. Erase the URL History.

  • Select the Web page that you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the Web page, press [No].


  • Press [Erase All].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase all of the Web pages, press [No].

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Web Access screen appears.


Saving a Page

You can save a currently displayed screen as a Page Memo.


Remark
  • The maximum data size that can be saved for each page is 500 KB.
  • Up to 30 pages can be saved.
  • You cannot add a PDF file to a Page Memo.
  • If you are saving a Web page with Flash content, the Flash content may not be saved properly.
  • If multiple windows are open, the specified web page is displayed in the window that is currently displayed on top.
  • The URLs of pages displayed from a registered Page Memo are not saved in the URL history.


Adding a Page Memo

  1. Call up the desired Web page that you want to save → press [Menu].

  1. Press [Add to Page Memo].

  1. Select the save format → press [OK].

If you do not want to save images, press [Text Only].

If you do not want to save the Web page, press [Cancel].

If you want to change the name, enter a new name → press [OK].

  • The name and URL are automatically displayed.
  • You can change the name and URL. If you save the URL, the contents of the saved screen do not change. The screen currently displayed is saved as a page memo.


Editing a Page Memo

You can erase and change the name of a saved Page Memo.


  1. Press [Menu].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Confirming the URL History."

  1. Press [Page Memo List].

  1. Edit a Page Memo.
  • Select [Name] or [Order] to sort the Page Memo List in ascending or descending order.

  • Select the desired Page Memo → press [Access].


  • Select the desired Page Memo → press [Details].

The detailed information of the selected Page Memo is displayed.

The following details are displayed:

  • Name
  • URL
  • Created: Displays the date that the page was saved.
  • Size(Byte)
  • Secure: Displays whether SSL is set.

  • Select the desired Page Memo → press [Rename].

  • Press the text field for <Name>.

  • Enter the new name → press [OK].

  • If a Page Memo with the same name or URL is already registered, a message appears, asking if you want to overwrite the existing Page Memo. Press [Overwrite] or [Add as New] → [OK].

  • Select the desired Page Memo → press [Erase].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the Page Memo, press [No].


  • Press [Erase All].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase all of the Page Memos, press [No].



Specifying Settings for the Display Screen

You can change the size and encoding of characters within a Web page.


Remark
  • If multiple windows are open, the settings are applied only to the window that is currently displayed on top.


Changing the Text Size

You can change the text size of a Web page.


Remark
  • You can select [Small], [Medium], or [Large].
  • The default setting is 'Medium'.
  • Even if you change the settings for text size, some Web pages might not reflect these changes.

  1. Press [Menu].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Confirming the URL History."

  1. Press [Text size].

  1. Select the text size → press [OK].

If you do not want to change the text size, press [Cancel].

The size of the characters within the Web page is changed.



Changing the Character Encoding

A Web page includes information about the character encoding (specified numbers that correspond to each character and symbol) of the language that is displayed. Character encoding varies with each Web page.


  1. Press [Menu].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Confirming the URL History."

  1. Press [Encode].

  • If the characters of a Web page are unreadable, select an appropriate character code to display the characters correctly.
  1. Select the character code → press [OK].

If you do not want to change the character code, press [Cancel].

  • There may be cases in which the selected settings for the character code are not properly reflected even if [Encode] is pressed again after the settings are specified.


Changing the Display Magnification

You can adjust the display magnification for the screen.
The display magnification can be set from 50% to 200% in 25% increments.


  1. Press [Menu].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Confirming the URL History."

  1. Press [Zoom].

  1. Select the zoom size → press [OK].

If you do not want to change the zoom size, press [Cancel].



Customizing Settings

This section describes the settings that can be made by the person in charge of Web Access's operation, such as the System Manager.



Restricting the Display Screen

You can specify various settings for the display screen, such as the format of the screen and whether to display images.


Remark
  • The default settings are:
  • Show Images: On
  • Show Animated GIF Images: On
  • Enable Table: On
  • Fit Web Page Into Screen Size: Off
  • Use JavaScript: On
  • Use Word Wrap: Off
  • Use Japanese Hyphenation: Off
  • Format: Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported CSS
  • Standard CSS: CSS1
  • Show Flash Contents: On
  • Flash Animation Frame Interval: Medium

  1. Press [Menu].

If necessary, see the screen shot in step 1 of "Confirming the URL History."

  1. Press [Settings].

  1. Press [View Settings].

The View Settings screen is displayed.

  1. Specify the settings for each item.

If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.

The following items can be set:

  • <Show Images>:
Select whether to display images within the contents of the Web page.
  • <Show Animated GIF Images>:
Select whether to display animated GIFs.
  • <Enable Table>:
Select whether to display tables.
  • <Fit Web Page Into Screen Size>:
Select whether to display the contents so that they fit within the width of the screen.
  • <Use JavaScript>:
Select whether to use JavaScript.
  • <Use Word Wrap>:
Select whether to use the word wrap function.
  • <Use Japanese Hyphenation>:
Select whether to use the Japanese word wrap function.
  • <Format>:
Select [Std CSS only], [Std CSS + Style Attribute], or [Std CSS + Style Attribute + External Imported CSS].
  • <Standard CSS>:
Select [CSS1], [CSS2], [CSS3].
  • <Show Flash Contents>:
Select whether to display the Flash contents.
  • <Flash Animation Frame Interval>:
Select the display interval for the Flash animation frames.
  • The optional Expansion RAM may be required to display Flash content, depending on the model of your machine.

  • Select [On] or [Off] for each item → press [OK].


  • Press [Format].

  • Select the desired format → press [OK].


  • Press [Standard CSS].

  • Select the type of Standard CSS → press [OK].


  • Press [Flash Animation Frame Interval].

  • Select the flash animation frame interval → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below:

[Short]: The flash animation is smooth.
[Medium]: The flash animation frame display interval is between that of [Short] and [Long].
[Long]: The flash animation is somewhat grainy.
  • If [Flash Animation Frame Interval] is set to 'Short', other operations, such as printing, may become slow.


Home Page Settings

You can specify settings for the Web page (home page) that is displayed when you press [] on the toolbar. You can also specify whether to display the home page when you start Web Access.


Remark
  • The default setting is 'Set Web Page as Home'.

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [Home Page Settings].

The Home Page Settings screen is displayed.

  1. Select [Set Web Page as Home] or [Set Favorite as Home].

  • Press [Set Web Page as Home] → enter the URL of the desired Web page in the [URL] field → press [OK].

If you press [Use Current Page as Home], the Web page that is currently displayed is set as the home page, and its URL is displayed in the [URL] field.

To display the designated home page when you start Web Access, press [On] for <Home Page during Startup>.


  • Press [Set Favorite as Home] → select [On] or [Off] for <Restrict Access to Links> → press [OK].

When settings are set for [Set Favorite as Home], the following screen is displayed when Web Access starts:

  • Depending on the model of your machine, after turning the main power ON, you may have to wait for the time set in Startup Time Settings to elapse before starting Web Access. Network transmission is not possible until this startup time has elapsed. For more information, see "Network."
  • If <Restrict Access to Links> is set to 'On', the following items in Privacy Policy and Regulations (from the Settings screen) are automatically set to 'On'. (For more information, see "Privacy Settings.")
  • Restrict URL Entry
  • Restrict Add/Edit Favorites
  • Restrict Add/Edit Page Memos
  • Restrict History Display
  • If multiple windows are displayed, the window that is currently displayed on top is set as the home page.


Auto Clear Settings

If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last key operation is performed), the display returns to the Basic Features screen (standard settings) of the selected function. You can also select whether automatically to delete the cache (temporary files of previously visited Web pages that are stored to speed up repeated access to the same page) when the Auto Clear mode is activated.


Remark
  • For more information on Auto Clear, see "Security."
  • The default setting is 'Show Home Page'.

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [Auto Clear Settings].

  1. Press [Display during Auto Clear].

  1. Select what to display during Auto Clear → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Show Home Page]: Displays the home page that is displayed when Web Access starts.
[Show Blank Page]: Closes all the Web pages.
[Keep Last Page] Displays the Web page that was last displayed.


Security Settings

You can select whether to use SSL and specify settings for certificates that are used to connect to the server.


Remark
  • The default settings are:
  • Use SSL: On
  • Certificates: Enable
  • Display Mixed HTTPS/HTTP Pg: On


Use SSL

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [Security].

  1. Press [Use SSL].

  1. Select [On] or [Off] for each item → press [OK].

  • Even if <Use SSL> is set to 'On', and <Use SSL 2.0>, <Use SSL 3.0>, and <Use TLS 1.0> are all set to 'Off', you cannot use SSL.


Certificate Settings

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [Security].

  1. Press [Certificates].

A list of certificates is displayed.

  1. Specify the settings for the certificate → press [OK].

  • Select a certificate → press [Enable/Disable].

A check mark is displayed to the left of an enabled certificate.


  • Select a certificate → press [Details].

Detailed information of the selected certificate is displayed.

The following details are displayed.

  • Issue Destination
  • Issuer
  • Expiration Date
  • Serial Number


Displaying Mixed HTTPS/HTTP Pages

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [Security].

  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Display Mixed HTTPS/HTTP Pg>.

If you select [Off], only content specified with HTTPS is displayed for mixed HTTPS/HTTP pages.



Cache Settings

You can specify settings for the cache (temporary files of previously visited Web pages that are stored to speed up repeated access to the same page). This can prevent other users from viewing Web pages that you previously browsed.


Remark
  • The default setting is 'Off'.

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [] or [] until [Cache] appears → press [Cache].

  1. Specify the settings for the cache.

  • Press [Use Cache].

  • Press [On] → select the cache type → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Each Session]: Checks the date and time information every session, and downloads from the server if the contents have been updated, or from the cache if the contents have not been updated.
[Each Access]: Checks the date and time information every time the Web page is accessed, and downloads from the server if the contents have been updated, or from the cache if the contents have not been updated.
[Cache Priority]: Does not check the date and time information, and downloads the contents from the server if the cache is not saved, or from the cache if they have been saved in the cache.
    If the Use Cache mode is set to 'Off', regardless of whether or not the cache is saved, the contents of the Web page are obtained from the server.

  • Press [Clear Cache].

  • It may take several minutes for the cache to clear, depending on the amount of data saved in the cache.
  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the cache, press [No].

The cache is erased.



Privacy Settings

You can specify settings for cookies and restrict the input of URLs. Cookies are files that are saved temporarily when you visit a Web page. Cookies are used as user IDs and contain information, such as the number of times a particular Web site was accessed and the date and time the Web page was accessed.


Remark
  • The default settings are:
  • Cookie Handling: Prompt
  • Restrict URL Entry: Off
  • Restrict Add/Edit Favorites: Off
  • Restrict Add/Edit Page Memos: Off
  • Restrict Editing Home Pages: Off
  • Restrict Printing: Off
  • Restrict History Display: Off
  • Dept. ID/User Name with History: Off

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [] or [] until [Privacy Policy and Regulations] appears → press [Privacy Policy and Regulations].

  1. Specify the settings for cookies.

  • Press [Cookie Handling].

  • Select whether to receive cookies → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Accept]: Always accepts the cookies that are created each time the user accesses a Web page.
[Block]: Blocks all cookies.
[Prompt]: Displays a screen prompting the user to select whether to accept or block the cookies created each time the user accesses a Web page.

  • Press [Erase Cookies].

  • Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase cookies, press [No].

All the cookies are erased.


  • Select [On] or [Off] for each item → press [OK].

  • If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.

The following items can be set:

  • <Restrict URL Entry>:
Select whether to restrict URL entry.
  • <Restrict Add/Edit Favorites>:
Select whether to restrict adding and editing of Favorites.
  • <Restrict Add/Edit Page Memos>:
Select whether to restrict adding and editing of Page Memos.
  • <Restrict Editing Home Pages>:
Select whether to designate and edit the home page.
  • <Restrict Printing>:
Select whether to restrict Print and PDF Direct Print.
  • <Restrict History Display>:
Select whether to restrict display of the URL history.
  • <Dept. ID/User Name with History>:
Select whether to display the Department ID or User Name on the Details screen of the URL history list.


Proxy Settings

For security purposes, you can specify the Web addresses that do not require the use of proxies. You can also confirm the proxy settings of the machine.


Remark
  • For information on changing the proxy settings of the machine, see "Network."

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [] or [] until [Proxy Settings] appears → press [Proxy Settings].

  1. Press the text entry field for <Address Without Using Proxy> → enter the desired URL → press [OK].

If you want to use HTTP1.1 for the proxy connection, select [On] for <Use HTTP1.1 for proxy connection>.

  • If the Web page is not properly displayed, set <Use HTTP1.1 for proxy connection> to 'On' to display the Web page properly.


Scheduled Printing

You can set a desired Web page to be printed at a designated time by specifying settings for scheduled printing.


Remark
  • If multiple jobs are scheduled to be printed at the same time, each job is printed in the listed order, starting with the job at the top of the list.
  • There may be a slight difference between the time specified for scheduled printing and the actual time that printing occurs.
  • If the data could not be obtained properly and scheduled printing could not be performed, the machine automatically retries printing.
  • If multiple windows are displayed, the window that is currently displayed on top is registered for scheduled printing.


Setting a Scheduled Print

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Restricting the Display Screen."

  1. Press [] or [] until [Scheduled Printing] appears → press [Scheduled Printing].

  1. Press [Register] or select the desired Web page and press [Edit].

If you want to register a new scheduled print, press [Register]. If you want to change settings for a scheduled print that is already registered, press [Edit].


  • Press [Enter the Name/URL].

  • Press the text entry fields for <Name> and <URL> → enter the name and URL → press [OK].

If you press [Register Current Page], the name and URL of the currently displayed Web page is automatically displayed in the entry fields.

  • The URL of a PDF file cannot be registered or edited.

  • Press [Print Time Settings].

  • Select [Everyday] or [Day] → enter the time to start printing → press [OK].

If you select [Day], specify the day to print → enter the time to start printing → press [OK].


  • Press [Print Settings].

The Print Settings screen is displayed.

  • Press [Print Settings] → specify the settings for each item.

  • If a user name and password is required for printing, refer to the following procedures. For details on other items, refer to their respective explanations in "Printing a Displayed Web Page."
  • Press [] or [] until [1st User Name/Password] or [2nd User Name/Password] appears → press [1st User Name/Password] or [2nd User Name/Password].

You can register up to two user names and passwords.

  • If Department ID Management, or the SSO-H login service is set, you must enter the respective user name and password.
  • Press the text entry fields for <User Name> and <Password> → enter a user name and password → press [OK].

  • Press [OK].


Erasing a Scheduled Print

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings] → [Scheduled Printing].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Setting a Scheduled Print."

  1. Select the desired Web page → press [Erase].

  1. Press [Yes].

If you do not want to erase the selected Web page, press [No].



Confirming the Detailed Information

  1. Press [Menu] → [Settings] → [Scheduled Printing].

If necessary, see the screen shots in steps 1 and 2 of "Setting a Scheduled Print."

  1. Select the desired Web page → press [Details].

Detailed information of the selected Web page is displayed.

The following details are displayed:

Name: The name of the selected Web page.
URL: The URL of the selected Web page.
Print Time: The time when the Web page is printed.
Status/Result: The printing status of the selected Web page.
  • To confirm the details of jobs that have been printed already, press [System Monitor] → [Print]. For more information, see "Basic Operations."


Printing a Displayed Web Page

You can print a Web page that is currently displayed. Before printing, you can specify settings for the pages to be printed.


Remark
  • To print a Web page, optional equipment with the UFR II print function must be installed. (May be standard-equipped, depending on the model.)
  • The print settings are restored to the default settings under the following conditions:
  • When the reset key is pressed
  • When the user logs out
  • When the Auto Clear mode activates
  • If a print server unit, such as the Color Network Printer Unit, is installed, you cannot print a Web page.


Specifying Print Settings

You can specify settings for the pages that you want to print. You can specify the information you want to print as well as the size of the paper and margins.


Remark
  • The default settings are:
  • Color Mode: Auto
  • Copies: 1
  • Paper Select: A4
  • 2-sided Printing: Off
  • Finishing: Off
  • Print Background Colors/Images: Off
  • Title Numbering: On
  • Page Numbering: On
  • Date Numbering: On
  • URL Numbering: On

  1. Press [].

  1. Press [Print Settings].

The Print Settings screen is displayed.

  1. Specify the settings for each item.

If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.

  • You may be able to select the resolution, depending on the model of your machine. To change the resolution, press [Resolution] and select 150 dpi or 300 dpi.

  • Select [Auto] or [Black] for <Color Mode>.

If you select [Auto], the machine automatically recognizes whether the currently displayed Web page is in color or black-and-white.


  • Press [Copies].

  • Press [-] or [+] to set the number of prints → press [OK].

The number of prints can be set from 1 to 9,999.

You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter the print quantity.


  • Press [Paper Select].

  • Select the paper size and image orientation → press [Done].

  • Depending on the model of your machine, the message <Load the paper below.> is displayed if you select to print from the stack bypass. Select the paper size that you loaded in the stack bypass.
  • The paper size loaded in each of the paper drawers is displayed.
  • When printing a wide Web page, select [Horizontal] for the image orientation.

  • Press [2-sided Printing].

  • Press [On] → select the orientation → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Book Type]: The front and back sides of the print have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Calendar Type]: The front and back sides of the print have opposite top-bottom orientations.

If you do not want to make a two-sided print, press [Off].


  • Press [Finishing].

  • Select a Finishing mode → press [OK].

You can select from the following Finishing modes:

  • [Collate (Page order)]:
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and output.
  • [Group (Same pages)]:
All prints of the same Web page are grouped together and output.
  • [Staple]:
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, stapled, and output. If you select [Staple], press [Next] → select the stapling type ([Corner] or [Double])→ select the stapling position → press [OK].

If you want the pages slightly offset vertically in the output tray, press [Offset].

If you do not want to set a Finishing mode, press [Off].

  • [Staple] is displayed only when an optional finisher is attached.
  • Depending on the optional finishers attached to the machine, [Rotation] may be displayed instead of [Offset]. To output sheets in alternating directions, press [Rotation].

  • Select [On] or [Off] for each item.

The following items can be set:

  • <Print Background Colors/Images>:
Select whether to print the background color and images when printing a Web page.
  • <Title Numbering>:
Select whether to print the name of the Web page when printing a Web page.
  • <Page Numbering>:
Select whether to print page numbers when printing a Web page.
  • <Date Numbering>:
Select whether to print the date when printing a Web page.
  • <URL Numbering>:
Select whether to print the URL when printing a Web page.
  • When <Print Background Colors/Images> is set to 'On', the Web page is printed exactly as it is displayed, but because the data size of the page is larger, the page takes longer to print.
  • Even when <Print Background Colors/Images> is set to 'Off', background colors may still be printed depending on the Web page.
  • The printing location of the title is fixed (header, left alignment).
  • The printing location of the page numbers are fixed (header, right alignment), and the format is [Current Page]/[All Pages].
  • The printing location of the time and date is fixed (footer, right alignment).
  • The printing location of the URL is fixed (footer, left alignment).


Printing the Web Page

Print the Web page with the settings that you have set.


Remark
  • If you are printing from Web Access, when the width of the displayed Web page exceeds the possible printing area, the width of the Web page is automatically adjusted to the width of the paper before it is printed.
  • Print settings are restored to the default settings each time you print. Make sure to specify the desired print settings before printing.

  1. Press [].

  1. Press [Start Print].

The displayed Web page is printed.

  • Only the first frame of an animation file (e.g., a Flash file) displayed on the Web page is printed.
  • If the characters or images at the bottom of a printed page are cut off, the same characters and images are reprinted on the top of the next page.
  • If you print a page with a fixed background image, the background image may not be printed properly.
  • The font and layout of the printed page may differ from the actual Web page.


Printing a PDF File

You can display a PDF file to confirm and print it.


Remark
  • Depending on the version of the PDF file, there may be cases in which the PDF file cannot be properly displayed, printed, or stored in a User inbox.
  • To print PDF files or store PDF files in a User Inbox, the optional Direct Printing Kit is required. The Direct Printing Kit is not required to view PDF files.


Viewing a PDF File

You can view a linked PDF file.


  1. Press the link to the PDF file.

You cannot specify multiple PDF files at the same time. PDF files also cannot be open in more than two windows.

If a password is required to access the specified PDF file, enter the password.

  1. Press [View] → [OK].

The selected PDF file is displayed.

The keys on the PDF File Display screen are as follows:

1. First Page: Returns to the first page.
2. Back: Returns to the previous page.
3. Next: Proceeds to the next page.
4. Last Page: Proceeds to the last page.
5. Reduce: Reduces the display to a minimum of 25%.
6. Scale Ratio: Displays the PDF file that is currently displayed in the scale ratio shown here.
7. Enlarge: Enlarges the display to a maximum of 200%.
8. Adjust Height: Adjusts the display to the height of the PDF file.
9. Adjust Width: Adjusts the display to the width of the PDF file.
10. Rotate: Rotates the display 90°to the right.
11. Store in User Inbox: Saves the file in a User Inbox. (See "Saving a PDF File in a User Inbox.")
12. Print: Prints the PDF file.
13. Page Designation: Proceeds to the specified page.

When you press [Page Designation], the screen below is displayed. To proceed to a specific page, enter the desired page number using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].



Printing a PDF File

You can print a linked PDF file.


Remark
  • The print settings are restored to the default settings under the following conditions:
  • When the reset key is pressed
  • When the user logs out
  • When the Auto Clear mode activates

  1. Press the link to the PDF file.

You cannot specify multiple PDF files at the same time. PDF files also cannot be open in more than two windows.

If a password is required to access the specified PDF file, enter the password.

  1. Press [Print] → [OK].

You can also print a PDF file by pressing [] after displaying the PDF file. (See "Viewing a PDF File.")

The PDF file is downloaded.

  1. Press [Print Settings].

The Print Settings screen is displayed.

  1. Specify the settings for each item.

If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.


  • Press [Print Range].

  • Press [Specify Pages] → enter the range of pages to print using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

If you want to print all of the pages, press [All].


  • Select [Auto] or [Black] for <Color Mode>.

If you select [Auto], the machine automatically recognizes whether the currently displayed Web page is in color or black-and-white.


  • Press [Copies].

  • Press [-] or [+] to set the number of prints → press [OK].

The number of prints can be set from 1 to 9,999.

You can also use - (numeric keys) to enter the print quantity.


  • Press [Paper Select].

  • Select the paper size → press [Done].

To select the paper size automatically, select [Auto].

  • The paper size loaded in each of the paper drawers are displayed.

  • Press [2-sided Printing].

  • Press [On] → select the orientation → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Long Edge]: The front and back sides of the print have the same top-bottom orientation.
[Short Edge]: The front and back sides of the print have opposite top-bottom orientations.

If you do not want to make a two-sided print, press [Off].


  • Press [Finishing].

  • Select a Finishing mode → press [OK].

You can select from the following Finishing modes:

  • [Collate (Page order)]:
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and output.
  • [Group (Same pages)]:
All prints of the same Web page are grouped together and output.
  • [Staple]:
The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, stapled, and output. If you select [Staple], press [Next] → select the stapling type ([Corner] or [Double])→ select the stapling position → press [OK].

If you want the pages slightly offset vertically in the output tray, press [Offset].

If you do not want to set a Finishing mode, press [Off].

  • [Staple] is displayed only when an optional finisher is attached.
  • Depending on the optional finishers attached to the machine, [Rotation] may be displayed instead of [Offset]. To output sheets in alternating directions, press [Rotation].

  • Press [Image Combination].

  • If 'Auto' is selected for [Paper Select], the Image Combination mode cannot be set.
  • Select the type of image combination → select the image order → press [OK].

You can select from the following image combination types.

  • [2 on 1]:
This setting reduces a two page document to fit onto one page.
  • [4 on 1]:
This setting reduces a four page document to fit onto one page.
  • [6 on 1]:
This setting reduces a six page document to fit onto one page.
  • [8 on 1]:
This setting reduces an eight page document to fit onto one page.
  • [9 on 1]:
This setting reduces a nine page document to fit onto one page.
  • [16 on 1]:
This setting reduces a 16 page document to fit onto one page.

If you do not want to set image combination settings, press [Off].

If [4 on 1], [6 on 1], [8 on 1], [9 on 1], or [16 on 1] is selected, a screen similar to the one below is displayed.


  • Press [Booklet].

  • If 'Auto' is selected for [Paper Select], the Booklet mode cannot be set.
  • Press [On] → select whether to saddle stitch → select the orientation → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Left Opening]: A booklet that opens to the left is created.
[Right Opening]: A booklet that opens to the right is created.

[Saddle Stitch] and [Do Not S. Stitch] are displayed only if the optional saddle finisher is attached.

If you do not want to create a booklet, press [Off].


  • Press [Print Comments].

  • Select how to print the comments → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Auto]: Prints the PDF file and only the comments specified for printing.
[Print All Comments]: Prints the PDF file and all the comments.
[Do Not Print]: Prints only the PDF file.

  • Press [Document Password].

  • Enter the document password → press [OK].

  • If there is no document password set for the selected PDF file, it is not necessary to enter the document password.
  • When printing a PDF file set with a document password, you must enter the document password beforehand. If a password is not entered, you cannot print the PDF file.
  • If you are printing a PDF file after displaying it, the document password used when opening the file is automatically set.
  1. Press [OK].

The selected print settings are set.

  1. Press [Start Print].

Printing starts.



Saving a PDF File in a User Inbox

PDF files that are linked from Web contents can be saved in a User Inbox.


Remark
  • Depending on the model of the machine, this function may not be supported.
  • PDF files cannot be saved to Confidential Inboxes or Memory RX Inboxes.
  • If comments are set for the PDF file, they are also saved automatically.
  • You cannot change the print settings for comments after saving a PDF file to a User Inbox.
  • You cannot save long-strip PDF files into a User inbox.

  1. Press the link to the PDF file.

You cannot specify multiple PDF files at the same time. PDF files also cannot be open in more than two windows.

If a password is set for the specified PDF file, enter the password.

  1. Press [Store in User Inbox] → [OK].

You can save a file in a User Inbox by pressing [View] → (Store in User Inbox). (See "Viewing a PDF File.")

  1. Select the User Inbox in which to store the file → enter a document name and document password → press [OK].

Select the User Inbox in which you want to save the file from the pull-down menu.

If a password is set, specify the name of the document upon saving in [Document Name]. If nothing is entered, the document is saved with the date and time as the file name. You can enter up to 24 characters for the document name. Characters after the 24th are ignored.

In [Document Password], enter the password to display the PDF file. If a PDF file is already displayed after entering a password, the password is automatically set.

  • PDF files that are not allowed to be printed, due to Adobe Acrobat settings, cannot be stored in a User Inbox.
  • If there is no document password set for the selected PDF file, it is not necessary to enter the document password.
  • After saving a PDF file with a password in a User Inbox, the file becomes a document without a password. To send it as a PDF file with a password, you must reset the password.
  • If a password is set for the selected User Inbox, the screen for entering the password for the User Inbox is displayed.
  • To check whether the file was stored, confirm the User Inbox that was selected as the storing destination.
  • If you are entering a document password, enter the correct password. If a password is entered incorrectly, the file will not be stored in the User Inbox.
  • The inbox number, document number, and document password set when saving a PDF file to a User Inbox are cleared when you open a new PDF file. However, if you press the [Refresh] button to refresh the currently displayed page, these settings are not cleared.


Network

This category describes network connectivity and setup instructions.



Optional Equipment and System Requirements

This section describes the optional equipment and system environments with which the machine is compatible.


Remark
  • For more information on the equipment needed, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • By connecting the machine to the network, its settings and operations can be performed on computers using the Remote UI and other utilities, without the need for any optional equipment. For more information on the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." For more information on utilities, see "NetSpot Suite."


Printing or Sending a Fax from a Computer


Optional Equipment Requirements

The following optional equipment is required for printing or sending a fax from a computer:


Remark
  • The optional Expansion RAM is necessary if you want to use the optional PS Printer Kit.

  • Printing
  • If you want to use the UFR II printer driver
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • If you want to use the PCL printer driver
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • If you want to use the PS printer driver
  • PS Printer Kit

Remark
  • To print with Mac OS 9, you need to use a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc. with the Mac OS, via an AppleTalk network.
  • The PS printer driver can be used only in a Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later environment. Also, you cannot print documents via an AppleTalk network.
  • The following optional equipment is not available in some regions:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit

  • Sending a Fax (for a TCP/IP, NetBIOS, or NetWare network)
  • Super G3 FAX Board


System Requirements

The following network and system environments are compatible when printing or sending a fax from a computer:


Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later.

  • With a TCP/IP Network:
  • Compatible OS
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Business
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
  • Solaris Version 1.1x (SunOS Version 4.1x) or later
  • Solaris Version 2.5x (SunOS Version 5.5x) or later
  • Mac OS X 10.3 or later
  • Computers/memory
  • Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly

Remark
  • If you are using Mac OS X, compatible operating systems differ depending on the type of printer driver. For details, see Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started.

  • With a NetBIOS Network:
  • Compatible OS
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Business
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
  • Mac OS X 10.3 or later
  • Compatible Protocol
  • NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)
  • Computers/memory
  • Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly

Remark
  • When you are using Mac OS X 10.3 or later, you can only print via a NetBIOS network if you are using a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc. with the Mac OS.

  • With a NetWare Network:
  • Compatible Servers
  • Novell NetWare Version 3.2/4.1/4.11/4.2/5/5.1/6/6.5
  • Compatible Clients
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Business
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
  • Computers/memory
  • Any computer which runs the above operating system software properly
  • With an AppleTalk Network:
  • Compatible AppleTalk
  • EtherTalk Phase 2
  • See Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started for compatible operating systems and computers.

Remark
  • The machine does not support Macintosh LocalTalk networks.

  • With a Server-Based Computing Environment:
  • Compatible Windows Terminal Server (Services)
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Compatible Software
  • Citrix MetaFrame 1.8
  • Citrix MetaFrame XP


Using E-Mail/I-Fax


Optional Equipment Requirements

  • Color Universal Send Kit


System Requirements

The following system environments are confirmed for using the e-mail/I-fax functions:

  • Compatible mail forwarding server software
  • Sendmail 8.93 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
    (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)
  • Compatible mail receiving server software
  • Qpopper 2.53 or later (UNIX)
  • Microsoft Exchange Server (Windows)
    (Microsoft Exchange Server 5.5 + Service Pack 1 or later)
  • Lotus Domino R4.6 or later (Windows)

Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later.
  • The machine sends e-mail or I-fax messages to mail servers using SMTP. The machine can receive incoming messages from a mail server using the POP3 protocol or directly using the machine's own SMTP receiving function.
    If the latter method is used, it is not necessary for the mail server to support the POP3 protocol.
  • The machine can receive I-fax images and error e-mail messages sent when errors occur during communication, but not any other type of e-mail.


Sending Data


Optional Equipment Requirements

  • Color Universal Send Kit


System Requirements

The following network and system environments are compatible when sending data from the machine to a file server, depending on the type of network used:


Remark
  • If you are using Windows 2000, you need to install Service Pack 2 or later.

  • With a TCP/IPv4 Network (Using FTP):
  • Compatible servers
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Internet Information Services (IIS) 5.0
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional and IIS 5.1
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and IIS 6.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate and IIS 7.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Business and IIS 7.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium and IIS 7.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic and IIS 7.0
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise and IIS 7.0
  • Solaris Version 2.6 or later
  • Red Hat Linux 7.2 or later
  • Mac OS X
  • FTP server for iW Document Manager Gateway
  • Compatible protocol
  • TCP/IPv4
  • With a TCP/IPv6 Network (Using FTP):
  • Compatible servers
  • Solaris Version 9 or later
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later
  • Mac OS X 10.3 or later
  • Compatible protocol
  • TCP/IPv6
  • With a TCP/IPv4 Network (Using WebDAV):
  • Compatible servers
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and IIS 5.0
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional and IIS 5.0
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional and IIS 5.1
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and IIS 6.0
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server and Apache 2.0 for Win 32
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional and Apache 2.0 for Win 32
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and Apache 2.0 for Win 32
  • Solaris Version 2.6 or later, and Apache 2.0 or later
  • Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS/ES/WS 4.0 or later, and Apache 2.0 or later
  • Mac OS X
  • Compatible protocol for the WebDAV server
  • TCP/IPv4
  • With a TCP/IPv6 Network (Using WebDAV):
  • Compatible servers
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003 and IIS 6.0
  • Solaris Version 9 or later, and Apache 2.0 or later
  • Compatible protocol for the WebDAV server
  • TCP/IPv6

Remark
  • If you connect to the internet via a proxy, the proxy server must support IPv6.

  • With a NetBIOS Network:
  • Compatible servers
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Server
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition
  • Microsoft Windows Server 2003
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Ultimate
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Business
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Premium
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Home Basic
  • Microsoft Windows Vista Enterprise
  • Compatible server software for sending data
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)
  • Compatible protocol
  • NetBIOS over TCP/IP (NetBT)
  • With a NetWare Network:
  • Compatible server
  • Novell NetWare Version 3.2/4.11/4.2/5/5.1/6/6.5
  • Compatible protocol
  • IPX


Checking Your Network Environment

Refer to the following examples to confirm the network environment that is connected to the machine, and then perform the necessary operations for that environment.



Sample Windows Network

In a Windows network environment, the TCP/IP or NetBIOS (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) protocol can be used. Multiple protocols can be used at the same time. In addition to IPv4 (Internet Protocol Version 4), the machine also supports IPv6 (Internet Protocol Version 6), and has a dual stack configuration that enables it to communicate with both IPv4 networks and IPv6 networks. You can select whether to use the functions of IPv4 or IPv6. You can also enable the functions of both IPv4 and IPv6. The IPv4 network and IPv6 network used by the machine supports IPSec (Security Architecture for Internet Protocol). (See "IPSec Settings.") To use the e-mail/I-fax function, the TCP/IP protocol is required.

After configuring the settings in accordance with "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network," "Interface Settings," or "Communication Environment Setup," specify a TCP/IP or NetBIOS network, depending on the protocol.


Remark
  • The machine does not support NetBEUI.
  • To perform IPSec communication, the optional IPSec Board must be installed after installing the optional Expansion Bus.


Sample Macintosh Network

In Mac OS 8/9, the AppleTalk (EtherTalk) protocol is used. In Mac OS X, either the AppleTalk (EtherTalk), TCP/IP, or NetBIOS (NetBIOS over TCP/IP) protocol can be used.

To use the e-mail/I-fax function or to send data, the TCP/IP protocol is required.

After configuring the settings in accordance with "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network," "Interface Settings," or "Communication Environment Setup," specify an AppleTalk (Macintosh), TCP/IP, or NetBIOS network, depending on the protocol.


Remark
  • The protocol you can use differs depending on the version of Mac OS or type of printer driver. For details, see Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started.


Sample UNIX Network

With UNIX computers, the TCP/IP protocol is used.

After configuring the settings in accordance with "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network," "Interface Settings," or "Communication Environment Setup," specify a TCP/IP network.



Using a Network with Various Types of Computers

If there are various types of computers on the network, the network operations you are required to perform depend on the type of computers being used.

For example, if you are using Windows XP and Macintosh computers, you will need to specify the settings described in both "Sample Windows Network" and "Sample Macintosh Network".

To use the e-mail/I-fax function, the TCP/IP protocol is required.
To use the data sending function, either the TCP/IP, NetWare, or NetBIOS protocol is required.

After configuring the settings in accordance with "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network," "Interface Settings," or "Communication Environment Setup," specify a TCP/IP, NetWare, NetBIOS, or AppleTalk (Macintosh) network, depending on the protocol.


Remark


Network Environment Setup Procedures

Before using the machine in a network environment, it is necessary to perform the following setup procedures.


Connect the machine to the network using the network cables.

Specify the interface settings for communication between the machine and computers on your network. To specify the settings, use:

  • The machine's control panel
  • The Remote UI (via a web browser)

Set up the environment for communication between the machine and computers on your network.



Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network

The machine can be connected to a computer or network with a USB cable or 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T Ethernet cable.


Remark
  • External USB devices (e.g., memory, keyboard, mouse, etc.) are not supported.
  • A USB cable or network cable are not included in this package. Please obtain a suitable cable for your computer or network.


Connecting to a Network

The machine supports TCP/IP, AppleTalk, and NetWare, which enables it to be used by Windows, Macintosh, UNIX, and Linux computers. It also has a 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T connector that can be used on most LANs.

When using 10Base-T/100Base-TX, connect the machine's RJ-45 connector to a hub port using a Category 5 twisted pair LAN cable. When using 1000Base-T, it is recommended you use an Enhanced Category 5 twisted pair LAN cable.


Remark
  • When connecting the interface cable or network cable, be sure to observe the following precautions to avoid electrical shock.
  • Turn OFF the computer and disconnect the power cord from the power outlet.
  • You cannot use the machine as a repeater, bridge, or gateway.
  • If two or more machines are on an AppleTalk network, they should be switched 'ON' 10 seconds or more apart.
  • The machine can automatically detect the type of Ethernet (10Base-T, 100Base-TX, or 1000Base-T).
  • If you are using a mixed 10Base-T/100Base-TX/1000Base-T environment, devices on the network (hubs, routers, etc.) must support the mixed environment. For more information, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • After connecting the network cable, perform the following operations. (For more information, see the relevant descriptions.)
  • Set the date and time, and System Manager settings. (See "Security.")
  • Set the network settings.
  • Install a driver if necessary. (See Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," or Chapter 11, "Before Sending Faxes from Computers," in Getting Started.)
  • Install a utility if necessary. (See the manuals provided with the utility.)


Connecting to a USB Interface

You can connect the machine to a computer with a USB port via a USB cable. The machine is USB 2.0 Hi-Speed compatible. The drivers, and utility that matches the operating system on your computer will be installed. For more information on installing the driver through a USB connection, see Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," or Chapter 11, "Before Sending Faxes from Computers," in Getting Started. For information on installing a utility, see the manuals provided with the utility.


Remark
  • If you connect or disconnect the USB cable while the machine's main power switch is ON, do not touch the metal parts around the connector, as this may result in electrical shock.
  • Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable in the following situations, as it may cause your computer or the machine to operate poorly:
  • When installing the driver
  • When the computer is booting up
  • When printing
  • If you disconnect the USB cable with the computer or machine's main power switch ON, always wait at least five seconds before reconnecting the cable. Immediately reconnecting the cable may cause your computer or machine to operate poorly.
  • When the machine is connected to a personal computer via the USB cable, you will not be able to use some of the utilities.
  • If you connect the machine to a personal computer via a USB cable, confirm that [Use USB Device] (in the System Settings screen) is set to 'On'. (See "Security.")
  • If you connect the machine to a Macintosh via a USB cable, the Macintosh, if shut down, may start up when the machine starts up or returns from the Sleep mode. If this happens, disconnect the USB cable (the use of a USB hub between the machine and the Macintosh may solve this problem).
  • If the machine is connected to a computer with a USB cable, you can print a document from your computer using the printer driver, or send a fax from your computer using the fax driver.
  • You cannot specify a computer connected to the machine through a USB connection as a destination for Send jobs or forwarded jobs. Also, with that computer, you cannot use the Remote UI and the Network Scan function.
  • The appropriate USB interface differs depending on the operating system of the connected computer as follows. For more information, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista: USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)
  • Mac OS 8/9/X (10.3.2 or earlier): USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)
  • Mac OS X (10.3.3 or later): USB 2.0 Hi-Speed/USB Full-Speed (USB 1.1 equivalent)


Touch Panel Display Transition

The following is a flow diagram of the touch panel display used in this category.

Specify the network settings from the Additional Functions screen displayed by pressing (Additional Functions).


Remark
  • Settings specified from the control panel become effective after the machine is restarted, after the procedure. Turn OFF the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON.
  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, enter them. (See "Security.")


Interface Settings

This section describes how to specify the interface settings from the control panel. If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.

After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see "Network Setting Items."


  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.] → specify the following.

[On]: If errors related to network connections occur, an error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine. If you want to use the machine in a network environment, select [On].

[Off]: Messages related to network connections are no longer displayed. If you want to use the machine without connecting to a network, select [Off].

  • Even if you switch the [Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.] setting from 'On' to 'Off', if the network connections are correctly set they will not be disconnected. The settings in the Network Settings screen will not be changed.
  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [Ethernet Driver Settings] → specify the following.


  • <Auto Detect>: [On]

If you reconnect the network cable (for example, reconnect the cable to a different Ethernet hub) with the machine's main power switch ON, the Auto Detect function will not work even if you set <Auto Detect> to [On]. Turn OFF the machine, wait at least 10 seconds, and then turn it ON. (Connect the cable with the machine's main power switch OFF.)

  • The machine automatically determines the Ethernet type. Press [On] unless you want to specify a particular Ethernet setting.

Select the appropriate items for <Communication Mode> and <Ethernet Type>, according to the network environment you are using.

  • To connect with 1000Base-T, select [Full Duplex] for <Communication Mode>.


Communication Environment Setup

This section describes how to set up the environment for communication between the machine and computers on your network. If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.

After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see "Network Setting Items."


Remark
  • [SNMP Settings] does not support AppleTalk networks.

  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [SNMP Settings] → specify the settings for SNMP v. 1.

[On] for <Use SNMP v. 1>: Follow the procedure below to specify the MIB access permissions and community names.

  • The machine supports the SNMP v. 1 and SNMP v. 3 management functions. You can use them simultaneously. The [Read Only]/[Read/Write] functions of SNMP v. 1 and the security functions of SNMP v. 3, such as an encrypted communication path, enable you to manage devices more securely. The available combinations of SNMP v. 1 and SNMP v. 3 functions you can use are shown below:
    SNMP v. 1 SNMP v. 3 Description
    Use SNMP v. 1 MIB Access Permission Use SNMP v. 3
    On Read/Write On/Off You can set or browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 1 to obtain information. As the write access with SNMP v. 1 is enabled, the security functions of SNMP v. 3 are not available, regardless of the settings for <Use SNMP v. 3>.
    On Read Only On You can only browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 1 to obtain information. Only users who have been assigned access rights can set each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 3.
    On Read Only Off You can only browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 1 to obtain information.
    Off - On Only users who have been assigned access rights can set or browse each item of the machine with a utility that uses SNMP v. 3.
    Off - Off You cannot set or browse each item of the machine with a utility.
  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, press [On] for both <Use SNMP v. 1> and [Enable Dedicated Port].
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, it is not possible to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if <Use SNMP v. 1>, <Use SNMP v. 3>, and [Enable Dedicated Port] are 'On'. For details, see "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or "TCP/IPv6 Settings."

  • Press [Community Name 1 Settings] → [On] → specify the settings for <MIB Access Permission> and the community name in [Community Name].

You can also change the community name in [Community Name] to a name other than 'public'.


  • Press [Community Name 2 Settings] → [On] → specify the settings for <MIB Access Permission> and the community name in [Community Name].

You can also change the community name in [Community Name] to a name other than 'public2'.


  1. Specify the settings for SNMP v. 3.

[On] for <Use SNMP v. 3>: Specify the user and context according to the following procedures.

  • An SNMP v. 3 user with the following settings is registered by default. Delete or change these settings as necessary.
  • User: initial
  • MIB Access Permission: Read/Write
  • Security Settings: Auth Yes/Encrypt Yes
  • Authent. Algorithm: MD5
  • Authent. Password: initial
  • Encryption Password: initial

  • Press [User Settings] → [Register] → specify the user name, MIB permissions, and security settings.

If you select [Auth Yes/Encrypt Yes] from the Security Settings drop-down list, select the authentication algorithm → enter the passwords for authentication and encryption. If you select [Auth. Yes/Encrypt. No] from the Security Settings drop-down list, select the authentication algorithm → enter the password for authentication.


  • Press [User Settings] to select the user whose settings you want to confirm or change → press [Details/Edit].

Confirm the displayed information → change the settings if necessary.


  • Press [User Settings] to select the user whose settings you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • Press [User Settings] → select the user whose status you want to change → press [User On/Off].

  • Press [Context Settings] → edit the context.

If you want to add a context, press [Register] to add a new context. If you want to change a context, select the context you want to change → press [Edit] to change the context. If you want to erase a context, select the context you want to erase → press [Erase].

  • A context named 'NULL' is registered by default. The 'NULL' context cannot be deleted, and is not displayed on the Context Settings screen.
  1. Set monitoring for the printer management information.

[On] for <Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host>: If you are using Windows Vista and set [Standard TCP/IP port] for the printer driver port, the SNMP port monitoring function will be enabled automatically to obtain printer management information such as information on print applications and printer ports.

  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [Enable Dedicated Port] → specify the following.

[On]: You can set or browse detailed information on the machine with a Canon printer driver or utility (UFR II/PCL/PS printer drivers, NetSpot Device Installer, etc.).

  • If you want to use a Canon printer driver or utility, press [On] for both <Use SNMP v. 1> and [Enable Dedicated Port].
  • You can restrict the IP addresses of computers on which items can be set or browsed. If you restrict the IP addresses, it is not possible to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine on computers other than those whose IP addresses are allowed, even if <Use SNMP v. 1>, <Use SNMP v. 3>, and [Enable Dedicated Port] are 'On'. For details, see "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or "TCP/IPv6 Settings."
  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [Use Spooler] → specify the following.

[On]: You can spool print jobs transmitted to this machine on the machine's hard disk. Set the spooler if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

  • If the optional PS Printer Kit is activated, take note of the following:
  • If the print job is sent from a Macintosh computer to a PS printer, you cannot specify whether to spool under this option. Spooling is determined by the name of the printer selected in the Macintosh screen. For more information, see "Setting Up a Computer for Printing."
  • If you print a file in PDF or PS format by specifying its URL on the Remote UI, the print job will always be spooled, regardless of the settings made under this option.
  • When you spool a print job on the machine's hard disk, the time required to release a computer outputting a print job is shortened.


IEEE802.1X Authentication Settings

This section describes how to set the IEEE802.1X authentication.

For IEEE802.1X, the RADIUS server requires user authentication from the supplicant (machine) when connecting to a network. EAPOL (EAP over LAN) is used for communication between the supplicant and the authenticator (LAN switch) that performs access control of the terminal based on the authentication results. Authentication information is managed collectively with the RADIUS (Remote Authentication Dial In User Service) server, and then the supplicant is authenticated. Invalid access can be prevented because this authentication method permits only supplicants authenticated by the RADIUS server to connect to the network via an authenticator. The authenticator blocks communication from supplicants not authenticated by the RADIUS server.

The machine supports the following methods of authentications:


Remark
  • You cannot set the EAP-TLS method and the EAP-TTLS/PEAP method at the same time.

  • EAP-TLS (Extensible Authentication Protocol-Transport Level Security)

For the EAP-TLS method, authentication is performed by issuing a digital certificate bilaterally to both the client and the RADIUS server. The key pair and client certificate sent from the machine are verified using the CA certificate on the RADIUS server. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server is verified using the CA certificate on the client (the machine). The CA certificate used to verify the server certificate must be registered. For information on installing the CA certificate file using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." For information on registering the installed CA certificate file, see "Registering a CA Certificate File Installed from a Computer."

Furthermore, the settings for the key pair (in PKCS#12 format) and the client certificate are necessary to use the EAP-TLS with the machine. After installing the key pair file and client certificate file using the Remote UI (see "Remote UI"), set the key pair and client certificate for EAP-TLS as the default key with the control panel of the machine.

  • EAP-TTLS (EAP-Tunneled TLS)

For the EAP-TTLS method, only the RADIUS server issues a digital certificate. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server is verified using the CA certificate on the client. The CA certificate used to verify the server certificate must be registered. For information on installing the CA certificate file using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." For information on registering the CA certificate file installed, see "Registering a CA Certificate File Installed from a Computer."

Furthermore, the name of the user to authenticate with IEEE802.1X authentication and the password need to be set to use EAP-TTLS with the machine.

The user can select two types of internal authentication protocol supported by EAP-TTLS: MS-CHAPv2 (Microsoft Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol Version 2), or PAP (Password Authentication Protocol). You cannot set both MS-CHAPv2 and PAP simultaneously.

  • PEAP (Protected EAP)

For the PEAP method, only the RADIUS server issues a digital certificate. The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server is verified using the CA certificate on the client. The CA certificate used to verify the server certificate must be registered. For information on installing the CA certificate file using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI." For instructions on registering the installed CA certificate file, see "Registering a CA Certificate File Installed from a Computer."

Furthermore, the name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication and the password need to be set to use PEAP with the machine.

The only internal authentication protocol supported by PEAP is MS-CHAPv2.



Selecting the IEEE802.1X Authentication Method

This section describes how to select the IEEE802.1X authentication method.


  1. Press [IEEE802.1X Settings] on the Network Settings screen → select [On] for <Use IEEE802.1X>.
  • If you set <Use IEEE802.1X> to 'On', the machine will not enter a complete Sleep mode.
  1. Select the IEEE802.1X authentication method on the IEEE802.1X Settings screen.

Register the CA certificate (see "Registering a CA Certificate File Installed from a Computer") in advance. If setting the EAP-TLS method, also install the key pair file and the client certificate file (see "Remote UI").


  • Select [On] for <Use TLS> → press [Key and Certificate].

  • Select the key pair you want to use → press [Set as the Default Key] to register the key pair and client certificate to use for EAP-TLS.

  • You cannot specify 'Device Signature Key' (used for key pairs for adding digital signatures to PDFs or XPSs) or 'AMS' (used for key pairs for access restrictions) as the name for the key pair.
  • It is necessary to use the Remote UI to delete a key pair registered for IEEE802.1X authentication. (See "Remote UI.")
  • You can check the content of a certificate by selecting a key pair on the Key and Certificate screen, and pressing [Certificate Details]. On the Certificate Details screen, you can press [Certificate Verification] to verify the certificate.
  • You can check what a key pair is being used for by selecting a key pair with 'Using' displayed for <Used> on the Key and Certificate screen, and pressing [Display Use Location].

  • Select [On] for <Use TTLS>.
  • Select the internal authentication protocol to use.

  • You cannot set both MS-CHAPv2 and PAP simultaneously.
  • Enter the name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication in [User], and the password of the user in [Password].

  • Select [On] for <Use PEAP>.
  • Enter the name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication in [User], and the password of the user in [Password].


TCP/IP Network Setup Procedures

To use a TCP/IP network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.


Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:

  • The machine's control panel
  • The Remote UI (via a web browser)
  • Canon utilities (NetSpot Device Installer, etc.)

Specify the settings for each computer you use for printing or sending a fax. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")

Specify the settings of the computer receiving data sent from the machine. (Optional equipment is required to send data. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")


Remark
  • It is recommended that steps 1 and 3 above be performed by the network administrator.
  • The machine or optional printing equipment does not come with printer driver software that can be used on a UNIX platform. (Use LPD to set up a printer in UNIX.)
  • As the fax option does not come with fax driver software for the UNIX platform, it is not possible to send a fax from a UNIX platform.


Protocol Settings

This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.

After configuring the settings, you can change the content by using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see "Network Setting Items."


Remark
  • When using functions to access external servers on the internet, you may not be able to access them due to the settings of firewalls, etc. In this case, consult your network administrator.


TCP/IPv4 Settings

This section describes the procedure for setting TCP/IPv4 using the control panel. After specifying the settings for TCP/IPv4, follow the procedure in "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6" to specify the required settings, and the procedure in "Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings" to check whether the network settings are correct. If the settings for TCP/IPv6 are already specified and you have finished specifying the settings common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6, only check the network settings after completing this procedure.

If you want to use IPv6 communications at the same time, follow the procedure in "TCP/IPv6 Settings," to specify the required settings, and the procedure in "Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings," to confirm the settings.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv4 Settings] → [Use IPv4].

  1. In <Use IPv4>, specify the following.

[On] for <Use IPv4>: IPv4 networks can be used.

[Off] for <Use IPv4>: IPv4 networks cannot be used, regardless of the settings specified for IPv4 on the Additional Functions screen. The ARP (Address Resolution Protocol) table is also disabled.

  • If you set <Use IPv4> to 'Off', you cannot use a NetBIOS network.
  1. On the TCP/IPv4 Settings screen, press [IP Address Settings] → specify the following.


  • [DHCP], [RARP], and [BOOTP]: [Off]

Enter the appropriate values in [IP Address], [Subnet Mask], and [Gateway Address].

  • It takes about two minutes to check whether the DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP settings can be used. If you do not plan to use one of these settings, it is recommended that you turn them off.

  • [DHCP], [RARP], or [BOOTP]: [On]

If this information cannot be obtained via DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP after you restart the machine, enter the IP address, subnet mask, and gateway address to use the settings entered in this step.

  • If the machine is restarted after DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP settings are specified, the TCP/IP Settings screen displays the IP address setting values obtained from the DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP server. (If the IP address, host name, and domain name have been previously set, these will be overwritten by the setting values obtained from DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP.)
  • If you use DHCP without the DNS dynamic update function, it is recommended that an identical IP address be assigned to the machine at all times. (If the IP address is not identical, the host name for the machine will not correspond to the IP address.)

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [DNS Settings] → [DNS Server Address Settings].

  1. In <IPv4>, specify the following.

If you want to use dynamic DNS updating, enter the IPv4 address of the DNS server in [Primary DNS Server].

If you do not want to set up a secondary DNS server, enter <0.0.0.0>.

  • If you set [BOOTP] or [DHCP] to 'On' in step 3, the IP address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings] → in <IPv4>, specify the following.

Enter the name of the machine as [Host Name], and the network domain name of the machine as [Domain Name]. If you want to use dynamic DNS updating, it is necessary to set a host name and domain name.

  • If you set [BOOTP] or [DHCP] to 'On' in step 3, the host name and domain name you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Dynamic Update Settings] → in <IPv4>, specify the following.

[On] for <DNS Dynamic Update>: If your environment includes a dynamic DNS server, you can automatically register the IPv4 address, host name, and domain name set for the machine in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.

  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2000 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • In the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Automatically update DHCP client information in DNS] → [Update DNS only if DHCP client requests].
  • If you have a DHCP server running Windows 2003 Server that uses the DHCP service and want to register the machine's DNS record, configure the following settings in the DHCP server:
  • In the DHCP server, right-click the [Scope] icon → click [Properties]. In the [DNS] sheet of the displayed dialog box, select [Enable DNS dynamic updates according to the settings below] → [Dynamically update DNS A and PTR (Pointer Record) records only if requested by the DHCP clients].
  • In the Active Directory environment, right-click the icon of the DHCP server you are using → select [Properties]. In the [Advanced] sheet of the displayed dialog box, click [Credentials]. In the [DNS dynamic update credentials] dialog box, enter the user name, domain, and password for the Active Directory.
  1. On the IPv4 Settings screen, press [IP Address Range Settings] → specify the following.

You need to set <RX/Print Range> if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, the optional Super G3 FAX Board, or the optional Color Universal Send Kit.

  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IPv4 addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IPv4 addresses of computers on which items for the machine can be set or browsed, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IPv4 addresses are not allowed; a utility on the computers cannot be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IPv4 addresses of computers from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) can be sent to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IPv4 addresses are not allowed. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")

  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv4 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [Off]

  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv4 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [Off]

  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv4 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses that are to be permitted.

  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv4 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses that are to be rejected.


  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv4 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [Off]
  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv4 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [Off]

  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv4 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses that are to be permitted.

  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv4 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv4 address or a range of IPv4 addresses that are to be rejected.

  • You can register up to eight IPv4 addresses or IPv4 address ranges.
  • The IPv4 address '0.0.0.0' cannot be specified.
  • The value of [First Address] for [Multiple Addresses] should be smaller than or equal to that of [Last Address].
  • If <Apply Settings> is set to 'Off' for both [Permit IPv4 Address] and [Reject IPv4 Address], all IPv4 addresses are permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> is set to 'Off' for [Permit IPv4 Address] and <Apply Settings> is set to 'On' for [Reject IPv4 Address], IPv4 addresses that are beyond the specified range of [Reject IPv4 Address] are permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> is set to 'On' for [Permit IPv4 Address] and <Apply Settings> is set to 'Off' for [Reject IPv4 Address], IPv4 addresses that are beyond the specified range of [Permit IPv4 Address] are not permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> for both [Permit IPv4 Address] and [Reject IPv4 Address] is set to 'On', IPv4 addresses that are beyond the ranges of both [Permit IPv4 Address] and [Reject IPv4 Address] are not permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> for both [Permit IPv4 Address] and [Reject IPv4 Address] is set to 'On', IPv4 addresses that are within the ranges of both [Permit IPv4 Address] and [Reject IPv4 Address] are not permitted.
  • If the usage of a protocol or print application is not permitted on your device, it cannot be used even after its IPv4 address is permitted on the machine; on your device, configure the settings to permit the protocol or print application.
  • This machine logs attempts to gain access from IPv4 addresses that it has been set to reject. For instructions on how to refer to the access log, see "Viewing the Network Access Log."


TCP/IPv6 Settings

This section describes the procedure for setting TCP/IPv6 using the control panel. After specifying the settings for TCP/IPv6, follow the procedure in "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6" to specify the required settings, and the procedure in "Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings" to check whether the network settings are correct. If the settings for TCP/IPv4 are already specified and you have finished specifying the settings common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6, only check the network settings after completing this procedure. If you want to use IPv4 communications at the same time, follow the procedure in "TCP/IPv4 Settings" to specify the required settings, and the procedure in "Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings" to check the settings.

The machine can use up to seven of the following IPv6 addresses. With IPv6 communication, multiple IPv6 addresses can be used at the same time.


Remark
  • If the IPv6 address assigned to the machine is the same as another node, you may not be able to perform IPv6 communication, even though an IPv6 address is displayed on the screen.

  • Link local address (1)

An address that is only valid within the same link. A link local address is automatically set using a specific prefix (fe80::) and an interface identifier generated from the MAC address of the machine. When the machine is using the functions of IPv6, one link local address is always registered.

  • Manual address (0 or 1)

A fixed address that is set from the control panel.

  • Stateless address (0 to 4)

A stateless address is automatically set using the machine's MAC address and the prefix (information indicating the network belonged to) included in the RA (Router Advertisement) notified by the router when the machine is started.

  • Stateful address (0 or 1)

A stateful address can be obtained from a DHCP server using DHCPv6.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv6 Settings] → [Use IPv6].

  1. In [Use IPv6], specify the following.

[On] for <Use IPv6>: You can use an IPv6 network. A link local address is automatically set.

  1. On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [Stateless Address Settings] → specify the following.

[On] for <Use Stateless Address>: A stateless address is automatically set when the machine is started.

  • The stateless address is discarded when the machine is restarted (with the machine's main power switch ON).
  1. On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [Manual Address Settings] → specify the following.

[On] for <Use Manual Address>: You can set the IPv6 address manually.

Enter the IPv6 address value in [Manual Address] and the IPv6 address prefix length in [Prefix Length].

Enter the default router address value in [Default Router Addr.]. If you do not want to specify the default router address, leave [Default Router Addr.] blank.

  • You cannot use a manual address if you leave [Manual Address] blank. You also cannot set any of the following types of address for [Manual Address]:
  • Multicast address
  • Address composed entirely of zeros
  • IPv4 compatible address (an IPv6 address with the top 96 bits set to '0' and an IPv4 address in the lower 32 bits)
  • IPv4 mapped address (an IPv6 address with the top 96 bits set to '0:0:0:0:0:ffff:' and an IPv4 address in the lower 32 bits)
  • You cannot enter a multicast address or an address composed entirely of zeros in [Default Router Addr.].
  1. On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [Use DHCPv6] → specify the following.

[On] for <Use DHCPv6>: You can use DHCPv6 to obtain a stateful address from a DHCP server.

  1. On the IPv6 Settings screen, press [IP Address Range Settings] → specify the following.

You need to set <RX/Print Range> if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, the optional Super G3 FAX Board, or the optional Color Universal Send Kit.

  • You can maintain security by setting the range of IPv6 addresses for computers that can obtain access to the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IPv6 addresses of computers on which items for the machine can be set or browsed, it is not possible to use the Remote UI on computers whose IPv6 addresses are not allowed; a utility on the computers cannot be used to set or browse detailed information concerning the machine.
  • Once you set the range of IPv6 addresses of computers from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) can be sent to the machine, the machine rejects data sent from computers whose IPv6 addresses are not allowed. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")

  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv6 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [Off]

  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv6 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [Off]

  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv6 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses that are to be permitted. Also specify the prefix and prefix length for the IPv6 address.

  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv6 Address] for <RX/Print Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses that are to be rejected. Also specify the prefix and prefix length for the IPv6 address.


  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv6 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [Off]
  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv6 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [Off]

  • <Apply Settings> of [Permit IPv6 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses that are to be permitted. Also specify the prefix and prefix length for the IPv6 address.

  • <Apply Settings> of [Reject IPv6 Address] for <Setting/Browsing Range>: [On]

Press [Register] → store only one IPv6 address or a range of IPv6 addresses that are to be rejected. Also specify the prefix and prefix length for the IPv6 address.

  • A total of eight (groups) of IPv6 addresses, ranges of IPv6 addresses, or IPv6 address prefixes can be set.
  • You cannot specify a multicast address or an address composed entirely of zeros for an IPv6 address.
  • If you enter '0' in [Prefix Length], all IPv6 addresses are not permitted.
  • If you enter '128' in [Prefix Length], the IPv6 addresses of the machine are not permitted.
  • If you want to enter a range of addresses, make sure that the number entered in [First Address] is less than the number entered in [Last Address].
  • If <Apply Settings> is set to 'Off' for both [Permit IPv6 Address] and [Reject IPv6 Address], all IPv6 addresses are permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> is set to 'Off' for [Permit IPv6 Address] and <Apply Settings> is set to 'On' for [Reject IPv6 Address], IPv6 addresses that are beyond the range specified in [Reject IPv6 Address] are permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> is set to 'On' for [Permit IPv6 Address] and <Apply Settings> is set to 'Off' for [Reject IPv6 Address], IPv6 addresses that are beyond the range specified in [Permit IPv6 Address] are not permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> for both [Permit IPv6 Address] and [Reject IPv6 Address] is set to 'On', IPv6 addresses that are beyond the ranges specified in both [Permit IPv6 Address] and [Reject IPv6 Address] are not permitted.
  • If <Apply Settings> for both [Permit IPv6 Address] and [Reject IPv6 Address] is set to 'On', IPv6 addresses that are within the ranges specified in both [Permit IPv6 Address] and [Reject IPv6 Address] are not permitted.
  • If the usage of a protocol or print application is not permitted on your device, it cannot be used even if its IPv6 address is permitted on the machine. Configure the settings of the device to permit the protocol or print application.
  • This machine logs attempts to gain access from IPv6 addresses that it has been set to reject. For instructions on how to refer to the access log, see "Viewing the Network Access Log."

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [DNS Settings] → [DNS Server Address Settings].

  1. In <IPv6>, specify the following.

If you want to use dynamic DNS updating, enter the IPv6 address of the DNS server in [Primary DNS Server].

If you do not want to specify a secondary DNS server, leave [Secondary DNS Server] blank.

  • You cannot enter any of the following types of address for [Primary DNS Server] or [Secondary DNS Server]:
  • Multicast address
  • Address composed entirely of zeros
  • Link local address
  • If you set <Use DHCPv6> to 'On' in step 5, the IPv6 address of a DNS server you set manually will be overwritten.
  1. On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings] → in <IPv6>, specify the following.

[On] for <Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4>: You can set the same host name or domain name used with IPv4 communication for IPv6 communication. If you set <Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4> to 'Off', enter the name of the machine in [Host Name] and the name of the domain the machine belongs to in [Domain Name]. It is necessary to set a host name and domain name if you want to use dynamic DNS updating.

  • If you set <Use DHCPv6> to 'On' in step 5, the domain name you set manually will be overwritten. Even if you set <Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4> to 'On', the domain name obtained from the DHCPv6 server is used.
  1. On the DNS Settings screen, press [DNS Dynamic Update Settings] → in <IPv6>, specify the following.

[On] for <DNS Dynamic Update>: If your environment includes a dynamic DNS server, you can automatically register the IPv6 address, host name, and domain name set for the machine in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.

[On] for <Register Stateless Address>: You can automatically register a stateless address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.

[On] for <Register Manual Address>: You can automatically register a manual address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.

[On] for <Register Stateful Address>: You can automatically register a stateful address in the DNS server using dynamic DNS updating.

  • Windows 2000 Server and Windows Server 2003 do not support DHCPv6 servers.


Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6

This section describes the procedure for specifying the settings common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6 using the control panel.

Specify the settings required for your network environment. If you want to use both TCP/IPv4 communications and TCP/IPv6 communications, specify the settings required for both protocols.

After performing this procedure, follow the procedure in "Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings" and "Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings" to check whether the network settings are correct.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [LPD Print Settings] → specify the following.

Specify the LPD print settings if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

[On]: You can use LPD as the print application.

  • You can only output a banner page if you are using the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, or the optional PS Printer Kit.
  • Output of a banner page is set on a print-job basis. Even if [On] is selected for <LPD Banner Page>, a banner page cannot be output for a print job unless it is set.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [RAW Print Settings] → specify the following.

Specify the Raw print settings if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

[On]: You can use Raw as the print application.

If you want to establish bidirectional communication using Port 9100, press [On] for <Bidirectional Communication>.

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SNTP Settings] → specify the following.

[On] for <Use SNTP>: You can perform time synchronization using SNTP.

Select the interval for performing time synchronization in <Polling Interval>.

In [NTP Server Address], enter the NTP server IP address or host name.

  • In order to perform time synchronization through SNTP, it is necessary to set the time zone of the region in which you are using the machine in advance. For instructions on how to set the time zone, see "Security."
  • If you want to set the digital signature method (see "Registering a Security Policy") for the IKE (Internet Key Exchange) authentication when performing IPSec communication, it is necessary to set <Use SNTP> to 'On'.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [FTP Print Settings] → specify the following.

Specify the FTP print settings if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, or the optional PS Printer Kit.

[On] for <Use FTP printing>: You can use FTP as the print application.

In [User], enter the login user name for access to the FTP server.

In [Password], enter the login password for access to the FTP server.

  • If you do not specify [User] and [Password], all user names and passwords will be valid.
  • The password will appear in the job list as a user name if you enter "anonymous" as a login user name for access to an FTP server without specifying [User] and [Password], or if you enter "anonymous" in [User]. (To display the job list, press [System Monitor] → [Print] → [Log] on the touch panel display.)
  • The port number is 21 and cannot be changed.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [WSD Print Settings] → specify the following.

Specify the WSD print settings if you are using Windows Vista, and the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

[On] for <Use WSD>: You can use WSD (Web Services for Devices) as the print application.

<Use WSD Browsing> is automatically set to 'On' if you set <Use WSD> to 'On', and enables device information to be obtained using WSD.

If you want to respond to multicast discovery requests, set <Use Multicast Discovery> to 'On'.

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Use PASV Mode for FTP] → specify the following.

Set the PASV mode for FTP if you are using the optional Color Universal Send Kit.

  • Whether you use the PASV mode for FTP depends on the network environment you are using and the settings of the file server you are sending to. Before specifying the PASV mode for FTP, consult your network administrator.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPP Print Settings] → specify the following.

Specify the IPP print settings if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

[On]: You can use IPP as the print application. Pressing [On] for [IPP Print Settings] automatically sets [Use HTTP] to 'On'.

To use SSL to encrypt the IPP data, press [On] for <Use SSL>.

If you are using IPP authentication, press [On] for <Use Authentication> → enter the user name to use for IPP authentication in [User], and the password to use for IPP authentication in [Password].

  • In order to select [On] for <Use SSL> to allow SSL communication, a key pair is necessary. You can use the preinstalled key pair, or generate an original key pair with the machine, to set as the default key. For information on the default key, and instructions on how to generate an original key pair, see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate."
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Multicast Discovery] → specify the following.

[On] for <Response>: You can use device information from other devices, such as an Address Book or Department ID Management settings, or respond to a multicast discovery from utilities.

Optionally, press [Scope Name] and enter the scope name for a multicast discovery.

  • For instructions on how to deliver and share device information, such as the Address Book and Department ID Management settings with multiple devices, see "Security."
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Use HTTP] → specify the following.

[On]: You can use the Remote UI or IPP.

Pressing [Off] for [Use HTTP] automatically sets [Remote UI] (in the System Settings screen) and [IPP Print Settings] to 'Off'.

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Proxy Settings] → specify the following.

In the following cases, specify the proxy settings, according to the network environment you are using:

  • If you are using the optional PS Printer Kit
  • If you are using the optional Direct Printing Kit
  • If you are using the optional Web Access Software (The Web Access Software is optional software for viewing web pages on the touch panel display of the machine. For details, see "Web Access.")
  • If you connect the WebDAV client to the Internet via a proxy, when using a WebDAV server

In [Server Address], enter a proxy server IP address or FQDN (for example, starfish.company.com).

In [Port Number], enter the port number of a proxy server using - (numeric keys).

If you want to use a proxy in the same domain, press [On] for <Use Proxy within the Same Domain>.

If you want to use proxy authentication, press [Authentication Settings] → [On] for <Use Proxy Authentication> → enter the user name to use for proxy authentication in [User], and the password to use for proxy authentication in [Password].

  • If you are using the optional PS Printer Kit or the optional Direct Printing Kit, you can print a file in the PDF or PS format by specifying its URL using the Remote UI. To print a file by specifying its URL using the Remote UI, you need to specify the proxy settings suitable for your environment. (Set in this step.)
  • The optional Direct Printing Kit is not available in some regions.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings] → specify the following.

[On] for <Apply Settings>: You can enable a MAC address filter. Press [Register] → specify the MAC addresses to allow access to.

  • Up to 100 MAC addresses can be specified.
  • If you select [On] for <Apply Settings>, you will become unable to access from MAC addresses which have not been specified. Check the MAC addresses carefully before specifying them. If the corresponding MAC address does not exist, you will become unable to access the network.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Dept. ID Management Password Confirmation] → specify the following.

Select [On] or [Off] if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board.

[On]: You can confirm the Department ID and password when printing using a driver that supports Windows Vista.

  • A key pair to use for encrypted SSL communication is required to confirm Department IDs and passwords. Even if you set [Dept. ID Management Password Confirmation] to 'On', Department IDs and passwords cannot be confirmed if the key pair is corrupted or invalid. In this case, erase the key pair and follow the procedure in "Key Pair and Server Certificate Settings for Encrypted SSL Communication," to register a new key pair.
  • If there is no key pair, you cannot set <Dept. ID Management Password Confirmation> to 'On'. You can use the preinstalled key pair, or generate an original key pair with the machine, to set as the default key. For information on the default key, and instructions on how to generate an original key, see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate."


Confirming TCP/IPv4 Settings

The following is the procedure for confirming that the network connections are properly set.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv4 Settings] → [PING Command].

  1. In [PING Command], check the following.

Pressing [Start] after entering the desired IP address existing on the network displays the result of the PING command on the touch panel display.

If this result is inappropriate, check the settings described in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," and "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6."

  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network function by following the procedure in "Startup Time Settings," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Startup Time Settings," for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SNTP Settings] → check the following.

After pressing [NTP Server Check], if <OK> is displayed, time synchronization is working correctly via SNTP.

If <Error> is displayed, check the settings for [NTP Server Address] set in step 3 of "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6."

Even if you perform [NTP Server Check], time settings are not updated. Check that communications are possible between the machine and the NTP server.



Confirming TCP/IPv6 Settings

The following is the procedure for confirming that the TCP/IPv6 network connections are properly set.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPv6 Settings] → [PING Command].

  1. In [PING Command], check the following.

Pressing [Start] after entering an IPv6 address existing on the network in [IPv6 Address] displays the result of the PING command on the touch panel display.

Pressing [Start] after entering the machine's host name in [Host Name] displays the result of the PING command on the touch panel display.

If this result is inappropriate, check the settings described in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," and "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6."

  • If you set the startup time of the machine's network functions by following the procedure in "Startup Time Settings," execute the PING command only after the time set as the startup time passes.
  • If you connect the machine to a switching hub, the machine may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. See "Startup Time Settings" for information on how to set up the startup time.
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SNTP Settings] → check the following.

After pressing [NTP Server Check], if <OK> is displayed, time synchronization is working correctly via SNTP.

If <Error> is displayed, check the settings for [NTP Server Address] set in step 3 of "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6."

Even if you perform [NTP Server Check], time settings are not updated. Check that communications are possible between the machine and the NTP server.



Key Pair and Server Certificate Settings for Encrypted SSL Communication

The key pair and server certificate are required for performing SSL encrypted communication, for use with the following items. This section describes how to specify the key pair and server certificate settings from the control panel of the machine.

  • MEAP functions via a web browser (See "MEAP/SSO.")
  • [Device Information Delivery Settings] (See "Security.")


Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate

It is necessary to generate and register a key pair in order to use encrypted SSL communication for IPP printing, e-mail and I-faxes, the Remote UI, MEAP functions via a web browser, and device information delivery, or confirm Department IDs and passwords.

A key pair and server certificate are preinstalled in the machine. You can also use this key pair and server certificate to enable encrypted SSL communication.

The procedure for generating and registering a key pair and self-signed server certificate using the control panel of the machine is as follows:


Remark
  • Up to six key pairs can be registered.
  • The key pair and certificate registered here can also be used as the key pair and certificate for IPSec.

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Generate Key].

  1. Press [Generate Network Communication Key] → specify the following.

In [Key Name], enter a name for the key pair → select a key length.

  • Up to 24 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Key Name].
  • You cannot generate a key pair with a key length other than 512 or 1024 bit.
  • You cannot specify 'Device Signature Key' (used for key pairs for adding digital signatures to PDFs) or 'AMS' (used for key pairs for access restrictions) as the name for the key pair.
  1. Press [Next] → set the self-signed server certificate.

You cannot set an end date which is earlier than the start date.

Set at least one of the following items → press [Start Key Generatn] to generate a key. You cannot issue a server certificate if all the items are left blank. When using IPPS printing with Windows Vista, make sure to enter the IP address of the machine in [Common Name].

Items you can set:

[Country/Region]: Select the country/region name from the 25 countries/regions in the list, or enter an Internet country code (2 characters maximum).
[State]: Set the state name (24 characters maximum).
[City]: Set the city name (24 characters maximum).
[Organization]: Set the organization name (24 characters maximum).
[Orgnztion Unit]: Set the organization unit, such as the department name (24 characters maximum).
[Common Name]: Set the IP address or FQDN (for example, starfish.company.com) of the machine (24 characters maximum).
  • A DNS server is necessary to use the FQDN of the machine in [Common Name]. Use the IP address of the machine if you do not have a DNS server.
  • After pressing [Start Key Generatn], you cannot use any of the keys until a key pair has been generated and registered.


Registering a Key Pair File and Server Certificate File Installed from a Computer

You can install a key pair from a computer in order to use encrypted SSL communication for IPP printing, e-mail and I-faxes, the Remote UI, MEAP functions via a web browser, and device information delivery, or confirm Department IDs and passwords.

A key pair file and server certificate file created on a computer can be installed in the machine using a web browser (Remote UI). The procedure for registering installed files in the machine using the control panel is as follows:


Remark
  • Up to six key pairs can be registered.
  • The key pair and certificate registered here can also be used as the key pair and certificate for IPSec.
  • For instructions on how to install a key pair file and server certificate file, see "Remote UI."

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Register Key and Certificate] → specify the following.

Select the file to register → press [Register] → enter the name of the private key in [Key Name], and the password for the private key in [Password].

To erase an unnecessary file, select the file → press [Erase].

  • You can register only key pair files which use the RSA algorithm.


Editing Key Pairs and Server Certificates

You can confirm the settings of registered key pairs and server certificates. You can also delete an unnecessary key pair and certificate, and check how a key pair is currently being used.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Key and Certificate List] → [Key and Certificate List for this Machine] → specify the following.

If (invalid) is displayed to the left of a key pair, it is corrupted or invalid. After erasing the corrupted or invalid key pair, register a key pair (see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate," or "Registering a Key Pair File and Server Certificate File Installed from a Computer.").


  • Select the key pair for the server certificate you want to confirm → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].

If [Certificate Verification] is grayed out or <The key is corrupted or invalid.> is displayed, you cannot use the key pair. After erasing the corrupted or invalid key pair, register a key pair (see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate," or "Registering a Key Pair File and Server Certificate File Installed from a Computer.").


  • Select the key pair to erase → press [Erase].

  • Key pairs for which 'Using' is displayed in <Used> cannot be deleted because they are being used with IPSec or because SSL is set to 'On'. Press [Display Use Location] to check the type of security the key pair is being used for. To delete a key pair which is only being used with SSL, set the following settings to 'Off'. A key pair being used for IPSec cannot be deleted.
  • [Use HTTP] in [MEAP Settings] (See "MEAP/SSO.")
  • [Receive Restriction for Each Function] in [Device Information Delivery Settings] (See "Security.")

  • Select a key pair with 'Using' displayed for <Used> → press [Display Use Location] to check the kind of security the key pair is being used for.



Changing the Key Pair Used With SSL Encrypted Communications

After checking the function that SSL encrypted communications are being used for, you can change the key pair being used.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [SSL Settings] to display a list of the functions using SSL encrypted communications → press [Key and Certificate].

  1. Select the key pair you want to use for SSL encrypted communications → press [Set as the Default Key].

You cannot set to use "Device Signature Key" or "AMS" (key pair for access restrictions) for SSL. The key pair used with IPSec can be used as the key pair for SSL, but the key pair used with IPSec cannot be changed with this procedure.

  • If you press [Certificate Details], you can check the certificate.
  • If you press [Display Use Location], you can check what the key is being used for.


Registering a CA Certificate File Installed from a Computer

Apart from the X.509 (DER) format CA certificate preinstalled in the machine, you can also register a CA certificate file which has been installed using a web browser (Remote UI).

The procedure for registering installed files in the machine using the control panel is as follows:


Remark
  • For instructions on how to install a CA certificate file, see "Remote UI."
  • Up to 50 CA certificate files can be registered.

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Register CA Certificate] → specify the following.

Select the file to register → press [Register].

To erase an unnecessary file, select the file → press [Erase]. When the confirmation message is displayed, press [Yes].

To confirm the CA certificate you have registered, see "Editing a CA Certificate."



Editing a CA Certificate

You can confirm the settings of registered CA certificates. You can also erase unnecessary CA certificates.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [CA Certificate List] → specify the following.

  • Select the key pair for the CA certificate you want to confirm → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].


  • Select the CA certificate to erase → press [Erase].



Generating and Confirming a Key Pair and Device Signature Certificate and User Certificate for Adding Digital Signatures to PDF Files

The machine can add the following two types of digital signatures to PDF files. This section describes the procedures for specifying and confirming the settings necessary for adding digital signatures to PDF files using the control panel of the machine. For instructions on how to add digital signatures to PDF files, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive," or "Remote UI."

  • Device Signature

Enables the recipient to identify the device that scanned the document. This type of signature requires the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set. To add a device signature to a PDF, set a key pair and device certificate. (See "Setting a Key Pair and Device Certificate.")

  • User Signature

Enables the recipient to identify the user who signed the document. This type of signature requires the optional Digital User Signature Kit. To add a user signature to a PDF, it is necessary to install a key pair and user certificate in the machine from a computer. (See "Remote UI.") You can confirm the installed key pair and user certificate using the control panel of the machine. (See "Confirming a Key Pair and User Certificate.")



Setting a Key Pair and Device Certificate

The following procedures describe how to generate and update the key pair and device certificate necessary for adding a device signature to a PDF.


Remark
  • The optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is necessary to add a device signature to PDF files. For more information on the equipment needed, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Generate Key].

  1. Press [Generate/Update Device Signature Key] → [Yes].

  • You can register only one key pair.


Confirming a Key Pair and Device Certificate

The following procedure describes how to confirm a key pair and device certificate generated/updated in "Setting a Key Pair and Device Certificate."


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Key and Certificate List] → [Key and Certificate List for this Machine].

If (invalid) is displayed to the left of a key pair, the key pair is corrupted or invalid. Follow the procedure in "Setting a Key Pair and Device Certificate," to generate/update a key pair.

  • You cannot delete or edit a key pair necessary for a device signature on the Key and Certificate List for this Machine screen.
  1. Select 'Device Signature Key' → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].

If [Certificate Verification] is grayed out or <The key is corrupted or invalid.> is displayed, you cannot use the key pair. Follow the procedure in "Setting a Key Pair and Device Certificate," to generate/update a new key pair.

  • <Certificate Thumbprint> contains sender information used to validate the reliability of a PDF with a device signature, by matching it with the MD5 or SHA-1 message digest number.
  • The expiration date for the device signature is set to 5 years after its key pair was generated/updated.


Confirming a Key Pair and User Certificate

The following procedure describes how the system manager can confirm the key pairs and user certificates for all users.

Install the key pair and user certificate used for adding a user signature to PDF files from a computer. (See "Remote UI.")


Remark
  • To add a user signature to a PDF, it is necessary to log in to the machine using the SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) login service, and the optional Digital User Signature Kit must be activated by registering a license key. For more information on the SSO-H login services, see "MEAP/SSO." For more information on the Digital User Signature Kit, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."
  • You can also use the Remote UI to confirm the key pairs and user certificates for all users. For more information, see "Remote UI."
  • End users can display the Key and Certificate List for Users screen in [Communications Settings] → [TX Settings] under <Common Settings> → [Check User Signature Certificate] (from the Additional Functions screen). However, in this case, only the key pair and user certificate for the user who is currently logged in are displayed. Key pairs and user certificates for other users cannot be displayed. The user's key pair also cannot be deleted from this screen. An end user must use the Remote UI to delete their key pair. (See "Remote UI.")

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [Certificate Settings] → [Key and Certificate List] → [Key and Certificate List for Users] → specify the following.

User key pairs with (invalid) displayed to the left of them are corrupted or invalid key pairs. After erasing the key pair, install a key pair and user certificate in the machine from a computer. (See "Remote UI.")


  • Select the key pair for the certificate you want to confirm → press [Certificate Details] → [Certificate Verification].

If [Certificate Verification] is grayed out or <The key is corrupted or invalid.> is displayed, you cannot use the key pair. After erasing the corrupted or invalid key pair, install a new key pair and user certificate from a computer. (See "Remote UI.")


  • Select the key pair to erase → press [Erase].



IPSec Settings

If you install the optional IPSec Board to the machine, you can use IPSec communications by setting <Use IPSec> to [On] in the IPSec Settings screen on the touch panel display of the machine.

IPSec is a protocol for ensuring the security of IP packets sent and received over an IP network by protecting it from threats such as theft, modification, and impersonation. IPSec is applied for TCP packets, UDP (User Datagram Protocol) packets, and ICMP (Internet Control Message Protocol) packets. The reason why IPSec is superior to other security protocols is that since it adds security functions to IP, the basic protocol of the internet, it does not depend on the application software and network configuration.

This section describes the procedure for creating a security policy to set IPSec communications, using the control panel of the machine. A security policy registers the settings for IPSec, such as the packets to process with IPSec, and the algorithm to use for authentication and encryption. A logical connection established for traffic by conducting negotiations according to an IPSec security policy is called an IPSec SA (Security Association).

The features of the IPSec used by the machine are as follows.


Remarks
  • [IPSec Settings] is only displayed on the TCP/IP Settings screen if the optional IPSec Board is installed after installing the optional Expansion Bus.

  • Communication Mode

Since the IPSec of the machine only supports the transport mode, authentication and encryption is only applied to the data part of the IP packets.

  • Authentication and Encryption Method

At least one of the following methods must be set for the machine. You cannot set both methods at the same time.

  • AH (Authentication Header)
    A protocol for certifying authentication by detecting modifications to the communicated data, including the IP header. The communicated data is not encrypted.
  • ESP (Encapsulating Security Payload)
    A protocol that provides confidentiality via encryption while certifying the integrity and authentication of only the payload part of communicated data.
  • Key Exchange Protocol

Supports IKEv1 (Internet Key Exchange version 1) for exchanging keys based on ISAKMP (Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol). IKE includes two phases; in phase 1 the SA used for IKE (IKE SA) is created, and in phase 2 the SA used for IPSec (IPSec SA) is created.

To set authentication with the pre-shared key method, it is necessary to decide upon a pre-shared key in advance, which is a keyword (24 characters or less) used for both devices to send and receive data. Use the control panel of the machine to set the same pre-shared key as the destination to perform IPSec communications with, and perform authentication with the pre-shared key method.

To select authentication with the digital signature method, it is necessary to install a key pair file and CA certificate file created on a PC in advance using the Remote UI, and then register the installed files using the control panel of the machine. Authentication is conducted with the destinations for IPSec communication using the CA certificate.

The types of key pair and CA certificate that can be used for authentication with the digital signature method are indicated below.

  • RSA algorithm
  • X.509 certificate
  • PKCS#12 format key pair

Remarks
  • For ISAKMP, port number 500 of UDP (User Datagram Protocol) is used for sending/receiving.
  • For information on installing a key pair file and CA certificate file, see "Remote UI."


Registering a Security Policy

This section describes the procedure for registering a new security policy.


Remarks
  • You can register up to 10 security policies. The registered security policies are displayed in order of their priority.

  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPSec Settings] → select [On] for <Use IPSec>.

  • If you set <Use IPv4> to 'On', the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  1. In <Receive Non-policy Packets>, specify the following settings → press [Register].

[Allow]: Allows the sending/receiving of packets that are not encrypted because they do not correspond to the security policy set on the IPSec Settings screen, in plain text.

[Reject]: Rejects the sending/receiving of packets that do not correspond to the security policy set on the IPSec Settings screen.

  1. Enter the security policy name to register in [Policy Name] → press [Selector Settings].

  1. On the Selector Settings screen, specify the local IP address to apply the registered security policy to.

When receiving IP packets, the registered security policy is applied if the destination IP address in the packets matches the local IP address specified in this procedure. When sending IP packets, the registered security policy is applied if the source IP address in the packets matches the local IP address specified in this procedure.

  • IPSec is not applied for link local addresses included when the following are selected. IPSec packets sent to link local addresses are discarded.
  • [All IP addresses] for <Local Address>
  • [IPv6 Address] for <Local Address>
  • [IPv6 Manual Settings] for <Local Address>

  • Select [All IP addresses] for <Local Address>.


  • Select [IPv4 Address] for <Local Address>.

  • Select [IPv6 Address] for <Local Address>.

  • Select [IPv4 Manual Settings] for <Local Address> → specify a single IPv4 address or range of IPv4 addresses. Also specify the subnet.


  • Select [IPv6 Manual Settings] for <Local Address> → specify a single IPv6 address or range of IPv6 addresses. Also specify the IPv6 address and prefix length.

  1. On the Selector Settings screen, specify the remote IP address to apply the registered security policy to.

When receiving IP packets, the registered security policy is applied if the source IP address in the packets matches the remote IP address specified in this procedure. When sending IP packets, the registered security policy is applied if the destination IP address in the packets matches the remote IP address specified in this procedure.


  • Select [All IP addresses] for <Remote Address>.

  • Select [All IPv4 addresses] for <Remote Address>.

  • Select [All IPv6 addresses] for <Remote Address>.

  • Select [IPv4 Manual Settings] for <Remote Address> → specify a single IPv4 address or range of IPv4 addresses. Also specify the subnet.

  • Select [IPv6 Manual Settings] for <Remote Address> → specify a single IPv6 address or range of IPv6 addresses. Also specify the IPv6 address and prefix length.
  1. On the Selector Settings screen, specify the destination port to apply the registered security policy to.

When receiving IP packets, the registered security policy is applied if the destination port in the packets matches the port number specified in this procedure. When sending IP packets, the registered security policy is applied if the source port in the packets matches the port number specified in this procedure.


  • Select [Specify by Port Number] for <Port>.
  • On the Specify by Port Number screen, set the local port and remote port.

[All ports]: Select to specify all the local ports or all the remote ports.

[Specify Port]: Select to specify a single local port or remote port according to the port number.


  • Select [Specify by Service Name] for <Port>.
  • On the Specify by Service Name screen, select a displayed service name → press [Service On/Off].

  1. On the Register screen, press [IKE Settings] → select the mode to use for IKE phase 1.

[Main]: Select to set the Main mode. This mode has strong security because the IKE session itself is encrypted.

[Aggressive]: Select to set the Aggressive mode. This mode speeds up IKE sessions because they are not encrypted.

  1. On the IKE Settings screen, specify the authentication method to use for IKE phase 1.

If you want to select the pre-shared key method, prepare a pre-shared key. To select the digital signature method, it is necessary to install a key pair file and CA certificate file created on a PC in advance using the Remote UI.


  • Press [Pre-shared Key Method] → [Shared Key] for <Authentication Method> → enter the pre-shared key.


  • Press [Digital sig. Method] → [Key and Certificate] for <Authentication Method>, select the key pair you want to use → press [Set as the Default Key] to register the key pair to use for IPSec.

You cannot set to use "Device Signature Key" or "AMS" (key pair for access restrictions). The key pair used for SSL can also be used as the key for IPSec.

  • The key pair used for this product and the root CA certificate used in the device to communicate with must be issued from the same root certificate authority.
  • It is necessary to use the Remote UI to delete a key pair registered for IPSec.(See "Remote UI.")
  • You can check the content of a certificate by selecting a key pair on the Key and Certificate screen, and pressing [Certificate Details]. On the Certificate Details screen, you can press [Certificate Verification] to verify the certificate.
  • You can check what a key pair is being used for by selecting a key pair with 'Using' displayed for <Used> on the Key and Certificate screen, and pressing [Display Use Location].
  1. On the IKE Settings screen, select the algorithm for the authentication and encryption to use for IKE phase 1.

  • Select [Manual Settings] for <Auth./Encryption Algorithm> → specify the authentication and encryption algorithm to apply to the IKE SA.

[SHA1] for <Authentication>: Select to set SHA1 (Secure Hash Algorithm 1) for the authentication algorithm. 160-bit hash values are supported.

[MD5] for <Authentication>: Select to set MD5 (Message Digest Algorithm 5) for the authentication algorithm. 128-bit hash values are supported.

[3DES-CBC] for <Encryption>: Select to set 3DES (Triple Data Encryption Standard) for the encryption algorithm, and CBC (Cipher Block Chaining) for the encryption mode. 3DES takes longer to process because it performs DES three times, but enables increased encryption strength. CBC links the encryption result of the previous block with the next block to make it harder to decipher the encryption.

[AES-CBC] for <Encryption>: Select to set AES (Advanced Encryption Standard) for the encryption algorithm, and CBC for the encryption mode. AES supports encryption keys with a key length of 128, 192, or 256 bits. As the supported key lengths are long, it enables increased encryption strength. CBC links the encryption result of the previous block with the next block to make it harder to decipher the encryption.

[Group1(762)] for <DH Group>: Select to set Group 1 for the DH (Diffie-Hellman) key exchange method. In Group 1, 762-bit MODP (Modular Exponentiation) is supported.

[Group2(1024)] for <DH Group>: Select to set Group 2 for the DH key exchange method. In Group 2, 1024-bit MODP is supported.

[Group14(2048)] for <DH Group>: Select to set Group 14 for the DH key exchange method. In Group 14, 2048-bit MODP is supported.


  • Select [Auto] for <Auth./Encryption Algorithm>.

The priority for the authentication and encryption algorithms is indicated below.

Priority Authentication Algorithm Encryption Algorithm DH Key Exchange Method
1 SHA1 AES (128-bit) Group 2
2 MD5
3 SHA1 AES (192-bit)
4 MD5
5 SHA1 AES (256-bit)
6 MD5
7 SHA1 3DES
8 MD5
  1. On the Register screen, press [IPSec Network Settings] → specify the SA validation time and validation type, and PFS (Perfect Forward Security).

[Time] and [Size] for <Validity>: Specify the validation period for the generated IKE SA and IPSec SA. In IPSec communications to which a valid security policy is applied, packets can be sent and received without conducting key exchange negotiations. Make sure to set either [Time] and [Size]. If you set both, the SA becomes invalid when the value set for either [Time] or [Size] is reached.

[On] for <PFS>: If you enable the PFS function, you can increase the confidentiality because even if one encryption key is exposed to a third party, the problem does not spread to other encryption keys.

[Off] for <PFS>: If you disable the PFS function, if one encryption key is exposed to a third party, other encryption keys may be able to be guessed. If you set <PFS> to 'On', the destination for PFS communication must also have PFS enabled.

  1. On the IPSec Network Settings screen, select the algorithm for the authentication and encryption to use for IKE phase 2.

  • Select [Manual Settings] for <Auth./Encryption Algorithm>.
  • Set the ESP authentication/encryption method, or the algorithm for the AH authentication method.

[SHA1] for <ESP Auth.>: Select to set SHA1 as the algorithm for the ESP authentication method. 160-bit hash values are supported.

[MD5] for <ESP Auth.>: Select to set MD5 as the algorithm for the ESP authentication method. 128-bit hash values are supported.

[NULL] for <ESP Auth.>: Select to not set the algorithm for the ESP authentication method.

[3DES-CBC] for <ESP Encryption>: Select to set 3DES for the ESP encryption algorithm, and CBC for the encryption mode. 3DES takes longer to process because it performs DES three times, but enables increased encryption strength. CBC links the encryption result of the previous block with the next block to make it harder to decipher the encryption.

[AES-CBC] for <ESP Encryption>: Select to set AES for the ESP encryption algorithm, and CBC for the encryption mode. AES supports encryption keys with a key length of 128, 192, or 256 bits. As the supported key lengths are long, it enables increased encryption strength. CBC links the encryption result of the previous block with the next block to make it harder to decipher the encryption.

[NULL] for <ESP Encryption>: Select to not set the algorithm for the ESP encryption method.

[SHA1] for <AH Auth.>: Select to set SHA1 as the algorithm for the AH authentication method. 160-bit hash values are supported.

[MD5] for <AH Auth.>: Select to set MD5 as the algorithm for the AH authentication method. 128-bit hash values are supported.


  • Select [Auto] for <Auth./Encryption Algorithm>.

The ESP authentication/encryption methods are set. The priority for the authentication and encryption algorithms is indicated below.

Priority Algorithm for ESP Authentication Method Algorithm for ESP Encryption Method
1 SHA1 AES (128-bit)
2 MD5
3 SHA1 AES (192-bit)
4 MD5
5 SHA1 AES (256-bit)
6 MD5
7 SHA1 3DES
8 MD5


Editing a Security Policy

This section describes the procedure for changing the settings of a registered security policy. It also describes the procedure for enabling a security policy.


  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [IPSec Settings] → perform the following.

  • Select the security policy → press [Policy On/Off].


  • Select the security policy → press [Raise Priority] or [Lower Priority].
  • You can press [Print List] to print a list of the security policies and confirm their priorities.

  • Select the security policy → press [Erase].

  • Select the security policy → press [Edit].
  • Change the required items on the Edit screen.

For more information on each setting, see "Registering a Security Policy."



E-Mail/I-Fax Settings

Remark
  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [E-mail/I-Fax].
  1. Specify the mail server for receiving e-mail/I-faxes.

The machine supports both the SMTP and POP3 functions.

The machine can receive I-fax images and communication error notices only.


  • Register the host name of the machine with the DNS server → specify the following.

Press [On] for <SMTP Receipt> → press [Off] for <POP>.

In [E-mail Address], enter the e-mail address your machine will use. You can specify any user name (the part of the address located in front of the @ symbol). Enter the host name after the "@" symbol in the e-mail address.

If you select [SSL] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)>, reception of only data encrypted using SSL is allowed and communications from the host not using SSL are rejected.

If you select [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)>, depending on the request from the host, reception of data encrypted using SSL is allowed only when there is a request from the host.

  • Even if you select [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)>, the data will not be encrypted if the SMTP host does not support encryption.
  • In order to select [SSL] or [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Receive)> to allow SSL transmission, it is necessary to generate a key pair in advance. For instructions on how to generate a key pair, see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate."

  • Press [On] for <POP> → press [Off] for <SMTP Receipt>.

In [E-mail Address], enter the e-mail address your machine will use.

In [POP Server], enter the IP address or name of the POP server using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

In [POP Address], enter the login name for access to the POP server.

In [POP Password], enter the password for access to the POP server.

Set [POP Interval] to the interval you want the POP server to check for incoming e-mail. If the interval is set to '0', the POP server is not checked automatically. For instructions on how to manually check the POP server, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

Select the authentication method supported by the POP server from [Standard], [APOP], or [POP AUTH] for <POP AUTH Method>.

If you want to send encrypted data, press [On] for <Allow SSL (POP)>.

  • If the POP server does not support SSL encryption, data is not encrypted when [On] is selected for <Allow SSL (POP)>.
  • In order to select [On] for <Allow SSL (POP)> to allow SSL transmission, it is necessary to generate a key pair in advance. For instructions on how to generate a key pair, see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate."

  1. Specify the mail server for sending e-mail/I-faxes.


  • In [SMTP Server], enter the IP address or name of the SMTP server using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

Press [On] for <POP Authentication before Sending> → press [Off] for <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)>.


  • In [SMTP Server], enter the IP address or name of the SMTP server using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

Press [On] for <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> → press [Off] for <POP Authentication before Sending>.

In [User], enter the user name used for logging in to the SMTP server. If you are using a Microsoft SMTP server, enter the user name in [User] using the following format: user name@domain name.

In [Password], enter the password used for logging in to the SMTP server.

To encrypt data to be sent using SSL, select [On] for <Allow SSL (SMTP Send)>.

  • If the SMTP host does not support encryption, data is not encrypted when [On] is selected for <Allow SSL (SMTP Send)>.

  • In [SMTP Server], enter the SMTP server IP address or name using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

Press [Off] both for <SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH)> and <POP Authentication before Sending>.



Startup Time Settings

If you connect the machine to a switching hub, it may not be able to connect to a network even though your network settings are set correctly.

This occurs because the spanning tree process performed between switching hubs prevents them from communicating with each other immediately after the machine connects to a switching hub.

In this case, use the following procedure to delay the start of communication.


  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [Startup Time Settings] → specify the following.

Press [-] or [+] to set the time period to delay the startup of network communications for the machine.



Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

After you have completed the protocol settings for printing and sending a fax with the machine, you are ready to set up each of the computers for printing or sending a fax.

  • Connecting to a TCP/IP Network

All computers that use the printer must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  • Installing the Driver and Specifying the Port Setting

To print or send a fax from a computer, you must install a driver and specify a port setting. The port setting differs depending on the print application used for printing or sending a fax. Use the following information as a guide to determine the print application you are using, and then perform the necessary operations.

  • IPP/IPPS
    This is a print application that can be used with TCP/IP. IPP enables you to use the HTTP protocol to send data to a machine on an intranet/the internet. IPPS is a print application which performs encrypted SSL communication when using IPP. See "Printer Connection Method (IPP/IPPS)."

Remark
  • If the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen do not permit the IP address of a computer in which a driver is installed, you cannot print from the computer. (See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings.")
  • If you print with IPP, the [Pause Printing] and [Cancel All Documents] settings on the [Printer] menu in the Windows print queue cannot be used. (To view the print queue, click the [Start] menu → point to [Settings] → click [Printers] → double-click the icon of the machine.)


Printer Connection Method (LPD/Raw)


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according to your operating system.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.


Installing a New Driver

  1. Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen to see whether the IP address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is permitted. For details, see step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings."
  • If the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen do not permit the IP address, you cannot install a driver.
  • If the IP address of the computer is beyond the range of the permitted addresses set for <RX/ Print Range> after installing a driver, you cannot print or send a fax from the computer.
  1. Install the driver.

Install the driver according to the following procedures indicated in the manual for each driver:

  • If you want to use the UFR II/PCL/PS printer driver
    See the procedure for dynamic installation in the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
  • If you want to use the fax driver
    See the procedure for dynamic installation in the Fax Driver Installation Guide.
  • The print application will be LPD and the print queue will be set to <LP> if the driver has been installed according to the above procedures.


Changing the Port after Installing the Driver

  1. In the printer properties dialog box of the printer you installed, select the [Ports] sheet → click [Add Port].

  1. In the [Printer Ports] dialog box, from [Available ports types], select [Standard TCP/IP Port] → click [New Port].
  1. According to the instructions on the Add Standard TCP/IP Printer Port Wizard, in [Printer Name or IP Address], enter the printer IP address or printer host name → exit the Wizard.

If the dialog box displays <Additional Port Information Required>, follow the instructions on the screen to search again, or click [Standard] → click [Canon Network Printing Device with P9100] under [Device type].

  1. In the printer properties dialog box, click [Configure Port] → select [LPR] or [Raw].

If you use LPD, you can specify one of the following print queues in [Queue Name].

  • LP
    The machine prints according to its spool settings. Normally, <LP> is entered as a print queue.
  • SPOOL
    The machine prints only after spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
  • DIRECT
    The machine prints without spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.


Mac OS X 10.3 or later

  1. Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen to see whether the IP address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is permitted. For details, see step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings."
  • If the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen do not permit the IP address, you cannot install a driver.
  • If the IP address of the computer is beyond the range of the permitted addresses set for <RX/Print Range> after installing a driver, you cannot print or send a fax from the computer.
  1. Install the driver.

Install the driver according to the instructions in the manual for each driver.

  • If you want to use the UFR II printer driver
    See the Mac UFR II Driver Guide.
  • If you want to use the PS printer driver
    See the Mac PS Driver Guide.
  • If you want to use a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc.
    For instructions on how to install the corresponding PPD file from Canon, see Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started. For details about the PS printer driver, see the documentation provided with your Macintosh.
  • The PS printer driver can be used only in a Mac OS X 10.3.9 or later environment.


UNIX

The machine supports the LPD print application for printing over TCP/IP networks.

The following procedures are only examples. The setup procedures for your environment may differ.


Remark
  • If the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen do not permit the IP address, you cannot specify the spooling system.

  1. Log in to a workstation as a superuser → set up the spooling system.

  • Add the following to the /etc/printcap file:

<Print queue name>|<comment>:\
:lp=<device special file>:\
:sd=<spool directory>:\
:rm=<printer IP address or host name>:


  • Start the admintool utility → click [Browse] → [Printers] → [Edit] → [Add] → [Access to Printer] → in [Printer Name], enter the desired print queue name → in [Print Server], enter the IP address or printer host name.
  • The admintool utility is included with the operating system. For specific operating instructions, see the operating system manual.
  • You can specify one of the following print queues.
  • LP
    The machine prints according to its spool settings. Normally, <LP> is entered as a print queue.
  • SPOOL
    The machine prints only after spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
  • DIRECT
    The machine prints without spooling a print job on the hard disk, regardless of its spool settings.
  • When the job log appears on the touch panel display of the machine, <unknown> may be displayed as the document name and user name of print data transmitted to the machine over a UNIX network. (To display the job log, press [System Monitor] → [Print] → [Log] on the touch panel display.)


Printer Connection Method (IPP/IPPS)


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according to your operating system.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  1. Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen to see whether the IP address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is permitted. For details, see step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings."
  • If the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen do not permit the IP address, you cannot install a driver.
  • If the IP address of the computer is beyond the range of the permitted addresses set for <RX/Print Range> after installing a driver, you cannot print or send a fax from the computer.
  1. Start the Add Printer Wizard → select a network printer.
  1. Select the option for locating the printer on the Internet or on your intranet → enter the URL of your printer.

If you want to use regular IPP printing, enter the following URL in [URL].
http://<the IP address or host name of the machine>/ipp

If you want to use encrypted communication and perform IPPS printing, enter the following URL in [URL].
https://<the IP address or host name of the machine>/ipp

  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to complete the installation.


Mac OS X 10.3 or later

If you are using the optional PS Printer Kit, and a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc. with the Mac OS, you can use IPP as the print application. After installing the PPD file according to Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started, specify the print settings according to the instructions in the documentation provided with your Macintosh.



Printer Connection Method (FTP)

The following procedure describes how to perform printing by using FTP.


  1. Go to the command prompt → log in to the machine's FTP server.

For details on user names and passwords, see step 4 in "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6."

Command to be executed
1. ftp> bin *Change the file type to IMAGE (BINARY)
Change the file type to IMAGE (BINARY) even if you are printing text files.

2. ftp> put <file name to be printed> *Upload the file to be printed

3. ftp> bye *Cut off server connection

The following is a UNIX command example.
1. U:> ftp 172.24.176.244 *Connect to server
Connected to 172.24.176.244.
220 Connection established.

2. Name (172.24.176.244:none): user_name *User login
331 Password required to login.

3. Password: *Enter password
230 User user_name logged in.

4. ftp> bin *Set file type
200 Type set to IMAGE (binary).

5. ftp> put print.txt *Upload print file
200 PORT command successful.
150 Opened BINARY data connection for file transfer.
226 Transfer complete.

6. ftp> bye *Cut off server connection
221 Server closing down connection.

  • Up to three clients can be logged in simultaneously to its FTP server.
  • You cannot perform manipulation of files (changing file names, deleting, etc.) on the FTP server by using FTP commands.


Printer Connection Method (WSD)

The following procedure describes how to perform printing with WSD when using Windows Vista.

If a dialog box is displayed while you are performing this procedure, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the documentation provided with Windows Vista.


  1. Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen to see whether the IPv4 address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is permitted. For details, see step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings."
  • If the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen do not permit the IPv4 address, you cannot install a driver.
  • If the IPv4 address of the computer is beyond the range of the permitted IPv4 addresses set for <RX/Print Range> after installing a driver, you cannot print or send a fax from the computer.
  1. Install the driver.

  • With Windows Explorer, right-click the printer icon you want to use → select [Install].

  • Start the Add Printer Wizard → select a network printer.


Setting Up a Computer as a File Server

To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving data.

You can send data over a TCP/IP network to any of the following:

  • FTP server (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista, UNIX, Linux, Mac OS X, iW Document Manager Gateway)
  • WebDAV server (Windows 2000 Server/2000 Professional/XP/Server 2003, UNIX, Linux, Mac OS X)
  • Windows shared folder (Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003)
  • Samba shared folder (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)

This section describes how to set up a computer as an FTP/WebDAV server.

For instructions on how to configure a Windows and Samba shared folder, see "Setting Up a Computer as a File Server."


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer to receive data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the control panel. For instructions on how to specify recipient address settings, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."
  • The following procedure explains a sample FTP/WebDAV server setup. Depending on your environment, the actual setup procedure may differ.


FTP Server Settings


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

This section describes the procedures for using the default home directory under [Default FTP Site]. To use other settings, enter the FTP site and home directory by referring to the IIS documentation.

It is recommended that the FTP server be configured by the network administrator.

In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according to your operating system.


Remark
  • The use of Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista as an FTP server requires the installation of IIS. If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install the version of IIS for the operating system you are using before entering these settings. (See "System Requirements.") For installation procedures, see the manuals provided with your operating system.
  • User authentication for access to FTP servers is performed using the local account database of Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/Server 2003/Vista used as the FTP server. Therefore, it is not possible to use the account of a domain user registered in Windows 2000 Server/XP Professional/ Server 2003/Vista to send data directly from the machine to FTP servers in other domains.
  • If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  1. Log on to Windows as a member of the group with access rights to the directory to be designated as the FTP site directory → start IIS.

Depending on your environment, the access rights settings for a drive or directory may differ. For details, see the Windows manual.

  1. In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, on the [Security Accounts] sheet, deselect the option which allows only anonymous connection.
  1. In the [Default FTP Site Properties] dialog box, on the [Home Directory] sheet, select both [Read] and [Write].

  1. Right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties] to open the [System Properties] dialog box → confirm [Full computer name].

  1. Right-click [My Computer] → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window → under [System Tools], in [Local Users and Groups], right-click the [Users] folder → click [New User].

  1. In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm Password] → click [Create].

Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from the machine. (You cannot change the password from the control panel.)

  • In the Active Directory environment, the procedures for setting up users differ from the above. For details, see the Windows manual.
  1. Set a recipient address using the control panel.

Sample recipient setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Full Computer Name]: starfish.organization.company.com
Create a directory named "share" in the specified FTP server's home directory "\lnetpub\ftproot", and then set "share" as the data destination.
  • The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>: FTP
[Host Name]: starfish.organization.company.com
[Folder Path]: share
[User]: User name entered in step 5
[Password]: Password for the above user

  • To use [Full computer name], which was confirmed in step 4, as the host name for [Host Name] as shown in the above example, it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
  • If you want to send to an IPv4 host using an FTP port other than port 21, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv4 address of FTP server>:<Port number>
    Example: 192.168.1.21:21000
  • To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv6 address>:<Port number>
    Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000


UNIX/Linux

For more information on the system requirements for using a UNIX/Linux computer as an FTP server, see "System Requirements."

In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use FTP. For details, consult your network administrator.


  1. Log in to a workstation as a superuser → set up the users who send documents from the machine, and their passwords.

Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

  1. Create a shared directory to be used for recipient addresses, and then enable read access and write access by the users who will be sending data.
  1. Set a recipient address using the control panel.

Sample recipient setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Host Name]: starfish
[Domain]: organization.company.com
The user's home directory is /home/hsato, and /home/hsato/share is the data destination.
  • The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>: FTP
[Host Name]: starfish.organization.company.com
[Folder Path]: Enter one of the following:
share (when using relative path)
/home/hsato/share (when using absolute path)
[User]: User name entered in step 1
[Password]: Password for the above user

For a sample screen, see the example of Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista screen.

  • To use the host name of the above example for [Host Name], it is necessary to use a DNS server. (This applies even if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If no DNS server is available, the host name setting should be specified using the IP address of the FTP server.
  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
  • If you want to send to an IPv4 host using an FTP port other than port 21, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv4 address of FTP server>:<Port number>
    Example: 192.168.1.21:21000
  • To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv6 address>:<Port number>
    Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000


Mac OS X

  1. Log in to Mac OS X as Administrator → start the FTP services under Mac OS X.
  1. Click the [Sharing] icon → [Allow FTP access] → click [Show All] on the toolbar.
  1. Click [Users] to open the [Users] window → enter the name of the user to whom you want to send data from the machine through Mac OS X → enter the password.

Enter a user name, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

  1. Create a shared folder to which files are to be sent.

Sample setting:
Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder.

  1. Select the shared folder created in step 4 → select [Show Info] from the [File] menu → select [Privileges] from [Show] → enable read & write access to the folder by the owner and members of the group to which the owner belongs.
  1. Set a recipient address using the control panel.

Sample recipient setting:

  • Server side settings (set using the above procedure):
    Create a folder named "iR_Folder" in the [Public] folder in the [Home] folder of the user named "yoko," and then specify the iR_Folder as the folder to which files are sent.
  • The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>: FTP
[Host Name]: IP address of Macintosh
[Folder Path]: Enter one of the following:
Public/iR_Folder (If you enter a relative path)
/Users/yoko/Public/iR_Folder (If you enter an absolute path)
[User]: User name entered in step 3
[Password]: Password for the above user

  • Up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path] on the control panel.
  • If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
  • If you want to send to an IPv4 host using an FTP port other than port 21, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv4 address of FTP server>:<Port number>
    Example: 192.168.1.21:21000
  • To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv6 address>:<Port number>
    Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000


FTP Server for iW Document Manager Gateway

An FTP server for iW Document Manager Gateway is required for receiving data from the machine, when used with iW Document Manager Gateway.


  1. Set up the FTP server for iW Document Manager Gateway → specify the folder to store data sent from the machine.

For more information, see the manual provided with the iW Document Manager Gateway.

  • Up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for a folder name.
  • Enter a user name and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.
  1. On the FTP server for iW Document Manager Gateway, export destination data.

For more information, see the manual provided with the iW Document Manager Gateway.

  • A DNS server is needed to use an FQDN format (for example, starfish.organization.company.com) for the FTP server address. (A DNS server is also required if the machine and the FTP server are in the same subnet.) If you have not set up a DNS server, use IP addresses.
  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for an FTP server address in the FQDN format.
  1. Use the Remote UI of the machine to import the destination data exported in step 2 into the machine.

For instructions on how to import the destination data, see "Remote UI."

  • If the System Manager ID and password of the machine are set, the dialog box for entering a user name and password appears; enter the System Manager ID in [User Name] and password in [Password].
  • If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the FTP port number is set to a value other than 21, specify the following for [Host Name]:
    <IP address of FTP server>:<Port number>
    Example: 192.168.1.21:21000


WebDAV Server Settings

The WebDAV sending function is a function for sending scanned image files, image files for received faxes, or image files sent from the User Inboxes or Memory RX Inbox of the machine, to a WebDAV server directory on the Internet or your intranet, using the WebDAV protocol.

This section describes the procedure for setting up a WebDAV publishing directory. Setting up a publishing directory enables users who have the necessary access privileges to manage files in the directory.

It is recommended that the WebDAV server be configured by the network administrator.



IIS for Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/Server 2003

The procedure below uses items of Windows 2000 as an example. Depending on your environment, the items you see on the screen may differ.


Remark
  • If IIS is not installed in the computer you are using, you will need to install the version of IIS for the operating system you are using before entering these settings. (See "System Requirements.") For installation procedures, see the manuals provided with your operating system.
  • Server authentication is required for sending to a WebDAV server. Enable authentication before using a WebDAV server. The authentication methods available for the server are Anonymous, Basic, or Digest authentication, and authentication errors will occur if you try to use another authentication method. If the Anonymous authentication method is enabled, access rights are assigned to all users, and IIS always performs anonymous authentication, even if either of the other two authentication methods are enabled. (The priority level is Anonymous authentication > Digest authentication > Basic authentication.) If a high level of security is required, disable anonymous authentication. Use the user names and passwords registered in the address book of the WebDAV server for the Basic and Digest authentication methods. For instructions on how to set the authentication method for IIS, see the IIS documentation.
  • The machine does not support sending to a Windows Vista computer using WebDAV. However, it is possible to view documents sent to the WebDAV server on the network from Windows Vista.
  • When connecting to a WebDAV server via a proxy with Digest authentication set using IIS 6.0, it is necessary to set <Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending> to 'On' from the control panel of the machine. For more information on this procedure, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  1. Right-click [My Computer] → in the [C:\Inetpub] folder, create a physical directory to use as the sending destination.
  • The physical directory cannot be created in the [C:\Inetpub\wwwroot] folder, because the default DACL of wwwroot differs from that of other directories.
  1. Create a virtual directory.
  • Start IIS → from the IIS snap-in, select the Web site to add a directory to.
  • On the [Action] menu, point to [New] → select [Virtual Directory].
  • Follow the instructions on the Virtual Directory Creation Wizard to complete the creation of the directory.

Specify the directory path created in step 1 as a physical path to the virtual directory.

  1. Select [Write] in the virtual directory properties to give access for writing files to the WebDAV clients.

If you are using Windows Server 2003, click [Allow] for [WebDAV] in [Web Service Extensions] in IIS Manager.

  1. See the IIS documentation to specify the settings for SSL encrypted communication.
  1. Set a recipient address from the control panel.

Sample recipient settings:

  • Server side settings:
    Create a physical directory named "C:\Inetpub\export\share\home\users\", and then create a virtual directory that links to the physical directory as the folder to which files are sent.
  • The machine's address settings:
<Protocol>: WebDAV
[Host Name]: https://starfish.cse.canon.co.jp/
[Folder Path]: \export\share\home\users\
[User]: User name for the Basic and Digest authentication methods of the WebDAV server
[Password]: Password for the Basic and Digest authentication method of the WebDAV server

  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [Folder path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv6 address>:<Port number>
    Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000


Apache for Windows 2000/2000 Server/XP/Server 2003/UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X

The following procedures describe how to create the "users/user_name/WebDAV" directory using the procedure for creating the directory under "C:/Program Files/Apache Group/Apache2" in the Windows file system as an example.


Remark
  • Apache 1.3 is provided with Mac OS X. If Apache is not installed in the computer you are using, install the version for the operating system you are using (downloadable from the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.) before entering these settings. (See "System Requirements.") If you want to use SSL, install a version of Apache that supports SSL (downloadable from the Apache-SSL official Web site at http://www.apache-ssl.org/). After installing Apache, start it and confirm that the Apache service is working properly.
  • If you are using Mac OS X, root has ownership of the Apache setting file (/etc/httpd/httpd.conf). In this case, perform one of the following procedures before specifying the WebDAV settings. For more information, see the documentation provided with your Macintosh or the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.
  • Obtain root access from the Terminal, using the sudo or su command
  • In the Finder, temporarily change the permissions for the Apache setting file to give permission to the user who will set the WebDAV server (return the permissions for the Apache setting file to their original values after setting the WebDAV server.)
  • Server authentication is required for sending to a WebDAV server. Enable authentication before using a WebDAV server. The authentication methods available for the server are the Basic and Digest authentication methods, and authentication errors will occur if you try to use another authentication method. If you set both the Basic and Digest authentication methods, the authentication method you set last will be enabled. Use the user names and passwords registered in the address book of the WebDAV server for authentication. For instructions on how to set authentication methods, see the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.
  • The machine does not support sending to a Windows Vista computer using WebDAV. However, it is possible to view documents sent to the WebDAV server on the network from Windows Vista.

  1. Edit httpd.conf.
  • Erase # on the left of the line to enable the WebDAV modules.

Directive to be changed:

  • Before change
    #LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so
    #LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so
  • After change
    LoadModule dav_module modules/mod_dav.so
    LoadModule dav_fs_module modules/mod_dav_fs.so
  • Specify the server name.

Directive to be changed:

  • Before change
    #ServerName localhost:80
  • After change
    #ServerName localhost:80
    ServerName Apache-Server.ccm.canon.co.jp:80
  • Change the user directory.

Directive to be changed:

  • Before change
    UserDir "My Documents/My Website"
  • After change
    # UserDir "My Documents/My Website"
    UserDir "C:/Program Files/Apache Group/Apache2/users""
  • To enable the DAV function, add the following directive:

<Location /~user_name/WebDAV>

DAV On

</Location>

  1. After specifying the settings for SSL encrypted communication, configure httpd.conf so that the Apache service starts with SSL support.

For more information, see the Apache Software Foundation Web site at http://www.apache.org/.

  1. Restart Apache.
  1. Set a recipient address from the control panel of the machine.

Sample recipient settings:

  • Server side settings:
    Create the "users/user_name/WebDAV" directory under "C:/Program Files/Apache Group/Apache2" as the folder to send files to.
  • The machine's address settings:
<Protocol>: WebDAV
[Host Name]: https://Apache-Server.ccm.canon.co.jp/
[Folder Path]: /~user_name/WebDAV/
[User]: User name for the Basic and Digest authentication methods of the WebDAV server
[Password]: Password for the Basic and Digest authentication method of the WebDAV server

  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you switch the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly.
  • If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [Folder path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • To send to an IPv6 host, set [Host Name] using the following format:
    <IPv6 address>:<Port number>
    Example: [5aed:90a0:bc05:01d2:568a:2fc0:0001:12ee]:21000


NetWare Network Setup Procedures

To use a NetWare network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.


Specify the NetWare print service settings. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")
To specify the settings from the computer, use:

  • NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software provided with NetWare)
  • Canon utilities (NetSpot Device Installer, etc.)

Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:

  • The machine's control panel
  • The Remote UI (via a web browser)
  • Canon utilities (NetSpot Device Installer, etc.)

Specify the settings of each computer you use for printing or sending a fax. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")

Specify the settings of the computer receiving data sent from the machine. (Optional equipment is required to send data. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")


Remark
  • You can specify the NetWare protocol settings if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, the optional Super G3 FAX Board, or the optional Color Universal Send Kit.
  • It is recommended that steps 1, 2, and 4 above be performed by the network administrator.
  • To configure settings with software other than the control panel of the machine, NWADMIN, PCONSOLE, or NetSpot Device Installer, TCP/IPv4 protocol must be supported by your network environment (IPv6 is not supported).


NetWare Print Service Settings

To print using a NetWare network, you need to specify print service settings, including print server and queue settings. You can use the software listed below to specify the print service settings from your computer.

  • NWADMIN or PCONSOLE (Novell software provided with NetWare)
  • Canon utilities (NetSpot Device Installer, etc.)

Remark
  • To specify the print service settings from NWADMIN or NetSpot Device Installer, the computer must have Novell Client (NetWare Client by Novell) installed.
  • The following procedures describe a sample NetWare setup. Depending on your environment, the actual setup procedure may differ.
  • You can specify the print server settings on the NetWare server and the print service settings of the machine at the same time, using NetSpot Device Installer. For instructions on how to specify the settings, see online help of NetSpot Device Installer.
  • For more information on NetSpot Device Installer, see "NetSpot Suite."


Types of Print Service

Before specifying print service settings, refer to the following descriptions to determine the type of print service you are using.


Remark
  • Normally with NetWare 4.x or later, it is recommended that you use NDS print service. With NetWare 3.2, it is recommended that you use Bindery print service. This category describes procedures for these two combinations only.
  • With NetWare 5.x, you can use NDPS (Novell Distributed Print Services). For NDPS settings, see the NetWare manual.
  • With NetWare 6, you can use iPrint print service. For iPrint settings, see the NetWare manual.

  • NDS (Novell Directory Service) and Bindery Mode

The machine network supports both the NDS and Bindery mode. Determine the appropriate mode according to the network environment you are using. (If you are using NetWare 3.2, only the Bindery mode is available.)

  • Queue Server Mode and Remote Printer Mode

The machine supports both the queue server mode and the remote printer mode.

  • Queue Server Mode
    If the machine is used in the queue server mode, all print server functions are provided by the machine itself; no other print server hardware or software is required. In the NDS queue server mode (NDS PServer), the NDS print server is used for printing. In the Bindery queue server mode (Bindery PServer), the Bindery print server is used for printing. In the queue server mode, a separate NetWare user operating license is required for each machine.
  • Remote Printer Mode
    In the remote printer mode, NetWare print server is required to control the printer. The machine prints using the NDS print server in the NDS remote printer mode (NPrinter), and the Bindery print server in the Bindery remote printer mode (RPrinter).


Setup Using NetWare Administrator or PCONSOLE


Using NetWare Administrator in the NDS Queue Server Mode or the Remote Printer Mode (NetWare 4.x or Later)

  1. Log in to NetWare as Administrator (or as a user of equivalent authority) → start NetWare Administrator → execute Quick Setup.
  • Select the container object for the printer object you want to create → click [Print Services Quick Setup] on the [Tools] menu.
  1. Specify the [Print Server name], [Printer], and [Print Queue] settings.
  • Enter the print server name in [Print Server name].

To use an existing print server, click the button to the right of [Print Server name] → select a print server from the list box. Be sure to remember the name of the print server. You need it to specify the machine's protocol settings.

  • Under [Printer], enter the printer name in [Name].
  • If you are using the queue server mode, select [Other/Unknown] from [Type].
  • If you are using the remote printer mode, select [Parallel] from [Type] → click [Communication] to open the [Parallel Communication] dialog box.

Select [LPT1] from [Port], and [Manual load] under [Connection type]. Under [Interrupts], specify the appropriate setting for your environment → click [OK] to close the [Parallel Communication] window.

  • Under [Print Queue], enter the queue name in [Name].
  • In [Volume], enter the volume in which the queue is placed.

To use an existing print server, click the button to the right of [Volume] → select a print server from the list box.

  • Click [Create] → exit NetWare Administrator.
  1. If you are using the remote printer mode, start the print server.
  • If you are using the NetWare file server as a print server, enter <Load PSERVER.NLM> in the file server → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.


Using PCONSOLE in the Queue Server Mode or Remote Printer Mode in the Bindery Mode (NetWare 3.2)

  1. Log in to NetWare as Supervisor → start PCONSOLE.
  1. If you have not set up a print server yet, set up the print server.
  • On the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Press [INSERT] on the keyboard.
  • Enter the name of the print server you are setting up → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.

Be sure to remember the name of the print server. You need it to specify the printer's protocol settings.

  • Press [ESC] on the keyboard to return to the [Available Options] menu.
  1. Set up a Queue, and then assign the print server to the queue.
  • On the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Queue Information] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Press [INSERT] on the keyboard.
  • Enter the name of the queue you are setting up → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Select the name of the queue you specified → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Select [Queue Servers] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Press [INSERT] on the keyboard.
  • Select the print server you set up in step 2 → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Press [ESC] on the keyboard repeatedly until you return to the [Available Options] menu.
  1. Assign the printer to the print server.
  • On the [Available Options] menu, select [Print Server Information] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Select the print server you set up in step 2 → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Select [Print Server Configuration] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Select [Printer Configuration] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • From [Configured Printers], select the number of the printer you want to use → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  1. Specify the printer name, type, etc.
  • In [Name], enter the name you want to use for the printer → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • If you are using the queue server mode, select [Defined elsewhere] from [Type]. If you are using the remote printer mode, select [Remote Parallel, LPT1] from [Type].
  • Specify the remaining items → press [ESC] on the keyboard.
  • In the confirmation box that opens, select [Yes] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Press [ESC] on the keyboard to return to the [Print Server Configuration] Menu.
  1. Assign a queue to the printer.
  • Select [Queues Serviced by Printer] → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Select the name of the printer you set up in step 5 → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • Press [INSERT] on the keyboard.
  • Select the queue you set up in step 3 → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  1. Press [ESC] on the keyboard repeatedly until you return to the [Exit PCONSOLE] window → select [Yes] to quit PCONSOLE.
  1. If you are using the remote printer mode, start the print server.
  • If you are using a dedicated print server, enter <PSERVER.EXE> → enter the print server name on the print server → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.
  • If you are using a NetWare file server as a print server, enter <LOAD PSERVER.NLM (print server name)> on the file server → press [ENTER] on the keyboard.


Protocol Settings

This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.

After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see "Network Setting Items."


  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [NetWare Settings] → specify the following.

<NetWare>: [On]

Select the frame type for your environment from the Frame Type drop-down list. If you select [Auto Detect], the frame type is automatically determined.

Select the print service specified in "NetWare Print Service Settings," from the Print Service drop-down list. The following print services are available:

  • [Bindery PServer]:Used in the queue server mode (Bindery mode print service).
  • [RPrinter]:Used in the remote printer mode (Bindery mode print service).
  • [NDS PServer]:Used in the queue server mode (NDS print service).
  • [NPrinter]:Used in the remote printer mode (NDS print service).
  • If [NetWare Settings] is not displayed, consult your local authorized Canon dealer.
  1. Press [Settings] → specify the print service details.

Specify the same tree, context, file server, and print server names that you specified in "NetWare Print Service Settings." (Settings differ depending on the print service. For print service settings, see "Network Setting Items.")

You can specify the print service settings either by selecting the desired options from the list on the screen that appears when you press [Browse], or by entering the desired character string for each item.

  • If you want to use [Browse] to specify each item, make sure you press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in "Startup Time Settings."

  • Press [Skip Log In] in the Browse screen.

If the browse right is not limited to the specific user, you can specify the print service without having to log in to NetWare.

  • Select the tree to which the desired print server belongs → select the context to which the desired print server belongs → select the desired print server.
  • For NDS PServer, specify each item on the screen for setting NDS PServer if necessary.

  • In the Browse screen, press the tree to which you want to log in → select the context to which you want to log in.
  • Press [Log In] → in the Enter Network Password screen, enter the name and password of a user to whom the browse right is granted.

If the browse right is limited to the specific user, it is necessary to log in to NetWare as a user to whom the browse right is granted.

Enter a user name prefixed with 'CN='. If the password is not specified, leave [Password] blank.

  • Select the tree to which the desired print server belongs → select the context to which the desired print server belongs → select the desired print server.
  • For NDS PServer, specify each item on the screen for setting NDS PServer if necessary.

  • In the Browse screen, select the file server to which the desired print server belongs.
  • In the Enter Network Password screen, enter the name and password of a user on the file server.

If the password is not specified, leave [Password] blank.

  • Select the desired print server.
  • Specify each item on the screen for setting Bindery PServer if necessary.

  • In [Tree], enter the name of the tree to which the desired print server belongs → in [Context], enter the name of the context to which the desired print server belongs → in [Print Server], enter the name of the desired print server.

  • For NDS PServer, specify each of the other items if necessary.

  • In [File Server], enter the name of the file server to which the desired print server belongs → in [Print Server], enter the name of the desired print server.
  • For Bindery PServer, specify each of the other items if necessary.


Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

After you have completed specifying the NetWare print service settings and printer protocol settings, you are ready to set up each of the computers for printing or sending a fax.


Remark


Connecting to a NetWare Network

In order to use a NetWare network, all computers that will perform printing or sending a fax need to have NetWare client software installed. For details, see your NetWare and operating system manuals.



Printer Connection Method

Install the driver according to the following procedures indicated in the manual for each driver.

  • If you want to use the UFR II/PCL/PS printer driver
  • See the procedure for standard installation in the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
  • If you want to use the fax driver
  • See the procedure for standard installation in the Fax Driver Installation Guide.

When the dialog box for selecting the port appears during installation, click [Use Network Printer] → [Settings]. From the list, select the print queue that you created in "NetWare Print Service Settings."



Setting Up a Computer as a File Server

To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving data.

This section describes how to set up a computer as a file server.


Remark
  • To send a file to the NetWare server, specify the following NetWare settings for the machine. For instructions on how to specify the protocol settings, see "Protocol Settings."
  • <NetWare>: [On]
  • <Frame Type>: Frame type suitable for your environment
  • This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer receiving data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the control panel. For instructions on how to specify recipient address settings, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."
  • In some environments, additional detailed settings, such as authority settings, may be required. For details, consult the network administrator of the environment you are using.

  1. Log in to NetWare as Administrator (or as a user of equivalent authority) → set up the users and passwords for sending data from the machine.

Enter a user name, and a password not longer than 24 alphanumeric characters.

  1. Create a directory to be used for recipient addresses, and then enable read access and write access by the users who will be sending data.
  1. Set a recipient address from the control panel.

There are two methods for specifying the recipient address; selecting the desired address from the list that appears when you press [Browse], or entering the address using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

Sample recipient settings: NDS Mode Example

If you send data to the "data" directory under "share_vol" in the above tree structure, the settings of the host name and the folder path differ depending on the location of a user account.

  • Example 1 If "SALES_JP" contains the user account "jenkins"
[Host Name]: SALES_JP.SALES.TREE=CANON
[Folder Path]: share_vol\data
[User]: CN=jenkins
[Password]: (Password for the above user)
  • Example 2 If "SALES_US" contains the user account "john"
[Host Name]: SALES_US.SALES.TREE=CANON
[Folder Path]: share_vol.SALES_JP.\data (One dot is required before \data.)
[User]: CN=john
[Password]: (Password for the above user)
  • Example 3 If "SALES" contains the user account "smith"
[Host Name]: SALES.TREE=CANON
[Folder Path]: share_vol.SALES_JP\data
[User]: CN=smith
[Password]: (Password for the above user)
  • Example 4 If "Tokyo" contains the user account "edwards"
[Host Name]: Tokyo.MARKETING.TREE=CANON
[Folder Path]: share_vol.SALES_JP.SALES..\data (Two dots are required before \data.)
[User]: CN=edwards
[Password]: (Password for the above user)

Sample recipient settings: Bindery Mode Example:

  • Server side settings:
[File Server Name]: TOPMAX_SERVER

Set \CSG in the SYS volume as the recipient.

  • The machine's address settings:
<Protocol>: NetWare (IPX)
[Host Name]: TOPMAX_SERVER
[Folder Path]: SYS\CFG
[User]: (User name entered in step 1)
[Password]: (Password for the above user)
  • If you want to use [Browse] to specify each item, make sure you press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in "Startup Time Settings."
  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you change the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • In NDS mode, note the following:
  • For the host name, specify the context by which a user logs in.
  • For the folder path, specify the relative path from the user context. You may omit the "xx=" portion, but the ".TREE=" portion with the tree name may not be omitted.
  • Enter a user name prefixed with "CN=."
  • Unless the same directory tree contains the user account name by which a user logs in and the volume object to which data is sent, dots are required according to the layer of the relative path. For example, one dot is required to indicate the layer one level above (Example 2), and two dots are required to indicate the layer two levels above (Example 4).


NetBIOS Network Setup Procedures

To use a NetBIOS network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.


Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:

  • The machine's control panel
  • The Remote UI (via a web browser)

Specify the settings of each computer you use for printing or sending a fax. (Optional equipment is required to print or send a fax from a computer. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")

Specify the settings of the computer receiving data sent from the machine. (Optional equipment is required to send data. For the equipment needed, see "Optional Equipment and System Requirements.")


Remark
  • It is recommended that steps 1 and 3 above be performed by the network administrator.
  • The only base protocol supported by the machine for NetBIOS networks is TCP/IPv4. TCP/IPv6 and NetBEUI are not supported (SMB is used as a print application).


Protocol Settings

This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.

After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see "Network Setting Items."



TCP/IP Settings (IPv4)

  1. Specify the TCP/IPv4 settings.

If you have not entered the TCP/IPv4 settings yet, enter them now. (For more information, see "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6.")

  • IPv6 is not supported.


SMB and WINS Settings

To use the machine on a NetBIOS network, specify the SMB settings. To resolve a name with WINS, specify the WINS settings using the following procedure.

To specify the SMB settings, you need to use the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, the optional PCL Printer Kit, the optional PS Printer Kit, the optional Super G3 FAX Board, or the optional Color Universal Send Kit.

WINS (Windows Internet Name Service) is a service for associating a NetBIOS name (which is a computer name or printer name on a NetBIOS network) with an IP address. To use WINS, specify the IP address settings for the WINS server.


  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [SMB Server Settings] → specify the following.

[On] for <Use SMB Server>: You can use the SMB server.

In [Server], enter the name of a computer that the machine connects to, using the keyboard on the touch panel display. Be sure to enter a unique name that does not exist as a name for another computer or printer on the same network.

In [Workgroup], enter the name of the workgroup the machine belongs to, using the keyboard on the touch panel display. If there is no workgroup on your environment, create a workgroup in the Windows environment, and then enter the workgroup name.

In [Comment], enter a comment about the printer, if necessary. If you display the printer information, the comment you specified here appears.

If you want the machine to notify the LAN Manager of its existence on the network, press [On] for <LM Announce>. If the LAN Manager does not have to refer to the machine, you can control the traffic over your network by selecting [Off].

To set up an SMB printer, press [SMB Printer Settings] → [On] for <Use SMB> → enter the printer name of the machine in [Printer].

  • You cannot enter the domain name as the workgroup name.
  • You cannot enter a character string that includes blanks in [Server] and [Workgroup].
  • You cannot enter a character string including blanks in [Printer].
  1. On the TCP/IP Settings screen, press [WINS Configuration] → specify the following.

[On] for <WINS Resolution>: You can resolve the name with WINS. Enter the IPv4 address of a WINS server in [WINS Server Address].

Enter the [Scope ID] settings if a scope ID is set on the computer in the network environment you are using. The scope ID is an identifier for determining the range available to a printer or computer. The scope ID set here is used regardless of the setting for <WINS Resolution>.

  • If DHCP determines the IPv4 address, the IPv4 address obtained from a DHCP server is overwritten with the IPv4 address of a WINS server (obtained from the DHCP server), whenever possible.
  • If you set a scope ID, the machine cannot communicate with any computer whose scope ID is different from the scope ID you set here.
  • If a scope ID is not set on any of the computers in your network environment, leave [Scope ID] blank.


Setting Up a Computer for Printing/Sending a Fax

After you have completed the protocol settings, you are ready to set up each of the computers for printing or sending a fax.


Remark


Connecting to a TCP/IP Network

All computers that use the machine for printing or sending a fax must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with your operating system.



Connecting to a NetBIOS Network

All computers that use the machine for printing or sending a fax must be enabled for NetBIOS network use.

The setup procedures differ depending on your operating system. See the procedures below to set the computers.

  • Mac OS X 10.3 or later: See the documentation provided with your Macintosh.

Remark
  • The following procedures describe a sample NetBIOS setup. Depending on your environment, the actual setup procedure may differ.


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

The following is the procedure for specifying a NetBIOS network with Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.

In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according to your operating system.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  1. In the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box, select [Client for Microsoft Networks] and [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].

  1. Double-click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] to open the [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] dialog box.
  1. On the [General] sheet, click [Advanced] → on the [WINS] sheet, select [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP].
  1. Restart the computer if prompted.


Printer Connection Method


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

Remark
  • If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  1. Check the settings for both <RX/Print Range> and <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen, to see whether the IPv4 address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is permitted. See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings."
  • If the settings for both <RX/Print Range> and <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen do not permit the IPv4 address, you cannot install a driver.
  • If the IPv4 address of the computer is beyond the range of the permitted addresses set for <RX/Print Range> after installing a driver, you cannot print or send a fax from the computer.
  1. Install the driver.

Install the driver according to the following procedures indicated in the manual for each driver.

  • If you want to use the UFR II/PCL/PS printer driver
    See the procedure for standard installation in the Printer Driver Installation Guide.
  • If you want to use the fax driver
    See the procedure for standard installation in the Fax Driver Installation Guide.

When the dialog box for selecting the port appears during installation, click [Use Network Printer] → [Settings]. From the list, select [Workgroup], [Server], and [Printer] you set in "SMB and WINS Settings."



Mac OS X 10.3 or later

If you are using the optional PS Printer Kit, and a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc., you can use SMB as the print application. After installing the PPD file according to Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started, specify the print settings according to the instructions in the documentation provided with your Macintosh.



Setting Up a Computer as a File Server

To send data from the machine to a computer on your network, you need to specify the settings of the computer for receiving data. You can send data over a NetBIOS network to a Windows or Samba (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X) shared folder. This section describes how to configure a shared folder.


Remark
  • Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.
  • This section describes only the procedures for setting up a computer receiving data sent from the machine. To send data from the machine to a server on the network, you must enter an address setting from the control panel. For instructions on how to specify recipient address settings, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."
  • The following procedures describe a sample shared folder configuration. Depending on your environment, the actual configuration procedure may differ.


Connecting to a TCP/IP Network

A computer that receives data sent from the machine must have TCP/IP client software installed and must be enabled for TCP/IP network use. For details, see the manuals provided with your operating system.

You can send data over a TCP/IP network from the machine to an FTP server. For instructions on how to set up an FTP server, see "Setting Up a Computer as a File Server."



Connecting to a NetBIOS Network and Configuring a Shared Folder


Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista

It is recommended that the file server be configured by the network administrator.

The number of users or clients that can access a server running Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista is limited. After this number of users or clients is reached, it is not possible to send to a server running Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista.

In the following procedures, items displayed on the screens for Windows 2000 are used. The items displayed may differ according to your operating system.


Remark
  • If you are using Windows Vista, a dialog box may be displayed while you are performing the procedure. In this case, enter a user name and password. For more information, see the manuals provided with the operating system.

  1. Log on to Windows as an Administrator → in the [Local Area Connection Properties] dialog box, select all [Client for Microsoft Networks], [File and Printer Sharing for Microsoft Networks], and [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)].

  1. Double-click [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP)] to open the [Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties] dialog box.
  1. On the [General] sheet, click [Advanced] → on the [WINS] sheet, click [Enable NetBIOS over TCP/IP].
  1. Restart the computer if prompted.
  1. Confirm the computer name.

If you are using Windows 2000, right-click the [My Computer] icon → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window. Right-click the [Computer Management (Local)] icon → click [Properties] to open the [Computer Management (Local) Properties] dialog box. On the [Network Identification] sheet, confirm the [Computer name] setting.

If you are using Windows XP/Server 2003, right-click [My Computer] → click [Properties] → on the [Computer Name] sheet, click [Change]. In the [Computer Name Changes] dialog box, click [More] to open the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name] dialog box → confirm [NetBIOS computer name].

If you are using Windows Vista, perform the same operation as with other operating systems to open the [DNS Suffix and NetBIOS Computer Name] dialog box → confirm the name in [NetBIOS computer name].

  1. Right-click the [My Computer] icon → click [Manage] to open the [Computer Management] window → under [System Tools], in [Local Users and Groups], from the [Users] folder, click [New User].

  1. In the [New User] dialog box, enter the user name in [User name] → enter the password in [Password] → re-enter the password in [Confirm Password] → click [Create].

Enter a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.

If [User must change password at next logon] is selected, any new users added must change their passwords in order to send data from the machine. (You cannot change the password from the control panel.)

  • In an Active Directory environment, the procedures for setting up users differ from the above. For details, see the Windows manual.
  1. Open the properties dialog box of the folder you want to share → on the [Sharing] sheet, click [Share this folder] → enter the share name in [Share name].

  1. Set permissions.

  • Click [Permissions] to display the dialog box.

Select or add the users or groups to whom you want to give access to the shared folder → under [Permissions], select both [Change] and [Read].


  • Display the [Security] sheet.

Select or add the users or groups to whom you want to give access to the shared folder → under [Permissions], select both [Write] and [Read & Execute], or a higher access authority. For data in the folder, check both [Write] and [Read], or a higher access authority.

  • To display the [Security] tab in Windows XP, open Folder Options → deselect [Use simple file sharing]. However, you can share folders and files with [Use simple file sharing] selected. Select or deselect [Use simple file sharing] to suit your environment. For more information, see the manual provided with Windows XP.
  • In the Active Directory environment, the procedures for specifying the security settings of the shared folder differ from above. For more information, see the Windows manual.
  1. Set a recipient address using the control panel.

There are three methods for specifying the recipient address; selecting the desired address from the list that appears when you press [Browse], searching for the address by pressing [Host Search], or entering the address using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

Sample recipient setting:

  • Server side settings (set and confirmed in the above step.):
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
Create a folder called 'Images' within share, and then specify Images as the recipient for sending.
  • The machine's Recipient Settings:
<Protocol>: Windows (SMB)
[Host Name]: \\swan\share (Shared folder path)
[Folder Path]: \Images
[User]: User name entered in the above step.
[Password]: Password for the above user.

  • If you want to use [Browse] to specify each item, make sure you press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in "Startup Time Settings."
  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you change the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case:
    \\192.168.2.100\share
    \\host_name.organization.company.com\share
  • You can also specify the user name in the address using the following formats:
  • domain_name\user_name (up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the domain name, and up to 20 for the user name)
  • user_name@organization.company.com (up to 128 characters in total)
    Note that the latter is only applicable when sending to a Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista computer that belongs to a domain containing Windows 2000/Server 2003/Vista domain controllers.


Samba (UNIX/Linux/Mac OS X)

Samba 2.2.8a or later is supported.

In some environments, detailed settings may be required in order to use the Samba. For details, consult your network administrator.


  1. Set up the users who access the Samba shared folder, and their passwords.

Set a user name not longer than 20 alphanumeric characters, and a password not longer than 14 alphanumeric characters.


  • Log in to a workstation as a superuser, and set the user name and password.

  • See the documentation provided with your Macintosh to set the user name and password.

  1. Set a recipient address using the control panel.

There are three methods for specifying the recipient address; selecting the desired address from the list that appears when you press [Browse], searching for the address by pressing [Host Search], or entering the address using the keyboard on the touch panel display.

Sample recipient setting:

  • Server side settings:
[Computer name]: swan
[Share Name]: share
Create a folder called 'Images' within share, and then specify Images as the recipient for sending.
  • The machine's recipient settings:
<Protocol>: Windows (SMB)
[Host Name]: \\swan\share (Shared folder path)
[Folder Path]: \Images
[User]: User name entered in the above step.
[Password]: Password for the above user.
For a sample screen, see the example of Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista screen.
  • If you use [Browse] to specify each item, press [Browse] after the expiration of the time specified in "Startup Time Settings."
  • Up to 128 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Host Name] on the control panel. Also, up to 255 alphanumeric characters can be entered for [Folder Path].
  • If you change the language of the touch panel display, [Host Name] and [Folder Path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • If the language of the touch panel display differs from the computer used as a master browser, [Host name] and [Folder path] may not be displayed correctly, or you may not be able to browse the directories.
  • You can send data using the following formats. A DNS server is required for the latter case.
    \\192.168.2.100\share
    \\host_name.organization.company.com\share
  • You can also specify the user name in the address using the following format.
  • domain_name\user_name (up to 15 alphanumeric characters for the domain name, and up to 20 for the user name)


AppleTalk Network Setup Procedures

To print via an AppleTalk network, it is necessary to perform the following procedures.


  • 1 Macintosh Network Settings

To specify AppleTalk network settings, enable AppleTalk according to the instructions in the documentation provided with your Macintosh.

Specify the protocol settings. To specify the settings, use:

  • The machine's control panel
  • The Remote UI (via a web browser)
  • Canon utilities (NetSpot Device Installer, etc.)

Specify the settings for each computer you use for printing.


Remark
  • You can only specify the AppleTalk protocol settings if you are using the optional UFR II Printer Kit, the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, or the optional PS Printer Kit.
  • It is recommended that the network administrator perform step 2.


Protocol Settings

This section describes how to specify the protocol settings for the machine using the control panel. If you are configuring the settings for the first time, use the control panel of the machine.

After configuring the settings, you can change them using software other than the control panel of the machine. For details, see "Network Setting Items."


Remark

  1. On the Network Settings screen, press [AppleTalk Settings] → specify the following.

[On] for <AppleTalk>: You can use the AppleTalk network.

In [Service Name], enter a name for the printer not longer than 32 characters. The name you enter here appears on the Macintosh screen.

If you are using a network that is set up in zones, enter the name of the zone in [Zone].

  • If there is more than one printer in the same zone, each printer must have a unique name.
  • You can also enter a zone name by pressing [Browse] and selecting the appropriate name from the displayed list.


Setting Up a Computer for Printing

After you have completed the machine protocol settings, install the printer driver on the Macintosh that will do the printing, and then make the settings for the print destination.

Specify the following settings according to the instructions in the manual for each driver.


Remark

  • If you want to use the UFR II printer driver

1. Installation of the UFR II printer driver
See the Mac UFR II Driver Guide.

2. Print settings
Set the machine as the print destination.

  • If you want to use a PS printer driver provided by Apple Inc. with the Mac OS

1. Installation of the PPD file
See Chapter 10, "Before Printing from Computers," in Getting Started.

2. Print settings
Set the machine as the print destination.

3. Selection of the printer name
Select either of the following names displayed in the Macintosh screen. ('xxx' indicates the name of the printer entered in [Service Name].)

  • [xxx_D]: the print job is printed without spooling to the hard disk of the machine.
  • [xxx_S]: the print job is printed after it has been spooled to the hard disk of the machine.


Network Connection Problems and Remedies

This section describes the causes of network connection problems, and how to resolve them.


Unable to Set up a Network

<Check the network connection.> is displayed on the control panel.

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to your network).

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Unable to Set up a Network

Cause

[Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.] is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Set [Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.] to 'On'.

<Check the network connection.> is displayed on the control panel.

Cause 1

The machine and cable are not properly connected.

Remedy

Turn OFF the machine's power switches, check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, and then turn them ON. (See "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network.")

Cause 2

[Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.] is set to 'On', although the machine is not connected to a network.

Remedy

Set [Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.] to 'Off'.

The machine automatically connects to a destination other than the intended destination via its dial-up access (when a dial-up router is connected to your network).

Cause

The machine periodically or temporarily communicates with devices on your network. If a dial-up router or NetWare file server is on the network to which the machine is connected, the machine connects to a destination other than the intended destination, depending on the settings of the machine or dial-up router. This may result in subscriber line charges and call charges.
Examples:

  • The file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine does not exist on the network.
  • The DNS server exists on an external network.
  • You attempt to access a device connected to an external network, if the device's information is set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected.
Remedy

Check the following:

  • If the dial-up router does not have to send packets via broadcast, change the router settings to ensure that it sends packets via a method other than broadcast. If dial-up router has to send packets via broadcast, check that the settings are correct.
  • Check that the file or mail server's host name or IP address set on the machine is correct.
  • If you attempt to access a device on the network to which the machine is connected, with the DNS server on an external network, set the destination using an IP address, not a host name.
  • If information about a device on an external network is set on the DNS server on the network to which the machine is connected, check the settings.

Detailed information concerning the machine cannot be set or browsed using the Remote UI or utility.

Cause 1

The IP addresses of computers on which the Remote UI or utility is used are not allowed in <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen.

Remedy

If the settings for <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen do not permit the IP address of a computer on which the Remote UI or utility is used, you cannot specify machine setting items or browse information on the machine. Check the settings for <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen. (See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings.")

Cause 2

<Use SNMP v. 1> or [Enable Dedicated Port Settings] is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Set <Use SNMP v. 1> and [Enable Dedicated Port Settings] to 'On'. (See "Communication Environment Setup.")

Cause 3

The SNMP community name does not match.

Remedy

If you use an SNMP community name different from the one stored in the machine to access the machine from a utility, the utility will not detect the machine. In this case, check the SNMP community name. (See "Communication Environment Setup.")

Cause 4

Invalid cache data is remaining.

Remedy

If the Remote UI does not start properly and an error message is displayed on your Web browser, delete the cache files.



Printing Problems and Remedies

This section describes how to resolve basic printing problems.


Unable to Install a Driver (TCP/IP Network)

Unable to Install a Driver (NetBIOS Network)

Unable to Print from a TCP/IP Network

Unable to Print from a NetWare Network

Unable to Print from a NetBIOS Network (Windows)

Unable to Print from an AppleTalk Network

Unable to Install a Driver (TCP/IP Network)

Cause

The IP address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is not permitted by the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen.

Remedy

If you want to use TCP/IP for printing and the IP address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is not permitted by the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen, the driver cannot be installed successfully. Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen. (See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings.")

Unable to Install a Driver (NetBIOS Network)

Cause

The IPv4 address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is not permitted by the settings for both <RX/Print Range> and <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen.

Remedy

If you are using a NetBIOS network and the IPv4 address of the computer in which a driver is to be installed is not permitted by the settings for both <RX/Print Range> and <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen, the driver cannot be installed successfully. Check the settings for both <RX/Print Range> and <Setting/Browsing Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen. (See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings.")

Unable to Print from a TCP/IP Network

Cause 1

The machine and cable are not properly connected.

Remedy

Turn OFF the machine's power switches, check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, and then turn them ON. (See "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network.")

Cause 2

TCP/IP network is not properly set up.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Confirm that the IPv4 addresses are properly set up. If the IPv4 addresses were set using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, confirm that they are operating.
  • Confirm that the IPv6 addresses are properly set up. After checking the settings of the router, set <Use Stateless Address> to 'On' to confirm whether you can obtain an address. If the IPv6 addresses were set using DHCPv6, confirm that DHCPv6 is operating.
  • Your computer may not be able to recognize the machine even though the IP address settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. (See "Startup Time Settings.")
Cause 3

The computer that is printing is not properly set up. (Windows)

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Confirm that the proper printer driver is installed. If you are printing from Windows, each computer must have a printer driver installed. For instructions on how to install printer drivers, see Getting Started.
  • Confirm that the correct printer is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing. Check the output destination in [Printer] in [Control Panel].
Cause 4

The computer that is printing is not properly set up. (Macintosh)

Remedy

Check the following Macintosh settings:

  • Confirm that the proper printer driver is installed.
  • Confirm that the proper printer has been selected as the destination.
  • Confirm that [AppleTalk] is active.
  • Confirm that the AppleTalk connection method is EtherTalk or Ethernet.
Cause 5

The name of the file being printed is too long.

Remedy

Normally LPR sends jobs either under the name of the application software used for printing or under the file name. However, a job name longer than 255 characters cannot be sent to the printer. To correct this problem, rename the file with a shorter name.

Cause 6

The IP address of the computer from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) is to be sent to the machine is not permitted by the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 or IPv6 Settings screen.

Remedy

Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv6 Settings screen. (See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings.")

Cause 7

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to Print from a NetWare Network

Cause 1

The machine and cable are not properly connected.

Remedy

Turn OFF the machine's power switches, check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, and then turn them ON. (See "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network.")

Cause 2

The NetWare network is not properly set up.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Confirm that the NetWare file server is running.
  • Confirm that there is sufficient disk space on the NetWare file server. Large files cannot be printed if there is insufficient disk space.
  • Start NWADMIN or PCONSOLE, and then confirm that the print queue is set up properly and is active.
  • Confirm that the network settings of the machine are correctly set. (See "Protocol Settings.") Check the following in particular:
  • A valid frame type is selected from the Frame Type drop-down list.
  • [Print Server] and [Printer Number] are correctly specified.
  • Your computer may not be able to recognize the machine, even though the IP address settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. (See "Startup Time Settings.")
Cause 3

The computer that is printing is not properly set up.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Confirm that the proper printer driver is installed. If you are printing from Windows, each computer must have a printer driver installed.
  • For instructions on how to install printer drivers, see Getting Started.
  • Confirm that the correct printer is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing. Confirm the output destination in [Printer] in [Control Panel].
Cause 4

If you are using an NDS PServer or Bindery PServer and the print server has a password setting, the machine's password setting is incorrect.

Remedy

Perform the following steps to correct the machine's password setting:

  • Confirm the password in the NetWare print server for printing on the machine.
  • Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Network Settings] → [NetWare Settings] to open the NetWare Settings screen.
  • Press [Settings] → enter a valid password in [Print Server Password]. (The setting becomes effective when the machine is restarted.)
Cause 5

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to Print from a NetBIOS Network (Windows)

Cause 1

The machine and cable are not properly connected.

Remedy

Turn OFF the machine's power switches, check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, and then turn them ON. (See "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network.")

Cause 2

TCP/IP network is not properly set up.

Remedy

On the assumption that the TCP/IP is working correctly if you print using NetBIOS network, check the following:

  • Confirm that the IPv4 addresses are properly set up. If the IPv4 addresses were set using DHCP, BOOTP, or RARP, confirm that they are operating.
  • If you are using a DHCP server, confirm that the WINS server is working correctly with the DHCP server.
  • Your computer may not be able to recognize the machine even though the IP address settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. (See "Startup Time Settings.")
Cause 3

NetBIOS network is not properly set up.

Remedy

Confirm that SMB and WINS are properly set up.

Cause 4

The IPv4 address of the computer from which data (print/fax/I-fax job) is to be sent to the machine is not permitted by the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen.

Remedy

Check the settings for <RX/Print Range> in [IP Address Range Settings] on the IPv4 Settings screen. (See step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings.")

Cause 5

The computer that is printing is not properly set up.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Confirm that the proper printer driver is installed. If you are printing from Windows, each computer must have a printer driver installed.
  • For instructions on how to install printer drivers, see Getting Started.
  • Confirm that the correct printer is set as the output destination for the computer that is printing. Confirm the output destination in [Printer] in [Control Panel].
Cause 6

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to Print from an AppleTalk Network

Cause 1

The machine and cable are not properly connected.

Remedy

Turn OFF the machine's power switches, check that the machine is connected to the network using the proper cable, and then turn them ON. (See "Connecting the Machine to a Computer or Network.")

Cause 2

The AppleTalk network is not properly set up.

Remedy

Confirm the AppleTalk settings. In particular, check the following:

  • Set the [Phase] to a valid phase type.
  • Set the [Zone] to the zone to which the printer belongs.
  • Your computer may not be able to recognize the machine even though the IP address settings are appropriate. This problem may be resolved by delaying the startup of network communications for the machine. (See "Startup Time Settings.")
Cause 3

The computer that is printing is not properly set up.

Remedy

Check the following Macintosh settings:

  • Confirm that the proper printer driver is installed.
  • Confirm that the proper printer has been selected as the destination.
  • Confirm that [AppleTalk] is active.
  • Confirm that the AppleTalk connection method is EtherTalk or Ethernet.
Cause 4

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.



Data Sending/File Sharing Problems and Remedies

This section describes how to resolve data sending/file sharing problems.


Unable to Send Data/Share Files (FTP)

Unable to Send Data/Share Files (NetWare)

Unable to Send Data/Share Files (Windows and Samba File Sharing)

<Check the server.> is displayed when you try to use a WebDAV server.

<TCP/IP error> is displayed when you try to send to a WebDAV server.

<SSL Error> is displayed, and transmission fails when you try to send to a destination using SSL encrypted communication via a WebDAV server.

<Could not be sent.> is displayed when you try to send via a WebDAV server.

<Check the server.> is displayed when you try to send via a WebDAV server.

<Cannot connect.> is displayed when you try to send to a WebDAV server.

Unable to Send Data/Share Files (FTP)

Cause 1

The FTP server is not set correctly.

Remedy

Perform the following to check the server status. (If you are using Windows, perform these from the command prompt.)

  • Example using UNIX, where the FTP server has the IP address: 192.168.1.195
    U:>ftp 192.168.1.195 *Connect to server
    Connected to 192.168.37.195.
    220 canmfs FTP server (UNIX(r) System V Release 4.0) ready.
    User (192.168.37.195:(none)): user_name *User login
    331 Password required for user_name.
    Password: *Enter password
    230 User user_name logged in.
    ftp>cd /export/share *Move to data destination directory
    250 CWD command successful.
    ftp> bin *Set data transfer type (binary)
    200 Type set to I.
    ftp> put sample.tif *Set transfer file name for verification
    ftp> by *Cut off server connection
    221 Goodbye
  • If the above are confirmed and file sharing still does not operate normally, consult the network administrator for the environment you are using.
Cause 2

The machine's address [User] setting contains one or more spaces after the user name.

Remedy

Ensure that the machine's address [User] setting does not contain spaces after the user name.

Cause 3

The machine was turned OFF while sending data to the FTP server, and when the machine was turned back ON, it attempted to resend the data. (If a Windows 2000/XP/Server 2003/Vista FTP server is being used.)

Remedy

If power to the machine is turned OFF while data is being sent to the FTP server, the FTP server may hold the data in a writing-in-progress state. Therefore, this data cannot be overwritten even when the machine reconnects and sends the same data again. Stop the FTP server temporarily and delete the held data, so it can be sent again.

Cause 4

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to Send Data/Share Files (NetWare)

Cause 1

File sharing settings for the NetWare file server are incorrect. (In Bindery Mode.)

Remedy

Check the following settings:

  • Use your computer to log in to the NetWare file server. From Windows Explorer, double-click [Entire Network] → check that the NetWare server you want to share is listed there. You can also check for the NetWare server as follows: On the [Start] menu, point to [Find] → click [Computer] → enter the name of the server you want to share → check that the server is on the network. (This server name will be the [Host Name] you entered when you set up the recipient settings.)
  • Open the server → open the folder for file sharing. (The path to this folder will be the [Folder Path] you entered when you set up the recipient settings.)
  • Check that files can be written to this folder.
  • If data cannot be sent or file sharing does not work after you do the above, consult your network administrator.
Cause 2

File sharing settings for the NetWare file server are incorrect. (In NDS Mode.)

Remedy

Check the following settings:

  • Log in as a user with Admin or equivalent authority. From Windows Explorer, double-click [Entire Network] → check that the NetWare server you want to share is listed there. You can also check for the NetWare server as follows: On the [Start] menu, point to [Find] → click [Computer] → enter the name of the server you want to share → check that the server is on the network.
  • Start the NWADMIN for this server. If [Root] is displayed at the upper left corner of the screen, the layer below it is the context. If [Root] is not displayed, go to the [View] menu → click [Go Up a Level] to change to the display below [Root]. (This context will be the value entered to the right side of the expression "o=" when you set up [Host Name] of the recipient.)
  • With <Root> appearing on the screen, go to the [View] menu → click [Go Up a Level] to open the [Set Context] dialog box. The tree name will be displayed in [Tree]. (This tree name will be the value you entered to the right side of the expression ".TREE=" when you set up [Host Name] of the recipient.)
  • If data cannot be sent or file sharing will not work after you do the above, consult your network administrator.
Cause 3

There is a print job in the printing queue, and the machine is still receiving this job.

Remedy

Send the data after the print job has been completely received. The machine cannot send data while it is receiving a print job.

Cause 4

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

Unable to Send Data/Share Files (Windows and Samba File Sharing)

Cause 1

File sharing settings for the shared folder are incorrect.

Remedy

Check the following settings:

  • On the computer you are using, go into Windows Explorer → double-click [Entire Network] → check that the computer you want to share is listed there. You can also check for the computer as follows: On the [Start] menu, point to [Find] → click [Computer] → enter the name of the computer you want to share → check that the computer is on the network.
  • If the computer you want to share is listed, double-click its icon to see whether the shared name of the folder you want to share is listed.
Cause 2

An error message is displayed on the touch panel display of the machine.

Remedy

After confirming the error message, see "Problem Solving," and perform the necessary operations according to the error message displayed.

<Check the server.> is displayed when you try to use a WebDAV server.

Cause

The WebDAV server is unavailable.

Remedy

Confirm the status of the WebDAV server.

<TCP/IP error> is displayed when you try to send to a WebDAV server.

Cause 1

The IPv4 address is set to '0.0.0.0', because it cannot be obtained automatically via DHCP, RARP, or BOOTP when the IPv4 address setting in SRAM is set to '0.0.0.0'.

Remedy

See "TCP/IPv4 Settings" to specify the correct IPv4 address.

Cause 2

The static IPv4 address is set to '0.0.0.0' when the IPv4 address setting in SRAM is set to '0.0.0.0'.

Remedy

See "TCP/IPv4 Settings" to specify the correct IPv4 address.

Cause 3

The IPv6 addresses are not properly set up.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Confirm that the settings for the addresses (<Use Stateless Address>, <Use Manual Address>, or <Use DHCPv6>) are set to 'On'.
  • If you are using a stateless address or DHCPv6, confirm that addresses can be obtained.
  • If addresses cannot be obtained, check the settings of the router or DHCPv6 server.
  • It may take several minutes for a stateless address to be determined.
Cause 4

The IP address of the DNS server is not correct.

Remedy

See "TCP/IPv4 Settings," or "TCP/IPv6 Settings," to check the IP address of the DNS server.

Cause 5

Sending could not be performed due to a lack of resources in the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Remedy

Free up sufficient disk space on the WebDAV server.

<SSL Error> is displayed, and transmission fails when you try to send to a destination using SSL encrypted communication via a WebDAV server.

Cause 1

The WebDAV server does not support SSL encrypted communication.

Remedy

Specify the SSL settings required for your environment on the WebDAV server.

Cause 2

The proxy server does not support SSL encrypted communication.

Remedy

If the WebDAV client is connected to the Internet via a proxy server, set the proxy server to use SSL.

<Could not be sent.> is displayed when you try to send via a WebDAV server.

Cause 1

An error occurred in the WebDAV server or proxy server.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
  • Check the settings of the proxy server.
Cause 2

External access to the target files or directories was denied.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Cause 3

The WebDAV server is busy because of heavy access.

Remedy

Try sending again later.

Cause 4

Sending files in chunks is not allowed.

Remedy

Press [Off] for <Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending>. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")

Cause 5

The size of the sent data is too large.

Remedy

Confirm the size of the sent data.

Cause 6

The specified URI (host name and folder path specified as the recipient address) is too long.

Remedy

See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive," to confirm the full path for the HTTP server entered in [Host Name] and the WebDAV folder path entered in [Folder Path] as the recipient address.

<Check the server.> is displayed when you try to send via a WebDAV server.

Cause 1

The machine tried to access the destination without using a proxy server, but it was necessary to access via a proxy server.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
Cause 2

Access to the destination was denied.

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Cause 3

The machine tried to access the destination via a proxy server without using SSL encrypted communication.

Remedy

Press [Off] for <Use Chunked Encoding with WebDAV Sending>. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")

Cause 4

The proxy server failed to communicate with the upstream server.

Remedy

Check the following:

  • Check the settings of the WebDAV server.
  • Check the settings of the proxy server.
Cause 5

According to the request from the WebDAV client, the HTTP protocol version which is not supported by the WebDAV server is used.

Remedy

Check the settings of the WebDAV server.

Cause 6

The disk space on the WebDAV server was insufficient to process the request from the WebDAV client.

Remedy

Free up sufficient disk space on the WebDAV server.

<Cannot connect.> is displayed when you try to send to a WebDAV server.

Cause

Proxy server authentication failed.

Remedy

See step 10 in "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," to confirm the settings of the proxy server.



Encrypted SSL Data Communication Problems and Remedies

This section describes how to resolve encrypted SSL data communication problems.


<The default key is not set. Check the [Key and Certificate List] settings in the Certificate Settings> is displayed when SSL is set.

<Cannot delete the default key when SSL is On, or when the [Receive Restrictions for Each Function] setting in Device Information Delivery is Off. Check the SSL or Device Information Delivery setting.> is displayed when you try to erase a key pair.

<Cannot change settings because the selected key is being used. Check the SSL or Device Information Delivery setting.> is displayed when you try to erase the default key pair.

<Cannot register because the algorithm of this key is not supported.> is displayed when you try to register a key pair file.

You cannot use encrypted SSL communication for IPP printing, email/I-fax, the Remote UI, MEAP functions via a web browser, and device information delivery, or confirm Department IDs and passwords even after you have turned SSL on.

<Certificate exp. date error> is displayed.

<Digital sig. cert. access err.> is displayed.

<The default key is not set. Check the [Key and Certificate List] settings in the Certificate Settings> is displayed when SSL is set.

Cause

The key pair or server certificate to use has not been registered.

Remedy

It is necessary to register a key pair and server certificate in order to perform encrypted SSL communication. For instructions on how to register a key pair, see "Generating a Key Pair and Server Certificate," or "Registering a Key Pair File and Server Certificate File Installed from a Computer."

<Cannot delete the default key when SSL is On, or when the [Receive Restrictions for Each Function] setting in Device Information Delivery is Off. Check the SSL or Device Information Delivery setting.> is displayed when you try to erase a key pair.

Cause

The key you are trying to erase is currently being used for encrypted SSL communication or used for the [Receive Restrictions for Each Function] mode in Device Information Delivery Settings.

Remedy

Cancel all SSL settings and encrypted SSL communication. See "Security," to set all settings for the [Receive Restrictions for Each Function] mode in Device Information Delivery Settings to 'On.'

<Cannot change settings because the selected key is being used. Check the SSL or Device Information Delivery setting.> is displayed when you try to change the default key.

Cause

The key you are trying to erase is currently being used for encrypted SSL communication or used for the [Receive Restrictions for Each Function] mode in Device Information Delivery Settings.

Remedy

Cancel all SSL settings and encrypted SSL communication. See "Security," to set all settings for the [Receive Restrictions for Each Function] mode in Device Information Delivery Settings to 'On.'

<Cannot register because the algorithm of this key is not supported.> is displayed when you try to register a key pair file.

Cause

You are trying to register a key pair file which uses the DSA algorithm.

Remedy

Register a key pair file which uses the RSA algorithm.

You cannot use encrypted SSL communication for IPP printing, email/I-fax, the Remote UI, MEAP functions via a web browser, and device information delivery, or confirm Department IDs and passwords even after you have turned SSL on.

Cause1

The generated key pair or server certificate is corrupted.

Remedy

After erasing the key pair you are using, generate a key pair and server certificate.

Cause2

The preinstalled default key pair or server certificate is corrupted.

Remedy

After erasing the key pair you are using, generate a key pair and server certificate.

Cause3

The registered key pair file or server certificate file is corrupted.

Remedy

After erasing the key pair you are using, install the key pair file and server certificate file created on your computer using the Remote UI (See "Remote UI."). Then, register the installed files on the control panel of the machine.

<Certificate exp. date error> is displayed.

Cause

The certificate has expired.

Remedy

Confirm the expiration date for the certificate.

<Digital sig. cert. access err.> is displayed.

Cause1

Access to the user certificate was denied when sending a PDF with a user signature.

Remedy

See "Generating and Confirming a Key Pair and Device Signature Certificate and User Certificate for Adding Digital Signatures to PDF Files" to confirm the user certificate settings.

Cause2

Access to the device certificate was denied when sending a PDF with a device signature.

Remedy

See "Generating and Confirming a Key Pair and Device Signature Certificate and User Certificate for Adding Digital Signatures to PDF Files" to confirm the device certificate settings.



IEEE802.1X Authentication Problems and Remedies

This section describes how to resolve IEEE802.1X authentication problems.


<IEEE802.1X error. Set the correct cert. information.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. Change the password.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. Check authentication settings.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. The certificate has expired.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. The certificate is incorrect.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. Cannot analyze the certificate.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. No reply from the destination.> is displayed.

<IEEE802.1X error. Set the correct cert. information.> is displayed.

Cause

The correct client authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and the CA certificate) is not set.

Remedy

Confirm the set authentication method and authentication information (the key pair and certificate, user name and password, and CA certificate).

<IEEE802.1X error. Change the password.> is displayed.

Cause

The correct password is not specified.

Remedy

Confirm the password, and then specify the correct password.

<IEEE802.1X error. Check authentication settings.> is displayed.

Cause

The specified authentication method of the machine does not match the authentication method of the RADIUS server.

Remedy

Confirm whether the authentication method specified for the machine and the authentication method specified for the RADIUS server match, and specify the correct authentication method if necessary.

<IEEE802.1X error. The certificate has expired.> is displayed.

Cause

The server certificate sent from the RADIUS server has expired.

Remedy

Confirm the expiration date for the server certificate of the RADIUS server.

<IEEE802.1X error. The certificate is incorrect.> is displayed.

Cause

An error occurred when verifying the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server using the CA certificate.

Remedy

Confirm the contents of the server certificate of the RADIUS server, as well as the CA certification registered on the machine.

<IEEE802.1X error. Cannot analyze the certificate.> is displayed.

Cause

The machine failed to analyze the server certificate sent from the RADIUS server.

Remedy

Confirm the server certificate contents of the RADIUS server.

<IEEE802.1X error. No reply from the destination.> is displayed.

Cause

An error occurred when communicating with the authenticator.

Remedy

Confirm the authenticator (LAN switch) settings, as well as the RADIUS server settings.



Network Setting Items

If you are configuring the settings for the first time in "Interface Settings," "TCP/IPv4 Settings," "TCP/IPv6 Settings," or "Settings Common to TCP/IPv4 and TCP/IPv6," use the control panel of the machine. After configuring the TCP/IP settings, you can change them using the Remote UI.

In the NetWare or AppleTalk network, the TCP/IP protocol must be used to specify the settings with software other than the control panel of the machine. The setting items are shown below.


Remark
  • Some items can be set using the Remote UI. Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI.
  • In the following tables, "N/A" stands for "Not Applicable".
  • For more information on Device Information Delivery, see "Security."

  • Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm.
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Change Settings/Display Connection Confirm. On/Off Off N/A

  • TCP/IP Settings (1/5)
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
IPv4 Settings: Use IPv4
Use IPv4 On/Off On N/A
IPv4 Settings: IP Address Settings
IP Address IP address 0.0.0.0 N/A
Subnet Mask IP address 0.0.0.0 N/A
Gateway Address IP address 0.0.0.0 N/A
DHCP On/Off Off
RARP On/Off Off
BOOTP On/Off Off
IPv4 Settings: PING Command
PING Command IP address 0.0.0.0 N/A N/A
IPv4 Settings: IP Address Range Settings*1
RX/Print Range:
Reject IPv4 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
RX/Print Range:
Permit IPv4 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
Setting/Browsing Range:
Reject IPv4 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
Setting/Browsing Range:
Permit IPv4 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv4 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
IPv6 Settings: Use IPv6
Use IPv6 On/Off Off N/A
IPv6 Settings: Stateless Address Settings
Use Stateless Address On/Off On N/A
IPv6 Settings: Manual Address Settings
Use Manual Address On/Off Off N/A
Manual Address IPv6 Address (39 Characters maximum) - N/A
Prefix Length 0 to 128 64 N/A
Default Router Addr. 39 Characters maximum - N/A
IPv6 Settings: Use DHCPv6
Use DHCPv6 On/Off Off
IPv6 Settings: PING Command
IPv6 Address 39 Characters maximum - N/A
Host Name 48 Characters maximum - N/A
IPv6 Settings: IP Address Range Settings*1
RX/Print Range:
Reject IPv6 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv6 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
RX/Print Range:
Permit IPv6 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv6 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
Setting/Browsing Range:
Reject IPv6 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv6 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A
Setting/Browsing Range:
Permit IPv6 Address
Apply Settings: On/Off
Up to 8 IPv6 addresses can be stored.
Off N/A

*1 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Super G3 FAX Board
  • Color Universal Send Kit

  • TCP/IP Settings (2/5)
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
DNS Settings: DNS Server Address Settings: IPv4
Primary DNS Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 N/A
Secondary DNS Server IP Address 0.0.0.0 N/A
DNS Settings: DNS Server Address Settings: IPv6
Primary DNS Server IPv6 Address - N/A
Secondary DNS Server IPv6 Address - N/A
DNS Settings: DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings: IPv4
Host Name 47 Characters maximum Canon
******
("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address)
N/A
Domain Name 47 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
DNS Settings: DNS Host Name/Domain Name Settings: IPv6
Use Same Host Name/Domain Name as IPv4 On/Off Off N/A
Host Name 47 Characters maximum Canon
******
("******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address)
N/A
Domain Name 47 Characters maximum - N/A
DNS Settings: DNS Dynamic Update Settings: IPv4
DNS Dynamic Update On/Off Off N/A
DNS Settings: DNS Dynamic Update Settings: IPv6
DNS Dynamic Update On/Off Off N/A
Register Stateless Address On/Off Off N/A
Register Manual Address On/Off Off N/A
Register Stateful Address On/Off Off N/A

  • TCP/IP Settings (3/5)
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
WINS Configuration
WINS Resolution On/Off Off N/A
WINS Server Address IP address 0.0.0.0 N/A
Node Type Auto Set, display only - - N/A
Scope ID 63 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
LPD Print Settings*2
LPD Print Settings On/Off On
LPD Banner Page*3 On/Off Off
RAW Print Settings*2
RAW Print Settings On/Off On
Bidirectional Communication On/Off Off
SNTP Settings
Use SNTP On/Off Off N/A
Polling Interval Interval for performing time synchronization (1 to 48 hours) 24 N/A
NTP Server Address IP address or host name (NULL) N/A
NTP Server Check - - N/A
FTP Print Settings*4
Use FTP printing On/Off Off
User User name for FTP server login (24 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
Password Password for FTP server login (24 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
WSD Print Settings*2
Use WSD On/Off On
Use WSD Browsing On/Off On
Use Multicast Discovery On/Off On
Use PASV Mode for FTP*5
Use PASV Mode for FTP On/Off Off
IPP Print Settings*2
IPP Print Settings On/Off On
Use SSL On/Off Off N/A
Use Authentication On/Off Off N/A
User User name for IPP authentication (24 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
Password Password for IPP authentication (24 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
Multicast Discovery
Response On/Off On
Scope Name Scope name to be used for a multicast discovery (32 Characters maximum) (default) N/A

*2 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Super G3 FAX Board
*3 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
*4 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
*5 This item is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated by registering a license key.

  • TCP/IP Settings (4/5)
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Certificate Settings: Generate Network Communication Key
Key Name 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Key Algorithm RSA, display only - - N/A
Key Length (bit) 512/1024 512 N/A
Start Date of Validity Year, Month, Date (01/01/2000 - 31/12/2048) (NULL) N/A
End Date of Validity Year, Month, Date (01/01/2000 - 31/12/2048) (NULL) N/A
Country/Region Country/Region name and code (2 Characters maximum) Singapore (SG) N/A
State 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
City 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Organization 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Orgnztion Unit 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Common Name IP address or FQDN (24 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
Certificate Settings: Generate Key
Generate/Update Device Signature Key*6 - - N/A
Certificate Settings: Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for this Machine
Certificate Details Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Certificate Thumbprint/Certificate Verification - N/A
Erase - - N/A
Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for - N/A
Certificate Settings: Key and Certificate List: Key and Certificate List for Users*7
Certificate Details Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Certificate Thumbprint/Certificate Verification - N/A
Erase - - N/A
Certificate Settings: CA Certificate List
Certificate Details Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Certificate Thumbprint/ Certificate Verification - N/A
Erase - - N/A
Certificate Settings: Register Key and Certificate
Register Key Name (24 Characters maximum)
Password (24 Characters maximum)
- N/A
Erase - - N/A
Certificate Settings: Register CA Certificate
Register - - N/A
Erase - - N/A

*6 [Generate/Update Device Signature Key] is enabled if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated by registering a license key.
*7 [Key and Certificate List for Users] is enabled if the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated by registering a license key.

  • TCP/IP Settings (5/5)
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Use HTTP
Use HTTP On/Off On
SSL Settings
SSL Settings Functions using SSL encrypted communications - N/A
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key - - N/A
Certificate Details Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Certificate Thumbprint/Certificate Verification - N/A
Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for - N/A
Proxy Settings*8
Use Proxy On/Off Off N/A
Server Address IP address or FQDN (128 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
Port Number 1 to 65535 80 N/A
Use Proxy within the Same
Domain
On/Off Off N/A
Authentication Settings
Use Proxy Authentication On/Off Off N/A
User 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Password 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings
Permitted Receiving MAC Address Settings Apply Settings: On/Off
MAC addresses (a maximum of 100 addresses can be registered)
Off N/A
Dept. ID Management Password Confirmation*2
Dept. ID Management Password Confirmation On/Off On N/A

*2 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Super G3 FAX Board
*8 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Direct Printing Kit
  • Web Access Software

  • IPSec Settings
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Use IPSec On/Off Off N/A
Receive Non-policy Packets Allow/Reject Allow N/A
Edit - - N/A
Erase - - N/A
Policy On/Off - - N/A
Register: Policy Name
Policy Name 24 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Register: Selector Settings
Local Address All IP addresses/IPv4 Address/IPv6 Address/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings All IP addresses N/A
Remote Address All IP addresses/All IPv4 addresses/All IPv6 addresses/IPv4 Manual Settings/IPv6 Manual Settings All IP addresses N/A
Port Specify by Port Number/Specify by Service Name Specify by Port Number N/A
Register: IKE Settings
IKE Mode Main/Aggressive Main N/A
Authentication Method Pre-Shared Key Method/Digital sig. Method Pre-Shared Key Method N/A
Auth./Encryption Algorithm Auto/Manual Settings Auto N/A
Register: IPSec Network Settings
Validity: Time 1 to 65535 minutes 480 N/A
Validity: Size 1 to 65535MB 65535 N/A
PFS On/Off Off N/A
Auth./Encryption Algorithm Auto/Manual Settings Auto N/A
Connect. Mode Transport, display only - - N/A

  • NetWare Settings*1
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
NetWare On/Off Off
Frame Type Auto Detect/Ethernet II/Ethernet 802.2/Ethernet 802.3/Ethernet SNAP Auto Detect N/A
IPX External Network Number Auto Set, display only - - N/A
Node Number Auto Set, display only - - N/A
Print Service Bindery PServer/R Printer/NDS PServer/NPrinter NDS PServer N/A
Packet Signature Auto Set, display only - - N/A
Bindery PServer Settings
Print Server 47 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
File Server 47 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Print Server Password 20 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Printer Number 0 to 15 0 N/A
Polling Interval 1 to 15 seconds 5 N/A
Printer Form 0 to 255 0 N/A
Buffer Size 1 to 20 (KB units) 20 N/A
Service Mode Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/Minimize form changes within print queues Minimize form changes within print queues N/A
RPrinter Settings
Print Server 47 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
File Server 47 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Printer Number 0 to 15 0 N/A
NDS PServer Settings
Print Server 64 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Tree 32 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Context 256 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Print Server Password 20 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Printer Number 0 to 254 0 N/A
Polling Interval 1 to 255 seconds 5 N/A
Printer Form 0 to 255 0 N/A
Buffer Size 3 to 20 (KB units) 20 N/A
Service Mode Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/Minimize form changes within print queues Minimize form changes within print queues N/A
NPrinter Settings
Print Server 64 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Tree 32 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Context 256 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Printer Number 0 to 254 0 N/A

*1 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Super G3 FAX Board
  • Color Universal Send Kit

  • AppleTalk Settings*1
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
AppleTalk On/Off Off
Phase Phase 2 (fixed) - - N/A
Service Name 32 Characters maximum Model name N/A
Zone 32 Characters maximum * N/A

*1 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit

  • SMB Server Settings*1
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Use SMB Server On/Off On N/A
Server 15 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Workgroup 15 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
Comment 48 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
LM Announce On/Off Off N/A
SMB Printer Settings
Use SMB On/Off On N/A
Printer 13 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A

*1 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Super G3 FAX Board
  • Color Universal Send Kit

  • SNMP Settings
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Get Printer Mgmt Info from Host On/Off Off
Use SNMP v. 1 On/Off On
Community Name 1 Settings
Community Name 1 On/Off On N/A
MIB Access Permission Read/Write/Read Only Read Only N/A
Community Name Community Name (32 Characters maximum) public N/A
Community Name 2 Settings
Community Name 2 On/Off Off N/A
MIB Access Permission Read/Write/Read Only Read Only N/A
Community Name Community Name (32 Characters maximum) public2 N/A
Use SNMP v. 3 On/Off Off N/A
User Settings
User On/Off - - N/A
Register User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent. Algorithm/Authent. Password/Encryption Algorithm/Encryption Password - N/A
Details/Edit User/MIB Access Permission/Security Settings/Authent. Algorithm/Authent. Password/Encryption Algorithm/Encryption Password - N/A
Erase - - N/A
Context Settings
Register Context name (32 Characters maximum) - N/A
Edit Context name (32 Characters maximum) - N/A
Erase - - N/A

  • Enable Dedicated Port Settings
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Enable Dedicated Port On/Off On

  • Spool Settings*1
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Use Spooler On/Off Off

*1 This item is available only if you are using the following optional equipment:
  • UFR II Printer Kit
  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit
  • PCL Printer Kit
  • PS Printer Kit
  • Super G3 FAX Board

  • Startup Time Settings
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Startup Time Settings 30 to 300 seconds 30 N/A

  • Ethernet Driver Settings
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Auto Detect On/Off On N/A
Communication Mode Half Duplex/Full Duplex Half
Duplex
N/A
Ethernet Type 10 Base-T/100 Base-TX/1000 Base-T 10 Base-T N/A
MAC Address Display only - - N/A

  • E-Mail/I-Fax Settings*1
Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
SMTP Receipt On/Off On
POP On/Off On
SMTP Server Server name or IP address (48 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
E-mail Address 64 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
POP Server Server name or IP address (48 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A
POP Address 64 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
POP Password 32 Characters maximum (NULL) N/A
POP Interval 0 to 99 (If the interval is set to '0', the incoming e-mail is not checked automatically.) 0 N/A
Authent./Encryption
POP AUTH Method Standard/APOP/POP
AUTH
Standard N/A
POP Authentication before Sending On/Off Off N/A N/A
SMTP Authentication (SMTP AUTH) On/Off Off N/A N/A
User User name for SMTP authentication (64 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A N/A
Password Password for SMTP authentication (32 Characters maximum) (NULL) N/A N/A
Allow SSL (POP) On/Off Off N/A N/A
Allow SSL (SMTP Send) On/Off Off N/A N/A
Allow SSL (SMTP Receive) SSL/On/Off Off N/A N/A

*1 This item is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated by registering a license key.

  • IEEE802.1X Settings

Item Setting Description Default Setting Can be set in Remote UI Device Information Delivery
Use IEEE802.1X On/Off Off N/A
User Name of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication (NULL) N/A
Password Password of the user to be authenticated with IEEE802.1X authentication (NULL) N/A
TLS Settings
Use TLS On/Off Off N/A
Key and Certificate
Set as the Default Key - - N/A
Certificate Details Version/Serial Number/Signature Algorithm/Issue Destination/Start Date of Validity/End Date of Validity/Issuer/Public Key/Certificate Thumbprint/Certificate Verification - N/A
Display Use Location Displays what the key pair is being used for. - N/A
TTLS Settings
Use TTL On/Off Off N/A
MSCHAPv2 - - N/A
PAP - - N/A
PEAP Settings
Use PEAP On/Off Off N/A

Remark
  • Use the control panel of the device to set items which cannot be set using the Remote UI.


Viewing the Network Access Log

This machine logs attempts to gain access from IP addresses that it has been set to reject. The procedure for referring to the access log is as follows.

For instruction on how to set the machine to permit or reject specific IP addresses, see step 8 in "TCP/IPv4 Settings" or step 6 in "TCP/IPv6 Settings."


Remark
  • To display [Log], set <Job Log Display> in [System Monitor Screen Restriction] in the System Settings screen (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'.

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print] → [Log] → select [Network] from the drop-down list.

The log pertaining to the rejected IP addresses is displayed.

Up to 100 logs can be displayed.

You can export the log to a CSV format file, using the Remote UI. For instructions, see "Remote UI."



Obtaining the Public Key of the Machine to Use SSL with Windows Vista

If you want to use IPPS printing, it is necessary to obtain the public key of the machine and install it in Windows Vista by following the procedure below.


  1. Start the Remote UI of the machine → click [Continue to this website (not recommended)] to display the Remote UI screen.
  1. Double-click [Internet | Protected Mode:On], located on the bottom-right of the web browser.
  1. Select [Trusted sites] → click [Sites].
  1. Confirm that 'https://<IP address of the machine>' is displayed → click [Add] → [Close].
  1. If [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] is selected, deselect it → click [OK] to return to the Remote UI screen → close the web browser → restart the web browser → repeat the procedure in step 1.
  1. Click [Certificate Error] on the right of the address bar → select [View certificates].
  1. Click [Install Certificate] in the displayed dialog box to start the Certificate Import Wizard.
  1. Click [Next] → select [Place all certificates in the following store] → click [Browse].
  1. Select [Trusted Root Certification Authorities] → follow the instructions on the screen to close the wizard.
  1. If you deselected [Enable Protected Mode (requires restarting Internet Explorer)] in step 5, select it again.


Remote UI

This category describes how to use the Remote User Interface.



Overview of the Remote UI

The Remote UI (User Interface) is preinstalled software in the machine that enables you to access the machine's functions by using a web browser. For example, the Remote UI enables you to access the machine to check job status, execute jobs, and specify various settings. To be able to use the Remote UI, all you need is a web browser and a network connection between your computer and the machine.
In order to use the Remote UI, you must first enter an IP (Internet Protocol) address for the machine from the control panel and set up the necessary network connection. Once this is achieved, start your web browser and enter the machine's IP address. The Remote UI screen appears on your computer screen and is ready for use.

  • Checking the Status of the Machine from a Networked Computer

The Remote UI enables you to access the machine via a network, enabling you to display the current status and settings for the machine, and the status of all information and job processing. You can manage the machine from a computer connected to the network without having to perform operations on the machine itself.
When you enter the machine's IP address into your web browser, the Remote UI's top page or main screen is displayed on your computer screen, as shown below:

The left column of the Remote UI's top page contains the function buttons, which allow you to navigate the functions of the Remote UI.

Takes you to the Remote UI top page. Displays information such as the product name, printer status, scanner status, and fax status.
Displays the machine's current status, settings information, and the optional equipment that is attached to the machine.
Displays the current status of jobs, and permits changes to jobs being processed by the machine.
Enables you to print, move, or send documents stored in inboxes.
Enables you to print PDF (Portable Document Format), PS/EPS (PostScript/Encapsulated PostScript), and image files that are stored in your computer or on the network without opening the files. The Direct Print function is available for PDF and PS files only if the optional PS Printer Kit or Direct Printing Kit is available for use. The Direct Printing Kit may not be available in all regions.
Enables you to manage the machine's Address Book, including the storing and editing of addresses.
Enables you to specify or change various system settings on the machine.
This updates or refreshes the currently displayed screen with the latest information. Information is not updated automatically. When you click this button, the latest information from the machine is acquired.

Remark
  • You can change the language displayed on the screen by selecting the desired language and clicking [Change Language], regardless of the language used on the touch panel display of the machine.
  • When you change the displayed language from the Remote UI, the language may not be displayed correctly, if the displayed language is different from the language used on the touch panel display of the machine.
  • If Language Switch is set to 'On' from the touch panel of the machine, some characters are restricted and cannot be entered.

  • Setting and Controlling the Machine from a Computer

The Remote UI enables you to pause and resume jobs, view and print jobs stored in inboxes, and change various settings from a computer without using the machine's control panel.

  • Viewing documents stored in inboxes on your computer screen

You can view documents in the machine's inboxes in the TIFF or JPEG format by clicking [Mail Box].


Remark
  • To view documents in the TIFF or JPEG format, you need an application that supports the TIFF or JPEG format (e.g., Imaging for Windows).
  • To view images on a Macintosh, you need an application that supports the TIFF and JPEG formats. If you use QuickTime, version 6.0.1 or later is required.

  • Link to MEAP Portal

A list of the MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform) applications can be displayed by clicking [http://<the IP address of the device:8000>/] for Link to MEAP Portal on the top page of the Remote UI.


Remark
  • You can set a MEAP application for Administrator/System Manager only if you enter the authentication login screen as an Administrator. (See "MEAP/SSO")
  • If Department ID Management is set to 'Off' and a System Manager is not specified, depending on the login services you are using, all users may be considered as Administrators without authentication. (See "Security")
  • [Link to MEAP Portal] appears only if a MEAP application called "PortalService" is installed on the machine. Portal Service can be installed using the MEAP Administration Software CD-ROM.


System Requirements

The system requirements for the Remote UI are as follows:

  • Windows
  • OS (Operating System)
  • Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional
  • Microsoft Windows XP
  • Microsoft Windows Vista
  • Web Browser
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6, or later
  • Macintosh
  • OS (Operating System)
  • Mac OS 10.3, or later
  • Web Browser
  • Safari 1.3.2, or later

Remark
  • Available browsers may be limited depending on the login services for the MEAP function you are using. For instructions on how to use the login services, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • The appearance of the Remote UI screens may vary, depending on the type and version of the Web browser that you are using.
  • This machine is compliant with IPv6 addresses. To access IPv6 addresses, your environment must be compliant with IPv6.
  • Apart from those mentioned above, no other software, such as a web server, is necessary. (There already is a web server inside the machine.)


Before You Start the Remote UI

Before you start the Remote UI, perform the following:

  • Specify the Network Settings

Specify the settings under Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) and find out the machine's IP address. If you do not know the machine's IP address, consult your network administrator. (See "Network")

  • MEAP Settings

Set Use HTTP in MEAP Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Security") If you are using a default authentication, you do not need to set Use HTTP to 'On'.

  • Enable the Remote UI

Set Remote UI in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. It is also recommended that Device Information Settings in System Settings is configured.


Remark
  • Connection via a proxy server is not possible. If your system environment has a proxy server, perform the following setting. (Settings vary according to the system environment, consult your network administrator.)
  • Enter the IP address of the machine into Exceptions in the web browser proxy server settings.
  • You must set your web browser to enable all cookies and use JavaScript. Otherwise, you will not be able to change the machine's settings using the Remote UI.
  • If the control panel of the machine is being used for a particular operation, you cannot perform the same operation using the Remote UI.
  • If multiple Remote UIs are running simultaneously, the latest setting that was made is enabled. It is recommended that only one Remote UI be running at a time
  • To enter characters from a web browser, use the characters that you can enter from the touch panel display of the machine. If you use the other characters, they may not be displayed/recognized properly on the machine.
  • If you are using the login services for the MEAP function, the IP address "127.0.0.1" must be allowed, in addition to the IP address of the computer used to start the Web browser.
  • In addition, if you are accessing IPv6 addresses, the above address must be activated.


Enabling the Remote UI

You must use the machine's control panel to enable the Remote UI.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Remote UI].

  • If the System Manager ID and System Password have already been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys) → press (Log In/Out).
  • If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  1. Select [On] → select whether to use SSL.

Select [Off] to disable the Remote UI.

<Use SSL>:

[On]: Allows secured transmission using SSL.
[OFF]: Prohibits secured transmission using SSL.
  • Any changes made to <Use SSL> are also applied to <Use SSL> in <Use HTTP> in MEAP Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
  1. Turn OFF the main power of the machine, wait 10 seconds, and then turn ON the main power.
  • The [Remote UI] setting is made effective only after turning the machine's main power OFF, and then ON.


Starting the Remote UI

To start the Remote UI, follow the procedure described below.


Remark
  • For details of selection and setting of a login service, consult your system administrator.

  1. Start your web browser.
  1. Enter the appropriate URL into [Address] or [Location].

http://<the IP address of the device>/

  • If a login service is not set, it is not necessary to perform the operations described in step 3 and later. However, if System Manager Settings are set (from the Additional Functions screen), log in using the System Manager ID and System Password, or click [Cancel] if you are a general user.
  • If you do not know the appropriate URL, consult your system administrator.
  • If the Remote UI does not start properly and an error message is displayed, delete the cache files of your Web browser.
  1. Enter the required data → click [Log In].


SSO-H is set as the login service.

The Remote UI screen is displayed.

  • If there is more than a 30 minute difference between the current time set in the computer registered by the Active Directory and the time set in the computer that you use for login, an error occurs when you log in using SSO-H. To be able to log in using SSO-H, it is necessary to match the current time on both the computers.
  • If Default Authentication is set, and an ID and password for the system manager in the System Manager Settings (from the Additional Functions screen of the machine) have been set, a dialog box requesting a user name and password appears. Enter the system manager ID and password, and click [OK] to start the Remote UI.
  • You must use the user login name (pre-Windows 2000) registered in Active Directory in order to then enter a user name for SSO-H authentication.
  • You can use only alphanumeric characters, . (period), - (hyphen), or _ (underscore) for a user name for SSO-H authentication. You can log in only if you use valid characters.
  • You can select up to four trusted domain names in addition to the domain name the machine belongs to for the DNS Domain Name.
  • Even if you install multiple login services, they cannot be used simultaneously. Only the login screen for the set login service is displayed.


Device Status and Information Display

You can use the Remote UI (User Interface) to check the machine's current status, such as the amount of paper remaining in the various paper sources, and to check for any errors. You can also obtain information on the machine's system manager, the location where the machine is installed, and the machine's protocol settings.


  1. Click [Device] → select the item you want to display from the menu that appears under [Device].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Device Status]: Displays the remaining amount of paper in the various paper sources, the remaining amount of consumables, and any error messages. To check the details of the error, click [Error information].
[Device Information]: Displays information related to the machine, such as the system manager's information and the location where the machine is installed.
[Device Features]: Displays the optional equipment (such as the finisher) that is attached to the machine and the functions that are available with the current system configuration.
[Network Settings]: Displays the machine's protocol settings.
[Counter Check]: Displays the total number of pages that have been output for printing, copying, and received job printing only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.


Job Management

The Remote UI provides you with job management capabilities, which enable you to check job status, pause/resume jobs, and prioritize print jobs.

The types of jobs that can be managed are:

  • Print jobs
  • Copy jobs
  • Send jobs
  • Receive jobs
  • Send Fax jobs
  • Receive Fax jobs

Remark
  • Send jobs and receive jobs can be managed only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Fax jobs can be managed only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • If the Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', [Receive Job] and [Log] are not displayed.
  • The Remote UI cannot be used to check the job status of or pause/resume encrypted secured print jobs.
  • The job management operations available using the Remote UI are the same as those that you can access from [System Monitor] on the control panel of the machine. For more information on operations from the touch panel display, see "Basic Operations" and "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."


Managing Print Jobs

  1. Click [Job Status] → [Status] or [Log] from the menu that appears under [Print Job].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].


  • Click [Status].
  • Select one of the following buttons corresponding to the job you want to perform operations on:

Details of each item are shown below.

: Deletes the selected job (cancels processing). The job cannot be retrieved once it is deleted.
: Moves the selected job up to the top of the print queue so that it is printed immediately after the current job is complete.
: Stops the output of print jobs that are sent from computers (printer driver). (This button cannot be used to stop the output of other types of jobs, such as copy jobs or print jobs of documents stored in inboxes.)
: Resumes the output of print jobs that are sent from computers (printer driver). (This button cannot be used to resume the output of other types of jobs, such as copy jobs or print jobs of documents stored in inboxes.)

  • Click [Status].
  • Click the job number that you want to display the details of.

  • Click [Log].
  • Select the type of job whose log you want to display from the Print Job Log drop-down list → click [Display].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Copy]: Displays the copy job log.
[Printer]: Displays the print job log.
[Local Print]: Displays the local print job log, including jobs from inboxes.
[Remote Copy]: Displays the remote copy job log.
[RX Print]: Displays the receive print job log.
[Report Print]: Displays the report print job log.
[Network]: Displays the network print job log.
  • The types of log that appear under the Print Job Log drop-down list vary depending on the optional equipment attached.

  • Click [Log].
  • Click [Save in CSV Format].
  • Click [OK].
  • Specify the location for the file to be saved → enter the file name → click [Save].

If the file name is not entered, one of the following names is used as the file name:

  • Copy:
pcopy.csv
  • Printer:
pprint.csv
  • Local Print:
plocal.csv
  • Remote Copy:
premote.csv
  • Receive Print:
prx.csv
  • Report Print:
preport.csv
  • Network:
network.csv

The type and order of items saved in the file are identical to the ones displayed on each job log.

  • The latest 100 jobs are displayed in the job log. (The jobs other than the latest 100 jobs are not saved in the log.)
  • The dialog box that is displayed when you save the job log in CSV format may vary depending on the manufacturer and version of the browser.


Managing Copy, Send, and Fax Jobs

  1. Click [Job Status] → select the job type and click [Status] or [Log] from the menu that appears under [Job Status].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].


  • Click [Status].
  • Select the job that you want to cancel → click[](Delete).

  • Click [Status].
  • Click the job number.

  • Click [Log].

  • Click [Log].
  • Click [Save in CSV Format].
  • Click [OK].
  • Specify the location for the file to be saved → enter the file name → click [Save].

If the file name is not entered, one of the following names is used as the file name:

  • Copy Job Log:
copy.csv
  • Send Jog Log:
tx.csv
  • Send Fax Jog Log:
ftx.csv
  • Receive Fax Jog Log:
frx.csv

The type and order of items saved in the file are identical to the ones displayed on each job log.

  • The latest 100 jobs are displayed in the job log. (The jobs other than the latest 100 jobs are not saved in the log.)
  • The latest 100 send and receive jobs are displayed in the send/receive job log. The latest 100 send fax and receive fax jobs are displayed in the send fax/receive fax job log.
  • The dialog box that is displayed when you save the job log in CSV format may vary depending on the manufacturer and version of the browser.


Managing Receive Jobs

  1. Click [Job Status] → [Log] or [Forwarding Status] from the menu that appears under [Receive Job].


  • Click [Log].
  • Click [Save in CSV Format].
  • Click [OK].
  • Specify the location for the file to be saved → enter the file name → click [Save].

If the file name is not entered, the file is saved as 'rx.csv'.

The type and order of items saved in the file are identical to the ones displayed on the receive job log.

  • The latest 100 jobs are displayed in the job log. (The jobs other than the latest 100 jobs are not saved in the log.)
  • The latest 100 send and receive jobs are displayed in the send/receive job log.
  • The dialog box that is displayed when you save the job log in CSV format may vary depending on the manufacturer and version of the browser.

  • Click [Forwarding Status].

  • Click [Forwarding Status].
  • Click the job number that you want to display the details of.


Managing Inboxes

The Remote UI enables you to perform operations on documents stored in inboxes as well as specify settings for the inboxes. The types of inboxes that can be managed are as follows.


Remark
  • The inbox management operations available using the Remote UI are the same as those available from the control panel of the machine. For instructions on using the control panel to manage inboxes, see "Mail Box."

  • User Inboxes

Scanned documents are stored here. Up to 100 User Inboxes can be used. You can print, send, duplicate, or delete documents stored in User Inboxes. You can also assign names to the inboxes and protect them with passwords.


Remark
  • Documents stored in User Inboxes can be sent only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  • Memory RX Inbox

Documents received in memory through the Fax/I-fax function are stored here. You can print, send, or delete documents stored in the Memory RX Inbox. You can also set whether Fax/I-fax documents are received in memory, and whether to protect the Memory RX Inbox with a password.


Remark
  • The Memory RX Inbox is available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • To receive Fax/I-fax documents in memory, press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Communications Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] → set [Use Fax Memory Lock] or [Use I-Fax Memory Lock] to 'On' from the machine's control panel. The same settings are available by clicking [Add. Func.] → [Custom Settings] → [Memory RX Inbox Settings] from the Remote UI.

  • Confidential Fax Inboxes

Documents received through the Fax/I-fax function that meet the specified forwarding conditions are stored here. Up to 50 Confidential Fax Inboxes can be created. You can print or delete documents stored in Confidential Fax Inboxes. You can also assign names to the inboxes and protect them with passwords.


Remark
  • Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.


User Inboxes

  1. Click [Mail Box] → select [User Inboxes] from the menu that appears under [Mail Box] → click the number of the desired inbox.

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

If the desired inbox is set with a password, enter the password → click [OK].

You can also select the desired inbox by entering its number next to [Inbox Number (00-99)] → click [Open].

  1. If you want to select and perform an operation on a document, select the check box next to the document under [Select] → click one of the buttons on the User Inboxes toolbar.

Details of each item are shown below.

: The machine prints out the selected document.
: Sends the selected document to a specified destination. The destination must already be stored in the Address Book.
: Duplicates the selected document to another User Inbox.
: Deletes the selected document. Once a document is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.
: You can combine a number of documents stored in user inboxes and save them as one document.
: You can insert a document stored in a user inbox into another document at any location, and create a new document.
: You can print a list of the documents in a user inbox.

You can change the displayed order of the documents by clicking [Document Name] or [Date & Time].


  • Click [Print].
  • If necessary, change the print settings → click [Start Print].

By selecting a document and clicking the buttons under Document Order, you can change the order in which the documents are printed.

  • Move to top
  • Move up one level
  • Move down one level
  • Move to bottom

If you want the document to be automatically deleted after it is printed, select the [Erase Document After Printing] check box.


  • Click [Change Print Settings] in the Print Settings pane.
  • Change the necessary print settings.

If you want to discard any changes you made and return to the previous screen to print with the original settings, click [Original Settings].

  • After changing the settings, click [Start Print].

If you try to specify settings that cannot be set together, an error dialog box appears and you will not be able to print. When this happens, start the procedure from the beginning.

  • [Store Print Settings] enables you to store the settings changed by clicking [Change Print Settings], when one document is selected.
  • For more information on specifying the print settings, see "Mail Box."
  • The settings that appear on the Print Settings screen vary depending on the optional equipment attached to the machine.

  • Click [Send].
  • Specify the address, user, and send settings → click [Start Send].

By selecting a document and clicking the buttons under Document Order, you can change the order in which the documents are sent.

  • Move to top
  • Move up one level
  • Move down one level
  • Move to bottom

If you want the document to be automatically deleted after it is sent, select the [Delete After Sending] check box.

Click [Address Book] under Address Settings to display a list of destinations from which you can select the desired destination.

You can delete an address from the list by selecting it and clicking [Delete].

  • The Send function is available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  • Click [Duplicate].
  • Click the Name drop-down list under Target Inbox → select the inbox where you want to duplicate the document → click [Start].

  • Click [Delete].

  • Click [Merge and Save].
  • Enter the necessary settings → click [Start].

By selecting a document and clicking the buttons below, you can change the order in which the documents are merged.

  • Move to top
  • Move up one level
  • Move down one level
  • Move to bottom

  • Click [Document Insertion].
  • Specify the document you want to insert → click [Next].
  • Enter the necessary settings → click [Start Insert].

If you want to return to the previous document insertion screen, click [Back].


  • Click [List Print].
  • Click [OK].
  1. To display the details of the document, click the document name.

You can also click [] (Type) to display the document details.

  • For documents scanned in the Full Color mode, a color icon () is displayed.
  1. If you want to display the image file of the document, click [] (Size).

For information on each icon, see "Mail Box."

: You can change the name of the document by clicking this button.
: You can erase any page in a document by placing a check mark next to the page you want to erase and clicking [Page Erase].
: You can erase the number of consecutive pages at one time by clicking this button and specifying the pages you want to erase.
: If the number of pages exceeds 100, you can select a range of pages displayed from the drop-down list.
  • The images that are stored in inboxes can be displayed.
  • For documents scanned in the Full Color mode, a color icon () is displayed.
  • [] (Size) does not appear for documents whose images cannot be displayed.
  • If the size of the image is larger than 1 MB, the message <The data size of the selected image is 1 MB or more. It may take time to display it. Are you sure you want to display it?> is displayed. To display the image file, click [OK]. To cancel displaying the image file, click [Cancel].
  1. If you want to specify the inbox name or protect the inbox with a password, click [Settings].
  1. Set each item as necessary → click [OK].
  • For more information on the User Inboxes settings, see "Mail Box."


Memory RX Inbox

Remark
  • The Memory RX Inbox is available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.


Memory RX Inbox

  1. Click [Mail Box] → select [Memory RX Inbox] from the menu that appears under [Mail Box] → click [MEMORY RX INBOX].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

If the Memory RX Inbox is set with a password, enter the password → click [OK].

  1. If you want to select and perform an operation on a document, select the check box next to the document under [Select] → click one of the buttons on the Memory RX Inbox toolbar.

Details of each item are shown below.

: The machine prints out the selected document. A document is automatically deleted once it is printed.
: Sends the selected document to a specified destination.
: Deletes the selected document. Once a document is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.
: Click this button to specify settings for receiving documents in memory.

  • Click [Print] → [Start Print].

  • Click [Send].
  • Specify the address, user, and send settings → click [Start Send].

By selecting a document and clicking the buttons under Document Order, you can change the order in which the documents are sent.

  • Move to top
  • Move up one level
  • Move down one level
  • Move to bottom

If you want the document to be automatically deleted after it is sent, select the [Delete After Sending] check box.

Click [Address Book] under Address Settings to display a list of destinations from which you can select the desired destination.

You can delete an address from the list by selecting it and clicking [Delete].


  • Click [Delete].

  • Click [Memory Lock Settings] → specify the settings as necessary → click [OK].

For more information on the Memory Lock Settings, see "Mail Box."


  1. To display the details of the document, click the destination.

You can also click an icon in Type to display the document details.

Displayed Icons:

Forwarded fax document or fax document saved in memory.
Forwarded I-fax document or I-fax document saved in memory.
  1. If you want to protect the inbox with a password, click [Settings].

Select [Set Inbox Password] → set the password → click [OK].

  • You cannot change the name of the Memory RX Inbox. Only the password can be specified or changed.
  • For more information on the Memory RX Inbox settings, see "Mail Box."


Divided Data RX Inbox

  1. Click [Mail Box] → select [Memory RX Inbox] from the menu that appears under [Mail Box] → click [Divided Data RX Inbox].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

If the Divided Data RX Inbox is set with a password, enter the password → click [OK].

  1. If you want to select and perform an operation on a document, select the check box next to the document under [Select] → click one of the buttons on the Divided Data Inbox toolbar.

Details of each item are shown below.

: Deletes the selected document. Once a document is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.

  • Click [Delete].

To print a document before deleting it, select [Print When Erased] before clicking [Delete].



Confidential Fax Inboxes

Remark
  • Confidential Fax Inboxes are available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.

  1. Click [Mail Box] → select [Confidential Fax Inboxes] from the menu that appears under [Mail Box] → click the number of the desired inbox.

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

If the desired inbox is set with a password, enter the password → click [OK].

You can also select the desired inbox by entering its number next to [Inbox Number (00-49)] → click [Open].

  1. If you want to select and perform an operation on a document, select the check box next to the document under [Select] → click one of the buttons on the Confidential Fax Inboxes toolbar.

Details of each item are shown below.

: The machine prints out the selected document.
: Deletes the selected document. Once a document is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.

  • Click [Print] → [Start Print].

If you want the document to be automatically deleted after it is printed, select the [Erase Document After Printing] check box.


  • Click [Delete].
  1. To display the details of the document, click the document name.

You can also click an icon in Type to display the document details.

Displayed Icons:

Forwarded fax document or fax document saved in memory.
Forwarded I-fax document or I-fax document saved in memory.
  1. To change the settings of a Confidential Fax Inbox, click [Settings].
  1. Set each item as necessary → click [OK].

To change the name of a Confidential Fax Inbox, enter the new name in [Name]. The maximum number of characters that you can enter for a Confidential Fax Inbox name is 24.

If you want to protect a Confidential Fax Inbox with a password, select [Set Inbox Password] → enter a password. You can use the Confidential Fax Inbox function without setting a password. You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0> or <00>.

If you want to send a link to a Confidential Fax Inbox via e-mail, select [Set URL Send] → click [Address Book] → select the destination address.

  • For more information on the Confidential Fax settings, see "Mail Box."


Printing PDF, PS/EPS, or Image Files Directly (Direct Print)

You can print PDF, PS/EPS, or image files directly from the Remote UI, without having to open the files.


Remark
  • The Direct Print function is available for PDF and PS/EPS files only if the optional PS Printer Kit or Direct Printing Kit is available for use. The Direct Printing Kit may not be available in all regions.
  • The image files that you can print directly are TIFF and JPEG files.
  • Direct printing may take a while to start after clicking [Start Print]. Do not click [Start Print] more than once.
  • Even in cases where you cannot print a file using the Direct Print function, or if the print output is out of alignment, you may still be able to open the file in an application and print it using the printer driver.


Printing PDF Files Directly

  1. Click [Direct Print] → select [PDF File] from the menu that appears under [Direct Print].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

  1. Specify the location of the PDF file that you want to print.

To specify the location using the pathname, click [File Path] → enter the pathname in the entry box.

To specify the location using the URL, click [URL] → enter the URL in the entry box → enter a user name and password in the [User] and [Password] entry boxes, if necessary.

You cannot specify multiple PDF files at the same time.

If a password is set for the specified PDF file, enter the password.

  • If you specify to print a PDF file by entering its URL, the next print job cannot be processed until the download of the PDF file is complete or until the browser has disconnected from the web server.
  • Only the HTTP protocol is supported for the printing of a PDF file by entering its URL.
  1. Specify the settings for Specify Print Range.

If you want to specify the pages to print by the page number, click [Pages] → enter the page numbers. Only the setting for the item whose radio button is selected will be effective.

  1. Specify the settings under Print Settings according to your preference.

Scroll down if desired settings are not displayed.

To restore the settings to their original values, click [Restore Defaults].

  1. Click [Start Print].

To check the files that have been sent to the machine to be printed, click [to Job List] on the message box that appears after you click [Start Print].



Printing PS/EPS Files Directly

  1. Click [Direct Print] → select [PS/EPS File] from the menu that appears under [Direct Print].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

  1. Specify the location of the PS/EPS file that you want to print.

You cannot specify multiple PS/EPS files at the same time.

  1. Specify the Print Settings according to your preference → click [Start Print].

To restore the settings to their original values, click [Restore Defaults].

To store the file in a user inbox, select [Store in User Inbox] → select the inbox you want to store the file in from the drop-down list.

To check the files that have been sent to the machine to be printed, click [to Job List] on the message box that appears after you click [Start Print].

  • Available print functions may vary according to the model of your machine.


Printing Image Files Directly

  1. Click [Direct Print] → select [Image File] from the menu that appears under [Direct Print].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

  1. Specify the location of the image file that you want to print.

You cannot specify multiple image files at the same time.

  1. Specify the print range and print settings → click [Start Print].

If you want to specify the pages to print by the page number, click [Pages] → enter the page numbers. Only the setting for the item whose radio button is selected will be effective.

To restore the settings to their original values, click [Restore Defaults].

To check the files that have been sent to the machine to be printed, click [to Job List] on the message box that appears after you click [Start Print].



Managing the Address Book

The Remote UI enables you to manage the Address Book by performing such operations as storing new addresses, editing addresses, and changing the name of the subaddress books. The types of addresses that can be managed are as follows.

  • Group Address

You can store multiple addresses under a single group address.

  • E-mail Address

You can store e-mail addresses.

  • Fax Address

You can store fax numbers.

  • I-Fax Address

You can store I-fax addresses.

  • File Server Address

You can store the information needed to save scanned documents in the file server, such as the protocol, host name, and pathname of the destination folder.


Remark
  • Group addresses can be managed only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • E-mail addresses, I-fax addresses, and file server addresses can be managed only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Fax addresses can be managed only if the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • The Address Book management operations available using the Remote UI are the same as those available from the control panel of the machine by pressing (Additional Functions) → [Address Book Settings]. For instructions on using the control panel to manage the Address Book, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  • System Reference Address Book

You can register devices to specify for remote copying.



Operating the Address Book

  1. Click a subaddress book from the Address Book screen that appears after clicking [Address] and [Address Book].

If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].

You can also click [] (Address Book) next to the subaddress book's name.

If the selected subaddress book is protected by a password, a dialog box prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the password → click [OK].

  • If Access Number Management is set to 'On', only those addresses that are not set with an access number are displayed. To also display addresses set with an access number, enter the access number in [Access Number] → click [Refresh]. To only display addresses that are not set with an access number, click [None]. [Access Number] appears only if Access Number Management is set to 'On'.
  • To only display a certain address type, click the Type drop-down list, select the desired address type, and click [Display]. You can also limit the number of addresses that are displayed by selecting the letter that the address begins with from the Initial drop-down list and clicking [Display]. If you select [All], all addresses stored under the selected subaddress book are displayed.
  • If you select [Address Book One-touch], click the List Number drop-down list → select the desired one-touch button number.
  1. If you want to perform an operation on an address or store a new address, click one of the buttons on the toolbar.

Details of each item are shown below.

Enables you to store addresses in the Address Book, except for group addresses. (This button does not appear if [Address Book One-touch] is selected.)
Enables you to store group addresses in the Address Book. (This button does not appear if [Address Book One-touch] is selected.)
Enables you to move addresses from one subaddress book to another. (This button does not appear if [Address Book One-touch] is selected.)
Enables you to delete addresses from the Address Book. Once an address is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.

  • Click [Register New Address].
  • Specify the type of address from the Type drop-down list → enter the necessary information depending on the type of address you have selected → click [OK].

If the destination is an e-mail address or I-fax, you can select [Receive Divided Data] to ensure that the size of data sent to the destination does not exceed the limit by dividing it into several files.


  • Click [Register New Group].
  • Enter a name for the group in [Group Name] → click [Address Book] under Members List.
  • Click [Select] next to each address you want to add to the group address → click [OK].
  • Verify the settings → click [OK].

To delete an address from the Members List, select the address → click [Delete].

If you want to store documents sent to this group in a User Inbox, select [Store In User Inbox] → select the inbox from the drop-down list.

If you include a User Inbox in the destination (group) to which you are sending your document, the document is stored in the selected User Inbox for later use. Documents stored in a User Inbox can be printed and sent to other destinations.


  • Click the radio button next to the address name → click [Move to Another Address Books].
  • From the Address Book drop-down list, select the Address Book where you want to move the address → click [OK].

  • Click the radio button next to the address name → click [Delete the Selected Address] → click [OK] on the dialog box that appears to ask for your confirmation to delete the selected address.

  1. Edit the address and the name of the subaddress book.

  • Click the name of the address.

You can also display the details of the address by clicking the icon to the left of the address name.

If [Address Book One-touch] is selected, you can also click the one-touch button number of the address to display its details.

  • Click [Edit].

You can edit the name of a group address and members list by clicking [Edit] on the Group Property screen.

  • Make the necessary changes → click [OK].
  • Dividing data

For an e-mail or I-fax destination, select [Receive Divided Data] to ensure that the size of data sent to the destination does not exceed the limit by dividing it into several files.

  • Changing a password

For a fax of file server destination, you can only change the password if you have selected the [Change Password] check box.

  • You can set or change the password only if a fax or file server address is selected.

  • Click [Register Address Book Name].
  • Enter the new name for the address book → click [OK].

The name for [Address Book One-touch] cannot be changed.


  • Click [Unregistered] of the desired one-touch button on the Address Book One-touch screen.

You can also display the Register New Address screen by clicking the number to the left of [Unregistered].

If you want to store one-touch buttons 013-200, click the List Number drop-down list.

  • Select the type of address that you want to store → enter the necessary information → click [OK].


Operating the System Reference Address Book

  1. Click [Address Book for Remote Copy] from the System Reference screen that appears after clicking [Address] and [System Reference].

  • If Department ID Management is set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the Department ID and password appears. Enter the Department ID and password → click [OK].
  1. If you want to perform an operation on an address or store a new address, click one of the buttons on the toolbar.

Details of each item are shown below.

: You can register remote copy printers.
: You can move a printer up the order of priority. Click the radio button at the front of the printer name, then click this button.
: You can delete a printer from the address book. Click the radio button at the front of the printer name, then click this button.
  • If you click [], you can display the top page of the Remote UI of a remote copy printer.

  • Click on the IP address of the remote copy printer that you want to edit.
  • Re-enter the IP address → click [OK].


Specifying a File Name for File/E-mail Transmission via Favorites Buttons

This function enables you to specify the file name to use when sending a file or e-mail with a favorites button.


Remark
  • This function is available only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • Before using this function, it is necessary to register a favorites button for file or e-mail transmission from the control panel of the machine. For more information on favorites buttons, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Favorites Extension Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Click [Edit] for the favorites button you want to specify the file name for.
  1. Select the required items for each tag.

Tags:

Not Specified Selects nothing for the file name
Send Time Uses the date and time of transmission in the file name.
You can select a format for the date and time from the pull-down list.
Device Name Uses the device name set in [Device Information Settings] in [System Settings] (from the Additional Functions screen) in the file name.
Location Uses the location set in [Device Information Settings] of [System Settings] (from the Additional Functions screen) in the file name.
Reception Number Uses the four digit Job ID assigned when a Send job is performed in the file name.
Department ID If Department ID Management is set when a Send job is performed, uses the current seven digit Department ID in the file name.
User Name If MEAP authentication is set when a Send job is performed, uses the current user name in the file name.
Custom String Uses characters defined in advance in the file name.
OCR String Uses the characters set for the title of a searchable PDF/XPS file in the file name.
Starting Page Number Uses the page number of the starting page of a sent document in the file name. If a document is divided and sent separately, the page number of the starting page of each divided part is used.

You can specify up to 10 tags for each favorites button.

The specified tags are combined into a file name in the order of the displayed numbers.

  • The maximum length of a specified file name is 255 characters, including the specified tags, default postfix, and file extension.
  • If a user name consists of more than 32 characters, the first 32 characters are used in the file name.
  • A maximum of 16 characters can be set for 'Custom String.' You cannot leave it blank.
  • If Searchable PDF/XPS is not set when a Send job is performed, the 'OCR String' setting is ignored and nothing is added to the file name.
  • If Department ID Management is not set when a Send job is performed, the 'Department ID' setting is ignored and nothing is added to the file name.
  • If MEAP Authentication is not set when a Send job is performed, the 'User Name' setting is ignored and nothing is added to the file name.
  • The same tag can be set for more than one setting number.
  • Displayed numbers set to 'Not Specified' are ignored.
  • If 'Not Specified' is set for all numbers, the default file name for file or e-mail transmission is used.
  • If there are no settings specified for a favorites button in Favorites Extension Settings, the document name is confined to the first 24 characters of the document name that is already specified from the control panel of the machine.

  • Select [Add Postfix to file name].
  1. Click [OK].

The specified filename is set for the document name when sending with the specified favorites button.

  • The specified document name may be changed from the control panel of the machine. However, if you try to edit the changed document name using the Remote UI, the file name settings may be reset.
  • If you specify a file name for a favorites button using this function and select the favorites button from the control panel of the machine, letters in a special format are displayed as the document name.


Customizing System Settings


Customizing System Information

The Remote UI enables you specify the machine's system settings.


Remark
  • If you are performing user authentication using the SSO-H login service, you cannot change the Additional Functions settings of the machine if you are logged in as a general user.
  • If you are logged in as an Administrator, you can change the Additional Functions settings of the machine. (When the dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password appears, enter the System Manager ID and System Password.)
  • Some of the system settings available using the Remote UI are the same as those that you can access from the control panel of the machine by pressing (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [System Manager Settings]. For instructions on using the control panel to specify system settings, see "Security" and "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."
  • The maximum number of digits you can store for the Department ID and password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
    - Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [System] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • If the System Manager ID and password have been set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Edit].
  1. Enter the necessary information → click [OK].

1. Specify the Message Board settings.

Enable Status Display: The message you enter here is displayed at the bottom of the touch panel display. Enter a message (23 characters maximum).
Enable Pop-up Window: The message you enter here is displayed on the touch panel display. Enter a message (23 characters maximum for each line). You can enter up to four lines.
Display: This setting determines the way the pop-up window is displayed.
  • If you select [All Times], the message can only be cleared from the machine's touch panel display if you press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Clear Message Board], or reset the setting using Remote UI to [On Auto Clear Time].
  • If you select [On Auto Clear Time], the message is cleared from the touch panel display if you press [Done]. However, the message is redisplayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates.
Remote UI: If you specify this setting, the contents of the pop-up window will be displayed on the main screen of the Remote UI as well.

2. Specify whether to display jog logs.

Job Log Display: Select to display job logs.
Obtain Job Log from Management Software: Select to obtain job logs using management software.
When [Job Log Display] is selected, this setting is always enabled even if it is not selected.

3. Specify PDL Selection (PnP) settings.

Specify the functions to set PDL Selection (PnP). From the machine, you can specify functions suitable for the fax board or printer kit installed in the machine. From your computer, you can detect and install drivers that are compatible with the specified functions.
Changes are only effective after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON).

4. Specify the Device Information Settings.

Device Name: Enter a name for the machine (32 characters maximum).
Location: Enter the location where the machine is installed (32 characters maximum).

5. Specify the System Manager Information.

System Manager: Enter the name of the System Manager (32 characters maximum).
Contact Information: Enter the contact information of the System Manager (32 characters maximum).
E-mail Address: Enter the e-mail address of the System Manager (64 characters maximum).
Administrator Comment (E-mail) Enter a comment for the System Manager (32 characters maximum).

6. Specify the contact person information.

Contact Person: Enter the name of the contact person (32 characters maximum).
Phone: Enter the phone number of the contact person.
Comment (E-mail): Enter a comment for the contact person (64 characters maximum).

7. Specify the support information.

URL: Specify the URL for support. This information is displayed on the main screen of the Remote UI.

8. Specify the MEAP Settings.

Use HTTP: Select [Use HTTP] to access the machine from a Web browser and use MEAP functions. After you change the MEAP Settings, restart the machine to enable the changed settings.

9. Specify the Remote UI Settings.

Use SSL: Set when using SSL encrypted communication. The SSL settings of the MEAP function are also changed. After you change the SSL settings, restart the machine to enable the changed settings.
  • The items displayed on this screen may vary according to the configuration of the machine.
  • For more information on PDL Selection (PnP) settings, see "Security."

  • Click [Restrict the Send Function].
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Set Address Book Password: Set a password for the Address Book. If this check box is selected, a dialog box prompting you to enter the password is displayed whenever you try to display or manage the Address Book.
Address Book Password: Specify a password for the Address Book (seven digits maximum). You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>.
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [Address Book Password], an error dialog box appears.
Enable Access Number Management: Selecting this check box specifies Access Number Management for the Address Book. Once Access Number Management is specified, you must enter the correct access number for the address to display it. This feature offers protection for every address that is set with an access number.
Restrict New Addresses: Restricts users from adding new destinations (fax, e-mail, I-fax, or file) to send to. The four types of new destinations can be restricted independently. When specifying a destination, users must select a destination that is stored in the Address Book, or a User Inbox.
Allow Fax Driver TX: Allows users to send documents via the fax driver.
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers: Select to display a confirmation screen after fax numbers are entered.
Allow Send with Expired Certificates: Select whether to allow the sending of documents created with an expired certificate.
Always Add Device Signature to Sending files: Select whether to always add a device signature to sent documents. This item is available only if the optional Universal Send Security Feature Set is activated.
Restrict Sending to Domains: Select to restrict sending to only domains you allow. To add an allowed domain, enter the domain name, and click [Add]. To edit an allowed domain, select the domain from the drop-down list, enter the new domain name, and click [Replacement]. To delete an allowed domain, select the domain from the drop-down list and click [Delete].
To allow sending to the subdomains of a domain, select [Permit Send to Subdomains], and select the domain from the Permitted Domains drop-down list.
  • For more information on restricting sending to domains, confirming entered fax numbers, allowing the sending of documents with expired certificates, and always adding a device signature to documents, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  • Click [Register ID and Password].
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Use ID and Password: Set the System Manager ID and password. If this check box is selected, a dialog box prompting you to enter the ID and password is displayed whenever you try to use Additional Functions.
System Manager ID: Set the System Manager ID (seven digits maximum).
System Password: Set the System Manager password (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [System Password], an error dialog box appears.


Restarting the Machine

The System Manager Settings enable you to restart the machine from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • When the machine is restarted, all the jobs currently underway are canceled. Make sure that all processing is complete before restarting the machine.
  • If the System Manager Settings are not set, the machine cannot be restarted from the Remote UI.
  • After you change the network settings, restart the machine to enable the changed settings.
  • After restarting the machine, if the machine does not recognize its optional equipment, turn OFF the power of the optional equipment, and then turn it back ON. For more information on the power switches, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → enter the user name and password.
  1. Select [System] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  1. Click [Restart Machine].
  1. Click [Perform Restart].
  1. Click [OK].
  • When the machine is restarted, all the jobs currently underway are canceled. Make sure that all processing is complete before restarting the machine.
  • It takes approximately 30 seconds to restart the machine.


Specifying LDAP Server Settings

The Remote UI enables you to store and edit the LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server settings. If the LDAP server information is stored, the machine can access the LDAP server on the network to search and obtain addresses when you are storing or specifying addresses.


Remark
  • The LDAP server settings are available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • The LDAP server settings available using the Remote UI are the same as those that you can access from the control panel of the machine by pressing (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Register LDAP Server]. For instructions on using the control panel to specify LDAP settings, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Register LDAP Server] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Specify the LDAP server settings.

  • Click [] (Register) on the Register LDAP Server screen.
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Server Name: Enter the name of the LDAP server.
Server Address: Enter the address of the LDAP server.
Location to Start Search: Enter the location (the directory in the LDAP server) from which to start searching.
Use SSL: Set whether to use SSL or not. If this check box is selected, SSL will be used.
Port Number: Enter the port number that the LDAP server uses. The default port number that is displayed varies depending on whether the [Use SSL] check box is selected or not. If necessary, change the default port number setting.
Max Number of Addresses to Search: Enter the maximum number of addresses to search on the LDAP server.
Search Timeout: Enter the maximum search time for addresses on the LDAP server before the session times out.
Login Information: Set the login information. Click the Login Information drop-down list → select the type of login information → specify the necessary fields. Some fields may be disabled, depending on the type of login information selected.

Click [Register/Edit LDAP Search Attributes] to set additional attributes (Display Name and Attribute Name).


  • Click the LDAP server name.
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

You can also display the Edit LDAP Server screen by clicking [] to the left of the server name.


  • On the Register LDAP Server screen, click [] (Select) for the LDAP server that you want to delete → click [] (Delete) → click [OK] on the dialog box that appears to ask for your confirmation to delete the selected LDAP server.
  • Once an LDAP server's settings are deleted, they cannot be retrieved.


Specifying Forwarding Settings

The Remote UI enables you to specify the forwarding conditions for forwarding received documents.


Remark
  • The Forwarding settings are available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • The forwarding settings available using the Remote UI are the same as those that you can access from the control panel of the machine by pressing (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Forwarding Settings]. For instructions on using the control panel to specify forwarding settings and more information on forwarding settings, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Forwarding Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click the Receive Type drop-down list → select the receiving mode.

If you select [All], all the forwarding settings stored in the machine are displayed.

  • The types of receiving modes that can be selected vary depending on the optional equipment attached to the machine.

  • Click [] (Add New Conditions) on the Forwarding Settings screen.
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Receive Type: Select Fax or I-Fax for the receiving mode.
Condition Name: Enter a name for the forwarding condition. If you select the [Enable This Forwarding Condition] check box, this forwarding condition will be enabled.
Forwarding Conditions: The settings here enable you to specify the forwarding conditions that the received documents must meet in order to be forwarded.
Forwarding Destination: To specify an address from the Address Book, click [Select from Address Book] → click [Address Book] → select the desired address from the displayed list → click [OK].
If you want to forward documents to a Confidential Fax Inbox, click [Select from Confidential Fax Box] → click the Confidential Fax Inbox drop-down list → select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox to forward documents to. If you want to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox that the documents are stored, select the [Enable URL Send] check box.
Forwarding Setting: Specify the necessary settings for forwarding documents, such as the document name and file format.
Select the file format of the forwarded document from the list. If you select [Divide into Pages], the document is divided into separate pages before being sent. If you select [PDF] or [XPS], you can further select the PDF format or XPS format from PDF Options or XPS Options.
If you select the [Specify Forwarding Time] check box, you can specify the time when forwarding is enabled. To enable forwarding every day, select [Everyday] → set the start and end time. If you want to enable forwarding on certain days only, click [Period Specification] → specify the day, start time, and end time to enable forwarding.
If you want a confirmation notice to be sent whenever forwarding completes successfully, select the [Forwarding Done Notice] check box → click [Address Book] → select the destination for the confirmation notice.
If you want a notice to be sent only when there has been an error, select the [Notice Only for Errors] check box.
If you want to print the documents to be forwarded or store them in memory, select the [Store/Print Received Document] check box.

  • Click [Forwarding without Conditions] on the Forwarding Settings screen.
  • Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Receive Type: Select the receiving mode.
Enable This Forwarding Condition: If you select this check box, the forwarding condition registered here is enabled.
Forwarding Destination: To specify an address from the Address Book, click [Select from Address Book] → click [Address Book] → select the desired address from the displayed list.
If you want to forward documents to a Confidential Fax Inbox, click [Select from Confidential Fax Box] → click the Confidential Fax Inbox drop-down list → select the desired Confidential Fax Inbox to forward documents to. If you want to send a link via e-mail to the Confidential Fax Inbox that the documents are stored, select the [Enable URL Send] check box.
Forwarding Setting: Specify the necessary settings for forwarding documents, such as the document name and file format.
If you want a confirmation notice to be sent whenever forwarding completes successfully, select the [Forwarding Done Notice] check box → click [Address Book] → select the destination for the confirmation notice → click [OK].
If you want a notice to be sent only when there has been an error, select the [Notice Only for Errors] check box.
If you want to print the documents to be forwarded or store them in memory, select the [Store/Print Received Document] check box.

  • Click the name of the forwarding condition that you want to edit.
  • Edit the necessary fields → click [OK].

  • Click [E-mail Priority Settings] on the Forwarding Settings screen.
  • Click the E-mail Priority drop-down list → select the desired priority → click [OK].

E-mail Priority:

  • High: Use this priority setting for important e-mail.
  • Normal: Use this priority setting for ordinary e-mail.
  • Low: Use this priority setting for e-mail with a low priority.

  • On the Forwarding Settings screen, click [] (Select) for the forwarding condition that you want to delete → click [] (Delete the Selected Conditions).

A triangular mark appears when you click [] (Select), and the forwarding condition is selected.

Click [OK], when the confirmation dialog box appears.

  • Once a forwarding setting is deleted, it cannot be retrieved.


Managing Department IDs

You can manage Department IDs with the Remote UI.

Follow the procedure below to specify Department ID Management settings from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • Department ID Management is set automatically if the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached to the machine.
  • The Department ID Management settings available using the Remote UI are the same as those that you can access from the control panel of the machine by pressing (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management]. For instructions on using the control panel to specify Department ID Management settings and more information on Department ID Management, see "Security."
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, the screens that appear are different from those shown in the procedure below.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Department ID Management] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

The list of Department IDs registered in the machine is displayed in groups of 100. If you want to display another group, click [] (Dept. ID Group) drop-down list → select a group from the drop-down list.

  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, [] (Register New Department) and [] (Delete the Selected Department) do not appear.
  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. To specify Department ID Management settings, click [Settings] → specify the desired settings on the Department ID Management Settings screen → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Enable Department ID Management: If this check box is selected, Department ID Management is enabled. When Department ID Management is enabled, the user must enter the Department ID to be able to use functions, such as the Copy and Send functions. (This enables you to keep track of the total number of prints by department and set impression limits.) In addition, when Department ID Management is enabled, the user must enter the Department ID and password to be able to execute jobs and perform operations on inboxes. If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, this check box does not appear.
Limit Functions: This setting enables you to select the function for which you want to set Department ID Management. If this check box is selected, Department ID Management is set for all functions. If this check box is not selected, Department ID Management is set for the Print function only.
Allow Print Jobs with Unknown IDs: Select this check box to enable printing for computers that use printer drivers that do not support Department ID Management. If this check box is not selected, only computers with printer drivers that support Department ID Management can print.
Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs: Select this check box to enable remote scanning for computers that use printer drivers that do not support Department ID Management. If this check box is not selected, only computers with printer drivers that support Department ID Management can perform remote scanning.
Clear All Counts: Click this button to reset the counter to zero for all departments.
  1. To register a new department, click [] (Register New Department) → specify the necessary fields on the Register New Department screen → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Department ID: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Password: Enter a number (seven digits maximum).
Confirm: Enter the password again. If the number you enter here is different from the number entered for [Password], an error dialog box appears.
Page Limits: Enter the maximum number of prints the department is allowed to make.
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, you cannot register a new department.
  • [Total Prints] is the sum of [Copy] and [Print].
  1. To delete a department, click the radio button for the department that you want to delete → click [] (Delete the Selected Department).
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, you cannot delete a department.
  1. Click [OK] when the confirmation dialog box appears.
  1. To change the password and page limit setting, click the desired Department ID → change the necessary fields on the Edit Department screen → click [OK].

You can also display the Edit Department screen by clicking [] to the left of the Department ID.

  • To clear the print total for the department, click [Clear Count] → click [OK] on the dialog box that appears to ask for your confirmation to clear the total.


Import/Export Function

The Remote UI enables you to save the Address Book and other settings information, such as forwarding settings, as a file that can be loaded into the machine when needed. This function is useful when you want to use the same settings on another machine, and for backing up. (It is recommended that you regularly back up important data.) The Import/Export function is intended for data exchange, and is available only through the Remote UI.


Remark
  • The Import/Export operation may take more than six minutes to complete. Do not turn the machine's main power OFF until the operation is complete. Otherwise, the machine may malfunction.
  • The import/export of the Address Book, Forwarding Settings, and Communications Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional Super G3 FAX Board, Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed.
  • During an Export operation, the screen display does not change until the operation is complete. Do not click [Start Export] while the hourglass or pointer indicates that the operation is still being processed.
  • The machine's control panel cannot be used while files are being imported/exported.
  • If you select [Additional Functions] under [Import/Export], you can backup and restore the following control panel settings:
  • Common Settings
  • Timer Settings (You cannot import/export the Time Fine Adjustment setting.)
  • Adjustment/Cleaning
  • Report Settings
  • System Settings (You cannot import/export the Date & Time Settings, print totals under Department ID Management, Forwarding Settings, the Memory RX Inbox Settings, and SNMP v.3 User and Context Settings in SNMP Settings in Network Settings.)
  • Copy Settings
  • Communications Settings


Saving the Address Book

You can store the Address Book as a file in your computer.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Address Book] → click [Export].

If a password is set for the Address Book, a dialog box prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the Address Book password → click [OK].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Select the subaddress book to export and the file format → click [Start Export].

Details of each item are shown below.

Address Book: Select the subaddress book to be saved as a file from the drop-down list.
File Format: Select the format in which to save the file.
  • Custom Format: Select this if the file is to be imported into another machine that is similar to this one.
  • LDAP Format: Select this if the file is to be used by another application (e.g., Microsoft Internet Explorer, Netscape Navigator, Microsoft Outlook, Eudora, etc.). Import this file as LDAP data from within these applications.

If you want to encrypt the passwords of the exported addresses, select [Encrypt Confidential Information of Address Book] → enter a password in the [Password] entry box → enter the same password in the [Confirm] entry box to confirm the password.

  • If you select [LDAP Format], only e-mail addresses and fax numbers can be saved. To save all the information stored in the subaddress book, select [Custom Format].
  • The name of the subaddress book is not exported.
  • If you import encrypted address data into a machine which does not have a decryption function, fax and file server addresses set with a password may not be imported, or may not be imported correctly.
  • If you want to import the exported address book into an address book of the fax driver, select [Custom Format]. If you select [LDAP Format], you cannot import into an address book of the fax driver.
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.


Loading an Address Book

You can load address books into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • If you import the Address Book (Erase and Overwrite), Forwarding Settings, or Additional Functions settings, the information stored in Favorites Buttons and Recall memory are erased.
  • If you select [Erase and Overwrite] as the [Import Method], the machine's control panel settings return to their default settings or standard mode.
  • You cannot import a file while the machine is scanning.
  • You can register up to 1,800 addresses in the Address Book. (200 of these are addresses assigned to the one-touch buttons.) Each address is treated as a separate item. When importing additional addresses, make sure that you do not exceed an overall total of 1,800 addresses.
  • When importing an LDAP format file, entries with e-mail addresses or fax numbers are imported into the machine.
  • The information in the address book's one-touch buttons cannot be imported in LDAP format.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Address Book] → click [Import].

If a password is set for the Address Book, a dialog box prompting you to enter the password appears. Enter the Address Book password → click [OK].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → specify the necessary fields → click [Start Import].

Details of each item are shown below.

Address Book: Select the subaddress book to be imported.
Import Method: Select the import method.
  • Append: The addresses in the file are added to the machine's Address Book. No changes are made to the pre-existing addresses in the Address Book.
  • Erase and Overwrite: All addresses stored in the machine are deleted, and the contents of the file are loaded into the machine.
File Path: Specify the location of the file to load.
File Format: Select the format of the file that is to be loaded.
  • Custom Format: Select this if the file to be imported was saved and exported by another machine that is similar to this one.
  • LDAP Format: Select this if the file is to be imported from another application.

If you want to import an encrypted address book file, select [Decode Confidential Information of Address Book] → enter the correct password in the [Password] entry box.

  • If you select [Append] as the [Import Method], addresses in the file that have the same name as those already stored on the machine will treated as new registrations with the same name. However, if [Address Book One-touch] is selected as the [Address Book], you cannot select [Append] as the [Import Method].
  • If you select [Overwrite] as the [Import Method] when [Address Book One-touch] is selected as the [Address Book], the addresses stored in the machine are not deleted all at once. Instead, they are overwritten one at a time.
  • If you select [Erase and Overwrite] as the [Import Method], the addresses in the file are registered after all the addresses stored in the machine are deleted.
  • If you select [LDAP Format], only e-mail addresses and fax numbers can be imported. The contents of one-touch buttons are not imported when [LDAP Format] is selected. To save all the information stored in the file, select [Custom Format].
  • The name of the address book is not imported.


Saving Forwarding Settings in Files (Export)

You can store forwarding settings as a file in your computer.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Forwarding Settings] → click [Export].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Start Export].

The contents of the Address Book are exported.

If you want to encrypt the passwords of the exported addresses, select [Encrypt Confidential Information of Address Book] → enter a password in the [Password] entry box → enter the same password in the [Confirm] entry box to confirm the password.

  • If you import encrypted address data into a machine which does not have a decryption function, fax and file server addresses set with a password may not be imported, or may not be imported correctly.
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.


Loading a Forwarding Settings File (Overwrite/Import)

You can load forwarding settings into the machine from saved files.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Forwarding Settings] → click [Import].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Select the format type from the File Format drop-down list → click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [Start Import].

Details of each item are shown below.

File Format: Select the format in which to save the file.
  • FIA Format: Select this when importing information registered for Forwarding Settings, the Address Book, or Favorites Buttons.
  • FIL Format: Select this when importing information registered for Forwarding Settings or the Address Book.
File Path: Specify the path of the file to import. You can only select files whose file extension is '.fia' or '.fil'.

If you want to import encrypted addresses, select [Decode Confidential Information of Address Book] → enter the correct password in the [Password] entry box.

  • When forwarding settings are imported, the Address Book is also automatically erased and overwritten.
  • The machine must be restarted to enable the imported forwarding settings. After importing, turn OFF the main power of the machine, wait 10 seconds, and turn the main power back ON.
  • After importing forwarding settings, the Remote UI cannot be used to perform other operations until the machine is restarted. Turn OFF the main power of the machine, wait 10 seconds, and turn the main power back ON.
  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.


Saving Additional Functions Settings in Files (Export)

You can store Additional Functions settings as a file in your computer.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Additional Functions] → click [Export].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Start Export].
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.


Loading Additional Functions Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)

You can load Additional Functions settings into the machine from saved files.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Additional Functions] → click [Import].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [Start Import].
  • You cannot import the data exported from a machine other than the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225.
  • When Additional Functions settings are imported, the System Manager ID, Department IDs, Address Book password, and Network settings are automatically overwritten.
  • The machine must be restarted to enable the imported Additional Functions settings. After importing, turn OFF the main power of the machine, wait 10 seconds, and turn the main power back ON.
  • After importing Additional Functions settings, the Remote UI cannot be used to perform other operations until the machine is restarted. Turn OFF the main power of the machine, wait 10 seconds, and turn the main power back ON.
  • SNMP v. 3 User and Context Settings in SNMP Settings in Network Settings cannot be imported/exported.
  • Do not import any files while the machine is executing other jobs.


Saving the Printer Settings

You can store the Printer Settings as a file in your computer.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Printer Settings] → click [Export].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Start Export].
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location where you want to save the file.


Loading Printer Settings

You can load printer settings into the machine from saved files.


Remark
  • You cannot import a file while the machine is scanning.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Printer Settings] → click [Import].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [Start Import].


Saving Paper Information Settings in files (Export)

You can store Paper Information Settings as a file in your computer.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Paper Information] → [Export].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Select the paper information category → click [Start Export].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Category]: Select the category of paper information to save to a file using the [Category] drop-down list.
  1. Click [Save] → follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location to save the file.


Loading Paper Information Settings Files (Overwrite/Import)

You can load paper information settings into the machine from files saved to a computer.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Import/Export] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Paper Information] → [Import].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Select the category of paper information → click [Browse] → select the file to import → click [Start Import].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Category]: Select the category of paper information to update using the [Category] drop-down list.
File path: Specify the location of the file to load.
  1. Follow the instructions on the screen to specify the location to save the file.


Device Custom Settings

The machine's custom settings can be edited with the Remote UI.

Follow the procedure below to customize the machine's settings from the Remote UI.


Remark
  • The custom settings that are available using the Remote UI are part of the settings available from the control panel of the machine. For instructions on using the control panel to specify the machine's custom settings, see Security.
  • For more information on the machine's custom settings, see the other categories and manuals relating to the function that needs to be set.
  • Of the settings available by pressing (Additional Functions) on the machine's control panel, the following settings are accessed from other menus within the Remote UI.
  • Mail Box Settings: Specify settings by clicking [Mail Box]. (See "Managing Inboxes.")
  • System Settings:
System Manager Settings: Specify settings by clicking [Add. Func.] → [System]. (See "Customizing System Settings.")
Register LDAP Server: Specify settings by clicking [Add. Func.] → [Store LDAP Server]. (See "Specifying LDAP Server Settings.")
Forwarding Settings: Specify settings by clicking [Add. Func.] → [Forwarding Settings]. (See "Specifying Forwarding Settings.")
Dept. ID Management: Specify settings by clicking [Add. Func.] → [Department ID Management]. (See "Managing Department IDs.")

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears. Enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click the type of custom setting that you want to specify.
  1. Specify all the necessary fields → click [OK].
  • If you are changing the network settings, the machine must be restarted to enable the settings. Turn OFF the main power of the machine, wait 10 seconds, and turn the main power back ON. You can restart the machine from the Remote UI. (See "Restarting the Machine.")
  • For more information on each setting, see other categories and manuals relating to the function that needs to be set.


Backing Up Inbox Data

You can back up inbox data stored in the machine to a file server connected to the network. Inbox data backed up in this way can be restored from the file server at a later date.

The following data can be backed up and restored:

  • Inbox Settings (inbox names, passwords, and auto erase times)
  • Inbox documents
  • Forms registered for the Image Composition mode

Remark
  • It may take more than seven hours to complete an inbox data backup/restore operation. Do not turn the main power switch of the machine OFF until the operation is complete, as this may cause the machine to malfunction.
  • In order to back up/restore inbox data, it is necessary to have an SMB server connected to the network.
  • If you back up/restore inbox data without restarting the machine after changing the language displayed on the touch panel display by pressing (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] from the control panel of the machine, the inbox data may not be backed up/restored properly.
  • The inbox data backed up using this function can be restored only to this machine or upgrades of the same model.
  • For more information about the Mail Box function, see Mail Box.
  • For more information on SMB servers, see Network.
  • It is recommended that you regularly back up important data.


Setting the Backup Destination for Inbox Data

You can specify the address, user name, password, and file path of the SMB server used to backup inbox data.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Backup Destination Settings].

  1. Specify the necessary fields → click [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

Host IP Address: The unique name used to identify the file server on the network. Enter the IP address of the SMB server to back up the inbox data. Enter the IP address of the SMB server to back up the inbox documents to in the following format:
\\Server Name\Name of Shared Folder.
User Name: Enter the user name for the SMB server used to back up the inbox data.
Password: Enter the password for the SMB server used to back up the inbox data.
File Path: Specify where to store the backup data on the SMB server.
Encrypt Backup Data: Select and enter a password to encrypt the backup data.
  • If you do not enter the correct host IP address, user name, password, and file path, the backup will not be performed.
  • You can enter up to 128 characters for the host IP address.
  • You can enter up to 128 characters for the user name.
  • You can enter 7 to 48 characters for the password.
  • You can enter up to 255 characters for the file path.
  • Make sure that the user limit of the folder is set to allow two or more users. If the user limit is set to allow only one user, the data will not be able to be restored correctly.
  • If you select to encrypt the backup data, the backup process may take longer.


Performing the Inbox Data Backup

Before upgrading the firmware of the machine, you can back up the inbox data stored in the machine to the destination specified in "Setting the Backup Destination for Inbox Data."


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Backup] → [Execute].

You can confirm the status of the backup process in [Backup Status].

Select 'All' or 'Changes' for the backup method. 'All' backs up all of the inbox data. 'Changes' backs up only the inbox data updated or added since the last backup.

  • If you want to schedule a backup, click [Add. Func.] → [Custom Settings] → [Auto Backup Settings], select either 'Back up All' or 'Back up Changes' and 'Everyday' or 'Select Days', and enter the time to perform the backup.


Restoring Backed Up Data

You can restore inbox data which has been backed up on a server to the machine.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Restore] → [Display Backup Data].

  1. Select the backup data to restore from the list → click [Execute].

The inbox data will be restored after you restart the machine (the main power of the machine is turned OFF, and then ON again).

  • If you want to display the backup/restore log, click [Add. Func.] → [Custom Settings] → [Backup/Restore Log].
  • If you want to restore encrypted backup data, enter the same password used when backing up the data.
  • Depending on the settings of the machine, the backup data may not be completely restored, or some documents may be automatically printed.
  • Restoration is performed after all of the inbox data stored in the machine, or documents that are being sent, received, or stored, are erased.


Registering/Editing Custom Paper Types

You can register/edit up to 200 paper types in addition to the paper types registered by default.



Registering Custom Paper Types (Duplication)

You can easily register a new paper type by duplicating an already registered paper type with similar properties, and giving it a new name.


  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that is displayed → click [Paper Type Management Settings].

  1. Select the paper type that has the properties closest to the paper type that you want to register → click [Duplicate].
  • You can select the paper types to display using the [Category to Display] drop-down list.
    [All]: Displays standard paper types and custom paper types.
    [Standard]: Displays only standard paper types.
    [Custom]: Displays custom paper types.
  • You can use the [Sort List by] drop-down list to sort the list according to where the paper types are registered or how much the paper types weigh.
  • You can click the name of a paper type to display detailed information for that paper type.
  1. Enter a name for the paper type → click [OK].
  • The paper type name cannot be registered in the following cases:
  • If the name is the same as the duplicated paper type.
  • If the name is left blank.
  1. Click the name of the paper type that you registered in the list.
  1. Click [Edit].
  1. Specify the desired settings → click [OK].


Editing Custom Paper Types

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that is displayed → click [Paper Type Management Settings].
  1. Follow the procedure in steps 4 to 6 of "Registering Custom Paper Types (Duplication)" to edit the custom paper type settings.
  • Only custom paper types set by the current user can be erased.


Erasing Custom Paper Types

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that is displayed → click [Paper Type Management Settings].
  1. Select the paper type you want to erase → click [Erase].
  1. Click [OK].
  • Only custom paper types set by the current user can be erased.


Installing a Certificate File

It is necessary to install a key pair from a computer in order to use encrypted SSL communication for IPP printing, E-mail and I-faxes, the Remote UI, and delivering device information.

Apart from the X.509 (DER) format server certificate preinstalled in the machine, you can also install a CA certificate file from your computer to use for encrypted SSL communication.

You can install a key pair and server certificate file created on a computer, a CA certificate, or a user signature certificate using the Remote UI.

Installed key pairs and CA certificates can be used for setting IPSec and IEEE802.1X Authentication. For more information on IPSec and IEEE802.1X Authentication, see "Network."



Installing a Key Pair and Server Certificate

Remark
  • For more information on registering a key pair and server certificate file, see Network.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [Key and Certificate Settings].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears → enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Register Key and Certificate].
  1. Click [Install].
  1. Enter the path for the key pair and certificate file to install → click [Start Installation].

The maximum number of characters that you can enter for the file name is eight, excluding the file path and file extension '.p12'. Specify the name of the file to install so that it will not exceed eight characters.

  • If you use IPPS printing in Windows Vista, you must set the IP address for the machine in [Common Name].


Installing a CA Certificate

Remark
  • For more information on registering a CA certificate file, see Network.

  1. Click [Add. Func.] → select [Custom Settings] from the menu that appears under [Add. Func.] → click [CA Certificate Settings].

  • If the System Manager ID and password are set, a dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and password appears → enter the System Manager ID and password → click [OK].
  1. Click [Register CA Certificate].
  1. Click [Install].
  1. Enter the path for the key pair and CA certificate file to install → click [Start Installation].

The maximum number of characters that you can enter for the file name is eight, excluding the file path and file extension '.cer'. Specify the name of the file to install so that it will not exceed eight characters.



Installing/Checking/Erasing a User Signature Certificate and Key Pair

This function installs/checks/erases a user certificate and key pair contained in a digital signature file.


Remark
  • This function is available only if the optional Digital User Signature Kit is activated and you log in to the machine using the SSO-H login service.
  • You can use a digital signature file with the following properties:
  • File format: PKCS#12
  • File extension: '.pfx' or '.p12'
  • You can use a user certificate with the following properties:
  • Format: X.509 version 3
  • Key length: 1024 bits/2048 bits
  • Encryption algorithm: RSA

  1. Enter the required data → click [Log In].


SSO-H is set as the login service.

  • If there is more than a 30 minute difference between the current time set in the computer registered by the Active Directory and the time set in the computer that you use for login, an error occurs when you log in using SSO-H. To be able to log in using SSO-H, it is necessary to match the current time on both the computers.
  • If Default Authentication is set, and an ID and password for the system manager in the System Manager Settings (from the Additional Functions screen of the machine) have been set, a dialog box requesting a user name and password appears. Enter the system manager ID and password, and click [OK] to start the Remote UI.
  • You must use the user login name (pre-Windows 2000) registered in Active Directory in order to then enter a user name for SSO-H authentication.
  • You can use only alphanumeric characters, . (period), - (hyphen), or _ (underscore) for a user name for SSO-H authentication. You can log in only if you use valid characters.
  • You can select up to four trusted domain names in addition to the domain name the machine belongs to for the DNS Domain Name.
  • Even if you install multiple login services, they cannot be used simultaneously. Only the login screen for the set login service is displayed.
  1. Click [Add. Func.] → click [User Key and Certificate Settings].

If a user with administrator privileges has logged in, all of the registered user keys and certificates are displayed.

If a general user has logged in, only their user key and certificate are displayed.


  • Click [Install].
  • Enter the path for the key pair and certificate file to install and the password of the private key → click [Start Installation].

The maximum number of characters that you can enter for the file name is twenty, excluding the file path and file extension '.p12' or '.pfx'. Specify the name of the file to install so that it will not exceed twenty characters.

  • Up to 100 user certificates can be installed, with a maximum of one user certificate per user. An error is displayed if you attempt to install more than 100 certificates, or more than one user certificate for a user.

  • To check a user key.

Click the user key you want to check.

  • To erase a user key.

Select the user key you want to erase → click [Erase].



MEAP/SSO

This category describes how to install MEAP applications and use login services.



Overview of SMS

SMS (Service Management Service) is software that enables you to access iR or imagePRESS machines (hereafter called machines) via a network from a web browser, and install and manage MEAP applications. The software (web server software) required to use SMS is included in this software. To be able to use the SMS, all you need is a web browser and a network connection between your computer and the machine.
You can use SMS if the machine is connected to the same network that your computer is using.

Using SMS, you can do the following:

  • Confirming the machine's MEAP application status from a computer on the same network

SMS enables you to access a machine via the network and display the status of installed applications, as well as various other data.
When you start SMS, enter your password in the [Log In] page, and log in, the following top page is displayed.


[Application List] Click to display the [Application List] page.
The status of MEAP applications installed in the machine is displayed on the [Application List] page.
[Install] Click to display the [Install] page.
You can install MEAP applications from the [Install] page.
[System Management] Click to display the [System Management] page.
On the [System Management] page, you can switch login services, and change the order of MEAP application buttons displayed on the touch panel display.
[Log Out] Click to finish SMS operations and log off. When you click this, the [Log In] page is displayed.

Remark
  • Do not use the browser's [Back] button. If you use [Back] to change pages, SMS may not operate correctly.

  • Installing and uninstalling MEAP applications on the machine

You can install and uninstall MEAP applications that correspond to the machine from your computer.


Remark
  • A license file is necessary to install a MEAP application.

  • Updating installed MEAP applications and license files

You can reinstall and update MEAP applications and license files if they have expired.

  • Changing the order of MEAP application buttons on the touch panel display.

You can set the order of the MEAP application buttons displayed at the top of the touch panel display of the machine.

  • You can set to allow a user to log in to SMS with the user name and password used when logging on to the machine.

You can also set to allow a user to log in to SMS with the user name and password of a user registered as an administrator.



Overview of Login Services

A login service is a service for authenticating users of the machine.
User authentication is performed in the following two cases:

  • Performing user authentication by displaying a login screen on the touch panel display
  • Performing user authentication by displaying a login page when accessing the machine via a Web browser

The login services included with the machine by default are Default Authentication (Department ID Management) and SSO-H (Single Sign-On H).
This category explains these two login services.


Remark
  • Default Authentication (Department ID Management) is set to a usable state as the default.


Default Authentication (Department ID Management)

Select this login service if you want to use Department ID Management, or do not want to authenticate users. Default Authentication has two types of users: administrator users and end users. The functions of the machine, the Remote UI, and MEAP applications that can be used differ according to the type of user.
Which users become administrator users or end users depends on whether Department ID Management and System Manager Settings are set, as indicated in the table below.


Administrator User End User
Department ID Management set to 'On' System Manager Settings set System Manager Users authenticated with a Department ID and password.
System Manager Settings not set Users authenticated with a Department ID and password. None
Department ID Management set to 'Off' System Manager Settings set System Manager Users other than the system manager
System Manager Settings not set All users None

Remark
  • For information on whether to use Department ID Management and registering Department IDs/passwords, see "Security" or "Remote UI."


Login Screens

When Default Authentication is set as the login service, three types of login screens exist.



Touch Panel Display

  • If Department ID Management is set to 'On':
  • Enter a Department ID/password or System Manager ID/System Password to log in to the machine.


Remark
  • If Department ID Management is set to 'Off', a login screen is not displayed, and user authentication is not performed.
  • If Department ID Management is set to 'Off' and System Manager Settings are set, a login screen is not displayed, but a screen prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password may be displayed when operating the machine.


Web Browser


  • Enter a Department ID/password or System Manager ID/System Password to log in to the Remote UI or a MEAP application (including login applications).


  • Enter the System Manager ID/System Password, and click [Administrator Login] to log in to the Remote UI or a MEAP application (including login applications).
  • End users should click [Regular User Login] to log in.


Remark
  • End users may not be able to log in to some MEAP applications.
  • It is not necessary to enter a Department ID/password when logging in as an end user.
  • If Department ID Management is set to 'Off' and System Manager Settings are not set, a login screen is not displayed, and user authentication is not performed.


SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)

This is a login service which can be used in an Active Directory environment network or in the machine. You can register/edit user data and specify administrator/end user settings in the following location:

  • Domain authentication is performed in Active Directory.
  • Local device authentication is performed in the memory of the machine from a Web browser.

SSO-H contains the following functions:

  • Enables the functions of the machine and MEAP applications, etc., to be used after being authenticated once.
  • Contains a user authentication system that connects with the domain controller, and has two compatible user authentication systems, which can be used even when there is network trouble and only the machine can be authenticated. These two user authentication systems can be used together or alone.


User Authentication Systems

SSO-H includes the following three user authentication systems:

  • 'Domain Authentication'
  • 'Local Device Authentication'
  • 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'

Remark
  • The three user authentication systems can be switched using a Web browser.
  • The default setting is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. To ensure the security of your system, change the SSO-H user authentication system to 'Domain Authentication', or change the user name and password for the Local Device Authentication administrator to something other than the default setting, as soon as you start using SSO-H.

  • 'Domain Authentication'

A user authentication system which is linked to the domain controller in an Active Directory environment on a network, and performs authentication for connecting to the network domain while logging in to the machine. Users belonging to up to 200 trusted domains (in addition to users belonging to the domain which includes the machine) can be authenticated. The name of the domain to log in to is selected by the user when logging in.


  • 'Local Device Authentication'

A user authentication system which only uses the machine. This users to be authenticated are registered/managed using a database inside the machine. [This device] is the login destination.


  • 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'

A user authentication system which includes the functions of both Domain Authentication and Local Device Authentication. This is useful for using Domain Authentication to authenticate users registered/managed in Active Directory, and using Local Device Authentication to authenticate temporary users which cannot be added to Active Directory.

In the example below, users belonging to Domain A (which includes the machine), and users belonging to Domain B (which is bi-directionally trusted by Domain A), can be authenticated, and users registered in the machine itself can be authenticated. The location to log in to (domain name or [This device]) is selected by the user when logging in.


Remark
  • When using Domain Authentication, if the server cannot be accessed because of trouble such as network failure, it may take up to five minutes for the login screen to be displayed on the touch panel display after the machine is started.
  • To use Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management at the same time, the information registered for Local Device Authentication and the user information for Department ID Management (Department ID and passwords) must match.
  • If you want to manage print totals and scan totals for each Department ID when using Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management at the same time, set Department ID Management to 'On'.
  • You cannot use the optional control card reader with 'Domain Authentication' or with 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'.


Login Screens

When SSO-H is set as the login service, two types of login screens exist.



Touch Panel Display

Select the login destination, and enter a user name and password to log in to the machine.

Select the login destination using the Login Destination drop-down list.


Remark
  • If 'Local Device Authentication' is set as the user authentication system, the Login Destination drop-down list is not displayed.
  • The names of the domains which allow user authentication are displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list.
  • The items in the drop-down list are displayed in alphabetical order by default.
  • Regardless of the items displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list, the domain which the machine belongs to is displayed at the top of the list, and [This device] is displayed at the bottom of the list.
  • If seven or more items are displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list, [Alphabetical], [], and [] are displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list.
  • If you press [Alphabetical], the items displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list are displayed in reverse alphabetical order, and the button changes to [Alphabetical].
  • If you press [Alphabetical], the items displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list are displayed in reverse alphabetical order, and the button changes to [Alphabetical].
  • Press [] to scroll down the list.
  • Press [] to scroll up the list.


Web Browser

Select the login destination, and enter a user name and password to log in to the Remote UI or a MEAP application (including login applications).

Select the login destination using the Login Destination drop-down list.


Remark
  • The names of the domains which allow user authentication are displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list in alphabetical order. However, regardless of the items displayed in the Login Destination drop-down list, the domain which the machine belongs to is displayed at the top of the list, and [This device] is displayed at the bottom of the list.


System Requirements


SMS (Service Management Service)

SMS can be used in the following system environments:


Operating System Software Web Browsers
Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
Windows XP Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 R2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Vista Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Mac OS X 10.3 Safari 1.3.2
Mac OS X 10.4 Safari 2.0.4

Remark
  • Your browser requires the following settings:
  • JavaScript should be enabled.
  • Cookies should be enabled for each session.
  • No web server or software other than that described above is required (a web server is included in the supported machine).


SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)


Domain Authentication

A Windows server in which Active Directory is installed and a DNS server for name resolution are necessary to use Domain Authentication.

  • Windows Server to Install Active Directory (Domain Controller)
  • Software
  • Operating system:
    Microsoft Windows 2000 Server SP4
    Microsoft Windows Server 2003 SP1
    Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2

  • System Requirements for Administrators and End Users
Operating System Software Web Browsers Java Runtime Environment
Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 7:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
Windows XP Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 R2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Vista Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Mac OS X v10.3 Safari 1.3.2 Sun Java Runtime Environment 5.0
Mac OS X v10.4 Safari 2.0.4

  • System Requirements for Administrators and End Users (When Using IPv6 Communications)
Operating System Software Web Browsers Java Runtime Environment
Windows XP Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 7:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 R2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Vista Microsoft Internet Explorer 7

  • Other System Requirements
  • Access privilege to Windows 2000/2003 Domain Name System (DNS)
  • Access privilege to Domain Controller

Remark
  • The Java Runtime Environment must be installed to use a computer running Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1a or later), Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 R2 as a client computer. For information on obtaining the Java Runtime Environment, see the Sun Microsystems Web site.
  • When accessing the machine from a computer using IPv6 communications, JAVA 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.5 or later is required.
  • You must use the user logon name (pre-Windows 2000) registered in Active Directory in order to then enter a user name for Domain Authentication.
  • You can use only alphanumeric characters, . (period), - (hyphen), _ (underscore), or % (percent) for a user name for Domain Authentication. You can log in only if you use valid characters.
  • When using Internet Explorer, it is necessary to enable the Active X plugin.
  • If there is a difference between the language set on the machine and the one set on the Active Directory, the sender's Full name is not displayed on the e-mail recipient's machine.
  • If there is more than a 30 minute difference between the time set on the computer with Active Directory, the time set on the machine, and the time set on the computer used for logging in, an error occurs when you log in using Domain Authentication. To be able to log in using Domain Authentication, it is necessary to match the current time on both computers and the machine.
  • When using Domain Authentication, make sure you register an administrator. If you do not register an administrator, some settings and management functions will not be available, depending on the application. The method of registering differs depending on your system environment.
  • When using iW Accounting Manager, the users registered as administrators in iW Accounting Manager will also be recognized as administrators in Domain Authentication. For instructions on registering an administrator, see the manual for iW Accounting Manager.
  • When not using iW Accounting Manager, the users belonging to the group "Canon Peripheral Admins" in Active Directory will be recognized as administrators in Domain Authentication. Follow the instructions in the manual for Active Directory to create a group called "Canon Peripheral Admins," and register the administrators.

  • Server Ports Used

The following server ports are used when using Domain Authentication with SSO-H:

Port Number Application
53 Communication with the DNS server
88 Domain Authentication with the KDC (Key Distribution Center)
389 LDAP communications with the directory service
(Default is 389, but it can be changed to a user-defined port at in the LDAP service properties.)


Local Device Authentication

An Active Directory environment network is not necessary to use Local Device Authentication.


Remark
  • User names and passwords are registered in a database inside the machine.
  • You can only use alphanumeric characters for the user names.
  • You can only use alphanumeric characters and symbols for the passwords.
  • In order to prevent unauthorized use, make sure to change the user name and password of the Local Domain Authentication administrator as soon as you start using SSO-H.

  • System Requirements for Administrators and End Users
Operating System Software Web Browsers Java Runtime Environment
Windows 2000 Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 7:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
Windows XP Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 R2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP1,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Vista Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Mac OS X v10.3 Safari 1.3.2 Sun Java Runtime Environment 5.0
Mac OS X v10.4 Safari 2.0.4

  • System Requirements for Administrators and End Users (When Using IPv6 Communications)
Operating System Software Web Browsers Java Runtime Environment
Windows XP Professional Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 6:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
  • Microsoft Internet Explorer 7:
    Sun Java Runtime Environment 1.4 or later
Windows Server 2003
Windows Server 2003 R2
Microsoft Internet Explorer 6 SP2,
Microsoft Internet Explorer 7
Windows Vista Microsoft Internet Explorer 7

Remark
  • The Java Runtime Environment must be installed to use a computer running Windows 2000 (Service Pack 4 or later), Windows XP Professional (Service Pack 1a or later), Windows Server 2003, or Windows Server 2003 R2 as a client computer. For information on obtaining the Java Runtime Environment, see the Sun Microsystems Web site.
  • When accessing the machine from a computer using IPv6 communications, JAVA 2 Runtime Environment Standard Edition 1.5 or later is required.
  • When using Internet Explorer, it is necessary to enable the Active X plugin.


Before Starting SMS (Preparations)

Before logging in to the SMS, start the machine and follow the procedure below:

  • Network Settings

Specify [Network Settings] in [System Settings] (from the Additional Functions screen). Confirm the IP address of the machine. If you do not know the IP address of the machine, consult the network administrator. (See "Network.")

  • Set Use HTTP to 'On' in MEAP Settings

Select [MEAP Settings] from [System Settings] and set [Use HTTP] to 'On'. If you do not set [Use HTTP] to 'On', you cannot access the machine from your web browser.


Remark
  • You cannot connect to the machine via a proxy server. Specify the following settings if you are working in an environment using a proxy server (as these settings differ depending on the network environment, consult the network administrator).
  • In the proxy server settings of your web browser, add the IP address of the machine to the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy) list.
  • You cannot use SMS if your web browser is not set to enable cookies and JavaScript.
  • When entering characters from your web browser, use characters that can be entered from the touch panel display of the machine. Otherwise, the characters may not be displayed or recognized correctly on the touch panel display.


Activating Use HTTP in MEAP Settings

Use the control panel of the machine to set MEAP functions from your web browser.


Remark
  • The default setting is 'On'.

  1. Press → [System Settings].

If the Department ID and Password are set, press [System Settings] → enter the Department ID and password → press (Log In/Out).

  1. Press [] or [] until [MEAP Settings] appears → press [MEAP Settings].

  1. Press [Use HTTP].

  1. Press [On].

  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL>.

[On]: Uses SSL (Secure Socket Layer) to communicate.

[Off]: SSL is not used to communicate.

  • Any changes made to <Use SSL> in <Use HTTP> in MEAP Settings are also applied to <Use SSL> in Remote UI in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • To set <Use SSL> to 'On', it is necessary to set the key pair and server certificate necessary for performing Encrypted SSL communications in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For information on generating the key pair for SSL, see "Network."
  1. Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
  1. Turn the main power of the machine OFF, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the power ON.


Before Logging in to SSO-H Management Application

SSO-H is an authentication system that runs on the machine. It is necessary to specify the following settings in the machine to use SSO-H for authentication.



Network Settings

Set the items in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). Also, confirm the machine's IP address. For more information, see "Network."


Remark
  • If the optional Color Network Printer Unit/Network Multi-PDL Printer Unit is attached to the machine, see the documentation included with the Color Network Printer Unit/Network Multi-PDL Printer Unit.


Activating Use HTTP in MEAP Settings

Follow the procedure below to set [Use HTTP] to 'On'. Setting [Use HTTP] to 'On', enables you to access the machine from your Web browser.

Use the control panel of your machine to set up MEAP functions.


Remark
  • You cannot connect to the machine via a proxy server. Specify the following settings if you are working in an environment using a proxy server (as these settings differ, depending on the network environment, contact your network administrator).
  • In the proxy server settings of your Web browser, enter the IP address of your machine in the [Exceptions] (addresses that do not use a proxy) list.
  • You cannot use SSO-H if your Web browser is not set to enable cookies, JavaScript, and JavaApplet.
  • Only enter characters in your Web browser that can also be entered from the touch panel display of the machine. Otherwise, the characters you enter from your Web browser may not be displayed or recognized correctly on the touch panel display.
  • The default setting is 'On'.

  1. Press → [System Settings].

If the Department ID and Password are set, press [System Settings] → enter the Department ID and password → press (Log In/Out).

  1. Press [] or [] until [MEAP Settings] appears → press [MEAP Settings].

  1. Press [Use HTTP].

If <Use SSL> is not displayed on your machine, proceed to step 7.

  1. Press [On].

  • For machines that do not display <Use SSL>, Domain Authentication cannot be performed from Web browsers.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL>.

[On]: Uses SSL (Secure Socket Layer) to communicate.

[Off]: SSL is not used to communicate.

  • <Use SSL> must be set to 'On' to be able to use 'Domain Authentication' from a Web browser.
  • Any changes made to <Use SSL> in <Use HTTP> in MEAP Settings are also applied to <Use SSL> in Remote UI in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • To set <Use SSL> to 'On', it is necessary to set the key pair and server certificate necessary for performing Encrypted SSL communications in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For information on generating the key pair for SSL, see "Network."
  1. Press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.
  1. Turn the main power of the machine OFF, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the power ON.


Date and Time Settings

When using SSO-H, it is necessary to synchronize the date and time settings of the authentication server and machine. Set the date and time of the machine in Date & Time Settings to the same date and time set on the authentication server. For more information, see "Security."

You can also specify daylight saving settings to automatically advance the standard time of the machine forward by one hour for a certain period each year.


Remark
  • If the date and time settings of the authentication server and machine are not synchronized, a login error will occur when using Domain Authentication.
  • You can set a time difference of up to 5 minutes (default setting) between the time set on the machine and the time set on the server.
  • The allowed difference in times can be changed using the settings of Active Directory. However, if more than 5 minutes is specified, the allowed difference will not be changed.


DNS Settings

Set the machine to use a DNS server in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). For more information, see "Network."

The DNS server that manages the domain name registered in the machine requires the following:

  • The domain name of the Active Directory server used for authentication (the IP address of the domain controller) must be able to be retrieved.
  • The DNS server must support SRV records.

The following setting may also be required, depending on the functions you use.

  • If the port number used for LDAP on the Active Directory side is changed:
  • Information for the LDAP service of Active Directory must be registered as an SRV record as follows:
  • Service:

'_ldap'

  • Protocol:

'_tcp'

  • Port number:

The port number used by the LDAP service of Active Directory

  • Host offering this service:

Host name of the domain controller that is actually providing the LDAP service of the Active Directory domain (zone)



Department ID Management Settings

Department ID Management must be set to 'Off' before using SSO-H. For more information, see "Security."


Remark
  • If Department ID Management is set to 'On', a warning message will be displayed on the login screen.


Language Settings

Check the language settings of Active Directory and the machine. If the display language of Active Directory and the machine differ, the sender's full name will not be displayed in the destination for e-mail.



Logging in to the SSO-H Management Application

It is necessary for the SSO-H administrator to log in to the SSO-H Management Application in order to manage users for the Local Device Authentication System of SSO-H, and specify the various SSO-H settings. Also, it is necessary for end users to log in to the SSO-H Management Application in order to change their own password.


Remark
  • It is necessary to set SSO-H as the login service.
  • Only users registered as administrators in SSO-H can log in.
  • Do not use the browser's [Back]. If you use [Back] to change pages, SSO-H may not operate correctly.
  • If PortalService is installed, you can access as an administrator from the MEAP Portal page.
  • The default user authentication system is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. For information on setting the user authentication system, see "Setting the User Authentication System."
  • The default user name for the administrator of the Local Device Authentication System of SSO-H is 'Administrator', and the default password is 'password' (case sensitive).


Logging In

  1. Open your web browser.
  1. Enter the following URL in the address bar.

http://<IP address or host name of the machine>:8000/sso/

The [Log In] page is displayed.

  • If [Use HTTP] in [TCP/IP Settings] in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', enter <http://<IP address or host name of the machine>/sso/>.
  1. Enter/select each item, and click [Log In].

You are logged in to the SSO-H Management Application.


  • Select [This Device] in [Login Destination], and enter the user name and password of the Local Authentication administrator in [User Name] and [Password].

  • Select the domain name in [Login Destination], and enter the user name and password of the domain authentication administrator in [User Name] and [Password] on the authentication server of the selected domain.
  1. When you have finished using the SSO-H Management Application, click [Log Out].



Logging in from the MEAP Portal

Remark
  • MEAP Portal is a Web page which displays a list of Servlet type MEAP applications installed in the machine. It enables you to jump to the Web page for each MEAP application simply by clicking the application name displayed in the list, without the need for entering the URL of the application.
  • In order to use MEAP Portal, it is necessary to install Portal Service (included on the MEAP Administration Software CD-ROM).

  1. Open your Web browser.
  1. Enter the following URL in the address bar.

http://<IP address or host name of the machine>/

The [Log In] page is displayed.

  • If you entered <http://<IP address or host name of the machine>:8000/>, you can display the [MEAP Portal] page without performing step 4 (without displaying the Remote UI screen).
  • If [Use HTTP] in [TCP/IP Settings] in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', you can display the [MEAP Portal] page without performing step 4 (without displaying the Remote UI screen) if you restart the machine (the main power of the machine is turned OFF, and then ON again).
  1. Enter/select each item, and click [Log In].

You are logged in to the Remote UI.


  • Select [This Device] in [Login Destination], and enter the user name and password of the Local Authentication administrator in [User Name] and [Password].

  • Select the domain name in [Login Destination], and enter the user name and password of the domain authentication administrator in [User Name] and [Password] on the authentication server of the selected domain.
  1. On the top page of the Remote UI, click the link to the MEAP Portal URL.

The [MEAP Portal] portal page is displayed.

  • The link to the MEAP Portal URL differs according to whether SSL is being used.
    If SSL is used: https://<IP address of the machine>:8443
    If SSL is not used: http://<IP address of the machine>:8000
  1. Click [Sys. Admin. Applications].

[Sys. Admin. Applications] page is displayed.

  1. Click [Single Sign-On H].

The SSO-H Management Application is displayed.

  1. When you have finished, click [Log Out].



Starting and Closing SMS

The following two methods exist for logging in to SMS:

  • Logging in with the SMS password (Password Authentication). On the [Log In] page for SMS, enter the SMS password to log in.
  • Logging in with the user name and password of the machine (Remote Login Service Authentication).
    Log in with the user name and password of the machine (except for Default Authentication).
    Only users registered as administrators can log in.

Use the [Utility] page in [System Management] to start and stop the login methods for SMS. (See "Setting the Login Method for SMS.")


Remark
  • Only Password Authentication is set as the default.
  • The URL to specify differs according to the login service.
  • If Default Authentication is set as the login service, you cannot log in to SMS with the user name and password of the machine.
  • Multiple users cannot log in to SMS at the same time.


Logging in with the SMS Password

Remark
  • The default password is "MeapSmsLogin" (case sensitive).
  • This password is to prevent unauthorized operation of the machine. Do not inform anyone other than the system manager of this password.
  • In order to prevent erroneous usage, change the password to one that only the network administrator knows (when you begin using it). If you want to change the password, see "Changing the Password."
  • Make sure that you do not forget your password. Otherwise, you will not be able to access SMS. In this case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  1. Open your web browser.
  1. Enter the following URL in the address bar.

http://<IP address or host name of the machine>:8000/sms/

The SMS [Log In] page is displayed.

  • The device serial number is displayed in the bottom right of the screen. This serial number is necessary when retrieving a license file from the license management system.
  • A drop-down list for switching the displayed language is displayed on the top right of the screen. Select the displayed language as necessary. (English and Japanese only)
  1. Enter the password → click [Log In].

If you cannot log in because the password is incorrect, a message prompting you to re-enter the password will be displayed.

  • If you do not access SMS after five minutes, it will timeout and automatically logout. If this happens, log in again from the [Log In] page.
  • If you do not log in within five minutes of displaying the [Log In] page, you will become unable to log in even if you enter the correct password. Re-enter the password according to the message displayed on the screen.


Logging in with the User Name and Password of the Machine

  1. Open your Web browser.
  1. Enter the following URL in the address bar.

http://<IP address or host name of the machine>:8000/sms/rls/

The [Log In] page for the selected login service is displayed.

  1. Enter the user name and password of a user registered as an SSO-H administrator → select the login destination → click [Log In].

If you cannot log in because the user name or password that you entered is incorrect, a message appears prompting you to re-enter your user name and password.

  • If SMS times out, it automatically logs out. (The time it takes before logging out depends on the login service.) If this happens, log in again from the [Log In] page.
  • If SMS times out on the [Log In] page, you cannot log in even if you enter the correct password. Follow the instructions on the screen to re-enter the password.


Logging Out

  1. Click [Log Out].

The [Log In] page is displayed.

  • When you finish using SMS, make sure you log out. If you close the web browser without logging out, SMS becomes temporarily unusable.


Installing Applications

You can install MEAP applications. There are two types of installation: installing a new MEAP application, and updating an existing MEAP application to a newer version.


Remark
  • You will need a valid license file in order to install a MEAP application.
  • If your application comes with a License Access Number, you must access the License Management System at the following URL to acquire your license file:
    http://www.canon.com/lms/license/
    Follow the online directions to create and download your license file. You will need to have your License Access Number and your MEAP device serial number(s) available in order to complete the license generation process.
  • If your application does not come with a License Access Number, your license file will be provided by your MEAP Application provider.
  • If you are updating an existing MEAP application to a newer version, stop the application before installing the new version. You cannot update the application unless you stop it first. (See "Stopping Applications.")
  • The maximum number of applications that can be installed is 19.
  • The maximum amount of hard disk space allocated to install MEAP applications is 1GB.
  • You can confirm the hard drive space allocated to MEAP applications in [Hard Disk], under [Resource Information] displayed in the [Application List] page.
  • There may be other system requirements for installation, depending on the applications.
    For instructions on settings, see the manual provided with the application.
  • If the machine enters the Shutdown mode while installing a MEAP application, an error message may be displayed on the [Install] page for SMS, and the installation canceled.
    In this case, try installing the MEAP application again after the machine is restarted (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON again). For instructions on how to turn ON/OFF the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."

  1. Click [Install].

The [Install Application/License] page is displayed.

  1. Select the application file and license file you want to install.
  • Click [Browse] for [Application File] → select the application file.
  • Click [Browse] for [License File] → select the license file.
  • Click [OK].

File extensions:

Application File: A file with the 'jar' extension.
License File: A file with the 'lic' extension.

The message <Installing... Please wait a moment.> is displayed.

  • You cannot install license files only.
  • When installing an application, make sure you specify the license file. You cannot install the application without specifying the license file.
  • To add a license file for an application that is already installed, see "Adding License Files."
  • You can also specify the file path by entering it directly.
  1. Confirm the information displayed on the install confirmation page → click [OK].

Depending on the application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information displayed on the screen → click [OK].


The following information is displayed when you update a MEAP application.

Application Information

<New Application>: Displays information about the new version of the MEAP application.
<Current Application>: Displays information about the existing MEAP application.

License Information

<Add>: Displays the additional validity period and counter information for the upgrade.
<Current>: Displays the validity period and counter information from when the application was installed.
<Total>: Displays the total of the validity periods and counter information in <Current> and <Add>.

Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait a moment.> is displayed again.
After installation is complete, the [Application List] page is displayed.



Starting/Stopping Applications

These procedures enable you to place installed applications in a started or stopped state.



Starting Applications

  1. Click [Application List].

The details of each item are shown below.

Name: Displays the name of the application.
Installed on: Displays the date on which the application was installed.
Application ID: Displays ID which is unique to each application, distinguishing one from another.
Status: Displays the status of the application.
Installed: Application has been installed, but not started. Or, the application has not been restarted after stopping the application and then restarting the machine.
Started: Application is running.
Stopped: Application is starting up.
Stopping: Application is closing down.
License: Displays the license status of the application.
installed: An effective license file has been installed.
Not Installed: License file is disabled.
Excess: Expiration date and the types of counters set for the installed license file, and any counter value(s) exceeding the upper limit of the license file.
Invalid: Installed license file has exceeded its expiration date. Alternatively, current counter value has exceeded the upper limit of the license file. (When a license file is set to many types of counters, it will expire when any counter exceeds the upper limit.)
Resource Information: Displays the resources being used by the applications.
Hard Disk: Amount of hard disk space being used. Shown in kilobytes.
Memory: Amount of memory being used. Shown in kilobytes.
Threads: Number of threads.
Sockets: Number of sockets.
File Descriptor: Number of file descriptors.
  • Hard disk information is updated when an application is installed or uninstalled. All other items are updated when an application is started or stopped.
  1. Select the radio button for the application you want to start → click [Start].

The application is started.

  • You cannot start applications whose required license file has not been installed.
  • When the resources required for memory, threads, sockets, or file descriptors has run out, the application will not start, even if you press [Start].


Stopping Applications

Remark
  • To update an application, you must close the application you want to update.

  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the application you want to stop → click [Stop].

The application is stopped.



Uninstalling Applications

You can uninstall MEAP applications.


Remark

  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the application you want to uninstall → click [Uninstall].

When you cannot uninstall the selected application, [Uninstall] is grayed out and cannot be clicked.

  1. Confirm the application you want to uninstall is selected → click [OK].

The application is uninstalled.

  • You can uninstall the application only if the status of its license is [Not Installed]. To uninstall applications with a different status, disable the license file from the [License File Management] page and delete the license file. (See "Downloading/Deleting Disabled License Files.")
  • To disable the license file, its application must be in a stopped state.
  • If the application you want to uninstall is linked with another application, a confirmation message will be displayed. If such applications are uninstalled, you may not be able to use the linked applications.


Confirming/Setting Application Preferences

You can confirm the details of installed applications.


  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Click the name of the application in the [Application List] whose details you want to confirm.

The [Application Information] page is displayed.

  • Depending on the application you are using, [Set Authentication] is displayed. This type of application performs jobs, including print jobs, regardless the control from the touch panel display.
  • The detailed information that is displayed may differ depending on the application.


Application License Settings

You can add, disable, or delete license files for installed applications.



Adding License Files

You can install license files for applications that are already installed. You can also increase counter values and extend terms of validity by adding a license file.


  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Click the name for the application in the [Application List].

The [Application Information] page is displayed.

  1. In the [Application Information] page, click [License Management].

The [License Management] tab page is displayed.

  1. Click [Browse] → select the license file you want to add → click [Install].

The message <Installing... Please wait a moment.> is displayed.

  1. Confirm the information displayed on the install confirmation page → click [OK].

The following information is displayed when adding a license file.

<Current>: Displays the validity period and counter information from when the application was installed.
<Add>: Displays the additional validity period and counter information for the upgrade.
<Total>: Displays the total of the validity periods and counter information in <Current> and <Add>.

Depending on the application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information displayed on the screen → click [OK].

Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait a moment.> is displayed again.

  • If the license of an application is expired or disabled, it is necessary to restart (stop and start) the application after the new license file is added.


Disabling License Files

You can disable installed license files. You must disable a license file before deleting or downloading it.


Remark
  • Disabling a license file must be performed after closing the application you want to disable. You cannot disable a license file if the application is still running.
  • When a disabled license file is generated, the status of that license file becomes [Uninstalled] and the application becomes unusable.
  • The disabled license file can be reinstalled to the same machine.

  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Click the name of the application in the [Application List].

The [Application Information] page is displayed.

  1. In the [Application Information] page, click [License Management].

The [License Management] tab page is displayed.

  1. Click [Disable].

A page confirming whether you want to disable the license file is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].


Downloading/Deleting Disabled License Files

Before uninstalling an application, you must delete the disabled license file(s). It is recommended to download the license file you want to delete to your computer and save it for reinstalling later.


Remark
  • Once you have deleted the disabled license file, you cannot download it from the machine.
  • The disabled license file can be reinstalled to the same machine.
  • You can only download or delete disabled license files.

  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Click the name of the application in the [Application List].

The [Application Information] page is displayed.

  1. In the [Application Information] page, click [License Management].

The [License Management] tab page is displayed.

  1. To download or delete the selected license file, follow the procedure below.

  • Select [Download].

  • Specify the location where you want to save the license file.
  • Click [OK].

The license file is stored.


  • Select [Delete].

The dialog box confirming whether you want to delete the file is displayed.

  • Click [OK].

The license file is deleted and the display returns to the [License File Management] page.



Setting Application Authentication Information

You can set the authentication information for MEAP applications that do not require operations from the control panel.
If the Default Authentication (Department ID Management) login service is set, enter a Department ID and password. If the SSO-H login service is set, enter a user name and password.


Remark
  • If you change the login application, confirm the authentication information. It may be necessary to re-enter the authentication information.

  1. Click [Application List].

The [Application List] page is displayed.

  1. Click the name of the application in the [Application List].

The [Application Information] screen is displayed.

  1. In the [Application Information] page, click [Authentication Information Settings].

The [Authentication Information Settings] tab page is displayed.

  1. Enter the authentication information → click [Set].

The message <Authentication information is set> is displayed if the authentication information is set successfully. If an error occurs when setting the authentication information, an error message is displayed.


  • Enter the Department ID and Password.
  • Click [Set].


  • Enter a User Name and Password, and select the Login Destination.
  • Click [Set].



Touch Panel Display Order Settings

You can set the order in which application buttons are displayed on the machine's touch panel display.


Remark
  • You can display up to nine application buttons on the touch panel display.
  • There are some MEAP applications whose buttons cannot be displayed on the touch panel display of the machine. The buttons for applications that can be displayed on the touch panel display are known as applets.

  1. Click [System Management] → [Panel].

  1. Select the applets (from the drop-down list) in the order you want to display them on the machine's touch panel display.

To return the display to its original settings, click [Reset].

  • Select all the applet fields to leave no field blank.
  • The application buttons are displayed on the touch panel of the machine from left to right as Button 1, Button 2, and so on.
  • The applet names and application IDs of the applications are displayed in the drop-down list.
  • Only the buttons of operating applets are displayed on the touch panel display of the machine. However, all of the installed applet names are displayed on the drop-down list.
  1. Click [Set].

An asterisk (*) is displayed next to the applet names of applications that have been set.



Uninstalling System Applications

System applications are the basic applications that make up a MEAP system.


Remark
  • It is not necessary to delete a license file before uninstalling a system application.

  1. Click [System Management] → [Enhanced Sys. App].

The page where you can specify various settings, such as system applications and login services, is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the application you want to uninstall → click [Uninstall].

A page confirming whether you want to continue uninstalling is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].

The application is uninstalled, and the [Enhanced Sys. App] page is displayed.



Starting/Stopping System Applications

System applications can be started, stopped, and uninstalled from the [System Management] page.



Starting System Applications

  1. Click [System Management] → [Enhanced Sys. App].

The page where you can specify various settings, such as system applications and login services, is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the application you want to start → click [Start].

If the application has started correctly, the status of the specified system application is 'Started'.



Stopping System Applications

  1. Click [System Management] → [Enhanced Sys. App].

The page where you can specify various settings, such as system applications and login services, is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the application you want to stop → click [Stop].

If the application has stopped correctly, the status of the specified system application is 'Stopped'.



Login Service Settings

A login service is a service for authenticating users that log in to a machine. You can change or uninstall login services from the [System Management] page.

There are two kinds of factory default login services that you can use:

  • Default Authentication (Department ID Management)
  • SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)

SSO-H includes the following three user authentication systems:

  • 'Domain Authentication'
  • 'Local Device Authentication'
  • 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'

For details of Login Service, see "Overview of Login Services."



Login Service Selection

You can select the login service for user authentication.


Remark
  • If you have logged in with the user name and password of the machine, the login service will not be displayed on the top of screen. To change the login service, log in with the SMS password.
  • To switch to SSO-H, Department ID Management must be set to 'Off'.
  • To set Local Device Authentication, the registered information in Local Device Authentication and the registered user data (Department ID and Password) in Department ID Management of the machine have to match.
  • To use Local Device Authentication and Department ID Management at the same time, update the Local Device Authentication user data (Department ID and corresponding password) and set Department Management ID to 'On', after switching the login service to SSO-H.
  • If SSO-H is set, you cannot use the optional control card reader. If you want to stop using the optional control card reader and switch to SSO-H, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • If there is more than a 30 minute difference between the time set on the computer with Active Directory, the time set on the machine, and the time set on the computer used for logging in, an error occurs when you log in. To be able to log in, it is necessary to match the current time on both computers and the machine.
  • If SSO-H is set as the login service, it takes time until the machine is ready to scan.
  • If SSO-H is set as the login service, it takes time to access the Remote UI.

  1. Click [System Management] → [Enhanced Sys. App].

The page where you can specify various settings, such as system applications and login services, is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the login service you want to use → click [Select].

The selected login service application is set to 'Start after Restart'.

  1. Turn the main power of the machine OFF, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the power ON.

The specified login service starts.

Changes to the login service settings are enabled after the machine is restarted.

For instructions on how to turn ON/OFF the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."



Uninstalling a Login Service

Login services are not necessary to uninstall. However, you can uninstall a login service to increase hard disk space for other applications.


Remark
  • Login services, unlike other applications, do not require you to delete the license file before uninstalling.
  • You cannot uninstall Default Authentication (Department ID Management), the login service that is currently being used (the login service whose state is displayed as 'Started' or 'Stop after Restart'), or the login service you will use from the next time you start the machine (the login service whose state is displayed as 'Start after Restart').
  • Even if you uninstalled SSO-H by mistake, you can reinstall it using the file in the MEAP Administration Software CD-ROM.

  1. Click [System Management] → [Enhanced Sys. App].

The page where you can specify various settings, such as system applications and login services, is displayed.

  1. Select the radio button for the login service you want to uninstall → click [Uninstall].

A page confirming whether you want to continue uninstalling the login service is displayed.

  1. Click [OK].

The login service is uninstalled.



Installing System Applications

  1. Click [System Management] → [Enhanced Sys. App].

The page where you can specify various settings, such as system applications and login services, is displayed.

  1. Select the enhanced system application file and license file.
  • Click [Browse] for [Enhanced System Application] → select the enhanced system application file.

  • Click [Browse] for [License File to Install] → select the license file.
  1. Click [Install].

The message <Installing... Please wait a moment.> is displayed.

  • When installing a system application, you must specify both the application file and license file.
  • You can also specify the file paths of the application and license file by entering them directly.
  1. Confirm the information displayed on the install confirmation page → click [OK].

Depending on the application, a software license agreement screen may be displayed. Confirm the information displayed on the screen → click [OK].

Installation will start after the message <Installing... Please wait a moment.> is displayed again.



Confirming System Information

You can confirm version data relating to platforms (such as Java Virtual Machine), version data, date of installation, and the current status of system applications.


  1. Click [System Management] → [System Info].

  • If you want to see the detailed information, click [Details].
  • You can confirm MEAP Specifications on this screen.


Confirming Application Data

You can check data relating to an application.


  1. Click [System Management] → [Application Info].

Click [Installed] to check data relating to installed applications (except system applications).

Click [Uninstalled] to check data relating to applications (except system applications) that have been uninstalled.



Confirming License Files

You can check the content of license files before installation.


Remark
  • You cannot display the content of installed license files.

  1. Click [System Management] → [Utility].
  1. Click [Check License].

  1. Click [Browse] → select the license file whose content you want to check.
  • You can specify the file path by entering it directly.
  1. Click [Check].

The content of the license file is displayed.



Changing the Password

You can change the SMS password.


  1. Click [System Management] → [Utility].
  1. Click [Change Password].

  1. Enter the old password and the new password → click [Set].

  • Make sure that you do not forget your password. Otherwise, you will not be able to access SMS. In this case, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • You must enter between 8 and 32 characters for the password.


Setting the Login Method for SMS

You can set to allow a user to log in to SMS with the user name and password used when logging on to the machine, or set to restrict a user from logging in to SMS with the SMS password.


Remark
  • The items you can set differ according to how you logged in.
  • If you have logged in with the user name and password of the machine:
    You can start/stop the service for allowing login with the SMS password (Password Authentication).
  • If you have logged in with the SMS password:
    You can start/stop the service for allowing login with the user name and password of the machine.

  1. Click [System Management] → [Utility].
  1. Click [Application Management Function].
  1. Select the radio button of the application for the service you want to start or stop → click [Start] or [Stop].


Name Displays the name of the application.
Installed on Displays the date on which the application was installed.
Application ID Displays the unique application ID.
Status Displays the status of the application.

The login method for SMS is set.

  • You can set both [Password Authentication] and [Remote Login Service Authentication] to 'Started', but you cannot set them both to 'Stopped'. (One of them must be set to 'Started'.)


Specifying the Various Settings of SSO-H

Specify the necessary settings to use SSO-H.



Setting the User Authentication System

You can select which of the three SSO-H user authentication systems to use.


Remark
  • The default setting is 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication'. To ensure the security of your system, change the SSO-H user authentication system to 'Domain Authentication', or change the user name and password for the Local Device Authentication administrator to something other than the default setting, as soon as you start using SSO-H.

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [Settings].

The [Settings] page is displayed.

  • To change the pages between the [User Management] and [Settings] pages, click [Single Sign-On H].
  1. Select the desired user authentication system from the [User Authentication System] drop-down list → click [OK].

[User Authentication System]:
• Domain Authentication Uses only Domain Authentication.
• Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication Uses both Domain Authentication and Local Device Authentication.
• Local Device Authentication Uses only Local Device Authentication.
  • Changes to the login service settings are enabled after the machine is restarted.
    After changing the settings, turn the main power of the machine OFF, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the power ON. For instructions on how to turn ON/OFF the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."
  • Do not select 'Domain Authentication' if you do not have an Active Directory environment network configured which can perform Domain Authentication. You will become unable to log in. If you become unable to log in, set a login service other than SSO-H, and reinstall the SSO-H login service from the MEAP Administration Software CD-ROM.


Setting the User Group to Register the Domain Administrator

"Canon Peripheral Admins" is set in advance as the user group of the device administrator. This needs to be specified when changing the user name of the administrator.


Remark
  • Do not set "Canon Peripheral Admins" as a primary group.

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [Settings].

The [Settings] page is displayed.

  • To change the pages between the [User Management] and [Settings] pages, click [Single Sign-On H].
  1. Enter the group name in [User Group Name].

  1. Click [OK].


Specify the Number of Users Displayed on the Touch Panel Display

For SSO-H, you can specify the number of user's logs displayed on the touch panel display when logging in.


Remark
  • The Number of Login Users to Display setting can be set not only by the Local Device Authentication administrator, but also by the Domain Authentication administrator.
  • The default settings are as follows:
    Number of Login Users to Display: Prioritize Server Settings

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [Settings].

The [Settings] page is displayed.

  • To change the pages between the [User Management] and [Settings] pages, click [Single Sign-On H].
  1. Select the number of user names you want to display from [Number of Login Users to Display] → click [OK].

[Number of Login Users to Display]:

• 0 [] is not displayed when you log in from the touch panel display of the machine. If this is set, the login screen is displayed as follows.
• 1 Only the information of the last user who logged in from the touch panel display of the machine is displayed on the drop-down list. If this is set, the login screen is displayed as follows.
• MAX (Maximum Number of a Device) The information of the last seven users who logged in from the touch panel display of the machine is displayed on the drop-down list. If this is set, the login screen is displayed as follows.
  • The Number of Login Users to Display setting is enabled only after logging out of the machine, logging back in, and then logging out again.


Setting the Access Mode in Sites

If multiple sites are operating in the domain, you can set to retrieve Active Directory site information to prioritize access to the domain controller in the site the machine belongs to. If you set the Access Mode in Sites mode, you can also select one of the following settings:

  • Only access the domain controller in the site the machine belongs to.
  • Enable access to domain controllers outside the site the machine belongs to, but prioritize access to the domain controller in the site the machine belongs to.

Remark
  • Even for machines with IPv6 settings enabled, IPv4 communications are used when using the Access Mode in Sites mode.
  • For domain controllers that have an IPv6 address, if an IPv4 address is also registered, access is performed using the IPv4 address for dual stack configuration.
  • The access mode in sites is not set by default.

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [Settings].

The [Settings] page is displayed.

  • To change the pages between the [User Management] and [Settings] pages, click [Single Sign-On H].
  1. Select [Set access mode in sites] → click [OK].

If you select [Set access mode in sites]: Retrieves Active Directory site information to access the domain controller in the site the machine belongs to. If multiple domain controllers are in the same site as the machine, they are accessed in the same order as the list of domain controllers retrieved from the DNS server.
If you do not select [Set access mode in sites]: Does not retrieve Active Directory site information. domain controllers are accessed in the same order as the list of domain controllers retrieved from the DNS server.
  • If you select [Set access mode in sites]:
  • Set how to retrieve site information.
[Only at First Time]: Uses the list of domain controllers retrieved when the machine was logged in to for the first time.
[Every Time When Device Starts Up]: Updates the list of domain controllers every time the machine is started.
  • Set the site access range.
[Only Site of Device]: Accesses only domain controllers in the same site as the machine. An error occurs if there are no domain controllers in the same site as the machine.
[Access Other Sites in Addition to Site of Device]: Also accesses domain controllers outside the same site as the machine if there are no domain controllers in the same site as the machine. An error occurs if there are also no domain controllers outside the same site as the machine.
  • Even when [Set access mode in sites] is selected, site information is not retrieved when logging in from a Web browser.
  • Even when [Only Site of Device] is set, the machine may access sites outside the site it belongs to when performing domain controller access during the startup process. However, access to domain controllers in the same site as the machine is prioritized.


Registering/Editing User Data for Local Device Authentication

You can register and edit user data for authentication from a web browser for the Local Device Authentication. You can also import and export user data in bulk.


Remark
  • Only the Local Device Authentication administrator can register/edit user data on the [User Management] page. End users can only change their own password.
  • Click [User Name], [Displayed As], or [E-mail Address] on the [User Management] page to change the sort order of registered user data.
  • [MEAP Portal] is only displayed if PortalService is installed.


Registering User Data

You can register a new user.


Remark
  • You can register up to 1,000 users.
  • An asterisk (*) is displayed on left side of the check box for the registered Administrator on the [User Management] page.
  • It is recommended that you export the registered user data and make a backup copy.

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [User Management].

The [User Management] page is displayed.

  1. Click [Register].

  1. Enter the necessary data → click [OK].

The content and setting conditions that should be entered are as follows:

Item Setting Content Setting Conditions Default
Values
User Name Set user name when logging in. Must be from 1 to 32 characters. You cannot include spaces or the following symbols (\/: * ? | < > [ ] ; , = + @ ").
Case-sensitive.
You cannot register a name that has already been registered.
Administrator
Password Set password when logging in. You can leave this blank or enter up to 32 characters.
Case-sensitive.
password
Confirm Enter the password you entered in [Password]. You can leave this blank or enter up to 32 characters.
Case-sensitive.
password
Department ID Set Department ID to be used when scanning or printing with the machine. Must be from 1 to 7 digits
(this can be omitted if Department ID Management is set to 'Off').
If the number you enter does not contain enough digits, zeros are added to the front of the number.
0000000
Password Set password corresponding to Department ID. You can leave this blank or enter up to 7 digits.
(this can be omitted if Department ID Management is set to 'Off').
If the number you enter does not contain enough digits, zeros are added to the front of the number.
0000000
Confirm Enter the password you entered in [Password]. You can leave this blank or enter up to 7 digits.
(this can be omitted if Department ID Management is set to 'Off').
If the number you enter does not contain enough digits, zeros are added to the front of the number.
0000000
User Type Select Administrator or End User. You cannot set all users to End User (General User). Administrator
Displayed As Set the user display name (for example, user's full name, user's department name, etc.) You can leave this blank or enter up to 32 characters. Administrator
E-mail Address Set the user's e-mail address. You can leave this blank or enter up to 256 ASCII characters.
The format of e-mail addresses is not checked.
Blank
Card ID*1 If the control card reader is attached, enter the card ID. You can leave this blank or enter up to 8 characters.
You cannot enter only zeros, such as <0000>.
Blank
*1 Indicates items that appear only when the control card reader is attached.

The new user information is registered.

  • If you select [Administrator] for [User Type], the user name and password can be used when you log in using Local Device Authentication.
  • If Department ID Management is set to 'On', the registered information for Local Device Authentication and the registered user data and password in the machine's Department ID Management have to match. If the Department ID and password have been changed due to the delivery of device information, make sure to change the Local Device Authentication settings accordingly.
  • To set Department ID Management to 'On', it is necessary to register the Department ID and password as the user information of the administrator for Local Device Authentication beforehand.
  • It is necessary to enter an e-mail address. If you leave the e-mail address blank when Local Device Authentication is used, you cannot send e-mail.
  • If Local Device Authentication is set:
  • The login user name and e-mail address are displayed on the sender field ("from") on the e-mail recipient's machine. However, if an e-mail address that exceeds 194 characters is entered, only the first 193 characters of the address is displayed.
  • The login user's e-mail address is displayed on the sender field on the I-fax recipient's machine.
  • Multiple users can share the same Department ID.
  • Multiple users can be registered as an Administrator.
  • Enter the same password for [Password] and [Confirm]. If you enter a different password for [Password] and [Confirm], a message prompting you to re-enter the passwords is displayed.


Editing User Data

You can change registered user data.


Remark
  • It is recommended that you export the registered user data and make a backup copy. (See "Exporting User Data.")
  • You cannot change the User Name.
  • Only a user registered as [Administrator] in [User Type] can edit the user data.
  • If you edit user data when that user is logged in, the changes you made are validated only after that user is logged out.
  • If you want to change the user name, you must delete the user data and create and register new user data.

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [User Management].

The [User Management] page is displayed.

  1. Place a check mark next to the user data you want to edit → click [Edit].

  1. Edit the necessary items → click [OK].



Deleting User Data

You can delete registered user data.


Remark
  • If a user is logging in to the machine and his user data is deleted, he will be logged out automatically.
  • The user data that is logged in as [Administrator] cannot be deleted.

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [User Management].

The [User Management] page is displayed.

  1. Place a check mark next to the user data you want to delete → click [Delete].

The user data is deleted.

  • You can select all of the displayed users by placing a check mark next to [ALL Select].


Importing User Data

You can read and register user data registered in another machine from a file.

For more information on file formats for import, see "File Formats for Local Device Authentication User Information Files."


Remark
  • Imported user data is registered or overwritten as [End User]. (See "Editing User Data.")

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [User Management].

The [User Management] page is displayed.

  1. Click [Import].

  1. Click [Browse] → specify the file you want to import.

You can also specify the file by entering the file path directly.

  1. Specify the necessary items → click [Start].

Details of each item are shown below.

[File Format]: Specify the file format for importing.
• SDL Format Import the user data created in the file format used for SDL and the Local Device Authentication of SSO-H. (File extension: "ldif").
• NetSpot Accountant 3.x Format Import the user data created in NetSpot Accountant 3.x Format. (File extension: "csv").
• NetSpot Accountant 4.x Format Import the user data created in NetSpot Accountant 4.x/iW Accounting Manager Format. (File extension: "csv").
<When Netspot Accountant Format Is Selected>
[Encoding]: Specify the character code for importing.
• Windows Latin-1
(CP1252)
Import the file written in Windows Latin Format.
Windows Latin is a character code for European.
• Windows Japanese
(CP932)
Import the file written in Windows Japanese Format.
Windows Japanese is a character code for Japanese.
[User Name Type]: Select the type of user name used for logging in.
• User ID Use the user ID as user name
• Windows User Name Use User Name in Windows as user name
  • If user data with the same name is already registered, the imported user data will overwrite the old data.


Exporting User Data

You can save user data registered in the machine to a file in your computer. Use this function when you want to use the user data registered in the machine with another device or when you want to back up the user data.


Remark
  • User Type of all exported data is [End User].

  1. Log in to MEAP Service → click [User Management].

The [User Management] page is displayed.

  1. Click [Export].

  1. Specify the necessary items → click [Start].

Details of each item are shown below.

[File Format]: Specify the file format for exporting.
• SDL Format Export the user data in the file format used for SDL and the Local Device Authentication of SSO-H. (File extension: "ldif").
• NetSpot Accountant 3.x Format Export the user data created in NetSpot Accountant 3.x Format. (File extension: "csv").
• NetSpot Accountant 4.x Format Export the user data created in NetSpot Accountant 4.x/iW Accounting Manager Format. (File extension: "csv").
<When Netspot Accountant Format Is Selected>
[Encoding]: Specify the character code for file exporting.
• Windows Latin-1 (CP1252) Export the file written in Windows Latin Format.
Windows Latin is a character code for European.
• Windows Japanese (CP932) Export the file written in Windows Japanese Format.
Windows Japanese is a character code for Japanese.


Registering/Editing User Data for Domain Authentication


Registering User Data

When the Domain Authentication System of SSO-H is being used, login authentication is performed by users that belong to the Active Directory server of the domain specified as the login destination. Contact the system manager to register/edit user data for Domain Authentication.


Remark
  • When using Domain Authentication, you must use the user logon name registered in the Active Directory server of the domain specified as the login destination. However, the internal processes of SSO-H use the pre-Windows 2000 user logon name.

Make sure to meet the following conditions when registering user information for Domain Authentication. If you do not meet these conditions when you register the information, you will become unable to perform authentication with Active Directory users.

  • The value before the '@' in the user logon name matches the value in the pre-Windows 2000 user logon name

  • The value after the '@' in the user logon name matches the domain name of the Active Directory to perform authentication with


Registering a Domain Authentication Administrator User

When Domain Authentication is being used, only a Domain Authentication administrator user can log in to the SSO-H Management Application.

Add a registered user to the 'Canon Peripheral Admins' group, or an arbitrary administrator group of Active Directory to make that user a Domain Authentication administrator user. Follow the procedure below to add the 'Canon Peripheral Admins' group.


Remark
  • Do not set the 'Canon Peripheral Admins' group as the primary group.


Adding a Group

  1. Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  1. Right-click the container and organizational unit you want to add.
  1. Select [New] → [Group] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

The [New Object - Group] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter the group name ('Canon Peripheral Admins') → click [OK].



Adding a User to the Canon Peripheral Admins Group

  1. Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  1. Right-click the user account you want to add to the 'Canon Peripheral Admins' group.
  1. Select [Add to a group] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.

The [Select Group] dialog box is displayed.

  1. Enter 'Canon Peripheral Admins' in the group selection dialog box → click [Check Names].

  1. Confirm that [Canon Peripheral Admins] is underlined → click [OK].



Changing a Local Device Authentication End User's Password

An end user for the Local Device Authentication can change their own password.
This increases the security of private information.


  1. Open your web browser.
  1. Enter the following URL in the address bar.

http://<IP address or host name of the machine>:8000/sso/

The [Log In] page is displayed.

  • If [Use HTTP] in [TCP/IP Settings] in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', enter <http://<IP address or host name of the machine>/sso/>.
  1. Enter the user name and password of a user registered as a user for the Local Device Authentication System of SSO-H → select [This Device] as the login destination → click [Log in].

You are logged in to the SSO-H Management Application.

  1. Click [User Management].

  1. Enter the new password in [New Password] and [Confirm].

  1. Click [OK].

  1. Click [Log Out].



File Formats for Local Device Authentication User Information Files

The following three file formats can be used for importing and exporting user information:

  • SDL format
  • NetSpot Accountant 3.x format
  • NetSpot Accountant 4.x format

Remark
  • It is recommended you use the SDL Format when exporting and importing user information with iW Accounting Manager (NetSpot Accountant).
  • Only the information for users that have a department ID assigned are exported with the NetSpot Accountant formats. If no users have department IDs assigned, a 0 byte file is exported.
  • If you use a NetSpot Accountant format, you may not be able to import users that are automatically registered.


SDL Format

The SDL format is the format used for local device authentication. This format adopts the LDIF file format, which sues the ldif file extension. LDIF (LDAP Data Interchange Format) is used for transferring directory information between LDAP directory servers, etc.

Each record in an LDIF file is separated by at least one empty line. A record comprises of multiple lines that do not include any empty lines. Each record contains an ID line (which can be omitted) and multiple entries. Each entry contains an attribute name and attribute value separated by a colon. If only blank spaces appear after the colon, that entry is ignored. However, if an entry is divided by a line break code and one space, that line break code and space are ignored. Characters after this are handled as if they are connected to the previous line, even if they are spaces. Either carriage return + line feed or line feed only can be used as the line break code. Line breaks are not allowed before the colon. Lines starting with # are ignored.

UTF-8 is used for character encoding.

Example:
dn: uid=J00001
userPassword: {sdl}1234567890abcdefghijklmn
canonUid: 1000001
canonPwd: 1010001
cn: SampleUser01
cn;lang-ja;phonetic:
mail: SampleUser.J00001@example.com
objectClass: top
objectClass: person

  • Input File Format

Attribute name Can be omitted? Default value used when omitted Item name in SSO-H Description
dn No - User Name "uid="login user name ("uid=" can be omitted). Must be from 1 to 32 characters. You cannot include spaces or the following symbols (\ / : * ? l < > [ ] ;, = + @ ").
userPassword Yes - Password (corresponding to the user name) When encrypted: the attribute value starts with "{sdl}". Use the encrypted value from the exported file.
When not encrypted: You can leave this blank or enter up to 32 characters.
canonUid Yes - Department ID Must be from 1 to 7 digits.
canonPwd Yes - Password (corresponding to the department ID) You can leave this blank or enter up to 7 digits.
cn Yes [null] Displayed As You can leave this blank or enter up to 32 characters.
cn;lang-ja;phonetic Yes [null] - -
mail Yes [null] E-mail Address You can leave this blank or enter up to 256 ASCII characters. The format of e-mail addresses is not checked.
objectClass Yes [null] "top" "top" (fixed)
objectClass No Not limited "person" "person" (fixed)
NOTE
1) The attribute names can be specified in any order. Unnecessary attribute names can be omitted.
2) User Type is not included in the input format. After the import is performed, edit it to "Administrator" as necessary.

  • Output File Format
Attribute name Corresponding user information on the [Register]/[Edit] screen of [User Management] Description
dn User Name The login user name.
userPassword Password (corresponding to the user name) The attribute value starts with "{sdl}" and the password is encrypted.
canonUid Department ID The department ID.
canonPwd Password (corresponding to the department ID) Not encrypted. If there are not enough digits, zeros are added to the start of the number.
cn Displayed As The display name.
cn;lang-ja;phonetic - -
mail E-mail Address The e-mail address.
objectClass - "top" (fixed)
objectClass - "person" (fixed)
NOTE
User Type is not output.


NetSpot Accountant 3.x Format

The NetSpot Accountant 3.x format is the file format for user information used in NetSpot Accountant 3.x. Windows Japanese (CP932) or Windows Latin-1 (CP1252) is used as the character code.


  • Input File Format
Item number Item name*1 Corresponding user information on the [Register]/[Edit] screen of [User Management]
1 Parent Department ID -
2 Account Type -
3 User ID User Name*2, Department ID
4 User Name Displayed As
5 Password Password
6 E-mail Address E-mail Address
7 Log In Name User Name*3
8 Domain Name -
9-10 Printing Usage Limit -
11 Card ID -

  • Output File Format
Item number Corresponding user information on the [Register]/[Edit] screen of [User Management] Item name*1 Description
1 - Parent Department ID Always [0]
2 - Account Type Always [1] (user)
3 Department ID User ID
4 Displayed As User Name
5 Password Password Always NULL
6 E-mail Address E-mail Address
7 User Name Log In Name
8 - Domain Name Always " "
9-10 - Printing Usage Limit Always NULL
NOTE
*1: The item name (The item name in NetSpot Accountant 3.0 or later. Item names are not displayed in the CSV file itself.)
*2: When [User ID] is set for [User Name Type] in [NetSpot AccountantFormat Is Selected] in [Import] in the SSO-H management application.
*3: When [Windows User Name] is set for [User Name Type] in [NetSpot AccountantFormat Is Selected] in [Import] in the SSO-H management application.


NetSpot Accountant 4.x Format

The NetSpot Accountant 4.x format is the file format for user information used in NetSpot Accountant 4.x or later and iW Accounting Manager 5.0 or later. Windows Japanese (CP932) or Windows Latin-1 (CP1252) is used as the character code.


  • Input File Format
Item number Item name*1 Corresponding user information on the [Register]/[Edit] screen of [User Management]
1 Parent Department ID -
2 Account Type -
3 User ID User Name*2, Department ID
4 User Name Displayed As
5 Password Password
6 E-mail Address E-mail Address
7 Log In Name User Name*3
8 Domain Name -
9-15 Printing Usage Limit -
16 Card ID -

  • Output File Format
Item number Corresponding user information on the [Register]/[Edit] screen of [User Management] Item name*1 Description
1 - Parent Department ID Always [0]
2 - Account Type Always [1] (user)
3 Department ID User ID
4 Displayed As User Name
5 Password Password Always NULL
6 E-mail Address E-mail Address
7 User Name Log In Name
8 - Domain Name Always " "
9-15 - Printing Usage Limit Always NULL
16 - Card ID Always "##########"
NOTE
*1: The item name (The item name in NetSpot Accountant 4.0 or later or iW Accounting Manager 5.0 or later. Item names are not displayed in the CSV file itself.)
*2: When [User ID] is set for [User Name Type] in [NetSpot AccountantFormat Is Selected] in [Import] in the SSO-H management application.
*3: When [Windows User Name] is set for [User Name Type] in [NetSpot AccountantFormat Is Selected] in [Import] in the SSO-H management application.


List of Error Messages

This section explains the various messages that appear on the display, along with possible causes and remedies.

If the machine displays an error message, follow the instructions on the display.

The following is a list of error messages, along with their possible causes and remedies.



Login Page

Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been successfully performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again.

You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with administrator rights.

The Service Management Service of the specified URL has not been started. Specify the correct URL.

Cannot use SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) because Default Authentication is selected as the login service.

Error: <Error Details>

Cannot login because another user is logged in or logout operations have not been successfully performed. Please wait a moment and then try this operation again.

Cause 1

Multiple browsers cannot log in using SMS at the same time. Therefore if another user has already logged in, you cannot log in even if you enter the correct password.

Remedy

Log out with the browser which is already logged in.

Cause 2

You cannot log in for a while if a user has closed their browser without pressing [Logout] to log out.

Remedy

Try to log in again after waiting for the time out.

You do not have permissions to use Service Management Service. Log in with administrator rights.

Cause

Only a user with administrator rights can log in to SMS with their user name and password. The user trying to log in cannot do so because they do not have administrator rights.

Remedy

Log in again with the user name and password of a user with administrator rights.

The Service Management Service of the specified URL has not been started. Specify the correct URL.

Cause

The login method you tried to use (Password Authentication or Remote Login Service Authentication) is not set to 'Started'.

Remedy

Log in to SMS using the login method which has been set to 'Started'. (Use another login method.)

Cannot use SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication) because Default Authentication is selected as the login service.

Cause

If the login service is set as Default Authentication, you cannot use the SMS Installer Service (Remote Login Service Authentication).

Remedy

Log in with the SMS password to use SMS.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures for the error are still not clear from <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Application List Page

Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.

A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a license.

Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>

Error: <Error Details>

Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.

Cause

The application cannot be started because it includes an applet, and the number of applets that can be started on the system would exceed the limit (nine applets) if the application was started.

Remedy

Stop an application running on the system which includes an applet, in order to reduce the number of applets running on the system, and then restart the application.

A license is needed to start this application. Try to start it again after installing a license.

Cause

A license file is necessary to start the application (the license file has not been installed).

Remedy

Install the license file, and then restart the application.

Cannot start this application because system resources (memory, threads, sockets, file descriptors, disk space, or screen size) required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>

Cause

The application cannot be started because system resources required to start the application are not able to be reserved.

Remedy

Stop another application, and then restart this application. It may be able to start this time.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures for the error are still not clear from <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Install Page

The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information>

The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information>

Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again.

The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.

The specified license is already installed.

To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file.

The specified file is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced System Application] page.

The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.

The specified application does not support this device.

The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the file.

Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall the specified application, and then try to install the application again.

Cannot install this application because hard disk space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again.

Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.

The specified application cannot be installed on this device.

This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service representative after checking the application version.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Error: <Error Details>

The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

Cause

The application file does not exist in the specified path, or the file path is incorrect.

Remedy

Specify the file path correctly.

The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

Cause

The license file does not exist in the specified path, or the file path is incorrect.

Remedy

Specify the file path correctly.

The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cause

The contents of the file specified as an application file are incorrect, or information is missing.

Remedy

This application file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cause

The contents of the file specified as a license file are incorrect, or information is missing.

Remedy

This license file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information>

Cause

The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application file.

Remedy

Check the file. If there are no problems, contact your local authorized Canon dealer to see if there is any <Missing information>.

The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information>

Cause 1

<Inaccurate information> in the application file cannot be recognized as correct information.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cause 2

If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the MEAP specifications of the application and of the machine do not match.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again.

Cause

The application cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the specified application.

Remedy

Specify a license file which corresponds to the application file.

The number of applications that can be installed has exceeded the limit. Try to install this application after uninstalling other applications.

Cause

You can install up to 19 applications. You are trying to install more applications than this number.

Remedy

You can install the new application by first uninstalling other applications (apart from system applications).

The specified license is already installed.

Cause

A license file which is already installed cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already been installed.

Remedy

The specified license file cannot be installed. Specify another license file.

To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file.

Cause

You cannot install the application unless you specify a corresponding license file with the application.

Remedy

When specifying an application to install, also specify a corresponding license file.

The specified file is a system application. Install the application from the [Enhanced System Application] page.

Cause

The specified file is a system application. You cannot install it from this [Install] page.

Remedy

Install the application from the [Enhanced Sys. App] page.

The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.

Cause

In the license file, there is serial number information of machines in which the license file can be installed. The application you have specified cannot be installed, because your machine's serial number is not found in the serial number information in this license file.

Remedy

Specify a license file whose serial number information includes the serial number of your machine.

The specified application does not support this device.

Cause

The application file can only be installed in certain machine models. It cannot be installed in this machine.

Remedy

Specify an application which supports the machine.

The specified file is an update file. Stop the application that you want update and then install the file.

Cause

The specified application file is a file for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.

Remedy

Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.

Cannot install the application because the license requirement is different. Uninstall the specified application, and then try to install the application again.

Cause

You have tried to upgrade an application which is already installed using a version of the same application with different license requirements.

Remedy

Try upgrading after uninstalling the application you are trying to upgrade.

Cannot install this application because hard disk space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again.

Cause

The application cannot be installed because there is not enough space left on the hard disk.

Remedy

Uninstall unnecessary applications to free up hard disk space.

Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.

Cause

The cancel button was pressed when the installation could not be canceled. Installation has successfully been completed.

Remedy

Disable the license file and download it from the [License Management] page.

The specified application cannot be installed on this device.

Cause

Could not install the specified application because the machine's memory is full.

Remedy

Try installing again after expanding the machine's memory. For more information on expanding the machine's memory, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

This application does not support the MEAP version of the device. Contact your service representative after checking the application version.

Cause

If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the MEAP Specifications of the application and of the machine do not match.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Cause

The specified application is already uninstalled.

Remedy

Reinstall the application as necessary.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures for the error are still not clear from <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Authentication Information Setting Page

Settings are incorrect.

  • Check to see if the password is incorrect.
  • Enter Dept. ID within 7 digits.
  • Check to see if the Department. ID is registered with the device.

Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Settings are incorrect.

  • Check to see if the password is incorrect.
  • Enter Dept. ID within 7 digits.
  • Check to see if the Department. ID is registered with the device.
Cause

Authentication information cannot be set because the entered Dept. ID does not exist, or the password is incorrect.

Remedy

Enter the correct Dept. ID and password registered for the machine.

Could not set authentication information because an error occurred.

Cause

The authentication number could not be set because an error has occurred for some reason.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Cause

The specified application is already uninstalled.

Remedy

Reinstall the application as necessary.



License Management Page

The specified file does not exist or the path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cannot install this license because the specified license does not correspond to this application. Try to specify a path for the license file again.

The specified license is already installed.

The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.

Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.

Cannot disable the license file because this application has been started. Disable the license file after stopping the application.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Error: <Error Details>

The specified file does not exist or the path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

Cause

The specified file does not exist, or the file path is incorrect.

Remedy

Specify the file path correctly.

The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cause 1

The contents of the file are incorrect.

Cause 2

Information is missing.

Remedy

This license file cannot be installed. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cannot install this license because the specified license does not correspond to this application. Try to specify a path for the license file again.

Cause

The license cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the application.

Remedy1

Specify a license file which corresponds to the application.

Remedy2

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The specified license is already installed.

Cause

A license file which is already installed cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already been installed.

Remedy

The specified license file cannot be installed. Specify another license file.

The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.

Cause

In the license file, there is serial number information of machines in which the license file can be installed. The application you have specified cannot be installed, because your machine's serial number is not found in the serial number information in this license file.

Remedy

Specify a license file whose serial number information includes the serial number of your machine.

Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.

Cause

The cancel button was pressed when installation could not be canceled. Installation has successfully been completed.

Remedy

Disable the license file and download it from the [License Management] page.

Cannot disable the license file because this application has been started. Disable the license file after stopping the application.

Cause

The license file cannot be disabled because the application is not stopped. The application corresponding to a license file must be stopped when disabling the license file.

Remedy

Stop the application corresponding to the license file, and then retry to disable the license file.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Cause

The specified application is already uninstalled.

Remedy

Reinstall the application as necessary.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures against the error are still not clear from the <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Panel Display Page

The following applets are multi-selected. Applets to display in a button cannot be duplicated. <Applet Name - Application ID>

Cannot set the order because there are buttons with applets to display that are not specified.

Set the Order in which to Display Applet Names on the Panel. The following applets are not selected. All applets must be selected. <Applet Name - Application ID>

Error: <Error Details>

The following applets are multi-selected. Applets to display in a button cannot be duplicated. <Applet Name - Application ID>

Cause

The applet display order could not be set because multiple applets of the same name are selected.

Remedy

Do not select multiple applets of the same name.

Cannot set the order because there are buttons with applets to display that are not specified.

Cause

The applet display order could not be set because there are applets which are not selected.

Remedy

Make sure to select all of the applets from the drop-down list to complete the list. However, do not select multiple applets of the same name.

Set the Order in which to Display Applet Names on the Panel. The following applets are not selected. All applets must be selected. <Applet Name - Application ID>

Cause

The applet display order could not be set because there are applets which are not selected.

Remedy

Specify the display order of the applets displayed in the bottom of the error message.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures for the error are still not clear from <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Enhanced System Application Page

Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.

Cannot start this application because system resources required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>

The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again.

The specified file is not system application. Check the file.

The specified license is already installed.

To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file.

The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information>

The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information>

The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.

The specified application does not support this device.

The specified file is an update file. Stop the system application that you want to update and then install the file.

The specified file is an update file for a login service that is currently being set. Select another login service, click [Set], restart the device, and the install this file.

Cannot install this application because hard disk space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again.

Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Error: <Error Details>

Cannot start this application because the number of bootable applets has exceeded the limit. Start this application after stopping other applications.

Cause

The application cannot be started because it includes an applet, and the number of applets that can be started on the system would exceed the limit (nine applets) if the application was started.

Remedy

Stop an application running on the system which includes an applet, in order to reduce the number of applets running on the system, and then restart the application.

Cannot start this application because system resources required to start the application may not be available. <Resources>

Cause

The application cannot be started because system resources required to start the application may not be able to be reserved.
NOTE: The resources which can not be reserved may be one of the following:

  • Memory
  • Thread
  • Socket
  • File descriptor
Remedy

Stop another application, and then try restarting this application. It may be able to start this time.

The file for the application to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

Cause

The application file does not exist in the specified path, or the file path is incorrect.

Remedy

Specify the file path correctly.

The file for the license to install does not exist or the file path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

Cause

The license file does not exist in the specified path, or the file path is incorrect.

Remedy

Specify the file path correctly.

The contents of the file for the application to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cause

The contents of the file specified as an application file are incorrect, or information is missing.

Remedy

This application file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The contents of the file for the license to install are incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cause

The contents of the file specified as a license file are incorrect, or information is missing.

Remedy

This license file cannot be installed. Check the file. If there are no problems, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cannot install this license because the specified application and license do not correspond. Try to specify a path for the license file again.

Cause

The application cannot be installed because the specified license file does not correspond to the specified application.

Remedy

Specify a license file which corresponds to the application file.

The specified file is not system application. Check the file.

Cause

The specified file is not a system application. This application cannot be installed from this [Enhanced Sys. App] page.

Remedy

Install from the [Install] page.

The specified license is already installed.

Cause

A license file which is already installed cannot be installed again. The specified license file has already been installed.

Remedy

The specified license file cannot be installed. Specify another license file.

To install the specified application, a license file must be installed at the same time. Specify a license file.

Cause

You cannot install the application unless you specify a corresponding license file with the application.

Remedy

When specifying an application to install, also specify a corresponding license file.

The following information in the specified application is incorrect. Check the file. <Inaccurate information>

Cause 1

<Inaccurate information> in the application file cannot be recognized as correct information.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

Cause 2

If the <Inaccurate information> is the MEAP Specifications, the MEAP Specifications of the application and of the machine do not match.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The following information is missing in file for the specified application. Check the file. <Missing information>

Cause

The application cannot be installed because required information is not included in the application file.

Remedy

Check the file. If there are no problems, contact your local authorized Canon dealer to see if there is any <Missing information>.

The specified license does not match this device. Specify an installable license.

Cause

In the license file, there is serial number information of machines in which the license file can be installed. The application you have specified cannot be installed, because your machine's serial number is not found in the serial number information in this license file.

Remedy

Specify a license file whose serial number information includes the serial number of your machine.

The specified application does not support this device.

Cause

The application file can only be installed in certain machine models. It cannot be installed in this machine.

Remedy

Specify an application which supports the machine.

The specified file is an update file. Stop the system application that you want to update and then install the file.

Cause

The specified application file is a file for updating an application which is already installed. It is necessary to stop the application which is to be updated before updating.

Remedy

Stop the application that you want to update, and then perform the update again.

The specified file is an update file for a login service that is currently being set. Select another login service, click [Set], restart the device, and the install this file.

Cause

Although the specified application file is an update file for the login service that is currently set, it cannot update a login service that has already started.

Remedy

To install the update file for the login service, start another login service, and then install the update file.

Cannot install this application because hard disk space has been exceeded. Uninstall other applications and then try to install it again.

Cause

The application cannot be installed because there is not enough space left on the hard disk.

Remedy

Uninstall unnecessary applications to free up hard disk space.

Could not cancel installation. Installation has been successfully completed.

Cause

The cancel button was pressed when installation could not be canceled. Installation has been successfully completed.

Remedy

Uninstall the application.

Cannot find the specified application. It may have been uninstalled by another user.

Cause

The specified application is already uninstalled.

Remedy

Reinstall the application as necessary.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures for the error are still not clear from <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.



Utility Page

The specified file does not exist or the path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

The contents of the specified file is incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

The specified license is already installed. Installed license file information cannot be displayed.

Error: <Error Details>

The old password is incorrect.

The new password is incorrect. Enter 8 or more characters for the password.

The new password and password to confirm do not match.

The specified file does not exist or the path is incorrect. Try to specify the path again.

Cause

The specified file does not exist, or the file path is incorrect.

Remedy

Specify the file path correctly.

The contents of the specified file is incorrect or information is missing. Check the file.

Cause 1

Contents of the file are incorrect. (A file other than the license file has been specified.)

Remedy

Check to see if the specified file is a license file.

Cause 2

File information is missing.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The specified license is already installed. Installed license file information cannot be displayed.

Cause

You cannot display the information of a license file which is already installed in a machine.

Remedy

Specify another license file.

Error: <Error Details>

Cause

An error has occurred for some reason. Refer to <Error Details> for details.

Remedy

If countermeasures for the error are still not clear from <Error Details>, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The old password is incorrect.

Cause

The password differs from the current password.

Remedy

Enter the current password correctly.

The new password is incorrect. Enter 8 or more characters for the password.

Cause

The new password is incorrect, or has characters that cannot be used for a password.

Remedy

Enter a new password (eight alphanumeric characters or more (a-z, A-Z, 0-9)).

The new password and password to confirm do not match.

Cause

The password cannot be changed because the new password and the password you entered for confirmation do not match.

Remedy

Enter the same password as the new password in the password confirmation field.



Troubleshooting

This section includes troubleshooting information for SSO-H.



List of Error Messages and Their Causes and Remedies

This section explains the various messages that may appear on the display, along with possible causes and remedies.


The authentication server is not found. Contact the system manager for details.

The authentication server is not running. Contact the system manager for details.

Could not log in. The timer settings of your computer and the authentication server may not be in sync, or the user name or password is incorrect.

A password is not set on the authentication server side. Contact system manager.

The account expiration date has passed. Contact system manager.

The password expiration date has passed. Contact system manager.

Login failed due to an authentication error in Dept. ID Management. Contact system manager.

The machine will not operate normally because Dept. ID Management is set to ON. Contact system manager.

Could not obtain log in information. Contact system manager.

The authentication server is not found. Contact the system manager for details.

Cause 1

The LAN cable is not connected.

Remedy 1

Connect the LAN cable.

Cause 2

The primary/secondary DNS server settings in the machine are incorrect or not specified.

Remedy 2

Confirm the DNS server settings of the machine, and specify the correct values.

Cause 3

The DNS server specified in the machine is not started, or the service has been stopped.

Remedy 3

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Confirm the DNS server specified on the machine, and start the server if it has not been started.
  • Start the "Services" management tool on the DNS server.
  • Confirm the status of the DNS Server. If 'Started' is not displayed under <Status>, right-click [DNS Server] → select [Start].
Cause 4

Domain name resolution could not be performed with the DNS server.

Remedy 4

Confirm the following:

  • Confirm that the host record exists on the DNS server.
  • Confirm that the forwarding settings are correct.

The authentication server is not running. Contact the system manager for details.

Cause 1

The LAN cable is not connected.

Remedy 1

Connect the LAN cable.

Cause 2

The Active Directory server is not started.

Remedy 2

Start the Active Directory server.

Cause 3

The KDC (Key Distribution Center) service of Active Directory is stopped.

Remedy 3

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Start the "Services" management tool on the Active Directory server.
  • Check whether the Active Directory server is operating normally.

Could not log in. The timer settings of your computer and the authentication server may not be in sync, or the user name or password is incorrect.

Cause

The difference between the time set on the machine and the Active Directory server is greater than the allowed difference.

Remedy

Adjust the times of the machine and the Active Directory server so that they are within the allowed time difference. For more information, see "Security."

A password is not set on the authentication server side. Contact system manager.

Cause

The DES (Data Encryption Standard) key required for Domain Authentication has not been generated for Active Directory.

Remedy

Follow the procedure below to change the settings.

  • Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  • Right-click the user that failed to be authenticated.
  • Select [Reset Password] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Enter a new password in the [Reset Password] dialog box → click [OK].

The account expiration date has passed. Contact system manager.

Cause 1

The expiration date of the authenticated user account has expired.

Remedy 1

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  • Right-click the user account that has expired.
  • Select [Properties] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Select the [Account] tab → confirm the values in [Expiration Date] in [Account Expires].
  • If the expiration date has passed, extend the expiration date, or set it to 'None'.
Cause 2

The account of the authenticated user is disabled.

Remedy 2

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  • Right-click the user whose account is disabled.
  • Select [Properties] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Select the [Account] tab → confirm the [Disable Account] setting in [Account Options].
  • If [Disable Account] is selected, deselect it → click [OK].

The password expiration date has passed. Contact system manager.

Cause 1

The expiration date of the password for the authenticated user account has expired.

Remedy 1

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  • Right-click the user whose password expired.
  • Select [Reset Password] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Enter a new password in the [Reset Password] dialog box → click [OK].
Cause 2

The account of the authenticated user is set to 'Require Change of Password Next Login'.

Remedy 2

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  • Right-click the user that failed to be authenticated.
  • Select [Properties] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Select the [Account] tab → confirm the [Require Change of Password Next Login] setting in [Account Options].
  • If [Require Change of Password Next Login] is selected, deselect it → click [OK].

Login failed due to an authentication error in Dept. ID Management. Contact system manager.

The machine will not operate normally because Dept. ID Management is set to ON. Contact system manager.

Cause

The Department ID Management function of the machine is set to 'On'.

Remedy

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Change the current login service to a login application other than SSO-H.
  • Set Department ID Management to 'Off'. For information on setting Department ID Management to 'Off', see "Security."
  • Turn the main power of the machine to OFF, wait 10 seconds, and then turn the power back ON. For more information on turning ON/OFF the main power of the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."

Could not obtain log in information. Contact system manager.

Cause

The port number specified in the '_ldap' SRV record (part of the DNS information of the domain specified as the login destination) is incorrect.

Remedy

Follow the procedure below to confirm the settings.

  • Start the DNS server management tool, "DNS."
  • Double-click [Forward Lookup Zones] → [<domain specified as the login destination>] → [_tcp], and then right-click the '_ldap' SRV record.
  • Select [Properties] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Select the [Service Location (SRV)] tab → confirm the value in [Port Number].
  • If the port number is different from the port number of the LDAP service, enter the correct port number for the LDAP service → click [OK].


Trouble That May Occur When Using the SSO-H Management Application

This section explains the various problems that may occur when using the SSO-H Management Application, along with possible causes and remedies.


Symptom: [Domain Authentication from Client PC] is not displayed on the Settings page.

Symptom: [Domain Authentication from Client PC] is not displayed on the Settings page.

Cause

The machine operating SSO-H does not support SSL communication.

Remedy

[Domain Authentication from Client PC] is only displayed when SSO-H is installed on a machine that supports SSL communication.



Trouble That May Occur When the Windows Server 2003 SP1 Firewall Is Set

This section explains the various problems that may occur when a firewall is set, along with possible causes and remedies.


Symptom: Service information fails to be retrieved when automatically retrieving domain information.

Symptom: Domain Authentication has failed. (The <Authentication server not operating.> error message is displayed.)

Symptom: User authentication has failed.

Symptom: Service information fails to be retrieved when automatically retrieving domain information.

Cause

Communication with the DNS server is blocked due to firewall settings.

Remedy

Unblock port 53 (the default port) for the UDP protocol and TCP protocol.
The DNS server normally uses port 53 to perform communications with the UDP protocol, but as data over a certain size may be processed using the TCP protocol, unblock port 53 for both the TCP protocol and UDP protocol.

Symptom: Domain Authentication has failed. (The <Authentication server not operating.> error message is displayed.)

Cause

Domain Authentication is blocked due to firewall settings.

Remedy

Unblock port 88 (the default port) for the UDP protocol and TCP protocol.
Domain Authentication normally uses port 88 to perform communications with the UDP protocol, but as data over a certain size may be processed using the TCP protocol, unblock port 88 for both the TCP protocol and UDP protocol.

Symptom: User authentication has failed.

Cause

Communication for LDAP searches is blocked due to the firewall settings.

Remedy

Unblock port 389 (the default port) for the TCP protocol.
User data is retrieved from Active Directory using LDAP searches. By default, LDAP searches are performed using the TCP protocol with port 389. Therefore, unblock port 389 for the TCP protocol. (If the port number used for the TCP protocol has been changed, unblock the port number used by the TCP protocol.)



Other Trouble

This section explains the various other problems that can occur, along with possible causes and remedies.


Symptom: Cannot log in using Domain Authentication with a user created before Active Directory was installed.

Symptom: It takes time for the application to start.

Symptom: It takes time to determine if a login is successful.

Symptom: Cannot log in using Domain Authentication with a user created before Active Directory was installed.

Cause

Accounts for users that were created before Active Directory was installed are automatically generated by placing them in the 'Users' folder after installing Active Directory. However, the accounts that are generated do not manage the DES (Data Encryption Standard) keys for Domain Authentication required by SSO-H. Also, as a user logon name is not set, the Domain Authentication System of SSO-H cannot be used for authentication because user data cannot be retrieved, even if a DES key is generated.

Remedy

Follow the procedure below to change the settings.

  • Start the Active Directory management tool, "Active Directory Users and Computers."
  • Right-click the user that failed to be authenticated.
  • Select [Properties] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Select the [Account] tab → enter a name in [User Logon Name] → click [OK].
  • Right-click the user name you changed.
  • Select [Reset Password] from the pop-up menu that is displayed.
  • Enter a new password in the [Reset Password] dialog box → click [OK].

Symptom: It takes time for the application to start.

Cause 1

A host whose name cannot be resolved is set in the SRV record retrieved with automatic domain retrieval.

Remedy 1

Perform the following on the DNS server to enable name resolution for the specified host.

  • Specify forwarding settings.
  • Add an A record.
  • Specify secondary settings.
Cause 2

The DNS server set cannot be found, or communication on is not possible.

Remedy 2

Confirm the network settings to see that the machine can communicate with the DNS server set on the machine, and adjust them if it cannot. Confirm things such as the following, and make the necessary adjustments:

  • Whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.
  • Whether the IP address of the DNS server set on the machine is correct.
  • Whether the specified DNS server exists.
  • Whether the specified DNS server is operating.
  • Whether the router settings are correct.
Cause 3

A network delay time is set.

Remedy 3

Adjust the network delay time.

Symptom: It takes time to determine if a login is successful.

Cause 1

Name resolution cannot be performed for the domain name specified as the login destination.

Remedy 1

Confirm the network settings to see that name resolution can be performed for the domain name specified as the login destination, and adjust them if it cannot. Confirm things such as the following, and make the necessary adjustments:

  • Whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.
  • Whether the IP address of the DNS server set on the machine is correct.
  • Whether the specified DNS server exists.
  • Whether the specified DNS server is operating.
  • Whether the router settings are correct.
Cause 2

The DNS server set cannot be found, or communication on is not possible.

Remedy 2

Confirm the network settings to see that the machine can communicate with the DNS server set on the machine, and adjust them if it cannot. Confirm things such as the following, and make the necessary adjustments:

  • Whether the LAN cable is connected correctly.
  • Whether the IP address of the DNS server set on the machine is correct.
  • Whether the specified DNS server exists.
  • Whether the specified DNS server is operating.
  • Whether the router settings are correct.
Cause 3

Multiple domain controllers exist for managing the specified domain. If multiple domain controllers exist for managing the specified domain when using SSO-H, it may take some time to perform authentication, as each domain controller called until one answers.

Remedy 3

Confirm the domain controllers, and adjust them, if necessary.



Security

This category describes setup instructions for the system manager.



Specifying the System Manager Settings

You can set an ID and a password for the System Manager. Once the System Manager ID/ password is set, restrictions can be placed on storing or changing the System Settings.


Remark
  • Attaching the optional Card Reader-C1 erases the System Manager ID and System Password that have been stored.
  • Depending on the login service being used, if Department ID Management is set to 'Off' and a System Manager ID or password is not specified, all users of the machine may be considered as the Administrator even without authentication.
  • If you are performing user authentication using the SSO-H login service, the System Settings mode is restricted in the following way:
  • Users registered as a general user cannot change the System Settings, regardless of the System Manager ID setting.
  • Users registered as an Administrator can change the System Settings by entering the correct System Manager ID and System Password or registering them in their user data in advance.
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, the numbers 1 to 1,000 cannot be used for the System Manager ID. Numbers 1 to 1,000 are reserved for control cards by default.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the System Manager ID and System Password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
    - Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [System Manager Settings].
  1. Specify the desired settings → press [OK].

[System Manager ID]:

Press [System Manager ID] → enter a number (up to seven digits) using - (numeric keys).
You must set a System Manager ID in order to manage the operations of the machine.

[System Password]: Press [System Password] → [Password] → enter a number (up to seven digits) → press [Confirm] → enter same number to confirm the password → press [OK].
You cannot store a System Manager ID or System Password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.
[System Manager]: Press [System Manager] → enter the System Manager's name → press [OK].
[E-mail Address]: Press [E-mail Address] → enter the System Manager's e-mail address → press [OK].
[Contact Information]: Press [Contact Information] → enter the contact information for the System Manager → press [OK].
[Comment]: Press [Comment] → enter any comment for the System Manager → press [OK].
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number or character, press (Clear) to clear your entry.
  • If Asterisks for Entering Access No./Passwords in Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', passwords you enter are not displayed as asterisks (********). (See "Setting the Display Method When Entering a Password.")


Department ID Management

You can register a Department ID and password for each department, and manage the machine by limiting its use to only those who enter the correct Department ID and password. This is called Department ID Management. Department IDs and passwords for up to 1,000 departments can be registered. Use Department ID Management to keep track of the copy, scan, and print totals for each department.

With Department ID Management, the following settings can be specified:

  • Turn Department ID Management 'On' or 'Off'.
  • Register the Department ID and password.
  • Set page limits for scans, prints, and copies.
  • Set whether to use Department ID Management for the Mail Box, Send, Fax, and Network Scan functions. If the Copy function is specified, it is automatically restricted when Department ID Management is set.
  • Set up copy, scan, and print restrictions.

Remark
  • Optional iW Accounting Manager software is necessary to use the Domain Authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing domain authentication with the 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' system) and Department ID Management simultaneously. If iW Accounting Manager is not installed, and SSO-H is set as the login service, make sure that Department ID Management is set to 'Off'. Otherwise, you will not be able to log on.
  • If you are using SSO-H and set Department ID Management to 'On', you may not be able to log on. In this case, change the login service to Default Authentication, and then set Department ID Management to 'Off'. For instructions on setting a login service, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, and Default Authentication is set as the login service, Department ID Management is automatically activated. (See "Optional Equipment.")
  • If SSO-H is set as the login service, Department ID Management is performed on the Department ID that shares the same user name and password as the one registered for MEAP User Authentication.
  • The user information registered for the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H, and the registered Department ID and password set for Department ID Management must match. If the registered Department ID and password have been changed because information was updated or changed by the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, make sure that you change/update the user information registered for the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H accordingly. For instructions on registering SSO-H user information, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • If SSO-H is set as the login service, the Limit Functions mode will not be available.
  • The maximum number of digits that you can store for the Department ID and password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits for either setting, the machine stores them with leading zeros.
    - Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is stored.
  • Other than using Department ID Management, this machine enables you to manage user information using SSO-H.


Registering the Department ID, Password, and Page Limit

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [On] → [Register Dept. ID/Password].

If you do not want to store a Department ID, password, or page limit restriction, proceed to step 10.

  1. Press [Register].

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter the Department ID and password.

  • Press [Dept. ID] → enter the Department ID.
  • Press [Password] → enter the desired password.
  • Press [Confirm] → enter the same number to confirm the password → press [OK].

You cannot register a Department ID or password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the entire number → enter the
    correct number.
  • If you do not want to set a password, you can use the machine by entering only the Department ID.
  1. Press [Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits].
  1. Set the page limits.
  • Press [On] under the desired function(s).

If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under the desired function's name.

  • <Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Copy Limit> and <Print Limit>.
  • Press [] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) → enter the page limit restriction using - (numeric keys).
  • The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a document either from memory or directly to the recipient.
  • The machine stops scanning if a scan limit is reached while the machine is scanning originals that are being fed from the optional feeder. (Those originals that were scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number → enter the correct number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
  • The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
  • Press [OK] → [OK].

  1. If you would like to limit users to certain functions of the machine, press [Limit Functions].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] next to the functions (other than the Copy function) you want to limit using Department ID Management → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Department ID Management is set for the selected function(s).
[Off]: Department ID Management is set only for copying and printing operations from computers.

[Send] appears if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional FAX board is installed, or if only the optional Universal Send Kit is activated. If only the optional FAX board is installed, [Fax] appears.

  1. Press [Done].
  1. Press [OK].
  • If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.


Changing the Password and Page Limit

You can change the password and page limit settings that you have registered.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [On] → [Register Dept. ID/Password].
  1. Press [] or [] to display the department whose password you want
    to change → select the department → press [Edit].

  • Press and hold down [] or [] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
  1. Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Password]
  • Press [Password] → enter the desired password using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [Confirm] → enter the same number to confirm the password using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.
Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear the password → enter the
    correct password.
  • You cannot change the Department ID.
  1. If you want to change or set a page limit restriction, press [Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits].
  1. Change the page limit restriction, if necessary.
  • Press [On] under the desired function(s).
  • Press [] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) → enter the page limit restriction using - (numeric keys).
  • Press [OK] → [OK].

If you do not want to set a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under the desired function's name.

  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number → enter the correct number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once a page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
  • The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  • If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.


Erasing the Department ID and Password

You can erase the Department ID and password that you have registered.


Remark
  • If Department ID Management is activated through the optional Card Reader-C1, you cannot delete the Department ID.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [On] → [Register Dept. ID/Password].
  1. Press [] or [] to display the Department ID that you want to erase →select the Department ID → press [Erase].

  • Press and hold down [] or [] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  • If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.


Checking and Printing Counter Information

You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [On] → [Page Totals].

  1. Check or print the page total count.

The page totals that belong to print jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID. These prints are referred to as prints with unknown IDs.

The page totals that belong to scan jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the number of pages that have been scanned from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID. These scanned pages from computers are referred to as network scans with unknown IDs.


  • Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID → view the desired page totals.
  • Press and hold down [] or [] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are
    registered.

  • Press [Print List].
  • Press [Yes].
  • To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
  • To close the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing the Page Count List, press [Done].
  • The counter information can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  • If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.


Clearing Page Totals

You can clear the page totals for all departments or for specific departments.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [On] → [Page Totals].

If necessary, see the screen shot is step 2 of "Checking and Printing Counter Information."

  1. Press [Clear All Totals].

To clear one page total at a time by department, press [] or [] to display the desired department → select the department → press [Clear].

  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done] → [OK].
  • If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.


Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown Ids

You can specify whether to accept or reject print and network scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.


Remark
  • <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is displayed only if the optional printer function is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [On].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs

[On]: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID

Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs

[On]: The machine accepts network scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not accept network scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
  • If you selected [On] in step 2, pressing [OK] activates Department ID Management.


Remote UI

You can set whether to enable the Remote UI (User Interface) to operate the machine and change settings.


Remark
  • For more information on the Remote UI, see "Remote UI."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Remote UI].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Settings can be specified and the machine can be operated through the Remote UI.
[Off]: Settings cannot be specified and the machine cannot be operated through the Remote UI.

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL> → press [OK].

Use SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

[On]: SSL is used to communicate.
[Off]: SSL is not used to communicate.

  • Press [OK].
  • Before setting <Use SSL> to 'On', it is necessary to set a default key in Network Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
  • The Remote UI is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned
    OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."
  • Any changes made to <Use SSL> are also applied to <Use SSL> in <Use HTTP> in MEAP Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).


Device Information Settings

Device Information Settings enables you to set a name for the machine, and enter information regarding its location.


Remark
  • For more information on the Remote UI, see "Remote UI."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Settings].
  1. Enter the name and location of the machine.
  • Press [Device Name] → enter the name of the machine → press [OK].
  • Press [Location] → enter the place where the machine is located → press [OK].
  • Press [OK].



Clearing the Message Board

The Message Board is a function used by the System Manager to display messages for users on the touch panel display. Message board settings are made from the Remote UI, but can be cleared from the main unit.


Remark
  • For instructions on creating messages using the Remote UI, see "Remote UI."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Clear Message Board].
  1. Press [Yes].


Auto Online/Offline

To use the optional Network Scan function, the machine must be connected to a network, and must be separately switched online to the network. This section explains how to switch the machine online and offline to use the Network Scan function.


Remark
  • For more information on the Network Scan function, see "Scanner Driver."


Auto Online

If Auto Online is set to 'On', the machine automatically goes online when you press [Scan] on the Basic Features screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Auto Online/Offline] → [Auto Online].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Auto Offline

If the machine is connected to a network that is online, scanning is not possible with the Copy or Mail Box function. By setting Auto Offline to 'On', the machine automatically goes offline when the Auto Clear mode initiates.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Auto Online/Offline] → [Auto Offline].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If Auto Offline is set to 'On', the machine automatically goes offline once the Auto Clear mode
    initiates. If the Auto Clear mode is not set (the Auto Clear Time is set to '0'), the machine
    automatically goes offline after approximately two minutes. (See "Additional Functions.")


Current Date and Time

Setting the current date and time is very important. The current date and time settings are used as standard timer settings for functions that require them.

  • GMT:
The time at the Greenwich Observatory in England is called GMT (Greenwich Mean Time).
  • Time Zone:
The standard time zones of the world are expressed globally in terms of the difference in hours (up to 12 hours) from GMT (0 hours). A time zone is a region throughout which this time difference is the same.
  • Daylight Saving Time:
In some countries, time is advanced throughout the summer season. The period in which this is applied is called "Daylight Saving Time."

Remark
  • You can also specify to automatically synchronize the date and time with a server on the network from the Additional Functions screen. (See "Network.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Date & Time Settings].
  1. Enter the current date (day, month, year) and time using - (numeric keys).

Enter the month and the day using four digits (including zeros).

Enter all four digits of the year, and the time in 24-hour notation, as four digits (including zeros) without a space.

Examples:

6 May →0605
7:05 a.m. →0705
11:18 p.m. →2318
  • If you make a mistake when entering values, press (Additional Functions) → enter the values again, starting with the month.

  • Press the Time Zone drop-down list → select the time zone in which the machine is located.

  • Press [On] → [Start Date].
  • Select the month and day from the Month and Day drop-down lists, respectively.
  • Press [-] or [+] to enter the time of day you want Daylight Saving Time to take effect → press [OK].
  • Press [End Date] → select the month, day, and time at which Daylight Saving Time ends → press [OK].
  • If you set Daylight Saving Time, the machine automatically sets the standard time of the machine one hour forward at the specified date and time.

  1. Press [OK].


License Registration

You must register a license key to enable optional modes and functions.

Each optional mode and function requires their own license key to be registered. There is no limit to the number of license keys that can be registered in the machine.


Remark
  • Some optional modes and functions require optional equipment to be installed in addition to obtaining and registering a license key. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."
  • A license key can be obtained via a Web browser to access the license management system. Access the system by entering the following URL: http://www.canon.com/lms/license/. For more information on obtaining the license key, see the License Access Number Certificate and the License Registration Booklet included with the various optional kits.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [License Registration].
  1. Enter the license key using - (numeric keys) → press [Start].

Details of each item are shown below.

[][]: Press to move the cursor to the desired position.
[Backspace]: Press to delete the last number entered.

If the following screen is displayed, → press [OK] enter the correct license key.

If the following screen is displayed, the required optional equipment needed for license registration has not been installed. Press [OK] → install the required optional equipment or make sure that the required optional equipment is installed properly → try registering the license key again.

  1. Press [OK].


Copy Set Numbering Options

You can specify the detailed settings of the Copy Set Numbering mode for both the Copying and
Mail Box functions. For instructions on using the Copy Set Numbering mode, see "Copy," and "Mail Box."


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Copy Set Numbering Option Settings].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for <Copy Set Num. Op>.

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Full Surface] and [Numbers in 5 Locations] are grayed out, and cannot be selected on the Orientation and Position Settings screen when you set the Copy Set Numbering mode. The font sizes of the copy set numbers are as follows: [Small]: 10.5 point, [Medium]: 12 point, [Large]: 14 point
[Off]: [Full Surface] and [Numbers in 5 Locations] can be selected on the Orientation and Position Settings screen when you set the Copy Set Numbering mode. The font sizes of the copy set numbers are as follows: [Small]: 12 point, [Medium]: 24 point, [Large]: 36 point

  • Select [On] or [Off] for each of the items → press [Next].

ID/User Name

[On]: The Department ID is printed. If you are using a login service other than Department ID Management, the user name is printed instead.
[Off]: Only the user name is printed.

Date

[On]: The date is printed.
[Off]: The date is not printed.

Characters

[On]: User-defined text is printed.
[Off]: User-defined text is not printed.
  • If you select [On] for <Date>, select the date format → press [Next].

If you select [Off] for <Date>, proceed to the next step.

  • If you select [On] for <Characters>, press [Enter] → enter the text to print → press [OK] → [Next].

If you select [Off] for <Characters>, proceed to the next step.

If you have registered characters in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you can select the characters from the list.

  • Select the way you would like to align the selected or entered characters on the page → press [OK].

  • Press [OK].


Setting System Monitor Screen Restrictions

You can set restrictions relating to the System Monitor screen.



Restricting Access to the System Monitor Screen

If you are using a login service, you can restrict access to the System Monitor screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [System Monitor Screen Restriction] → [Display Status Before Authentication].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

If the Display Status Before Authentication mode is set to 'Off':

: Displayed -: Not Displayed
Department ID Management or Log In Service, such as SSO-H The System Monitor Screen
Print, Copy, Send, Fax, and Receive Status Screens Device Status Screen
Before Logging In -
After Logging In
  • Even if you set the Display Status Before Authentication mode to 'Off', access to the System Monitor screen is only restricted if a login service is set.


Setting to Allow Secured Printing from the System Monitor Screen

You can set whether to allow secured printing from the System Monitor screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [System Monitor Screen Restriction] → [Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Setting to Display Job Logs from the System Monitor Screen

You can set whether to display job logs from the System Monitor screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [System Monitor Screen Restriction] → [Job Log Display].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Job logs are displayed.
[Off]: Job logs are not displayed.

If [Off] is selected, the following items are not displayed/cannot be selected.

- On the System Monitor screen: [Details] and [Print List] on the Receive screen [Log] on the Copy, Send, Fax, and Print screens
- On the Print Job screen: [Log]

  • Press [OK].

  • Select [Permit] or [Do Not Allow] for <Obtain Job Log From Management Software> → press [OK].

Obtain Job Log From Management Software

[Permit]: Permits collection of job logs using management software.
[Do Not Allow]: Does not permit collection of job logs using management software.


MEAP Settings

You can print information about installed MEAP applications.



Use HTTP Server

Set Use HTTP to 'On' to access this machine from a Web browser, and utilize the installed MEAP applications.


Remark
  • To manage user information for the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H, set USE HTTP to 'On'.
  • To change the SSO-H user authentication system to Domain Authentication, Domain Authentication +Local Device Authentication, or Local Device Authentication, set USE HTTP to 'On'.
  • To use the Remote UI, set USE HTTP to 'On'.
  • Set Use HTTP to 'On' if HTTP is required for MEAP functions and MEAP applications. To use HTTP for functions other than MEAP (e.g., the Remote UI), set Use HTTP in Network Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On'. (See "Network.")
  • If you set Use HTTP in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'On', the port number for MEAP functions and MEAP applications is automatically set to '8000'.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [MEAP Settings] → [Use HTTP].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: An HTTP server is used.
[Off]: An HTTP server is not used.

  • Select [On] or [Off] for <Use SSL> → press [OK].

Use SSL (Secure Sockets Layer)

[On]: SSL is used to communicate.
[Off]: SSL is not used to communicate.

  • Press [OK].
  • Before setting <Use SSL> to 'On', it is necessary to set a default key in Network Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
  • The Use HTTP mode is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is
    turned OFF, and then back ON). For instruction on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."
  • Any changes made to <Use SSL> are also applied to <Use SSL> in Remote UI in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).


Printing Installed Application Information

You can print the MEAP application information, as well as certain system application information.


Remark
  • The information is printed as a report.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [MEAP Settings] → [Print System Information].
  1. Press [Yes].

Items printed for each application are as follows:

MEAP Specifications: Prints information regarding the MEAP function.
MEAP Contents: Prints the MEAP version.
Application Name: Prints the name of the application.
Application ID/System Application Name: Prints the system application's file name or the Application ID of a standard application.
Application Version: Prints the application's version number.
Status: Prints the status of the application.
- Installed: The application has been installed successfully.
- Active: The application is running.
- Stopped: The application is idle.
Installed on: Prints the date and time the application was installed.
Vendor: Prints the name of the application vendor.
License Status: Prints the license status.
- Installed: An effective license has been installed.
- Invalid: The license is invalid.
- Overlimit: The installed license has exceeded its user limit.
- Unnecessary: You do not need a license to run the application.
License Expires After: Prints the expiration date of the license. If License Status shows "Unnecessary" as its value, the expiration date is not printed.
License Upper Limit: Prints the upper license limit for each counter. If License Status shows "Unnecessary" as its value, the upper license limit is not printed.
Counter Value: Prints the current value for each counter. If License Status shows "Unnecessary" as its value, the current counter value is not printed.
Maximum Memory Usage: Prints the maximum amount of memory that can be used by each application. The Maximum Memory Usage number is printed in kilobytes (KB).
Registered Service: Prints the service registered on the MEAP framework from the application. The Registered Service is printed only if there is data that corresponds to it.
  • The printed items are subject to change, as we are constantly improving our products.
  • In the sample printout, an application called "PortalService" is installed on the machine. This
    application can be installed using the MEAP Administration Software CD-ROM.


Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings

Registering device information in your machine enables you to set the machine to deliver the same device information to other machines that are connected to the same network. This enables you to easily manage multiple machines at the same time.

Your machine is capable of both sending and receiving device information, which can be delivered manually and automatically.


The following device information can be delivered:


Delivered Information Contents Notes
Address Book The Address Book, forwarding settings, and favorites buttons
  • All of the currently stored destinations are deleted, and then the destinations that are delivered are registered.
  • Sending and receiving of the Address Book is available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated or the optional FAX board is attached.
Department ID System Manager and Department ID Management settings
  • Only Department IDs existing in the client machines are deleted.
  • If an identical Department ID exists in the client machine, its password and set counter limits are overwritten. Counter values, however, are not overwritten.
  • If a Department ID exists in the host machine, but not in the client machine, the Department ID,password, and set counter limits from the host machine are added to the client machine.
    Counter values are also added and reset.
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached to the host machine and is not attached to the client machine, or vice versa, only System Manager Settings are delivered.
Printer Settings Printer Settings
Additional Functions Settings Value Settings made from the Additional Functions screen(excluding the above settings)
  • Some Additional Functions settings are not
    delivered. For more information, see "Additional Functions."
  • Information for inboxes set with a password is not delivered. Information for inboxes set with a password in the client machine is not overwritten.
  • If you do not deliver Additional Functions settings and the Address Book at the same time, the settings in URL Send Settings in Mail Box Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) may be erased.
Paper Information Importing and exporting of the Paper Type Management Settings
  • The user-defined paper types that are already stored are delivered. Upon exporting, the user-defined paper information is duplicated and delivered. Upon importing, the user-defined paper types that are already stored are overwritten by the paper information.

Remark
  • Preparing for delivery and updating the information after it is received may take several minutes. Do not turn the main power OFF until these operations are complete. Doing so may result in loss of data or damage to the data.
  • Device information can be shared between machines of the same model (iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225), and which have the Device Information Delivery Settings mode. However, some information may not be delivered correctly depending on the optional equipment that is attached to the machines.
  • If [Restrictions for Receiving Device Info.] under <Receiving Settings> is set to 'Off' in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), device information can be delivered from different machine models; however, some information may not be delivered correctly. (See "Restricting the Reception of Device Information.")
  • Device information cannot be delivered if the System Manager ID and System Password registered in the client machine differs from the System Manager ID and System Password registered in the host machine.
  • Unique machine information, such as the IP address, is not delivered.
  • The machine can deliver device information to devices using IPv4 or devices using IPv6.


Registering/Deleting/Printing Delivery Destinations

You can register, confirm, and delete delivery destinations.


Remark
  • The maximum number of destinations you can register is 100.


Registering Delivery Destinations

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Register Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
  1. Register a destination.

  • Press [Register].

  • Enter the IP address of the destination or FQDN (Fully Qualified Domain Name) (i.e., starfish.organization.company.com) → press [OK].
  • If any of the following is true for the destination machine, a message <Could not retrieve information for the device to register. Register as a destination?> is displayed. If you press [Yes], <Deliverable Settings> on the Details screen will be blank.
  • The main power is turned OFF
  • The destination machine is not connected to the network
  • A default key is not set
  • Every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings is set to 'On'

  • Press [Auto Search/Register].
  • Press [Auto Search Start].

To display the search results as host names, press [Display Host Name].

Press [-] or [+] to set the search depth (how many routers to search).

  • Since searching uses SLP (Service Location Protocol), machines behind a router will not be detected if the router is set to restrict passing with the SLP protocol.
  • If any of the following is true for the destination machine, you cannot search the destination.
  • The main power is turned OFF
  • The destination machine is not connected to the network
  • Every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings is set to 'On'
  • Select the destination → press [OK].

To select all of the destinations, press [Select All]. However, if a destination is selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the destination again.
  • To cancel all destinations, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All].)

  1. Press [Done].


Confirming Delivery Destination Settings

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Register Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
  1. Select the destination whose settings you want to confirm → press [Details].

  1. Confirm the settings → press [OK].

If you have changed the destination machine's settings in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving Settings> in Device Information Delivery Settings, press [Get Information] to update the destination machine's information.

  • If any of the following is true for the destination machine whose settings you want to confirm,
    <Deliverable Settings> on the Details screen will be blank.
  • The main power is turned OFF
  • The destination machine is not connected to the network
  • Every function in Receive Restriction for Each Function under <Receiving Settings> in Device
    Information Delivery Settings is set to 'On'


Deleting a Delivery Destination

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Register Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
  1. Select the destination that you want to erase → press [Erase].

To select all destinations, press [Select All]. However, if a destination is selected, this key changes to [Clear Selection].

  • You can cancel a selection by selecting the destination again.
  • To cancel all destinations, press [Clear Selection]. ([Clear Selection] changes to [Select All].)
  1. Press [Yes].


Printing the Delivery Destinations

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Register Destinations] under <Transmitting Settings>.
  1. Press [Print List].

  • The delivery destination list can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].


Setting Automatic Delivery

You can set to automatically deliver device information at a specified time. You can also select which information to deliver.


Remark
  • When delivering device information, the following machines will not update their information:
  • Machines which are processing a send job
  • Machines importing or exporting data via the Remote UI
  • Machines which are executing functions from the Additional Functions screen
  • In addition to the above, machines which are having their address books accessed or are sending a job will not update their address books, and machines performing a print job will not update their Printer Settings.
  • Machines which could not receive device information because of a power failure or network trouble, will not receive updated information until the first automatic update after the machine recovers.
  • Device information is not delivered if the machine goes into the Shutdown mode, even if an automatic delivery time is set.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Auto Delivery Settings] under <Transmitting Settings>.
  1. Select [Everyday], [Select Days], or [Off].

  • Select a number ([1] to [5]) → enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].

You can store up to five different start times.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples:

7:05 a.m. →0705
11:18 p.m. →2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Select a day of the week ([Sun] to [Sat]) → select a number ([1] to [5]).
  • Enter the start time using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].

You can store up to five different start times for each day of the week.

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples:

7:05 a.m. →0705
11:18 p.m. →2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.


  • Press [OK].

  1. Select which device information you want to deliver → press [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The machine will deliver the selected device information.
[Off]: The machine will not deliver the selected device information.

<Network Settings>:

Available when [On] is selected for <Add. Functions Settings Value>. Select [Include] to deliver the network settings, or [Exclude] to not deliver the network settings → press [Done].

  1. Select the destinations → press [OK].


Setting Manual Delivery

You can set to manually deliver device information.


Remark
  • When delivering device information, the following machines will not update their information:
  • Machines which are processing a send job
  • Machines importing or exporting data via the Remote UI
  • Machines which are executing functions from the Additional Functions screen
  • Machines which are having their address books accessed
  • In addition to the above, machines which are having their address books accessed or are sending a job will not update their address books, and machines performing a print job will not update their Printer Settings.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Manual Delivery] under <Transmitting Settings>.
  1. Select which device information you want to deliver → press [Next].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The machine delivers the selected device information.
[Off]: The machine does not deliver the selected device information.

<Network Settings>:

Available when [On] is selected for <Add. Functions Settings Value>. Select [Include] to deliver the network settings, or [Exclude] to not deliver the network settings → press [Done].

  1. Select the destinations → press [Manual delivery Start].
  • Even if you press [Cancel] on the delivery in progress screen, delivery will not be canceled for
    machines to which information has already been delivered. Delivery to the next selected
    machine will be canceled.
  1. When delivery is complete, confirm the delivery results displayed in the <Status> column on the Manual Delivery screen.


Restricting the Reception of Device Information

You can set whether to receive delivered device information from other model machines, besides the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225, which have the Device Information Delivery Settings mode.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Restrictions for Receiving Device Info.] under <Receiving Settings>.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Device information can only be delivered from other iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 machines with the Device Information Delivery Settings mode.
[Off]: Device information can be delivered from different machine models.


Restoring Device Information

You can restore device information to what it was before it was updated. This is useful when you have accidentally updated the device information.


Remark
  • You can return device information only to what it was at the time of the very last update.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Restore Data] under <Receiving Settings>.
  1. Select the information to restore → press [Start].

  • If you do not restore the Additional Functions settings and the Address Book at the same time, the URL Send Settings in Mail Box Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) may be erased.
  1. Press [Yes].


Restricting the Type of Information That Is Updated

You can restrict the type of device information that is received and updated.


Remark
  • While receiving and updating device information, the screen indicating that the settings are being updated is displayed. Operations on this machine cannot be performed until the update completes.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Receive Restriction for Each Function] under <Receiving Settings>.
  1. Select [On] or [Off] next to the functions you want to restrict → press [Done].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The machine is restricted, and does not update the selected device information.
[Off]: The machine is not restricted, and updates the device information.
  • Before setting <Add. Functions Settings Value>, <Dept. ID>, or <Address Book> to 'Off', it is
    necessary to set a default key in Network Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Network.")
  • Changes are only effective after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."


Checking/Printing the Communication Log

You can check and print the following information on the Communication log: Start time, destination address, delivery result, end time, data content, and end code.



Checking the Communication Log

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Communication Log].
  1. Check the communication logs → press [Done].
  • To view the detailed information of a communication log, select the log → press [Details].


Printing the Communication Log

Remark
  • For details on the Device Information Communication Log, see Troubleshooting.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Device Information Delivery Settings] → [Communication Log].
  1. Press [Print List].

If you want to print the list automatically at a specified time, press [Report Settings].


  • Specify the desired print settings → press [OK].

Auto Print

[On]: The communication log is automatically printed when the number of send and receive transmissions reaches 100.
[Off]: The communication log is not printed automatically.

Daily Activity Report Time

If you select [On], enter the time using - (numeric keys).

Enter all four digits of the time (including zeros), using 24-hour notation.

Examples:

7:05 a.m. →0705
11:18 p.m. →2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, press (Clear) to clear your entry → enter another four digit number.

If the number of send and receive transmissions exceed 100 before the specified Auto Print time is reached, a communication log of the most recent 100 transmissions is printed.

[Separate Report Type]:

If you want to print the delivery and receive logs separately, press [Separate Report Type].

  • The communication log can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Press [Yes].


Initializing All Data/Settings

This mode enables you to erase the following data stored in the machine. It is not normally necessary to use this mode, but it is useful to erase personal or confidential information when returning or disposing of the machine.

  • Data stored in inboxes
  • Address data stored in the Address Book
  • Scan settings registered for the Sending function
  • Mode Memory settings registered for the Copy or Mail Box function
  • MEAP applications and license files
  • Data saved from MEAP applications
  • The password for the SMS (Service Management Service) login service of MEAP
    (If you changed the password, it returns to the default password.)
  • User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
  • Unsent documents (reserved documents and documents set with the Delayed Send mode)
  • Job history
  • Additional Functions settings
  • Forms registered for the Image Composition mode
  • Registered forwarding settings
  • Key Pair and Server Certificate registered in Certificate Settings in TCP/IP Settings in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen)

Remark
  • Before initiating the Initialize All Data/Settings mode, make sure that the data you are erasing is completely unnecessary. Note that Canon will not be liable for any damages resulting from the loss of data.
  • If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached to the machine, and does not operate properly after initializing the data, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • To prevent other users from accidentally erasing all the data on the hard disk, it is recommended to register a System Manager ID and System Password so that only the System Manager can perform this procedure.
  • Confirm that there are no current jobs being processed before using the Initialize All Data/Settings mode.
  • Back up any necessary data before initializing the data in the machine. You can back up the following data:
  • Address Book, Additional Functions settings, Forwarding Settings, and User Inbox Document Data (For information on exporting this data, see "Remote UI.")
  • License files for MEAP applications (For information on downloading license files, see "MEAP/SSO.")
  • User authentication information registered in the Local Device Authentication System of SSO-H (Single
    Sign-On H) (For information on exporting authentication information, see "MEAP/SSO.")
  • Settings which can be sent using the Device Information Delivery mode (Can only be backed up if you have another iR machine with the Device Information Delivery mode. It is not necessary to back up this data if you want to use the data already registered in the other iR machine. For more information on the Device Information Delivery mode, see "Specifying Device Information Delivery Settings.")
  • Data saved from MEAP applications (Depending on the MEAP application, you may be able to back up this data. For more information, see "MEAP/SSO.")
  • You cannot access the machine while the hard disk is being initialized.
  • The Initialize All Data/Settings mode does not delete any data the machine has stored on a server or computer.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Initialize All Data/Settings].
  1. Press [Yes].

It may take more than 30 minutes to initialize the hard disk.

  • If there are any current jobs being processed, they will be canceled, and then erased.
  1. After the hard disk is initialized, the control panel power switch automatically turns OFF and the main power switch of machine automatically switches to OFF ("" side).


Displaying the Current Department ID/User Name

If you are using a login service, you can display the Department ID or user name which is currently being used to log on to the machine in the Job/Print Status Display Area.

The item displayed for each login service is shown below:


Login Service Item Displayed
Default Authentication Department ID
SSO-H (Single Sign-On H) If you logged on to the domain to which the machine belongs: User Name
If you logged on to a domain to which the machine does not belong: User Name
If you logged on using the Local Device Authentication system: User Name

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Display ID/User Name].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • If you set Display ID/User Name to 'On', and you are not using a login service, the Department ID/user name is not displayed.


USB Settings

This mode enables you to specify the USB settings.


Remark
  • Changes are only effective after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instruction on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."


Using a USB Device

Set Use USB Device to 'On' to connect a computer to the machine via the USB port.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [USB Settings] → [Use USB Device].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Using a USB Host

Set Use USB Host to 'On' to connect a host device with the machine via the USB port.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [USB Settings] → [Use USB Host].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Using the MEAP Driver for USB Input Device Connections

Set [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] to 'On' if you want to use the MEAP driver for a USB input device connected to the machine. Specify this setting when using MEAP applications that support USB connections.


Remark
  • If you want to use a USB keyboard, it is necessary to set [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] to 'Off' in advance. For more information on USB keyboards, see "Basic Operations."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [USB Settings] → [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Using the MEAP Driver for USB External Disk Device Connections

Set [Use MEAP Driver for USB External Disk Device] to 'On' if you want to use the MEAP driver for a USB external disk device connected to the machine. Specify this setting when using MEAP applications that support USB connections.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [USB Settings] → [Use MEAP Driver for USB External Disk Device].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Specifying Encrypted Secured Printing Settings

You can specify settings relating to encrypted secured printing.


Remark
  • Encrypted Print Settings can be set only if the Encrypted Printing Software is activated.


Setting to Receive Only Encrypted Secured Print Jobs

You can set the machine to only receive encrypted secured print jobs from computers.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Encrypted Print Settings] → [Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Setting the Display Method When Entering a Password

You can set whether to display asterisks when entering confidential information, such as a password.


Remark
  • When the information is being displayed as asterisks, a screen prompting the user to re-enter the information for confirmation purposes is displayed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: When registering confidential information, it will be displayed as asterisks.
[Off]: When registering confidential information, it will be displayed directly on the screen.


Setting the Secure Watermark Mode

You can select whether to set the Secure Watermark function for each copy job, print job, and print jobs from printer drivers, if performing such jobs with the Secure Watermark function always set. For more information on the Secure Watermark function, see "Copy," and "Mail Box."


Remark
  • Secure Watermark Mode is displayed only if the optional Secure Watermark is activated.


Forced Secure Watermark

Forced Secure Watermark enables you to set the machine to always print the specified hidden watermark on prints and copies.


Remark
  • The Forced Secure Watermark Mode can be set only if the optional Secure Watermark is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Secure Watermark Mode] → [Forced Secure Watermark].
  1. Press [Set] for the desired function.
  1. Select the type of secure watermark to embed (Watermark, Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, or ID/User Name).

  • Select a preset watermark → press [Next].


  • Press [Enter] → enter the desired text → press [OK] → [OK] → [Next].

If you have registered characters in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you can select the characters from the list.


  • Select the date format → press [Next].


  • Enter the starting number using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].


  • Press [Next].

  • The serial number that is displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area when you press (Counter Check) on the control panel is printed.

  • Press [Next].
  • The ID or User Name of the user printing the document is printed.
  • The watermark "COPY" is printed if a login service is not set.

  1. Select the background pattern → select the size of the text → press [OK].

To print pattern on the background of copy, select the background pattern from the Background Pattern drop-down list.

You can select [Small] (36 pt.), [Medium] (54 pt.), or [Large] (72 pt.) for the size of the text.

To print the characters vertically across the page, press [Print Characters Vertically].

To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored Backgnd].



Printer Driver Secure Watermark

If you set the Printer Driver Secure Watermark mode, you can select whether to set the Secure Watermark function for each job.


Remark
  • If both Forced Secure Watermark and Printer Driver Secure Watermark are set at the same time, Forced Secure Watermark is given priority.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Secure Watermark Mode] → [Secure Watermark Mode] → [Printer Driver Secure Watermark].
  1. Press [Set] for the desired function.
  1. Select the type of secure watermark to embed (Watermark, Date, Copy Set Numbering, Serial Number, or ID/User Name).

  • Select a preset watermark → press [Next].


  • Press [Enter] → enter the desired text → press [OK] → [OK] → [Next].

If you have registered characters in Register Characters for Page No./Watermark in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), you can select the characters from the list.


  • Select the date format → press [Next].


  • Enter the starting number using - (numeric keys) → press [Next].


  • Press [Next].

  • The serial number that is displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area when you press (Counter Check) on the control panel is printed.

  • Press [Next].
  • The ID or User Name of the user printing the document is printed.
  • The watermark "COPY" is printed if a login service is not set.

  1. Select the background pattern → select the size of the text → press [OK].

To print pattern on the background of copy, select the background pattern from the Background Pattern drop-down list.

You can select [Small] (36 pt.), [Medium] (54 pt.), or [Large] (72 pt.) for the size of the text.

To print the characters vertically across the page, press [Print Characters Vertically].

To use white letters on a colored background, press [White Letters on Colored Backgnd].



Detecting and Installing Drivers that Support Functions Specified on the Machine into Your Computer

From the machine, you can specify functions suitable for the fax board or printer kit installed in the machine. From your computer, you can detect and install drivers that are compatible with the specified functions.


Remark
  • The PDL Selection (PnP) function is displayed in the following cases:
  • When two or more types of PDL print functions are enabled
  • When one or more type of PDL print function is enabled and an optional fax board is installed
  • If the desired driver is not in your computer, detection and installation cannot be performed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [PDL Selection (PnP)].
  1. Select the button for the function that is applicable to Plug and Play settings → press [OK].

The displayed function buttons may differ, depending on the optional equipment that is attached.

  • Changes are only effective after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instruction on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."


Specifying Settings for All User Inboxes

You can specify settings for the time until documents in all of the user inboxes are erased automatically, as well as whether to print upon storing from the printer driver.


Remark
  • If these settings have been previously specified for individual user inboxes, the settings set in [Settings for All User Inboxes] are given priority, regardless of password settings for each user inbox.
  • If settings for individual user inboxes are changed after specifying settings in [Setting for All Use Inboxes], the settings for each individual user inbox are given priority.


Setting the Time until Documents Are Automatically Erased

You can specify settings for the time until documents in all of the user inboxes are erased automatically, as well as whether to print upon storing from the printer driver.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Settings for All User Inboxes] → [Time until Document Auto Erase].
  1. Press [] or [] to set the time until documents are automatically erased → press [OK].


Printing upon Storing from the Printer Driver

When storing documents from a computer into a user inbox, you can set whether to print the result of the storing process. Select [On] to print the results.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Settings for All User Inboxes] → [Print Upon Storing From the Printer Driver].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Restricting Printer Jobs

You can specify whether to restrict printer jobs so that they can only be stored in user inboxes.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Restrict Printer Jobs].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: Restricts jobs from printer drivers.
Jobs can only be stored in user inboxes.
[Off]: There are no restrictions for jobs from printer drivers.
Jobs can be stored in user inboxes and/or can be printed.


Storing/Editing Irregular Paper Types

You can register up to 200 paper types with new names other than the default paper types registered in the machine. You can register a paper type by editing the name after duplicating the closest paper type from a registered paper type.


Remark
  • When printing the received document, paper types that the user specifies are not available.


Storing Irregular Paper Types

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Paper Type Management Settings].
  1. Select from the list a paper type that has closely resembling characteristics to the paper type you are going to register → press [Duplicate].

  1. Enter a name → press [OK].

  • The paper type name cannot be registered in the following cases:
  • If the name is the same as the duplicated paper type.
  • If the name is left blank.


Editing Irregular Paper Types

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Paper Type Management Settings].
  1. Select a paper type that you have registered from the list → press [Details/Edit].

  1. Press [Change].

  • If you change the name of irregular paper types that are currently loaded in a paper source, you must re-register the paper type for paper drawers, stack bypass, and paper decks. For more information on registering the paper type in a paper source, see "Additional Functions."
  • The names of the paper types registered by default cannot be changed.
  • You can only edit the contents for <Name>. Detailed information for <Category>, <Basis Weight>, <Finish>, <Type>, <Creep (Displacement) Correct.>, and <Color> are displayed.
  1. Enter the name → press [OK].



Erasing Irregular Paper Types

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Paper Type Management Settings].
  1. Select a paper type that you have registered from the list → press [Erase].

  • Confirm the contents to be erased.
  1. Press [Yes].


Scanner Driver

This category describes how to scan from computers.



Switching the Scanner Online and Offline

To start the Network ScanGear driver and scan, first you must switch the scanner online.


Remark
  • The touch panel display may differ depending on the printer model you are using.


Switching the Scanner Online

Switching the scanner online enables communication with other devices on the network, and allows the scanner to receive data from the computer.

Follow the procedure below to switch the scanner online.

  1. On the touch panel display, press .

  1. In the Scan screen, press [Online].

You can also set the scanner to go online automatically. For details, see "Security."

When the following display appears, the scanner is online.

  • The following messages may be displayed on the control panel, depending on the scanning state.
  • Connecting to host...
  • Scanning...
  • Sending data...
  • Waiting...


Switching the Scanner Offline

After scanning over the network, disconnect the scanner from the network by switching it offline in order to use other functions.


Remark
  • You do not have to switch the scanner offline in order to use other functions while data is being transferred.
  1. Press [Offline].

You can also set the scanner to go offline automatically. For details, see "Security."

The scanner is offline.

If you press [Offline] while scanning, the dialog box below is displayed. Click [Yes] to stop scanning and switch the scanner offline.



Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used

Selecting the network scanner to be used with the ScanGear Tool enables scanning with the Network ScanGear driver. No scanner is selected during the Network ScanGear installation, so this operation is required before use.


Remark
  • The ScanGear Tool cannot be started at the same time as the Network ScanGear driver.
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. On the [Start] (or []) menu, point to [Programs] (or [All Programs]) → [Color Network ScanGear] (or [Network ScanGear]) → click [ScanGear Tool].

The ScanGear Tool starts.

  1. Select the scanner to be used.

  • Click [Discover].

The ScanGear Tool searches for scanners on the network, and the results are displayed in the list.

  • Click the scanner to be used in the list → click [Select].

Information for the selected scanner appears under [Selected Scanner].

  • Only scanners on the same subnet (network with the same network ID) as your computer are displayed in the list.
  • After selecting the scanner, you can click [Test Connection] to check that the selected scanner can be used.

  • Click [IP Address].

The [IP Address] dialog box appears.

  • Enter the IP address in [Scanner IP Address] → click [OK].

Information for the selected scanner appears under [Selected Scanner].

  • It is possible to specify an IP address outside the subnet.
  • After selecting the scanner, you can click [Test Connection] to check that the selected scanner can be used.
  1. Click [Exit].

The settings are saved and the ScanGear Tool is closed.



Starting Network ScanGear

The Network ScanGear driver is started by accessing it from a TWAIN-compliant application as follows.


Remark
  • If you are using Network ScanGear for the first time after installing it, the network scanner to be used must be selected with the ScanGear Tool. For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used."
  • The Network ScanGear driver cannot be started at the same time as the ScanGear Tool. If the ScanGear Tool is running, close it.
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Switch the scanner online.

For details, see "Switching the Scanner Online."

  1. Start the application.
  1. In the application, select Network ScanGear as the scanner to be used.

In the application, select the command for scanner selection (for example, "Select Scanner", or "Select Source") → select [Color Network ScanGear] (or [Network ScanGear]) in the dialog box that is displayed.

The Network ScanGear main window appears.

  • See the documentation provided with your application for commands and procedures used to select Network ScanGear and start scanning.


Network ScanGear Main Window

The window that appears when the Network ScanGear driver is opened in an application is called the Network ScanGear Main Window. The Network ScanGear Main Window includes the following items.


Remark
  • The window displayed below is the Color Network ScanGear Main Window.
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.


Toolbar

Scanning buttons

Preview Area

Settings

Status Bar


Toolbar

The toolbar contains buttons for manipulating the image shown in the Preview Area. You can reposition the toolbar by clicking and dragging it. You can hide the toolbar by clicking [] (Exit), to remove it from the display. To redisplay it, select [Show Toolbar] on the [System] menu in the main window. The functions of the buttons in the toolbar are described below.


  • [] (Crop)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a cross-hair, which you can then drag within the Preview Area to specify the area to be scanned.

  • [] (Move Image)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a small hand, which you can then drag to scroll the image in the Preview Area. The Move Image button is available only when the image has been zoomed, so that it is larger than the Preview Area.

  • [] (Zoom)

Clicking this button turns the pointer into a magnifying glass in the Preview Area, allowing you to enlarge or reduce the image in the Preview Area. Click the left mouse button on the preview image to enlarge it by one step, and click the right mouse button on the enlarged image to reduce it by one step. This button is available only when an image appears in the Preview Area.

  • [] (Ruler)

Clicking this button displays rulers at the top and left sides of the Preview Area. Clicking the button toggles the ruler display on and off.

  • [] (Help)

Clicking this button displays the Online Help.



Scanning buttons

  • [Scan]

Clicking this button scans an original. When scanning is complete, the Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application. During scanning, a scanning progress dialog box is displayed. To interrupt scanning, click [Cancel].

  • Depending on the application, the Network ScanGear Main Window may not close after scanning is complete. In this case, click [] (Exit) in the Network ScanGear Main Window to close it.
  • [Preview]

Clicking this button pre-scans the original and displays a preview image in the Preview Area. After changing the scan settings, click this button once again to display a preview of the image with the new settings. During scanning, [Preview] changes to [Cancel]. If you interrupt scanning by clicking [Cancel], the part of the image already scanned appears in the Preview Area. This button is not available when using the feeder to scan, or when [Auto] is selected from [Original Size].

  • [Clear]

Clicking this button clears the image displayed in the Preview Area. It also cancels the scanning area setting and magnification of the preview image, and returns the Preview Area display to its default size.



Preview Area

This area displays a preview of how the image will look after the original is scanned.

Use it to check the appearance of the image, and to adjust the scanning area or scan settings. Right-clicking on the Preview Area displays a pop-up menu that provides the following functions.


Remark
  • The preview image does not appear when using the feeder for scanning or when [Auto] is selected for [Original Size].

  • [Cropping Area]

Displays the [Cropping Area] dialog box, where you can specify the dimensions of the scanning area. This function cannot be selected with 2-sided scanning, when [Auto-adjust Orientation] is selected, or when [Auto] or [Different Sizes] is selected for [Original Size]. For instructions on how to specify the scanning area, see "Specifying the Scanning Area."

  • [Unit]

Selects the unit used to specify the scanning area (millimeters, inches, or pixels).

  • [Original Frame Erase]

Enables you to specify whether to delete a shadow or frame around the original when scanning. Selecting [On] applies a 2.5 mm white frame around the scanned image.

The [Original Frame Erase] command is not available when [Auto] or [Different Sizes] is selected for [Original Size], or when the scanning area is specified.

  • The default setting for [Original Frame Erase] is [On]. If you select [Off], streaks may appear on the scanned image.


Settings

Click the tabs to access the [Main], [Options], and [Scanner Info] sheets. Use the [Main] sheet to specify scan settings. Use the [Options] sheet to specify processing options. Use the [Scanner Info] sheet (for Color Network ScanGear only) to display information about the currently selected scanner. For details about the settings in each sheet, refer to the Online Help for that sheet.


Remark
  • The available settings vary depending on the scanner model you are using.


Status Bar

The status bar shows the following information, from left to right.

  • The [Color Mode] setting
  • The [Resolution] setting
  • The top left coordinates, and the width and height of the scanning area
  • The amount of memory required to scan the image (units: KB)


Viewing the Online Help

To view the online help, follow the procedure below.


Remark
  • The ScanGear Tool cannot be started at the same time as the Network ScanGear driver.
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.

  1. Click the [Help] (or []) button.

  • Start ScanGear Tool.

For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used."

  • Click the [Help] button.

The online help is displayed.


  • Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  • Click the [] button.

The online help is displayed.



Scanning from the Platen Glass

Follow the procedure below to scan from the platen glass.


Remark
  • If you are using Network ScanGear for the first time after installing it, the network scanner to be used must be selected with the ScanGear Tool. For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used."
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

The scanner driver is started by a call from TWAIN-compatible software (such as Adobe Photoshop, Adobe Acrobat, Microsoft Word/Excel/PowerPoint in Microsoft Office 2000 and later, etc.).

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for [Original Placement].

  1. Place the original on the platen glass. The original should have the side to be scanned face down, as shown in the illustration.

  1. In the Network ScanGear Main Window, set the Color Mode, Resolution, and other scan settings.
  • The available settings and ranges vary depending on the printer model you are using.
  1. To preview the image, click [Preview].

A preview image appears in the Preview Area.

  • You can use the preview image to do the following:
  • Use the toolbar to enlarge the image, or use the settings in the [Options] sheet to adjust the appearance of the image.
  1. Click [Scan].

Scanning starts.

When scanning is complete, the Network ScanGear Main Window closes and the scanned image is transferred to the application.

  • After clicking [Scan], do not perform any operation in the Network ScanGear Main Window until the scanning progress dialog boxes displayed.
  • If Network ScanGear does not automatically close after scanning, click [] (Exit) to close it.
  • Be sure to close the Network ScanGear Main Window before exiting the application.


Scanning from the Feeder

Follow the procedure below to scan from the feeder.


Remark
  • If you are using Network ScanGear for the first time after installing it, the network scanner to be used must be selected with the ScanGear Tool. For details, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used."
  • If you are scanning a custom paper sized original using the document feeder, set [Original Size] in the [Main] page of Network ScanGear to [Custom].
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select the original sides to be scanned for [Original Placement].

For 1-sided originals, select [Feeder (1-sided)]; for 2-sided originals, select [Feeder (2-sided)] or [Feeder (Hi-Speed 2-sided)].

  1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation] to display the [Orientation] dialog box, and then set the feeding direction.

For 2-sided originals, specify the Book Opening direction (i.e. the relation between the front and back sides).

For details about the setting, see "Setting the Original Feeding Orientation."

  1. Load the originals into the feeder.

Load the originals in the orientation specified in the [Orientation] dialog box, with the surface to be scanned face up.

  1. In the Network ScanGear Main Window, set the Color Mode, Resolution, and other scan settings.
  • The available settings and ranges vary depending on the printer model you are using.
  1. If necessary specify the scanning area, and then click [Scan].

Scanning starts.

The originals loaded into the feeder are scanned in succession.

  • Check that the originals are correctly loaded in the feeder.
  • When Scanning from the platen glass after using the feeder, make sure that the platen glass cover is fully opened before positioning the original.
  • It is not possible to specify the scanning area when scanning 2-sided originals.
  • If streaks or dirt appear on the original scanned through the feeder, clean the feeder roller. For details, see "Maintenance."


Automatically Detecting Original Feeding Orientation

You can set Network ScanGear so that the orientation of originals set the feeder is automatically detected. Originals then scanned from the feeder are displayed with their correct orientation on the computer.


Remark
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Auto-adjust Orientation].

During scanning, the orientation of the original is detected automatically, and the scanned image is rotated if necessary, so that it is displayed correctly on the computer screen.



Setting the Original Feeding Orientation

You can set the orientation at which originals are placed in the feeder of the scanner beforehand, so that originals scanned from the feeder are displayed with their correct orientation on the computer.


Remark
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation].

The [Orientation] dialog box appears.

  1. Select the orientation of the originals to be loaded into the feeder for [Feeding Direction].

For 2-sided originals, also set [Book Opening] to indicate the relation between the front and back sides of a 2-sided original.

  1. When the settings are complete, click [OK] to close the dialog box.


Scanning Different Sized Originals Together

You can load originals of different sizes together in the feeder and scan them in one operation.


Remark
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Different Sizes] for [Original Size].

The [Different Sizes] dialog box appears.

  • If you are scanning a custom paper size original, select [Custom] for [Original Size] in the [Main] sheet. Also, in such cases the width of all pages must be the same.
  1. Check the possible combinations and select the appropriate combination of original sizes.

For sizes such as A3 and A4, where the longer side of the smaller original is the same size as the shorter side of the larger original, select [Same Width]. For combinations of sizes such as A3 and B4 with no sides of the same length in common, select [Different Width].

  1. After selecting the settings, click [OK] to close the dialog box.


Specifying the Scanning Area

When scanning from the platen glass, you can display the scan image in the Preview Area, and then select the area to scan within the original. Follow the procedure below to specify the scanning area.


Remark
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Platen] for [Original Placement].

  1. Click [Preview] to display the image in the Preview Area.
  1. Click [Crop] on the toolbar.

The pointer changes to cross-hairs in the Preview Area, allowing you to select the scanning area.

  1. Drag the mouse from one corner of the rectangular area you want to specify to the diagonally opposite corner.

Once an area is specified, you can change it, as follows:

  • You can drag the area to a different position, or drag the frame handles to change the size of the area.
  • To cancel the scanning area setting, click outside the area.

The specified area is indicated by a broken line.

  • You can also specify the scanning area in the [Cropping Area] dialog box.
    Right-click in the Preview Area, and then select [Cropping Area] to display the [Cropping Area] dialog box. Enter the dimensions of the area to be scanned and click [OK].
  • Although it is not possible to display a preview image when scanning using the feeder, you can still specify the scanning area numerically using the [Cropping Area] dialog box, or by dragging the mouse in the empty Preview Area to roughly define the area.
  • You cannot specify the scanning area in the following cases:
  • When scanning 2-sided originals
  • When [Auto-adjust Orientation] is selected
  • When [Auto] or [Different Sizes] is selected from [Original Size]


Department ID Management

You can manage the number of pages scanned by individuals or groups (such as departments or users) with the Network ScanGear Department ID Management function.


Remark
  • To use the Department ID Management function, you must first register a department ID and password, and make sure that the Department ID Management function is enabled at the scanner.


Setting a Department ID and Password

You can set a department ID and password beforehand in the ScanGear Tool in order to scan using the Department ID Management function.


Remark
  • The window displayed may differ according to the operating system etc.
  1. Start ScanGear Tool.
  1. Select a scanner to use.

For details about how to start ScanGear Tool or to select a scanner, see "Selecting the Network Scanner to be Used."

  1. Confirm that [Enabled] is displayed for [Department ID Management] under [Selected Scanner] → click [Dept. ID Settings].

The [Department ID Settings] dialog box appears.

  1. Select [Save Password].
  1. Enter the department ID and password in [Department ID] and [Password].
  1. To confirm the department ID and password each time you scan, select the [Confirm Department ID/Password when Scanning] check box.
  1. Click [OK] to close the dialog box.
  1. Click [Exit] in the ScanGear Tool.

The settings are saved and ScanGear Tool is closed.

Scanning with the selected scanner from then onward is performed with the department ID and password.



Entering the Department ID and Password When You Scan

If a department ID and password have not been set in the ScanGear Tool, they must be entered each time scanning is executed.


Remark
  1. Start Network ScanGear from the application.

For details, see "Starting Network ScanGear."

  1. Make all the necessary settings on the [Main] sheet → click [Scan].

The [Confirm Department ID] dialog box appears.

  1. Enter [Department ID] and [Password] → click [OK].

Scanning is performed with the entered department ID and password.



Summary of Important Features and Settings

The following setting parameters are available in Network ScanGear.

For details, refer to the Online Help in the sheets in which the setting is listed, or in the appropriate dialog box.


Remark
  • The available settings and parameters vary depending on the printer model you are using.

Setting Procedure
Color mode for image Select the desired color mode from [Color Mode] in the [Main] sheet.
Scanning resolution Select the desired resolution from [Resolution] in the [Main] sheet.
Size of originals to be scanned Select the desired size from [Original Size] in the [Main] sheet.
Scan originals of undefined paper size Select [Custom] from [Original Size] in the [Main] sheet.

Setting Procedure
Adjust density Select [Manual] from [Density Adjustment] in the [Main] sheet → move the [Density] slider to adjust the value.
Create color negative image Select [On] from [Reversed Image] in the [Options] sheet.
Mirror image left to right Select [On] from [Mirror Image] in the [Options] sheet.
Rotate image Select the desired angle of rotation from [Image Rotation] in the [Options] sheet.
Setting the brightness, contrast, and gamma for full color scanning (only for Color Network ScanGear) In the [Options] sheet, select the color that you want to set from [Channel] → move the [Brightness], [Contrast], and [Gamma] sliders to adjust the settings.
Setting the brightness, contrast, and gamma for grayscale scanning (only for Color Network ScanGear) In the [Options] sheet, move the [Brightness], [Contrast], and [Gamma] sliders to adjust the settings.

Setting Procedure
Scan originals from feeder with correct orientation Select [Auto-adjust Orientation] in the [Main] sheet.
- or -
Perform the following steps:
1. In the [Main] sheet, click [Orientation] to display the [Orientation] dialog box.
2. Select the feeding direction of originals (and Book Opening direction for 2-sided originals) in the dialog box.
Set the number of pages to scan In the [Main] sheet, select [Specify] from [Pages to Scan] → enter the number of pages.
Scan different sized originals as one operation (defined paper sizes) Perform the following steps:
1. In the [Main] sheet, select [Different Sizes] from [Original Size] to display the [Different Sizes] dialog box.
2. Specify the combination of original sizes in the dialog box.
Scan different sized originals as one operation (undefined paper sizes) Select [Custom] from [Original Size] in the [Main] sheet.

Setting Procedure
Verify the Department ID Management settings Select the scanner in ScanGear Tool, and then confirm that [Enabled] is displayed for [Dept. ID Management] under [Selected Scanner].
Once the scanner is selected, you can verify the scanner information in the [Scanner Info] sheet.
Save a department ID and password Perform the following steps:
1. Open the [Department ID Settings] dialog box from ScanGear Tool.
2. In the dialog box, select [Save Password] → enter values in [Department ID] and [Password].


Troubleshooting

The background you wanted to remove has been scanned in. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Select [On] from [Remove Background] in the [Main] sheet.
- or -
Perform the following steps:

1.

In the [Main] sheet, select [Manual] from [Density Adjustment] → select [Remove Background] from [Image Qlty Adjstmnt].

2.

Click [Fine Adjustment] to display the [Settings for Background Removal] dialog box.

3.

Adjust the density of the background colors by moving the sliders for each color in the dialog box.

Images bleeding through from the opposite side of the paper have been scanned. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Perform the following steps:

1.

In the [Main] sheet, select [Manual] from [Density Adjustment] → select [Prevent Bleed Through] from [Image Qlty Adjstmnt].

2.

Click [Fine Adjustment] to display the [Setting for Bleed Through Prevention] dialog box.

3.

Adjust the density to prevent bleed through by moving the slider in the dialog box.

The amount of image data is too large to be scanned. (only for Color Network ScanGear)

Select [High] from [Compression Ratio] in the [Option] sheet.

Dark borders and frame lines that appear around the original have been scanned.

Perform the following steps:

1.

Right-click in the Preview Area to display a pop-up menu.

2.

On the pop-up menu, point to [Original Frame Erase] → click [On].



NetSpot Suite

This category describes software used for setting/managing the machine from computers.



NetSpot Device Installer

NetSpot Device Installer is a utility program that sets up network protocols for Canon devices connected to networks. It can set up devices quickly and easily, either directly from the supplied CD-ROM, or from your computer after you install it.



iW Series

This category describes software used for more effectively utilizing office equipment.



iW Document Manager

Document Manager is a network compatible document management system for managing and viewing a variety of documents. By using this software together with other related software and devices (such as iR products) via a network, users can build a highly functional document management system. In Document Manager Workgroup Server, documents are managed in database functional units called cabinets. Document Manager Enterprise Server can accommodate larger scale systems.

  • Document Manager Client is a client application that carries out the document read, save, edit, and output functions of the network compatible document management software named iW Document Manager.



iW Document Manager Client for MEAP

Document Manager Client for MEAP is the client software for Document Manager Workgroup/Enterprise. It runs on MEAP-enabled Canon device.

  • Expanded Document Store Function

When Document Manager Client for MEAP is part of the system, you can send and store scanned documents directly to a specified destination folder (in a Document Manager cabinet) from the touch-panel display of a MEAP-enabled Canon device. You can also automatically store fax documents sent to Canon devices in Document Manager.



iW Publishing Manager

Publishing Manager helps you to easily and quickly create and print business documents with an impressive appearance. With Publishing Manager, you can create documents efficiently utilizing the features of a Canon or non-Canon printer to the fullest.



iW Scan Manager

Scan Manager is software that can be linked with input devices such as the Document Scanner DR Series document scanners and iR series digital multifunction devices. Utilizing this linked operation, you can import paper documents into your computer at high speed, and efficiently input management information contained in imported documents. Documents imported with Scan Manager can be released to "Document Manager," which is the core iW series software product utilized in various business situations.



iW Function Flow

iW Function Flow is an option that increases the efficiency of routine operations that use multiple functions of iR machines. By creating and registering combinations of functions that are frequently used on the machine, you can repeatedly reuse the same combination of functions.
For example, you can scan an A3 original and reduce it to A4 size, merge it with a standard document stored in a User Inbox, and then send it to a customer via e-mail; all with the press of a button.
An Input, Edit, and Output operation can be set for each series of operations. A series of operations, such as this, is called a function flow.
You can access the machine via a Web browser to edit, import, and export function flows.



iW Management Console

iW Management Console is utility software which enables integrated management of a printing environment. Multiple devices connected to the network can be centrally managed using a Web browser with iW Management Console.
You can display a list of the information (network settings, status, installation location, etc.) retrieved from devices on the network, and send an e-mail notifying of these changes in device status to the administrator. You can also specify these settings for a batch of devices. These devices can be managed by the system manager by specifying the desired date and time to automatically apply the settings of the devices.
The functions of iW Management Console can also be expanded by adding optional plug-ins.



Access Management System

The Access Management System is a system for managing access restrictions for devices.
Access restrictions for devices are managed in units called "roles." Roles contain information that determines which of the various functions of the devices can be used or not. Roles set with access restrictions are assigned to users and groups to restrict the use of devices.



Before You Start Using This Machine

This category describes what you should know before using the machine.



Installation Location and Handling

This section describes precautions for installation location and handling. We recommend that you read this section prior to using this machine.



Installation Precautions


Avoid Installing the Machine in the Following Locations

  • Avoid locations subject to temperature and humidity extremes, whether low or high.

For example, avoid installing the machine near water faucets, hot water heaters, humidifiers, air conditioners, heaters, or stoves.

  • Avoid installing the machine in direct sunlight.

If this is unavoidable, use curtains to shade the machine. Be sure that the curtains do not block the machine's ventilation slots or louvers, or interfere with the electrical cord or power supply.

  • Avoid poorly ventilated locations.

This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.

  • Avoid locations where a considerable amount of dust accumulates.
  • Avoid locations where ammonia gas is emitted.

  • Avoid locations near volatile or flammable materials, such as alcohol or paint thinner.
  • Avoid locations that are subject to vibration.

For example, avoid installing the machine on unstable floors or stands.

  • Avoid exposing the machine to rapid changes in temperature.

If the room in which the machine is installed is cold but rapidly heated, water droplets (condensation) may form inside the machine. This may result in a noticeable degradation in the quality of the copied image, the inability to properly scan an original, or the copies having no printed image at all.

  • Avoid installing the machine near computers or other precision electronic equipment.

Electrical interference and vibrations generated by the machine during printing can adversely affect the operation of such equipment.

  • Avoid installing the machine near televisions, radios, or similar electronic equipment.

The machine might interfere with sound and picture signal reception. Insert the power plug into a dedicated power outlet, and maintain as much space as possible between the machine and other electronic equipment.

  • Do not remove the machine's leveling feet.

Do not remove the machine's leveling feet after the machine has been installed. If you put weight on the front of the machine while the drawers or units within the machine are pulled out, the machine may fall forward. To prevent this from happening, make sure that the machine's leveling feet are in place.



Select a Safe Power Supply

  • Plug the machine into a 220 - 240 V AC outlet.
  • Make sure that the power supply for the machine is safe, and has a steady voltage.
  • Do not connect other electrical equipment to the same power outlet to which the machine is connected.
  • Do not connect the power cord to a multiplug power strip, as this may cause a fire or electrical shock.
  • The power cord may become damaged if it is often stepped on or if heavy objects are placed on it. Continued use of a damaged power cord can lead to an accident, such as a fire or electrical shock.



Provide Adequate Installation Space

  • Provide enough space on each side of the machine for unrestricted operation.

No option is attached.

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1), Finisher-S1, and Paper Deck-Q1 are attached.

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1), Saddle Finisher-AE2, Puncher Unit-L1, Buffer Pass Unit-E2, and Paper Deck-Q1 are attached.



Moving the Machine

  • If you intend to move the machine, even to a location on the same floor of your building, contact your local authorized Canon dealer beforehand. Do not attempt to move the machine yourself.



Handling Precautions

  • Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the machine.

  • Some parts inside the machine are subject to high-voltages and temperatures. Take adequate precautions when inspecting the inside of the machine. Do not carry out any inspections not described in this manual.
  • Be careful not to spill liquid or drop any foreign objects, such as paper clips or staples inside the machine. If a foreign object comes into contact with electrical parts inside the machine, it might cause a short circuit and result in a fire or electrical shock.

  • If there is smoke, or unusual noise, immediately turn the main power switch OFF, disconnect the power cord from the outlet, and call your local authorized Canon dealer. Using the machine in this state may cause a fire or electrical shock. Also, avoid placing objects around the power plug so that the machine can be disconnected whenever necessary.

  • Do not turn the main power switch OFF or open the front covers while the machine is in operation. This might result in paper jams.
  • Do not use flammable sprays, such as spray glue, near the machine. There is a danger of ignition.

  • This machine generates a slight amount of ozone during normal use. Although sensitivity to ozone may vary, this amount is not harmful. Ozone may be more noticeable during extended use or long production runs, especially in poorly ventilated rooms. It is recommended that the room be appropriately ventilated, sufficient to maintain a comfortable working environment, in areas of machine operation.
  • For safety reasons, turn OFF the control panel power switch of the machine when it will not be used for a long period of time, such as overnight. As an added safety measure, turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord when the machine will not be used for an extended period of time, such as during consecutive holidays.

  • Use a modular cable that is shorter than three meters.


Backing Up Data

Data such as the Address Book and Additional Functions settings are stored on the internal hard disk of the machine.

Please regularly back up your important data, as it is possible that a malfunction in the hard disk may cause received data and stored data to be lost.

Please note that Canon will not be held responsible for any damages caused by the loss of data.

The data that can be backed up is indicated below.

  • Address Book, Additional Functions settings, forwarding settings, Mail Box function data (User Inbox data, forms for the Form Composition mode)

For information on backing up (exporting) this data, see "Remote UI."

  • Data that can be backed up using the Device Information Delivery Settings mode

You can perform temporary backing up of your data by delivering data registered in the machine to other client machines. For information on the Device Information Delivery Settings mode, see "Security."

  • Data relating to MEAP
  • License files for MEAP applications

For information on backing up (downloading) license files, see "MEAP/SSO."

  • User authentication information registered for the Local Device Authentication system of SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)

For information on backing up (exporting) user authentication information, see "MEAP/SSO."

  • Data stored by MEAP applications

You may be able to back up data stored by MEAP applications, depending on the application. For more information, see the documentation for each MEAP application.


Remark
  • If your machine is not connected to a network, it is recommended that you print and store important information such as the Address Book. See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive."


Parts and Their Functions

This section provides you with the names and functions of all the parts on the outside and inside of the main unit, control panel, and the touch panel display. An illustration of the machine with some optional equipment attached to it is also provided. For more information on optional equipment, parts and their functions, see "Optional Equipment."



External View

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1) and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 are attached.


1 Feeder (DADF-U1) (Optional)
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the platen glass for scanning. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make two or one sided copies. For the iR3245/iR3235, the Feeder (DADF-U1) is standard-equipped in some regions.
2 Control Panel
Includes the keys, touch panel display, and indicators required for operating the machine. (See "Control Panel Parts and Functions.")
3 Main Unit's Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the main unit. (See "Problem Solving.")
4 Stack Bypass
Use the stack bypass to feed paper manually, and for loading nonstandard paper stock, such as envelopes. (See "Basic Operations.")
5 Main Power Switch
Press to the "I" side to turn the power ON. (See "Main Power and Control Panel Power.")
6 Paper Drawer's Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam in Paper Drawers 1 and 2.
7 Paper Drawer 2
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
8 Paper Drawer 1
Holds up to 550 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
9 Output Tray
Prints and copies are output to this tray.
10 Output Paper Tray Guide
Tilt the output paper tray guide up to prevent output papers from falling down.
11 Test Button
Press this button to periodically test the circuit breaker. (See "Troubleshooting.")
12 Breaker
Detects excess current or leakage current. (See "Troubleshooting." )

Remark
  • For more information on the optional equipment, parts and their functions, see "Optional Equipment."


Internal View

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1) and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 are attached.


1 Platen Glass
Use the platen glass when scanning books, thick originals, thin originals, transparencies, etc.
2 Fixing Unit's Upper Cover
Open this cover to clear a paper jam in the fixing unit. (See "Problem Solving.")
3 Duplexing Unit
Pull out the duplexing unit to clear a paper jam. (See "Problem Solving.")
4 Toner Supply Port Cover
Open this cover to replace the toner cartridge.
5 Toner Cartridge
When toner runs out, pull out the toner cartridge, and replace it with a new one. Toner cartridges are sold separately (not standard equipment). (See "Maintenance.")


Control Panel Parts and Functions


1

Control Panel Power Switch (Sub Power Supply)
Press to turn the control panel ON or OFF. When the control panel power switch is held for more than three seconds, it initiates the Shutdown mode. (See "Shutting Down the Machine.") When turned OFF, the machine is in the Sleep mode.

2 Counter Check key
Press to display the copy and print count totals on the touch panel display.
3 Stop key
Press to stop a job in progress, such as a scan, copy, or fax (scanning only) job.
4 Start key
Press to start an operation.
5 Main Power Indicator
Lights when the main power is turned ON.
6 Error Indicator
Flashes or lights if there is an error in the machine. When the Error indicator flashes, follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display. When the Error indicator maintains a steady red light, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
7 Processing/Data Indicator
Flashes or blinks green when the machine is performing operations, and maintains a steady green light when fax data is stored in memory.
8 Clear key
Press to clear entered values or characters.
9 Numeric keys
Press to enter numerical values.
10 ID (Log In/Out) key
Press when setting or enabling Department ID
Management.
11 Fax Volume Settings Key
Press to display the screen for adjusting settings such as the transmission volume and fax sending/receiving alarm volume.
12 Brightness Adjustment Dial
Use to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display.
13 Additional Functions key
Press to specify additional functions.
14 Help key
Press to display explanations and instructions of modes or functions on the touch panel display.
15 Reset key
Press to restore the standard settings of the machine.
16 Touch Panel Display
The settings screen for each function is shown on this display.
17 Edit Pen
Use when operating the touch panel display, such as to enter characters. If you lose the edit pen, contact your local authorized Canon dealer. Do not use an object with a sharp end on the control panel, such as a pencil or ballpoint pen, in place of the edit pen.
18 USB Port
Use to connect memory media to the machine via USB.


Main Power and Control Panel Power

The machine is provided with two power switches, a main power switch and a control panel power switch, as well as a breaker that detects excess current or leakage current.



How to Turn ON the Main Power

This section explains how to turn ON the main power.


  1. Make sure that the power plug is firmly inserted into the power outlet.
  • Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
  1. Press the main power switch to the "I" side. The main power switch is located on the right side of the machine.

The main power indicator on the control panel lights when the main power switch is turned ON.

  • If the main power indicator on the control panel does not light even though the main power switch is ON, be sure to check the breaker to see if it is OFF. (See "Problem Solving.")
  1. The screens shown below are displayed while the system software is loading.

  • The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.

If a message is displayed on the touch panel display, proceed to step 4.

  • The screen below is displayed when the machine is ready to scan.

  • Once the message <Reservation copies can be made.> appears on the touch panel display, you can specify settings, and copying or printing begins automatically as soon as the machine finishes warming up. (See "Copy.")
  • In the case above, the standard settings are selected.
  • The standard copy settings are:
  • Copy Ratio:
1:1 (100%)
  • Paper Selection:
Auto Paper Selection
  • Copy Exposure:
Automatic Exposure Adjustment
  • Copy Quantity:
1
  • Copy Function:
11-sided copy
  • You can select which functions to display on the Basic Features screen when turning ON the main power, according to the Additional Functions settings. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • If you press [→] on the Basic Features screen right after the machine is activated, the screen will be blank. Wait for a moment, and then press [→] again.
  • If a Macintosh, which has been shut down, is connected to the machine via a USB cable, when you turn the machine ON, the Macintosh may also turn ON. In this case, disconnect the Macintosh from the machine. (You may also be able to solve this problem by using a USB hub between the machine and the Macintosh).

  • The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.

  • After the Start Up screen disappears, the MEAP Start Up screen is displayed.

You can press [→] to switch to the Basic Features screen to use the Copy, Mail Box, etc. functions even if the MEAP Start Up screen is still displayed.

  • The MEAP Application screen is displayed.


  • The Start Up screen is displayed until the machine is ready to scan.

  • After the Start Up screen disappears, the MEAP Start Up screen is displayed regardless of the Set as Initial Function settings.

  • Do not turn the main power OFF, if you want to send or receive I-fax documents. Also, do not turn the main power OFF, if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional fax board is installed, and you want to be able to send or receive fax documents. Sending or receiving I-fax or fax documents cannot be done when the main power is turned OFF.
  • If SSO-H is set as the login service, the machine will take longer to become ready to scan.

  1. If you are using a login service, log in using the procedure for the login service you are using.
  • If you are using Department ID Management with the optional Card Reader-C1, see "Optional Equipment."


Control Panel Power Switch

Press the control panel power switch to cancel the Sleep mode and resume normal machine operations.


Remark
  • The machine can receive and print documents from a personal computer when it is in the Sleep mode. I-fax and fax documents can also be received while the machine is in the Sleep mode.
  • It takes approximately 10 seconds to recover after the Sleep mode is deactivated.
  • If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to 'Low', it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch panel display to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.


Shutting Down the Machine

If there are any jobs currently being processed, or a MEAP application is running when the Shutdown mode is activated, the machine asks you to confirm and cancel any existing jobs, and then access to the hard disk is restricted. This procedure protects the hard disk from access errors the next time the machine is turned ON. When the machine shuts down, it also performs an internal cooling down process, which enables the machine to be shut down safely. Follow the instructions below to safely shutdown the machine.


Remark
  • If you turn the main power of the machine OFF without following the procedure below, copies output the next time the machine is turned ON may not be printed correctly. In this case, printing will return to normal after a certain number of copies are output.

  1. Press and hold the control panel power switch for more than three seconds.

If the machine is in the Sleep mode, press the control panel power switch one time to cancel the Sleep mode, and then press and hold the control panel power switch again for more than three seconds.

The job confirmation screen is displayed.

  • Do not initiate the Shutdown mode while fonts are being downloaded.
  • You can also force the machine into the Shutdown mode by pressing (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Shutdown Mode].
  • You cannot force the machine into the Shutdown mode in the following cases:
  • When the machine is receiving and updating device information
  • When the machine is browsing device information
  • When the machine is importing or exporting data using the Remote UI function
  • In a rare instance, the machine may not go into the Shutdown mode even if you press and hold the control panel power switch for more than three seconds. In this case, follow the instructions on the touch panel display to turn OFF the main power.
  • If print data is sent while the machine is in the Shutdown mode, the machine may receive the data, depending on the print data's size. However, the print data is not printed.
  1. Confirm the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed → press [Start].

Jobs continue to be processed until [Start] is pressed.

To cancel the Shutdown mode, press [Cancel].

If there are no current jobs, proceed to step 4.

  • Jobs that are displayed on the job confirmation screen are:
  • Current copy, fax, and print jobs (including secured print jobs)
  • Copy and print jobs (including secured print jobs) that are waiting to be processed
  • On the job confirmation screen, the current job is displayed on the first line, and the other jobs are processed in the order in which they were reserved (up to seven jobs).
  1. Confirm the message displayed → press [Yes].


If There Are Jobs Currently Being Processed or Waiting to Be Processed



If the Device Information Is Being Delivered


All of the jobs on the confirmation screen being processed or waiting to be processed are canceled. The machine and any network communication processes also start to shut down.

The Performing Shutdown screen appears.

  1. When the following screen appears, wait for the machine to complete the shutdown process.

If you need to immediately operate the machine after starting the shutdown process, press [Restart] → [Yes].

If you press [Restart] when device information is being updated, a message asking for your confirmation to continue appears on the screen. Press [Yes].

  • You can also force the shutdown of the machine (omitting the normal job cancellation process) by pressing [Forced Off]. If you press [Forced Off] while data is being processed or the machine is shutting down, a message asking for your confirmation to continue appears on the screen. Press [Yes]. However, as it is possible that this will destroy data, which is being processed or cause damage to the machine, it is not recommended. Note that Canon will not be liable for any damages resulting from the loss of data on the hard disk drive. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When the machine shuts down, it also performs an internal cooling down process. It may take some time for the machine to shut down due to this process.
  • It may take some time for the machine to completely shut down depending on the application you are using.
  • The screen below is displayed when you press [Forced Off] in the following case.
  • When the hardware is in finishing process
  • When device information is being updated

  1. After the machine shuts down, the control power switch automatically turns OFF and the main power switch of machine automatically switches to the "" side.
  • The machine may continue to operate during or after the shutdown process. Do not unplug the power cord until the device sounds stop.


How To Use This Manual

Please read this manual (e-Manual) thoroughly before operating the machine to familiarize yourself with its capabilities, and to make the most of its many functions. After reading the e-Manual, store it in a safe place for future reference.



e-Manual

By using the e-Manual, you can select and view HTML manuals included on the CD-ROM via your computer. Follow the instructions below to use the e-Manual.



System Requirements

The e-Manual is guaranteed to operate in the following system environments.

  • OS (Operating System)
Windows: 2000 SP4, XP, Vista
Even if you are using Windows 2000 SP4, Internet Explorer 6.0 or later is required.
Mac: OSX.4.x
  • Web Browser
Windows: Internet Explorer 6.0 or 7.0
Mac: Safari 2.0.x
  • Flash Player

Flash Player 8.0 or later


Remark
  • The memory and CPU required to run each operating system are also required.
  • A display resolution of 1024 × 768 pixels or higher is required.
  • The e-Manual may not operate correctly if Flash Player is not installed or a version of Flash Player earlier than the above is installed in your computer.


e-Manual Menu

When using the e-Manual with Windows, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the e-Manual in your computer.
2. Select the language to install the manual (e-Manual).
3. Select [Install] or [Display Manual].
If [Install] is selected, the manual (e-Manual) is saved in My Documents. If the shortcut icon created on the desktop, or [index.html] saved in the folder is double-clicked, the Manual (e-Manual) is displayed.
If [Display Manual] is selected, the Manual (e-Manual) is displayed.

When using the e-Manual with Macintosh, follow the steps below.
1. Insert the e-Manual in your computer.
2. Drag-and-drop the [iR3245_Manual_eng] folder into the location you want to save it.
3. Double-click [index.html] in the [iR3245_Manual_eng] folder, and the Manual (e-Manual) is displayed.


Remark
  • Depending on the operating system you are using, a security protection message may be displayed. In this case, allow the contents to be displayed.
  • When you start the e-Manual, the following screen (the top page) is displayed.


1 Function Categories
Select a category from the drop-down list and click [Display], or click the button to display a list of image icons. Click an image icon to display the topic pages.
If you click the [Display Function List] displayed in the list of image icons, a list of all the topic page titles is displayed. When there are also sub-categories, they can be selected from the drop-down list in the image icon list.
2 Appendix Categories
Select an appendix category to display topic pages such as the maintenance and optional equipment topics.
3 [Function List]
Click to display the topic pages for function categories.
4 [Contents]
Click to display the contents for the function categories and appendix categories in a separate window.
5 [Index]
Click to display the index for the function categories and appendix categories in a separate window.
6 [Glossary]
Click to display the glossary in a separate window.
7 [Search]
Click to display a list of the topic page titles that include the phrase you enter and the category names that they belong to. Click a title to display the corresponding topic page.
8 [Print]
Click to print all categories or a single category. When there are sub-categories, you can print them separately.
9 PDF Guides
Click to display the Getting Started, Easy Operation Guide, and Troubleshooting in the PDF format.
10 [Important Notice]
Click to display important notices in a separate window. Only displayed when there are important notices.
11 [Office Locations]
Click to display Canon contact details in a separate window.
12 [Top]
Click to return to the top page.

Remark
  • If the Windows CD-ROM auto play feature is not enabled, click [Start] on the Windows task bar → [My Computer]. (Windows Vista: click [start] on the Windows task bar → [Computer]. Windows 2000: double-click [My Computer] on the Windows desktop.) Open the e-Manual icon, then double-click start.exe.
  • When performing a search, make sure to enter a phrase that will match a keyword.
  • Depending on the environment of your computer and the phrase you enter, the correct search results may not be displayed or may take time to be displayed. Also, a confirmation screen may be displayed before executing the search.
  • If you are using Safari and search results are not displayed, click [View] → [Reload Page] from the menu bar.
  • Topic pages can be printed by category or topic.
  • The background color and images of the Topic Page may not be printed, depending on the web browser settings.


How To Use This Manual (e-Manual)


Symbols Used in This Manual

The following symbols are used in this manual to explain procedures, restrictions, handling precautions, and instructions that should be observed for safety.

WARNING/CAUTION Indicates a warning or a caution concerning operations that may lead to death or injury to persons, or damage to property if not performed correctly. To use this machine safely, always pay attention to these warnings and cautions.
IMPORTANT Indicates operational requirements and restrictions. Be sure to read these items carefully to operate the machine correctly, and avoid damage to the machine.
NOTE Indicates a clarification of an operation, or contains additional explanations for a procedure. Reading these notes is highly recommended.


Keys Used in This Manual

The following symbols and key names are a few examples of how keys to be pressed are expressed in this manual:

  • Touch Panel Display Keys: [Key Name]
    Examples: [Cancel]
    [Done]
  • Control Panel Keys: Key Icon (Key Name)
    Examples: (Start)
    (Stop)


Displays Used in This Manual

Screen shots of the touch panel display used in this manual are those taken when the optional Color Universal Send Kit has been activated, and the following optional equipment is attached to the iR3245: the Feeder (DADF-U1), Super G3 FAX Board, UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, Finisher-S1, Additional Finisher Tray-B1, and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3.

Note that functions that cannot be used depending on the model or options, are not displayed on the touch panel display.

The keys which you should press are marked with a , as shown below.

When multiple keys can be pressed on the touch panel display, all keys are marked. Select the keys, which suit your needs.



Illustrations Used in This Manual

Illustrations used in this manual are those displayed when the iR3245 has the following optional equipment attached to it: the Feeder (DADF-U1), Finisher-S1, Additional Finisher Tray-B1, and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3.



Abbreviations Used in This Manual

In this manual, product names and model names are abbreviated as follows:

Microsoft Windows 98: Windows 98

Microsoft Windows 98 Second Edition: Windows 98 SE

Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition: Windows Me

Microsoft Windows 2000: Windows 2000

Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional: Windows 2000 Professional

Microsoft Windows 2000 Server: Windows 2000 Server

Microsoft Windows Server 2003: Windows Server 2003

Microsoft Windows Server 2003 R2: Windows Server 2003 R2

Microsoft Windows XP Professional Edition: Windows XP Professional

Microsoft Windows XP: Windows XP

Microsoft Windows Vista operating system: Windows Vista

Microsoft Windows operating system: Windows

Novell NetWare: NetWare

Apple Macintosh: Macintosh

Apple Mac: Mac



Trademarks

MEAP and the MEAP logo are trademarks of Canon Inc.

Apple, AppleTalk, EtherTalk, LocalTalk, Mac, Mac OS, Macintosh, QuickTime and TrueType are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Safari and Tiger are trademarks of Apple Inc.

Windows, Windows logo, Windows Vista and Windows Vista logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

The following fonts are licensed from Bitstream Technologies, Inc.
Dutch 801 Bold, Dutch 801 Roman, Fixed Pitch 810 Courier 10 Pitch/Text.

The following font is a trademark of Bitstream Inc.
Dutch 801
© Copyright 1987, Bitstream Inc., Cambridge Massachusetts USA.
All rights reserved.

Concerning typeface credit, the actual names on a FONT LIST for this machine may differ from those listed below.

CG, Intellifont, and UFST are trademarks of Agfa Monotype Corporation or its affiliated companies and may be registered in some jurisdictions.

Marigold and Oxford are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.

Apple, Apple Chancery, Chicago, Geneva, Hoefler Text, Monaco, and New York are trademarks of Apple Inc.

ITC AvantGarde Gothic, ITC Bookman, ITC Lubalin Graph, ITC Mona Lisa, ITC Symbol, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.

Clarendon, Helvetica, New Century Schoolbook, Optima, Palatino, Stempel Garamond, and Times are trademarks of Linotype-Hell AG and its subsidiaries.

Univers is a trademark of Linotype-Hell AG and its subsidiaries and may be registered in some jurisdictions.

Coronet is a registered trademark of Ludlow Type Foundry.

Wingdings is a trademark of Microsoft Corporation.

Albertus, Arial, Book Antiqua, Bookman Old style, Century Gothic, Gill Sans, Joanna, and Times New Roman are trademarks of the Monotype Corporation plc., and may be registered in some jurisdictions.

CG Omega is a product of Agfa Corporation and CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from the Monotype Corporation plc, is a product of Agfa Corporation.

Eurostile is a trademark of Nebiolo.


Java and all Java-based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. or other countries.

Other product and company names herein may be the trademarks of their respective owners.



Operations and Terms Used in This Manual (e-Manual)

This machine makes effective use of memory to perform print operations efficiently. For example, as soon as the machine has scanned the original that you want to copy, it can immediately scan the next person's original. You can also print from this machine, using a function other than the Copy function. In this machine, these operations take place in a complex way, so that not only copies, but also various kinds of prints may sometimes have to wait their turn before they can be printed.

To avoid confusion when reading this manual (e-Manual), the terms "scanning," "printing," and "copying," used throughout this manual are defined below. When making a copy, the process of scanning originals and printing copies may be described as separate functions.



What This Machine Can Do

This category describes the features of the machine and its useful functions.



What This Machine Can Do

All the elements you will ever need in a digital multitasking machine

The iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 incorporates a rich array of input and output features that can greatly enhance your efficiency. Equipped with features that meet the needs of document work in a digitized office, the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 represents the ultimate in digital multitasking machines.

An asterisk (*) indicates functions, which require optional equipment. For information on the optional equipment required to use each function, and the available combinations of optional equipment, see "Optional Equipment."

  • Copying → See "Copy"

In addition to normal copying functions, convenient new functions, such as "Sample Set" which helps to avoid copy errors, "Booklet" for making copies into booklets, and "Different Size Originals" for copying originals of different sizes together in one copy operation, are provided to increase your productivity.

The Mail Box function enables you to save document data that has been scanned from the scanner unit or created on a PC. The saved data can be printed at a specified time, or merged with separately saved data or data created on a PC for simultaneous processing.

The Send function enables you to send scanned image or document data to file servers, or send it by e-mail or I-fax. A variety of file formats are supported (PDF, JPEG, TIFF, and XPS), which offer you greater flexibility in accommodating digital workplace environments.

In addition to normal facsimile functions, the machine offers you Super G3 compatibility, which enables you to transmit documents at high speeds, greatly reducing transmission costs as compared to conventional facsimile machines. Scanned documents as well as documents stored in the inbox, and computer data can be sent by facsimile. You can also send documents to multiple addresses and forward received facsimile to another destination.

If the UFR II Printer Kit, UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, PCL Printer Kit, or PS Printer Kit is activated, you can upgrade this machine to a high-speed network printer. Various outputs are also possible when printing, such as 2-sided printing and page alignment. The Direct Printing Kit enables you to print a TIFF, PDF, or XPS without opening the file from your computer, using the Remote UI.

  • Using the Remote User Interface → See "Remote UI"

You can control functions, such as confirming the status of the machine, job operations, and printing instructions for data saved in inboxes, all from your PC's Web browser.

The MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform) incorporated in the machine enables you to install applications to expand the functions of the machine.

The Network Scan function enables you to use the machine as a conventional scanner. You can scan a document using the machine, and read the data in an application you are using on your computer. You can scan images of up to A3 in size at a resolution of 600 × 600 dpi.

* The Network ScanGear software can be installed from the same User Software CD-ROM as the printer driver. For more information on the installation of the Network ScanGear software, see the "Network ScanGear Installation Guide."

You can perform various settings of the machine connected to a network when using utility software. You can perform initial settings, confirm the status of the machine, and manage documents.



Overview of the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225

Most operations on this machine are executed from the touch panel display. By pressing the keys according to the instructions on the touch panel display, you can utilize almost all of the functions of this machine.


Remark
  • Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers or the edit pen. Do not press the touch panel display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it.
  • Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.


The Touch Panel Display

Keys for using the machine's main functions are located on the top of the touch panel display. To use any of the desired function's features, you must first press the key for the desired function. The area on the bottom of the touch panel display is used for messages that indicate the status of the machine. The System Monitor key, which enables you to check the status of the various devices, jobs, and consumables, is also displayed here.



Switching the Functions Indicated on the Touch Panel Display

After the power is turned ON, the following screen appears on the touch panel display. You can press [Copy], [Send], [Mail Box], [Print Job], [Scan], or [System Monitor] to change functions. (See "Additional Functions.") To display other functions, such as an installed MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform) application, press [→].


Remark
  • You can set the initial screen (the first screen that appears when the machine is turned ON) from the Additional Functions screen. The initial screen can be the Copy, Send or Fax, Mail Box, Print Job, MEAP, or System Monitor screen.

  • Keys Displayed on the Touch Panel Display

The Copy Basic Features screen is shown as an example below.

1 Copy
Press this key to access the machine's copying functions. (See "Copy.")
2 Send
Press this key to access the machine's sending functions, and facsimile functions. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")
3 Mail Box
Press this key to access the machine's mailbox functions. (See "Mail Box.")
4 Print Job
Press this key to check or cancel print jobs, and to check or print the print job log. (See "Basic Operations.")
5
Press this key to gain access to hidden function keys. The function keys are displayed on two screens. You can also customize the order of the function keys in Function Display Settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
6 System Monitor
Press this key to change, check, or cancel jobs, and to check or print the job log. (See "Basic Operations.")
7 Job/Print Status Display Area
The progress of jobs and copy operations, and the status of devices and consumables are displayed here. Also, depending on the login service you are using, the current ID or user name can be displayed here. (See "Security.")
8 Scan
Press this key to use the Network Scan function. (See "Scanner Driver.")
9 Web Access
Press this key to view Web pages.


Various Touch Panel Display Screens

The top of the touch panel display may differ according to the optional equipment attached to the machine.

Attached Optional Equipment Displayed Function Keys
None
Color Universal Send Kit

Optional FAX Board

Color Universal Send Kit and Web Access Software



Adding New Functions

This machine is compliant with MEAP (Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform). MEAP is a software platform that enables the development of custom applications based on Sun Microsystems' Java and Java 2 Platform, Micro Edition (J2ME).

MEAP enables you to do the following:

  • Install/Uninstall Customized Applications

Installing MEAP applications enables you to utilize new customizable functions for the machine. You can also uninstall these applications.


Remark
  • For instructions on installing and uninstalling MEAP applications, see "MEAP/SSO."

  • User Management and Restriction Using a Login Service

A login service manages data relating to users using the machine. The following two login services are available:

  • Default Authentication
    Use the authentication method set on the machine, such as Department ID Management or System Manager Settings, as the login service.
  • SSO-H (Single Sign-On H)
    A login service which can be used in an Active Directory environment network or in the machine. It contains the following user authentication systems. (See "MEAP/SSO.")
  • Domain Authentication
  • Local Device Authentication
  • Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication

Remark
  • Default Authentication is selected as the default login service. For instructions on selecting and setting a login service other than default authentication, see "MEAP/SSO."


Specifying Settings

The Additional Functions screen appears when you press (Additional Functions). The Additional Functions screen enables you to make common settings related to many functions of the machine, as well as customize specific functions to suit your needs. For more information on the settings not explained in this category, see the following:

The Additional Functions Screen


The System Functions Screen


Remark
  • Settings made from the Additional Functions screen are not changed even if you press (Reset).
  • For instructions on specifying System Settings, see "Security."
  • For instructions on specifying Network Settings, see "Network."
  • [Communications Settings] and [Address Book Settings] are displayed on the Additional Functions screen only if the optional Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional fax board is installed.
  • [Communications Settings], [Forwarding Settings], [Restrict Access to Destinations], and [Register LDAP Server] are displayed on the System Settings screen only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, or the optional fax board is installed.
  • [Auto Online/Offline] is displayed on the System Settings screen only if the optional UFR II Printer Kit, UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, PCL Printer Kit, or PS Printer Kit is activated.


Functions That Conserve Power

You can conserve power efficiently when the machine is not being used by using the following modes.


Remark
  • Even if the main power switch is turned OFF, a small amount of energy is consumed if the power plug is left inserted into the power outlet. If you do not want any energy consumed, remove the power plug from the power outlet.
  • The touch panel display turns OFF when the machine enters one of the energy saving modes.
  • The machine can continue to receive I-fax or fax documents, and process or print data sent from computers even if it is in one of the energy saving modes described below.

  • Auto Sleep Mode

You can set the machine to enter the Sleep mode whenever you desire, by pressing the control panel power switch, or specify to have the machine enter the Sleep mode at a preset time. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch again.


Remark
  • The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely depending on certain conditions. (For more information, see "Additional Functions.")
  • Turn the control panel power switch OFF when not using the machine for a prolonged period of time, for example, at night.
  • If a Macintosh, which has been shut down, is connected to the machine via a USB cable, when you turn the machine ON, the Macintosh may also turn ON. In this case, disconnect the Macintosh from the machine. (You may also be able to solve this problem by using a USB hub between the machine and the Macintosh).
  • The time it takes for the machine to automatically enter the Sleep mode can be set from 10 seconds to 4 hours. The default setting is '1' minute. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to 'Low', it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch panel to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.

  • Daily Timer

The machine automatically enters the Sleep mode at the specified time and day of the week set with the daily timer. To reactivate the machine, press the control panel power switch.


Remark
  • The Daily Timer settings can be set from Sunday to Saturday and 00:00 to 23:59. (See "Additional Functions.")


Checking, Changing, and Canceling Print Jobs

The System Monitor screen enables you to check the status of the machine, cancel print jobs, or specify the printing priority.

The System Monitor Screen (Print)


The System Monitor Screen (Device)

On the Print Job screen, you can confirm, cancel, or change the priority of print jobs.

The Print Job Screen


Remark
  • The meanings of the icons that appear in the Job/Print Status Display Area (on the bottom left of the screen) are described below:

Icon (Type of Job) Description
Copy Job
Send/Fax Job
Mail Box Job
Printer Job
Report Job
Network Scan Job
Remote Copy Job
Additional Functions Job

Icon (Machine Status) Description
Error
Paper Jam
Staple Jam
Replace Toner Cartridge


Displaying a Help Screen

Pressing (Help) brings up a guidance screen with information about the various features that are available with your machine. Follow the instructions on the screen to select the operation you want to perform. An explanation of the function and how to set it is displayed.

  • Main Menu

This is the first screen displayed when you press (Help).

Press [Using the Help Function] to display an explanation of how to use the Help function.

  • List Screen

Displays a list of the functions selected on the main menu.

  • Explanation Screen

Displays a detailed explanation of the function selected on the list screen.

Press [Try It] to jump to the screen for setting the selected function.

Press [Display more detailed settings.] to display more detailed information and related topics.


Remark
  • The [Try It] key and [Display more detailed settings.] are only displayed on the Explanation Screen for some Copy and Send functions.

Example:
The procedure for copying on a nonstandard paper size.


  1. Press [Making Copies] → [Copying on a Nonstandard Paper Size].

  1. Check the detailed information for the function.

Press [Try It] → [Yes] to try using the function.



Reading Messages from the System Manager

The System Manager uses the Message Board feature of the machine to convey messages to the users of this machine. The messages are sent through the Remote User Interface and displayed on the touch panel display. (See "Remote UI.")


Remark
  • The message board can be used only if the machine is connected to a network.
  • For instructions on erasing the message board, see "Security."


Types of Message Boards

The following three types of message boards are available:

  • A Message Board without [Done]

  • A Message Board with [Done]

If you press [Done] and close the message board, you can perform normal operations. The message appears again when the main power is turned OFF, and then turned back ON, or after the Auto Clear mode has activated.



Remark
  • The Auto Clear mode does not activate if Auto Clear Time is set to '0'. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • A Message Board Where the Message Appears in the Job/Print Status Display Area



Other Useful Functions

Other useful functions are:

  • Auto Drawer Switching

If a paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, the machine automatically locates another paper drawer loaded with the same size paper, and begins feeding paper from that paper drawer.


Remark
  • You can set whether a paper drawer is subject to automatic paper drawer switching for each function. The default setting is 'Off' for the stack bypass, and 'On' for the other paper drawers. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Auto Clear

If the machine is not used for a period of approximately two minutes after the last print job or key operation is performed, the machine automatically restores the standard settings.


Remark
  • You can set the Auto Clear Time from 0 to 9 minutes in one minute increments. The default setting is '2' minutes. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • The Auto Clear mode does not activate if Auto Clear Time is set to '0'.

  • Job Duration Display

If you set Job Duration Display to 'On' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the display shows the time duration before a print job completes.


Remark
  • Even if Job Duration Display is set to 'On', the job duration time is not displayed when the wait time is less than one minute.

  • Number of Copies/Job Duration Status Display

If you set Number of Copies/Job Duration Status Display to 'On' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen), the number of copies specified and the approximate time before the current job completes is displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area.


Remark
  • The approximate time is not displayed when the wait time is less than one minute. (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Paper Supply Indicator

The paper supply indicator shows the remaining amount of paper in each paper drawer on the Paper Select screen, and on the screen that appears when paper in a paper drawer has run out during printing. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")

There are four different paper supply indicators, as shown below:

Display Remaining Paper
Paper drawer is approximately 50% - 100% full.
Paper drawer is approximately 10% - 50% full.
Paper drawer is less than 10% full.
Paper drawer is empty.
  • Auto Orientation

Using information, such as the size of the original and zoom ratio, the machine automatically rotates the image to the most suitable orientation for the selected paper size.

If the image does not fit onto the paper after it is rotated, the machine will not rotate the image, and will print it as is, with part of the image cut off.

Even if Auto Orientation is set to 'On', the image is not rotated if the Different Size Originals, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Staple (Double), Transparency Interleaving, XY Zoom, Shift, or Image Repeat mode is set. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")



Basic Operations

This category describes the basic operations of the machine.



Using the Touch Panel Display

This section describes the keys that are frequently used on the touch panel display. Information on how to adjust the brightness of the touch panel display is also provided.


Remark
  • Press the touch panel display keys gently with your fingers or the edit pen. Do not press the touch panel display with a pencil, ballpoint pen, or other sharp objects that can scratch the surface of the touch panel display or break it.
  • Before using the touch panel display, peel off the protective film from the display.


Frequently Used Keys

The following keys on the touch panel display are used frequently:

Press to cancel the mode that you are currently setting, or a mode that has already been set, on screens other than the Additional Functions screen. Also, press to close the current mode's setting screen, and keep the original settings set from the Additional Functions screen.
Press to confirm the current settings and proceed to the next step in the procedure.
Press to go back to the previous step in the procedure, without saving the current settings.
Press to close the current screen.
Press to confirm the current settings of a mode.


Touch Panel Key Display

When you press a key on the touch panel display that key is highlighted, and the corresponding mode is set. When you set certain modes, the characters on some keys may become grayed out. You cannot press keys that are grayed out. This means that you cannot set these modes in combination with the presently set mode.

  • Mode Setting Keys
State of Keys Description
The Shift mode is not set, and can be selected.

(The key is highlighted)
The Shift mode is set, and can be selected.

(The characters on the key are grayed out.)
The Shift mode cannot be set in combination with the presently set mode.
  • Keys That Indicate When a Mode Is Turned On or Off
Mode Is Turned Off Mode Is Turned On

(Checked)

(Highlighted)

Keys that have a right triangle () indicate that those keys have additional screens to set their functions. If you press a key that does not have a right triangle (), it turns that mode on or off.

Keys That Display Additional Settings Keys That Turn Modes On/Off

Keys that have a colored triangle () in the lower right corner and that appear on screens for storing settings, are keys that already have settings stored in them.

Settings Are Stored No Settings Are Stored
  • Keys That Display a Drop-Down List

Pressing a key that has a down triangle () to the right of the name of the selection, displays a drop-down list containing other setting options.

Before Selection Drop-Down List After Selection
  • Numeric Keys

Any time the numeric keys icon is displayed on the screen, you can use the numeric keys on the control panel to enter values.





You can enter values using the numeric keys on the touch panel display or on the control panel.
You can only enter values using the numeric keys on the control panel.


Adjusting the Brightness

If the touch panel display is difficult to view, use the Brightness Adjustment Dial on the control panel to adjust its brightness.


Remark
  • To make the touch panel display brighter, turn the dial counterclockwise. To make it darker, turn the dial clockwise.


Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display

For screens that require alphanumeric entries, enter characters using the keys displayed on the touch panel display, as shown below.


Remark
  • When entering characters on the SSO-H authentication screen or in MEAP application functions, the screen you actually see may be different.


Entering Characters

  1. Press the entry mode drop-down list → select the entry mode → enter characters.

The procedure for entering characters with the entry mode is as follows.


Entry Mode Example Procedure
Alphanum. Canon Enter 'Canon'.
Symbol é Press [é].

To enter uppercase letters, press [Shift].

To enter a space, press [Space].

To move the cursor, press [] or [].

To switch the entry mode, press the entry mode drop-down list → select the entry mode → enter the desired characters or symbols.

  • If you make a mistake when entering characters, press [] or [] to position the cursor → press [Backspace] to delete the characters → enter the correct characters.
  • To delete all of the characters you have entered, press (Clear).
  • The available entry modes, and the maximum number of characters that you can enter vary, depending on the type of entries you are making.
  1. When you have entered all characters, press [OK].


Values in Inches

If you want to enter values in inches in all modes, which require a numeric entry, set Inch Entry to 'On' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.") This enables you to enter values in inches when you press [Inch] on a screen requiring a numeric entry or measurement.

The following example shows you how to enter 1 1/2" for Original Size in the Zoom Program mode.


  1. Press [1] → [_] → [1] → [/] → [2] using the numeric keys on the touch panel display.

  • If you make a mistake when entering values, press [C] on the touch panel display → enter the correct values.
  • You can enter only 2, 4, 8, or 16 as the denominator.
  • The value entered in inches is converted to millimeters by the machine each time it is entered. Thus, there may be a slight difference between the value calculated and the actual value entered.
  • To enter values in millimeters, press [mm].


Entering Characters Using a USB Keyboard

If you connect a USB keyboard to the machine, you can enter characters using that keyboard instead of entering characters from the touch panel display.


Remark
  • Do not insert the connector of the USB keyboard into the USB port at an angle. If you insert it at an angle or insert a connector of a shape that does not meet the USB specifications, the USB port may be damaged.
  • When a USB keyboard is connected to the machine, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • Some USB keyboards may not operate correctly, as indicated below.
  • Use a commercially sold USB keyboard.

  • Regarding USB Keyboards

When the Keyboard screen is displayed on the touch panel display, you can enter characters using a USB keyboard instead of entering characters from the touch panel display.

Even when using a USB keyboard, you can use the Keyboard screen on the touch panel display, and - (numeric keys) on the control panel.


Remark
  • To use a USB keyboard, [Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device] must be set to 'Off' and [Use USB Host] must be set to 'On' in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • A USB keyboard can be removed at any time. It is not necessary to perform any special operation to remove it.

  • Entering Characters

When the Keyboard screen is displayed on the touch panel display, characters entered from a USB keyboard are displayed on the touch panel display. For information on entering characters from the touch panel display, see "Entering Characters from the Touch Panel Display."

This section describes the differences between entering characters from the touch panel display and entering characters from a USB keyboard.

  • You can only enter ASCII characters from a USB keyboard. You can also use the spacebar and the arrow keys. For information on ASCII characters, see "ASCII code" in the Glossary.
  • It is not necessary to change the entry mode drop-down list on the touch panel display to enter characters that are not displayed on the touch panel display from the USB keyboard.
  • When the entry mode drop-down list is displayed on the touch panel display, you cannot enter characters from a USB keyboard.
  • To enter uppercase characters, enter the characters while holding the Shift key on the USB keyboard. Even if you press [Shift] on the touch panel display, the characters entered from the USB keyboard will not become uppercase.
  • The Enter key of the USB keyboard is only used to enter line breaks. Even when using a USB keyboard, it is necessary to press [OK] on the touch panel display when you have finished entering characters.
  • Keys that are not displayed on the Keyboard screen of the touch panel display, such as Delete, End, Tab, Esc, and the numeric keys and function keys, cannot be used on a USB keyboard.
  • The sound made when entering characters with a USB keyboard can be changed by setting the sound made when entering characters on the Keyboard screen of the touch panel display. For information on setting the sound, see "Tone Settings."


Entering the Department ID and Password

If Department ID Management has been set, the Department ID and password must be entered before using this machine.


Remark
  • For instructions on setting the Department ID and password, see "Security."
  • If you are using a control card for Department ID management, the message <You must insert a control card.> appears on the touch panel display. Insert the control card into the card slot. (See "Optional Equipment.")
  • The use of some functions may be restricted, and a screen asking you to enter your Department ID and password or insert your control card may appear while you are using the machine. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display to continue using the selected function.
  • If you are using a MEAP application to manage user authentication, and SSO-H is set as the login service, the following procedure is not necessary. (See "Using a Login Service.")

  1. Use - (numeric keys) to enter your Department ID and password.
  • Press [Dept. ID] → enter your Department ID.
  • Press [Password] → enter the password.

If no password has been set, proceed to step 2.

The numbers that you enter for the password are displayed as asterisks (*******).

  • If you make a mistake when entering the Department ID or password, press (Clear) → enter the correct values.
  1. Press (Log In/Out).

The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel display.

  • If the Department ID or password that you entered is incorrect, the message <This number has not been registered. Enter the number again.> appears. Repeat this procedure from step 1.
  1. When your operations are complete, press (Log In/Out) on the control panel.

If you are using a control card, remove the control card, and take it with you. (See "Optional Equipment.")

The screen for entering the Department ID and password appears.

  • To perform operations again, you have to re-enter your Department ID and password.
  • If you do not press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, any subsequent copies made are added to the total of the Department ID you previously entered.
  • Even if you forget to press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, the screen for entering the Department ID and password automatically appears after the set Auto Clear Time elapses. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • After pressing (Log In/Out), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to the Standard mode.


Using a Login Service

If you are managing the machine with a login service, such as SSO-H (Single Sign-On H), enter the user name and password before using this machine.


Remark
  • SSO-H is used as example to explain the procedure. However, if you are using a different login service, the login procedure may vary.
  • For instructions on selecting and setting a login service, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • For instructions on registering user data for Local Device Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H, see "MEAP/SSO."
  • For information on the user name used for the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' user authentication system), contact your system administrator.

  1. Press [User Name].

  • To use the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication user authentication system), a Windows server in which Active Directory is installed is necessary.
  • If there is more than a 30 minute time difference between the current time set in the registry of a computer using Windows Active Directory and the time set on the machine, an error occurs when you log on using the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication user authentication system). To be able to log on, the current time on both the computer and the machine must match. For instructions on setting the current date and time on the machine, see "Security."
  • You can also specify the number of user's logs displayed on the touch panel display when logging in. (For more information, see "MEAP/SSO.")
  • When using the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication user authentication system), you can use only alphanumeric characters, . (period), - (hyphen), _ (underscore), or % (percent) for a user name. You can log on only if you use valid characters.
  1. Enter the user name → press [OK].

  1. Press [Password].

  1. Enter the password → press [OK].

  • If you are using the Domain Authentication user authentication system of SSO-H (including when performing Domain Authentication with the Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication user authentication system), select the Login destination from the drop-down list.
  • For instructions on selecting the Login destination, see "MEAP/SSO."
  1. Press [Log In].

You can also press (Log In/Out) instead of [Log In] to log on.

The Basic Features screen of the selected function (or the MEAP application screen) appears on the touch panel display.

If the user name or password that you entered is incorrect, a message appears prompting you to verify your user name and password. Repeat the procedure from step 1.

  1. When your operations are complete, press (Log In/Out) on the control panel.

The screen for entering the user name and password appears.

  • To perform operations again, you have to re-enter your user name and password.
  • If you do not press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, any subsequent copies made are added to the total of the user who previously logged on to the machine.
  • Even if you forget to press (Log In/Out) after you are finished operating the machine, the screen for entering the user name and password automatically appears after the set Auto Clear Time elapses. (See "Additional Functions.")
  • After pressing (Log In/Out), all settings are canceled, and the machine returns to the Standard mode.


Placing Originals

Place your originals on the platen glass or into the feeder, depending on the size and type of the original, and the copy modes that you want to use.


Remark

  • Platen Glass

Place the originals on the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies.

  • Feeder

Place the originals into the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time, and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the platen glass and scans them. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided documents.



Document Sizes

The size of the original is automatically detected, and the document is scanned. When you are sending fax documents, if the output paper in the recipient's machine is not equal to the scanned document size, the original image may be either reduced in size or divided into smaller parts before it is sent.

The machine cannot always detect the size of the original if it is a nonstandard paper size, such as a book. In this case, specify the size at which you want to scan the original. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")



Orientation

You can place an original either vertically or horizontally. Always align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner) or the back edge of the feeder.

  • Platen Glass

Vertical Placement

Horizontal Placement

  • Feeder

Vertical Placement

Horizontal Placement


Remark
  • If the top edge of the original is not aligned with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner), your original may not be scanned correctly, depending on the copy mode that you have set.
  • Originals of the following sizes can be placed either vertically or horizontally. However, the scanning speed for horizontally placed originals is somewhat slower than that of vertically placed originals. Place originals horizontally when copying with a Preset Zoom, such as when enlarging an A4 original onto A3 paper.
  • Platen glass: A4, B5, and A5
  • Feeder: A4 and B5
  • Horizontally placed A4, B5, and A5 originals are referred to as A4R, B5R, and A5R.
  • A3 and B4 originals must be placed horizontally.
  • Vertically placed B5 originals are sent as horizontal B4 documents. Horizontally placed B5 originals are sent as A4 documents.


Platen Glass

You should use the platen glass when copying bound originals (such as books and magazines), heavy or lightweight originals, and transparencies. You should also place originals onto the platen glass when you want to copy an A3 original with an image that extends all the way to the edges without the periphery of the original being cut off. (See "Copy," "Mail Box," and "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")


Remark
  • The machine automatically detects the size of the following originals: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, and B5R.

  1. Lift the feeder/platen cover.

  • This machine is equipped with an open/close sensor on the feeder/platen cover (see circled area in the above illustration). When placing originals on the platen glass, lift the feeder/platen cover approximately 300 mm so that the sensor detaches from the feeder/platen cover. If the sensor does not detach from the feeder/platen cover, the size of the originals may not be detected correctly.
  1. Place your originals face down.

The surface of the original that you want to copy must be placed face down. Align the top edge of your original with the back edge of the platen glass (by the arrow in the top left corner).

Place books and other bound originals on the platen glass in the same way.

  • When you are enlarging an A4, B5, or A5 original onto A3 or B4 paper, place the original horizontally on the platen glass, and align it with the A4R, B5R, or A5R marks.
  1. Gently close the feeder/platen cover.

  • Close the feeder/platen cover gently to avoid catching your hands, as this may result in personal injury.
  • Do not press down hard on the feeder/platen cover when using the platen glass to make copies of thick books. Doing so may damage the platen glass and result in personal injury.
  • Be aware that the light emitted from the platen glass may be very bright when closing the feeder/platen cover.
  • If you are placing the original on the platen glass, the size of the original is detected after the feeder/platen cover is closed. Be sure to close the feeder/platen cover before copying.
  • Remove the original from the platen glass when scanning is complete.

  • The size of A5, A5R, and A6R originals cannot be detected. After pressing (Start), follow the instructions on the screen to specify the original size. You can also manually select the paper size.



Feeder

You should use the feeder when you want to copy several originals at the same time. Place the originals into the feeder and press (Start). The machine automatically feeds the originals to the platen glass and scans them. Two-sided originals can also be automatically turned over and scanned as two-sided documents.

  • Weight:
  • One-sided scanning: 42 to 128 g/m2
  • Two-sided scanning: 50 to 128 g/m2
  • Size: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5, A5R, or B6
  • Tray Capacity: up to 50 sheets (80 g/m2) (up to 10 sheets if using 42 g/m2 paper)

Remark
  • Thin originals may become creased, if used in a high temperature or high humidity environment.
  • Do not place the following types of originals into the feeder:
  • Originals with tears or large binding holes
  • Severely curled originals or originals with sharp folds
  • Clipped or stapled originals
  • Carbon backed paper or other originals which may not feed smoothly
  • Transparencies and other highly transparent originals
  • If the same original is fed through the feeder repeatedly, the original may fold or become creased, and make feeding impossible. Limit repeated feeding to a maximum of 30 times (this number varies, depending on the type and quality of the original).
  • If the feeder rollers are dirty from scanning originals written in pencil, perform the feeder cleaning procedure. (See "Maintenance.")
  • Always smooth out any folds in your originals before placing them into the feeder.

  1. Adjust the slide guides to fit the size of your originals.
  1. Neatly place your originals with the side to be copied face up into the original supply tray.

Place your originals as far into the feeder as they will go, until the Original Set indicator is lit.

If any dirt on the original scanning area is detected when the originals are placed in the feeder, the following screen appears. Even though streaks may appear on the copies, you can continue to scan your documents by pressing [Done].

It is recommended, however, that you open the feeder, clean the scanning area, and then close the feeder. The following screen will not appear once the scanning area is clean.

For instructions on cleaning the original scanning area, see "Maintenance."

  • Do not add or remove originals while they are being scanned.
  • When scanning is complete, remove the originals from the original output area to avoid paper jams.

  • When you are enlarging an A4 or B5 original onto A3 or B4 paper, place the original horizontally.
  • The scanned originals are output to the original output area in the order they are fed into the feeder.


Making Prints Using the Stack Bypass

If you are making prints on tracing paper, labels, transparencies, nonstandard paper size stock, or envelopes, load the paper stock into the stack bypass.


Remark
  • Note the following points when using the stack bypass:
  • Paper Quantity: one to approximately 50 sheets (80 g/m2, stack approximately 5 mm high)
  • Paper Size: 99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm
  • Paper Weight: 64 to 128 g/m2
  • Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use, to allow the paper to feed smoothly through the stack bypass (allowable curl amount: less than 10 mm for normal paper, less than 5 mm for heavy paper). There are some types of paper stock, which may meet the above specifications, but cannot be fed into the stack bypass.
  • Do not load different size/type paper at the same time.
  • Feed tracing paper one sheet at a time, and remove each sheet as it is delivered to the output tray. Loading several sheets of tracing paper together may cause paper jams.
  • Depending on the type of heavy paper you want to load, if you load multiple sheets of heavy paper into the stack bypass, a paper jam may occur. In this case, load only one sheet of heavy paper at a time.
  • If you are making two-sided prints, select the 2-Sided mode. The printed-paper may crease depending on the moisture absorption condition of the paper, and if you copy the two pages as two one-sided documents.
  • To print on the backside of preprinted paper, load the paper into the stack bypass, and press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page] on the paper selection screen that appears.
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
  • If you are printing on envelopes, do not allow more than 10 envelopes to accumulate in the output tray. Always empty the output tray once 10 envelopes have accumulated.
  • If you select [Free Size] for copying, you cannot use the Auto, Entire Image, Finishing, 12-Sided, 22-Sided, Book2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Image Combination, Shift, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, Image Repeat, Form Composition, Pg/Copy Set Numbering, or Watermark/Print Date mode. (See "Copy.")
  • If you select [Envelope] for copying, you cannot use the Finishing, 12-Sided, 22-Sided, Book2-Sided, Two-page Separation, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Image Combination, Booklet, Transparency Interleaving, or Form Composition mode. (See "Copy.")
  • If you select [Free Size] for printing documents stored in an inbox, you cannot use the Finishing, 2-Sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, Booklet, Form Composition, Pg/Copy Set Numbering, or Watermark/Print Date mode. (See "Mail Box.")
  • If you select [Envelope] for printing documents stored in an inbox, you cannot use the Finishing, 2-Sided, Cover/Sheet Insertion, Cover/Job Separator, Booklet, or Form Composition mode. (See "Mail Box.")
  • When scanning the following originals, you cannot use the Automatic Paper Selection mode. Use the Manual Paper Selection mode when scanning these types of originals:
  • Highly transparent originals, such as transparencies
  • Originals with an extremely dark background
  • Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.
  • For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.

  • Standard Size

You can select standard inch paper, or A or B series paper.

  • Free Size

You can load nonstandard paper sizes (99 mm x 148 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm).

  • Envelope

The following envelopes can be loaded into the stack bypass:

  • COM10 No.10:
104.7 mm x 241.3 mm
  • ISO-B5:
176 mm x 250 mm
  • Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8:
98.4 mm x 190.5 mm
  • ISO-C5:
162 mm x 229 mm
  • DL:
110 mm x 220 mm
  • Yougata 4:
105 mm x 235 mm

For more information on specific envelope measurements, see "Available Paper Stock."


  1. Open the stack bypass.

  • If the paper size you are going to load into the stack bypass is different from the paper size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Press [Paper Select] → [Stack Bypass] → select the paper size and type loaded in the stack bypass.
  • Proceed to step 6.

If there is a current or reserved job, you can reserve a change of paper for the stack bypass. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")

If there is no reserved job, remove any paper remaining in the stack bypass → continue the procedure from step 2.


  1. Adjust the slide guides to match the size of the paper.

If you are feeding large size paper, pull out the auxiliary tray.

  1. Load the paper into the stack bypass.

Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark ().

When you use the stack bypass to make copies, straighten out curled paper prior to use, as shown below. Curled paper may cause a paper jam.

To print on the backside of preprinted paper, load the preprinted paper face up into the stack bypass, as shown in the illustration below.

  • If the paper retaining lever is not set securely, a paper jam may occur, or paper may be fed from a paper drawer instead of the stack bypass.
  • When loading paper into the stack bypass, align the paper stack neatly between the slide guides. If the paper is not loaded correctly, a paper jam may occur.
  • If you are printing on heavyweight paper or envelopes using the stack bypass, and find that the paper or envelopes are not being fed smoothly or evenly through the stack bypass, remove the paper or envelopes, curl the feeding edges upward approximately 3 mm, and then reload the paper or envelopes. Curling the feeding edges enables the rollers to grip the paper or envelopes as they are fed into the stack bypass.
  • If there are instructions on the paper package about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions.
  • When the paper is loaded into the stack bypass, the side facing down is the one printed on.
  • If problems, such as poor print quality or paper jams occur, try turning the paper stack over and reload it.
  • For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it), see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.

  • Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and then stack them together. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

  • Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the envelopes by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls. Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

If you are using ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10 No.10, and Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8, or DL envelopes, hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat.

If you are using Yougata 4 envelopes, load the envelopes without folding them.

  • If you use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed.
  • Do not print on the backside of the envelopes (the side with the flap).
  • If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading them into the stack bypass.

  • Load the envelopes, as shown below.

  • The stack bypass can hold five envelopes at a time.
  • If the envelopes do not pass through the machine properly even if the procedures up to this point have been followed, repeat the procedures by feeding once for each envelope.
  • Envelopes may be creased in the printing process.

  1. Select the desired paper size.

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].

  • To select an inch series paper size, press [Inch-size].

  • Press [Free Size] → [Next].


  • Press [Envelope].

  • Select the envelope type → press [OK].

The display returns to the paper size selection screen.

  • If the envelope type is not selected correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Press [OK] → proceed to step 6.

If the following screen is displayed, press [OK] → adjust the width of the slide guides → specify the desired envelope size.

If the following screen is displayed, adjust the width of the slide guides to match the paper or envelope size stored in Stack Bypass Standard Settings, or set Stack Bypass Standard Settings to 'Off' in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  • Set the paper or envelope size to the same size as the paper or envelopes loaded in the stack bypass.

  1. Select the desired paper type → press [OK].

If you are using a paper type that is not listed, press [Detailed Settings] → select the paper type → press [OK].

If you are printing on the backside of a previously printed sheet, press [2nd Side of 2-Sided Page].

  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper types, see "Security."
  1. Press [Done].

If you press [Stack Bypass Settings], follow the procedures and screens in steps 4 and 5 to reset the paper size and type settings.

  1. If the Copy function is selected, place your originals → select the desired copy settings.

If you are printing documents that are stored in an inbox, this step is not necessary.

  1. Press (Start).

If you are printing documents that are stored in an inbox, press [Start Print].

Copying or scanning starts.

  • To cancel all settings and return the machine to the Standard mode, press (Reset).


Multifunctional Operations

The iR3245/iR3235/iR3230/iR3225 offers the user many functions, such as printing, scanning, copying, and sending, which can be used together. The following table provides you with the details of multifunctional operations.

  • How to read the table

The following table indicates the availability of the operations listed in the horizontal rows when the operations listed in the vertical columns are already being performed.

Examples:

  • If the machine receives print data when it is already printing documents that have been received by fax, print performance may be affected.
  • You cannot scan originals for a copy job and send job at the same time.
: Available -: Unavailable : Available, but with conditions

Receive Send Scan Print Copy:
Scan
and
Print
via
Net-
work
via
Fax
Print
Data
via
Net-
work
via
Fax
Copy/
Mail
Box
Send Copy RX
Docu-
ment
Print
Data
Receive via
Net-
work
via
Fax
- -
Print
Data

*3

*3

*3

*3

*3
Send via
Net-
work
via
Fax

*3

*1

*1
*3

*1
*3

*1
*3

*1
Scan Copy/
Mail
Box

*1
- -
*1

*1
-
Send
*3

*1
*3
- -
*1
*3

*1
*3
-
Print Copy -
*2

*2
-
RX
Docu-
ment

*3

*1
*3

*1

*1
*3

*2

*2
*3

*2
*3

*2
Print
Data

*3

*1
*3

*1

*1
*3

*2

*2
*3
-
*2
Copy:
Scan and Print

*1
- - -
*2

*2
-

*1 The machine's performance may be affected if image processing, such as compression, enlargement/reduction, and rotation, are carried out.
*2 The output order of competing jobs varies, depending on whether an optional finisher is attached.
- When an optional finisher is attached: one set is output alternately for each job
- When an optional finisher is not attached: one page is output alternately for each job
*3 The machine's processing speed may be slower.

Remark
  • Even if it is possible to perform multifunctional operations, the operation performance may decrease.
  • The machine's performance may be affected if several network send and receive jobs are being carried out at the same time.
  • The operation of printing data from an inbox is included in "Print Data" under "Print" in the table.
  • The operation of printing remote copy jobs or cascade copy jobs are included in "Copy" under "Print" in the table.


Available Paper Stock

The paper types that can be used with this machine are shown in the following table. Icons indicating the type of paper loaded in each paper drawer can be displayed on the paper selection screen if you store that information in the machine beforehand. (See "Additional Functions.")

: Available -: Unavailable

Paper Type Paper Source
Paper Drawer
(64 to 80 g/m2)
Stack Bypass
(64 to 128 g/m2)
Paper Deck (optional)
(64 to 80 g/m2)
Plain*1
Recycled*1
Color
Pre-punched
Bond Paper - -
Heavy*2 - -
Tracing Paper*3 - -
Transparency*4 - -
Labels - -
Envelopes *5 -

*1 Plain and Recycled paper are from 64 to 90 g/m2. Load paper heavier than 81 g/m2 in the stack bypass.
*2 Heavy papers is from 91 to 128 g/m2.
*3 Some types of tracing paper cannot be used.
*4 Use only A4 transparencies made especially for this machine.
*5 If the optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 is attached to Paper Drawer 1, envelopes can be loaded.

: Available -: Unavailable

Paper Size Width x Length Paper Source
Paper
Drawer 1
Paper
Drawer
2, 3, 4
Stack
Bypass
Paper
Deck
(optional)
A3 297 mm × 420 mm - -
A4 297 mm × 210 mm
A4R 210 mm × 297 mm -
A5R 148 mm × 210 mm -
B4 256 mm × 364 mm -
B5 257 mm × 182 mm -
B5R 182 mm × 257 mm -
Envelope COM 10 No.10 104.7 mm × 241.3 mm *1 - -
Monarch:
Catalog Glove No.8
98.4 mm × 190.5 mm *1 - -
DL 110 mm × 220 mm *1 - -
ISO-B5 176 mm × 250 mm *1 - -
ISO-C5 162 mm × 229 mm *1 - -
Yougata 4 105 mm × 235 mm *1 - -
Free Size 99 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm - - -

*1 If the optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 is attached to Paper Drawer 1, envelopes can be loaded.

Remark
  • For instructions on loading paper, see the following sections:
  • Paper Drawers 3, 4, and the Paper Deck-Q1 are optional.


Volume Adjustment

Pressing (Fax Volume Settings) enables you to adjust the fax sending/receiving alarm volume and transmission volume. You can also set various tones to sound according to the operations performed or status of the device.



Adjusting the Alarm and Monitor Volume

You can set the volume for the alarm and monitor tones that this machine sounds during a fax transmission.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • The alarm tone sounds when sending or receiving is canceled.
  • The monitor tone sounds when it connects to the recipient's fax machine.

  1. Press (Fax Volume Settings) on the control panel.

  1. Select [] or [] to set the Alarm Volume and Monitor Volume → press [OK].

You can set the volume to any level on a scale of 0 to 9.

If you set the volume all the way to the left, the volume is muted and no tone will sound.



Tone Settings

You can set whether to sound the following six types of audible tones. The tones below sound at the following times:

  • Entry Tone:
When pressing keys on the control panel, keys on the touch panel display, or keys on a USB keyboard
  • Invalid Entry Tone:
When an invalid key on the control panel or touch panel display is pressed, or when the maximum number of characters is exceeded
  • Restock Supplies Tone:
When the toner cartridge needs to be replaced
  • Error Tone:
When a malfunction occurs (e.g., paper jam or operational error)
  • Job Done Tone:
After a job completes (e.g., outputting or stapling is complete)

  1. Press (Fax Volume Settings) on the control panel.

The Fax Volume Settings screen appears on the touch panel display.

  1. Press [Audible Tones].

If the optional fax board is not installed, this procedure is not necessary. Proceed to step 3.

  1. Select [On] or [Off] for the desired tones → press [OK].

The optional fax board is installed.


The optional fax board is not installed.



Checking the Counter and Controller Version

You can check the copy and print page counts, and the print and scan page counts that are performed by users who log on to MEAP applications using a login service.

You can also check the version of the controller.


  1. Press (Counter Check) on the control panel.

The various counts are shown on the touch panel display.

  1. Check the Send/Fax counter, MEAP counter, or controller version.

  • Press [Send/Fax Cntr Check].

[Send/Fax Cntr Check] appears if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional fax board is installed.

[Send Counter Check] appears if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, but the optional fax board is not installed.

[Fax Counter Check] appears if the optional fax board is installed, but the Color Universal Send Kit is not activated.

  • Press [Done].

  • Press [MEAP Counter].
  • Press the Application Name drop-down list → select the desired application.

To check the version information of an application, the MEAP Contents version information, etc., press [Version Information].

  • Press [Done].

  • Press [Device Configuration].
  • Press [Done].

  1. Press [Done].


Checking Job Status

If you press [System Monitor], the System Monitor screen appears, enabling you to check and change the status of Copy, Send, Fax, Print, and Receive jobs. For example, you can change the order of jobs in the print queue, cancel a job, or check the details of a job.

By displaying the status for each job type, it is possible to check the current job or a job waiting to be processed. By displaying the Log, you can view all of the completed jobs or confirm that a job has been processed. It is also possible to print a fax transmissions/receptions report from the System Monitor screen.

Press [Print Jobs] to confirm or edit print jobs on the Print Job screen.

From the System Monitor screen, it is possible to quickly acquire information about the machine, check the amount of paper remaining in all of the standard and optional paper sources, check the available system memory, and the status of consumables. You can also view a list of error messages.


Remark
  • If Department ID Management or a login service (such as SSO-H) is set and Display Status Before Authentication in System Monitor Screen Restriction in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', operations other than displaying the Device Status screen cannot be performed from the System Monitor screen before logging in to the machine. (See "Security.")
  • If the Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the following items are not displayed:
  • On the System Monitor screen
    <Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen
    Copy, Send, Fax, and Print job logs
  • On the Print Job screen
    [Log]
  • Many of the check/change operations can also be performed from the Remote User Interface. (See "Remote UI.")
  • The status bars on the keys located on the bottom of the System Monitor screen, flash in red or green to indicate the status of jobs. The status bars flash green when there are current jobs that are being processed, and maintain an steady green light when there are jobs in the print queue. Flashing red status bars indicate errors. For instructions on resolving errors, see "Problem Solving."
  • The Send function is available only if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated.
  • The Fax function is available only if the optional fax board is installed.
  • The Print function is available only if the optional printer function is activated.


Checking Job Status from the System Monitor Screen

  1. Press [System Monitor].

To cancel remote or cascade copy jobs from the machine that is scanning the original, press [Copy] on the System Monitor Screen.

  1. From the keys located at the bottom of the System Monitor screen, select the job type that you want to check or change, or press [Device] to display the current status of the machine.

  • Press [Status] to check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.

The example above shows the screen that is displayed when [Print] is selected.

If [Fax] is selected, press [Send Job Status] or [Received Job Status] instead.

If [Receive] is selected, press [Forwarding Status].

  • Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.

The log is organized according to the type of job. Press the Select Type drop-down list → select the type of job whose log you want to check.

If you select [RX Print] from the Select Type drop-down list, the log for all receive jobs is displayed in chronological order.

  • The status of Receive jobs can only be confirmed by the log.
  • The table below describes the icons that are displayed on the status and log screens.

Icon (Job Status) Description
Executing
Waiting
Error
Canceling
Paused
Secured Print
Sent

Icon (Job Type) Description
Copy Job
Send/Fax Job
Mail Box Job
Print Job
Report Print Job
  • The most recent 100 copy, fax, or print jobs, and a total of the most recent 100 send and receive jobs are displayed in the log.

  • Check the current machine status.

  • Press [Consumables] to display the remaining amount of toner and staples.
  • When you are finished checking the status of the consumables, press [Done].
  • All displays are approximations of the actual amount of consumables remaining.

  1. Press [Done].


Checking Job Status from the Print Job Screen

  1. Press [Print Job].

  1. Check the status of the print jobs.
  • Press [Status] to check the jobs currently being processed or waiting to be processed.

  • If Suspended Job Timeout is set to "On", when the designated time elapses for a job suspended because the designated paper was not available when the job was issued, the job is displayed as a suspended job.
  • To display detailed information for a suspended job, such as the designated paper, select the job → press [Details].
  • To resume a suspended job, load the designated paper → select the suspended job → press [Resume].
  • You can select more than one suspended jobs to resume.
  • If you are using a login service, [My Job Status] is displayed. Press this key to display only the jobs for the user that is currently logged on to the machine.
  • Press [Log] to check the jobs that have already been processed.

  • Press the Select Type drop-down list → select the type of job whose log you want to check.


Job Details

You can check the details of copy and print jobs, such as the date and time the machine received and processed the jobs, and the number of pages.


Remark
  • If the Job Log Display in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', the following items are not displayed on the System Monitor screen:
  • On the System Monitor screen
    <Activity Report (RX)>, [Details], and [Print List] on the Receive screen
    Copy, Send, Fax, and Print job logs
  • On the Print Job screen
    [Log]
  • Only operations for print jobs can be performed on the Print Job screen.


Checking Copy/Print Job Details


Checking Copy/Print Job Details from the System Monitor Screen

  1. Press [System Monitor] → select the job type ([Copy] or [Print]).

  • To check the details of jobs specified through a MEAP application, select [Print] for both MEAP copy and print jobs.
  1. Press [Status] or [Log] → select the job whose details you want to check → press [Details].

  • If Suspended Job Timeout is set to "On", when the designated time elapses for a job suspended because the designated paper was not available when the job was issued, the job is displayed as a suspended job.
  • To display detailed information for a suspended job, such as the designated paper, select the job → press [Details].
  • To resume a suspended job, load the designated paper → select the suspended job → press [Details] → [Resume].
  1. Check the detailed information → press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.


Checking Copy/Print Job Details from the Print Job Screen

  1. Press [Print Job].

  1. Press [Status] or [Log] → select the job whose details you want to check → press [Details].

  1. Check the detailed information → press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.


Printing the Copy/Print Log


Printing Copy/Print Log from the System Monitor Screen

  1. Press [System Monitor] → select the job type ([Copy] or [Print]).

  1. Press [Log] → [Print List].

If you selected [Print], press the Select Type drop-down list → select the type of job whose log you want to print → press [Print List].

  • The log can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in one of the paper sources that are set to 'On' when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")
  1. Press [Yes].

If you selected [Copy], the Copy Log List is printed. If you selected [Print], the Print Log List is printed.

  1. Press [Done].
  • For samples of the Copy and Print Logs, see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.


Printing the Copy/Print Log from the Print Job Screen

  1. Press [Print Job] → [Log].
  1. Press the Select Type drop-down list → select the type of job whose log you want to print → press [Print List].

  1. Press [Yes].


Priority Printing

You can change the printing priority of a job, so that it is printed right after the current job is complete.



Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the System Monitor Screen

  1. Press [System Monitor] → [Print].
  1. Press [Status] → select the job for priority printing → press [Print Next].

  1. Press [Done].


Selecting the Job for Priority Printing from the Print Job Screen

  1. Press [Print Job] → [Status].
  1. Select the job for priority printing → press [Print Next].



Optional Equipment

This category describes the optional equipment that can be attached to the machine.



System Configuration

This section provides you with illustrations of all the optional equipment that can be attached to the machine, and shows you examples of different system configurations.



Optional Equipment





1 Platen Cover Type M
The Platen Cover Type M secures the originals placed on the platen glass.
For the iR3245/iR3235, this option is not available in some regions.
2 Feeder (DADF-U1)
Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet onto the platen glass for scanning. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one or two-sided copies. For the iR3245/iR3235, the Feeder (DADF-U1) is standard-equipped in some regions.
3 Card Reader-C1
The Card Reader-C1 enables Department ID Management to be performed automatically.
4 Copy Tray-J1
The Copy Tray-J1 provides an additional paper output tray.
5 Paper Deck-Q1
The Paper Deck-Q1 provides an additional source of paper for printing jobs.
The Paper Deck-Q1 holds up to 2,700 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
6 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3
The Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 provides two additional sources of paper for printing jobs.
Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
7 Inner 2 Way Tray-D1
The Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 is equipped with the following features: Collate, Group, and Rotate.
8 Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2
The Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 can only be attached to Paper Drawer 1, and holds only envelopes.
9 Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1
The Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 can be attached to the optional Finisher-S1, and is equipped with the Hole Punch mode.
10 Finisher-S1
The Finisher-S1 is equipped with the following modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple (Corner).
11 Additional Finisher Tray-B1
The Additional Finisher Tray-B1 can be attached to the optional Finisher-S1 to provide an additional paper output tray.
12 Buffer Pass Unit-E2
The Buffer Pass Unit-E2 is required to attach the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 to the main unit.
13 Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1
The Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 can be attached to the optional Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2, and is equipped with the Hole Punch mode.
14 Staple Cartridge-D2/D3
The Staple Cartridge-D2/D3 can be attached to the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 for saddle stitching.
15 Staple-J1
The Staple-J1 can be attached to the optional finisher for stapling (Corner and Double).
16 Saddle Finisher-AE2
The Saddle Finisher-AE2 is equipped with the following modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple (Corner, Double, and Saddle Stitch).
17 Finisher-AE1
The Finisher-AE1 is equipped with the following modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple (Corner and Double).

Remark
  • Only one optional finisher can be attached to the main unit at a time.
  • Either the optional Platen Cover Type M or Feeder (DADF-U1) can be attached to the main unit.
  • The name of the puncher unit may differ according to the regions.


Sample System Configurations

Different optional equipment can be attached to the machine to form various system configurations. The illustrations below are only examples of some of the possible system configurations. For information on the complete range of optional equipment configurations, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

The optional Platen Cover Type M and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 are attached.

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1), Inner 2 Way Tray-D1, Copy Tray-J1, Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3, Paper Deck-Q1, and Card Reader-C1 are attached.

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1), Finisher-S1, Additional Finisher Tray-B1, and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 are attached.

The optional Feeder (DADF-U1), Saddle Finisher-AE2, Puncher Unit-L1, Buffer Pass Unit-E2, and Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 are attached.



System Options

By installing system related optional accessories, the user can expand the functionality of the machine. This section describes the system related optional accessories and their functions.

  • UFR II Printer Kit

The UFR II Printer Kit incorporates UFR II (Ultra Fast Rendering II) Technology, which utilizes Canon's original printing algorithm to minimize file processing and achieve maximum performance.


Remark
  • To use the features of the UFR II Printer Kit, it must be activated by registering a license key.
  • The UFR II Printer Kit is not available in some regions.

  • UFR II/PCL Printer Kit

The UFR II/PCL Printer Kit supports not only UFR II, but also PCL emulation printing solutions.


Remark
  • To use the features of the UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, it must be activated by registering a license key.
  • The UFR II/PCL Printer Kit is not available in some regions.

  • PCL Printer Kit

The PCL Printer Kit supports PCL emulation printing solutions.


Remark
  • To use the features of the PCL Printer Kit, it must be activated by registering a license key after the UFR II Printer Kit has been activated.
  • The PCL Printer Kit is not available in some regions.

  • PS Printer Kit

The PS Printer Kit supports PS emulation printing solutions.


Remark
  • To use the features of the PS Printer Kit, it must be activated by registering a license key after the UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit, or the UFR II/PCL Printer Kit has been activated.
  • To activate the PS Printer Kit, the memory of the machine must be expanded by installing the Additional Memory Type A (512MB) to the machine.

  • Direct Printing Kit

The Direct Printing Kit includes the Direct Print functions, which enables you to print a TIFF, JPEG, or PDF image without opening the file from your computer, using the Remote UI.


Remark
  • To use the features of the Direct Printing Kit, it must be activated by registering a license key, after the optional UFR II/PCL Printer Kit or PS Printer Kit has been made available for use.
  • The Direct Printing Kit is not available in some regions.

  • Expansion Bus

The Expansion Bus is necessary to install the IPSec Board.

  • System Upgrade RAM

This option expands the memory capacity of the machine. By installing the System Upgrade RAM, the memory of your machine is expanded, and there are more functions that can be specified when storing documents in inboxes and scanning documents to be sent.

  • Additional Memory Type A (512MB)

This option expands the memory capacity of the machine. To enable some optional functions, it is necessary to install the Additional Memory Type A (512MB) to expand the memory capacity of the machine.

  • Super G3 FAX Board

Installing the Super G3 FAX Board enables you to send and receive fax documents. You can also send documents that have been created in applications directly from your PC via a network.


Remark
  • The Canon Fax Driver is supplied with the Super G3 FAX Board, and enables you to send fax images from a PC via the machine.

  • Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board

The Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board enables you to use two lines to send and receive fax documents.


Remark
  • To use the features of the Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board, it must be installed after the Super G3 FAX Board has been installed.
  • The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board and Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board cannot be installed at the same time.

  • Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board

The Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board enables you to use three lines to send and receive fax documents.


Remark
  • To use the features of the Super G3 2nd/3rd Line Fax Board, it must be installed after the Super G3 FAX Board has been installed.
  • The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board and Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board cannot be installed at the same time.

  • IPSec Board

This is the option for using the IPSec communication. IPSec is a protocol for creating a security policy to protect data received from and sent to the IP network from threats such as interception, alteration, and theft.


Remark
  • To perform IPSec communication, the optional IPSec Board must be installed after installing the Expansion Bus.

  • Color Universal Send Kit

The Color Universal Send Kit enables you to send scanned documents by e-mail or I-fax, as well as send scanned data to be stored in file servers or User Inboxes.


Remark
  • To enable the Send function, the Color Universal Send Kit must be activated.

  • Universal Send Security Feature Set

The Universal Send Security Feature Set enables you to encrypt PDF files and set a password to send them safely to a file server or e-mail address. It also enables the recipient of the PDF or XPS files to verify which device scanned it.

  • Encrypted PDF
    The Encrypted PDF mode enables you to encrypt PDF files that you send to an e-mail address or file server for enhanced security. Only users who enter the correct password can open, print, or change the received PDF.
  • Device Signature PDF or Device Signature XPS
    The Device Signature PDF or the Device Signature XPS mode uses the device signature certificate and key pair inside the machine to add a digital signature to the document, which enables the recipient to verify which device scanned it.

Remark
  • To use the features of the Universal Send Security Feature Set, it must be activated by registering a license key after the Color Universal Send Kit has been activated.

  • Universal Send Advanced Feature Set

The Universal Send Advanced Feature Set enables you to make Compact PDF, Compact XPS, Trace & Smooth PDF, Searchable PDF, and Searchable XPS files.

  • Compact PDF or Compact XPS
    A Compact PDF or a Compact XPS is a higher compressed PDF or XPS file than a normal PDF or XPS file. The text and image portions of a PDF or XPS file are processed separately to achieve a higher level of compression, which enables you to reduce the load on a network or server.
  • Trace & Smooth PDF
    The Trace & Smooth mode enables you to convert the text and line drawings of a scanned image to scalable outline data. The outline data (Trace) can be extracted and used in Adobe Illustrator. The smoothing process can also be applied to the text of the outline data to make it appear less jagged when viewed on a PC monitor or in print.
  • Searchable PDF or Searchable XPS
    The Searchable PDF or the Searchable XPS mode enables you to perform OCR (Optical Character Recognition) to extract data that can be recognized as text from a scanned image. The text can then be added to the file to create a PDF or XPS file that is searchable.

Remark
  • To use the features of the Universal Send Advanced Feature Set, it must be activated by registering a license key after the Color Universal Send Kit has been activated.

  • Digital User Signature Kit

The Digital User Signature Kit enables you to add a digital user signature obtained from a certificate authority to a PDF or XPS file. This enables the recipient of a PDF or XPS file to verify which user signed it.


Remark
  • To use the features of the Digital User Signature Kit, it must be activated by registering a license key after the Color Universal Send Kit has been activated.
  • Digital certificates issued by a certificate authority must be registered to use the Digital User Signature Kit. (See "Remote UI.")

  • Secure Watermark

The Secure Watermark enables you to embed hidden text in the background of copies. You can embed text, such as "CONFIDENTIAL," the date and time, or a department name. The embedded text only appears when the machine prints the copies.

  • HDD Data Encryption Kit

The HDD Data Encryption Kit is a tool that enables you to prevent data leakages by encrypting all of the data stored in the hard disk of the machine. Encrypted hard disk data that is extracted from the machine cannot be read properly.

  • HDD Data Erase Kit

The HDD Data Erase Kit enables you to erase the data stored on the hard disk completely.


Remark
  • To use the features of the HDD Data Erase Kit, it must be activated.

  • Web Access Software

The Web Access Software enables you to view Web pages from the touch panel display of the machine. If you register PDF files on the Web page, you can print them without using a PC. Moreover, if you create a Web page or special content, and then register it as a PDF file, you can share the Web page or special content with other users.


Remark
  • To print Web pages and PDF files using the Web Access Software, the optional Direct Printing Kit must be activated.
  • To display Flash content, the memory of the machine must be expanded by installing the Additional Memory Type A (512MB).

  • Encrypted Printing Software

The Encrypted Printing Software enables you to encrypt print data sent from a computer using the Secured Print function, and decrypt it at the machine. This enables you to strengthen the security of print data by preventing the contents of your printed documents from being seen by other users, and preventing the unauthorized use of confidential information.


Remark
  • The features of the Encrypted Printing Software are available only if the UFR II Printer Kit, UFR II/PCL Printer Kit, or PS Printer Kit is activated.

  • ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT

The ACCESS MANAGEMENT SYSTEM KIT enables you to restrict the various features of the Copy, Print, Mail Box, and Send functions that each user can use. Restricting the Send function enables you to reduce the risk of confidential information being leaked, and restricting users to only allow two-sided printing of multiple page documents enables printing costs to be reduced.

  • iW Function Flow

iW Function Flow is an option that enables you to register combinations of functions (such as Scan, Print, and Send functions). For example, you can execute multiple operations such as scanning and then sending an original, or combining documents stored in a User Inbox and then printing them as a booklet, all with a single operation.

The authentication function of iW Function Flow also enables each user to register and execute their own settings.

  • Wireless LAN Board

Installing the Wireless LAN Board will allow the machine to connect to a network without using cables, and transfer data in infrastructure mode via an access point. Setting a password and authentication method reduces the risk of stolen data or unauthorized access by a third party.


Remark
  • The Wireless LAN Board and the standard network interface of this product cannot be used at the same time.
  • The Wireless LAN Board is not available in some regions.

  • USB Memory Connectivity Kit

Optional equipment required to store scanned documents and inbox documents to USB memory, and print images from USB memory.



Available Combination of Options

This table describes the optional equipment that is needed to use each function, the available combination of options that can be installed simultaneously, and the limitations when installing optional equipment.

Machine Function Optional Equipment Needed Simultaneous Installation
Required Limitations
Copy Function Platen Cover Type M or Feeder (DADF-U1) - The Platen Cover Type M and Feeder (DADF-U1) cannot be attached together. If only the Platen Cover Type M is attached, some functions may be unavailable.
Mail Box Function Platen Cover Type M or Feeder (DADF-U1) - The Platen Cover Type M and Feeder (DADF-U1) cannot be attached together. If only the Platen Cover Type M is attached, some functions may be unavailable.
Send Function Platen Cover Type M or Feeder (DADF-U1) - The Platen Cover Type M and Feeder (DADF-U1) cannot be attached together. If only the Platen Cover Type M is attached, some functions may be unavailable.
Color Universal Send Kit - To use the Send function, the Color Universal Send Kit must be activated.
Universal Send Advanced Feature Set Color Universal Send Kit To use the features of the Universal Send Advanced Feature Set, it must be activated after the optional Color Universal Send Kit has been activated.
Universal Send Security Feature Set Color Universal Send Kit To use the features of the Universal Send Security Feature Set, it must be activated after the optional Color Universal Send Kit has been activated.
Digital User Signature Kit Color Universal Send Kit To use the features of the Digital User Signature Kit, it must be activated after the optional Color Universal Send Kit has been activated.
Fax Function Platen Cover Type M or Feeder (DADF-U1) - The Platen Cover Type M and Feeder (DADF-U1) cannot be attached together. If only the Platen Cover Type M is attached, some functions may be unavailable.
Super G3 FAX Board - -
Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board Super G3 FAX Board To use the features of the Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or the Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board, it must be installed after the Super G3 FAX Board has been installed.
The optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board and Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board cannot be installed at the same time.
UFR II Printer Function UFR II Printer Kit or UFR II/PCL Printer Kit - To use the UFR II Printer Function, the UFR II Printer Kit or UFR II/PCL Printer Kit must be activated. Some printer kits may not be available in all regions.
UFR II/PCL Printer Function UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit, or UFR II/PCL Printer Kit - To use the UFR II/PCL Printer Function, the UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit, or the UFR II/PCL Printer Kit must be activated. Some printer kits may not be available in all regions.
PS Printer Function and PS Direct Print Function PS Printer Kit UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit, or UFR II/PCL Printer Kit To use the features of the PS Printer Kit, it must be activated after the optional UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit has been activated. Some printer kits may not be available in all regions.
To activate the PS Printer Kit, the memory of the machine must be expanded by installing the Additional Memory Type A (512MB) to the machine.
TIFF/JPEG/PDF Direct Print Function Direct Printing Kit UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit, or UFR II/PCL Printer Kit To use the Direct Printer function, the Direct Printing Kit must be activated after the optional UFR II Printer Kit and PCL Printer Kit, or UFRII/PCL Printer Kit has been activated. The Direct Printing Kit may not be available in all regions.
Additional Copy Tray Right Side Output Tray Copy Tray-J1 - The Copy Tray-J1 cannot be used with the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2.
Inner Output Tray Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 - The Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 cannot be used with the Finisher-S1, Finisher-AE1, or Saddle Finisher-AE2.
Additional Finisher Tray-B1 Finisher-S1 The Additional Finisher Tray-B1 cannot be used with the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1, Finisher-AE1, or Saddle Finisher-AE2.
Secure Watermark Secure Watermark - -
Collate
Group
Offset
Staple
Finisher-S1, Finisher-AE1, or Saddle Finisher-AE2 Buffer Pass Unit-E2*1 The Copy Tray-J1 cannot be used with the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2.
Hole Punch Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 Buffer Pass Unit-E2, Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3, and Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 The Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 cannot be used with the Finisher-S1.
Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 Finisher-S1 The Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 cannot be used with the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2.
Department ID Management*2 Card Reader-C1 - -
Additional Paper Supply Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 - -
Large Scale Paper Supply Paper Deck-Q1 Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 -
Security Management
(Data Encryption)
HDD Data Encryption Kit - -
Security Management
(Data Erase)
HDD Data Erase Kit - -
Increased Security
(IPSec)
IPSec Board Expansion Bus To perform IPSec communication, the optional IPSec Board must be installed after installing the Expansion Bus.
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN Board - The Wireless LAN Board and the standard network interface of this product cannot be used at the same time. The Wireless LAN Board is not available in some regions.
Displaying
Web Pages
Viewing Web Access Software - To display Flash contents, the memory of the machine must be expanded.
Printing Web Pages/PDF Files Direct Printing Kit -
Encrypted Secured Printing Encrypted Printing Software Print Function To use the features of the Encrypted Printing Software, an optional printing kit must be activated.
Memory Media USB Memory Connectivity Kit - -

*1 If the Finisher-S1 is attached, the Buffer Pass Unit-E2 is not necessary.
*2 The Department ID Management function is a standard function in this machine. If the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached, Department ID Management is performed automatically, and you do not have to enter the Department ID and password manually. The Card Reader-C1 enables you to check the print totals and the remaining number of pages that can be printed on the touch panel display.


Utilities

For information on utility software, see "iW Series."



Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3

If you attach the Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 to the machine, you have two additional paper sources for print jobs.

Up to 550 sheets of paper (80 g/m2) can be loaded into each drawer of the Cassette feeding unit.



Parts and Their Functions


1 Paper Drawers
Each paper drawer holds up to 550 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
2 Lower Right Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed paper.


Optional Accessories

  • FL Cassette-Y1(L)

This cassette can be adjusted to hold various paper sizes. (See "Maintenance.")

  • Available Locations: Paper Drawers 2, 3, or 4
  • Available Paper Sizes: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R

  • FL Cassette-Z1(M)

This cassette can be adjusted to hold various paper sizes. (See "Maintenance.")

  • Available Locations: Paper Drawer 1
  • Available Paper Sizes: B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, or A5R



Paper Deck-Q1

If you attach the Paper Deck-Q1 to the machine, you have one additional source of paper for print jobs.

Up to 2,700 sheets of paper (80 g/m2) can be loaded into the paper deck.


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the main power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button on the paper deck.
  • The paper size of the paper deck is fixed to A4.


Parts and Their Functions


1 Release Button
Press to move the paper deck away from the main unit when you want to detach it from the machine.
2 Open Button
Press to open the paper deck when you need to load paper or check for a paper jam.
3 Paper Supply Indicator
Enables you to check the amount of paper remaining in the paper deck.


Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2

The following six types of envelopes can be loaded into the envelope feeder attachment:

  • COM 10 No.10: 104.7 mm × 241.3 mm
  • Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8: 98.4 mm × 190.5 mm
  • DL: 110 mm × 220 mm
  • ISO-C5: 162 mm × 229 mm
  • ISO-B5: 176 mm × 250 mm
  • Yougata 4: 105 mm × 235 mm


Parts and Their Functions

The Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 can only be attached to Paper Drawer 1.


1 Left Guide
Use the Left Guide to align the length of the envelopes being loaded.
2 Envelope Receptacle
The Envelope Receptacle pushes the envelopes up so that they can be fed correctly, even when there are only a few envelopes left.
3 Back Width Guide
Fix the Back Width Guide in place using the provided screws to match the width of the envelopes.
4 Front Width Guide
Fix the Front Width Guide in place using the provided screws to match the width of the envelopes.
5 Paper Size Dial
When the Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 is attached to the paper drawer, make sure that the Paper Size Dial is set to 'ENV'.
6 Size Switch
Select either 'ENV.1' or 'ENV.2' for the envelope type.
7 Open Button
Press to open the paper drawer.


Feeder (DADF-U1)

Originals placed in the feeder are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the platen glass for scanning. The feeder also automatically turns over two-sided originals to make one or two-sided copies.


Remark
  • Do not insert your fingers into the gaps around the original supply tray, as your fingers may get caught. Also, be careful not to drop objects, such as paper clips into the gaps, as doing so may cause damage to the machine or cause it to break down.
  • When using the platen glass to copy or scan thick originals, such as books or magazines, do not press down hard on the feeder.
  • If the original output area is blocked, originals may get damaged, and printing may not be performed correctly. Therefore, do not place any objects in the original output area.
  • For the iR3245/iR3235, the Feeder (DADF-U1) is standard-equipped in some regions.


Parts and Their Functions


1 Feeder Cover
Open this cover to remove jammed originals.
2 Slide Guides
Adjust the slide guides to match the width of the original.
3 Original Supply Tray
Originals placed here are automatically fed sheet by sheet to the platen glass. Place originals into this tray with the surface that you want to scan face up.
4 Original Output Area
Originals that have been scanned from the original supply tray are output into the Original Output Area in the order that they are fed into the feeder.
5 Original Set Indicator
Lights when originals are placed in the original supply tray.


Platen Cover Type M

The Platen Cover Type M secures originals that are placed on the platen glass for copying.


Remark
  • For the iR3245/iR3235, this option is not available in some regions.


Parts and Their Functions


1 Platen Cover
Close the platen cover to secure originals that have been placed on the platen glass.


Finisher-S1/Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1

The Finisher-S1 is equipped with the following finishing modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple. (See "Finishing Modes.")

The Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 is equipped with the Hole Punch mode.

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the right side of the machine, and the optional Additional Finisher Tray-B1 is attached to the Finisher-S1, prints can be delivered to three different locations.


Remark
  • The Finisher-S1 cannot be attached with the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1.
  • The name of the puncher unit may differ according to the regions.


Parts and Their Functions


1 Auxiliary Tray
If you are printing on large size paper, such as A3, B4, or A4R, pull out the auxiliary tray.
2 Additional Finisher Tray-B1
The Additional Finisher Tray-B1 can be attached to the optional Finisher-S1, and provides an additional paper output tray.
3 Output Tray
Paper is output to the output tray.
4 Front Cover
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit, or to clear a staple jam. (For instructions on replacing the staple cartridge, see "Maintenance." For instructions on clearing a staple jam, see "Problem Solving.")
5 Main Unit's Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the main unit. (See "Problem Solving.")
6 Paper Output Unit
Pull out the paper output unit to remove jammed paper. (See "Problem Solving.")
7 Handle
Grip this handle to pull out the Finisher-S1 or push it back into its original position.


Finishing Modes

The Finisher-S1 is equipped with the following finishing modes.


Remark
  • If the Collate or Group mode is set, the output tray moves downward as the stack of paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness. Once the output tray has reached its stacking limit, printing stops temporarily. Remove all of the prints from the output tray, and printing resumes.

  • Collate Mode

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The collated print sets can be shifted by pressing [Offset].

  • Group Mode

All prints of the same original page are grouped together. The grouped print sets can be shifted by pressing [Offset].

  • Offset Mode

The print output is shifted alternately to the front and back of the tray, in a vertical (portrait) orientation, or a horizontal (landscape) orientation, depending on the orientation of your originals.


Remark
  • If you press [Offset] when either the Collate or Group mode is set, each set of prints is shifted approximately 30 mm before it is delivered to the output tray.

  • Staple Mode

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. Prints are stapled in the following places:

  • If an original is placed on the platen glass:

  • If originals are placed in the optional feeder:


Remark
  • Do not place your hands in the part of the tray where stapling is performed (near the rollers) when a finisher is attached, as this may result in personal injury.

  • Do not place objects or lean against the finisher unit when it is extended. Doing so may damage the finisher or cause the machine to tip over, resulting in personal injury.

  • Do not place your hands into the open spaces around the moving finisher trays. Doing so may result in personal injury or damage to the finisher.

  • Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher, as doing so may damage the trays.

  • If the Staple mode is set, the output tray moves downward as the stack of paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness. Once the output tray has reached its stacking limit, or after 30 sets of prints have been output, printing and stapling stop temporarily. Remove all of the stapled prints from the output tray, and printing and stapling resume.
  • Only the following paper sizes can be stapled: A3, B4, A4, A4R, or B5.
  • You cannot staple envelopes, transparencies, tracing paper, or labels.
  • The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be stapled together is 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, and 50 sheets of A4 or B5 paper.
  • If the machine stops while stapling and the message <Load staples.> appears, almost all of the staples have been used, and the staple cartridge must be replaced. To proceed, replace the staple cartridge. (See "Maintenance.")

  • Hole Punch Mode

The Hole Punch mode punches two or three holes (depending on the paper size) in the printed sheets.

  • The hole punched areas are shown in the illustration below.

  • The distance between the punch holes is shown in the illustration below.


Remark
  • You cannot punch holes in A5R paper.
  • Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, envelopes, pre-punched paper, tracing paper, or labels.
  • The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine. However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.

: Available -: Unavailable

Paper Size Output Tray
A3
A4
A4R
A5R
B4
B5
B5R
Envelope COM10 No.10
Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8
DL
ISO-B5
ISO-C5
Yougata 4
Free size 99 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm


Finisher-AE1/Saddle Finisher-AE2/Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1

The Finisher-AE1 and Saddle Finisher-AE2 are equipped with the following finishing modes: Collate, Group, Offset, and Staple.

The Saddle Finisher-AE2 is also equipped with the Saddle Stitch mode.

The Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 is equipped with the Hole Punch mode.


Remark
  • To attach the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2, the optional Buffer Pass Unit-E2 is required.
  • Either the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 can be attached to the main unit.
  • The Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 can be attached only if the Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • The name of the puncher unit may differ according to the regions.


Parts and Their Functions

1 Top Cover of the Finisher
Open this cover to remove jammed paper. (See "Problem Solving.")
2 Top Cover of the Puncher Unit
Open this cover to remove jammed paper. (See "Problem Solving.")
3 Front Cover of the Punch Waste Tray
Open this cover to remove punch waste or to remove jammed paper. (For instructions on removing punch waste, see "Maintenance." For instructions on clearing a paper jam, see "Problem Solving.")
4 Buffer Pass Unit-E2
Open the Buffer Pass Unit-E2 to remove jammed paper. (See "Problem Solving.")
5 Front Cover of the Finisher-AE1
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge in the stapler unit, or to clear a staple jam. (For instructions on replacing the staple cartridge, see "Maintenance." For instructions on clearing a staple jam, see "Problem Solving.")
6 Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AE2
Open this cover to replace the staple cartridge, remove jammed paper, or to clear a staple jam in the stapler unit and saddle stitcher unit. (For instructions on replacing the staple cartridge in the stapler unit, see "Maintenance." For instructions on replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit, see "Maintenance." For instructions on clearing a paper jam, see "Problem Solving." For instructions on clearing a staple jam in the stapler unit, see "Problem Solving." For instructions on clearing a staple jam in the saddle stitcher unit, see "Problem Solving.")
7 Booklet Tray (Saddle Finisher-AE2 Only)
Prints that are saddle stitched are output to this tray.
8 Booklet Tray Guide (Saddle Finisher-AE2 Only)
Set this guide to match the size of the output paper. (See "Finishing Modes.")
9 Lower Output Tray
Prints are output to this tray. You can set the Tray Designation mode to designate this tray for outputting prints when using certain functions. (See "Additional Functions.")
10 Upper Output Tray
Prints are output to this tray. You can set the Tray Designation mode to designate this tray for outputting prints when using certain functions. (See "Additional Functions.")


Finishing Modes

The Finisher-AE1 and Saddle Finisher-AE2 are equipped with the following finishing modes.


Remark
  • Do not place anything other than output paper in the trays of the finisher, as doing so may damage the trays.
  • Do not place anything under the trays of the finisher, as doing so may damage the trays.

  • If the Collate or Group mode is set, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit, subsequent prints are automatically delivered to the next available tray. If all of the available trays have reached their stacking limits, printing stops temporarily. Remove all of the output paper from the trays. The trays move upward, and printing resumes.

  • Collate Mode

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order. The collated print sets can be shifted by pressing [Offset].

  • Group Mode

All prints of the same original page are grouped together. The grouped print sets can be shifted by pressing [Offset].

  • Offset Mode

The print output is shifted alternately to the front and back of the tray, in a vertical (portrait) orientation, or a horizontal (landscape) orientation, depending on the orientation of your originals. For example, if you place A4R originals, the paper is output and shifted in the horizontal direction. If you place A4 originals, the paper is output and shifted in the vertical direction.


Remark
  • If you press [Offset] when either the Collate or Group mode is set, each set of prints is shifted approximately 30 mm before it is delivered to the output tray.

  • Staple Mode

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order and stapled. Prints are stapled in the following places:

  • If an original is placed on the platen glass:

  • If originals are placed in the optional feeder:


Remark
  • If a finisher is attached to the machine, do not place your hand in the part of the tray where stapling is performed or where the rollers are located, as this may result in personal injury.

  • If the Staple mode is set, the output trays move downward as the stack of paper that is output increases in quantity and thickness. Once an output tray has reached its stacking limit, or after 30 sets of prints have been output, printing and stapling stop temporarily. Remove all of the stapled prints from the output tray, and printing and stapling resume.
  • You cannot corner or double staple B5R or A5R paper.
  • You cannot staple transparencies, envelopes, tracing paper, or labels.
  • Do not pull copies or prints out of the output area while they are being stapled. Remove the copies or prints after they are output to one of the output trays.
  • The maximum number of sheets, including cover sheets, that can be stapled together is 30 sheets of A3, B4, or A4R paper, and 50 sheets of A4 or B5 paper.
  • If the machine stops while stapling and the message <Load staples.> appears, almost all of the staples have been used, and the staple cartridge must be replaced. To proceed, replace the staple cartridge. (See "Maintenance.")

  • Saddle Stitch Mode

The Saddle Stitch mode enables you to make booklets, consisting of pages folded and stapled in the center.


Remark
  • The Saddle Stitch mode is available only if the Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • The maximum number of sheets that can be saddle stitched is 15 (60 pages, 80 g/m2), including cover sheets. To change the amount of pages that can be saddle stitched, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • The paper sizes that can be saddle stitched are: A3, B4, or A4R.
  • The accuracy of folds created in the Saddle Stitch mode may vary depending on the paper type and the number of sheets.
  • Make sure to adjust the Booklet Tray guide to match the size of the output paper before outputting saddle stitched prints, as shown below.
  • A paper jam may occur if the Booklet Tray guide is not adjusted to match the size of the output paper.

  • Hole Punch Mode

The Hole Punch mode punches two or three holes (depending on the paper size) in the printed sheets.

  • The hole punched areas are shown in the illustration below.

  • The distance between the punch holes is shown in the illustration below.


Remark
  • You cannot punch holes in A5R paper.
  • Holes cannot be punched in transparencies, envelopes, pre-punched paper, tracing paper, or labels.
  • The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine. However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.

: Available -: Unavailable

Paper Size Paper Size
Tray A Tray B Tray C Booklet Tray
A3
A4 -
A4R
A5R -
B4
B5 -
B5R -
Envelope COM10 No.10 -
Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8 -
DL -
ISO-B5 -
ISO-C5 -
Yougata 4 -
Free Size 99 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm - -

The Booklet Tray can only be used when the Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.



Inner 2 Way Tray-D1

If you attach the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 to the machine, prints can be delivered to both the main tray and the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1.

Additionally, if the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the right side of the machine, prints can be delivered to three different locations.

When the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 is attached to the machine, the following finishing modes are available:


Remark
  • If the optional Finisher-S1, Finisher-AE1, or Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached, the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 cannot be attached.

  • Collate Mode

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order before they are delivered to the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1.

  • Group Mode

All prints of the same original page are grouped together into sets before they are delivered to the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1.

  • Rotate Mode

If originals of the same size are printed, the prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and are output in alternating directions to the Inner 2 Way Tray-D1.



Parts and Their Functions

1 Inner 2 Way Tray
Prints are output to this tray.
2 Output Paper Tray Guide
Tilt up the output paper tray guide to catch the printouts.
3 Paper Output Unit
Pull out the Paper Output Unit to remove jammed paper. (See "Problem Solving.")
4 Main Unit's Right Cover
Open this cover when clearing a paper jam inside the main unit. (See "Problem Solving.")

Remark
  • The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine. However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.

: Available -: Unavailable

Paper Size Output Tray
Tray A Tray B
A3
A4
A4R
A5R
B4
B5
B5R
Envelope COM10 No.10
Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8
DL
ISO-B5
ISO-C5
Yougata 4
Free Size 99 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm



Copy Tray-J1

If the Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the machine, the following finishing modes are available:


  • Collate Mode

The prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order before they are delivered to the output tray.

  • Group Mode

All prints of the same original page are grouped together into sets before they are delivered to the output tray.

  • Rotate Mode

If originals of the same size are printed, the prints are automatically collated into sets arranged in page order, and are output in alternating directions to the output tray.


Remark
  • [Rotate] can only be selected when the Copy Tray-J1 and the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 are attached.


Parts and Their Functions

1 Output Tray
Prints are output to this tray.
2 Auxiliary Tray
Pull out the auxiliary tray if you are printing on large size paper (A3, B4, or A4R).

Remark
  • The following are paper sizes that can be output to the output trays of the machine. However, some paper sizes may not be output, depending on the set functions.

: Available -: Unavailable

Paper Size Output Tray
A3
A4
A4R
A5R
B4
B5
B5R
Envelope COM10 No.10 -
Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8 -
DL -
ISO-B5 -
ISO-C5 -
Yougata 4 -
Free Size 99 mm × 148 mm to 297 mm × 432 mm -


Card Reader-C1

If the Card Reader-C1 is attached to the machine, you must insert a control card to operate it. The Card Reader-C1 performs Department ID Management by using the control card.


Remark
  • If you are using a login service other than default authentication, the Limit Functions mode will not be available.
  • If 'Domain Authentication' or 'Domain Authentication + Local Device Authentication' of SSO-H is set as the login service, you cannot use the optional Card Reader-C1.
  • If the Basic Features screen does not appear on the touch panel display when the control card is inserted, make sure that:
  • The control card is inserted in the correct direction.
  • The control card is inserted as far as it can go.
  • An unusable control card is not inserted. (For example, cards, which are damaged or cards prohibited from use.)
  • Insert a usable control card correctly.
  • If the Card Reader-C1 is attached, the types of cards shown below can be used. An optical type card can manage up to 200 departments, and a magnetic type card can manage up to 1,000 departments.


Procedure before Using the Machine

  1. Insert the control card into the card slot, making sure that it is facing in the correct direction.

The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears on the touch panel display.



Procedure after Using the Machine

  1. After you finish using the machine, remove the control card.

The touch panel display returns to the screen for inserting the control card.

  • Once you have removed the control card, you cannot operate the machine until the control card is inserted again.


Department ID Management

This section describes how to change the password and page limit, and how to check the print totals when the control card is being used.


Remark
  • The maximum number of digits that you can register for the password is seven. If you enter fewer than seven digits, the machine registers the password with leading zeros.
  • Example: If <321> is entered, <0000321> is registered.


Flow of Additional Functions Operations

This section describes the flow of Additional Functions operations when the optional Card Reader-C1 is attached.


Remark
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed when you press (Reset).

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings].

If the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys) → press (Log In/Out).

The System Settings screen is displayed.

  1. Press [Dept. ID Management].

  • If the desired setting is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.
  1. Select the desired mode.

  1. Specify the desired mode → press [OK].

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.


Changing the Password and Page Limit

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [Register Dept. ID/Password].

  1. Press [] or [] to display the department whose password you want to change → select the department → press [Edit].

  • Press and hold down [] or [] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are registered.
  1. Enter the new password (up to seven digits) using - (numeric keys).

  • Press [Password].
  • Press [Password] → enter the desired password.
  • Press [Confirm] → enter the same number to confirm the password → press [OK].

You cannot store a password with only zeros as the number, such as <0000000>. If you enter a number that begins with zeros, the leading zeros are ignored.

Example: If <02> or <002> is entered, <0000002> is stored.

  • If you make a mistake when entering the password, press (Clear) to clear the password.
  • You cannot change the Department ID.
  • If Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'Off', passwords you enter are not displayed as asterisks (*******). (See "Security.")
  1. If you want to change or set a page limit restriction, press [Turn Limits On/Off and Set Page Limits].
  1. Set the page limit restriction.
  • Press [On] under the desired function(s).

To cancel setting a page limit restriction for a function, press [Off] under the desired function's name.

  • <Total Print Limit> is the sum of <Copy Limit> and <Print Limit>.
  • Press [] (Page Limit) next to [On]/[Off] of the desired function(s) → enter the page limit restriction using - (numeric keys).
  • The machine stops sending a fax if the Scan Limit is reached while faxing a document either from memory or directly to the recipient.
  • The machine stops scanning if a scan limit is reached while the machine is scanning originals that are being fed from the optional feeder. (Those originals that were scanned before the limit is reached are not added to the scan count.)
  • If you make a mistake when entering a number, press (Clear) to clear the number.
  • You can set the page limit from 0 to 999,999 pages. Once the page limit is reached, copying, scanning, or printing is not possible.
  • The page limit refers to the number of printed surfaces. Therefore, a two-sided print is counted as two pages.
  • Press [OK] → [OK].

  1. If you would like to limit users to certain functions of the machine, press [Limit Functions].
  1. Press [On] or [Off] next to the functions you want to limit using Department ID Management → press [OK].

If you select [On] for all of the functions on the screen, Department ID Management is set for all of the machine's functions.

If you select [Off] for all of the functions on the screen, Department ID Management is set only for copying or printing operations from computers.

[Send] appears if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional fax board is installed, or if only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated. If only the optional fax board is installed, [Fax] appears.

  1. Press [Done] → [OK].

If the page limit setting is set to 'On', the remaining number of pages that can be printed (page limit minus the current page count) is displayed on the screen, as shown below.


Copy Basic Features Screen

The icons that are displayed on the screen are explained below:

Total number of sheets remaining that can be copied or printed
Remaining number of sheets that can be copied


Scan Screen

The item that is displayed on the Scan screen is explained below:

Remaining number of sheets that can be scanned in color
Remaining number of sheets that can be scanned in black


Print Screen

The icon that is displayed on the Print screen is displayed below:

Total number of sheets remaining that can be copied or printed
Remaining number of sheets that can be printed


Send Screen

The icon that is displayed on the Send screen is explained below:

Remaining number of sheets that can be scanned in color
Remaining number of sheets that can be scanned in black
  • Only the page limits for functions that are set to 'On' are displayed.
  • The Send screen appears only if the optional Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional fax board is installed, or if only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated.


Checking the Page Counts on a Control Card

You can check the page counts on the control card you are currently using.


  1. Press [System Monitor].
  1. Press [Pg Ct Check].

  1. Check the page counts → press [Done] → [Done].


Checking and Printing Counter Information

You can display and print a list of how much paper was used by each department.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [Page Totals].

  1. Check or print the page total count.

The print page totals that belong to print jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the number of prints from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID. These prints are referred to as prints with unknown IDs.

The scan page totals that belong to scan jobs without a Department ID (left blank) are the number of pages that have been scanned from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID. The scanned pages from computers are referred to as network scans with unknown IDs.


  • Press [] or [] to display the desired Department ID → press [] or [] to display and view the desired page totals.
  • Press and hold down [] or [] to quickly and continuously scroll through the available Department ID pages. Continuous scrolling is useful when a large number of Department IDs are registered.

  • Press [Print List].
  • Press [Yes].
  • To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
  • To close the screen that is displayed while the machine is printing the Page Count List, press [Done].
  • The counter information can be printed only if A3, B4, A4, or A4R (plain, recycled, or color paper) is loaded in a paper source that is set to 'On' when you press [Other] to select a paper source in Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen). (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Press [Done] → [OK].


Clearing Page Totals

You can clear the page totals made for all departments or for specific departments.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Press [Page Totals].

  1. Press [Clear All Totals].

To clear one page total at a time by department, press [] or [] to display the desired department → select the department → press [Clear].

  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done] → [OK].


Accepting Print and Scan Jobs with Unknown Ids

You can specify whether to accept or reject print and network scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.


Remark
  • The setting for <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is valid only if the machine is equipped with the Printer function. The setting for <Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs> is valid only if the machine is equipped with the Network Scan function.
  • For more information on the Network Scan function, see "Scanner Driver."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [System Settings] → [Dept. ID Management].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs>:

[On]: The machine accepts print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not accept print jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.

<Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs>:

[On]: The machine accepts remote scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.
[Off]: The machine does not accept remote scan jobs from computers that do not correspond with a registered Department ID.


Additional Functions

This category describes the Additional Functions of the machine, which can be customized to suit your needs.



What Are Additional Functions?

Additional Functions enable you to customize the machine's various settings.


Remark
  • If you are performing user authentication using the SSO-H login service, you cannot change the Additional Functions settings of the machine if you are logged in as a general user.
  • If you are logged in as an Administrator, you can change the Additional Functions settings of the machine. (When the dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password appears, enter the System Manager ID and System Password).
  • Settings specified from the Additional Functions screen are never changed, even if you press (Reset).

  1. Press (Additional Functions).

The Additional Functions screen is displayed.

  1. Select an Additional Functions setting.

If you select System Settings and the System Manager ID and System Password have been set, enter the System Manager ID and System Password using - (numeric keys) → press (Log In/Out).

  1. Press a mode key to specify its settings.

For an overview of all the settings you can change from the Additional Functions screen, see "Additional Functions Settings Table."

  • The Common Settings, Adjustment/Cleaning, System Settings, and Copy Settings screens consist of a list of individual settings. Press [] or [] to scroll to the desired setting.

  1. Specify the desired mode → press [OK].

The selected mode is set.

  1. Press [Done] repeatedly until the Basic Features screen appears.


Additional Functions Settings Table

The following settings can be selected or stored from the Additional Functions screen. (*1 Indicates the default setting.) For more information on the settings not explained in this category, see the following:


The Additional Functions Screen


The System Settings Screen

  • Common Settings
Item Settings Delivered
Function Display Settings No

Initial Function and Function Order Settings

Copy*1, Send, Mail Box, Print Job, Scan, MEAP

Copy Screen Display Settings

Regular Copy Only, Regular and Express Copy*1, Express Copy Only

Set System Monitor as the Default Screen

On, Off*1

Set the Default Screen for System Monitor

Copy, Send, Fax, Print, Receive, Device*1
Auto Clear Setting Initial Function*1, Selected Function Yes
Display Remaining Paper Message On*1, Off No
Inch Entry On, Off*1 Yes
Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS Copy, Printer, Mail Box, Receive/Fax,
Other: (Stack Bypass: On, Off*1, All Other Paper Sources: On*1, Off)
Copy: Consider Paper Type: On, Off*1
No
Envelope Cassette Env. 1: COM10*1, ISO-B5, Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8, ISO-C5, DL, Yougata 4
Env. 2: COM10*1, ISO-B5, Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8, ISO-C5, DL, Yougata 4
No
Register Paper Type Plain*1, Recycled, Color, Pre-punched, Bond Paper, Heavy, Tracing Paper, Transparency, Labels No
Paper Select Screen Priority Simple*1, Detailed No
Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode Low*1, High Yes
LTRR/STMT Original Selection Distinguish Manually, Use LTRR Format*1, Use STMT Format Yes
Tray Designation*2 If the Optional Copy Tray-J1 Is Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer*1, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
If the Optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 Is Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer*1, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
If the Optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer*1, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray C: Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
If the Optional Finisher-S1 and Additional Finisher Tray-B1 Are Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer*1, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
If the Optional Finisher-S1 and Copy Tray-J1 Are Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer*1, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
If the Optional Finisher-S1, Copy Tray-J1, and Additional Finisher Tray-B1 Are Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer*1, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray C: Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
If the Optional Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2, and Buffer Pass Unit-E2 Are Attached
  • Tray A: Copy*1, Mail Box*1, Printer, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray B: Copy, Mail Box, Printer*1, Receive, Fax, Other
  • Tray C: Copy, Mail Box, Printer, Receive*1, Fax*1, Other*1
Tray Home Position: Tray A*1, Tray B, Off
No*3
Printing Priority Copy: 1*1, 2, 3
Printer: 1, 2*1, 3
Mail Box, Receive/Fax, Other: 1, 2, 3*1
Yes
Register Form for Form Composition Register (Entire Image Composition/ Transparent Image), Erase, Check Print, Details No
Register Characters for Page No./Watermark Register, Edit, Erase Yes
Stack Bypass Standard Settings On, Off*1 No
Paper Feed Method Switch Speed Priority*1, Print Side Priority No
Standard Local Print Settings No

Paper Select

All Paper Sources, Auto*1

Copies

1*1 to 9,999 sets

Finishing

If No Finisher Is Attached or Only the Optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 is Attached:
  • Do Not Collate, Collate*1, Rotate Collate, Group, Rotate Group
If the Optional Finisher-S1 Is Attached:
  • Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner)
If the Optional Finisher-S1 and Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 Are Attached:
  • Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner), Hole Punch
If the Optional Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2, and Buffer Pass Unit-E2 Are Attached:
  • Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right)
If the Optional Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2, and Buffer Pass Unit-E2 and Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 Are Attached:
  • Do Not Collate, Collate, Offset Collate*1, Group, Offset Group, Staple (Corner: Top Left, Bottom Left, Top Right, Bottom Right), (Double: Left, Right), Hole Punch

2-Sided Print

On, Off*1

Erase Document After Printing

On, Off*1

Merge Documents

On, Off*1
Language Switch On, Off*1 No
Reversed Display (Color) On, Off*1 No
Offset Jobs*2 On*1, Off Yes
Job Separator between Jobs On, Off*1 Yes
Job Separator between Copies On, Off*1 No
Job Duration Display Copy: On, Off*1
Mail Box: On, Off*1
Other: On, Off*1
No
Number of Copies/Job Duration Status Display On*1, Off No
Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray*2 On*1, Off Yes
Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area*2 On*1, Off No
Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio Yes
Gamma Value for Remote Scans Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 Yes
Limited Functions Mode*2 On, Off*1 Yes
Shutdown Mode Press [Start] No
Suspended Job Timeout On (0 to 999 minutes, in one minute increments, 5 minutes*1), Off*1 Yes
Initialize Common Settings Initialize No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*3 Indicates information that is delivered only if the number of output trays in the host machine and client machines is the same.
  • Timer Settings
Item Settings Delivered
Time Fine Adjustment 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments No
Auto Sleep Time 10 seconds, 1*1, 2, 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50 min., 1 hour, 90 min., 2, 3, 4 hours Yes
Auto Clear Time 0 (Off) to 9 minutes, in one minute increments; 2 min.*1 Yes
Time Until Unit Quiets Down 0 (Off), to 9 minutes, in one minutes increments; 1 min.*1 Yes
Daily Timer Settings Sunday to Saturday, 00:00 to 23:59, in one minute increments Yes

*1 Indicates the default setting.
  • Adjustment/Cleaning
Item Settings Delivered
Zoom Fine Adjustment X, Y: -1.0% to +1.0%, in 0.1% increments; 0.0%*1 No
Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning*2 Press [Start] No
Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment*2 All paper sizes: -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm, in 0.25 mm increments; 0.00 mm*1 No
Creep (Displacement) Correction Adjustment Correction (for each paper type) 0.00 mm to 2.00 mm, in 0.05 mm increments; 0.25 mm*1 No
Auto Gradation Adjustment Automatic after the machine prints and scans a test print No
Exposure Recalibration Copy/Inbox, Send: Light, Dark: 1 to 9 levels; 5*1 No
Character/Background Contrast Adjustment*2 Relative Contrast Value: -7 to +7; -1*1 (for the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230), 0*1 (for the iR3225), Sample Print, Sample Print Settings
Standard Value Settings: 1 to 64; 20*1, Print, Print Settings
Latent String Density: 1 to 36; 7*1 (for the iR3245/iR3235/iR3230), 6*1 (for the iR3225)
Initialize
No
Feeder Cleaning*2 Press [Start] No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
  • Report Settings*2
Item Settings Delivered
Settings: Send
TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off
  • Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Yes
Activity Report Yes

Auto Print

On*1, Off

Daily Activity Report Time

On, Off*1
  • Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59

Send/Receive Separate

On, Off*1
Settings: Fax
Fax TX Report For Error Only*1, On, Off
  • Report with TX Image: On*1, Off
Yes
Fax Activity Report Yes

Auto Print

On*1, Off

Daily Activity Report Time

On, Off*1
  • Timer Setting: 00:00 to 23:59

Send/Receive Separate

On, Off*1
Fax RX Report For Error Only, On, Off*1 Yes
Confidential Fax Inbox RX Report On*1, Off Yes
Print List: Send
Address Book List Address Book 1 to 10;
One-touch Buttons, Print List
No
User Data List Print List No
Print List: Fax
User Data List Print List No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
  • System Settings
Item Settings Delivered
System Manager Settings
System Manager ID Seven digit number maximum Yes
System Password Seven digit number maximum
System Manager 32 characters maximum
E-mail Address 64 characters maximum
Contact Information 32 characters maximum
Comment 32 characters maximum
Dept. ID Management
Dept. ID Management On, Off*1 Yes
Register Dept. ID/Password Register, Edit, Erase, Limit Functions Yes
Page Totals Clear, Print List, Clear All Totals No
Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs On*1, Off Yes
Allow Remote Scan Jobs with Unknown IDs On*1, Off Yes
Communications Settings*2
E-mail/I-Fax Common Settings

Maximum Data Size for Sending

0 (Off), 1 to 99 MB; 3 MB*1 Yes

Default Subject

40 characters maximum; Attached Image*1

Specify Authorized User Reply-to Destination

On, Off*1 No
E-mail Settings

Specify Authorized User Dest. Sender

On*1, Off No
I-Fax Settings

Full Mode TX Timeout

1 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1 Yes

Divided Data RX Timeout

0 to 99 hours; 24 hours*1

Print MDN/DSN on Receipt

On, Off*1

Always send notice for RX errors

On*1, Off

Use Send Via Server

On, Off*1

Allow MDN Not Via Server

On*1, Off
Fax Settings

Send Start Speed

33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes

Receive Start Speed

33600 bps*1, 14400 bps, 9600 bps, 7200 bps, 4800 bps, 2400 bps Yes

Receive Password

20 digits maximum No

R-Key Settings

PTSN*1, PBX Yes
Memory RX Inbox Settings

Memory RX Inbox Password

Seven digit number No

Use Fax Memory Lock

On, Off*1 Yes

Use I-Fax Memory Lock

On, Off*1 Yes

Memory Lock Start Time

Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Yes

Memory Lock End Time

Everyday, Select Days, Off*1 Yes
Remote UI On*1, Off
  • Use SSL*5: On, Off*1
Yes
Restrict the Send Function*2
Address Book Password Seven digit number Yes
Access Number Management On, Off*1 Yes
Restrict New Addresses Fax: On, Off*1
E-mail: On, Off*1
I-fax: On, Off*1
File: On, Off*1
Yes
Allow Fax Driver TX On*1, Off Yes
Confirm Entered Fax Numbers On, Off*1 Yes
E-mail/I-Fax Domain Sending Restriction Restrict Sending to Domains; On, Off*1
  • Register, Edit, Erase
Yes
Allow Sending with Expired Certificates On, Off*1 Yes
Always Add Device Signature to Send On, Off*1
  • Restrict File Format: On, Off*1
Yes
Device Information Settings
Device Name 32 characters maximum No
Location 32 characters maximum No
Forwarding Settings*2 Receive Type, E-mail Priority, Edit, Erase, Print List No
Validate/Invalidate, Register (Registered Forwarding Settings), Forward w/o Conditions Yes
Clear Message Board Clear No
Auto Online/Offline*2
Auto Online On, Off*1 Yes
Auto Offline On, Off*1 Yes
Date & Time Settings Date and Time Setting (12 digit number)
Time Zone: GMT -12:00 to GMT +12:00; GMT 00:00*1
Daylight Saving Time: On, Off*1
No
License Registration 24 characters maximum No
System Monitor Screen Restriction
Display Status Before Authentication On*1, Off No
Allow Secured Print from Print Status Screen On, Off*1 No
Job Log Display On*1, Off
  • Obtain Job Log From Management Software: Permit, Do Not Allow*1
No
Register LDAP Server*2 Register, Edit, Erase, Register/Edit LDAP Search, Print List No
MEAP Settings
Use HTTP On*1, Off
  • Use SSL*5: On, Off*1
Yes
Print System Information Print No
Copy Set Numbering Option Settings Copy Set Num. Op: On (ID/User Name: On, Off; Date: On, Off; Characters: On, Off), Off*1 Yes
Display ID/User Name On*1, Off No
USB Settings
Use USB Device On*1, Off Yes
Use USB Host On*1, Off Yes
Use MEAP Driver for USB Input Device On*1, Off Yes
Use MEAP Driver for USB External Disk Device On, Off*1 Yes
Device Information Delivery Settings
Register Destinations Auto Search/Register, Register, Details, Erase, Print List
Auto Delivery Settings Everyday, Select Days, Off*1
  • Add. Functions Settings Value: On (Network Settings: Include, Exclude*1), Off*1
  • Dept. ID: On, Off*1
  • Address Book: On, Off*1
  • Printer Settings: On, Off*1
  • Paper Information: On, Off*1
Manual Delivery Add. Functions Settings Value: On (Network Settings: Include, Exclude*1), Off*1
Dept. ID: On, Off*1
Address Book: On, Off*1
Printer Settings: On, Off*1
Paper Information: On, Off*1
Restrictions for Receiving Device Info. On*1, Off
Restore Data Add. Functns Set. Value, Dept. ID, Address Book, Printer Settings,Paper Information: On, Off*1
Receive Restriction for Each Function Add. Functions Settings Value: On*1, Off
Dept. ID: On*1, Off
Address Book: On*1, Off
Printer Settings: On*1, Off
Paper Information: On*1, Off
Communication Log Details, Print List, Report Settings
Auto Print: On*1, Off
Daily Activity Report Time: On (00:00 to 23:59), Off*1
Separate Report Type: On, Off*1
Initialize All Data/Settings Initialize No
Use Asterisks to Enter Access No./Passwords On*1, Off Yes
Secure Watermark Mode*2
Forced Secure Watermark Copy:Do Not Set*1, Set
Mail Box:Do Not Set*1, Set
Printer:Do Not Set*1, Set
Yes
Printer Driver Secure Watermark Do Not Set*1, Set Yes
Encrypted Print Settings*2
Only Allow Encrypted Print Jobs On, Off*1 Yes
Settings for All User Inboxes
Time until Document Auto Erase 0=Off, 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*1, 7, 30 days No
Print Upon Storing From the Printer Driver On, Off*1 No
Paper Type Management Settings Details/Edit
  • Name, Category, Basis Weight, Type, Finish, Creep(Displacement) Correct., Color
Yes
Duplicate, Erase, Sort List by No
PDL Selection (PnP) *2 UFR II, PCL5e, PCL5c, PCL6, PS3, FAX No
Restrict Printer Jobs On, Off*1 Yes
Erase Encrypted PDF Password Erase No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*5 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
  • Copy Settings
Item Settings Delivered
Paper Select Key Size for Express Copy Screen Large*1: Four paper sources maximum
(Stack Bypass, Stack Bypass Settings,
1: Paper Drawer 1,
2: Paper Drawer 2,
3: Paper Drawer 3,
4: Paper Drawer 4,
5: Paper Deck-Q1),
Small
No
Standard Key 1, 2 Settings for Regular Screen Various modes; No Settings*1 No
Standard Key Settings for Express Copy Screen Displayed Standard Keys: Up to 5 Set Keys*1, Up to 10 Set Keys,
Settings: Various modes; No Settings*1
No
Auto Collate*2 On*1, Off Yes
Auto Orientation On*1, Off Yes
Photo Mode On, Off*1 Yes
Standard Settings Store, Initialize No
Register Remote Device Register (Seven devices maximum), Details, Erase, Move To Top No
Remote Device Transmission Timeout 5 to 30 seconds; 30 seconds*1 Yes
Initialize Copy Settings Initialize No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
  • Communications Settings*2
Item Settings Delivered
Common Settings:
TX Settings
Unit Name for E-mail/I-Fax 24 characters maximum No
Erase Failed TX On*1, Off Yes
Data Compression Ratio High Ratio, Normal*1, Low Ratio Yes
Handle Documents with Forwarding Errors Always Print, Store/Print, Off*1 Yes
Photo Mode On, Off*1 Yes
Retry Times 0 to 5 times; 3 times*1 Yes
Edit Standard Send Settings Scanning Mode: Clr/B&W 200x200 dpi
File Format: TIFF/PDF Auto Select
Stamp: Off
No
Register Favorites Button Register/Edit, Erase (M1 to M18), Display Comment: On, Off*1 Yes
Display Confirmation for Favorites Button On*1, Off No
Image Level for High Compression Image Level in Text/Photo or Photo Mode:
Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Image Level in Text Mode:
Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
OCR (Text Serchable) Settings Smart Scan: On*1, Off
Num. of Char. for Doc. Name Setting: 1 to 24 characters; 24 characters*1
Yes
Trace & Smooth Settings Outline Graphics: On*1, Off
Graphics Recognition Level: Normal*1, Moderate, High
Background Image Level: Data Size Priority, Normal*1, Image Priority
Yes
Check Device Signature Certificate Certificate Details: Certificate Verification No
Check User Signature Certificate Certificate Details: Certificate Verification No
Default Screen for Send Favorites Buttons, One-touch Buttons, New Address*1 No
TX Terminal ID On*1 (Printing Position: Inside, Outside*1;Display Destination Name: On*1, Off; Telephone # Mark: FAX*1, TEL), Off Yes
Use Chunked Encoding with WebDav Sending On*1, Off Yes
Gamma Value for YCbCr Send Jobs Gamma 1.0, Gamma 1.4, Gamma 1.8*1, Gamma 2.2 Yes
Initialize TX Settings Initialize No
Common Settings:
RX Settings
2-Sided Print On, Off*1 Yes
Select Drawer Switch A: On*1, Off
Switch B: On*1, Off
Switch C: On*1, Off
Switch D: On*1, Off
Yes
Receive Reduction On*1:
  • RX Reduction: Auto*1, Fixed Reduction
  • Reduce %: 75 to 97% (in 1% increments); 90%*1
  • Reduce Direction: Vertical & Horizontal, Vertical Only*1
Off
Yes
Received Page Footer On, Off*1 Yes
2 On 1 Log On, Off*1 Yes
Fax Settings: Basic Settings
Sender's Names (TTI) 01 to 99, Register/Edit, Erase No
Fax Settings: Tx Settings
ECM TX On*1, Off Yes
Pause Time 1 to 15 seconds; 2 seconds*1 Yes
Auto Redial On*1:
Option:
  • Redial Times: 1 to 10 times;2 times*1
  • Redial Interval: 2 to 99 minutes;2 minutes*1
  • TX Error Resend: Error and 1st Page*1, All pages, Off
Off
Yes
Check Dial Tone Before Sending On*1, Off Yes
Fax Settings: RX Settings
ECM RX On, Off*1 Yes
Fax Settings: Line Options
Line 1

Unit Telephone #

20 digits maximum No

Unit Name

24 characters maximum No

Tel Line Type

Pulse, Tone*1 No
Line 2*7, Line 3*8 No

Unit Telephone #

20 digits maximum No

Unit Name

24 characters maximum No

Tel Line Type

Pulse, Tone*1 No
TX Line Selection Optional FAX Board is installed:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
Optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
  • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
Optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board:
  • Line 1: Priority TX*1, Prohibit TX
  • Line 2: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
  • Line 3: Priority TX, Prohibit TX
No

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*7 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.
*8 Indicates item that appears only if the optional Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the optional Super G3 FAX Board.
  • Mail Box Settings
Item Settings Delivered
User Inboxes Settings Inbox No.: 00 to 99
Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum
Password: Seven digits
Time until Document Auto Erase: 0 (Off), 1, 2, 3, 6, 12 hours, 1, 2, 3*1, 7, 30 days
URL Send Settings
Print upon storing from the printer driver: On, Off*1
Initialize*5
Yes*6
Photo Mode On, Off*1 Yes
Standard Scan Settings Store, Initialize No
Confidential Fax Inboxes Settings*2 Inbox No.: 00 to 49
Register Inbox Name: 24 characters maximum
Password: Seven digits maximum
URL Send Settings
Initialize*5
Yes*6

*1 Indicates the default setting.
*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.
*5 Indicates items that are not delivered as device information.
*6 Information is not delivered if a password is set for the inbox.
  • Address Book Settings*2
Item Settings Delivered
Register Address Register New Address, Edit, Erase, Incremental Yes
Register Address Book Name Register Name Yes
One-touch Buttons Register/Edit (from 001 to 200), Erase Yes

*2 Indicates items that appear only when the appropriate optional equipment is attached.

Remark
  • If you are performing user authentication using the SSO-H login service, you cannot change the Additional Functions settings of the machine if you are logged in as a general user.
  • If you are logged in as an Administrator, you can change the Additional Functions settings of the machine. (When the dialog box prompting you to enter the System Manager ID and System Password appears, enter the System Manager ID and System Password).
  • Information that is delivered when the Device Information Delivery Settings mode is set, is marked with "Yes" in the "Delivered" column. For information on the Device Information Delivery Settings, see "Security."


Specifying Common Settings

You can specify the settings that are common to the Copy, Mail Box, Send, and Fax functions.



Initial Function at Power ON

You can specify the screen that is displayed when you turn ON the main power, or after the Auto Clear mode initiates.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Function Display Settings].
  1. Specify each setting → press [OK].


  • Press [Settings] for <Initial Function and Function Order Settings>.
  • Select a function.

To set the screen of the selected function as the initial function screen, press [Set as Initial Function].

  • If you select [MEAP], it takes longer to start the machine. If no MEAP applications are installed, a message telling you that there are no MEAP applications installed appears.
  • Press [Up] or [Down] to move the function's key to the desired position or group → press [Next].

The function keys are divided into the following groups:

Group A: The selected function keys are displayed on page 1 of the Basic Features screen.

Group B: The selected function keys are displayed on page 2 of the Basic Features screen.

  • Select a function group.
  • Press [Up] or [Down] to move the function group to the desired position → press [OK].


  • Press [Settings] for <Copy Screen Display Settings>.
  • Press [Regular Copy Only], [Regular and Express Copy], or [Express Copy Only] → press [OK].

If you select [Regular and Express Copy], the Regular Copy Screen is displayed by priority.


  • Press [On] for <Set System Monitor as the Default Screen>.

  • Press [Settings] for <Set the Default Screen for System Monitor>.
  • Select [Copy], [Send], [Fax], [Print], [Receive], or [Device] under <Default Status Type> → select [Status] or [Log] under <Status/Log>.

  • Press [OK].


Default Display after Auto Clear

You can set whether the screen specified as the Initial Function is displayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates.


Remark
  • The time necessary for the Auto Clear mode to initiate can be set. (See "Auto Clear Time.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Auto Clear Setting].
  1. Select [Initial Function] or [Selected Function] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Initial Function]: The screen specified as the initial function is displayed after the Auto Clear mode initiates. For example, if you set the System Monitor screen as the initial screen, and the Auto Clear mode initiates while a settings screen for the Mail Box function is shown, the display returns to the System Monitor screen.
[Selected Function]: The display returns to the main screen of the function that was displayed before the Auto Clear mode initiated. For example, if you set the System Monitor screen as the initial screen, and the Auto Clear mode initiates while a settings screen for the Mail Box function is shown, the display returns to the Inbox Selection screen of the Mail Box Function.


Display the Remaining Paper Message

You can set to display the message indicating that the remaining paper loaded in a paper drawer is low.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Display Remaining Paper Message].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Inch Entry

Specifying this setting ensures that the key for entering values in inches is displayed on the various numeric entry screens.


Remark
  • Even if Inch Entry is set to 'On', you still have the option to enter measurements in millimeters by pressing [mm] on the various numeric entry screens.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Inch Entry].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching

You can set which paper sources can be used for Automatic Paper Selection and Auto Drawer Switching. This setting can be made independently for all functions of the machine, and is especially useful when you want to use different paper sources for different purposes.


Remark
  • Paper sources set to 'On' are used for the following functions:
  • APS (Auto Paper Selection): The machine automatically selects the appropriate paper size (paper source) based on the original's size and copy ratio settings (when making a copy), or the set ratio of the image (when receiving a fax).
  • ADS (Auto Drawer Switching): If a paper source runs out of paper during a continuous print job, the machine automatically selects another paper source with the same paper size, and begins feeding paper from that paper source.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS].
  1. Select [Copy], [Printer], [Mail Box], [Receive/Fax], or [Other].

[Printer] appears only if the optional printer function is activated.

[Receive/Fax] appears if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional fax board is installed. If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, [Receive] appears. If only the optional fax board is installed, [Fax] appears.

[Other] is used for specifying the paper source for printing reports.

  1. Select [On] or [Off] for the stack bypass and the other paper sources → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The paper source is eligible for APS/ADS.
[Off]: The paper source is ineligible for APS/ADS.

The numbers on the screen represent the following paper sources:


The optional Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 and Paper Deck-Q1 are attached.

  • Regardless of the stack bypass setting, you cannot select 'Off' for all of the paper sources at the same time. At least one of the paper sources, besides the stack bypass must be set to 'On'.
  • The settings under [Copy] include an option called [Consider Paper Type], which determines whether the machine considers the paper type loaded in a paper source.
  • If [Consider Paper Type] is set to 'On', paper is not fed from another paper source when the original paper source runs out of paper, unless another paper source is loaded with the same paper size and type. For more information on stored paper types, see "Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source."
  • If [Consider Paper Type] is set to 'Off', paper is fed from another paper source when paper in the current paper source runs out, as long as the same paper size/type is loaded in that paper source.
  • If you selected [Printer] in step 2, the Stack Bypass icon ( ) will not be displayed on the paper selection screen.


Designating the Envelope Type

You can use Paper Drawer 1 as an envelope cassette, if you attach the optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2, set the size switch to the appropriate envelope type, and the paper size dial to 'ENV.'.


Remark
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 is attached to Paper Drawer 1.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Envelope Cassette].
  1. Select [ENV.1] or [ENV.2] → select the envelope type → press [OK].
  • Make sure that the selected envelope type is the same envelope type that is loaded in Paper Drawer 1.


Identifying the Type of Paper in a Paper Source

This setting enables you to specify the paper type loaded in each paper source.


Remark
  • Be sure to correctly set the paper type. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Paper Type].
  1. Select the paper source in which you want to register the paper type.

The numbers on the screen represent the following paper sources:


The optional Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 and Paper Deck-Q1 are attached.

  1. Select the desired paper type loaded in the paper source → press [OK].

Make sure that the registered paper type setting is the same paper type that is loaded in the paper source.

  • You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper types, see "Security."
  • The registered paper type information is displayed through the use of icons on the paper selection screen, as shown below.


Paper Select Screen Priority

You can set whether priority is given to the simple setting screen for paper type, or the detailed setting screen when displaying the paper type selection screen from the paper size selection screen.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Paper Select Screen Priority].
  1. Select [Simple] or [Detailed] → press [OK].


Energy Consumption in the Sleep Mode

You can set the amount of energy that the machine consumes when it is in the Sleep mode.


Remark
  • The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely, depending on the status and type of installed MEAP applications (e.g., there still may be applications running in the background consuming power).
  • If there are less than 10 minutes remaining before a Delayed Send job is to be sent, the machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • If you are using a management application (such as NetSpot Console) to view or manage the settings and status of the machine via the network, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • The machine will not enter the Sleep mode completely when it is connected to a computer via a USB cable.
  • When memory media or a USB keyboard is connected to the USB port, the machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely.
  • The machine may not enter the Sleep mode completely in the following cases:
  • If <Ethernet Type> in [Ethernet Driver Settings] in [Network Settings] (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to '1000 Base-T'
  • If the IPSec Board is installed and <Use IPSec> in [IPSec Settings] in [TCP/IP Settings] (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On'
  • If the Wireless LAN Board is installed
  • In some cases, the energy consumption level in the Sleep mode is 'High' even when the energy consumption level is set to 'Low' when:
  • A job is being processed (including a forwarding job, report job, receive job, and sending a forwarding done notice).
  • Any of the following settings are set from the Additional Functions screen:

Report Settings
Settings Send The Daily Activity Report Time setting for the Activity Report is set to 'On'.*1
Fax The Daily Activity Report Time setting for the FAX Activity Report is set to 'On'.*1
System Settings
Communications Settings Memory RX Inbox Settings Time limit for receiving fax documents in memory is set.*1
Network Settings TCP/IP Settings

NetWare Settings

AppleTalk Settings

SMB Settings

E-Mail/I-Fax
DHCP is set to 'On'.

NetWare is set to 'On'.

AppleTalk is set to 'On'.

SMB is set to 'On'.

The POP Interval setting is set to less than '10' minutes (except when the POP Interval setting is set to '0').
*1 If there is more than 10 minutes remaining before the specified time, the machine consumes the same amount of energy as when the energy consumption level is set to 'Low'.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode].
  1. Select [Low] or [High] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Low]: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is low, but it takes longer to recover from the Sleep mode.
[High]: Energy consumption in the Sleep mode is high, but it takes shorter to recover from the Sleep mode.
  • If Energy Consumption in Sleep Mode is set to 'Low', it may take more than 10 seconds for the touch panel to be displayed after pressing the control panel power switch.


Distinguishing LTRR and STMT Originals

You can designate the way the machine handles LTRR and STMT originals that are placed on the platen glass.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [LTRR/STMT Original Selection].
  1. Select [Distinguish Manually], [Use LTRR Format], or [Use STMT Format] → press [OK].

If you select [Distinguish Manually], a screen enabling you to select the original size appears when scanning.

If you select [Use LTRR Format], the machine detects the original as LTRR.

If you select [Use STMT Format], the machine detects the original as STMT.



Output Tray Designation

You can designate the machine's output trays to be used for specific functions.

The output trays indicated by Tray A, B, and C varies according to the attached optional equipment.


Options Attached Default Settings Tray A/B/C
Copy Tray-J1 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box
Tray B: Printer, Receive/Fax, Other
Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box
Tray B: Printer, Receive/Fax, Other
Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 and Copy Tray-J1 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box
Tray B: Printer
Tray C: Receive/Fax, Other
Finisher-S1 and Additional Finisher Tray-B1 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box
Tray B: Printer, Receive/Fax, Other
Finisher-S1 and Copy Tray-J1 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box, Printer
Tray B: Receive/Fax, Other
Finisher-S1, Additional Finisher Tray-B1, and Copy Tray-J1 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box
Tray B: Printer
Tray C: Receive/Fax, Other
Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2, and Buffer Pass Unit-E2 Tray A: Copy, Mail Box
Tray B: Printer
Tray C: Receive/Fax, Other
Tray Home Position: Tray A

Remark
  • The same output tray can be designated for multiple functions.
  • The priority order of the output destinations is determined by the order of the selected output trays. The priority is displayed as "1," "2," and "3."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Tray Designation].
  1. Select the functions for which to designate output Trays A, B, and C → press [OK].


The optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.

[Printer] appears only if the optional printer function is activated.

[Other] is used for designating a tray for printing reports.

[Receive/Fax] appears if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional fax board is installed. If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, [Receive] appears. If only the optional fax board is installed, [Fax] appears.

When the Super G3 2nd Line FAX Board or Super G3 2nd/3rd Line FAX Board is installed in addition to installing the Super G3 FAX Board, you can set up to three fax lines (lines 1 to 3).

If you want to use an output tray for only one function, select only that function.

  • If a certain tray reaches its stacking limit, the machine automatically uses another tray that is designated for the same function. However, it is recommended that you only designate one tray for fax/I-fax documents to prevent them from getting lost.
  • If the optional Finisher-S1 and Copy Tray-J1 are attached and the Staple mode is set, the sheets are output to Tray A, regardless of the Tray Designation settings.
  • If the optional Finisher-S1 and Copy Tray-J1 are attached and the following paper is selected, the sheets are output to trays other than the Copy Tray-J1, regardless of the Tray Designation settings: nonstandard, envelopes, heavy paper, transparencies, labels, or tracing paper.
  • If the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 and Copy Tray-J1 are attached and the following paper is selected, the sheets are output to trays other than the Copy Tray-J1, even if the Copy Tray-J1 is specified as the destination: nonstandard, envelopes, heavy paper, transparencies, labels, or tracing paper.

  • Press the Tray Home Position drop-down list → select the tray home position to be used while jobs are being processed.

Tray Home Position

[Tray A]: Tray A moves closer to the output area.
[Tray B]: Tray B moves closer to the output area.
[Off]: The tray home position is not set. The output tray stops at the position it is in when printing finishes.


Setting the Printing Priority

You can set the machine's printing priority. A job that belongs to a function with a higher set priority is printed after the job currently being processed is complete.


Remark
  • Priority printing does not take place until the current job is complete. However, if the current job is paused, the printing of a job that belongs to a function with a higher set priority may start, depending on the settings.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Printing Priority].
  1. Select the printing priority for the various functions → press [OK].

If you select [1] for a function, that function is given the highest printing priority.

[Printer] appears only if the optional printer function is activated.

[Receive/Fax] appears if the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, and the optional fax board is installed. If only the Color Universal Send Kit is activated, [Receive] appears. If only the optional fax board is installed, [Fax] appears.

<Other> is used for setting the priority for printing reports.

PDL prints from MEAP applications are included in <Printer>. However, local print jobs from MEAP applications are included in <Mail Box>.

  • If the same printing priority has been specified for multiple functions, printing starts with the first processed print job.


Image Form

You can store image forms and superimpose them on the output using the Form Composition mode in the Copy and Mail Box functions. For instructions on using the Form Composition mode, see "Copy" and "Mail Box."


Remark
  • Up to 100 image forms can be stored. However, this number varies depending on the capacity of the hard disk.
  • Be sure to place the original that contains the image form on the platen glass. It is not possible to scan an image form from the feeder.
  • Image forms can also be retrieved from a personal computer and stored in the machine.


Storing an Image Form

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Form for Form Composition].
  1. Press [Register].
  1. Select the size of the original that contains the image form → press [Next].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].
  1. Select [Entire Image Composition] or [Transparent Image] → press [Next].


  • Press [-] or [+] to adjust the halftone density → press [Next].


  1. Set the desired scan settings.

If you want to change the zoom ratio, press [Copy Ratio]. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")

If you want to change the scan exposure, press [] or []. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")

If you want to select the image quality for scanning, select the original type from the original type drop-down list. (See "Copy.")

If you want to invert images, adjust the contrast of images, or set the automatic copy/scan exposure, press [Special Features], and then set each function. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")

If you want to assign a name to the image form, press [Form Name] → enter a name → press [OK].

  • If you press [OK] without entering any characters, the machine automatically assigns the image form a name using the year, month, day, and time the image form was stored.
  1. Place the original that contains the image form on the platen glass → press (Start).
  • The following two types of icons appear on the screen:
  • : Transparent Image
  • : Entire Image Composition


Checking Image Form Details

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Form for Form Composition].
  1. Select the desired image form → press [Details].
  • To check the image of the stored form, press [Check Print] → select the paper size → press [Start Print]. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")
  1. Check the detailed information → press [Done].

If you want to change the name of the image form, press [Change Form Name].



Erasing an Image Form

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Form for Form Composition].
  1. Select the image form that you want to erase → press [Erase].
  • To check the image of the stored form, press [Check Print] → select the paper size → press [Start Print]. (See "Copy" and "Mail Box.")
  1. Press [Yes].


User-Defined Text for Page Numbers and Watermarks

You can register specific text to be placed on your documents using the Pg/Copy Set Numbering, Print Watermark/Date, or [Watermark] for the Secure Watermark mode. For instructions on using the Pg/Copy Set Numbering, Print Watermark/Date, and Secure Watermark modes, see "Copy" and "Mail Box."


Remark
  • The maximum number of user-defined text strings for watermarks and page numbers that can be registered is 30.


Registering User-Defined Text

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Characters for Page No./ Watermark].
  1. Press [Register] → enter the desired characters → press [OK].
  1. Press [Done].


Editing User-Defined Text

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Characters for Page No./ Watermark].
  1. Select the text to edit → press [Edit].
  1. Enter the new text → press [OK].
  1. Press [Done].


Erasing User-Defined Text

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Register Characters for Page No./ Watermark].
  1. Select the text to erase → press [Erase].
  1. Press [Yes].
  1. Press [Done].


Standard Paper for the Stack Bypass

You can set the paper size and type that the stack bypass uses beforehand. This setting is useful if you always load the same paper size and type into the stack bypass.

If the Stack Bypass Standard Settings are stored when using the optional Fax function, you can also use the stack bypass to receive faxes.


Remark
  • When printing on special types of paper, such as heavy paper or transparencies, be sure to correctly set the paper type, especially if you are using heavy paper. If the type of paper is not set correctly, it could adversely affect the quality of the image. Moreover, the fixing unit may become dirty and require a service repair, or the paper could jam.
  • If you are using the stack bypass as a paper source for the Copy, Mail Box, and Fax (Receive) functions, you must select the stack bypass when specifying the Drawer Eligibility for APS/ADS setting. (See "Auto Paper Selection/Auto Drawer Switching.")

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Stack Bypass Standard Settings].
  1. Press [On] → [Store].

If you press [Off], proceed to step 5.

  1. Select the desired paper size.

  • Select the desired paper size → press [Next].
  • To select an inch paper size, press [Inch-size].

  • Press [Free Size].
  • Press [Next].

  • Press [Envelope].
  • Select the envelope type → press [OK].
  • If the envelope type is not selected correctly, a paper jam will occur.
  • Press [OK] → proceed to step 5.

  1. Select the desired paper type → press [OK].
  • [Transparency] can be selected only if [A4] is selected as the paper size.
  • You can register a paper type that is not listed in [Detailed Settings] in the Stack Bypass Settings: Selecting the Paper Type screen. For details on registering paper types, see "Security."
  1. Press [OK].


Setting the Speed or Print Side Priority

You can set whether the printer speed is the priority for your job, or whether to print on a specific side of the paper. This is useful when you want to make one or two-sided prints on preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it) without changing the orientation of the paper loaded in a paper source.


Remark
  • When using preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it) whose orientation is important, it is recommended that you set [Print Side Priority] for the paper source which is loaded with that paper.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Paper Feed Method Switch].
  1. Select [Speed Priority] or [Print Side Priority] for each paper source → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Speed Priority]: When you feed one or two-sided prints into the machine, the method for delivering paper inside the machine changes, and this affects the printing speed. Therefore, to maximize the printing speed, load the paper manually as follows:
One-Sided Prints:
Load the paper face up in a paper drawer, or face down into the stack bypass and the optional paper deck. The side facing up in the paper drawer, and the side facing down in the stack bypass and paper deck are the sides printed on.
Two-Sided Prints:
Load the paper face down in a paper drawer, or face up in the stack bypass and the paper deck. The side facing down in the paper drawer, and the side facing up in the stack bypass and paper deck are the first sides that are printed on.
[Print Side Priority]: If you load paper in a paper drawer and select [Print Side Priority], no matter whether you are printing one or two-sided prints, the side of the paper facing up is always the one printed on first. (The side facing down is the one printed on first for the stack bypass and paper deck.) However, some speed will be sacrificed when printing one-sided prints.

If [Print Side Priority] is selected for a paper source, and Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', the Automatic Paper Selection and Automatic Drawer Switching settings are ignored. Also, the machine's printing speed may become slower when you print one-sided documents.



Standard Local Print Settings

You can set the standard print settings for the machine. The Standard Local Print Settings are used in the following cases:

  • If you print documents stored in inboxes without changing the print settings
  • If you merge and print multiple documents stored in an inbox
  • If you reset the settings before printing a document that has been sent from a computer and stored in an inbox

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Standard Local Print Settings].
  1. Select the desired standard local print settings for each mode → press [Done].

Details of each item are shown below.

  • [Paper Select]:
Select the paper source.
  • [Copies]:
Set the number of copies from 1 to 9,999 sets.
  • [Finishing]:
Set the type of collating.
  • [2-Sided Print]:
Set whether to perform two-sided printing.
  • [Erase Document After Printing]:
Set whether to erase a document from memory after it prints.
  • [Merge Documents]:
Set whether to merge documents, if you select multiple documents that are stored in an inbox for printing.


Changing the Language Shown on the Touch Panel Display

You can select the language displayed on the touch panel display.


Remark
  • If Language Switch is set to 'On', some characters are restricted and cannot be entered. To be able to enter all characters, set Language Switch to 'Off'.
  • Even if Language Switch is set to 'On', there are some languages that cannot be displayed.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Language Switch].
  1. Press [On] → select the desired language → press [OK].

If you do not want to change the display language, press [Off].

If you press [Display Shortcut Key], [ ] will be displayed next to [System Monitor] on the Basic Features screen. [ ] is a shortcut key to the Language Switch screen.

  • Some messages may not be displayed properly in the language that you just selected. In this case, restart the machine (turn the machine OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."
  • If SSO-H is set as the login service, and there is a difference between the language set on the machine and the one set in Active Directory, the sender's full name will not be displayed in e-mail messages sent to the recipient.


Reversing the Contrast of the Touch Panel Display

You can reverse the contrast on the touch panel display for better viewing. The Reversed Display mode reverses the light and dark areas on the touch panel display. If you find it hard to read what is being shown on the touch panel display, try using this mode.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Reversed Display (Color)].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[On]: The colors of the touch panel display screen are reversed (i.e., the areas that are normally light become dark, and the dark areas become light).
[Off]: The touch panel display screen returns to its default colors.


Alternating the Print Output (Offset Jobs)

The Offset Jobs mode automatically sorts the print output by job when multiple print jobs are specified. It also ensures that output pages are always sorted even if you forget to specify a finishing mode.


Remark
  • [Offset Jobs] is displayed only if an optional finisher is attached.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Offset Jobs].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Print Jobs

This mode enables you to insert blank pages before the first page of each print job from a selected paper drawer. This is useful when you want to separate one print job from another when printing multiple jobs.


Remark
  • If you are using the Booklet or Saddle Stitch mode, job separation sheets cannot be inserted between jobs.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Job Separator between Jobs].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].

  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper drawer containing the desired paper size for the job separation sheet → press [OK].
  • Press [OK].

  • Press [OK].


Inserting a Job Separation Sheet between Copy Sets

If you are using the Collate, Offset Collate, or Staple mode, you can insert blank pages from a selected paper drawer to separate a specified number of copies.


Remark
  • If you are using the Do not Collate, Rotate Collate, Group, Offset Group, Booklet, or Saddle Stitch mode, job separation sheets cannot be inserted between copy sets.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Job Separator between Copies].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].

  • Press [Paper Select] → select the paper drawer containing the desired paper size for the job separation sheet → press [OK].
  • Use - (numeric keys) to specify the number of pages after which a job separation sheet will be inserted.
  • Press [OK].

  • Press [OK].


Job Duration Display

If the Job Duration Display mode is set to 'On', the remaining time that it takes to complete an operation is displayed in minutes on the touch panel display.


Remark
  • The wait time is displayed as <Approx Prt Time> (approximate printing time) on the screen that is displayed when the machine is printing.
  • Even if Job Duration Display is set to 'On', the wait time is not displayed if the wait time is less than one minute.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Job Duration Display].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] for each function → press [OK].


Number of Copies/Wait Time Status Display

If the Number of Copies/Wait Time Status Display mode is set to 'On', the number of copies specified and the approximate time before the current job completes is displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area.


Remark
  • The accuracy of the approximate times displayed in the Job/Print Status Display Area may vary, depending on the status of the machine.
  • The approximate time is not displayed when the wait time is less than one minute.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Number of Copies/Job Duration Status Display].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Setting an Output Tray to Hold Different Paper Sizes

This mode enables you to output different paper sizes to the same output tray.


Remark
  • This mode is available only if an optional finisher is attached.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].

If Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray is set to 'Off', and the message <Remove the paper from the output tray.> is displayed, printing stops. Remove all of the paper from the output tray, and printing resumes.

If both the Different Size Originals and Staple modes are set, outputs are stapled and collated, regardless of the Different Paper Sizes settings.

  • Even if you set Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray to 'Off', different paper sizes are output to the same output tray in the same way as when Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray is set to 'On' when outputting to the Copy Tray-J1 or Buffer Pass Unit-E2.
  • Even if you set Different Paper Sizes for the Output Tray to 'Off', different paper size may be output to the same output tray if there is only a small amount of paper in the paper tray.


Clean the Original Scanning Area Prompt

You can use the Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area mode to prompt you to clean the scanning area when the machine detects streaks or stains. If the feeder is not clean, the machine will scan and print dust and grime on the output. The Clean the Original Scanning Area Prompt appears when originals are placed in the feeder. For instructions on cleaning the feeder's scanning area, see "Maintenance."


Remark
  • [Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area] appears only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Cleaning Display for the Original Scanning Area].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].


Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans

You can set the compression ratio for network scanning. A high compression ratio reduces the amount of memory used for scanning the document, but results in a lower image quality. On the contrary, a low compression ratio increases the amount of memory used for scanning the document, but results in a higher image quality.


Remark
  • For more information on the Network Scan function, see "Scanner Driver."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Data Compression Ratio for Remote Scans].
  1. Select [High Ratio], [Normal], or [Low Ratio] → press [OK].

Details of each item are shown below.

[High Ratio]: A small amount of memory is used for scanning the document, but the images have a lower image quality.
[Normal]: The amount of memory used for the document and the quality of the images are moderate. The compression ratio is between the High Ratio and Low Ratio settings.
[Low Ratio]: A large amount of memory is used for the document, but the images have a higher image quality.


Setting the Gamma Value for Remote Scans

You can set the gamma value that is used for scanning color documents into your computer through the Network Scan function. Select a gamma value that is most suited to your computer settings so that you can print the document from your computer with the most optimal density.


Remark
  • For more information on the Network Scan function, see "Scanner Driver."

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Gamma Value for Remote Scans].
  1. Select the gamma value ([Gamma 1.0], [Gamma 1.4], [Gamma 1.8], or [Gamma 2.2]) → press [OK].


Limiting Functions

If a problem frequently occurs when using the Finishing modes, such as Offset Collate and Staple, you can temporarily limit the use of these finishing modes by setting Limited Functions Mode to 'On'.

In addition, when the Service Call Message screen appears indicating a finishing mode malfunction and you temporally set the Limited Functions Mode to clear the Service Call Message screen, you can deactivate the Limited Functions Mode by setting this mode to 'Off' from the Additional Functions screen. However, after the Limited Functions Mode is deactivated, the Service Call Message screen may appear again, unless the cause of the malfunction is cleared. (See "Problem Solving.")


Remark
  • [Limited Functions Mode] is displayed only if an optional finisher is attached.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Limited Functions Mode].
  1. Select [On] or [Off] → press [OK].
  • The Limited Functions Mode is enabled only after you restart the machine (the main power switch is turned OFF, and then back ON). For instructions on restarting (turning the main power switch OFF and then ON) the machine, see "Before You Start Using This Machine."


Setting Timeout for Suspended Jobs

You can set the suspension time for jobs suspended because the designated paper was not available when the job was issued. After the suspension time elapses, the next job is automatically processed.


Remark
  • When a job is suspended because paper has run out during the job, the next job is not processed even after the designated suspension time elapses.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Suspended Job Timeout].
  1. Select [On] or [Off].
  • Press [] or [] to set the time until suspended jobs are automatically erased.
  • Press [OK].

  • Press [OK].


Returning the Common Settings to Their Defaults

You can restore all of the Common Settings to their defaults (initial settings).


Remark
  • If you set Limited Functions Mode to 'On', and then return the Common Settings to their default settings, the setting for the Limited Functions Mode remains unchanged.
  • Image forms registered for Register Form for Form Compositions are not erased.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Common Settings] → [Initialize Common Settings].
  1. Press [Yes].


Timer Settings

You can make various timer related settings for the machine, such as adjusting the current time, and specifying the time it takes for the machine to enter into the Sleep mode or Low-Power mode.



Current Time Adjustment

You can make adjustments to the current time. For instructions on setting the current date and time, see "Security."


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Timer Settings] → [Time Fine Adjustment].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to adjust the current time → press [OK].
  • Even if you change the time from 00:00 to 23:59, or 23:59 to 00:00, the date will not be changed.


Auto Sleep Time

If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation is performed), the control panel power switch automatically switches OFF to save power. The machine has entered the Sleep mode.


Remark

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Timer Settings] → [Auto Sleep Time].
  1. Press [] or [] to enter the desired Auto Sleep Time → press [OK].


Auto Clear Time

If the machine is idle for a certain period of time (after the last print job or key operation is performed), the display returns to the Basic Features screen (standard settings) of the selected function. This period of time is called the "Auto Clear Time."


Remark
  • If '0' is selected, the Auto Clear Time mode is not set.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Timer Settings] → [Auto Clear Time].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to enter the desired Auto Clear Time → press [OK].


Time Until Unit Quiets Down

This machine enters the Quiet mode after a specified amount of time has elapsed following a print job, or a key operation is performed. You can specify the amount of time that elapses prior to entering the Quiet mode.


Remark
  • If '0' is selected, the Quiet mode is not set.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Timer Settings] → [Time Until Unit Quiets Down].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to enter the desired time period → press [OK].


Daily Timer Settings

You can set the time that the machine automatically enters the Sleep mode each day of the week.


Remark
  • If the Auto Sleep Time and Daily Timer modes are both set, the Auto Sleep Time setting has priority.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Timer Settings] → [Daily Timer Settings].
  1. Select the day of the week → enter the time using - (numeric keys) → press [OK].

Enter the time in 24-hour notation as four digits (including zeros) without a space.

Examples:
7:05 a.m. → 0705
11:18 p.m. → 2318

If you make a mistake when entering the time, select the day of the week again → enter another four digit number.

You can also press (Clear) to clear the incorrect values.



Adjusting the Machine

This section describes how you can make fine adjustments to the settings of the machine, such as making a fine adjustment to the printed image and the page number or watermark position.

It is recommended that you perform an Automatic Gradation Adjustment and clean the machine regularly.



Zoom Fine Adjustment

When you print a copy or a document from an inbox, a slight difference in size may occur between the size of the original image, and the size of the copied/printed image. In this case, you can perform a fine adjustment to compensate for this difference.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Zoom Fine Adjustment].
  1. Press [-] or [+] to adjust the percentage (%) → press [OK].

If you are making an adjustment to either the X (horizontal) or Y (vertical) direction, press [-] or [+] to enter a value for that direction only.



Saddle Stitch Staple Repositioning

You can reposition the stapler of the saddle stitcher unit after clearing a staple jam, or after replacing the staple cartridge. Saddle stitch staple repositioning works by feeding several sheets of paper into the saddle stitcher unit and stapling them together.


Remark
  • If transparencies are loaded in a paper drawer, make sure to pull out that paper drawer slightly so that transparencies are not fed for the saddle stitch staple repositioning procedure. Damage to the machine may occur if transparencies are fed during this procedure.
  • Only use A3, B4, or A4R paper for the saddle stitch staple repositioning procedure.
  • Make sure to remove all output booklets from the optional Booklet Tray before performing the saddle stitch staple repositioning procedure.
  • Saddle stitch staple repositioning can be performed only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • Paper that is required for the saddle stitch staple repositioning procedure is automatically fed to the saddle stitcher unit by the machine.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning].
  1. Press [Start].


Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment

If you are using the Saddle Stitch mode of the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, and you notice that the folds of the paper are not exactly in the middle of the booklet, you can make adjustments to the saddle stitch position to compensate for this error.


Remark
  • The saddle stitch position can only be adjusted if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment].
  1. Select the paper size for which you want to adjust the saddle stitch position.
  • Some of the paper sizes displayed may not be available in certain countries.
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the saddle stitch position → press [OK].


Adjusting Creep(Displacement) Correction

This mode enables you to adjust the displacement of pages that occurs between the outermost and center page when the Booklet mode is set.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Creep (Displacement) Correction Adjustment].
  1. Select the desired paper type → press [Adjust].
  1. Press [] or [] to adjust the correction width → press [OK].
  • To enter values in inches, press [Inch].


Automatic Gradation Adjustment

You can recalibrate the machine when you notice irregularities in the color of the copies or prints, such as when copies turn out to be different from the original in gradation, density, or color.

This is a precise recalibration that is made to the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine. The procedure involves making test prints and placing them on the platen glass for scanning. Once this is complete, the machine automatically corrects the irregularities.


Remark
  • Make sure that you place the test prints properly. Accurate recalibrations of the gradation, density, and color settings of the machine cannot be made if the test prints are not scanned correctly.
  • This machine adjusts the toner and print speed according to the paper type. To make effective adjustments, use plain paper.
  • Test prints are not counted as part of the copy or print total page counts.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Auto Gradation adjustment].
  1. Press [Test Print].
  • If the paper which is appropriate for the test print is not loaded in a paper source, a message asking you to load the appropriate paper appear. In this case, load the appropriate paper in a paper source.
  1. Place the test print on the platen glass.

Place the test print face down on the platen glass, with the black bands along the top left back edge of the platen glass by the arrow.

  1. When auto gradation adjustment is complete, press [Start Scan].
  1. Remove the test print from the platen glass.


Exposure Recalibration

You can recalibrate the exposure adjustment scale if differences between the image on the original and the print occur.


  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Exposure Recalibration].
  1. Press [Light] or [Dark] for each function to adjust the exposure → press [OK].


Adjusting the Secure Watermark Mode Settings

This mode enables you to adjust the relative contrast (brightness) of the hidden text and the background when using the Secure Watermark mode. The Secure Watermark effect can be tested by making a copy of a sample print.

Specify the following settings in [Character/Background Contrast Adjustment]:

  • [Relative Contrast Value]: adjusts the relative contrast of the hidden text and the background.
  • [Standard Value Settings]: sets the density of the text.
  • [Latent String Density]: sets the density of the background.

Remark
  • Load A3, A4, LTR, or 11" × 17" size regular or heavy paper when making sample prints.
  • If [White Letters on Colored Backgnd] is not selected, [Standard Value Settings] sets the density of the background, and [Latent String Density] sets the density of the text.
  • [Character/Background Contrast Adjustment] is displayed only if the optional Secure Watermark is activated.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Character/Background Contrast Adjustment].

The text/background contrast adjustment can be set from [Secure Watermark] in the Special Features screen for the Copy and Mail Box functions.

  1. Press [For Printer 1200 dpi] or [Standard].

Press [For Printer 1200 dpi] if the resolution is set at 1200 dpi during printing.

If [For Printer 1200 dpi] or [Standard] is not displayed, proceed to step 3.


  1. Press [Sample Print].


  • Press [Sample Print Settings] → specify the desired settings → press [OK].

You can set the background pattern, text size, color, and orientation.


  1. Select the paper to use for the sample print → press [Start Print].

The sample print is output.

  • The sample print includes the hidden text and the background for each relative contrast value.
  • The area within the frame on the sample print is the output sample for the currently set relative contrast value.
  1. Copy the sample print to check the result of the Secure Watermark settings.

If you do not want to change [Relative Contrast Value], proceed to step 8.


  1. Compare the sample print and the copy, and set the value for the best sample print for [Relative Contrast Value] using [] or [].

  • Adjust [Relative Contrast Value] while comparing the difference between [Standard Value Settings] and the current [Latent String Density], by referring to the sample print.
  • If you increase the value for [Relative Contrast Value], the text gets denser, and if you decrease the value, the text gets lighter. When [White Letters on Colored Backgnd] is not selected, if you increase the value for [Relative Contrast Value], the background gets denser, and if you decrease the value, the background gets lighter.
  • The setting range for the Relative Contrast Value will differ, depending on the Standard Value Settings you have set.
    Standard Value Settings Relative Contrast Value
    1 0 to +7
    4 -4 to +7
    8 to 56 -7 to +7
    60 -7 to +4
    64 -7 to 0

  • Press [Standard Value Settings] → [Sample Print].
  • Select the paper to use for the sample print → press [Start Print].

A standard value sample print is output.

  • Refer to the print result and set the standard value indicated for the image which has the most even contrast for the inner and outer squares using [-] or [+].
  • If you increase the value for [Standard Value Settings], the text gets denser, and if you decrease the value, the text gets lighter. When [White Letters on Colored Backgnd] is not selected, if you increase the value for [Standard Value Settings], the background gets denser, and if you decrease the value, the background gets lighter.
  • When changing the adjustment area on the sample print for the relative contrast, specify settings for [Standard Value Settings].

  • Press [Latent String Density] → adjust the density using [-] or [+].
  • If you changed [Standard Value Settings], adjust [Latent String Density] so that the density of the inner square set in [Standard Value Settings] for the standard value sample print gets closer.
  • To set a text density that differs from the most even secure watermark image in the standard value sample print, it is necessary to adjust [Latent String Density] to a density close to the text density.
  • If you increase the value for [Latent String Density], the background gets denser, and if you decrease the value, the background gets lighter. When [White Letters on Colored Backgnd] is not selected, if you increase the value for [Latent String Density], the text gets denser, and if you decrease the value, the text gets lighter.

  1. If you changed [Standard Value Settings] and [Latent String Density], repeat steps 3 to 6 to adjust [Relative Contrast Value].

If you did not change the settings, proceed to step 8.

  1. Press [OK].

The contents of the settings changed in [Character/Background Contrast Adjustment] are retained until the next time the settings are changed.



Automatic Feeder Cleaning

If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.


Remark
  • [Feeder Cleaning] appears only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached.
  • It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Feeder Cleaning].
  1. Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder → press [Start].

Make sure that you fan the sheets of paper well.

Use A4 paper (60 to 80 g/m2).

When cleaning is complete, try scanning again.

  • To cancel feeder cleaning while it is in progress, press [Cancel].


Problem Solving

This category describes what to do when paper jams occur, or an error is displayed.



Reducing the Frequency of Paper Jams

If paper jams occur frequently, even though there is no apparent problem with the machine, either one of the following two reasons may be the cause. Follow the instructions described below to reduce the frequency of paper jams.

  • There are torn pieces of paper left inside the machine.

Pulling jammed paper out of the machine by force may leave parts of the paper torn inside, leading to frequent paper jams. If paper tears while you are trying to remove jammed paper from the machine, make sure that you remove all of the torn pieces.

  • The paper size dial is set incorrectly.

Make sure that the paper size dial located on the right side of a paper drawer matches the size of the paper loaded in the paper drawer. If the paper size dial is set incorrectly, paper jams may occur more frequently.



Clearing Paper Jams

If a paper jam occurs, the following screens appear on the touch panel display.



Screens Indicating the Locations of Paper Jams

The screen indicating the location of the paper jam and instructions on how to clear the paper jam appear on the touch panel display. This screen repeatedly appears on the touch panel display until the paper jam is entirely cleared.

  • Example of a Screen Indicating the Location of the Paper Jam

The location of the paper jam is indicated, by a red circle, in the upper right corner of the screen.

If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and scanning originals, even if the jammed paper is not removed immediately.


Remark
  • If a paper jam occurs in the optional Feeder (DADF-U1), you cannot continue operating the machine. Follow the directions on the touch panel display to clear the paper jam. (See "Feeder (DADF-U1) (Optional).")
  • If a MEAP application screen is displayed, a message appears in the Job/Print monitor area. Press [System Monitor] → follow the procedures that appear on the touch panel display to help you remove the jammed paper.

  • Example of a Screen Indicating How to Clear the Paper Jam


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed originals or paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the originals or paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.
  • The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • After clearing all paper jams, remove your hands from the machine immediately. Even if the machine is not in operation, your hands, hair, or clothing may get caught in the feed rollers, which could result in personal injury or damage if the machine suddenly starts printing.
  • If paper is jammed in several locations, remove the jammed paper in the order indicated on the touch panel display.

  1. Inspect all paper jam locations indicated on the touch panel display, and remove any jammed paper.

See the appropriate sections below for instructions on finding and removing jammed paper. Or, you can follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

If jammed paper tears while it is being removed, be sure to remove any remaining pieces from inside the machine.

  • If the machine's power is turned OFF when there is a paper jam, detection of paper jams in the paper drawers is not possible after the power is turned back ON. Clear paper jams without turning the power OFF.
  • Some areas that are shown to have paper jams may not actually have paper jams. However, always check all locations indicated on the touch panel display in the order that is given.
  • For information on the possible locations where paper jams may occur and how to remove the jammed paper, see the following.


1 Fixing Unit (See "Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit).")
2 Duplexing Unit (See "Duplexing Unit (Inside the Main Unit).")
3 Stack Bypass (See "Stack Bypass.")
4 Paper Drawer 1 (See "Paper Drawer 1.")
5 Paper Drawer 2 (See "Paper Drawer 2.")

  1. If a paper jam occurs inside an optional unit, see the instructions in the following sections.










  1. After you have removed all of the jammed paper in the locations indicated on the touch panel display, restore all levers and covers to their original positions.
  1. Continue to follow the procedure and instructions on the touch panel display.

Once you have removed all of the jammed paper in locations other than the optional feeder, printing or copying resumes.

If there is paper that still needs to be removed, a screen indicating how to clear that paper jam appears on the touch panel display. Repeat the procedure from step 1.

  • You do not have to re-enter the number of copies or prints, even if you are printing multiple sets. The machine automatically recalculates the number of copies or prints to make based on the number of sheets that have jammed.


Fixing Unit (Inside the Main Unit)

If a paper jam occurs in the fixing unit area, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.

  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Pull down the upper cover of the fixing unit by its tab, and remove any jammed paper.

If there is paper jammed in the lower part of the fixing unit, proceed to step 3.

  • The fixing unit and its surroundings are subject to high-temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area, except the jammed paper and the upper cover.
  1. Remove any jammed paper protruding from the lower part of the fixing unit.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Duplexing Unit (Inside the Main Unit)

If a paper jam occurs inside the duplexing unit, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • The fixing unit and its surroundings inside the machine may become hot during use. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not touch the fixing unit and its surroundings, as doing so may result in burns or electrical shock.

  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Stack Bypass

If a paper jam occurs inside the stack bypass, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


  1. Remove all of the paper that is not jammed from the stack bypass.

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all of the output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Remove any jammed paper from the stack bypass inside the right cover of the main unit.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the upper and lower right covers of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Paper Drawer 1

If a paper jam occurs inside Paper Drawer 1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Open the paper drawer's right cover.

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Press and release the button on Paper Drawer 1.

  1. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Gently push Paper Drawer 1 back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.

  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Close the paper drawer's right cover.

  • When closing the paper drawer's right cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Paper Drawer 2

If a paper jam occurs inside Paper Drawer 2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


  1. Open the paper drawer's right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Remove any jammed paper.
  1. Press and release the button on Paper Drawer 2.
  1. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
  1. Remove any jammed paper.
  1. Gently push Paper Drawer 2 back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Close the paper drawer's right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the paper drawer, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

  1. Open the lower right cover of the cassette feeding unit.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Remove any jammed paper.
  1. Press and release the button on the paper drawer indicated on the touch panel display.
  1. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
  1. Remove any jammed paper.
  1. Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Close the lower right cover of the cassette feeding unit.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the lower right cover of the cassette feeding unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Paper Deck-Q1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs in the optional Paper Deck-Q1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.

  1. Press the release button, and move the paper deck away from the main unit.

  1. Pull down the lever on the side of the paper deck that attaches to the main unit, and remove any jammed paper from the feeding area.

Paper can also be jammed in the feeding slot on the side of the main unit. Remove any jammed paper from the feeding slot.

  1. Reconnect the paper deck to the main unit.

If the screen indicating the paper jam is no longer displayed after reconnecting the paper deck to the main unit, proceed to step 7.

  • When reconnecting the paper deck to the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Press the open button to open the paper deck.

The inside lifter descends automatically.

  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the main power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button on the paper deck.
  1. Remove any jammed paper.

Look carefully, as jammed paper may be difficult to see.

  1. Close the paper deck.

  • When closing the paper deck, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Feeder (DADF-U1) (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs in the optional Feeder (DADF-U1), a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed originals, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the originals.

  1. Open the feeder cover.

  1. Remove any jammed originals.

  1. Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab.

  1. Turn the feed dial, and remove any jammed originals.

  1. Close the inner cover.

  • When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Close the feeder cover.

  • When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Lift the feeder, and remove any jammed originals.

  1. Close the feeder.

  • When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Finisher-S1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs in the optional Finisher-S1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

If the optional Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 is not attached, this procedure is not necessary. Proceed to step 4.

  1. Align the pointed notch on the knob with the shaded region () .

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Pull out the paper output unit.

  1. Pull down any one of the four inner guides, and remove any jammed paper.

  • If it is impossible to lower one of the four inner guides, try another inner guide. Do not attempt to lower the inner guide too forcefully, as this may break it.
  1. Push the paper output unit back into its original position.

  • When pushing the paper output unit back into its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Pull down the upper cover of the fixing unit by its tab, and remove any jammed paper.

If there is difficulty in removing jammed paper from the bottom of the fixing unit, proceed to step 9.

  • The fixing unit and its surroundings are subject to high-temperatures. When removing jammed paper, take care not to touch anything in this area, except the jammed paper and the upper cover.
  1. If there is any jammed paper protruding from the lower part of the fixing unit, remove the jammed paper.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Finisher-S1/Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs in the optional Finisher-S1 and Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Align the pointed notch of the knob with the shaded region ().

  1. Remove any jammed paper protruding from the output tray.

  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Follow steps 5 to 9 in "Finisher-S1 (Optional)" to remove the paper jam.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then pull it out to the left.

  • Do not place any objects on the finisher unit, or lean on it, as doing so may damage the machine, or cause the machine to fall over, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Pull down the puncher unit, and then remove any jammed paper.

  1. Return the puncher unit to its original position.

  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then return the finisher unit to its original position.

  • When returning the finisher unit to its original position, do not place your fingers or hands under the finisher, as they may get caught, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Return the pointed notch on the knob back to its original position.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Inside the Transfer Cover of the Finisher-S1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the transfer cover of the optional Finisher-S1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Remove any jammed paper protruding from the output tray.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then pull it out to the left.

  • Do not place any objects on the finisher unit, or lean on it, as doing so may damage the machine, or cause the machine to fall over, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Open the transfer cover, and then remove any jammed paper.

  1. Close the transfer cover.

  • When closing the transfer cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then return the finisher unit to its original position.

  • When returning the finisher unit to its original position, do not place your fingers or hands under the finisher, as they may get caught, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Inside the Top Cover of the Finisher-AE1/Saddle Finisher-AE2 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the top cover of the optional Finisher-AE1 or optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Open the output slot on the outside of the finisher, and remove any jammed paper that is visible.

If you cannot see any jammed paper, check if any jammed paper is stuck inside the output area of the finisher.

  • If a paper jam occurs when you are printing in the Staple mode, do not remove the output sheets that are waiting to be stapled. (Printing and stapling resume after you clear the paper jam.)
  1. Open the top cover of the finisher, and remove any jammed paper.

  1. Close the top cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the top cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Inside the Buffer Pass Unit-E2 of the Finisher-AE1/Saddle Finisher-AE2 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the buffer pass unit of the optional Finisher-AE1 or optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Open the buffer pass unit, and remove any jammed paper.
  1. Close the buffer pass unit.
  • When closing the buffer pass unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Inside the Front Cover of the Saddle Finisher-AE2 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the front cover of the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Tilt the upper delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.

Springs are attached to the upper delivery guide, so it returns to its original position when released.

  1. Tilt the lower delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.

Turn the lever on the lower delivery guide to the right until it stops, and then tilt the lower delivery guide to the right.

  1. Return the lower delivery guide to its original position.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the saddle stitcher unit of the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Turn the knob on the right in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise).

  1. While pushing in the knob on the left, turn it in the direction of the arrow (clockwise).

  1. Remove any jammed paper protruding from the saddle stitcher unit.

  1. Tilt the lower delivery guide to the right, and remove any jammed paper.

Turn the lever on the lower delivery guide to the right until it stops, and then tilt the lower delivery guide to the right.

  1. Return the lower delivery guide to its original position.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


  1. Open the front cover of the punch waste tray.

  1. Align the pointed notch on the knob within the shaded region ().

  1. Open the top cover of the puncher unit.

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Close the top cover of the puncher unit.

  • When closing the top cover of the puncher unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Close the front cover of the punch waste tray.

  • When closing the front cover of the punch waste tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Inner 2 Way Tray-D1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

If the optional Copy Tray-J1 is attached to the main unit, remove all output paper from the tray. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

s
  1. Pull out the paper output unit.

  1. Remove any jammed paper.

  1. Push the paper output unit back into its original position.

  • When pushing the paper output unit back into its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Remove any jammed paper from the inside of the main unit's right cover.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Copy Tray-J1 (Optional)

If a paper jam occurs inside the optional Copy Tray-J1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the paper jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove the jammed paper.


Remark
  • There are some areas inside the machine which are subject to high-voltages. When removing jammed paper or when inspecting the inside of the machine, do not allow necklaces, bracelets, or other metal objects to touch the inside of the machine, as this may result in burns or electrical shock.
  • When removing jammed paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to cut your hands or injure yourself on the inside of the machine. If you cannot remove the paper, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, take care not to allow the toner on the jammed paper to come into contact with your hands or clothing, as this will dirty your hands or clothing. If they become dirty, wash them immediately with cold water. Washing them with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • When removing paper which has become jammed inside the machine, remove the jammed paper gently to prevent the toner on the paper from scattering and getting into your eyes or mouth. If the toner gets into your eyes or mouth, wash them immediately with cold water and immediately consult a physician.

  1. Press the button on the right cover of the main unit, and open the right cover.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is attached to the main unit, move the paper deck away from the main unit before proceeding with this procedure. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  1. Remove any jammed paper protruding from the inside slot of the copy tray.

  1. Place your hand where the hand symbol () is located on the right cover of the main unit, and then gently close the right cover until it clicks into place in the closed position.

If the optional Paper Deck-Q1 was moved away from the main unit, reconnect it to the main unit. For more information, see "Optional Equipment."

  • When closing the right cover of the main unit, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display.


Clearing Staple Jams

If a staple jam occurs, follow the procedure described below to remove the jammed staples.



Finisher-S1 (Optional)

If a staple jam occurs in the optional Finisher-S1, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the staple jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove any jammed staples.


Remark
  • Make sure to close all covers and paper drawers of the machine before clearing any staple jams.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then pull it out to the left.

  • Do not place any objects on the finisher unit, or lean on it, as doing so may damage the machine, or cause the machine to fall over, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Lift and pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding it by the green tab.

  1. Push down the tab on the staple case.

  1. Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.

  1. Return the tab on the staple case to its original position.

  1. Gently push the staple case back into the finisher until it is securely in place.

  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then return the finisher unit to its original position.

  • When returning the finisher unit to its original position, do not place your fingers or hands under the finisher, as they may get caught, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit automatically performs a "dry" stapling operation to reposition the staples.


Finisher-AE1/Saddle Finisher-AE2 (Optional)

If a staple jam occurs in the stapler unit of the optional Finisher-AE1 or optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the staple jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove any jammed staples.


Remark
  • Make sure to close all covers and drawers of the machine before clearing any staple jams.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Lift and pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding it by the green tab.

  1. Push down the tab on the staple case.

  1. Remove all of the staples that slide from the staple case.

  1. Return the tab on the staple case to its original position.

  1. Gently push the staple case back into the stapler unit until it is securely in place.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit automatically performs a "dry" stapling operation to reposition the staples.


Saddle Stitcher Unit (Optional)

If a staple jam occurs inside the saddle stitcher unit of the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Check the location of the staple jam, and follow the procedure described below, and the procedure that appears on the touch panel display, to remove any jammed staples.


Remark
  • If necessary, make sure to remove all of the paper in the Booklet tray before clearing a staple jam inside the saddle stitcher unit.
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Grip the saddle stitcher unit by its handle, and pull it out of the finisher until it stops.

  1. Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you, and then push it up.

  1. Pull out the staple cartridge containing the jammed staples, holding it by its left and right sides.

  1. On the staple case, push down Part A, and push up Part B.

  1. Remove any jammed staples, and return Part B to its original position.

  1. Return the staple cartridge to its original position.

  1. Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you, and then push it down into its original position.

  1. Gently push the saddle stitcher unit back into its original position.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • When you have cleared the staple jam, be sure to manually reposition the staples in the saddle stitcher unit. (See "Additional Functions.")


List of Error Messages

This section explains the various messages that appear on the touch panel display, along with possible causes and remedies.

For explanations of messages that are not listed here, see "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive" and "Network."



Self-Diagnostic Display

If the machine displays a self-diagnostic error message, follow the instructions on the touch panel display.

Self-diagnostic error messages appear on the touch panel display at the following times:

  • When scanning or printing cannot be performed because of an operational error.
  • When you need to make a decision or take some action during scanning, copying, or printing.
  • When you need to make a decision or take some action while browsing the network.

The following is a list of self-diagnostic error messages, along with their possible causes and remedies.


Load paper.

Load A4 size paper.

Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.

Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key. (Data for the scanned original has exceeded limits on the size that can be handled by this machine. Automatically adjust settings and try again.)

Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the limit. Scanning may be possible if [Sharpness] is reduced and the type of original is set to [Text].

Remove the paper from the output tray.

Remove the paper from the booklet tray.

Replace toner cartridge.

Place the original on the platen glass.

Remove the original from the platen glass.

Remove the original from the feeder.

Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty.

This number has not been registered. Enter the number again.

Load paper.

Cause 1

The machine has run out of paper. No more prints can be made.

Remedy

Load paper. (See "Maintenance.")

Cause 2

The paper drawer is not correctly inserted.

Remedy

Insert the paper drawer as far as it will go. (See "Maintenance.")

Load A4 size paper.

Cause

The optimum paper size selected by the Automatic Paper Selection mode is not available in the machine.

Remedy 1

Load the indicated paper size into the machine. If you press (Start) while this message is displayed, prints are made with the currently selected paper size.

Remedy 2

If the message continues to be displayed even if the indicated paper size is loaded, set Drawer Eligibility For APS/ADS in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) for that paper drawer to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")

Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key.

Cause

Scanning was stopped due to a problem with the optional feeder.

Remedy

Arrange the originals in page order with the first page on top. Place the originals back into the feeder's original supply tray, and press (Start).

Return page 1 to the top, and then press the Start key. (Data for the scanned original has exceeded limits on the size that can be handled by this machine. Automatically adjust settings and try again.)

Cause

Scanning has stopped because the data size of the scanned original exceeds the maximum data size that the machine can handle.

Remedy

Try scanning the original again from the first page. If scanning is still not possible, reduce the Sharpness mode setting, and select [Text] for the original type.

Scanning has stopped because the size of the data for the scanned original exceeds the limit. Scanning may be possible if [Sharpness] is reduced and the type of original is set to [Text].

Cause

Scanning has stopped because the data size of the scanned original exceeds the maximum data size that the machine can handle.

Remedy

Reduce the Sharpness mode setting, and select [Text] for the original type.

Remove the paper from the output tray.

Cause

Prints from the previous job remain in the output tray.

Remedy

Remove the prints remaining in the output tray. Printing automatically resumes.

Remove the paper from the booklet tray.

Cause

Prints from the previous job remain in the Booklet tray of the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2.

Remedy

Remove the prints remaining in the Booklet tray. Printing automatically resumes.

Replace toner cartridge.

Cause 1

Printing will not be possible soon because the toner is running low.

Cause 2

Printing is not possible because the toner has run out.

Remedy

Replace the toner cartridge. (See "Maintenance.")

Place the original on the platen glass.

Cause

The specified mode requires that the original be placed on the platen glass, but there is no original on the platen glass.

Remedy

Place the original on the platen glass.

Remove the original from the platen glass.

Cause

An original remains on the platen glass.

Remedy

Remove the original from the platen glass, and place the new original.

Remove the original from the feeder.

Cause

The machine cannot scan your original using the feeder. An original is placed in the feeder and on the platen glass.

Remedy

Remove the original from the feeder.

Original scanning area (thin glass strip) is dirty.

Cause

The feeder's scanning area is dirty.

Remedy

Clean the feeder's scanning area. (See "Maintenance.")

This number has not been registered. Enter the number again.

Cause

The Department ID and password you entered are not registered.

Remedy

Contact the system manager of your Department for the correct Department ID and password.



List of Error Codes without Messages

If a job or operation does not complete successfully, check the error code, and perform the necessary operations according to the error code displayed. You can check the error code on the Details screen when you press [Log] on the System Monitor screen. (See "Basic Operations.")

If a send, receive, or fax job does not complete successfully, the error code is printed in the Results column on the Activity Report and Send Report. However, if a send job is canceled, "STOP" is printed in the Results column on the Send Report. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")

Perform the necessary procedures according to the error code.


#001

#009

#099

#701

#703

#711

#712

#749

#759

#816

#817

#823

#824

#825

#849

#850

#851

#852

#853

#854

#855

#856

#857

#858

#859

#860

#861

#862

#863

#865

#001

Cause 1

Different sized originals were scanned without setting the Different Size Originals mode.

Remedy

Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.

Cause 2

Different sized originals were scanned in the 2-Sided Original without setting the Different Size Originals mode.

Remedy

Set the Different Size Originals mode, and then try scanning again.

#009

Cause 1

There is no paper.

Remedy

Load paper. (See "Maintenance.")

Cause 2

The paper drawer is not inserted correctly into the machine.

Remedy

Insert the paper drawer properly. (See "Maintenance.")

#099

Cause

Copying/printing was interrupted.

Remedy

Try copying/printing again.

#701

Cause 1

The specified Department ID does not exist, or the password has changed.

Remedy

Enter the correct Department ID or password using - (numeric keys) on the control panel, and try again.

Cause 2

The Department ID or password was changed while the machine was processing a job.

Remedy

Change the Department ID and password, and try again. If you do not know the password, contact your System Manager.

Cause 3

<Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> is set to 'Off'.

Remedy

Set <Allow Printer Jobs with Unknown IDs> to 'On'. (See "Security.")

#703

Cause

The hard disk is full, and no more images can be scanned.

Remedy 1

Wait a few moments, and try scanning again after the current send jobs complete.

Remedy 2

Erase documents stored in inboxes. If the machine still does not operate normally, turn the main power OFF, and then back ON again. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#711

Cause

The inbox memory is full.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive" and "Mail Box.")

#712

Cause

The maximum number of documents is already stored in the inbox.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents stored in the inbox. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive" and "Mail Box.")

#749

Cause

You could not execute the job because a service call message is being displayed.

Remedy

Turn the main power OFF, wait for 10 or more seconds, and turn the main power back ON. If the machine still does not work normally, turn the main power OFF, disconnect the machine, and contact your local authorized Canon dealer. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#759

Cause

An error occurred while sending the URL of a User Inbox.

Remedy

Contact your System Manager.

#816

Cause

You cannot print because the set page limit total has been reached.

Remedy

Contact your System Manager.

#817

Cause

A communication error occurred between your machine and a remote copy printer.

Remedy

Check the network connection, and try again. If communication errors continue, contact your System Manager.

#823

Cause

Unable to connect to a remote copy printer.

Remedy

Check the network connection, and try again. If the machine still does not operate normally, contact your System Manager.

#824

Cause

A communication error occurred in a remote copy printer.

Remedy

Check the network connection to the remote copy printer, and try again. If the machine still does not communicate with the remote copy printer, contact your System Manager.

#825

Cause 1

The Department ID and password set on the host machine do not match those registered in the remote copy printers.

Remedy 1

Register your Department ID and password in the remote copy printers.

Remedy 2

Use a remote copy printer in which your Department ID and password are registered.

Cause 2

Reserved or current print jobs cannot be performed in the remote copy printer because the Department ID and password have been deleted, or the password has been changed.

Remedy

Contact your System Manager, or make sure that the Department ID and password set in the host machine match the ones registered in the remote copy printer.

#849

Cause

Device information could not be delivered because the client machine is processing a job.

Remedy

Try delivering device information again after the client machine finishes processing the job.

#850

Cause

Device information could not be delivered because a screen relating to the delivered device information is being displayed.

Remedy

Try delivering the device information again after the screen is cleared from the client machine. (See "Security.")

#851

Cause 1

There is insufficient memory remaining in the system.

Remedy

Check the system's available memory, and delete any unnecessary documents stored in inboxes. (See "Mail Box.")

Cause 2

The machine's memory is full.

Remedy

Erase unnecessary documents and documents with errors from memory to increase the amount of available memory. (See "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive" and "Mail Box.")

Cause 3

The scanned document cannot be stored because there are more than 2,000 documents in the specified inbox.

Remedy

If there are a large number of documents, delete the unnecessary ones from the specified inbox. (See "Mail Box.")

#852

Cause

An error occurred because the main power switch was turned OFF while a job was being processed.

Remedy

Check to see if the main power switch is turned ON. Try processing the job again, if necessary. (See "Before You Start Using This Machine.")

#853

Cause 1

When trying to print a large number of pages, the job is not performed due to insufficient memory resources.

Remedy

Reduce the number of pages to print, or perform the print job again when no other jobs are reserved.

Cause 2

The job could not be processed, because it was canceled from the printer driver while the print data was being sent to the machine.

Remedy

Try printing again.

Cause 3

The spool memory is full when Use Spooler in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is set to 'On', therefore, data received from the host could not be spooled.

Remedy

Set Use Spooler in Network Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off', and try sending the print data again. (See "Network.")

Cause 4

The maximum number of receivable data exceeds the receive limit. (See "Mail Box" and "Using the Main Unit to Send/Receive.")

Remedy

Try printing the documents again after all current jobs are complete. If you still cannot print, check the sent data.

Cause 5

The number of secured documents exceeded the maximum limit that can be reserved at a time.

Remedy

Print or erase the secured documents that are stored in the machine, and try printing again. (See "Setting the Main Unit (PS/PCL/UFR II Printer).")

#854

Cause

Device information could not be delivered because the client machine has Restrictions for Receiving Device Info. in Device Information Delivery Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) set to 'On'.

Remedy

Try delivering device information again after setting Restrictions for Receiving Device Info. in Device Information Delivery Settings in System Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to 'Off'. (See "Security.")

#855

Cause

Device information could not be delivered because a language that the client machine cannot handle was included in the device information.

Remedy

Contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

#856

Cause

The job was canceled because there was not enough free space on the hard disk to store the temporary data.

Remedy

Contact your System Manager.

#857

Cause

Data reception timed out, or the job was canceled at the host.

Remedy

Check that the network is functioning properly, and then try printing again.

#858

Cause

There is a problem with the print data sent from an external application.

Remedy

Check the settings of the data sent to the machine, make sure they are compatible with the machine, and try sending the data again.

#859

Cause 1

A compression error occurred with the image data.

Remedy

Check the print settings, and try printing again.

Cause 2

An original was not scanned properly, or the orientation of the original was incorrect.

Remedy

Check the scan settings, and try scanning again.

#860

Cause 1

A paper jam occurred during printing.

Remedy

Try printing again.

Cause 2

You tried to print on a transparency sheet not made for this machine.

Remedy

Load transparencies made for this machine into the machine and then try printing again.

#861

Cause

An error occurred while processing PDL data or image data.

Remedy

Confirm the print settings you made when printing from a computer.

#862

Cause 1

The saddle finisher trays have exceeded their stacking limits.

Remedy

Change the print data or print settings, and try printing again.

Cause 2

A combination of settings, which is not supported was set.

Remedy

Change the print data or print settings, and try printing again.

Cause 3

Data, which is not guaranteed to be compatible was printed.

Remedy

Change the print data or print settings, and try printing again.

#863

Cause

An error occurred while processing PDL data or image data.

Remedy

Check the settings, and try printing again.

#865

Cause

A function related to performing jobs is restricted.

Remedy

Contact your System Manager.



If Memory Becomes Full during Scanning

If memory becomes full during the scanning of originals, the following screens appear on the touch panel display.


Remark
  • The machine's memory can store approximately 8,200 pages of scanned images. Approximately 8,000 pages of that total is shared by the various functions, including the Copy, Print, and Mail Box functions. In addition, each function is guaranteed to be able to store the following number of pages:

    Copy: 100 pages
    Print: 100 pages (excluding Secured Print Jobs)

    For example, the Copy function can store up to 8,100 pages of scanned images.
    100 + 8,000 = 8,100 pages (approximate figures)
    However, the number of pages that the machine's memory can store may differ, depending on the amount of memory required for documents stored in inboxes and jobs that are in the print queue.

  1. Follow this procedure:

  • Select [Yes], [No], or [Another Function].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Yes]: The pages scanned into memory are printed. When printing is complete, scan the remaining originals.
[No]: The pages scanned into memory are not printed.
[Another Function]: Select to use another function that is not being used (If the desired function is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired function.) → press [Done].

The Basic Features screen of the selected function appears.


  • Select [Cancel] or [Another Function].

Details of each item are shown below.

[Cancel]: The current job is canceled, and the display returns to the Basic Features screen. Scan the job again when the current job is complete.
[Another Function]: Select to use another function that is not being used (If the desired function is not displayed, press [] or [] to scroll to the desired function.) → press [Done].



Service Call Message

If a malfunction occurs and the machine cannot operate normally, a screen like the one shown below is displayed. Follow the instructions that appear on the touch panel display.



Contacting Your Local Authorized Canon Dealer

If a message like the one shown below appears, follow the procedure described below.


Remark
  • Do not connect or disconnect the power cord with wet hands, as this may result in electrical shock.
  • Always grasp the power plug when disconnecting the power cord. Pulling on the power cord may expose or snap the core wire, or otherwise damage the power cord. If the power cord is damaged, this could cause current to leak, resulting in a fire or electrical shock.
  • If you turn OFF the main power switch when there is a job waiting to print, that job is erased.

  1. Press [Shutdown].

After the machine shuts down, the control power switch automatically turns OFF and the main power switch of machine automatically switches to OFF ("" side).

  1. Wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch back to "I" side.
  1. If the machine still does not operate normally, follow the procedure below, and then contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • Turn the main power switch OFF.
  • Remove the power plug from the power outlet.
  • When you contact your local authorized Canon dealer, have the following information available:
  • Product name
  • Details of the malfunction
  • The error code displayed on the touch panel display


Setting the Limited Functions Mode from the Service Call Message Screen

If the Service Call Message screen appears indicating a malfunction of a Finisher mode, you can clear it by turning the Limited Functions Mode 'On' to temporarily limit the use of the finishing modes. However, after the Limited Functions Mode is deactivated, the Service Call Message screen may appear again, unless the cause of the malfunction is removed.


Remark
  • If you shutdown the machine when there is a job waiting to print, that job is erased.
  • If you set Limited Functions Mode to 'On' from the Service Call Message screen, Limited Functions Mode in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) is also set to 'On'. (See "Additional Functions.")

  1. Press [Limited Fnctns Mode].

  1. Press [Yes].

A message prompting you press [Shutdown] and to turn the main power switch back ON appears.

  1. Press [Shutdown] to turn the main power switch OFF.

After the machine shuts down, the control power switch automatically turns OFF and the main power switch of machine automatically switches to OFF ("" side).

  1. Wait at least 10 seconds before turning the main power switch back to "I" side.

The machine starts up in the Limited Functions mode.



When the Power Does Not Turn ON

If you cannot operate the machine, even though the main power switch and the control panel power switch are both turned ON, always check that the breaker is not in the OFF position.

If the breaker is in the OFF position, contact your local authorized Canon dealer without turning the breaker back ON.


Remark
  • If the breaker is in the OFF position, do not switch the current leakage breaker back ON. Doing so may lead to a fire, electrical shock, smoke, or the tripping of other breakers in the facility.


Printer/Fax Driver Troubleshooting

See the "Troubleshooting" in the driver help to resolve problems when using the printer driver or fax driver for Windows. In this section, screens for the printer driver are used.



Maintenance

This category describes how to load paper, perform routine cleaning, and replace consumables.



Paper Drawers

This section describes how to load paper into the paper drawers.


Remark
  • The following paper sizes can be loaded into Paper Drawers 1, 2, 3, and 4.
  • Paper Drawer 1: B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, A5R, and envelopes
  • Paper Drawer 2, 3, 4: A3, B4, A4, A4R, B5, B5R, and A5R
  • Envelopes can be loaded into Paper Drawer 1 only if the optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 is attached.
  • Paper Drawers 3 and 4 can only be used if the optional Cassette Feeding Unit-Y3 is attached.
  • For more information on available paper stock that can be loaded into the paper drawers, see "Basic Operations."


Loading Paper

If the selected paper runs out, or the selected paper drawer runs out of paper during printing, a screen prompting you to load paper appears on the touch panel display.

Follow the procedure below to load paper into the paper drawers.


Remark
  • When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • A screen prompting you to load paper also appears if the selected paper drawer is not fully inserted into the machine. Make sure that the paper drawer is properly in place.
  • Do not load nonstandard paper sizes into the paper drawers.
  • Do not load the following types of paper into the paper drawers. Doing so may cause a paper jam.
  • Severely curled or wrinkled paper
  • Thin straw paper
  • Transparencies
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the reverse side of this paper either.)
  • Fan the stack of paper well before loading it, and align the edges of the paper stack on a flat surface.
  • Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the drawer next to the paper stack. Doing so may cause paper jams.
  • If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints are automatically made after you load the correct paper. If you select another paper drawer, the remaining prints are made after you press [OK].
  • To cancel printing, press [Cancel].
  • To use another available function, press [Another Function] → select [Copy], [Send], [Mail Box], [Scan], or [Print Job] → press [Done].

  1. Press and release the button on the paper drawer in which you want to load paper.
  1. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.
  1. Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.
  • When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place, away from direct sunlight.
  • For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
  • Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate feeding.

  1. Load the paper stack into the paper drawer.

Even out the edges of the paper stack. Load the paper stack against the right wall of the paper drawer.

When loading paper into the paper drawer for the first time, set the paper size dial to match the paper size being loaded. (See "Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size.")

When loading paper into the paper drawer, make sure that the paper size setting is the same size as the paper being loaded.

  • Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
  • Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark () at the back of the paper drawer.
  • Each paper drawer holds approximately 550 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
  • If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions.
  • When the paper is loaded into the paper drawer, the side facing up is the one printed on.
  • If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper stack over, and reload it.
  • For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it), see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.
  1. Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • You will not be able to make copies or print if you load paper that exceeds the loading limit, or if the paper drawer is not completely pushed into the machine. Always check that the paper drawers are in place, and that the paper does not exceed the loading limit.
  • If paper runs out during copying or printing, load a new paper stack, and follow the instructions on the touch panel display. The machine automatically restarts, and produces the remaining copies or prints.


Adjusting a Paper Drawer to Hold a Different Paper Size

If you want to load a different paper size into a paper drawer, follow the procedure described below to adjust the paper drawer guides.


Remark
  • Only A4 transparencies can be used. Make sure that the paper size dial is set to 'A4' when loading transparencies in a paper drawer. If transparencies of a different size (other than A4) are loaded in a paper drawer, the paper size and remaining amount of paper will not be detected correctly.

  1. Press and release the button on the paper drawer that you want to adjust. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops. Remove all of the remaining paper.

  1. Lift out the left guide, and insert it into the holes marked for the desired paper size.

  1. Squeeze the lever on the front guide, as shown below. Without releasing the lever, slide the front guide to align it with the mark for the desired paper size.

  • Adjust the guides correctly to avoid causing a paper jam, dirty prints, or making the inside of the machine dirty.
  1. Load the appropriate size paper into the paper drawer.
  • When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  1. Turn the paper size dial on the right side of the paper drawer, so that the arrow points to the paper size being loaded.

  • If the paper size dial is not positioned correctly to the paper size loaded in the paper drawer, the wrong paper size will be shown on the touch panel display. This may also cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.
  1. Change the paper drawer's size sticker to match the new paper size.

  1. Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.
  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


Paper Deck-Q1 (Optional)

If you attach the optional Paper Deck-Q1 to the machine, you have one additional source of paper for printing jobs. The Paper Deck-Q1 holds up to 2,700 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).


Remark
  • If the machine is in the Sleep mode (the touch panel is not displayed, and only the main power indicator is lit), you may not be able to open the paper deck. In this case, press the control panel power switch to reactivate the machine, and then press the open button on the paper deck.
  • The paper size of the optional Paper Deck-Q1 is fixed to A4.


Loading Paper

If you select the paper deck when it has no paper, or if the paper deck runs out of paper during a print job, a screen prompting you to load paper appears on the touch panel display.

Follow the procedure below to load paper into the paper deck.


Remark
  • When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • The paper deck can only accommodate paper from 64 to 80 g/m2 in weight. Use the stack bypass to load paper that is heavier.
  • If a message prompting you to load paper appears during printing, the remaining prints are automatically made after you load the correct paper. If you select another paper source, the remaining prints are made after you press [OK].

  1. Press the open button to open the paper deck.

The inside lifter automatically descends to the paper loading position.

  1. Open a package of paper, and remove the paper stack.
  • When loading paper, take care not to cut your hands on the edges of the paper.
  • Rewrap any remaining paper in its original package, and store it in a dry place, away from direct sunlight.
  • Do not load the following types of paper into the paper deck. Doing so may cause a paper jam.
  • Severely curled or wrinkled paper
  • Thin straw paper
  • Transparencies
  • Paper which has been printed on using a thermal transfer printer (Do not print on the reverse side of this paper either.)
  • For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
  • Before loading paper, always fan the sheets several times, and align the edges to facilitate feeding.

  1. Load the paper stack into the paper deck.

Make sure that the inside lifter has lowered before loading paper, and even out the edges of the paper stack.

  • Paper which has been rolled or curled must be straightened out before loading it into the paper deck.
  • Make sure that the height of the paper stack does not exceed the loading limit mark () on the inside of the paper deck.
  • The paper deck holds approximately 2,700 sheets of paper (80 g/m2).
  • Load the paper stack in stages, adding approximately 500 sheets of paper (80 g/m2) at a time. If the paper deck can accommodate more paper, the lifter will descend.
  • Only load A4 paper into the paper deck. Paper cannot be loaded horizontally.
  • If there are instructions on the package of paper about which side of the paper to load, follow those instructions.
  • When paper is loaded in the paper deck, the side facing down is the one printed on.
  • If problems occur, such as poor print quality or paper jams, try turning the paper stack over, and reload it.
  • For more information on the print direction of preprinted paper (paper which has logos or patterns already printed on it), see Chapter 4, "Appendix," in Troubleshooting.
  1. Close the paper deck.

The inside lifter automatically rises, and the machine becomes ready for printing.

  • When closing the paper deck, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 (Optional)

This section explains how to use the optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2.


Remark
  • The optional Envelope Feeder Attachment-C2 can only be attached to Paper Drawer 1.


How to Use the Envelope Feeder Attachment

The following six types of envelopes can be loaded into the envelope feeder attachment: COM10 No.10, Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8, DL, ISO-B5, ISO-C5, and Yougata 4.

If you are using COM10 No. 10 envelopes, load them after checking the following:

  • Make sure that [COM10] is selected for ENV.1 in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).
  • The guides are adjusted to hold COM10 No. 10 envelopes.
  • The paper size dial is set to 'Env.', and the size switch is set to 'ENV.1'.

Remark
  • When you attach the envelope feeder attachment to the paper drawer, do not forcefully move the front guide of the paper drawer in the wrong direction. Doing so may detach the envelope feeder attachment from the paper drawer.
  • Do not print on both sides of an envelope. Doing so may cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.
  • Do not load the following types of envelopes inside the envelope cassette. Doing so may cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.
  • Curled, creased, or folded envelopes
  • Very thick or thin envelopes
  • Damp or wet envelopes
  • Torn envelopes
  • Irregularly shaped envelopes
  • Envelopes with clasps or windows
  • Envelopes that have already been sealed
  • Envelopes with holes or perforations
  • Envelopes with specially coated surfaces
  • Envelopes made of surface treated colored paper
  • Envelopes that are self-sticking, which use ink, glue, or other substances that can melt, burn, vaporize, or emit smells under the heat of a fixing unit (approximately 200°C). Depending on the materials used for the seal, the glue may melt under the fixing unit's heat, sealing the envelopes.
  • If the optional Copy Tray-J1 and Finisher-S1 are attached, envelopes are output to any output tray other than the Copy Tray-J1, even if the Copy Tray-J1 is designated as the output tray destination.
  • If the optional Copy Tray-J1 and Inner 2 Way Tray-D1 are attached, envelopes are output to any output tray other than the Copy Tray-J1, even if the Copy Tray-J1 is designated as the output tray destination.
  • If you are printing on envelopes, empty the output tray when up to 10 printed envelopes accumulate in the tray.
  • Envelopes should be stored in a place away from high-temperatures and humidity.
  • If there is a temperature difference between the location where the envelopes were stored and the location where the envelopes are being printed, leave the envelopes in the printing location at room temperature before you use them.
  • Correctly match the paper size dial, size switch, and Envelope Cassette settings in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) with the size of the envelopes being loaded. Failure to do so may cause paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.
  • The width guides on the envelope feeder attachment can be changed so that the following envelopes can be loaded. Using envelopes other than these may result in paper jams, dirty prints, or make the inside of the machine dirty.
  • COM10 No.10: Mailwell No.582
  • Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8: Mailwell No.553
  • DL: Mailwell/Schneidersöne No.11345
  • Yougata 4: Uzumaki Y-401
  • If you want to adjust the width guides to load ISO-C5 or ISO-B5 envelopes, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.
  • For more information on envelope types that can be loaded in the envelope feeder attachment, see "Basic Operations."


Preparing the Envelopes

This section explains how to prepare the envelopes before loading them into the paper drawer.


Remark
  • Using curled, creased, or folded envelopes may cause paper jams. Load envelopes after following the procedure below.

  1. Take five envelopes, loosen them as shown, and stack them together.

Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

  1. Place the envelopes on a clean, level surface, and press all the way around the envelopes by hand, in the direction of the arrows, to remove any curls.

Repeat this step five times for each set of five envelopes.

If you are using ISO-B5, ISO-C5, COM10 No.10, Monarch: Catalog Glove No.8, or DL envelopes, hold down the four corners of the envelopes firmly, so that they and the sealed or glued portion stay flat.

If you are using Yougata 4 envelopes, load the envelopes without folding them.

  • If you use envelopes that have glue attached to their flaps, the glue may melt due to the heat and pressure of the fixing unit.
  • Take particular care to spread the envelopes out in the direction that they will be fed.
  • Do not print on the back side of the envelopes (the side with the flap).
  • If the envelopes become filled with air, flatten them by hand before loading them into the envelope feeder attachment.



Loading Envelopes

This section explains how to load envelopes into Paper Drawer 1.


  1. Press and release the button on Paper Drawer 1.

  1. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Load 10 envelopes at a time with the side you want to print on face up. While loading the envelopes, press down on the right side of the receptacle to lock them into place.

Load the envelopes, as shown below.

Align the leading edges of the envelopes, and make sure that they are held in place under the claw.

  • Envelopes which have been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
  • Make sure that the height of the envelope stack does not fall below the height limit mark ().
  • The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded into the cassette is approximately 30 mm.
  • The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes varies according to the envelope type and user operating conditions, but as a reference, 30 mm is approximately 50 envelopes.
  1. Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.

  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the paper drawer next to the envelopes. Doing so may cause paper jams.
  • If output has been stopped due to an insufficient number of envelopes, load more envelopes, and follow the instructions on the touch panel display. Printing resumes.


Changing Envelope Sizes

This section explains how to load different types of envelopes into the envelope cassette from the settings made in Envelope Cassette in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).


  1. Press and release the button on Paper Drawer 1.

  1. Grip the handle, and pull out the paper drawer until it stops.

  1. Pull and lift the paper drawer out of the machine by holding its left and right sides with both hands.

  1. Remove all of the envelopes that are loaded in the paper drawer (several envelopes at a time).

  1. Remove the left guide of the envelope feeder attachment, and insert the left guide into the appropriate slot for the desired envelope size.

To remove the left guide, tilt the left guide to the right, and then pull it up.

  1. Loosen the two screws fixing the front width guide of the envelope feeder attachment.

  1. Press down on the envelope receptacle, and move the front width guide to align it with the mark for the desired envelope size.

  1. Fix the front width guide in place with the screws.

  1. Move the back width guide of the envelope feeder attachment in accordance with steps 6 to 8.

  1. Load 10 envelopes at a time with the side you want to print on face up. While loading the envelopes, press down on the right side of the receptacle to lock them into place.

Load the envelopes, as shown below.

Align the leading edges of the envelopes, and make sure that they are held in place under the claw.

  • Envelopes which have been rolled or curled must be straightened out prior to use.
  • Make sure that the height of the envelope stack does not fall below the height limit mark ().
  • The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes that can be loaded into the cassette is approximately 30 mm.
  • The maximum height (quantity) of envelopes varies according to the envelope type and user operating conditions, but as a reference, 30 mm is approximately 50 envelopes.
  1. Turn the paper size dial on the right side of the paper drawer, so that the arrow points to 'ENV.'. Then, set the size switch to 'ENV.1' or 'ENV.2'.

[ENV.1] enables the envelope size and type stored in ENV.1 in Envelope Cassette in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to be loaded.

[ENV.2] enables the envelope size and type stored in ENV.2 in Envelope Cassette in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen) to be loaded.


  1. Gently push the paper drawer back into the machine until it clicks into place in the closed position.

  • When returning the paper drawer to its original position, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • Never place paper or any other items in the empty part of the paper drawer next to the envelopes. Doing so may cause paper jams.
  • If output has been stopped due to an insufficient number of envelopes, load more envelopes, and follow the instructions on the touch panel display. Printing resumes.
  1. Check the size switch, and store the envelope size and type in Envelope Cassette in Common Settings (from the Additional Functions screen).

For more information on storing the envelope type, see "Additional Functions."



Feeder (DADF-U1) (Optional)

Originals sent by fax or the Send function via the feeder, can be stamped to indicate that they have been sent. Replace the stamp cartridge when this mark is faint or no longer visible.


Remark
  • When replacing the stamp cartridge, take care not to allow ink to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If ink gets onto you hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water.
  • In some regions, the Feeder (DADF-U1) may be standard-equipped for the iR3245/iR3235.


Replacing the Stamp Cartridge

  1. Open the feeder cover, and then open the inner cover.

  1. Remove the old stamp cartridge, using tweezers.

  1. Push in the new stamp cartridge until it clicks, using tweezers.

  • Make sure that the stamp cartridge is not protruding from the surface.
  • Insert the stamp cartridge properly, or paper jams may occur.
  1. Gently close the inner cover, and then close the feeder cover.

  • When closing the covers, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


Finisher-S1/Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 (Optional)

This section describes the procedure for replacing the staple cartridge in the optional Finisher-S1, and removing punch waste from the optional Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1.


Remark
  • The name of the puncher unit may differ according to the regions.


Replacing the Staple Cartridge

When the optional Finisher-S1 is almost out of staples and the staple cartridge must be replaced, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.

Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.


Remark
  • We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then pull it out to the left.

  • Do not place any objects on the finisher unit, or lean on it, as doing so may damage the machine, or cause the machine to fall over, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Lift and pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding it by the green tab.

  1. Place the staple case, as shown below, press the area indicated by PUSH, and then pull out the staple cartridge.

  1. Insert the new staple cartridge.

Press the spring-loaded case down until it clicks into place.

  • Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.
  • Do not remove the seal that holds the staples together before you place the staple cartridge into the staple case.
  • Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
  1. Remove the seal holding the staples together, by pulling it straight out, and then down.

  • Make sure that you pull the seal straight out, and then down. If you pull it out at an angle, it may tear.
  1. Gently push the staple case back into the finisher until it is securely in place.

  1. Lift the handle of the finisher unit up, and then return the finisher unit to its original position.

  • When returning the finisher unit to its original position, do not place your fingers or hands under the finisher, as they may get caught, resulting in personal injury.
  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit automatically performs a "dry" stapling operation to reposition the staples.


Removing Punch Waste

When the punch waste tray of the optional Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 becomes full, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to remove the punch waste.


Remark
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Puncher Unit-Q1/R1/S1 is attached.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.
  1. Pull out the punch waste tray.
  1. Discard the punch waste.
  • Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied.
  1. Return the punch waste tray to its original position.
  • If the punch waste tray is not securely in place, you cannot make prints in the Hole Punch mode.
  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.
  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


Finisher-AE1/Saddle Finisher-AE2/Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 (Optional)

This section describes the procedure for replacing the staple cartridge in the optional Finisher-AE1 or optional Saddle Finisher-AE2, and how to remove the punch waste from the optional Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1.


Remark
  • The name of the puncher unit may differ according to the regions.


Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Stapler Unit

When the optional Finisher-AE1 or Saddle Finisher-AE2 is almost out of staples, and the staple cartridge in the stapler unit must be replaced, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.

Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.


Remark
  • We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Lift and pull out the staple case from the stapler unit, holding it by the green tab.

  1. Place the staple case, as shown below, press the area indicated by PUSH, and then pull out the staple cartridge.

  1. Insert the new staple cartridge.

Press the spring-loaded case down until it clicks into place.

  • Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.
  • Do not remove the seal that holds the staples together before you place the staple cartridge into the staple case.
  • Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
  1. Remove the seal holding the staples together, by pulling it straight out, and then down.

  • Make sure that you pull the seal straight out, and then down. If you pull it out at an angle, it may tear.
  1. Gently push the staple case into the stapler unit, until it is securely in place.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • If there are no staples ready for stapling after the cover is closed, the stapler unit automatically performs a "dry" stapling operation to reposition the staples.


Replacing the Staple Cartridge in the Saddle Stitcher Unit

When the saddle stitcher unit of the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is almost out of staples, and the staple cartridge must be replaced, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to replace the staple cartridge.

Use only staple cartridges intended for use with this machine.


Remark
  • If necessary, remove all of the output paper in the Booklet Tray before replacing the staple cartridge in the saddle stitcher unit.
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Saddle Finisher-AE2 is attached.
  • We recommend that you order staple cartridges from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out.

  1. Open the front cover of the finisher.

  1. Grip the saddle stitcher unit by its handle, and pull it out of the finisher until it stops.

  1. Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you, and then push it up.

  1. Pull out the empty staple cartridge, holding it by its left and right sides.

  1. Insert the new staple cartridge.

  • Only one staple cartridge can be inserted at a time.
  1. Pull the stapler unit of the saddle stitcher unit towards you, and then push it down into its original position.

  1. Gently push the saddle stitcher unit back into its original position.

  1. Close the front cover of the finisher.

  • When closing the front cover of the finisher, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • When you have replaced the staple cartridge, be sure to manually reposition the staples in the saddle stitcher unit. (See "Additional Functions.")


Removing Punch Waste

When the punch waste tray of the optional Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 becomes full, a screen similar to the one shown below appears on the touch panel display. Follow the procedure described below to remove the punch waste.


Remark
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Puncher Unit-L1/M1/N1 is attached.

  1. Open the front cover of the punch waste tray.
  1. Pull out the punch waste tray.
  1. Discard the punch waste.
  • Make sure that the punch waste tray is completely emptied.
  1. Return the punch waste tray to its original position.
  • If the punch waste tray is not securely in place, you cannot make prints in the Hole Punch mode.
  1. Close the front cover of the punch waste tray.
  • When closing the front cover of the punch waste tray, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


Replacing the Toner Cartridge

When there is only a small amount of toner remaining inside the machine, the following message appears on the touch panel display. You can continue printing, but at this time you should purchase a new toner cartridge to have it available when needed.

When toner runs out completely and prints can no longer be made, a screen with instructions on how to replace the toner cartridge, like the one shown below, appears on the touch panel display. Follow the instructions on the touch panel display, and the procedure described below to help you replace the toner cartridge.

If you press [Recover Later], you can continue operations, such as setting modes and scanning originals, even if you do not replace the toner cartridge immediately.


Remark
  • Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
  • Keep toner out of the reach of small children. If toner is ingested, consult a physician immediately.
  • Take care not to allow toner to come into contact with your hands or clothing. If toner gets onto your hands or clothing, wash it off immediately with cold water. Washing it off with warm water will set the toner, and make it impossible to remove the toner stains.
  • Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine.
  • Do not replace toner cartridges until the message prompting you to do so appears.
  • You can replace a toner cartridge while the machine is printing.
  • Complete instructions on how to replace the toner cartridge can be accessed by pressing [Previous] or [Next] on the touch panel display.
  • If toner runs out during a print job, the remaining prints are made after you replace the toner cartridge.

  1. Open the toner supply port cover.

  1. Lift up the locking lever until it becomes vertical.

  • Make sure that the (down arrow) on the locking lever is aligned with the (up arrow) of the(Unlock) icon position before proceeding.
  1. Pull the toner cartridge out of the toner supply port.

Pull the toner cartridge out halfway, and then remove it completely while supporting it and keeping it straight with your other hand from underneath.

  • Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite resulting in burns or a fire.
  • If the toner cartridge cannot be pulled out, check that the knob is turned all the way to the appropriate position.
  1. Twist the red protective cap of the new toner cartridge in the direction of the arrow (counterclockwise) to remove it.

  • Do not touch the tip of the toner cartridge or subject it to shock by hitting it. Doing so may cause the toner cartridge to leak.
  1. Push the new toner cartridge in as far as possible.

Support the new toner cartridge with your hand from underneath while pushing it into the machine with your other hand.

  1. Push the locking lever down into its original position.

  • Make sure that the (down arrow) on the locking lever is aligned with the (right arrow) of the(Lock) icon position.
  • If you insert a toner cartridge intended for use in a different machine, the locking lever will not move.
  1. Close the toner supply port cover.

  • When closing the toner supply port cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.


Routine Cleaning

If the original is not copied clearly, clean the following parts of the machine. For high-quality printouts, we recommend cleaning these parts once or twice a month.

  • Platen glass
  • Underside of the platen cover
  • Feeder's rollers

Remark
  • When cleaning the machine, first turn OFF the main power switch, and disconnect the power cord. Failure to observe these steps may result in a fire or electrical shock.
  • Do not use alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other solvents for cleaning. Doing so may result in damage to the plastic parts.
  • Disconnect the power cord from the power outlet regularly, and clean the area around the base of the power plug's metal pins and the power outlet with a dry cloth to ensure that all dust and grime is removed. If the power cord is connected for a long period of time in a damp, dusty or smoky location, dust can build up around the power plug and become damp. This may cause a short circuit and result in a fire.


Platen Glass and Cover

Clean the platen glass and the underside of the optional platen cover by following the procedure below.


Remark
  • If the platen glass or the underside of the optional platen cover is dirty, the original may not be scanned clearly, or the size of the original may be detected incorrectly.

  1. Clean the platen glass and the underside of the optional platen cover with a cloth dampened with water, and then wipe them clean with a soft, dry cloth.

  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.


Manual Feeder Cleaning

If originals that have been fed through the feeder have streaks or appear dirty, clean the feeder's rollers.


Remark
  • Do not dampen the cloth too much, as this may damage the original or break the machine.
  • Spin the rollers while cleaning them.
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached.

  1. Open the feeder cover.

  1. Clean the rollers (a total of three places) inside the feeder cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

  1. Open the inner cover, holding it by its front tab.

  1. Clean the rollers (a total of three places) inside the inner cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

  1. Clean the transparent plastic part of the inner cover with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

  1. Close the inner cover.

  • When closing the inner cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Close the feeder cover.

  • When closing the feeder cover, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  1. Lift the feeder.

  1. Clean the feeder scanning area with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

  1. While turning the resin roller, clean the resing roller and the area around the resin roller with a cloth dampened with water. Then, wipe the area with a soft, dry cloth.

  1. Close the feeder.

  • When closing the feeder, be careful not to get your fingers caught, as this may result in personal injury.
  • Be aware that the light emitted from the platen glass may be very bright when closing the feeder.


Automatic Feeder Cleaning

If your originals have black streaks or appear dirty after scanning them through the feeder, clean the rollers of the feeder.


Remark
  • This procedure is necessary only if the optional Feeder (DADF-U1) is attached.
  • It takes approximately 20 seconds to clean the feeder.

  1. Press (Additional Functions) → [Adjustment/Cleaning] → [Feeder Cleaning].
  1. Place 10 sheets of blank paper into the feeder → press [Start].

Make sure that you fan the sheets of paper well.

Use A4 paper (60 to 80 g/m2).

When cleaning is complete, try scanning again.

  • To cancel feeder cleaning while it is in progress, press [Cancel].


Consumables

The following consumables are available from Canon. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.

We recommend that you order paper stock and toner from your local authorized Canon dealer before your stock runs out.

  • Paper Stock

In addition to plain paper (A3, B4, A4, B5, and A5), recycled paper, color paper, transparencies (recommended for this machine), tracing paper, labels, and other types of paper stock are available. For more information, contact your local authorized Canon dealer.


Remark
  • Do not store paper in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the paper to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
  • To prevent moisture build-up, tightly wrap any remaining paper in its original package for storage.
  • For high-quality printouts, use paper recommended by Canon.
  • Some commercially available paper types are not suited for this machine. Contact your local authorized Canon dealer when you need to purchase paper.

  • Toner

If a message prompting you to replace the toner cartridge appears on the touch panel display, replace the used toner cartridge with a new one.

Use only toner cartridges intended for use with this machine.


Remark
  • Do not burn or throw used toner cartridges into open flames, as this may cause the toner remaining inside the cartridges to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
  • Do not store toner cartridges in places exposed to open flames, as this may cause the toner to ignite, resulting in burns or a fire.
  • Keep toner and other consumables out of the reach of small children. If these items are ingested, consult a physician immediately.
  • Store toner cartridges in a cool location, away from direct sunlight. (The recommended storage conditions are: temperatures below 30°C, and humidity below 80%.)

  • Stamp Cartridge

The stamp cartridge is used to stamp originals. Use the tweezers provided to remove and replace the stamp cartridge.